-# $OpenBSD: Makefile.bsd-wrapper,v 1.15 2000/01/11 16:29:52 millert Exp $
+# $OpenBSD: Makefile.bsd-wrapper,v 1.16 2000/04/09 08:25:09 millert Exp $
#
# groff config
GNUCFLAGS= CC="${CC}" CFLAGS="${CFLAGS} ${COPTS}"
GNUCXXFLAGS= CXX="${CXX}" CCFLAGS="${CXXFLAGS} ${COPTS}"
-CLEANFILES= config.cache config.log pic/pic.cc eqn/eqn.cc \
- refer/label.cc pic/pic.tab.h eqn/eqn.tab.h ${MANALL}
-
-# All of groff's man pages have a .n extension. Sigh.
-MANLOCALBUILD= yes
-
-MAN_SRC1= addftinfo/addftinfo.n groff/groff.n troff/troff.n \
- tbl/tbl.n pic/pic.n eqn/eqn.n grops/grops.n grotty/grotty.n \
- grodvi/grodvi.n tfmtodit/tfmtodit.n grolj4/grolj4.n \
- hpftodit/hpftodit.n refer/refer.n lookbib/lookbib.n \
- indxbib/indxbib.n lkbib/lkbib.n soelim/soelim.n \
- pfbtops/pfbtops.n psbb/psbb.n \
- afmtodit/afmtodit.n grog/grog.n nroff/nroff.n
-MAN_SRC5= man/groff_font.n man/groff_out.n
-MAN_SRC7= man/groff_char.n tmac/groff_ms.n tmac/me.n \
- tmac/msafer.n mm/groff_mm.n mm/groff_mmse.n
-
-MAN_BUILD1= ${MAN_SRC1:S/.n$/.cat1/g}
-MAN_BUILD5= ${MAN_SRC5:S/.n$/.cat5/g}
-MAN_BUILD7= ${MAN_SRC7:S/.n$/.cat7/g}
-
-# Used for cleaning, which is why it is independent of NOMAN
-MANALL= ${MAN_BUILD1} ${MAN_BUILD5} ${MAN_BUILD7}
-.ifndef NOMAN
-MAN_BUILD= ${MANALL}
-.endif
-
+CLEANFILES+= config.cache config.log pic/pic.cc eqn/eqn.cc \
+ refer/label.cc pic/pic.tab.h eqn/eqn.tab.h
-MLINKS= groff_ms.7 ms.7 groff_mm.7 mm.7 eqn.1 neqn.1
+MAN= addftinfo/addftinfo.1 afmtodit/afmtodit.1 eqn/eqn.1 \
+ grodvi/grodvi.1 groff/groff.1 grog/grog.1 grohtml/grohtml.1 \
+ grolj4/grolj4.1 grops/grops.1 grotty/grotty.1 hpftodit/hpftodit.1 \
+ indxbib/indxbib.1 lkbib/lkbib.1 lookbib/lookbib.1 \
+ man/groff_char.7 man/groff_font.5 man/groff_out.5 mm/groff_mm.7 \
+ mm/groff_mmse.7 nroff/nroff.1 pfbtops/pfbtops.1 pic/pic.1 \
+ psbb/psbb.1 refer/refer.1 soelim/soelim.1 tbl/tbl.1 \
+ tfmtodit/tfmtodit.1 tmac/groff_man.7 tmac/groff_me.7 tmac/groff_ms.7 \
+ tmac/groff_msafer.7 troff/troff.1
-.SUFFIXES: .n .cat1 .cat5 .cat7
+MLINKS= groff_man.7 man.7 groff_me.7 me.7 groff_mm.7 mm.7 groff_ms.7 ms.7 \
+ eqn.1 neqn.1
-.n.cat1 .n.cat5 .n.cat7:
- @echo "${NROFF} -mandoc ${.IMPSRC} > ${.TARGET}"
- @${NROFF} -mandoc ${.IMPSRC} > ${.TARGET} || (rm -f ${.TARGET}; false)
-
-all: config.status gnu_build ${MAN_BUILD}
+all: config.status gnu_build
.FORCE: .IGNORE
fontdir=${DESTDIR}${FONTDIR} \
indexdir=${DESTDIR}${INDEXDIR} \
common_words_file=${DESTDIR}${COMMON_WORDS} \
- INSTALL_MAN= TMAC_AN= TMAC_ANDOC= MDOCFILES= tmac_an= \
install
install -c -o ${BINOWN} -g ${BINGRP} -m 444 ${.CURDIR}/tmac/tmac.an \
${DESTDIR}${DATASUBDIR}/tmac/tmac.an.old
clean cleandir:
- rm -f ${CLEANFILES}
-@if [ -e Makefile ]; then ${MAKE} distclean; fi
+ rm -f ${CLEANFILES}
depend:
# Nothing here so far...
.ifdef NOMAN
maninstall:
- # Dummy target for bootstrap...
+ @echo NOMAN is set
.endif
.include <bsd.obj.mk>
LIBGROFF=$(TOP)/libgroff/libgroff.a
LIBBIB=$(TOP)/libbib/libbib.a
LIBDRIVER=$(TOP)/libdriver/libdriver.a
-LIBM=-lm
MLIB=
XLIBS=
YTABH=
MANCLEAN=$(MANPAGES)
fontsubdir=$(fontdir)/dev$(DEV)
-# Target to use for installing unformatted man-pages. Some systems may not
-# want them installed.
-INSTALL_MAN=install_man
+all install install_bin install_data TAGS depend distfiles uninstall_sub:
-all install install_bin install_data $(INSTALL_MAN) TAGS depend distfiles uninstall_sub:
-
-install: install_bin install_data $(INSTALL_MAN)
+install: install_bin install_data
uninstall: uninstall_sub
pure:
.PHONY: all clean distclean mostlyclean realclean extraclean depend distfiles
-.PHONY: install install_bin install_data $(INSTALL_MAN)
+.PHONY: install install_bin install_data
.PHONY: uninstall uninstall_sub
.PHONY: pure
\#* *~ =* core junk grot old temp tmp tem
.SUFFIXES:
-.SUFFIXES: .o .cc .c .y .man .n
+.SUFFIXES: .o .cc .c .y .1_in .1 .5_in .5 .7_in .7
.cc.o:
$(COMPILE.cc) $<
fi; \
fi
-.man.n:
+.1_in.1 .5_in.5 .7_in.7:
@echo Making $@ from $<
@-rm -f $@
@sed -e "s;@FONTDIR@;$(fontdir);g" \
-e "s;@MAN7EXT@;$(man7ext);g" \
-e "s;@TMAC_S_PREFIX@;$(tmac_s_prefix);g" \
-e "s;@TMAC_M_PREFIX@;$(tmac_m_prefix);g" \
+ -e "s;@TMAC_AN_PREFIX@;$(tmac_an_prefix);g" \
-e "s;@TMAC_MDIR@;$(tmacdir)/mm;g" \
-e "s;@BROKEN_SPOOLER_FLAGS@;$(BROKEN_SPOOLER_FLAGS);g" \
-e "s;@VERSION@;`cat $(srcdir)/../VERSION`;g" \
.PHONY: install_man
install_man:
- -test -d $(mandir) || mkdir $(mandir)
+ -test -d $(manroot) || mkdir $(manroot)
-test -d $(man1dir) || mkdir $(man1dir)
@-pages="$(MAN1)"; \
for p in $$pages; do \
- prog=`basename $$p .n`; \
+ prog=`basename $$p .1`; \
target=$(man1dir)/$(NAMEPREFIX)$$prog.$(man1ext); \
rm -f $$target; \
echo $(INSTALL_DATA) $$p $$target; \
-test -d $(man5dir) || mkdir $(man5dir)
@-pages="$(MAN5)"; \
for p in $$pages; do \
- target=$(man5dir)/`basename $$p .n`.$(man5ext); \
+ target=$(man5dir)/`basename $$p .5`.$(man5ext); \
rm -f $$target; \
echo $(INSTALL_DATA) $$p $$target; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $$p $$target; \
-test -d $(man7dir) || mkdir $(man7dir)
@-pages="$(MAN7)"; \
for p in $$pages; do \
- target=$(man7dir)/`basename $$p .n`.$(man7ext); \
+ target=$(man7dir)/`basename $$p .5`.$(man7ext); \
rm -f $$target; \
echo $(INSTALL_DATA) $$p $$target; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $$p $$target; \
uninstall_man:
@-pages="$(MAN1)"; \
for p in $$pages; do \
- target=$(man1dir)/$(NAMEPREFIX)`basename $$p .n`.$(man1ext); \
+ target=$(man1dir)/$(NAMEPREFIX)`basename $$p .1`.$(man1ext); \
echo rm -f $$target; \
rm -f $$target; \
done
@-pages="$(MAN5)"; \
for p in $$pages; do \
- target=$(man5dir)/`basename $$p .n`.$(man5ext); \
+ target=$(man5dir)/`basename $$p .5`.$(man5ext); \
echo rm -f $$target; \
rm -f $$target; \
done
@-pages="$(MAN7)"; \
for p in $$pages; do \
- target=$(man7dir)/`basename $$p .n`.$(man7ext); \
+ target=$(man7dir)/`basename $$p .7`.$(man7ext); \
echo rm -f $$target; \
rm -f $$target; \
done
g=@g@
# Common prefix for installation directories.
-# Used in definitions of exec_prefix, datasubdir, fontpath, mandir.
+# Used in definitions of exec_prefix, datasubdir, fontpath, manroot.
# This must already exist when you do make install.
prefix=@prefix@
# otherwise the supplied eign file will be used.
common_words_file=$(datasubdir)/eign
-# mandir is the root of the man page directory tree.
-mandir=@mandir@
+# manroot is the root of the man page directory tree.
+manroot=$(prefix)/man
# man1ext is the man section for user commands.
man1ext=1
-man1dir=$(mandir)/man$(man1ext)
+man1dir=$(manroot)/man$(man1ext)
# man5ext is the man section for file formats.
man5ext=5
-man5dir=$(mandir)/man$(man5ext)
+man5dir=$(manroot)/man$(man5ext)
# man7ext is the man section for macros.
man7ext=7
-man7dir=$(mandir)/man$(man7ext)
+man7dir=$(manroot)/man$(man7ext)
# DEFINES should include the following:
# -DHAVE_MMAP if you have mmap() and <sys/mman.h>
# -DUNISTD_H_DECLARES_GETOPT if your C++ <unistd.h> declares getopt()
# -DSTDLIB_H_DECLARES_PUTENV if your C++ <stdlib.h> declares putenv()
# -DSTDIO_H_DECLARES_POPEN if your C++ <stdio.h> declares popen()
+# -DSTDIO_H_DECLARES_PCLOSE if your C++ <stdio.h> declares pclose()
+# -DHAVE_SYS_NERR if you have sysnerr in <errno.h> or <stdio.h>
+# -DHAVE_SYS_ERRLIST if you have sys_errlist in <errno.h> or
+# <stdio.h>
+# -DMATH_H_DECLARES_HYPOT if you have hypot() in <math.h>
# -DTRADITIONAL_CPP if your C++ compiler uses a traditional
-# (Reiser) preprocessor.
+# (Reiser) preprocessor
# -DLONG_FOR_TIME_T if localtime() takes a long * not a time_t *
# -DHAVE_STRUCT_EXCEPTION if <math.h> defines struct exception
# -DRETSIGTYPE=int if signal handlers return int not void
CCFLAGS=@CXXFLAGS@
CFLAGS=@CFLAGS@
-LDFLAGS=
+LDFLAGS=@LDFLAGS@
YACC=@YACC@
YACCFLAGS=-v
LIBS=@LIBS@
+LIBM=@LIBM@
RANLIB=@RANLIB@
INSTALL=@INSTALL@
INSTALL_PROGRAM=@INSTALL_PROGRAM@
#PURIFYCCFLAGS=-g++=yes \
# -collector=`dirname \`$(CCC) -print-libgcc-file-name\``/ld
-#
-# XXX - OpenBSD build mods
-#
-INSTALL_MAN=install_man
-TMAC_AN=tmac.an
-TMAC_ANDOC=tmac.andoc
-TMAC_S=tmac.s
-MDOCFILES=doc-common doc-ditroff doc-nroff doc-syms
-
# Passing down MAKEOVERRIDES prevents $(MAKE) from containing a second
# copy of $(MDEFINES) when making individual directories; this could
# cause the argument list to become too long on some systems.
"tmacdir=$(tmacdir)" "tmacpath=$(tmacpath)" \
"indexext=$(indexext)" "indexdir=$(indexdir)" \
"indexname=$(indexname)" "common_words_file=$(common_words_file)" \
- "mandir=$(mandir)" "man1ext=$(man1ext)" "man1dir=$(man1dir)" \
+ "manroot=$(manroot)" "man1ext=$(man1ext)" "man1dir=$(man1dir)" \
"man5ext=$(man5ext)" "man5dir=$(man5dir)" \
"man7ext=$(man7ext)" "man7dir=$(man7dir)" \
"tmac_wrap=$(tmac_wrap)" "sys_tmac_prefix=$(sys_tmac_prefix)" \
"tmac_s_prefix=$(tmac_s_prefix)" "tmac_m_prefix=$(tmac_m_prefix)" \
"CCC=$(CCC)" "CC=$(CC)" "CCDEFINES=$(CCDEFINES)" "CDEFINES=$(CDEFINES)" \
"CCFLAGS=$(CCFLAGS)" "CFLAGS=$(CFLAGS)" "LDFLAGS=$(LDFLAGS)" \
- "YACC=$(YACC)" "YACCFLAGS=$(YACCFLAGS)" \
+ "YACC=$(YACC)" "YACCFLAGS=$(YACCFLAGS)" "LIBM=$(LIBM)" \
"LIBS=$(LIBS)" "LIBOBJS=$(LIBOBJS)" "RANLIB=$(RANLIB)" "AR=$(AR)" \
"INSTALL_PROGRAM=$(INSTALL_PROGRAM)" "INSTALL_DATA=$(INSTALL_DATA)" \
"ETAGS=$(ETAGS)" "ETAGSFLAGS=$(ETAGSFLAGS)" "ETAGSCCFLAG=$(ETAGSCCFLAG)" \
"PERLPATH=$(PERLPATH)" "SH_SCRIPT_SED_CMD=$(SH_SCRIPT_SED_CMD)" \
- "PURIFY=$(PURIFY)" "PURIFYCCFLAGS=$(PURIFYCCFLAGS)" \
- "INSTALL_MAN=$(INSTALL_MAN)" "TMAC_AN=$(TMAC_AN)" "TMAC_ANDOC=$(TMAC_ANDOC)" \
- "TMAC_S=$(TMAC_S)" "MDOCFILES=$(MDOCFILES)" "tmac_m=$(tmac_m_prefix)m"
+ "PURIFY=$(PURIFY)" "PURIFYCCFLAGS=$(PURIFYCCFLAGS)"
SHELL=/bin/sh
INCDIRS=include
LIBDIRS=libgroff libdriver libbib
CCPROGDIRS=groff troff tbl pic eqn grops grotty grodvi tfmtodit \
- grolj4 hpftodit refer lookbib indxbib lkbib soelim addftinfo
+ grolj4 hpftodit refer lookbib indxbib lkbib soelim addftinfo \
+ grohtml
CPROGDIRS=pfbtops psbb
PROGDIRS=$(CCPROGDIRS) $(CPROGDIRS)
DEVDIRS=devps devdvi devascii devlatin1 devX75 devX75-12 devX100 devX100-12 \
- devlj4
+ devlj4 devhtml
OTHERDIRS=man tmac afmtodit grog nroff mm
ALLDIRS=$(INCDIRS) $(LIBDIRS) $(PROGDIRS) $(DEVDIRS) $(OTHERDIRS)
EXTRADIRS=devps/generate devdvi/generate xditview doc
DISTDIRS=$(ALLDIRS) $(EXTRADIRS)
-TARGETS=all install install_bin install_data $(INSTALL_MAN) clean distclean mostlyclean \
+TARGETS=all install install_bin install_data clean distclean mostlyclean \
realclean extraclean distfiles TAGS depend uninstall_sub
do=all
dot: FORCE
@$(MAKE) $(MDEFINES) srcdir=$(srcdir) VPATH=$(srcdir) \
-f $(srcdir)/Makefile.comm -f $(srcdir)/Makefile.sub $(do)
-
+
$(LIBDIRS): FORCE
@if test $(srcdir) = .; \
then srcdir=.; \
rm -f Makefile; \
$(LN_S) $$srcdir/Makefile.init Makefile
mv tmp groff-$(version)
+ rm -f groff-$(version).tar.gz
tar cfh - groff-$(version) | gzip -c >groff-$(version).tar.gz
rm -fr groff-$(version)
.PHONY: uninstall_dirs
uninstall_dirs:
# Use rmdir here so that the directories are only removed if they're empty
- -rmdir $(man1dir) $(man5dir) $(man7dir) $(mandir) \
+ -rmdir $(man1dir) $(man5dir) $(man7dir) $(manroot) \
$(tmacdir) $(fontdir) $(bindir) $(datasubdir) $(datadir)
PROG=addftinfo
-MAN1=addftinfo.n
+MAN1=addftinfo.1
XLIBS=$(LIBGROFF)
OBJS=addftinfo.o guess.o
CCSRCS=addftinfo.cc guess.cc
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.TH ADDFTINFO @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+addftinfo \- add information to troff font files for use with groff
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B addftinfo
+[
+.BI \- param\ value\fR.\|.\|.
+]
+.I res
+.I unitwidth
+.I font
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B addftinfo
+reads a troff font file
+and adds some additional font-metric information
+that is used by the groff system.
+The font file with the information added is written on the
+standard output.
+The information added is guessed using
+some parametric information about the font
+and assumptions
+about the traditional troff names for characters.
+The main information added is the heights and depths of characters.
+The
+.I res
+and
+.I unitwidth
+arguments should be the same as the corresponding parameters
+in the DESC file;
+.I font
+is the name of the file describing the font;
+if
+.I font
+ends with
+.B I
+the font will be assumed to be italic.
+.SH OPTIONS
+Each of the options changes one of the parameters that is used
+to derive the heights and depths.
+Like the existing quantities in the font
+file, each
+.I value
+is in
+.RI inches/ res
+for a font whose point size is
+.IR unitwidth .
+.I param
+must be one of:
+.TP
+.B x-height
+The height of lowercase letters without ascenders such as x.
+.TP
+.B fig-height
+The height of figures (digits).
+.TP
+.B asc-height
+The height of characters with ascenders, such as b, d or l.
+.TP
+.B body-height
+The height of characters such as parentheses.
+.TP
+.B cap-height
+The height of uppercase letters such as A.
+.TP
+.B comma-depth
+The depth of a comma.
+.TP
+.B desc-depth
+The depth of characters with descenders, such as p,q, or y.
+.TP
+.B body-depth
+The depth of characters such as parentheses.
+.LP
+.B addftinfo
+makes no attempt to use the specified parameters to guess
+the unspecified parameters.
+If a parameter is not specified the default will be used.
+The defaults are chosen to have the reasonable values for
+a Times font.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR font (5)
+.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@),
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR groff_char (@MAN7EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.TH ADDFTINFO @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-addftinfo \- add information to troff font files for use with groff
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B addftinfo
-[
-.BI \- param\ value\fR.\|.\|.
-]
-.I res
-.I unitwidth
-.I font
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B addftinfo
-reads a troff font file
-and adds some additional font-metric information
-that is used by the groff system.
-The font file with the information added is written on the
-standard output.
-The information added is guessed using
-some parametric information about the font
-and assumptions
-about the traditional troff names for characters.
-The main information added is the heights and depths of characters.
-The
-.I res
-and
-.I unitwidth
-arguments should be the same as the corresponding parameters
-in the DESC file;
-.I font
-is the name of the file describing the font;
-if
-.I font
-ends with
-.B I
-the font will be assumed to be italic.
-.SH OPTIONS
-Each of the options changes one of the parameters that is used
-to derive the heights and depths.
-Like the existing quantities in the font
-file, each
-.I value
-is in
-.RI inches/ res
-for a font whose point size is
-.IR unitwidth .
-.I param
-must be one of:
-.TP
-.B x-height
-The height of lowercase letters without ascenders such as x.
-.TP
-.B fig-height
-The height of figures (digits).
-.TP
-.B asc-height
-The height of characters with ascenders, such as b, d or l.
-.TP
-.B body-height
-The height of characters such as parentheses.
-.TP
-.B cap-height
-The height of uppercase letters such as A.
-.TP
-.B comma-depth
-The depth of a comma.
-.TP
-.B desc-depth
-The depth of characters with descenders, such as p,q, or y.
-.TP
-.B body-depth
-The depth of characters such as parentheses.
-.LP
-.B addftinfo
-makes no attempt to use the specified parameters to guess
-the unspecified parameters.
-If a parameter is not specified the default will be used.
-The defaults are chosen to have the reasonable values for
-a Times font.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR font (5)
-.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@),
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR groff_char (@MAN7EXT@)
-MAN1=afmtodit.n
+MAN1=afmtodit.1
CLEANADD=afmtodit
all: afmtodit
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
+.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
+.de Tp
+.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
+.el .TP "\\$1"
+..
+.TH AFMTODIT @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+afmtodit \- create font files for use with groff \-Tps
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B afmtodit
+[
+.B \-ns
+]
+[
+.BI \-d desc_file
+]
+[
+.BI \-e enc_file
+]
+[
+.BI \-i n
+]
+[
+.BI \-a n
+]
+.I afm_file
+.I map_file
+.I font
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B afmtodit
+creates a font file for use with groff and
+.BR grops .
+.B afmtodit
+is written in perl;
+you must have perl version 3 installed in order to run
+.BR afmtodit .
+.I afm_file
+is the AFM (Adobe Font Metric) file for the font.
+.I map_file
+is a file that says which groff character names map onto
+each PostScript character name;
+this file should contain a sequence of lines of the form
+.IP
+.I
+ps_char groff_char
+.LP
+where
+.I ps_char
+is the PostScript name of the character
+and
+.I groff_char
+is the groff name of the character (as used in the groff font file.)
+The same
+.I ps_char
+can occur multiple times in the file;
+each
+.I groff_char
+must occur at most once.
+.I font
+is the groff name of the font.
+If a PostScript character is in the encoding to be used for the font
+but is not mentioned in
+.I map_file
+then
+.B afmtodit
+will put it in the groff font file as an unnamed character,
+which can be accessed by the
+.B \eN
+escape sequence in
+.BR troff .
+The groff font file will be output to a file called
+.IR font .
+.LP
+If there is a downloadable font file for the font, it may be listed in
+the file
+.BR @FONTDIR@/devps/download ;
+see
+.BR grops (@MAN1EXT@).
+.LP
+If the
+.B \-i
+option is used,
+.B afmtodit
+will automatically generate an italic correction,
+a left italic correction and a subscript correction
+for each character
+(the significance of these parameters is explained in
+.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@));
+these parameters may be specified for individual characters by
+adding to the
+.I afm_file
+lines of the form:
+.IP
+.BI italicCorrection\ ps_char\ n
+.br
+.BI leftItalicCorrection\ ps_char\ n
+.br
+.BI subscriptCorrection\ ps_char\ n
+.LP
+where
+.I ps_char
+is the PostScript name of the character,
+and
+.I n
+is the desired value of the corresponding parameter in thousandths of an em.
+These parameters are normally needed only for italic (or oblique) fonts.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.B \-n
+Don't output a
+.B ligatures
+command for this font.
+Use this with constant-width fonts.
+.TP
+.B \-s
+The font is special.
+The effect of this option is to add the
+.B special
+command to the font file.
+.TP
+.BI \-d desc_file
+The device description file is
+.I desc_file
+rather than the default
+.BR DESC .
+.TP
+.BI \-e enc_file
+The PostScript font should be reencoded to use the encoding described
+in enc_file.
+The format of
+.I enc_file
+is described in
+.BR grops (@MAN1EXT@).
+.TP
+.BI \-a n
+Use
+.I n
+as the slant parameter in the font file;
+this is used by groff in the positioning of accents.
+By default
+.B afmtodit
+uses the negative of the ItalicAngle specified in the afm file;
+with true italic fonts it is sometimes desirable to use
+a slant that is less than this.
+If you find that characters from an italic font have accents
+placed too far to the right over them,
+then use the
+.B \-a
+option to give the font a smaller slant.
+.TP
+.BI \-i n
+Generate an italic correction for each character so that
+the character's width plus the character's italic correction
+is equal to
+.I n
+thousandths of an em
+plus the amount by which the right edge of the character's bounding
+is to the right of the character's origin.
+If this would result in a negative italic correction, use a zero
+italic correction instead.
+.IP
+Also generate a subscript correction equal to the
+product of the tangent of the slant of the font and
+four fifths of the x-height of the font.
+If this would result in a subscript correction greater than the italic
+correction, use a subscript correction equal to the italic correction
+instead.
+.IP
+Also generate a left italic correction for each character
+equal to
+.I n
+thousandths of an em
+plus the amount by which the left edge of the character's bounding box
+is to the left of the character's origin.
+The left italic correction may be negative.
+.IP
+This option is normally needed only with italic (or oblique) fonts.
+The font files distributed with groff were created using an option of
+.B \-i50
+for italic fonts.
+.SH FILES
+.Tp \w'\fB@FONTDIR@/devps/download'u+2n
+.B @FONTDIR@/devps/DESC
+Device description file.
+.TP
+.BI @FONTDIR@/devps/ F
+Font description file for font
+.IR F .
+.TP
+.B @FONTDIR@/devps/download
+List of downloadable fonts.
+.TP
+.B @FONTDIR@/devps/text.enc
+Encoding used for text fonts.
+.TP
+.B @FONTDIR@/devps/generate/textmap
+Standard mapping.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR grops (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@),
+.BR perl (1)
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
-.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
-.de Tp
-.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
-.el .TP "\\$1"
-..
-.TH AFMTODIT @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-afmtodit \- create font files for use with groff \-Tps
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B afmtodit
-[
-.B \-ns
-]
-[
-.BI \-d desc_file
-]
-[
-.BI \-e enc_file
-]
-[
-.BI \-i n
-]
-[
-.BI \-a n
-]
-.I afm_file
-.I map_file
-.I font
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B afmtodit
-creates a font file for use with groff and
-.BR grops .
-.B afmtodit
-is written in perl;
-you must have perl version 3 installed in order to run
-.BR afmtodit .
-.I afm_file
-is the AFM (Adobe Font Metric) file for the font.
-.I map_file
-is a file that says which groff character names map onto
-each PostScript character name;
-this file should contain a sequence of lines of the form
-.IP
-.I
-ps_char groff_char
-.LP
-where
-.I ps_char
-is the PostScript name of the character
-and
-.I groff_char
-is the groff name of the character (as used in the groff font file.)
-The same
-.I ps_char
-can occur multiple times in the file;
-each
-.I groff_char
-must occur at most once.
-.I font
-is the groff name of the font.
-If a PostScript character is in the encoding to be used for the font
-but is not mentioned in
-.I map_file
-then
-.B afmtodit
-will put it in the groff font file as an unnamed character,
-which can be accessed by the
-.B \eN
-escape sequence in
-.BR troff .
-The groff font file will be output to a file called
-.IR font .
-.LP
-If there is a downloadable font file for the font, it may be listed in
-the file
-.BR @FONTDIR@/devps/download ;
-see
-.BR grops (@MAN1EXT@).
-.LP
-If the
-.B \-i
-option is used,
-.B afmtodit
-will automatically generate an italic correction,
-a left italic correction and a subscript correction
-for each character
-(the significance of these parameters is explained in
-.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@));
-these parameters may be specified for individual characters by
-adding to the
-.I afm_file
-lines of the form:
-.IP
-.BI italicCorrection\ ps_char\ n
-.br
-.BI leftItalicCorrection\ ps_char\ n
-.br
-.BI subscriptCorrection\ ps_char\ n
-.LP
-where
-.I ps_char
-is the PostScript name of the character,
-and
-.I n
-is the desired value of the corresponding parameter in thousandths of an em.
-These parameters are normally needed only for italic (or oblique) fonts.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-n
-Don't output a
-.B ligatures
-command for this font.
-Use this with constant-width fonts.
-.TP
-.B \-s
-The font is special.
-The effect of this option is to add the
-.B special
-command to the font file.
-.TP
-.BI \-d desc_file
-The device description file is
-.I desc_file
-rather than the default
-.BR DESC .
-.TP
-.BI \-e enc_file
-The PostScript font should be reencoded to use the encoding described
-in enc_file.
-The format of
-.I enc_file
-is described in
-.BR grops (@MAN1EXT@).
-.TP
-.BI \-a n
-Use
-.I n
-as the slant parameter in the font file;
-this is used by groff in the positioning of accents.
-By default
-.B afmtodit
-uses the negative of the ItalicAngle specified in the afm file;
-with true italic fonts it is sometimes desirable to use
-a slant that is less than this.
-If you find that characters from an italic font have accents
-placed too far to the right over them,
-then use the
-.B \-a
-option to give the font a smaller slant.
-.TP
-.BI \-i n
-Generate an italic correction for each character so that
-the character's width plus the character's italic correction
-is equal to
-.I n
-thousandths of an em
-plus the amount by which the right edge of the character's bounding
-is to the right of the character's origin.
-If this would result in a negative italic correction, use a zero
-italic correction instead.
-.IP
-Also generate a subscript correction equal to the
-product of the tangent of the slant of the font and
-four fifths of the x-height of the font.
-If this would result in a subscript correction greater than the italic
-correction, use a subscript correction equal to the italic correction
-instead.
-.IP
-Also generate a left italic correction for each character
-equal to
-.I n
-thousandths of an em
-plus the amount by which the left edge of the character's bounding box
-is to the left of the character's origin.
-The left italic correction may be negative.
-.IP
-This option is normally needed only with italic (or oblique) fonts.
-The font files distributed with groff were created using an option of
-.B \-i50
-for italic fonts.
-.SH FILES
-.Tp \w'\fB@FONTDIR@/devps/download'u+2n
-.B @FONTDIR@/devps/DESC
-Device description file.
-.TP
-.BI @FONTDIR@/devps/ F
-Font description file for font
-.IR F .
-.TP
-.B @FONTDIR@/devps/download
-List of downloadable fonts.
-.TP
-.B @FONTDIR@/devps/text.enc
-Encoding used for text fonts.
-.TP
-.B @FONTDIR@/devps/generate/textmap
-Standard mapping.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR grops (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@),
-.BR perl (1)
#! /bin/sh
# Guess values for system-dependent variables and create Makefiles.
-# Generated automatically using autoconf version 2.10
+# Generated automatically using autoconf version 2.13
# Copyright (C) 1992, 93, 94, 95, 96 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
#
# This configure script is free software; the Free Software Foundation
# Initialize some other variables.
subdirs=
MFLAGS= MAKEFLAGS=
+SHELL=${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh}
+# Maximum number of lines to put in a shell here document.
+ac_max_here_lines=12
ac_prev=
for ac_option
verbose=yes ;;
-version | --version | --versio | --versi | --vers)
- echo "configure generated by autoconf version 2.10"
+ echo "configure generated by autoconf version 2.13"
exit 0 ;;
-with-* | --with-*)
done
# NLS nuisances.
-# Only set LANG and LC_ALL to C if already set.
-# These must not be set unconditionally because not all systems understand
-# e.g. LANG=C (notably SCO).
-if test "${LC_ALL+set}" = set; then LC_ALL=C; export LC_ALL; fi
+# Only set these to C if already set. These must not be set unconditionally
+# because not all systems understand e.g. LANG=C (notably SCO).
+# Fixing LC_MESSAGES prevents Solaris sh from translating var values in `set'!
+# Non-C LC_CTYPE values break the ctype check.
if test "${LANG+set}" = set; then LANG=C; export LANG; fi
+if test "${LC_ALL+set}" = set; then LC_ALL=C; export LC_ALL; fi
+if test "${LC_MESSAGES+set}" = set; then LC_MESSAGES=C; export LC_MESSAGES; fi
+if test "${LC_CTYPE+set}" = set; then LC_CTYPE=C; export LC_CTYPE; fi
# confdefs.h avoids OS command line length limits that DEFS can exceed.
rm -rf conftest* confdefs.h
# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
+ac_exeext=
+ac_objext=o
if (echo "testing\c"; echo 1,2,3) | grep c >/dev/null; then
# Stardent Vistra SVR4 grep lacks -e, says ghazi@caip.rutgers.edu.
if (echo -n testing; echo 1,2,3) | sed s/-n/xn/ | grep xn >/dev/null; then
fi
-if test "x$prefix" = xNONE; then
-echo $ac_n "checking for prefix by ""... $ac_c" 1>&6
-# Extract the first word of "grops", so it can be a program name with args.
-set dummy grops; ac_word=$2
-echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6
-if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_path_GROPS'+set}'`\" = set"; then
- echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
-else
- case "$GROPS" in
- /*)
- ac_cv_path_GROPS="$GROPS" # Let the user override the test with a path.
- ;;
- *)
- IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:"
- for ac_dir in $PATH; do
- test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
- if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then
- ac_cv_path_GROPS="$ac_dir/$ac_word"
- break
- fi
- done
- IFS="$ac_save_ifs"
- ;;
-esac
-fi
-GROPS="$ac_cv_path_GROPS"
-if test -n "$GROPS"; then
- echo "$ac_t""$GROPS" 1>&6
-else
- echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
-fi
-
- if test -n "$ac_cv_path_GROPS"; then
- prefix=`echo $ac_cv_path_GROPS|sed 's%/[^/][^/]*//*[^/][^/]*$%%'`
- fi
-fi
-
# Extract the first word of "gcc", so it can be a program name with args.
set dummy gcc; ac_word=$2
echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:528: checking for $ac_word" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_CC'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
if test -n "$CC"; then
ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test.
else
- IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:"
- for ac_dir in $PATH; do
+ IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS=":"
+ ac_dummy="$PATH"
+ for ac_dir in $ac_dummy; do
test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then
ac_cv_prog_CC="gcc"
# Extract the first word of "cc", so it can be a program name with args.
set dummy cc; ac_word=$2
echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:558: checking for $ac_word" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_CC'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
if test -n "$CC"; then
ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test.
else
- IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:"
+ IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS=":"
ac_prog_rejected=no
- for ac_dir in $PATH; do
+ ac_dummy="$PATH"
+ for ac_dir in $ac_dummy; do
test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then
if test "$ac_dir/$ac_word" = "/usr/ucb/cc"; then
echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
fi
+ if test -z "$CC"; then
+ case "`uname -s`" in
+ *win32* | *WIN32*)
+ # Extract the first word of "cl", so it can be a program name with args.
+set dummy cl; ac_word=$2
+echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:609: checking for $ac_word" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_CC'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+ echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+ if test -n "$CC"; then
+ ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test.
+else
+ IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS=":"
+ ac_dummy="$PATH"
+ for ac_dir in $ac_dummy; do
+ test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
+ if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then
+ ac_cv_prog_CC="cl"
+ break
+ fi
+ done
+ IFS="$ac_save_ifs"
+fi
+fi
+CC="$ac_cv_prog_CC"
+if test -n "$CC"; then
+ echo "$ac_t""$CC" 1>&6
+else
+ echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+fi
+ ;;
+ esac
+ fi
test -z "$CC" && { echo "configure: error: no acceptable cc found in \$PATH" 1>&2; exit 1; }
fi
+echo $ac_n "checking whether the C compiler ($CC $CFLAGS $LDFLAGS) works""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:641: checking whether the C compiler ($CC $CFLAGS $LDFLAGS) works" >&5
+
+ac_ext=c
+# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
+ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
+
+cat > conftest.$ac_ext << EOF
+
+#line 652 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+
+main(){return(0);}
+EOF
+if { (eval echo configure:657: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then
+ ac_cv_prog_cc_works=yes
+ # If we can't run a trivial program, we are probably using a cross compiler.
+ if (./conftest; exit) 2>/dev/null; then
+ ac_cv_prog_cc_cross=no
+ else
+ ac_cv_prog_cc_cross=yes
+ fi
+else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+ ac_cv_prog_cc_works=no
+fi
+rm -fr conftest*
+ac_ext=c
+# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
+ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
+
+echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_cc_works" 1>&6
+if test $ac_cv_prog_cc_works = no; then
+ { echo "configure: error: installation or configuration problem: C compiler cannot create executables." 1>&2; exit 1; }
+fi
+echo $ac_n "checking whether the C compiler ($CC $CFLAGS $LDFLAGS) is a cross-compiler""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:683: checking whether the C compiler ($CC $CFLAGS $LDFLAGS) is a cross-compiler" >&5
+echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross" 1>&6
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
+
echo $ac_n "checking whether we are using GNU C""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:688: checking whether we are using GNU C" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_gcc'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
yes;
#endif
EOF
-if { ac_try='${CC-cc} -E conftest.c'; { (eval echo configure:639: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }; } | egrep yes >/dev/null 2>&1; then
+if { ac_try='${CC-cc} -E conftest.c'; { (eval echo configure:697: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }; } | egrep yes >/dev/null 2>&1; then
ac_cv_prog_gcc=yes
else
ac_cv_prog_gcc=no
fi
echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_gcc" 1>&6
+
if test $ac_cv_prog_gcc = yes; then
GCC=yes
- if test "${CFLAGS+set}" != set; then
- echo $ac_n "checking whether ${CC-cc} accepts -g""... $ac_c" 1>&6
-if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_gcc_g'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+else
+ GCC=
+fi
+
+ac_test_CFLAGS="${CFLAGS+set}"
+ac_save_CFLAGS="$CFLAGS"
+CFLAGS=
+echo $ac_n "checking whether ${CC-cc} accepts -g""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:716: checking whether ${CC-cc} accepts -g" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_cc_g'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
echo 'void f(){}' > conftest.c
if test -z "`${CC-cc} -g -c conftest.c 2>&1`"; then
- ac_cv_prog_gcc_g=yes
+ ac_cv_prog_cc_g=yes
else
- ac_cv_prog_gcc_g=no
+ ac_cv_prog_cc_g=no
fi
rm -f conftest*
fi
-echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_gcc_g" 1>&6
- if test $ac_cv_prog_gcc_g = yes; then
- CFLAGS="-g -O"
- else
- CFLAGS="-O"
- fi
+echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_cc_g" 1>&6
+if test "$ac_test_CFLAGS" = set; then
+ CFLAGS="$ac_save_CFLAGS"
+elif test $ac_cv_prog_cc_g = yes; then
+ if test "$GCC" = yes; then
+ CFLAGS="-g -O2"
+ else
+ CFLAGS="-g"
fi
else
- GCC=
- test "${CFLAGS+set}" = set || CFLAGS="-g"
+ if test "$GCC" = yes; then
+ CFLAGS="-O2"
+ else
+ CFLAGS=
+ fi
fi
-for ac_prog in $CCC c++ g++ gcc CC cxx
+for ac_prog in $CCC c++ g++ gcc CC cxx cc++ cl
do
# Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args.
set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2
echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:752: checking for $ac_word" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_CXX'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
if test -n "$CXX"; then
ac_cv_prog_CXX="$CXX" # Let the user override the test.
else
- IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:"
- for ac_dir in $PATH; do
+ IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS=":"
+ ac_dummy="$PATH"
+ for ac_dir in $ac_dummy; do
test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then
ac_cv_prog_CXX="$ac_prog"
test -n "$CXX" || CXX="gcc"
+echo $ac_n "checking whether the C++ compiler ($CXX $CXXFLAGS $LDFLAGS) works""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:784: checking whether the C++ compiler ($CXX $CXXFLAGS $LDFLAGS) works" >&5
+
+ac_ext=C
+# CXXFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
+ac_cpp='$CXXCPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='${CXX-g++} -c $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cxx_cross
+
+cat > conftest.$ac_ext << EOF
+
+#line 795 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+
+int main(){return(0);}
+EOF
+if { (eval echo configure:800: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then
+ ac_cv_prog_cxx_works=yes
+ # If we can't run a trivial program, we are probably using a cross compiler.
+ if (./conftest; exit) 2>/dev/null; then
+ ac_cv_prog_cxx_cross=no
+ else
+ ac_cv_prog_cxx_cross=yes
+ fi
+else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+ ac_cv_prog_cxx_works=no
+fi
+rm -fr conftest*
+ac_ext=c
+# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
+ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
+
+echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_cxx_works" 1>&6
+if test $ac_cv_prog_cxx_works = no; then
+ { echo "configure: error: installation or configuration problem: C++ compiler cannot create executables." 1>&2; exit 1; }
+fi
+echo $ac_n "checking whether the C++ compiler ($CXX $CXXFLAGS $LDFLAGS) is a cross-compiler""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:826: checking whether the C++ compiler ($CXX $CXXFLAGS $LDFLAGS) is a cross-compiler" >&5
+echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_cxx_cross" 1>&6
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cxx_cross
+
echo $ac_n "checking whether we are using GNU C++""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:831: checking whether we are using GNU C++" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_gxx'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
yes;
#endif
EOF
-if { ac_try='${CXX-g++} -E conftest.C'; { (eval echo configure:719: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }; } | egrep yes >/dev/null 2>&1; then
+if { ac_try='${CXX-g++} -E conftest.C'; { (eval echo configure:840: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }; } | egrep yes >/dev/null 2>&1; then
ac_cv_prog_gxx=yes
else
ac_cv_prog_gxx=no
fi
echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_gxx" 1>&6
+
if test $ac_cv_prog_gxx = yes; then
GXX=yes
- if test "${CXXFLAGS+set}" != set; then
- echo $ac_n "checking whether ${CXX-g++} accepts -g""... $ac_c" 1>&6
-if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_gxx_g'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+else
+ GXX=
+fi
+
+ac_test_CXXFLAGS="${CXXFLAGS+set}"
+ac_save_CXXFLAGS="$CXXFLAGS"
+CXXFLAGS=
+echo $ac_n "checking whether ${CXX-g++} accepts -g""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:859: checking whether ${CXX-g++} accepts -g" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_cxx_g'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
echo 'void f(){}' > conftest.cc
if test -z "`${CXX-g++} -g -c conftest.cc 2>&1`"; then
- ac_cv_prog_gxx_g=yes
+ ac_cv_prog_cxx_g=yes
else
- ac_cv_prog_gxx_g=no
+ ac_cv_prog_cxx_g=no
fi
rm -f conftest*
fi
-echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_gxx_g" 1>&6
- if test $ac_cv_prog_gxx_g = yes; then
- CXXFLAGS="-g -O"
- else
- CXXFLAGS="-O"
- fi
+echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_cxx_g" 1>&6
+if test "$ac_test_CXXFLAGS" = set; then
+ CXXFLAGS="$ac_save_CXXFLAGS"
+elif test $ac_cv_prog_cxx_g = yes; then
+ if test "$GXX" = yes; then
+ CXXFLAGS="-g -O2"
+ else
+ CXXFLAGS="-g"
fi
else
- GXX=
- test "${CXXFLAGS+set}" = set || CXXFLAGS="-g"
-fi
-
-# If we cannot run a trivial program, we must be cross compiling.
-echo $ac_n "checking whether cross-compiling""... $ac_c" 1>&6
-if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_c_cross'+set}'`\" = set"; then
- echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
-else
- if test "$cross_compiling" = yes; then
- ac_cv_c_cross=yes
-else
-cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 765 "configure"
-#include "confdefs.h"
-main(){return(0);}
-EOF
-{ (eval echo configure:769: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; }
-if test -s conftest && (./conftest; exit) 2>/dev/null; then
- ac_cv_c_cross=no
-else
- ac_cv_c_cross=yes
-fi
-fi
-rm -fr conftest*
+ if test "$GXX" = yes; then
+ CXXFLAGS="-O2"
+ else
+ CXXFLAGS=
+ fi
fi
-echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_c_cross" 1>&6
-cross_compiling=$ac_cv_c_cross
# CXXFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CXXCPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CXX-g++} -c $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cxx_cross
if test "$cross_compiling" = no; then
-echo $ac_n "checking that C++ compiler can compile simple program""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+ echo $ac_n "checking that C++ compiler can compile simple program""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:903: checking that C++ compiler can compile simple program" >&5
fi
if test "$cross_compiling" = yes; then
:
else
-cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 798 "configure"
+ cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 909 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" void exit(int);
#endif
int main() { return 0; }
EOF
-{ (eval echo configure:805: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; }
-if test -s conftest && (./conftest; exit) 2>/dev/null; then
+if { (eval echo configure:916: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext} && (./conftest; exit) 2>/dev/null
+then
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
else
- echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
-{ echo "configure: error: a working C++ compiler is required" 1>&2; exit 1; }
-fi
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+ rm -fr conftest*
+ echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6;{ echo "configure: error: a working C++ compiler is required" 1>&2; exit 1; }
fi
rm -fr conftest*
+fi
+
if test "$cross_compiling" = no; then
-echo $ac_n "checking that C++ static constructors and destructors are called""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+ echo $ac_n "checking that C++ static constructors and destructors are called""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:930: checking that C++ static constructors and destructors are called" >&5
fi
if test "$cross_compiling" = yes; then
:
else
-cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 821 "configure"
+ cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 936 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
#ifdef __cplusplus
extern "C" void exit(int);
int main() { return 1; }
EOF
-{ (eval echo configure:840: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; }
-if test -s conftest && (./conftest; exit) 2>/dev/null; then
+if { (eval echo configure:955: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext} && (./conftest; exit) 2>/dev/null
+then
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
else
- echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
-{ echo "configure: error: a working C++ compiler is required" 1>&2; exit 1; }
-fi
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+ rm -fr conftest*
+ echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6;{ echo "configure: error: a working C++ compiler is required" 1>&2; exit 1; }
fi
rm -fr conftest*
+fi
+
echo $ac_n "checking that header files support C++""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:968: checking that header files support C++" >&5
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 851 "configure"
+#line 970 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
#include <stdio.h>
-int main() { return 0; }
-int t() {
+int main() {
fopen(0, 0);
; return 0; }
EOF
-if { (eval echo configure:859: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; }; then
+if { (eval echo configure:977: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
- echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
-{ echo "configure: error: header files do not support C++ (if you are using a version of gcc/g++ earlier than 2.5, you should install libg++)" 1>&2; exit 1; }
+ echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6;{ echo "configure: error: header files do not support C++ (if you are using a version of gcc/g++ earlier than 2.5, you should install libg++)" 1>&2; exit 1; }
fi
rm -f conftest*
-
ac_ext=c
# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
-if test -z "$PSPRINT"
-then
+if test -z "$PSPRINT"; then
for ac_prog in lpr
do
# Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args.
set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2
echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1001: checking for $ac_word" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_LPR'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
if test -n "$LPR"; then
ac_cv_prog_LPR="$LPR" # Let the user override the test.
else
- IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:"
- for ac_dir in $PATH; do
+ IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS=":"
+ ac_dummy="$PATH"
+ for ac_dir in $ac_dummy; do
test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then
ac_cv_prog_LPR="$ac_prog"
# Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args.
set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2
echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1035: checking for $ac_word" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_LP'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
if test -n "$LP"; then
ac_cv_prog_LP="$LP" # Let the user override the test.
else
- IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:"
- for ac_dir in $PATH; do
+ IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS=":"
+ ac_dummy="$PATH"
+ for ac_dir in $ac_dummy; do
test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then
ac_cv_prog_LP="$ac_prog"
test -n "$LP" && break
done
- if test -n "$LPR" && test -n "$LP"
- then
+ if test -n "$LPR" && test -n "$LP"; then
# HP-UX provides an lpr command that emulates lpr using lp,
# but it doesn't have lpq; in this case we want to use lp
# rather than lpr.
# Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args.
set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2
echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1073: checking for $ac_word" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_LPQ'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
if test -n "$LPQ"; then
ac_cv_prog_LPQ="$LPQ" # Let the user override the test.
else
- IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:"
- for ac_dir in $PATH; do
+ IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS=":"
+ ac_dummy="$PATH"
+ for ac_dir in $ac_dummy; do
test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then
ac_cv_prog_LPQ="$ac_prog"
test -n "$LPQ" || LPR=
fi
- if test -n "$LPR"
- then
+ if test -n "$LPR"; then
PSPRINT="$LPR"
- elif test -n "$LP"
- then
+ elif test -n "$LP"; then
PSPRINT="$LP"
fi
fi
echo $ac_n "checking for command to use for printing PostScript files""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1112: checking for command to use for printing PostScript files" >&5
echo "$ac_t""$PSPRINT" 1>&6
# Figure out DVIPRINT from PSPRINT.
echo $ac_n "checking for command to use for printing dvi files""... $ac_c" 1>&6
-if test -n "$PSPRINT" && test -z "$DVIPRINT"
-then
- if test "X$PSPRINT" = "Xlpr"
- then
+echo "configure:1116: checking for command to use for printing dvi files" >&5
+if test -n "$PSPRINT" && test -z "$DVIPRINT"; then
+ if test "X$PSPRINT" = "Xlpr"; then
DVIPRINT="lpr -d"
else
DVIPRINT="$PSPRINT"
# Extract the first word of "perl", so it can be a program name with args.
set dummy perl; ac_word=$2
echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1129: checking for $ac_word" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_path_PERLPATH'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
/*)
ac_cv_path_PERLPATH="$PERLPATH" # Let the user override the test with a path.
;;
+ ?:/*)
+ ac_cv_path_PERLPATH="$PERLPATH" # Let the user override the test with a dos path.
+ ;;
*)
- IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:"
- for ac_dir in $PATH; do
+ IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS=":"
+ ac_dummy="$PATH"
+ for ac_dir in $ac_dummy; do
test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then
ac_cv_path_PERLPATH="$ac_dir/$ac_word"
# Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args.
set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2
echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1167: checking for $ac_word" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_YACC'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
if test -n "$YACC"; then
ac_cv_prog_YACC="$YACC" # Let the user override the test.
else
- IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:"
- for ac_dir in $PATH; do
+ IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS=":"
+ ac_dummy="$PATH"
+ for ac_dir in $ac_dummy; do
test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then
ac_cv_prog_YACC="$ac_prog"
# Extract the first word of "ranlib", so it can be a program name with args.
set dummy ranlib; ac_word=$2
echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1200: checking for $ac_word" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_RANLIB'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
if test -n "$RANLIB"; then
ac_cv_prog_RANLIB="$RANLIB" # Let the user override the test.
else
- IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:"
- for ac_dir in $PATH; do
+ IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS=":"
+ ac_dummy="$PATH"
+ for ac_dir in $ac_dummy; do
test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=.
if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then
ac_cv_prog_RANLIB="ranlib"
# SunOS /usr/etc/install
# IRIX /sbin/install
# AIX /bin/install
+# AIX 4 /usr/bin/installbsd, which doesn't work without a -g flag
# AFS /usr/afsws/bin/install, which mishandles nonexistent args
# SVR4 /usr/ucb/install, which tries to use the nonexistent group "staff"
# ./install, which can be erroneously created by make from ./install.sh.
echo $ac_n "checking for a BSD compatible install""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1261: checking for a BSD compatible install" >&5
if test -z "$INSTALL"; then
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_path_install'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
- IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:"
+ IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_IFS="$IFS"; IFS=":"
for ac_dir in $PATH; do
# Account for people who put trailing slashes in PATH elements.
case "$ac_dir/" in
/|./|.//|/etc/*|/usr/sbin/*|/usr/etc/*|/sbin/*|/usr/afsws/bin/*|/usr/ucb/*) ;;
*)
# OSF1 and SCO ODT 3.0 have their own names for install.
- for ac_prog in ginstall installbsd scoinst install; do
+ # Don't use installbsd from OSF since it installs stuff as root
+ # by default.
+ for ac_prog in ginstall scoinst install; do
if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_prog; then
if test $ac_prog = install &&
grep dspmsg $ac_dir/$ac_prog >/dev/null 2>&1; then
# AIX install. It has an incompatible calling convention.
- # OSF/1 installbsd also uses dspmsg, but is usable.
:
else
ac_cv_path_install="$ac_dir/$ac_prog -c"
;;
esac
done
- IFS="$ac_save_ifs"
+ IFS="$ac_save_IFS"
fi
if test "${ac_cv_path_install+set}" = set; then
# It thinks the first close brace ends the variable substitution.
test -z "$INSTALL_PROGRAM" && INSTALL_PROGRAM='${INSTALL}'
+test -z "$INSTALL_SCRIPT" && INSTALL_SCRIPT='${INSTALL_PROGRAM}'
+
test -z "$INSTALL_DATA" && INSTALL_DATA='${INSTALL} -m 644'
echo $ac_n "checking whether ln -s works""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1314: checking whether ln -s works" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_LN_S'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
fi
echo $ac_n "checking for csh hash hack""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1335: checking for csh hash hack" >&5
cat <<EOF >conftest.sh
#!/bin/sh
true || exit 0
exit 1
EOF
chmod +x conftest.sh
-if echo ./conftest.sh | (csh >/dev/null 2>&1) >/dev/null 2>&1
-then
+if echo ./conftest.sh | (csh >/dev/null 2>&1) >/dev/null 2>&1; then
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6; SH_SCRIPT_SED_CMD='1s/.*/:/'
else
echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6; SH_SCRIPT_SED_CMD=''
fi
rm -f conftest.sh
-
echo $ac_n "checking how to run the C preprocessor""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1351: checking how to run the C preprocessor" >&5
# On Suns, sometimes $CPP names a directory.
if test -n "$CPP" && test -d "$CPP"; then
CPP=
# On the NeXT, cc -E runs the code through the compiler's parser,
# not just through cpp.
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 1230 "configure"
+#line 1366 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
#include <assert.h>
Syntax Error
EOF
ac_try="$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out"
-{ (eval echo configure:1236: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }
-ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out`
+{ (eval echo configure:1372: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }
+ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out | grep -v "^conftest.${ac_ext}\$"`
if test -z "$ac_err"; then
:
else
echo "$ac_err" >&5
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
CPP="${CC-cc} -E -traditional-cpp"
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 1245 "configure"
+#line 1383 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
#include <assert.h>
Syntax Error
EOF
ac_try="$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out"
-{ (eval echo configure:1251: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }
-ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out`
+{ (eval echo configure:1389: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }
+ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out | grep -v "^conftest.${ac_ext}\$"`
if test -z "$ac_err"; then
:
else
echo "$ac_err" >&5
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+ rm -rf conftest*
+ CPP="${CC-cc} -nologo -E"
+ cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 1400 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+#include <assert.h>
+Syntax Error
+EOF
+ac_try="$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out"
+{ (eval echo configure:1406: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }
+ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out | grep -v "^conftest.${ac_ext}\$"`
+if test -z "$ac_err"; then
+ :
+else
+ echo "$ac_err" >&5
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
CPP=/lib/cpp
fi
rm -f conftest*
fi
+rm -f conftest*
+fi
rm -f conftest*
ac_cv_prog_CPP="$CPP"
fi
for ac_hdr in unistd.h dirent.h limits.h sys/dir.h stdlib.h
do
-ac_safe=`echo "$ac_hdr" | tr './\055' '___'`
+ac_safe=`echo "$ac_hdr" | sed 'y%./+-%__p_%'`
echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_hdr""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1434: checking for $ac_hdr" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_header_$ac_safe'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 1279 "configure"
+#line 1439 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
#include <$ac_hdr>
EOF
ac_try="$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out"
-{ (eval echo configure:1284: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }
-ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out`
+{ (eval echo configure:1444: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }
+ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out | grep -v "^conftest.${ac_ext}\$"`
if test -z "$ac_err"; then
rm -rf conftest*
eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=yes"
else
echo "$ac_err" >&5
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=no"
fi
fi
if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_header_'$ac_safe`\" = yes"; then
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
- ac_tr_hdr=HAVE_`echo $ac_hdr | tr 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz./\055' 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ___'`
+ ac_tr_hdr=HAVE_`echo $ac_hdr | sed 'y%abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz./-%ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ___%'`
cat >> confdefs.h <<EOF
#define $ac_tr_hdr 1
EOF
done
echo $ac_n "checking for ISC 3.x or 4.x""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1471: checking for ISC 3.x or 4.x" >&5
if grep '[34]\.' /usr/options/cb.name >/dev/null 2>&1
then
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
fi
echo $ac_n "checking whether -D_POSIX_SOURCE is necessary""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1483: checking whether -D_POSIX_SOURCE is necessary" >&5
ac_ext=C
# CXXFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CXXCPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CXX-g++} -c $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cxx_cross
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 1328 "configure"
+#line 1493 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
#include <stdio.h>
extern "C" { void fileno(int); }
-int main() { return 0; }
-int t() {
+int main() {
; return 0; }
EOF
-if { (eval echo configure:1337: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
+if { (eval echo configure:1501: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6;cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
#define _POSIX_SOURCE 1
EOF
else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
fi
rm -f conftest*
-
ac_ext=c
# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
ac_ext=C
# CXXFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CXXCPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CXX-g++} -c $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cxx_cross
echo $ac_n "checking declaration of getopt in stdlib.h""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1530: checking declaration of getopt in stdlib.h" >&5
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 1364 "configure"
+#line 1532 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
#include <stdlib.h>
extern "C" { void getopt(int); }
-int main() { return 0; }
-int t() {
+int main() {
; return 0; }
EOF
-if { (eval echo configure:1373: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
+if { (eval echo configure:1540: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6;cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
#define STDLIB_H_DECLARES_GETOPT 1
fi
rm -f conftest*
-
echo $ac_n "checking declaration of getopt in unistd.h""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1554: checking declaration of getopt in unistd.h" >&5
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 1387 "configure"
+#line 1556 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <unistd.h>
extern "C" { void getopt(int); }
-int main() { return 0; }
-int t() {
+int main() {
; return 0; }
EOF
-if { (eval echo configure:1397: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
+if { (eval echo configure:1565: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6;cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
#define UNISTD_H_DECLARES_GETOPT 1
fi
rm -f conftest*
-
ac_ext=c
# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
ac_ext=C
# CXXFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CXXCPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CXX-g++} -c $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cxx_cross
echo $ac_n "checking declaration of putenv""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1594: checking declaration of putenv" >&5
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 1424 "configure"
+#line 1596 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
#include <stdlib.h>
extern "C" { void putenv(int); }
-int main() { return 0; }
-int t() {
+int main() {
; return 0; }
EOF
-if { (eval echo configure:1433: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
+if { (eval echo configure:1604: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
- echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
-cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
+ echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6;cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
#define STDLIB_H_DECLARES_PUTENV 1
EOF
fi
rm -f conftest*
-
ac_ext=c
# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
ac_ext=C
# CXXFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CXXCPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CXX-g++} -c $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cxx_cross
echo $ac_n "checking declaration of popen""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1633: checking declaration of popen" >&5
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 1461 "configure"
+#line 1635 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
#include <stdio.h>
extern "C" { void popen(int); }
-int main() { return 0; }
-int t() {
+int main() {
; return 0; }
EOF
-if { (eval echo configure:1470: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
+if { (eval echo configure:1643: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6;cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
#define STDIO_H_DECLARES_POPEN 1
fi
rm -f conftest*
-
ac_ext=c
# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
ac_ext=C
# CXXFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CXXCPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CXX-g++} -c $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cxx_cross
echo $ac_n "checking declaration of pclose""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1672: checking declaration of pclose" >&5
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 1497 "configure"
+#line 1674 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
#include <stdio.h>
extern "C" { void pclose(int); }
-int main() { return 0; }
-int t() {
+int main() {
; return 0; }
EOF
-if { (eval echo configure:1506: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
+if { (eval echo configure:1682: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6;cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
#define STDIO_H_DECLARES_PCLOSE 1
fi
rm -f conftest*
+ac_ext=c
+# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
+ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
+
+
+ac_ext=C
+# CXXFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
+ac_cpp='$CXXCPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='${CXX-g++} -c $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cxx_cross
+
+echo $ac_n "checking for sys_nerr in <errno.h> or <stdio.h>""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1711: checking for sys_nerr in <errno.h> or <stdio.h>" >&5
+cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 1713 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+int main() {
+int k; k = sys_nerr;
+; return 0; }
+EOF
+if { (eval echo configure:1721: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
+ rm -rf conftest*
+ echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6;cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
+#define HAVE_SYS_NERR 1
+EOF
+
+else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+ rm -rf conftest*
+ echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+ac_ext=c
+# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
+ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
+
+ac_ext=C
+# CXXFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
+ac_cpp='$CXXCPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='${CXX-g++} -c $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cxx_cross
+
+echo $ac_n "checking for sys_errlist in <errno.h> or <stdio.h>""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1750: checking for sys_errlist in <errno.h> or <stdio.h>" >&5
+cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 1752 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+int main() {
+int k; k = (int)sys_errlist[0];
+; return 0; }
+EOF
+if { (eval echo configure:1760: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
+ rm -rf conftest*
+ echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6;cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
+#define HAVE_SYS_ERRLIST 1
+EOF
+
+else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+ rm -rf conftest*
+ echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
ac_ext=c
# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
ac_ext=C
# CXXFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CXXCPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CXX-g++} -c $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cxx_cross
+
+echo $ac_n "checking declaration of hypot""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1789: checking declaration of hypot" >&5
+cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 1791 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+#include <math.h>
+extern "C" { double hypot(double,double); }
+int main() {
+
+; return 0; }
+EOF
+if { (eval echo configure:1799: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
+ rm -rf conftest*
+ echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+ rm -rf conftest*
+ echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6;cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
+#define MATH_H_DECLARES_HYPOT 1
+EOF
+
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+ac_ext=c
+# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
+ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
+
+
+ac_ext=C
+# CXXFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
+ac_cpp='$CXXCPP $CPPFLAGS'
+ac_compile='${CXX-g++} -c $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cxx_cross
echo $ac_n "checking C++ <osfcn.h>""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1828: checking C++ <osfcn.h>" >&5
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 1533 "configure"
+#line 1830 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
#include <osfcn.h>
-int main() { return 0; }
-int t() {
+int main() {
read(0, 0, 0); open(0, 0);
; return 0; }
EOF
-if { (eval echo configure:1541: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
+if { (eval echo configure:1837: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6;cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
#define HAVE_CC_OSFCN_H 1
EOF
else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
fi
rm -f conftest*
-
ac_ext=c
# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
ac_ext=C
# CXXFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CXXCPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CXX-g++} -c $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cxx_cross
echo $ac_n "checking C++ <limits.h>""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1866: checking C++ <limits.h>" >&5
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 1568 "configure"
+#line 1868 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
#include <limits.h>
-int main() { return 0; }
-int t() {
+int main() {
int x = INT_MIN; int y = INT_MAX; int z = UCHAR_MAX;
; return 0; }
EOF
-if { (eval echo configure:1576: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
+if { (eval echo configure:1875: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6;cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
#define HAVE_CC_LIMITS_H 1
EOF
else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
fi
rm -f conftest*
-
ac_ext=c
# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
ac_ext=C
# CXXFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CXXCPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CXX-g++} -c $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cxx_cross
echo $ac_n "checking for declaration of time_t""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1904: checking for declaration of time_t" >&5
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 1603 "configure"
+#line 1906 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
#include <time.h>
-int main() { return 0; }
-int t() {
+int main() {
time_t t = time(0); struct tm *p = localtime(&t);
; return 0; }
EOF
-if { (eval echo configure:1611: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
+if { (eval echo configure:1913: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6;cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
#define LONG_FOR_TIME_T 1
fi
rm -f conftest*
-
ac_ext=c
# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
echo $ac_n "checking return type of signal handlers""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1934: checking return type of signal handlers" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_type_signal'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 1634 "configure"
+#line 1939 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <signal.h>
void (*signal ()) ();
#endif
-int main() { return 0; }
-int t() {
+int main() {
int i;
; return 0; }
EOF
-if { (eval echo configure:1652: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
+if { (eval echo configure:1956: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
rm -rf conftest*
ac_cv_type_signal=void
else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
ac_cv_type_signal=int
fi
rm -f conftest*
-
fi
echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_type_signal" 1>&6
echo $ac_n "checking struct exception""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1975: checking struct exception" >&5
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 1671 "configure"
+#line 1977 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
#include <math.h>
-int main() { return 0; }
-int t() {
+int main() {
struct exception e;
; return 0; }
EOF
-if { (eval echo configure:1679: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
+if { (eval echo configure:1984: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6;cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
#define HAVE_STRUCT_EXCEPTION 1
EOF
else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
fi
rm -f conftest*
+echo $ac_n "checking for sin in -lm""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:1998: checking for sin in -lm" >&5
+ac_lib_var=`echo m'_'sin | sed 'y%./+-%__p_%'`
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_lib_$ac_lib_var'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+ echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+ ac_save_LIBS="$LIBS"
+LIBS="-lm $LIBS"
+cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 2006 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+/* Override any gcc2 internal prototype to avoid an error. */
+/* We use char because int might match the return type of a gcc2
+ builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply. */
+char sin();
+
+int main() {
+sin()
+; return 0; }
+EOF
+if { (eval echo configure:2017: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then
+ rm -rf conftest*
+ eval "ac_cv_lib_$ac_lib_var=yes"
+else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+ rm -rf conftest*
+ eval "ac_cv_lib_$ac_lib_var=no"
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+LIBS="$ac_save_LIBS"
-for ac_func in valloc getpagesize
+fi
+if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_lib_'$ac_lib_var`\" = yes"; then
+ echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
+ LIBM=-lm
+else
+ echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+fi
+
+
+
+for ac_hdr in unistd.h
+do
+ac_safe=`echo "$ac_hdr" | sed 'y%./+-%__p_%'`
+echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_hdr""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:2043: checking for $ac_hdr" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_header_$ac_safe'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+ echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
+else
+ cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 2048 "configure"
+#include "confdefs.h"
+#include <$ac_hdr>
+EOF
+ac_try="$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out"
+{ (eval echo configure:2053: \"$ac_try\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_try) 2>&5; }
+ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out | grep -v "^conftest.${ac_ext}\$"`
+if test -z "$ac_err"; then
+ rm -rf conftest*
+ eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=yes"
+else
+ echo "$ac_err" >&5
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+ rm -rf conftest*
+ eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=no"
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+fi
+if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_header_'$ac_safe`\" = yes"; then
+ echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
+ ac_tr_hdr=HAVE_`echo $ac_hdr | sed 'y%abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz./-%ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ___%'`
+ cat >> confdefs.h <<EOF
+#define $ac_tr_hdr 1
+EOF
+
+else
+ echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
+fi
+done
+
+for ac_func in getpagesize
do
echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_func""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:2082: checking for $ac_func" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func_$ac_func'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 1698 "configure"
+#line 2087 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
/* System header to define __stub macros and hopefully few prototypes,
which can conflict with char $ac_func(); below. */
builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply. */
char $ac_func();
-int main() { return 0; }
-int t() {
+int main() {
/* The GNU C library defines this for functions which it implements
to always fail with ENOSYS. Some functions are actually named
; return 0; }
EOF
-if { (eval echo configure:1722: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; }; then
+if { (eval echo configure:2110: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then
rm -rf conftest*
eval "ac_cv_func_$ac_func=yes"
else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
eval "ac_cv_func_$ac_func=no"
fi
rm -f conftest*
-
fi
+
if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_func_'$ac_func`\" = yes"; then
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
ac_tr_func=HAVE_`echo $ac_func | tr 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz' 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ'`
done
echo $ac_n "checking for working mmap""... $ac_c" 1>&6
-if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func_mmap'+set}'`\" = set"; then
+echo "configure:2135: checking for working mmap" >&5
+if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func_mmap_fixed_mapped'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
if test "$cross_compiling" = yes; then
- ac_cv_func_mmap=no
+ ac_cv_func_mmap_fixed_mapped=no
else
-cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 1752 "configure"
+ cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 2143 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
-/* Thanks to Mike Haertel and Jim Avera for this test. */
+/* Thanks to Mike Haertel and Jim Avera for this test.
+ Here is a matrix of mmap possibilities:
+ mmap private not fixed
+ mmap private fixed at somewhere currently unmapped
+ mmap private fixed at somewhere already mapped
+ mmap shared not fixed
+ mmap shared fixed at somewhere currently unmapped
+ mmap shared fixed at somewhere already mapped
+ For private mappings, we should verify that changes cannot be read()
+ back from the file, nor mmap's back from the file at a different
+ address. (There have been systems where private was not correctly
+ implemented like the infamous i386 svr4.0, and systems where the
+ VM page cache was not coherent with the filesystem buffer cache
+ like early versions of FreeBSD and possibly contemporary NetBSD.)
+ For shared mappings, we should conversely verify that changes get
+ propogated back to all the places they're supposed to be.
+
+ Grep wants private fixed already mapped.
+ The main things grep needs to know about mmap are:
+ * does it exist and is it safe to write into the mmap'd area
+ * how to use it (BSD variants) */
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <fcntl.h>
#include <sys/mman.h>
+/* This mess was copied from the GNU getpagesize.h. */
#ifndef HAVE_GETPAGESIZE
-# include <sys/param.h>
-# ifdef EXEC_PAGESIZE
-# define getpagesize() EXEC_PAGESIZE
-# else
-# ifdef NBPG
-# define getpagesize() NBPG * CLSIZE
-# ifndef CLSIZE
-# define CLSIZE 1
-# endif
-# else
-# ifdef NBPC
-# define getpagesize() NBPC
-# else
-# define getpagesize() PAGESIZE /* SVR4 */
-# endif
-# endif
+# ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H
+# include <unistd.h>
# endif
-#endif
-#ifndef HAVE_VALLOC
-# define valloc malloc
-#endif
+/* Assume that all systems that can run configure have sys/param.h. */
+# ifndef HAVE_SYS_PARAM_H
+# define HAVE_SYS_PARAM_H 1
+# endif
+
+# ifdef _SC_PAGESIZE
+# define getpagesize() sysconf(_SC_PAGESIZE)
+# else /* no _SC_PAGESIZE */
+# ifdef HAVE_SYS_PARAM_H
+# include <sys/param.h>
+# ifdef EXEC_PAGESIZE
+# define getpagesize() EXEC_PAGESIZE
+# else /* no EXEC_PAGESIZE */
+# ifdef NBPG
+# define getpagesize() NBPG * CLSIZE
+# ifndef CLSIZE
+# define CLSIZE 1
+# endif /* no CLSIZE */
+# else /* no NBPG */
+# ifdef NBPC
+# define getpagesize() NBPC
+# else /* no NBPC */
+# ifdef PAGESIZE
+# define getpagesize() PAGESIZE
+# endif /* PAGESIZE */
+# endif /* no NBPC */
+# endif /* no NBPG */
+# endif /* no EXEC_PAGESIZE */
+# else /* no HAVE_SYS_PARAM_H */
+# define getpagesize() 8192 /* punt totally */
+# endif /* no HAVE_SYS_PARAM_H */
+# endif /* no _SC_PAGESIZE */
+
+#endif /* no HAVE_GETPAGESIZE */
#ifdef __cplusplus
-extern "C" { void *valloc(unsigned), *malloc(unsigned); }
+extern "C" { void *malloc(unsigned); }
#else
-char *valloc(), *malloc();
+char *malloc();
#endif
int
main()
{
- char *buf1, *buf2, *buf3;
- int i = getpagesize(), j;
- int i2 = i * 2;
- int fd;
-
- buf1 = (char *)valloc(i2);
- buf2 = (char *)valloc(i);
- buf3 = (char *)malloc(i2);
- for (j = 0; j < i2; ++j)
- *(buf1 + j) = rand();
- fd = open("conftestmmap", O_CREAT | O_RDWR, 0666);
- write(fd, buf1, i2);
- mmap(buf2, i, PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE, MAP_FIXED | MAP_PRIVATE, fd, 0);
- for (j = 0; j < i; ++j)
- if (*(buf1 + j) != *(buf2 + j))
- exit(1);
- lseek(fd, (long)i, 0);
- read(fd, buf2, i); /* read into mapped memory -- file should not change */
- /* (it does in i386 SVR4.0 - Jim Avera, jima@netcom.com) */
- lseek(fd, (long)0, 0);
- read(fd, buf3, i2);
- for (j = 0; j < i2; ++j)
- if (*(buf1 + j) != *(buf3 + j))
- exit(1);
- exit(0);
+ char *data, *data2, *data3;
+ int i, pagesize;
+ int fd;
+
+ pagesize = getpagesize();
+
+ /*
+ * First, make a file with some known garbage in it.
+ */
+ data = malloc(pagesize);
+ if (!data)
+ exit(1);
+ for (i = 0; i < pagesize; ++i)
+ *(data + i) = rand();
+ umask(0);
+ fd = creat("conftestmmap", 0600);
+ if (fd < 0)
+ exit(1);
+ if (write(fd, data, pagesize) != pagesize)
+ exit(1);
+ close(fd);
+
+ /*
+ * Next, try to mmap the file at a fixed address which
+ * already has something else allocated at it. If we can,
+ * also make sure that we see the same garbage.
+ */
+ fd = open("conftestmmap", O_RDWR);
+ if (fd < 0)
+ exit(1);
+ data2 = malloc(2 * pagesize);
+ if (!data2)
+ exit(1);
+ data2 += (pagesize - ((int) data2 & (pagesize - 1))) & (pagesize - 1);
+ if (data2 != mmap(data2, pagesize, PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE,
+ MAP_PRIVATE | MAP_FIXED, fd, 0L))
+ exit(1);
+ for (i = 0; i < pagesize; ++i)
+ if (*(data + i) != *(data2 + i))
+ exit(1);
+
+ /*
+ * Finally, make sure that changes to the mapped area
+ * do not percolate back to the file as seen by read().
+ * (This is a bug on some variants of i386 svr4.0.)
+ */
+ for (i = 0; i < pagesize; ++i)
+ *(data2 + i) = *(data2 + i) + 1;
+ data3 = malloc(pagesize);
+ if (!data3)
+ exit(1);
+ if (read(fd, data3, pagesize) != pagesize)
+ exit(1);
+ for (i = 0; i < pagesize; ++i)
+ if (*(data + i) != *(data3 + i))
+ exit(1);
+ close(fd);
+ unlink("conftestmmap");
+ exit(0);
}
EOF
-{ (eval echo configure:1821: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; }
-if test -s conftest && (./conftest; exit) 2>/dev/null; then
- ac_cv_func_mmap=yes
+if { (eval echo configure:2283: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext} && (./conftest; exit) 2>/dev/null
+then
+ ac_cv_func_mmap_fixed_mapped=yes
else
- ac_cv_func_mmap=no
-fi
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+ rm -fr conftest*
+ ac_cv_func_mmap_fixed_mapped=no
fi
rm -fr conftest*
fi
-echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_func_mmap" 1>&6
-if test $ac_cv_func_mmap = yes; then
+fi
+
+echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_func_mmap_fixed_mapped" 1>&6
+if test $ac_cv_func_mmap_fixed_mapped = yes; then
cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
#define HAVE_MMAP 1
EOF
fi
saved_libs="$LIBS"
-LIBS="$LIBS -lm"
+LIBS="$LIBS -lc $LIBM"
for ac_func in fmod strtol getcwd strerror putenv
do
echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_func""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:2310: checking for $ac_func" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func_$ac_func'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 1848 "configure"
+#line 2315 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
/* System header to define __stub macros and hopefully few prototypes,
which can conflict with char $ac_func(); below. */
builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply. */
char $ac_func();
-int main() { return 0; }
-int t() {
+int main() {
/* The GNU C library defines this for functions which it implements
to always fail with ENOSYS. Some functions are actually named
; return 0; }
EOF
-if { (eval echo configure:1872: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; }; then
+if { (eval echo configure:2338: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then
rm -rf conftest*
eval "ac_cv_func_$ac_func=yes"
else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
eval "ac_cv_func_$ac_func=no"
fi
rm -f conftest*
-
fi
+
if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_func_'$ac_func`\" = yes"; then
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
- :
+ ac_tr_func=HAVE_`echo $ac_func | tr 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz' 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ'`
+ cat >> confdefs.h <<EOF
+#define $ac_tr_func 1
+EOF
+
else
echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
-LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS ${ac_func}.o"
+LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS ${ac_func}.${ac_objext}"
fi
-
done
+
LIBS="$saved_libs"
for ac_func in rename mkstemp
do
echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_func""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:2368: checking for $ac_func" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func_$ac_func'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 1900 "configure"
+#line 2373 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
/* System header to define __stub macros and hopefully few prototypes,
which can conflict with char $ac_func(); below. */
builtin and then its argument prototype would still apply. */
char $ac_func();
-int main() { return 0; }
-int t() {
+int main() {
/* The GNU C library defines this for functions which it implements
to always fail with ENOSYS. Some functions are actually named
; return 0; }
EOF
-if { (eval echo configure:1924: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; }; then
+if { (eval echo configure:2396: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext}; then
rm -rf conftest*
eval "ac_cv_func_$ac_func=yes"
else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
eval "ac_cv_func_$ac_func=no"
fi
rm -f conftest*
-
fi
+
if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_func_'$ac_func`\" = yes"; then
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
ac_tr_func=HAVE_`echo $ac_func | tr 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz' 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ'`
done
echo $ac_n "checking for sys_siglist declaration in signal.h or unistd.h""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:2421: checking for sys_siglist declaration in signal.h or unistd.h" >&5
if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_decl_sys_siglist'+set}'`\" = set"; then
echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6
else
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 1951 "configure"
+#line 2426 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <signal.h>
#ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H
#include <unistd.h>
#endif
-int main() { return 0; }
-int t() {
+int main() {
char *msg = *(sys_siglist + 1);
; return 0; }
EOF
-if { (eval echo configure:1964: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
+if { (eval echo configure:2438: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
rm -rf conftest*
ac_cv_decl_sys_siglist=yes
else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
ac_cv_decl_sys_siglist=no
fi
rm -f conftest*
-
fi
echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_decl_sys_siglist" 1>&6
# CXXFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CXXCPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CXX-g++} -c $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cxx_cross
echo $ac_n "checking whether ANSI array delete syntax supported""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:2467: checking whether ANSI array delete syntax supported" >&5
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 1992 "configure"
+#line 2469 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
-int main() { return 0; }
-int t() {
+int main() {
char *p = new char[5]; delete [] p;
; return 0; }
EOF
-if { (eval echo configure:2000: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
+if { (eval echo configure:2476: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6;cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
#define ARRAY_DELETE_NEEDS_SIZE 1
fi
rm -f conftest*
-
ac_ext=c
# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
ac_ext=C
# CXXFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CXXCPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CXX-g++} -c $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CXX-g++} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CXXFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cxx_cross
echo $ac_n "checking traditional preprocessor""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:2505: checking traditional preprocessor" >&5
cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 2027 "configure"
+#line 2507 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
#define name2(a,b) a/**/b
-int main() { return 0; }
-int t() {
+int main() {
int name2(foo,bar);
; return 0; }
EOF
-if { (eval echo configure:2035: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
+if { (eval echo configure:2514: \"$ac_compile\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_compile) 2>&5; }; then
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6;cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
#define TRADITIONAL_CPP 1
EOF
else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
rm -rf conftest*
echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
fi
rm -f conftest*
-
ac_ext=c
# CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options.
ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS'
ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5'
-ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest${ac_exeext} $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5'
+cross_compiling=$ac_cv_prog_cc_cross
echo $ac_n "checking w_coredump""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:2535: checking w_coredump" >&5
if test "$cross_compiling" = yes; then
echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
else
-cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
-#line 2058 "configure"
+ cat > conftest.$ac_ext <<EOF
+#line 2540 "configure"
#include "confdefs.h"
-
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/wait.h>
main()
exit(i != 0200);
#endif
}
-
EOF
-{ (eval echo configure:2075: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; }
-if test -s conftest && (./conftest; exit) 2>/dev/null; then
+if { (eval echo configure:2555: \"$ac_link\") 1>&5; (eval $ac_link) 2>&5; } && test -s conftest${ac_exeext} && (./conftest; exit) 2>/dev/null
+then
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6;cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF
#define WCOREFLAG 0200
EOF
else
+ echo "configure: failed program was:" >&5
+ cat conftest.$ac_ext >&5
+ rm -fr conftest*
echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6
fi
-fi
rm -fr conftest*
+fi
+
echo $ac_n "checking default value for grops -b option""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:2571: checking default value for grops -b option" >&5
test -n "${BROKEN_SPOOLER_FLAGS}" || BROKEN_SPOOLER_FLAGS=7
echo "$ac_t""$BROKEN_SPOOLER_FLAGS" 1>&6
echo $ac_n "checking default paper size""... $ac_c" 1>&6
-if test -z "$PAGE"
-then
+echo "configure:2576: checking default paper size" >&5
+if test -z "$PAGE"; then
descfile=
- if test -r $prefix/share/groff/font/devps/DESC
- then
+ if test -r $prefix/share/groff/font/devps/DESC; then
descfile=$prefix/share/groff/font/devps/DESC
- elif test -r $prefix/lib/groff/font/devps/DESC
- then
+ elif test -r $prefix/lib/groff/font/devps/DESC; then
descfile=$prefix/lib/groff/font/devps/DESC
fi
if test -n "$descfile" \
- && grep "^paperlength 841890" $descfile >/dev/null 2>&1
- then
+ && grep "^paperlength 841890" $descfile >/dev/null 2>&1; then
PAGE=A4
else
PAGE=letter
fi
fi
-if test -z "$PAGE"
-then
+if test -z "$PAGE"; then
dom=`awk '($1 == "dom" || $1 == "search") { print $2; exit}' \
/etc/resolv.conf 2>/dev/null`
-
- if test -z "$dom"
- then
+ if test -z "$dom"; then
dom=`(domainname) 2>/dev/null | tr -d '+'`
- if test -z "$dom"
- then
+ if test -z "$dom"; then
dom=`(hostname) 2>/dev/null | grep '\.'`
fi
fi
-
# If the top-level domain is two letters and it's not `us' or `ca'
# then they probably use A4 paper.
case "$dom" in
echo "$ac_t""$PAGE" 1>&6
echo $ac_n "checking for existing troff installation""... $ac_c" 1>&6
-if test "x`(echo .tm '|n(.g' | tr '|' '\\\\' | troff -z -i 2>&1) 2>/dev/null`" \
- = x0
-then
+echo "configure:2611: checking for existing troff installation" >&5
+if test "x`(echo .tm '|n(.g' | tr '|' '\\\\' | troff -z -i 2>&1) 2>/dev/null`" = x0; then
echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6
g=g
else
fi
-
echo $ac_n "checking for prefix of system macro packages""... $ac_c" 1>&6
+echo "configure:2622: checking for prefix of system macro packages" >&5
sys_tmac_prefix=
sys_tmac_file_prefix=
-for d in /usr/share/lib/tmac /usr/lib/tmac
-do
- for t in "" tmac.
- do
- for m in an s m
- do
+for d in /usr/share/lib/tmac /usr/lib/tmac; do
+ for t in "" tmac.; do
+ for m in an s m; do
f=$d/$t$m
if test -z "$sys_tmac_prefix" \
&& test -f $f \
- && grep '^\.if' $f >/dev/null 2>&1
- then
+ && grep '^\.if' $f >/dev/null 2>&1; then
sys_tmac_prefix=$d/$t
sys_tmac_file_prefix=$t
fi
tmac_wrap=
echo $ac_n "checking which system macro packages should be made available""... $ac_c" 1>&6
-if test "x$sys_tmac_file_prefix" = "xtmac."
-then
- for f in $sys_tmac_prefix*
- do
+echo "configure:2642: checking which system macro packages should be made available" >&5
+if test "x$sys_tmac_file_prefix" = "xtmac."; then
+ for f in $sys_tmac_prefix*; do
suff=`echo $f | sed -e "s;$sys_tmac_prefix;;"`
case "$suff" in
- e);;
+ e) ;;
*)
- grep "Copyright.*Free Software Foundation" $f >/dev/null \
- || tmac_wrap="$tmac_wrap $suff"
- ;;
+ grep "Copyright.*Free Software Foundation" $f >/dev/null \
+ || tmac_wrap="$tmac_wrap $suff" ;;
esac
done
-elif test -n "$sys_tmac_prefix"
-then
+elif test -n "$sys_tmac_prefix"; then
files=`echo $sys_tmac_prefix*`
grep "\\.so" $files >conftest.sol
- for f in $files
- do
+ for f in $files; do
case "$f" in
- ${sys_tmac_prefix}e) ;;
+ ${sys_tmac_prefix}e) ;;
*.me) ;;
*/ms.*) ;;
*)
- b=`basename $f`
- if grep "\\.so.*/$b\$" conftest.sol >/dev/null \
- || grep -l "Copyright.*Free Software Foundation" $f >/dev/null
- then
- :
- else
- suff=`echo $f | sed -e "s;$sys_tmac_prefix;;"`
- case "$suff" in
- tmac.*);;
- *) tmac_wrap="$tmac_wrap $suff" ;;
- esac
- fi
+ b=`basename $f`
+ if grep "\\.so.*/$b\$" conftest.sol >/dev/null \
+ || grep -l "Copyright.*Free Software Foundation" $f >/dev/null; then
+ :
+ else
+ suff=`echo $f | sed -e "s;$sys_tmac_prefix;;"`
+ case "$suff" in
+ tmac.*) ;;
+ *) tmac_wrap="$tmac_wrap $suff" ;;
+ esac
+ fi
esac
done
rm -f conftest.sol
# --recheck option to rerun configure.
#
EOF
+# The following way of writing the cache mishandles newlines in values,
+# but we know of no workaround that is simple, portable, and efficient.
+# So, don't put newlines in cache variables' values.
# Ultrix sh set writes to stderr and can't be redirected directly,
# and sets the high bit in the cache file unless we assign to the vars.
(set) 2>&1 |
- sed -n "s/^\([a-zA-Z0-9_]*_cv_[a-zA-Z0-9_]*\)=\(.*\)/\1=\${\1='\2'}/p" \
- >> confcache
+ case `(ac_space=' '; set | grep ac_space) 2>&1` in
+ *ac_space=\ *)
+ # `set' does not quote correctly, so add quotes (double-quote substitution
+ # turns \\\\ into \\, and sed turns \\ into \).
+ sed -n \
+ -e "s/'/'\\\\''/g" \
+ -e "s/^\\([a-zA-Z0-9_]*_cv_[a-zA-Z0-9_]*\\)=\\(.*\\)/\\1=\${\\1='\\2'}/p"
+ ;;
+ *)
+ # `set' quotes correctly as required by POSIX, so do not add quotes.
+ sed -n -e 's/^\([a-zA-Z0-9_]*_cv_[a-zA-Z0-9_]*\)=\(.*\)/\1=${\1=\2}/p'
+ ;;
+ esac >> confcache
if cmp -s $cache_file confcache; then
:
else
echo "running \${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $0 $ac_configure_args --no-create --no-recursion"
exec \${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $0 $ac_configure_args --no-create --no-recursion ;;
-version | --version | --versio | --versi | --vers | --ver | --ve | --v)
- echo "$CONFIG_STATUS generated by autoconf version 2.10"
+ echo "$CONFIG_STATUS generated by autoconf version 2.13"
exit 0 ;;
-help | --help | --hel | --he | --h)
echo "\$ac_cs_usage"; exit 0 ;;
s/@@/%@/; s/@@/@%/; s/@g\$/%g/' > conftest.subs <<\\CEOF
$ac_vpsub
$extrasub
+s%@SHELL@%$SHELL%g
s%@CFLAGS@%$CFLAGS%g
s%@CPPFLAGS@%$CPPFLAGS%g
s%@CXXFLAGS@%$CXXFLAGS%g
+s%@FFLAGS@%$FFLAGS%g
s%@DEFS@%$DEFS%g
s%@LDFLAGS@%$LDFLAGS%g
s%@LIBS@%$LIBS%g
s%@oldincludedir@%$oldincludedir%g
s%@infodir@%$infodir%g
s%@mandir@%$mandir%g
-s%@GROPS@%$GROPS%g
s%@CC@%$CC%g
s%@CXX@%$CXX%g
s%@LPR@%$LPR%g
s%@YACC@%$YACC%g
s%@RANLIB@%$RANLIB%g
s%@INSTALL_PROGRAM@%$INSTALL_PROGRAM%g
+s%@INSTALL_SCRIPT@%$INSTALL_SCRIPT%g
s%@INSTALL_DATA@%$INSTALL_DATA%g
s%@LN_S@%$LN_S%g
s%@SH_SCRIPT_SED_CMD@%$SH_SCRIPT_SED_CMD%g
s%@CPP@%$CPP%g
+s%@LIBM@%$LIBM%g
s%@LIBOBJS@%$LIBOBJS%g
s%@BROKEN_SPOOLER_FLAGS@%$BROKEN_SPOOLER_FLAGS%g
s%@PAGE@%$PAGE%g
CEOF
EOF
+
+cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <<\EOF
+
+# Split the substitutions into bite-sized pieces for seds with
+# small command number limits, like on Digital OSF/1 and HP-UX.
+ac_max_sed_cmds=90 # Maximum number of lines to put in a sed script.
+ac_file=1 # Number of current file.
+ac_beg=1 # First line for current file.
+ac_end=$ac_max_sed_cmds # Line after last line for current file.
+ac_more_lines=:
+ac_sed_cmds=""
+while $ac_more_lines; do
+ if test $ac_beg -gt 1; then
+ sed "1,${ac_beg}d; ${ac_end}q" conftest.subs > conftest.s$ac_file
+ else
+ sed "${ac_end}q" conftest.subs > conftest.s$ac_file
+ fi
+ if test ! -s conftest.s$ac_file; then
+ ac_more_lines=false
+ rm -f conftest.s$ac_file
+ else
+ if test -z "$ac_sed_cmds"; then
+ ac_sed_cmds="sed -f conftest.s$ac_file"
+ else
+ ac_sed_cmds="$ac_sed_cmds | sed -f conftest.s$ac_file"
+ fi
+ ac_file=`expr $ac_file + 1`
+ ac_beg=$ac_end
+ ac_end=`expr $ac_end + $ac_max_sed_cmds`
+ fi
+done
+if test -z "$ac_sed_cmds"; then
+ ac_sed_cmds=cat
+fi
+EOF
+
cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <<EOF
CONFIG_FILES=\${CONFIG_FILES-"Makefile"}
EOF
cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <<\EOF
for ac_file in .. $CONFIG_FILES; do if test "x$ac_file" != x..; then
- # Support "outfile[:infile]", defaulting infile="outfile.in".
+ # Support "outfile[:infile[:infile...]]", defaulting infile="outfile.in".
case "$ac_file" in
- *:*) ac_file_in=`echo "$ac_file"|sed 's%.*:%%'`
+ *:*) ac_file_in=`echo "$ac_file"|sed 's%[^:]*:%%'`
ac_file=`echo "$ac_file"|sed 's%:.*%%'` ;;
*) ac_file_in="${ac_file}.in" ;;
esac
- # Adjust relative srcdir, etc. for subdirectories.
+ # Adjust a relative srcdir, top_srcdir, and INSTALL for subdirectories.
# Remove last slash and all that follows it. Not all systems have dirname.
ac_dir=`echo $ac_file|sed 's%/[^/][^/]*$%%'`
[/$]*) INSTALL="$ac_given_INSTALL" ;;
*) INSTALL="$ac_dots$ac_given_INSTALL" ;;
esac
+
echo creating "$ac_file"
rm -f "$ac_file"
configure_input="Generated automatically from `echo $ac_file_in|sed 's%.*/%%'` by configure."
# $configure_input" ;;
*) ac_comsub= ;;
esac
+
+ ac_file_inputs=`echo $ac_file_in|sed -e "s%^%$ac_given_srcdir/%" -e "s%:% $ac_given_srcdir/%g"`
sed -e "$ac_comsub
s%@configure_input@%$configure_input%g
s%@srcdir@%$srcdir%g
s%@top_srcdir@%$top_srcdir%g
s%@INSTALL@%$INSTALL%g
-" -f conftest.subs $ac_given_srcdir/$ac_file_in > $ac_file
+" $ac_file_inputs | (eval "$ac_sed_cmds") > $ac_file
fi; done
-rm -f conftest.subs
+rm -f conftest.s*
+EOF
+cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <<EOF
+EOF
+cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <<\EOF
exit 0
EOF
This would be called as
@example
-.vl $Id: groff.texinfo,v 1.1.1.1 2000/04/09 07:58:37 millert Exp $
+.vl $Id: groff.texinfo,v 1.2 2000/04/09 08:25:11 millert Exp $
@end example
.\" This document was written for free use and redistribution by
.\" Eric S. Raymond <esr@thyrsus.com> in August 1995.
.\"
-.\" $Id: pic.ms,v 1.1.1.2 2000/04/09 07:58:38 millert Exp $
+.\" $Id: pic.ms,v 1.2 2000/04/09 08:25:11 millert Exp $
.\"
.\" Set a proper TeX
.ie t .ds tx T\h'-.1667m'\v'.224m'E\v'-.224m'\h'-.125m'X
PROG=eqn
-MAN1=eqn.n
+MAN1=eqn.1
XLIBS=$(LIBGROFF)
OBJS=eqn.o main.o lex.o box.o limit.o list.o over.o text.o script.o \
mark.o other.o delim.o sqrt.o pile.o special.o
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.ie \n(.V<\n(.v .ds tx T\h'-.1667m'\v'.224m'E\v'-.224m'\h'-.125m'X
+.el .ds tx TeX
+.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
+.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
+.de Tp
+.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
+.el .TP "\\$1"
+..
+.\" The BSD man macros can't handle " in arguments to font change macros,
+.\" so use \(ts instead of ".
+.tr \(ts"
+.TH @G@EQN @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+@g@eqn \- format equations for troff
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B @g@eqn
+[
+.B \-rvCNR
+]
+[
+.BI \-d cc
+]
+[
+.BI \-T name
+]
+[
+.BI \-M dir
+]
+[
+.BI \-f F
+]
+[
+.BI \-s n
+]
+[
+.BI \-p n
+]
+[
+.BI \-m n
+]
+[
+.IR files \|.\|.\|.
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page describes the GNU version of
+.BR eqn ,
+which is part of the groff document formatting system.
+.B eqn
+compiles descriptions of equations embedded within
+.B troff
+input files into commands that are understood by
+.BR troff .
+Normally, it should be invoked using the
+.B \-e
+option of
+.BR groff .
+The syntax is quite compatible with Unix eqn.
+The output of GNU eqn cannot be processed with Unix troff;
+it must be processed with GNU troff.
+If no files are given on the command line, the standard input
+will be read.
+A filename of
+.B \-
+will cause the standard input to be read.
+.LP
+.B eqn
+searches for the file
+.B eqnrc
+using the path
+.BR @MACROPATH@ .
+If it exists, eqn will process it before the other input files.
+The
+.B \-R
+option prevents this.
+.LP
+GNU eqn does not provide the functionality of neqn:
+it does not support low-resolution, typewriter-like devices
+(although it may work adequately for very simple input).
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.B \-C
+Recognize
+.B .EQ
+and
+.B .EN
+even when followed by a character other than space or newline.
+.TP
+.B \-N
+Don't allow newlines within delimiters.
+This option allows
+.B eqn
+to recover better from missing closing delimiters.
+.TP
+.B \-v
+Print the version number.
+.TP
+.B \-r
+Only one size reduction.
+.TP
+.BI \-m n
+The minimum point-size is
+.IR n .
+eqn will not reduce the size of subscripts or superscripts to
+a smaller size than
+.IR n .
+.TP
+.BI \-T name
+The output is for device
+.IR name .
+The only effect of this is to define a macro
+.I name
+with a value of
+.BR 1 .
+Typically
+.B eqnrc
+will use this to provide definitions appropriate for the output device.
+The default output device is
+.BR @DEVICE@ .
+.TP
+.BI \-M dir
+Search
+.I dir
+for
+.B eqnrc
+before the default directories.
+.TP
+.B \-R
+Don't load
+.BR eqnrc .
+.TP
+.BI \-f F
+This is equivalent to a
+.BI gfont\ F
+command.
+.TP
+.BI \-s n
+This is equivalent to a
+.BI gsize\ n
+command.
+This option is deprecated.
+eqn will normally set equations at whatever the current point size
+is when the equation is encountered.
+.TP
+.BI \-p n
+This says that subscripts and superscripts should be
+.I n
+points smaller than the surrounding text.
+This option is deprecated.
+Normally eqn makes sets subscripts and superscripts at 70%
+of the size of the surrounding text.
+.SH USAGE
+Only the differences between GNU eqn and Unix eqn are described here.
+.LP
+Most of the new features of GNU eqn
+are based on \*(tx.
+There are some references to the differences between \*(tx and GNU eqn below;
+these may safely be ignored if you do not know \*(tx.
+.SS Automatic spacing
+.LP
+.B eqn
+gives each component of an equation a type, and adjusts the spacing
+between components using that type.
+Possible types are:
+.TP \w'punctuation'u+2n
+ordinary
+an ordinary character such as 1 or
+.IR x ;
+.TP
+operator
+a large operator such as
+.ds Su \s+5\(*S\s0
+.if \n(.g .if !c\(*S .ds Su the summation operator
+\*(Su;
+.TP
+binary
+a binary operator such as +;
+.TP
+relation
+a relation such as =;
+.TP
+opening
+a opening bracket such as (;
+.TP
+closing
+a closing bracket such as );
+.TP
+punctuation
+a punctuation character such as ,;
+.TP
+inner
+a subformula contained within brackets;
+.TP
+suppress
+spacing that suppresses automatic spacing adjustment.
+.LP
+Components of an equation get a type in one of two ways.
+.TP
+.BI type\ t\ e
+This yields an equation component that contains
+.I e
+but that has type
+.IR t ,
+where
+.I t
+is one of the types mentioned above.
+For example,
+.B times
+is defined as
+.RS
+.IP
+.B
+type "binary" \e(mu
+.RE
+.IP
+The name of the type doesn't have to be quoted, but quoting protects
+from macro expansion.
+.TP
+.BI chartype\ t\ text
+Unquoted groups of characters are split up into individual characters,
+and the type of each character is looked up;
+this changes the type that is stored for each character;
+it says that the characters in
+.I text
+from now on have type
+.IR t .
+For example,
+.RS
+.IP
+.B
+chartype "punctuation" .,;:
+.RE
+.IP
+would make the characters
+.B .,;:
+have type punctuation
+whenever they subsequently appeared in an equation.
+The type
+.I t
+can also be
+.B letter
+or
+.BR digit ;
+in these cases
+.B chartype
+changes the font type of the characters.
+See the Fonts subsection.
+.SS New primitives
+.TP
+.IB e1\ smallover\ e2
+This is similar to
+.BR over ;
+.B smallover
+reduces the size of
+.I e1
+and
+.IR e2 ;
+it also puts less vertical space between
+.I e1
+or
+.I e2
+and the fraction bar.
+The
+.B over
+primitive corresponds to the \*(tx
+.B \eover
+primitive in display styles;
+.B smallover
+corresponds to
+.B \eover
+in non-display styles.
+.TP
+.BI vcenter\ e
+This vertically centers
+.I e
+about the math axis.
+The math axis is the vertical position about which characters
+such as + and - are centered; also it is the vertical position
+used for the bar of fractions.
+For example,
+.B sum
+is defined as
+.RS
+.IP
+.B
+{ type "operator" vcenter size +5 \e(*S }
+.RE
+.TP
+.IB e1\ accent\ e2
+This sets
+.I e2
+as an accent over
+.IR e1 .
+.I e2
+is assumed to be at the correct height for a lowercase letter;
+.I e2
+will be moved down according if
+.I e1
+is taller or shorter than a lowercase letter.
+For example,
+.B hat
+is defined as
+.RS
+.IP
+.B
+accent { "^" }
+.RE
+.IP
+.BR dotdot ,
+.BR dot ,
+.BR tilde ,
+.B vec
+and
+.B dyad
+are also defined using the
+.B accent
+primitive.
+.TP
+.IB e1\ uaccent\ e2
+This sets
+.I e2
+as an accent under
+.IR e1 .
+.I e2
+is assumed to be at the correct height for a character without a descender;
+.I e2
+will be moved down if
+.I e1
+has a descender.
+.B utilde
+is pre-defined using
+.B uaccent
+as a tilde accent below the baseline.
+.TP
+.BI split\ \(ts text \(ts
+This has the same effect as simply
+.RS
+.IP
+.I text
+.RE
+.IP
+but
+.I text
+is not subject to macro expansion because it is quoted;
+.I text
+will be split up and the spacing between individual characters
+will be adjusted.
+.TP
+.BI nosplit\ text
+This has the same effect as
+.RS
+.IP
+.BI \(ts text \(ts
+.RE
+.IP
+but because
+.I text
+is not quoted it will be subject to macro expansion;
+.I text
+will not be split up
+and the spacing between individual characters will not be adjusted.
+.TP
+.IB e\ opprime
+This is a variant of
+.B prime
+that acts as an operator on
+.IR e .
+It produces a different result from
+.B prime
+in a case such as
+.BR A\ opprime\ sub\ 1 :
+with
+.B opprime
+the
+.B 1
+will be tucked under the prime as a subscript to the
+.B A
+(as is conventional in mathematical typesetting),
+whereas with
+.B prime
+the
+.B 1
+will be a subscript to the prime character.
+The precedence of
+.B opprime
+is the same as that of
+.B bar
+and
+.BR under ,
+which is higher than that of everything except
+.B accent
+and
+.BR uaccent .
+In unquoted text a
+.B '
+that is not the first character will be treated like
+.BR opprime .
+.TP
+.BI special\ text\ e
+This constructs a new object from
+.I e
+using a
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@)
+macro named
+.IR text .
+When the macro is called,
+the string
+.B 0s
+will contain the output for
+.IR e ,
+and the number registers
+.BR 0w ,
+.BR 0h ,
+.BR 0d ,
+.BR 0skern
+and
+.BR 0skew
+will contain the width, height, depth, subscript kern, and skew of
+.IR e .
+(The
+.I "subscript kern"
+of an object says how much a subscript on that object should be tucked in;
+the
+.I skew
+of an object says how far to the right of the center of the object an
+accent over the object should be placed.)
+The macro must modify
+.B 0s
+so that it will output the desired result with its origin at the current
+point, and increase the current horizontal position by the width
+of the object.
+The number registers must also be modified so that they correspond to the
+result.
+.RS
+.LP
+For example, suppose you wanted a construct that `cancels' an expression
+by drawing a diagonal line through it.
+.IP
+.nf
+.ft B
+.ne 6+\n(.Vu
+\&.EQ
+define cancel 'special Ca'
+\&.EN
+\&.de Ca
+\&.ds 0s \eZ'\e\e*(0s'\ev'\e\en(0du'\eD'l \e\en(0wu -\e\en(0hu-\e\en(0du'\ev'\e\en(0hu'
+\&..
+.ft
+.fi
+.LP
+Then you could cancel an expression
+.I e
+with
+.BI cancel\ {\ e\ }
+.LP
+Here's a more complicated construct that draws a box round an expression:
+.IP
+.nf
+.ft B
+.ne 11+\n(.Vu
+\&.EQ
+define box 'special Bx'
+\&.EN
+\&.de Bx
+\&.ds 0s \eZ'\eh'1n'\e\e*(0s'\e
+\eZ'\ev'\e\en(0du+1n'\eD'l \e\en(0wu+2n 0'\eD'l 0 -\e\en(0hu-\e\en(0du-2n'\e
+\eD'l -\e\en(0wu-2n 0'\eD'l 0 \e\en(0hu+\e\en(0du+2n''\eh'\e\en(0wu+2n'
+\&.nr 0w +2n
+\&.nr 0d +1n
+\&.nr 0h +1n
+\&..
+.ft
+.fi
+.RE
+.SS Customization
+The appearance of equations is controlled by
+a large number of parameters. These can be set using
+the
+.B set
+command.
+.TP
+.BI set\ p\ n
+This sets parameter
+.I p
+to value
+.I n ;
+.I n
+is an integer.
+For example,
+.RS
+.IP
+.B
+set x_height 45
+.RE
+.IP
+says that
+.B eqn
+should assume an x height of 0.45 ems.
+.RS
+.LP
+Possible parameters are as follows.
+Values are in units of hundredths of an em unless otherwise stated.
+These descriptions are intended to be expository rather than
+definitive.
+.TP \w'\fBdefault_rule_thickness'u+2n
+.B minimum_size
+.B eqn
+will not set anything at a smaller point-size than this.
+The value is in points.
+.TP
+.B fat_offset
+The
+.B fat
+primitive emboldens an equation
+by overprinting two copies of the equation
+horizontally offset by this amount.
+.TP
+.B over_hang
+A fraction bar will be longer by twice this amount than
+the maximum of the widths of the numerator and denominator;
+in other words, it will overhang the numerator and
+denominator by at least this amount.
+.TP
+.B accent_width
+When
+.B bar
+or
+.B under
+is applied to a single character,
+the line will be this long.
+Normally,
+.B bar
+or
+.B under
+produces a line whose length is the width of the object to which it applies;
+in the case of a single character,
+this tends to produce a line that looks too long.
+.TP
+.B delimiter_factor
+Extensible delimiters produced with the
+.B left
+and
+.B right
+primitives will have a combined height and depth of at least this many
+thousandths of twice the maximum amount by which the sub-equation that
+the delimiters enclose extends away from the axis.
+.TP
+.B delimiter_shortfall
+Extensible delimiters produced with the
+.B left
+and
+.B right
+primitives will have a combined height and depth
+not less than the difference of
+twice the maximum amount by which the sub-equation that
+the delimiters enclose extends away from the axis
+and this amount.
+.TP
+.B null_delimiter_space
+This much horizontal space is inserted
+on each side of a fraction.
+.TP
+.B script_space
+The width of subscripts and superscripts is increased by this amount.
+.TP
+.B thin_space
+This amount of space is automatically inserted after punctuation
+characters.
+.TP
+.B medium_space
+This amount of space is automatically inserted on either side
+of binary operators.
+.TP
+.B thick_space
+This amount of space is automatically inserted on either side of
+relations.
+.TP
+.B x_height
+The height of lowercase letters without ascenders such as x.
+.TP
+.B axis_height
+The height above the baseline of the center of characters
+such as \(pl and \(mi.
+It is important that this value is correct for the font
+you are using.
+.TP
+.B default_rule_thickness
+This should set to the thickness of the
+.B \e(ru
+character, or the thickness of horizontal lines produced with the
+.B \eD
+escape sequence.
+.TP
+.B num1
+The
+.B over
+command will shift up the numerator by at least this amount.
+.TP
+.B num2
+The
+.B smallover
+command will shift up the numerator by at least this amount.
+.TP
+.B denom1
+The
+.B over
+command will shift down the denominator by at least this amount.
+.TP
+.B denom2
+The
+.B smallover
+command will shift down the denominator by at least this amount.
+.TP
+.B sup1
+Normally superscripts will be shifted up by at least this amount.
+.TP
+.B sup2
+Superscripts within superscripts or upper limits
+or numerators of
+.B smallover
+fractions
+will be shifted up by at least this amount.
+This is usually less than sup1.
+.TP
+.B sup3
+Superscripts within denominators or square roots
+or subscripts or lower limits will be shifted up by at least
+this amount.
+This is usually less than sup2.
+.TP
+.B sub1
+Subscripts will normally be shifted down by at least this amount.
+.TP
+.B sub2
+When there is both a subscript and a superscript, the subscript
+will be shifted down by at least this amount.
+.TP
+.B sup_drop
+The baseline of a superscript will be no more
+than this much amount below the top of the object on
+which the superscript is set.
+.TP
+.B sub_drop
+The baseline of a subscript will be at least this much below
+the bottom of the object on which the subscript is set.
+.TP
+.B big_op_spacing1
+The baseline of an upper limit will be at least this
+much above the top of the object on which the limit is set.
+.TP
+.B big_op_spacing2
+The baseline of a lower limit will be at least this
+much below the bottom of the object on which the limit is set.
+.TP
+.B big_op_spacing3
+The bottom of an upper limit will be at least this much above the
+top of the object on which the limit is set.
+.TP
+.B big_op_spacing4
+The top of a lower limit will be at least this much below
+the bottom of the object on which the limit is set.
+.TP
+.B big_op_spacing5
+This much vertical space will be added above and below limits.
+.TP
+.B baseline_sep
+The baselines of the rows in a pile or matrix will normally be
+this far apart.
+In most cases this should be equal to the sum of
+.B num1
+and
+.BR denom1 .
+.TP
+.B shift_down
+The midpoint between the top baseline and the bottom baseline
+in a matrix or pile will be shifted down by this much from the axis.
+In most cases this should be equal to
+.BR axis_height .
+.TP
+.B column_sep
+This much space will be added between columns in a matrix.
+.TP
+.B matrix_side_sep
+This much space will be added at each side of a matrix.
+.TP
+.B draw_lines
+If this is non-zero, lines will be drawn using the
+.B \eD
+escape sequence, rather than with the
+.B \el
+escape sequence and the
+.B \e(ru
+character.
+.TP
+.B body_height
+The amount by which the height of the equation exceeds this
+will be added as extra space before the line containing the equation
+(using
+.BR \ex .)
+The default value is 85.
+.TP
+.B body_depth
+The amount by which the depth of the equation exceeds this
+will be added as extra space after the line containing the equation
+(using
+.BR \ex .)
+The default value is 35.
+.TP
+.B nroff
+If this is non-zero,
+then
+.B ndefine
+will behave like
+.B define
+and
+.B tdefine
+will be ignored,
+otherwise
+.B tdefine
+will behave like
+.B define
+and
+.B ndefine
+will be ignored.
+The default value is 0
+(This is typically changed to 1 by the
+.B eqnrc
+file for the
+.B ascii
+and
+.B latin1
+devices.)
+.LP
+A more precise description of the role of many of these
+parameters can be found in Appendix H of
+.IR The\ \*(txbook .
+.RE
+.SS Macros
+Macros can take arguments.
+In a macro body,
+.BI $ n
+where
+.I n
+is between 1 and 9,
+will be replaced by the
+.IR n-th
+argument if the macro is called with arguments;
+if there are fewer than
+.I n
+arguments, it will be replaced by nothing.
+A word containing a left parenthesis where the part of the word
+before the left parenthesis has been defined using the
+.B define
+command
+will be recognized as a macro call with arguments;
+characters following the left parenthesis
+up to a matching right parenthesis will be treated as comma-separated
+arguments;
+commas inside nested parentheses do not terminate an argument.
+.TP
+.BI sdefine\ name\ X\ anything\ X
+This is like the
+.B define
+command, but
+.I name
+will not be recognized if called with arguments.
+.TP
+.BI include\ \(ts file \(ts
+Include the contents of
+.IR file .
+Lines of
+.I file
+beginning with
+.B .EQ
+or
+.B .EN
+will be ignored.
+.TP
+.BI ifdef\ name\ X\ anything\ X
+If
+.I name
+has been defined by
+.B define
+(or has been automatically defined because
+.I name
+is the output device)
+process
+.IR anything ;
+otherwise ignore
+.IR anything .
+.I X
+can be any character not appearing in
+.IR anything .
+.SS Fonts
+.B eqn
+normally uses at least two fonts to set an equation:
+an italic font for letters,
+and a roman font for everything else.
+The existing
+.B gfont
+command
+changes the font that is used as the italic font.
+By default this is
+.BR I .
+The font that is used as the roman font can be changed
+using the new
+.B grfont
+command.
+.TP
+.BI grfont\ f
+Set the roman font to
+.IR f .
+.LP
+The
+.B italic
+primitive uses the current italic font set by
+.BR gfont ;
+the
+.B roman
+primitive uses the current roman font set by
+.BR grfont .
+There is also a new
+.B gbfont
+command, which changes the font used by the
+.B bold
+primitive.
+If you only use the
+.BR roman ,
+.B italic
+and
+.B bold
+primitives to changes fonts within an equation,
+you can change all the fonts used by your equations
+just by using
+.BR gfont ,
+.B grfont
+and
+.B gbfont
+commands.
+.LP
+You can control which characters are treated as letters
+(and therefore set in italics) by using the
+.B chartype
+command described above.
+A type of
+.B letter
+will cause a character to be set in italic type.
+A type of
+.B digit
+will cause a character to be set in roman type.
+.SH FILES
+.Tp \w'\fB@MACRODIR@/eqnrc'u+2n
+.B @MACRODIR@/eqnrc
+Initialization file.
+.SH BUGS
+Inline equations will be set at the point size that is current at the
+beginning of the input line.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@),
+.I The\ \*(txbook
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.ie \n(.V<\n(.v .ds tx T\h'-.1667m'\v'.224m'E\v'-.224m'\h'-.125m'X
-.el .ds tx TeX
-.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
-.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
-.de Tp
-.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
-.el .TP "\\$1"
-..
-.\" The BSD man macros can't handle " in arguments to font change macros,
-.\" so use \(ts instead of ".
-.tr \(ts"
-.TH @G@EQN @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-@g@eqn \- format equations for troff
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B @g@eqn
-[
-.B \-rvCNR
-]
-[
-.BI \-d cc
-]
-[
-.BI \-T name
-]
-[
-.BI \-M dir
-]
-[
-.BI \-f F
-]
-[
-.BI \-s n
-]
-[
-.BI \-p n
-]
-[
-.BI \-m n
-]
-[
-.IR files \|.\|.\|.
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page describes the GNU version of
-.BR eqn ,
-which is part of the groff document formatting system.
-.B eqn
-compiles descriptions of equations embedded within
-.B troff
-input files into commands that are understood by
-.BR troff .
-Normally, it should be invoked using the
-.B \-e
-option of
-.BR groff .
-The syntax is quite compatible with Unix eqn.
-The output of GNU eqn cannot be processed with Unix troff;
-it must be processed with GNU troff.
-If no files are given on the command line, the standard input
-will be read.
-A filename of
-.B \-
-will cause the standard input to be read.
-.LP
-.B eqn
-searches for the file
-.B eqnrc
-using the path
-.BR @MACROPATH@ .
-If it exists, eqn will process it before the other input files.
-The
-.B \-R
-option prevents this.
-.LP
-GNU eqn does not provide the functionality of neqn:
-it does not support low-resolution, typewriter-like devices
-(although it may work adequately for very simple input).
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-C
-Recognize
-.B .EQ
-and
-.B .EN
-even when followed by a character other than space or newline.
-.TP
-.B \-N
-Don't allow newlines within delimiters.
-This option allows
-.B eqn
-to recover better from missing closing delimiters.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print the version number.
-.TP
-.B \-r
-Only one size reduction.
-.TP
-.BI \-m n
-The minimum point-size is
-.IR n .
-eqn will not reduce the size of subscripts or superscripts to
-a smaller size than
-.IR n .
-.TP
-.BI \-T name
-The output is for device
-.IR name .
-The only effect of this is to define a macro
-.I name
-with a value of
-.BR 1 .
-Typically
-.B eqnrc
-will use this to provide definitions appropriate for the output device.
-The default output device is
-.BR @DEVICE@ .
-.TP
-.BI \-M dir
-Search
-.I dir
-for
-.B eqnrc
-before the default directories.
-.TP
-.B \-R
-Don't load
-.BR eqnrc .
-.TP
-.BI \-f F
-This is equivalent to a
-.BI gfont\ F
-command.
-.TP
-.BI \-s n
-This is equivalent to a
-.BI gsize\ n
-command.
-This option is deprecated.
-eqn will normally set equations at whatever the current point size
-is when the equation is encountered.
-.TP
-.BI \-p n
-This says that subscripts and superscripts should be
-.I n
-points smaller than the surrounding text.
-This option is deprecated.
-Normally eqn makes sets subscripts and superscripts at 70%
-of the size of the surrounding text.
-.SH USAGE
-Only the differences between GNU eqn and Unix eqn are described here.
-.LP
-Most of the new features of GNU eqn
-are based on \*(tx.
-There are some references to the differences between \*(tx and GNU eqn below;
-these may safely be ignored if you do not know \*(tx.
-.SS Automatic spacing
-.LP
-.B eqn
-gives each component of an equation a type, and adjusts the spacing
-between components using that type.
-Possible types are:
-.TP \w'punctuation'u+2n
-ordinary
-an ordinary character such as 1 or
-.IR x ;
-.TP
-operator
-a large operator such as
-.ds Su \s+5\(*S\s0
-.if \n(.g .if !c\(*S .ds Su the summation operator
-\*(Su;
-.TP
-binary
-a binary operator such as +;
-.TP
-relation
-a relation such as =;
-.TP
-opening
-a opening bracket such as (;
-.TP
-closing
-a closing bracket such as );
-.TP
-punctuation
-a punctuation character such as ,;
-.TP
-inner
-a subformula contained within brackets;
-.TP
-suppress
-spacing that suppresses automatic spacing adjustment.
-.LP
-Components of an equation get a type in one of two ways.
-.TP
-.BI type\ t\ e
-This yields an equation component that contains
-.I e
-but that has type
-.IR t ,
-where
-.I t
-is one of the types mentioned above.
-For example,
-.B times
-is defined as
-.RS
-.IP
-.B
-type "binary" \e(mu
-.RE
-.IP
-The name of the type doesn't have to be quoted, but quoting protects
-from macro expansion.
-.TP
-.BI chartype\ t\ text
-Unquoted groups of characters are split up into individual characters,
-and the type of each character is looked up;
-this changes the type that is stored for each character;
-it says that the characters in
-.I text
-from now on have type
-.IR t .
-For example,
-.RS
-.IP
-.B
-chartype "punctuation" .,;:
-.RE
-.IP
-would make the characters
-.B .,;:
-have type punctuation
-whenever they subsequently appeared in an equation.
-The type
-.I t
-can also be
-.B letter
-or
-.BR digit ;
-in these cases
-.B chartype
-changes the font type of the characters.
-See the Fonts subsection.
-.SS New primitives
-.TP
-.IB e1\ smallover\ e2
-This is similar to
-.BR over ;
-.B smallover
-reduces the size of
-.I e1
-and
-.IR e2 ;
-it also puts less vertical space between
-.I e1
-or
-.I e2
-and the fraction bar.
-The
-.B over
-primitive corresponds to the \*(tx
-.B \eover
-primitive in display styles;
-.B smallover
-corresponds to
-.B \eover
-in non-display styles.
-.TP
-.BI vcenter\ e
-This vertically centers
-.I e
-about the math axis.
-The math axis is the vertical position about which characters
-such as + and - are centered; also it is the vertical position
-used for the bar of fractions.
-For example,
-.B sum
-is defined as
-.RS
-.IP
-.B
-{ type "operator" vcenter size +5 \e(*S }
-.RE
-.TP
-.IB e1\ accent\ e2
-This sets
-.I e2
-as an accent over
-.IR e1 .
-.I e2
-is assumed to be at the correct height for a lowercase letter;
-.I e2
-will be moved down according if
-.I e1
-is taller or shorter than a lowercase letter.
-For example,
-.B hat
-is defined as
-.RS
-.IP
-.B
-accent { "^" }
-.RE
-.IP
-.BR dotdot ,
-.BR dot ,
-.BR tilde ,
-.B vec
-and
-.B dyad
-are also defined using the
-.B accent
-primitive.
-.TP
-.IB e1\ uaccent\ e2
-This sets
-.I e2
-as an accent under
-.IR e1 .
-.I e2
-is assumed to be at the correct height for a character without a descender;
-.I e2
-will be moved down if
-.I e1
-has a descender.
-.B utilde
-is pre-defined using
-.B uaccent
-as a tilde accent below the baseline.
-.TP
-.BI split\ \(ts text \(ts
-This has the same effect as simply
-.RS
-.IP
-.I text
-.RE
-.IP
-but
-.I text
-is not subject to macro expansion because it is quoted;
-.I text
-will be split up and the spacing between individual characters
-will be adjusted.
-.TP
-.BI nosplit\ text
-This has the same effect as
-.RS
-.IP
-.BI \(ts text \(ts
-.RE
-.IP
-but because
-.I text
-is not quoted it will be subject to macro expansion;
-.I text
-will not be split up
-and the spacing between individual characters will not be adjusted.
-.TP
-.IB e\ opprime
-This is a variant of
-.B prime
-that acts as an operator on
-.IR e .
-It produces a different result from
-.B prime
-in a case such as
-.BR A\ opprime\ sub\ 1 :
-with
-.B opprime
-the
-.B 1
-will be tucked under the prime as a subscript to the
-.B A
-(as is conventional in mathematical typesetting),
-whereas with
-.B prime
-the
-.B 1
-will be a subscript to the prime character.
-The precedence of
-.B opprime
-is the same as that of
-.B bar
-and
-.BR under ,
-which is higher than that of everything except
-.B accent
-and
-.BR uaccent .
-In unquoted text a
-.B '
-that is not the first character will be treated like
-.BR opprime .
-.TP
-.BI special\ text\ e
-This constructs a new object from
-.I e
-using a
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@)
-macro named
-.IR text .
-When the macro is called,
-the string
-.B 0s
-will contain the output for
-.IR e ,
-and the number registers
-.BR 0w ,
-.BR 0h ,
-.BR 0d ,
-.BR 0skern
-and
-.BR 0skew
-will contain the width, height, depth, subscript kern, and skew of
-.IR e .
-(The
-.I "subscript kern"
-of an object says how much a subscript on that object should be tucked in;
-the
-.I skew
-of an object says how far to the right of the center of the object an
-accent over the object should be placed.)
-The macro must modify
-.B 0s
-so that it will output the desired result with its origin at the current
-point, and increase the current horizontal position by the width
-of the object.
-The number registers must also be modified so that they correspond to the
-result.
-.RS
-.LP
-For example, suppose you wanted a construct that `cancels' an expression
-by drawing a diagonal line through it.
-.IP
-.nf
-.ft B
-.ne 6+\n(.Vu
-\&.EQ
-define cancel 'special Ca'
-\&.EN
-\&.de Ca
-\&.ds 0s \eZ'\e\e*(0s'\ev'\e\en(0du'\eD'l \e\en(0wu -\e\en(0hu-\e\en(0du'\ev'\e\en(0hu'
-\&..
-.ft
-.fi
-.LP
-Then you could cancel an expression
-.I e
-with
-.BI cancel\ {\ e\ }
-.LP
-Here's a more complicated construct that draws a box round an expression:
-.IP
-.nf
-.ft B
-.ne 11+\n(.Vu
-\&.EQ
-define box 'special Bx'
-\&.EN
-\&.de Bx
-\&.ds 0s \eZ'\eh'1n'\e\e*(0s'\e
-\eZ'\ev'\e\en(0du+1n'\eD'l \e\en(0wu+2n 0'\eD'l 0 -\e\en(0hu-\e\en(0du-2n'\e
-\eD'l -\e\en(0wu-2n 0'\eD'l 0 \e\en(0hu+\e\en(0du+2n''\eh'\e\en(0wu+2n'
-\&.nr 0w +2n
-\&.nr 0d +1n
-\&.nr 0h +1n
-\&..
-.ft
-.fi
-.RE
-.SS Customization
-The appearance of equations is controlled by
-a large number of parameters. These can be set using
-the
-.B set
-command.
-.TP
-.BI set\ p\ n
-This sets parameter
-.I p
-to value
-.I n ;
-.I n
-is an integer.
-For example,
-.RS
-.IP
-.B
-set x_height 45
-.RE
-.IP
-says that
-.B eqn
-should assume an x height of 0.45 ems.
-.RS
-.LP
-Possible parameters are as follows.
-Values are in units of hundredths of an em unless otherwise stated.
-These descriptions are intended to be expository rather than
-definitive.
-.TP \w'\fBdefault_rule_thickness'u+2n
-.B minimum_size
-.B eqn
-will not set anything at a smaller point-size than this.
-The value is in points.
-.TP
-.B fat_offset
-The
-.B fat
-primitive emboldens an equation
-by overprinting two copies of the equation
-horizontally offset by this amount.
-.TP
-.B over_hang
-A fraction bar will be longer by twice this amount than
-the maximum of the widths of the numerator and denominator;
-in other words, it will overhang the numerator and
-denominator by at least this amount.
-.TP
-.B accent_width
-When
-.B bar
-or
-.B under
-is applied to a single character,
-the line will be this long.
-Normally,
-.B bar
-or
-.B under
-produces a line whose length is the width of the object to which it applies;
-in the case of a single character,
-this tends to produce a line that looks too long.
-.TP
-.B delimiter_factor
-Extensible delimiters produced with the
-.B left
-and
-.B right
-primitives will have a combined height and depth of at least this many
-thousandths of twice the maximum amount by which the sub-equation that
-the delimiters enclose extends away from the axis.
-.TP
-.B delimiter_shortfall
-Extensible delimiters produced with the
-.B left
-and
-.B right
-primitives will have a combined height and depth
-not less than the difference of
-twice the maximum amount by which the sub-equation that
-the delimiters enclose extends away from the axis
-and this amount.
-.TP
-.B null_delimiter_space
-This much horizontal space is inserted
-on each side of a fraction.
-.TP
-.B script_space
-The width of subscripts and superscripts is increased by this amount.
-.TP
-.B thin_space
-This amount of space is automatically inserted after punctuation
-characters.
-.TP
-.B medium_space
-This amount of space is automatically inserted on either side
-of binary operators.
-.TP
-.B thick_space
-This amount of space is automatically inserted on either side of
-relations.
-.TP
-.B x_height
-The height of lowercase letters without ascenders such as x.
-.TP
-.B axis_height
-The height above the baseline of the center of characters
-such as \(pl and \(mi.
-It is important that this value is correct for the font
-you are using.
-.TP
-.B default_rule_thickness
-This should set to the thickness of the
-.B \e(ru
-character, or the thickness of horizontal lines produced with the
-.B \eD
-escape sequence.
-.TP
-.B num1
-The
-.B over
-command will shift up the numerator by at least this amount.
-.TP
-.B num2
-The
-.B smallover
-command will shift up the numerator by at least this amount.
-.TP
-.B denom1
-The
-.B over
-command will shift down the denominator by at least this amount.
-.TP
-.B denom2
-The
-.B smallover
-command will shift down the denominator by at least this amount.
-.TP
-.B sup1
-Normally superscripts will be shifted up by at least this amount.
-.TP
-.B sup2
-Superscripts within superscripts or upper limits
-or numerators of
-.B smallover
-fractions
-will be shifted up by at least this amount.
-This is usually less than sup1.
-.TP
-.B sup3
-Superscripts within denominators or square roots
-or subscripts or lower limits will be shifted up by at least
-this amount.
-This is usually less than sup2.
-.TP
-.B sub1
-Subscripts will normally be shifted down by at least this amount.
-.TP
-.B sub2
-When there is both a subscript and a superscript, the subscript
-will be shifted down by at least this amount.
-.TP
-.B sup_drop
-The baseline of a superscript will be no more
-than this much amount below the top of the object on
-which the superscript is set.
-.TP
-.B sub_drop
-The baseline of a subscript will be at least this much below
-the bottom of the object on which the subscript is set.
-.TP
-.B big_op_spacing1
-The baseline of an upper limit will be at least this
-much above the top of the object on which the limit is set.
-.TP
-.B big_op_spacing2
-The baseline of a lower limit will be at least this
-much below the bottom of the object on which the limit is set.
-.TP
-.B big_op_spacing3
-The bottom of an upper limit will be at least this much above the
-top of the object on which the limit is set.
-.TP
-.B big_op_spacing4
-The top of a lower limit will be at least this much below
-the bottom of the object on which the limit is set.
-.TP
-.B big_op_spacing5
-This much vertical space will be added above and below limits.
-.TP
-.B baseline_sep
-The baselines of the rows in a pile or matrix will normally be
-this far apart.
-In most cases this should be equal to the sum of
-.B num1
-and
-.BR denom1 .
-.TP
-.B shift_down
-The midpoint between the top baseline and the bottom baseline
-in a matrix or pile will be shifted down by this much from the axis.
-In most cases this should be equal to
-.BR axis_height .
-.TP
-.B column_sep
-This much space will be added between columns in a matrix.
-.TP
-.B matrix_side_sep
-This much space will be added at each side of a matrix.
-.TP
-.B draw_lines
-If this is non-zero, lines will be drawn using the
-.B \eD
-escape sequence, rather than with the
-.B \el
-escape sequence and the
-.B \e(ru
-character.
-.TP
-.B body_height
-The amount by which the height of the equation exceeds this
-will be added as extra space before the line containing the equation
-(using
-.BR \ex .)
-The default value is 85.
-.TP
-.B body_depth
-The amount by which the depth of the equation exceeds this
-will be added as extra space after the line containing the equation
-(using
-.BR \ex .)
-The default value is 35.
-.TP
-.B nroff
-If this is non-zero,
-then
-.B ndefine
-will behave like
-.B define
-and
-.B tdefine
-will be ignored,
-otherwise
-.B tdefine
-will behave like
-.B define
-and
-.B ndefine
-will be ignored.
-The default value is 0
-(This is typically changed to 1 by the
-.B eqnrc
-file for the
-.B ascii
-and
-.B latin1
-devices.)
-.LP
-A more precise description of the role of many of these
-parameters can be found in Appendix H of
-.IR The\ \*(txbook .
-.RE
-.SS Macros
-Macros can take arguments.
-In a macro body,
-.BI $ n
-where
-.I n
-is between 1 and 9,
-will be replaced by the
-.IR n-th
-argument if the macro is called with arguments;
-if there are fewer than
-.I n
-arguments, it will be replaced by nothing.
-A word containing a left parenthesis where the part of the word
-before the left parenthesis has been defined using the
-.B define
-command
-will be recognized as a macro call with arguments;
-characters following the left parenthesis
-up to a matching right parenthesis will be treated as comma-separated
-arguments;
-commas inside nested parentheses do not terminate an argument.
-.TP
-.BI sdefine\ name\ X\ anything\ X
-This is like the
-.B define
-command, but
-.I name
-will not be recognized if called with arguments.
-.TP
-.BI include\ \(ts file \(ts
-Include the contents of
-.IR file .
-Lines of
-.I file
-beginning with
-.B .EQ
-or
-.B .EN
-will be ignored.
-.TP
-.BI ifdef\ name\ X\ anything\ X
-If
-.I name
-has been defined by
-.B define
-(or has been automatically defined because
-.I name
-is the output device)
-process
-.IR anything ;
-otherwise ignore
-.IR anything .
-.I X
-can be any character not appearing in
-.IR anything .
-.SS Fonts
-.B eqn
-normally uses at least two fonts to set an equation:
-an italic font for letters,
-and a roman font for everything else.
-The existing
-.B gfont
-command
-changes the font that is used as the italic font.
-By default this is
-.BR I .
-The font that is used as the roman font can be changed
-using the new
-.B grfont
-command.
-.TP
-.BI grfont\ f
-Set the roman font to
-.IR f .
-.LP
-The
-.B italic
-primitive uses the current italic font set by
-.BR gfont ;
-the
-.B roman
-primitive uses the current roman font set by
-.BR grfont .
-There is also a new
-.B gbfont
-command, which changes the font used by the
-.B bold
-primitive.
-If you only use the
-.BR roman ,
-.B italic
-and
-.B bold
-primitives to changes fonts within an equation,
-you can change all the fonts used by your equations
-just by using
-.BR gfont ,
-.B grfont
-and
-.B gbfont
-commands.
-.LP
-You can control which characters are treated as letters
-(and therefore set in italics) by using the
-.B chartype
-command described above.
-A type of
-.B letter
-will cause a character to be set in italic type.
-A type of
-.B digit
-will cause a character to be set in roman type.
-.SH FILES
-.Tp \w'\fB@MACRODIR@/eqnrc'u+2n
-.B @MACRODIR@/eqnrc
-Initialization file.
-.SH BUGS
-Inline equations will be set at the point size that is current at the
-beginning of the input line.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@),
-.I The\ \*(txbook
PROG=grodvi
-MAN1=grodvi.n
+MAN1=grodvi.1
XLIBS=$(LIBDRIVER) $(LIBGROFF)
MLIB=$(LIBM)
OBJS=dvi.o
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.ie t .ds tx T\h'-.1667m'\v'.224m'E\v'-.224m'\h'-.125m'X
+.el .ds tx TeX
+.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
+.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
+.de Tp
+.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
+.el .TP "\\$1"
+..
+.TH GRODVI @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+grodvi \- convert groff output to TeX dvi format
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B grodvi
+[
+.B \-dv
+] [
+.BI \-w n
+] [
+.BI \-F dir
+] [
+.IR files \|.\|.\|.
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B grodvi
+is a driver for
+.B groff
+that produces \*(tx dvi format.
+Normally it should be run by
+.BR groff\ \-Tdvi .
+This will run
+.BR @g@troff\ \-Tdvi ;
+it will also input the macros
+.BR @MACRODIR@/tmac.dvi ;
+if the input is being preprocessed with
+.B @g@eqn
+it will also input
+.BR @FONTDIR@/devdvi/eqnchar .
+.LP
+The dvi file generated by
+.B grodvi
+can be printed by any correctly-written dvi driver.
+The troff drawing primitives are implemented
+using the tpic version 2 specials.
+If the driver does not support these, the
+.B \eD
+commands will not produce any output.
+.LP
+There is an additional drawing command available:
+.TP
+.BI \eD'R\ dh\ dv '
+Draw a rule (solid black rectangle), with one corner
+at the current position, and the diagonally opposite corner
+at the current position
+.RI +( dh , dv ).
+Afterwards the current position will be at the opposite corner. This
+produces a rule in the dvi file and so can be printed even with a
+driver that does not support the tpic specials unlike the other
+.B \eD
+commands.
+.LP
+The groff command
+.BI \eX' anything '
+is translated into the same command in the dvi file as would be
+produced by
+.BI \especial{ anything }
+in \*(tx;
+.I anything may not contain a newline.
+.LP
+Font files for
+.B grodvi
+can be created from tfm files using
+.BR tfmtodit (@MAN1EXT@).
+The font description file should contain the following
+additional commands:
+.Tp \w'\fBinternalname'u+2n
+.BI internalname\ name
+The name of the tfm file (without the
+.B .tfm
+extension) is
+.IR name .
+.TP
+.BI checksum\ n
+The checksum in the tfm file is
+.IR n .
+.TP
+.BI designsize\ n
+The designsize in the tfm file is
+.IR n .
+.LP
+These are automatically generated by
+.B tfmtodit.
+.LP
+In
+.B troff
+the
+.B \eN
+escape sequence can be used to access characters by their position
+in the corresponding tfm file;
+all characters in the tfm file can be accessed this way.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.B \-d
+Do not use tpic specials to implement drawing commands.
+Horizontal and vertical lines will be implemented by rules.
+Other drawing commands will be ignored.
+.TP
+.B \-v
+Print the version number.
+.TP
+.BI \-w n
+Set the default line thickness to
+.I n
+thousandths of an em.
+.TP
+.BI \-F dir
+Search directory
+.IB dir /devdvi
+for font and device description files.
+.SH FILES
+.TP
+.B @FONTDIR@/devdvi/DESC
+Device description file.
+.TP
+.B @FONTDIR@/devdvi/ F
+Font description file for font
+.IR F .
+.TP
+.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.dvi
+Macros for use with
+.BR grodvi .
+.SH BUGS
+Dvi files produced by
+.B grodvi
+use a different resolution (57816 units per inch) to those produced by
+\*(tx.
+Incorrectly written drivers which assume the resolution used by \*(tx,
+rather than using the resolution specified in the dvi file will not
+work with grodvi.
+.LP
+When using the
+.B \-d
+option with boxed tables,
+vertical and horizontal lines can sometimes protrude by one pixel.
+This is a consequence of the way \*(tx requires that the heights
+and widths of rules be rounded.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR tfmtodit (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@eqn (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR groff_out (@MAN5EXT@),
+.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@),
+.BR groff_char (@MAN7EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.ie t .ds tx T\h'-.1667m'\v'.224m'E\v'-.224m'\h'-.125m'X
-.el .ds tx TeX
-.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
-.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
-.de Tp
-.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
-.el .TP "\\$1"
-..
-.TH GRODVI @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-grodvi \- convert groff output to TeX dvi format
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B grodvi
-[
-.B \-dv
-] [
-.BI \-w n
-] [
-.BI \-F dir
-] [
-.IR files \|.\|.\|.
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B grodvi
-is a driver for
-.B groff
-that produces \*(tx dvi format.
-Normally it should be run by
-.BR groff\ \-Tdvi .
-This will run
-.BR @g@troff\ \-Tdvi ;
-it will also input the macros
-.BR @MACRODIR@/tmac.dvi ;
-if the input is being preprocessed with
-.B @g@eqn
-it will also input
-.BR @FONTDIR@/devdvi/eqnchar .
-.LP
-The dvi file generated by
-.B grodvi
-can be printed by any correctly-written dvi driver.
-The troff drawing primitives are implemented
-using the tpic version 2 specials.
-If the driver does not support these, the
-.B \eD
-commands will not produce any output.
-.LP
-There is an additional drawing command available:
-.TP
-.BI \eD'R\ dh\ dv '
-Draw a rule (solid black rectangle), with one corner
-at the current position, and the diagonally opposite corner
-at the current position
-.RI +( dh , dv ).
-Afterwards the current position will be at the opposite corner. This
-produces a rule in the dvi file and so can be printed even with a
-driver that does not support the tpic specials unlike the other
-.B \eD
-commands.
-.LP
-The groff command
-.BI \eX' anything '
-is translated into the same command in the dvi file as would be
-produced by
-.BI \especial{ anything }
-in \*(tx;
-.I anything may not contain a newline.
-.LP
-Font files for
-.B grodvi
-can be created from tfm files using
-.BR tfmtodit (@MAN1EXT@).
-The font description file should contain the following
-additional commands:
-.Tp \w'\fBinternalname'u+2n
-.BI internalname\ name
-The name of the tfm file (without the
-.B .tfm
-extension) is
-.IR name .
-.TP
-.BI checksum\ n
-The checksum in the tfm file is
-.IR n .
-.TP
-.BI designsize\ n
-The designsize in the tfm file is
-.IR n .
-.LP
-These are automatically generated by
-.B tfmtodit.
-.LP
-In
-.B troff
-the
-.B \eN
-escape sequence can be used to access characters by their position
-in the corresponding tfm file;
-all characters in the tfm file can be accessed this way.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-d
-Do not use tpic specials to implement drawing commands.
-Horizontal and vertical lines will be implemented by rules.
-Other drawing commands will be ignored.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print the version number.
-.TP
-.BI \-w n
-Set the default line thickness to
-.I n
-thousandths of an em.
-.TP
-.BI \-F dir
-Search directory
-.IB dir /devdvi
-for font and device description files.
-.SH FILES
-.TP
-.B @FONTDIR@/devdvi/DESC
-Device description file.
-.TP
-.B @FONTDIR@/devdvi/ F
-Font description file for font
-.IR F .
-.TP
-.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.dvi
-Macros for use with
-.BR grodvi .
-.SH BUGS
-Dvi files produced by
-.B grodvi
-use a different resolution (57816 units per inch) to those produced by
-\*(tx.
-Incorrectly written drivers which assume the resolution used by \*(tx,
-rather than using the resolution specified in the dvi file will not
-work with grodvi.
-.LP
-When using the
-.B \-d
-option with boxed tables,
-vertical and horizontal lines can sometimes protrude by one pixel.
-This is a consequence of the way \*(tx requires that the heights
-and widths of rules be rounded.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR tfmtodit (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@eqn (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR groff_out (@MAN5EXT@),
-.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@),
-.BR groff_char (@MAN7EXT@)
PROG=groff
-MAN1=groff.n
+MAN1=groff.1
XLIBS=$(LIBGROFF)
MLIB=$(LIBM)
OBJS=groff.o pipeline.o
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.de TQ
+.br
+.ns
+.TP \\$1
+..
+.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
+.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
+.de Tp
+.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
+.el .TP "\\$1"
+..
+.TH GROFF @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+groff \- front end for the groff document formatting system
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B groff
+[
+.B \-abehilpstvzCENRSUVXZ
+]
+[
+.BI \-w name
+]
+[
+.BI \-W name
+]
+[
+.BI \-m name
+]
+[
+.BI \-F dir
+]
+[
+.BI \-I dir
+]
+[
+.BI \-T dev
+]
+[
+.BI \-f fam
+]
+[
+.BI \-M dir
+]
+[
+.BI \-d cs
+]
+[
+.BI \-r cn
+]
+[
+.BI \-n num
+]
+[
+.BI \-o list
+]
+[
+.BI \-P arg
+]
+[
+.BI \-L arg
+]
+[
+.IR files \|.\|.\|.\|
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B groff
+is a front-end to the groff document formatting system.
+Normally it runs the
+.B @g@troff
+program and a postprocessor appropriate for the selected
+device.
+Available devices are:
+.TP
+.B ps
+For PostScript printers and previewers
+.TP
+.B dvi
+For TeX dvi format.
+.TP
+.B X75
+For a 75 dpi X11 previewer.
+.TP
+.B X100
+For a 100dpi X11 previewer.
+.TP
+.B ascii
+For typewriter-like devices.
+.TP
+.B latin1
+For typewriter-like devices using the ISO Latin-1 character set.
+.TP
+.B lj4
+For an HP LaserJet4-compatible (or other PCL5-compatible) printer.
+.TP
+.B html
+To produce HTML output.
+.LP
+The postprocessor to be used for a device is specified by the
+.B postpro
+command in the device description file.
+This can be overridden with the
+.B \-X
+option.
+.LP
+The default device is
+.BR @DEVICE@ .
+It can optionally preprocess with any of
+.BR @g@pic ,
+.BR @g@eqn ,
+.BR @g@tbl ,
+.BR @g@refer ,
+or
+.B @g@soelim.
+.LP
+Options without an argument can be grouped behind a single
+.BR \- .
+A filename of
+.B \-
+denotes the standard input.
+.LP
+The
+.B grog
+command can be used to guess the correct groff command to use to
+format a file.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.B \-h
+Print a help message.
+.TP
+.B \-e
+Preprocess with @g@eqn.
+.TP
+.B \-t
+Preprocess with @g@tbl.
+.TP
+.B \-p
+Preprocess with @g@pic.
+.TP
+.B \-s
+Preprocess with @g@soelim.
+.TP
+.BI \-I dir
+This option is as described in
+.BR @g@soelim (@MAN1EXT@) .
+This option implies the
+.B \-s
+option.
+.TP
+.B \-R
+Preprocess with @g@refer.
+No mechanism is provided for passing arguments to
+.B @g@refer
+because most @g@refer options have equivalent commands
+which can be included in the file.
+See
+.BR @g@refer (@MAN1EXT@)
+for more details.
+.TP
+.B \-v
+Make programs run by
+.B groff
+print out their version number.
+.TP
+.B \-V
+Print the pipeline on stdout instead of executing it.
+.TP
+.B \-z
+Suppress output from
+.BR @g@troff .
+Only error messages will be printed.
+.TP
+.B \-Z
+Do not postprocess the output of
+.BR @g@troff .
+Normally
+.B groff
+will automatically run the appropriate postprocessor.
+.TP
+.BI \-P arg
+Pass
+.I arg
+to the postprocessor.
+Each argument should be passed with a separate
+.B \-P
+option.
+Note that
+.B groff
+does not prepend
+.B \-
+to
+.I arg
+before passing it to the postprocessor.
+.TP
+.B \-l
+Send the output to a printer.
+The command used for this is specified by the
+.B print
+command in the device description file.
+.TP
+.BI \-L arg
+Pass
+.I arg
+to the spooler.
+Each argument should be passed with a separate
+.B \-L
+option.
+Note that
+.B groff
+does not prepend
+.B \-
+to
+.I arg
+before passing it to the postprocessor.
+.TP
+.BI \-T dev
+Prepare output for device
+.IR dev .
+The default device is
+.BR @DEVICE@ .
+.TP
+.B \-X
+Preview with
+.B gxditview
+instead of using the usual postprocessor.
+.B Groff
+passes
+.B gxditview
+a
+.B -printCommand
+option which will make the
+.B Print
+action do what
+.B groff
+would have done if the
+.B -l
+option had been given.
+This is unlikely to produce good results except with
+.BR \-Tps .
+.TP
+.B \-N
+Don't allow newlines with eqn delimiters.
+This is the same as the
+.B \-N
+option in
+.BR @g@eqn .
+.TP
+.B \-S
+Safer mode. Pass the
+.B \-S
+option to
+.B @g@pic
+and use the
+.B \%\-msafer
+macros with
+.BR @g@troff .
+(enabled by default)
+.TP
+.B \-U
+Unsafe mode. Reverts to the old unsafe behaviour.
+.TP
+.B \-a
+.TQ
+.B \-b
+.TQ
+.B \-i
+.TQ
+.B \-C
+.TQ
+.B \-E
+.TQ
+.BI \-w name
+.TQ
+.BI \-W name
+.TQ
+.BI \-m name
+.TQ
+.BI \-o list
+.TQ
+.BI \-d cs
+.TQ
+.BI \-r cn
+.TQ
+.BI \-F dir
+.TQ
+.BI \-M dir
+.TQ
+.BI \-f fam
+.TQ
+.BI \-n num
+These are as described in
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@) .
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+.TP
+.SM
+.B GROFF_COMMAND_PREFIX
+If this is set
+.IR X ,
+then
+.B groff
+will run
+.IB X troff
+instead of
+.BR @g@troff .
+This also applies to
+.BR tbl ,
+.BR pic ,
+.BR eqn ,
+.BR refer ,
+and
+.BR soelim .
+It does not apply to
+.BR grops ,
+.BR grodvi ,
+.BR grotty ,
+.BR grolj4 ,
+.BR grohtml ,
+and
+.BR gxditview .
+.TP
+.SM
+.B GROFF_TMAC_PATH
+A colon separated list of directories in which to search for
+macro files.
+.TP
+.SM
+.B GROFF_TYPESETTER
+Default device.
+.TP
+.SM
+.B GROFF_FONT_PATH
+A colon separated list of directories in which to search for the
+.BI dev name
+directory.
+.TP
+.SM
+.B PATH
+The search path for commands executed by
+.BR groff .
+.TP
+.SM
+.B GROFF_TMPDIR
+The directory in which temporary files will be created.
+If this is not set and
+.B
+.SM TMPDIR
+is set, temporary files will be created in that directory.
+Otherwise temporary files will be created in
+.BR /tmp .
+The
+.BR grops (@MAN1EXT@)
+and
+.BR @g@refer (@MAN1EXT@)
+commands can create temporary files.
+.SH FILES
+.Tp \w'\fB@FONTDIR@/dev\fIname\fB/DESC'u+3n
+.BI @FONTDIR@/dev name /DESC
+Device description file for device
+.IR name .
+.TP
+.BI @FONTDIR@/dev name / F
+Font file for font
+.I F
+of device
+.IR name .
+.SH AUTHOR
+James Clark <jjc@jclark.com>
+.SH BUGS
+Report bugs to bug-groff@gnu.org.
+Include a complete, self-contained example
+that will allow the bug to be reproduced,
+and say which version of groff you are using.
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+Copyright \(co 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+.LP
+groff is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
+the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
+Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later
+version.
+.LP
+groff is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
+WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
+FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
+for more details.
+.LP
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
+with groff; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software
+Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+.SH AVAILABILITY
+The most recent released version of groff is always available for
+anonymous ftp from ftp.gnu.org in the directory gnu/groff.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR grog (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@tbl (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@pic (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@eqn (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@soelim (@MAN1EXT@) ,
+.BR @g@refer (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR grops (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR grodvi (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR grotty (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR grohtml (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR gxditview (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR deroff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@),
+.BR groff_out (@MAN5EXT@),
+.BR groff_man (@MAN7EXT@),
+.BR groff_ms (@MAN7EXT@),
+.BR groff_me (@MAN7EXT@),
+.BR groff_char (@MAN7EXT@),
+.BR groff_msafer (@MAN7EXT@)
int zflag = 0;
int iflag = 0;
int Xflag = 0;
+ int safer_flag = 1;
int opt;
const char *command_prefix = getenv("GROFF_COMMAND_PREFIX");
if (!command_prefix)
command_prefix = PROG_PREFIX;
commands[TROFF_INDEX].set_name(command_prefix, "troff");
while ((opt = getopt(argc, argv,
- "itpeRsSzavVhblCENXZF:m:T:f:w:W:M:d:r:n:o:P:L:"))
+ "abCd:eEf:F:hiI:lL:m:M:n:No:pP:r:RsStT:UvVw:W:XzZ"))
!= EOF) {
char buf[3];
buf[0] = '-';
case 'i':
iflag = 1;
break;
+ case 'I':
+ commands[SOELIM_INDEX].set_name(command_prefix, "soelim");
+ commands[SOELIM_INDEX].append_arg(buf, optarg);
+ break;
case 't':
commands[TBL_INDEX].set_name(command_prefix, "tbl");
break;
commands[TROFF_INDEX].append_arg(buf);
break;
case 'S':
- commands[PIC_INDEX].append_arg(buf);
- commands[TROFF_INDEX].insert_arg("-msafer");
+ safer_flag = 1;
+ break;
+ case 'U':
+ safer_flag = 0;
break;
case 'T':
if (strcmp(optarg, "Xps") == 0) {
break;
}
}
+ if (safer_flag) {
+ commands[PIC_INDEX].append_arg("-S");
+ commands[TROFF_INDEX].insert_arg("-msafer");
+ } else {
+ commands[TROFF_INDEX].insert_arg("-U");
+ }
font::set_unknown_desc_command_handler(handle_unknown_desc_command);
if (!font::load_desc())
fatal("invalid device `%1'", device);
void synopsis()
{
fprintf(stderr,
-"usage: %s [-abehilpstvzCENRSVXZ] [-Fdir] [-mname] [-Tdev] [-ffam] [-wname]\n"
-" [-Wname] [ -Mdir] [-dcs] [-rcn] [-nnum] [-olist] [-Parg] [-Larg]\n"
+"usage: %s [-abehilpstvzCENRSUVXZ] [-Fdir] [-mname] [-Tdev] [-ffam] [-wname]\n"
+" [-Wname] [-Mdir] [-dcs] [-rcn] [-nnum] [-olist] [-Parg] [-Larg]\n"
" [files...]\n",
program_name);
}
"-Parg\tpass arg to the postprocessor\n"
"-Larg\tpass arg to the spooler\n"
"-N\tdon't allow newlines within eqn delimiters\n"
-"-S\tenable safer mode\n"
+"-S\tenable safer mode (the default)\n"
+"-U\tenable unsafe mode\n"
"\n",
stderr);
exit(0);
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.de TQ
-.br
-.ns
-.TP \\$1
-..
-.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
-.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
-.de Tp
-.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
-.el .TP "\\$1"
-..
-.TH GROFF @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-groff \- front end for the groff document formatting system
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B groff
-[
-.B \-tpeszaivhblCENRSVXZ
-]
-[
-.BI \-w name
-]
-[
-.BI \-W name
-]
-[
-.BI \-m name
-]
-[
-.BI \-F dir
-]
-[
-.BI \-T dev
-]
-[
-.BI \-f fam
-]
-[
-.BI \-M dir
-]
-[
-.BI \-d cs
-]
-[
-.BI \-r cn
-]
-[
-.BI \-n num
-]
-[
-.BI \-o list
-]
-[
-.BI \-P arg
-]
-[
-.IR files \|.\|.\|.\|
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B groff
-is a front-end to the groff document formatting system.
-Normally it runs the
-.B @g@troff
-program and a postprocessor appropriate for the selected
-device.
-Available devices are:
-.TP
-.B ps
-For PostScript printers and previewers
-.TP
-.B dvi
-For TeX dvi format
-.TP
-.B X75
-For a 75 dpi X11 previewer
-.TP
-.B X100
-For a 100dpi X11 previewer
-.TP
-.B ascii
-For typewriter-like devices
-.TP
-.B latin1
-For typewriter-like devices using the ISO Latin-1 character set.
-.TP
-.B lj4
-For an HP LaserJet4-compatible (or other PCL5-compatible) printer.
-.LP
-The postprocessor to be used for a device is specified by the
-.B postpro
-command in the device description file.
-This can be overridden with the
-.B \-X
-option.
-.LP
-The default device is
-.BR @DEVICE@ .
-It can optionally preprocess with any of
-.BR @g@pic ,
-.BR @g@eqn ,
-.BR @g@tbl ,
-.BR @g@refer ,
-or
-.B @g@soelim.
-.LP
-Options without an argument can be grouped behind a single
-.BR \- .
-A filename of
-.B \-
-denotes the standard input.
-.LP
-The
-.B grog
-command can be used to guess the correct groff command to use to
-format a file.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-h
-Print a help message.
-.TP
-.B \-e
-Preprocess with @g@eqn.
-.TP
-.B \-t
-Preprocess with @g@tbl.
-.TP
-.B \-p
-Preprocess with @g@pic.
-.TP
-.B \-s
-Preprocess with @g@soelim.
-.TP
-.B \-R
-Preprocess with @g@refer.
-No mechanism is provided for passing arguments to
-.B @g@refer
-because most @g@refer options have equivalent commands
-which can be included in the file.
-See
-.BR @g@refer (@MAN1EXT@)
-for more details.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Make programs run by
-.B groff
-print out their version number.
-.TP
-.B \-V
-Print the pipeline on stdout instead of executing it.
-.TP
-.B \-z
-Suppress output from
-.BR @g@troff .
-Only error messages will be printed.
-.TP
-.B \-Z
-Do not postprocess the output of
-.BR @g@troff .
-Normally
-.B groff
-will automatically run the appropriate postprocessor.
-.TP
-.BI \-P arg
-Pass
-.I arg
-to the postprocessor.
-Each argument should be passed with a separate
-.B \-P
-option.
-Note that
-.B groff
-does not prepend
-.B \-
-to
-.I arg
-before passing it to the postprocessor.
-.TP
-.B \-l
-Send the output to a printer.
-The command used for this is specified by the
-.B print
-command in the device description file.
-.TP
-.BI \-L arg
-Pass
-.I arg
-to the spooler.
-Each argument should be passed with a separate
-.B \-L
-option.
-Note that
-.B groff
-does not prepend
-.B \-
-to
-.I arg
-before passing it to the postprocessor.
-.TP
-.BI \-T dev
-Prepare output for device
-.IR dev .
-The default device is
-.BR @DEVICE@ .
-.TP
-.B \-X
-Preview with
-.B gxditview
-instead of using the usual postprocessor.
-.B Groff
-passes
-.B gxditview
-a
-.B -printCommand
-option which will make the
-.B Print
-action do what
-.B groff
-would have done if the
-.B -l
-option had been given.
-This is unlikely to produce good results except with
-.BR \-Tps .
-.TP
-.B \-N
-Don't allow newlines with eqn delimiters.
-This is the same as the
-.B \-N
-option in
-.BR @g@eqn .
-.TP
-.B \-S
-Safer mode. Pass the
-.B \-S
-option to
-.B @g@pic
-and use the
-.B \%\-msafer
-macros with
-.BR @g@troff .
-.TP
-.B \-a
-.TQ
-.B \-b
-.TQ
-.B \-i
-.TQ
-.B \-C
-.TQ
-.B \-E
-.TQ
-.BI \-w name
-.TQ
-.BI \-W name
-.TQ
-.BI \-m name
-.TQ
-.BI \-o list
-.TQ
-.BI \-d cs
-.TQ
-.BI \-r cn
-.TQ
-.BI \-F dir
-.TQ
-.BI \-M dir
-.TQ
-.BI \-f fam
-.TQ
-.BI \-n num
-These are as described in
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@) .
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-.TP
-.SM
-.B GROFF_COMMAND_PREFIX
-If this is set
-.IR X ,
-then
-.B groff
-will run
-.IB X troff
-instead of
-.BR @g@troff .
-This also applies to
-.BR tbl ,
-.BR pic ,
-.BR eqn ,
-.B refer
-and
-.BR soelim .
-It does not apply to
-.BR grops ,
-.BR grodvi ,
-.BR grotty
-and
-.BR gxditview .
-.TP
-.SM
-.B GROFF_TMAC_PATH
-A colon separated list of directories in which to search for
-macro files.
-.TP
-.SM
-.B GROFF_TYPESETTER
-Default device.
-.TP
-.SM
-.B GROFF_FONT_PATH
-A colon separated list of directories in which to search for the
-.BI dev name
-directory.
-.TP
-.SM
-.B PATH
-The search path for commands executed by
-.BR groff .
-.TP
-.SM
-.B GROFF_TMPDIR
-The directory in which temporary files will be created.
-If this is not set and
-.B
-.SM TMPDIR
-is set, temporary files will be created in that directory.
-Otherwise temporary files will be created in
-.BR /tmp .
-The
-.BR grops (@MAN1EXT@)
-and
-.BR @g@refer (@MAN1EXT@)
-commands can create temporary files.
-.SH FILES
-.Tp \w'\fB@FONTDIR@/dev\fIname\fB/DESC'u+3n
-.BI @FONTDIR@/dev name /DESC
-Device description file for device
-.IR name .
-.TP
-.BI @FONTDIR@/dev name / F
-Font file for font
-.I F
-of device
-.IR name .
-.SH AUTHOR
-James Clark <jjc@jclark.com>
-.SH BUGS
-Report bugs to bug-groff@prep.ai.mit.edu.
-Include a complete, self-contained example
-that will allow the bug to be reproduced,
-and say which version of groff you are using.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.LP
-groff is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
-the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
-Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later
-version.
-.LP
-groff is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
-WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
-FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
-for more details.
-.LP
-You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
-with groff; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software
-Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
-.SH AVAILABILITY
-The most recent released version of groff is always available for
-anonymous ftp from prep.ai.mit.edu (18.71.0.38) in the directory
-pub/gnu.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR grog (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@tbl (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@pic (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@eqn (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@soelim (@MAN1EXT@) ,
-.BR @g@refer (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR grops (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR grodvi (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR grotty (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR gxditview (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR deroff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@),
-.BR groff_out (@MAN5EXT@),
-.BR groff_ms (@MAN7EXT@),
-.BR me (@MAN7EXT@),
-.BR groff_char (@MAN7EXT@),
-.BR msafer (@MAN7EXT@)
-MAN1=grog.n
+MAN1=grog.1
CLEANADD=grog
all: grog
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.TH GROG @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+grog \- guess options for groff command
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B grog
+[
+.BI \- option
+\|.\|.\|.
+]
+[
+.IR files \|.\|.\|.
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B grog
+reads
+.I files
+and guesses which of the
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@)
+options
+.BR \-e ,
+.BR \-man ,
+.BR \-me ,
+.BR \-mm ,
+.BR \-ms ,
+.BR \-p ,
+.BR \-s ,
+and
+.BR \-t
+are required for printing
+.IR files ,
+and prints the groff command including those options on the standard output.
+A filename of
+.B \-
+is taken to refer to the standard input.
+If no files are specified the standard input will be read.
+Any specified options will be included in the printed command.
+No space is allowed between options and their arguments.
+For example,
+.IP
+.B `grog \-Tdvi paper.ms`
+.LP
+will guess the appropriate command to print
+.B paper.ms
+and then run it after adding the
+.B \-Tdvi
+option.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR doctype (1),
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@tbl (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@pic (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@eqn (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@soelim (@MAN1EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.TH GROG @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-grog \- guess options for groff command
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B grog
-[
-.BI \- option
-\|.\|.\|.
-]
-[
-.IR files \|.\|.\|.
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B grog
-reads
-.I files
-and guesses which of the
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@)
-options
-.BR \-e ,
-.BR \-man ,
-.BR \-me ,
-.BR \-mm ,
-.BR \-ms ,
-.BR \-p ,
-.BR \-s ,
-and
-.BR \-t
-are required for printing
-.IR files ,
-and prints the groff command including those options on the standard output.
-A filename of
-.B \-
-is taken to refer to the standard input.
-If no files are specified the standard input will be read.
-Any specified options will be included in the printed command.
-No space is allowed between options and their arguments.
-For example,
-.IP
-.B `grog \-Tdvi paper.ms`
-.LP
-will guess the appropriate command to print
-.B paper.ms
-and then run it after adding the
-.B \-Tdvi
-option.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR doctype (1),
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@tbl (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@pic (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@eqn (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@soelim (@MAN1EXT@)
PROG=grohtml
-MAN1=grohtml.n
+MAN1=grohtml.1
XLIBS=$(LIBDRIVER) $(LIBGROFF)
MLIB=$(LIBM)
OBJS=html.o
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
+manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
+preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
+.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
+.de Tp
+.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
+.el .TP "\\$1"
+..
+.TH GROHTML @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+grohtml \- html driver for groff
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B grohtml
+[
+.B \-atvdgm?
+] [
+.BI \-F dir
+] [
+.BI \-I imagetype
+] [
+.BI \-r resolution
+] [
+.IR files \|.\|.\|.
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B grohtml
+translates the output of GNU
+.B troff
+to html.
+Normally
+.B grohtml
+should be invoked by using the groff command with a
+.B \-Thtml
+option.
+If no files are given,
+.B grohtml
+will read the standard input.
+A filename of
+.B \-
+will also cause
+.B grohtml
+to read the standard input.
+Html output is written to the standard output.
+When
+.B grohtml
+is run by
+.B groff
+options can be passed to
+.B grohtml
+using the
+.B groff
+.B \-P
+option.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.B \-a
+force
+.B grohtml
+to generate html line breaks in the same position as troff dictates.
+Without this option
+.B grohtml
+generates text in paragraphs which is formatted by the html browser.
+.TP
+.B \-d
+turn on internal debugging.
+.TP
+.B \-g
+tell
+.B grohtml
+not to try and guess titles and headings.
+By using this flag together with the -m and -a flag
+.B grohtml
+will treat the html browser as a printer, not as a formatter.
+.TP
+.B \-m
+leave margins alone.
+.B grohtml
+will not remove left margins.
+.TP
+.B \-t
+forbids
+.B grohtml
+from generating html tables when implementing indentation and tabular text.
+.B grohtml
+can implement .IP by tables or html indents.
+However if .2C is used it can only be sensibly converted to html using a
+table structure.
+As a few known bugs still exist with the html table code this option is
+present to supress execution of this development code.
+The default in
+.B grohtml
+is that html tables are generated when appropriate.
+.TP
+.BI \-F dir
+Search the directory
+.IB dir /dev name
+for font and device description files;
+.I name
+is the name of the device, usually
+.BR html .
+.TP
+.BI \-I imagetype
+select the type of image generated when grohtml encounters an equation,
+table, or picture.
+By default this is png256.
+Legal image types are: gif and any of the png formats which are supported by
+ghostscript gs(1).
+.TP
+.BI \-r resolution
+select the resolution for all images.
+By default this is 80 pixels per inch.
+Example: -r100 indicates 100 pixels per inch.
+.TP
+.B \-v
+Print the version number.
+.TP
+.B \-?
+Display usage.
+.SH USAGE
+There are styles called
+.BR R ,
+.BR I ,
+.BR B ,
+and
+.B BI
+mounted at font positions 1 to 4.
+It is advisable to invoke groff with the -mhtml macro set, which turns off
+headers, footers, and hyphenation; additionally, it will right justify text.
+.SH DEPENDENCIES
+.B grohtml
+is dependent upon grops and gs.
+If
+.B grohtml
+has been configured to generate gif files then it is further dependent upon,
+ppmtogif, and ppmquant.
+However if it has been configured to generate png files (the default) then
+it is dependent upon gs having a png output device.
+Images are generated whenever a table, picture, equation or line is
+encountered.
+.SH BUGS
+This is still very alpha.
+At least three major bugs remain:
+Firstly,
+.B grohtml
+sometimes miscalculates the end of an html table resulting in text which
+appears twice.
+Secondly equation numbers are not handled correctly.
+Thirdly equation macros and pic macros can confuse
+.BR grohtml .
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR afmtodit (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR psbb (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR groff_out (@MAN5EXT@),
+.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@),
+.BR groff_char (@MAN7EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
-.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
-.de Tp
-.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
-.el .TP "\\$1"
-..
-.TH GROHTML @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-grohtml \- html driver for groff
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B grohtml
-[
-.B \-atvdgm?
-] [
-.BI \-F dir
-] [
-.BI \-I imagetype
-] [
-.BI \-r resolution
-] [
-.IR files \|.\|.\|.
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B grohtml
-translates the output of GNU
-.B troff
-to html.
-Normally
-.B grohtml
-should be invoked by using the groff command with a
-.B \-Thtml
-option.
-If no files are given,
-.B grohtml
-will read the standard input.
-A filename of
-.B \-
-will also cause
-.B grohtml
-to read the standard input.
-Html output is written to the standard output.
-When
-.B grohtml
-is run by
-.B groff
-options can be passed to
-.B grohtml
-using the
-.B groff
-.B \-P
-option.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-a
-force
-.B grohtml
-to generate html line breaks in the same position as troff dictates.
-Without this option
-.B grohtml
-generates text in paragraphs which is formatted by the html browser.
-.TP
-.B \-d
-turn on internal debugging.
-.TP
-.B \-g
-tell
-.B grohtml
-not to try and guess titles and headings.
-By using this flag together with the -m and -a flag
-.B grohtml
-will treat the html browser as a printer, not as a formatter.
-.TP
-.B \-m
-leave margins alone.
-.B grohtml
-will not remove left margins.
-.TP
-.B \-t
-forbids
-.B grohtml
-from generating html tables when implementing indentation and tabular text.
-.B grohtml
-can implement .IP by tables or html indents.
-However if .2C is used it can only be sensibly converted to html using a
-table structure.
-As a few known bugs still exist with the html table code this option is
-present to supress execution of this development code.
-The default in
-.B grohtml
-is that html tables are generated when appropriate.
-.TP
-.BI \-F dir
-Search the directory
-.IB dir /dev name
-for font and device description files;
-.I name
-is the name of the device, usually
-.BR html .
-.TP
-.BI \-I imagetype
-select the type of image generated when grohtml encounters an equation,
-table, or picture.
-By default this is png256.
-Legal image types are: gif and any of the png formats which are supported by
-ghostscript gs(1).
-.TP
-.BI \-r resolution
-select the resolution for all images.
-By default this is 80 pixels per inch.
-Example: -r100 indicates 100 pixels per inch.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print the version number.
-.TP
-.B \-?
-Display usage.
-.SH USAGE
-There are styles called
-.BR R ,
-.BR I ,
-.BR B ,
-and
-.B BI
-mounted at font positions 1 to 4.
-It is advisable to invoke groff with the -mhtml macro set, which turns off
-headers, footers, and hyphenation; additionally, it will right justify text.
-.SH DEPENDENCIES
-.B grohtml
-is dependent upon grops and gs.
-If
-.B grohtml
-has been configured to generate gif files then it is further dependent upon,
-ppmtogif, and ppmquant.
-However if it has been configured to generate png files (the default) then
-it is dependent upon gs having a png output device.
-Images are generated whenever a table, picture, equation or line is
-encountered.
-.SH BUGS
-This is still very alpha.
-At least three major bugs remain:
-Firstly,
-.B grohtml
-sometimes miscalculates the end of an html table resulting in text which
-appears twice.
-Secondly equation numbers are not handled correctly.
-Thirdly equation macros and pic macros can confuse
-.BR grohtml .
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR afmtodit (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR psbb (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR groff_out (@MAN5EXT@),
-.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@),
-.BR groff_char (@MAN7EXT@)
PROG=grolj4
-MAN1=grolj4.n
+MAN1=grolj4.1
XLIBS=$(LIBDRIVER) $(LIBGROFF)
MLIB=$(LIBM)
OBJS=lj4.o
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
+.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
+.de Tp
+.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
+.el .TP "\\$1"
+..
+.TH GROLJ4 @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+grolj4 \- groff driver for HP Laserjet 4 family
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B grolj4
+[
+.B \-lv
+] [
+.B \-d
+[\c
+.IR n ]
+] [
+.BI \-c n
+] [
+.BI \-p paper_size
+] [
+.BI \-w n
+] [
+.BI \-F dir
+] [
+.IR files \|.\|.\|.
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B grolj4
+is a driver for
+.B groff
+that produces output in PCL5 format suitable for an HP Laserjet 4 printer.
+.LP
+There is an additional drawing command available:
+.TP
+.BI \eD'R\ dh\ dv '
+Draw a rule (solid black rectangle), with one corner
+at the current position, and the diagonally opposite corner
+at the current position
+.RI +( dh , dv ).
+Afterwards the current position will be at the opposite corner. This
+generates a PCL fill rectangle command, and so will work on
+printers that do not support HPGL/2 unlike the other
+.B \eD
+commands.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.BI \-c n
+Print
+.I n
+copies of each page.
+.TP
+.B \-l
+Print the document with a landscape orientation.
+.TP
+.BI "\-d [" n ]
+Use duplex mode
+.IR n :
+1\ is long-side binding; 2\ is short-side binding;
+default is\ 1.
+.TP
+.BI \-p size
+Set the paper size to
+.IR size ,
+which must be one of
+letter, legal, executive, a4, com10, monarch, c5, b5, dl.
+.TP
+.B \-v
+Print the version number.
+.TP
+.BI \-w n
+Set the default line thickness to
+.I n
+thousandths of an em.
+.TP
+.BI \-F dir
+Search directory
+.IB dir /devlj4
+for font and device description files.
+.SH FILES
+.TP
+.B @FONTDIR@/devlj4/DESC
+Device description file.
+.TP
+.B @FONTDIR@/devlj4/ F
+Font description file for font
+.IR F .
+.TP
+.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.lj4
+Macros for use with
+.BR grolj4 .
+.SH BUGS
+Small dots.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@eqn (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR groff_out (@MAN5EXT@),
+.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@),
+.BR groff_char (@MAN7EXT@),
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
-.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
-.de Tp
-.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
-.el .TP "\\$1"
-..
-.TH GROLJ4 @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-grolj4 \- groff driver for HP Laserjet 4 family
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B grolj4
-[
-.B \-lv
-] [
-.B \-d
-[\c
-.IR n ]
-] [
-.BI \-c n
-] [
-.BI \-p paper_size
-] [
-.BI \-w n
-] [
-.BI \-F dir
-] [
-.IR files \|.\|.\|.
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B grolj4
-is a driver for
-.B groff
-that produces output in PCL5 format suitable for an HP Laserjet 4 printer.
-.LP
-There is an additional drawing command available:
-.TP
-.BI \eD'R\ dh\ dv '
-Draw a rule (solid black rectangle), with one corner
-at the current position, and the diagonally opposite corner
-at the current position
-.RI +( dh , dv ).
-Afterwards the current position will be at the opposite corner. This
-generates a PCL fill rectangle command, and so will work on
-printers that do not support HPGL/2 unlike the other
-.B \eD
-commands.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.BI \-c n
-Print
-.I n
-copies of each page.
-.TP
-.B \-l
-Print the document with a landscape orientation.
-.TP
-.BI "\-d [" n ]
-Use duplex mode
-.IR n :
-1\ is long-side binding; 2\ is short-side binding;
-default is\ 1.
-.TP
-.BI \-p size
-Set the paper size to
-.IR size ,
-which must be one of
-letter, legal, executive, a4, com10, monarch, c5, b5, dl.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print the version number.
-.TP
-.BI \-w n
-Set the default line thickness to
-.I n
-thousandths of an em.
-.TP
-.BI \-F dir
-Search directory
-.IB dir /devlj4
-for font and device description files.
-.SH FILES
-.TP
-.B @FONTDIR@/devlj4/DESC
-Device description file.
-.TP
-.B @FONTDIR@/devlj4/ F
-Font description file for font
-.IR F .
-.TP
-.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.lj4
-Macros for use with
-.BR grolj4 .
-.SH BUGS
-Small dots.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@eqn (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR groff_out (@MAN5EXT@),
-.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@),
-.BR groff_char (@MAN7EXT@),
PROG=grops
-MAN1=grops.n
+MAN1=grops.1
XLIBS=$(LIBDRIVER) $(LIBGROFF)
MLIB=$(LIBM)
OBJS=ps.o psrm.o
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
+.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
+.de Tp
+.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
+.el .TP "\\$1"
+..
+.TH GROPS @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+grops \- PostScript driver for groff
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B grops
+[
+.B \-glmv
+] [
+.BI \-b n
+] [
+.BI \-c n
+] [
+.BI \-w n
+] [
+.BI \-F dir
+] [
+.IR files \|.\|.\|.
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B grops
+translates the output of GNU
+.B troff
+to PostScript.
+Normally
+.B grops
+should be invoked by using the groff command
+with a
+.B \-Tps
+option.
+.if '@DEVICE@'ps' (Actually, this is the default for groff.)
+If no files are given,
+.B grops
+will read the standard input.
+A filename of
+.B \-
+will also cause
+.B grops
+to read the standard input.
+PostScript output is written to the standard output.
+When
+.B grops
+is run by
+.B groff
+options can be passed to
+.B grops
+using the
+.B groff
+.B \-P
+option.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.BI \-b n
+Workaround broken spoolers and previewers.
+Normally
+.B grops
+produces output that conforms
+the Document Structuring Conventions version 3.0.
+Unfortunately some spoolers and previewers can't handle such output.
+The value of
+.I n
+controls what
+.B grops
+does to its output acceptable to such programs.
+A value of 0 will cause grops not to employ any workarounds.
+Add 1 if no
+.B %%BeginDocumentSetup
+and
+.B %%EndDocumentSetup
+comments should be generated;
+this is needed for early versions of TranScript that get confused by
+anything between the
+.B %%EndProlog
+comment and the first
+.B %%Page
+comment.
+Add 2 if lines in included files beginning with
+.B %!
+should be stripped out; this is needed for Sun's pageview previewer.
+Add 4 if
+.BR %%Page ,
+.BR %%Trailer
+and
+.B %%EndProlog
+comments should be
+stripped out of included files; this is needed for spoolers that
+don't understand the
+.B %%BeginDocument
+and
+.B %%EndDocument
+comments.
+Add 8 if the first line of the PostScript output should be
+.B %!PS-Adobe-2.0
+rather than
+.BR %!PS-Adobe-3.0 ;
+this is needed when using Sun's Newsprint with a printer that requires
+page reversal.
+The default value can be specified by a
+.RS
+.IP
+.BI broken\ n
+.LP
+command in the DESC file.
+Otherwise the default value is 0.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BI \-c n
+Print
+.I n
+copies of each page.
+.TP
+.BI \-g
+Guess the page length.
+This generates PostScript code that guesses the page length.
+The guess will be correct only if the imageable area is vertically
+centered on the page.
+This option allows you to generate documents that can be printed
+both on letter (8.5\(mu11) paper and on A4 paper without change.
+.TP
+.B \-l
+Print the document in landscape format.
+.TP
+.B \-m
+Turn manual feed on for the document.
+.TP
+.BI \-F dir
+Search the directory
+.IB dir /dev name
+for font and device description files;
+.I name
+is the name of the device, usually
+.BR ps .
+.TP
+.BI \-w n
+Lines should be drawn using a thickness of
+.I n
+thousandths of an em.
+.TP
+.B \-v
+Print the version number.
+.SH USAGE
+There are styles called
+.BR R ,
+.BR I ,
+.BR B ,
+and
+.B BI
+mounted at font positions 1 to 4.
+The fonts are grouped into families
+.BR A ,
+.BR BM ,
+.BR C ,
+.BR H ,
+.BR HN ,
+.BR N ,
+.B P
+and
+.B T
+having members in each of these styles:
+.de FT
+.if '\\*(.T'ps' .ft \\$1
+..
+.TP
+.B AR
+.FT AR
+AvantGarde-Book
+.FT
+.TP
+.B AI
+.FT AI
+AvantGarde-BookOblique
+.FT
+.TP
+.B AB
+.FT AB
+AvantGarde-Demi
+.FT
+.TP
+.B ABI
+.FT ABI
+AvantGarde-DemiOblique
+.FT
+.TP
+.B BMR
+.FT BMR
+Bookman-Light
+.FT
+.TP
+.B BMI
+.FT BMI
+Bookman-LightItalic
+.FT
+.TP
+.B BMB
+.FT BMB
+Bookman-Demi
+.FT
+.TP
+.B BMBI
+.FT BMBI
+Bookman-DemiItalic
+.FT
+.TP
+.B CR
+.FT CR
+Courier
+.FT
+.TP
+.B CI
+.FT CI
+Courier-Oblique
+.FT
+.TP
+.B CB
+.FT CB
+Courier-Bold
+.FT
+.TP
+.B CBI
+.FT CBI
+Courier-BoldOblique
+.FT
+.TP
+.B HR
+.FT HR
+Helvetica
+.FT
+.TP
+.B HI
+.FT HI
+Helvetica-Oblique
+.FT
+.TP
+.B HB
+.FT HB
+Helvetica-Bold
+.FT
+.TP
+.B HBI
+.FT HBI
+Helvetica-BoldOblique
+.FT
+.TP
+.B HNR
+.FT HNR
+Helvetica-Narrow
+.FT
+.TP
+.B HNI
+.FT HNI
+Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique
+.FT
+.TP
+.B HNB
+.FT HNB
+Helvetica-Narrow-Bold
+.FT
+.TP
+.B HNBI
+.FT HNBI
+Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique
+.FT
+.TP
+.B NR
+.FT NR
+NewCenturySchlbk-Roman
+.FT
+.TP
+.B NI
+.FT NI
+NewCenturySchlbk-Italic
+.FT
+.TP
+.B NB
+.FT NB
+NewCenturySchlbk-Bold
+.FT
+.TP
+.B NBI
+.FT NBI
+NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic
+.FT
+.TP
+.B PR
+.FT PR
+Palatino-Roman
+.FT
+.TP
+.B PI
+.FT PI
+Palatino-Italic
+.FT
+.TP
+.B PB
+.FT PB
+Palatino-Bold
+.FT
+.TP
+.B PBI
+.FT PBI
+Palatino-BoldItalic
+.FT
+.TP
+.B TR
+.FT TR
+Times-Roman
+.FT
+.TP
+.B TI
+.FT TI
+Times-Italic
+.FT
+.TP
+.B TB
+.FT TB
+Times-Bold
+.FT
+.TP
+.B TBI
+.FT TBI
+Times-BoldItalic
+.FT
+.LP
+There is also the following font which is not a member of a family:
+.TP
+.B ZCMI
+.FT ZCMI
+ZapfChancery-MediumItalic
+.FT
+.LP
+There are also some special fonts called
+.B SS
+and
+.BR S .
+Zapf Dingbats is available as
+.BR ZD
+and a reversed version of ZapfDingbats (with symbols pointing in the opposite
+direction) is available as
+.BR ZDR ;
+most characters in these fonts are unnamed and must be accessed using
+.BR \eN .
+.LP
+.B grops
+understands various X commands produced using the
+.B \eX
+escape sequence;
+.B grops
+will only interpret commands that begin with a
+.B ps:
+tag.
+.TP
+.BI \eX'ps:\ exec\ code '
+This executes the arbitrary PostScript commands in
+.IR code .
+The PostScript currentpoint will be set to the position of the
+.B \eX
+command before executing
+.IR code .
+The origin will be at the top left corner of the page,
+and y coordinates will increase down the page.
+A procedure
+.B u
+will be defined that converts groff units
+to the coordinate system in effect.
+For example,
+.RS
+.IP
+.B
+\&.nr x 1i
+.br
+.B
+\eX'ps: exec \enx u 0 rlineto stroke'
+.br
+.RE
+.IP
+will draw a horizontal line one inch long.
+.I code
+may make changes to the graphics state,
+but any changes will persist only to the
+end of the page.
+A dictionary containing the definitions specified by the
+.B def
+and
+.B mdef
+will be on top of the dictionary stack.
+If your code adds definitions to this dictionary,
+you should allocate space for them using
+.BI \eX'ps\ mdef \ n '\fR.
+Any definitions will persist only until the end of the page.
+If you use the
+.B \eY
+escape sequence with an argument that names a macro,
+.I code
+can extend over multiple lines.
+For example,
+.RS
+.IP
+.nf
+.ft B
+\&.nr x 1i
+\&.de y
+\&ps: exec
+\&\enx u 0 rlineto
+\&stroke
+\&..
+\&\eYy
+.fi
+.ft R
+.LP
+is another way to draw a horizontal line one inch long.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BI \eX'ps:\ file\ name '
+This is the same as the
+.B exec
+command except that the PostScript code is read from file
+.IR name .
+.TP
+.BI \eX'ps:\ def\ code '
+Place a PostScript definition contained in
+.I code
+in the prologue.
+There should be at most one definition per
+.B \eX
+command.
+Long definitions can be split over several
+.B \eX
+commands;
+all the
+.I code
+arguments are simply joined together separated by newlines.
+The definitions are placed in a dictionary which is automatically
+pushed on the dictionary stack when an
+.B exec
+command is executed.
+If you use the
+.B \eY
+escape sequence with an argument that names a macro,
+.I code
+can extend over multiple lines.
+.TP
+.BI \eX'ps:\ mdef\ n\ code '
+Like
+.BR def ,
+except that
+.I code
+may contain up to
+.I n
+definitions.
+.B grops
+needs to know how many definitions
+.I code
+contains
+so that it can create an appropriately sized PostScript dictionary
+to contain them.
+.TP
+.BI \eX'ps:\ import\ file\ llx\ lly\ urx\ ury\ width\ \fR[\fP\ height\ \fR]\fP '
+Import a PostScript graphic from
+.IR file .
+The arguments
+.IR llx ,
+.IR lly ,
+.IR urx ,
+and
+.I ury
+give the bounding box of the graphic in the default PostScript
+coordinate system; they should all be integers;
+.I llx
+and
+.I lly
+are the x and y coordinates of the lower left
+corner of the graphic;
+.I urx
+and
+.I ury
+are the x and y coordinates of the upper right corner of the graphic;
+.I width
+and
+.I height
+are integers that give the desired width and height in groff
+units of the graphic.
+The graphic will be scaled so that it has this width and height
+and translated so that the lower left corner of the graphic is
+located at the position associated with
+.B \eX
+command.
+If the height argument is omitted it will be scaled uniformly in the
+x and y directions so that it has the specified width.
+Note that the contents of the
+.B \eX
+command are not interpreted by
+.BR troff ;
+so vertical space for the graphic is not automatically added,
+and the
+.I width
+and
+.I height
+arguments are not allowed to have attached scaling indicators.
+If the PostScript file complies with the Adobe Document Structuring
+Conventions and contains a
+.B %%BoundingBox
+comment, then the bounding box can be automatically
+extracted from within groff by using the
+.B sy
+request to run the
+.B psbb
+command.
+.RS
+.LP
+The
+.B \-mps
+macros (which are automatically loaded when
+.B grops
+is run by the groff command) include a
+.B PSPIC
+macro which allows a picture to be easily imported.
+This has the format
+.IP
+\&\fB.PSPIC\fP [ \fB\-L\fP | \fB-R\fP | \fB\-I\fP \fIn\fP ]\ \"
+\fI\|file\fP [ \fIwidth\fP [ \fIheight\fP ]]
+.LP
+.I file
+is the name of the file containing the illustration;
+.I width
+and
+.I height
+give the desired width and height of the graphic.
+The
+.I width
+and
+.I height
+arguments may have scaling indicators attached;
+the default scaling indicator is
+.BR i .
+This macro will scale the graphic uniformly
+in the x and y directions so that it is no more than
+.I width
+wide
+and
+.I height
+high.
+By default, the graphic will be horizontally centered.
+The
+.BI \-L
+and
+.BI \-R
+cause the graphic to be left-aligned and right-aligned
+respectively.
+The
+.B \-I
+option causes the graphic to be indented by
+.IR n .
+.RE
+.TP
+.B \eX'ps:\ invis'
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+.B \eX'ps:\ endinvis'
+No output will be generated for text and drawing commands
+that are bracketed with these
+.B \eX
+commands.
+These commands are intended for use when output from
+.B troff
+will be previewed before being processed with
+.BR grops ;
+if the previewer is unable to display certain characters
+or other constructs, then other substitute characters or constructs
+can be used for previewing by bracketing them with these
+.B \eX
+commands.
+.RS
+.LP
+For example,
+.B gxditview
+is not able to display a proper
+.B \e(em
+character because the standard X11 fonts do not provide it;
+this problem can be overcome by executing the following
+request
+.IP
+.ft B
+.nf
+\&.char \e(em \eX'ps: invis'\e
+\eZ'\ev'-.25m'\eh'.05m'\eD'l .9m 0'\eh'.05m''\e
+\eX'ps: endinvis'\e(em
+.ft
+.fi
+.LP
+In this case,
+.B gxditview
+will be unable to display the
+.B \e(em
+character and will draw the line,
+whereas
+.B grops
+will print the
+.B \e(em
+character
+and ignore the line.
+.RE
+.LP
+The input to
+.B grops
+must be in the format output by
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@).
+This is described in
+.BR groff_out (@MAN1EXT@).
+In addition the device and font description files for the device used
+must meet certain requirements.
+The device and font description files supplied for
+.B ps
+device meet all these requirements.
+.BR afmtodit (@MAN1EXT@)
+can be used to create font files from AFM files.
+The resolution must be an integer multiple of 72 times the
+.BR sizescale .
+The
+.B ps
+device uses a resolution of 72000 and a sizescale of 1000.
+The device description file should contain a command
+.IP
+.BI paperlength\ n
+.LP
+which says that output should be generated which is suitable for
+printing on a page whose length is
+.I n
+machine units.
+Each font description file must contain a command
+.IP
+.BI internalname\ psname
+.LP
+which says that the PostScript name of the font is
+.IR psname .
+It may also contain a command
+.IP
+.BI encoding\ enc_file
+.LP
+which says that
+the PostScript font should be reencoded using the encoding described in
+.IR enc_file ;
+this file should consist of a sequence of lines of the form:
+.IP
+.I
+pschar code
+.LP
+where
+.I pschar
+is the PostScript name of the character,
+and
+.I code
+is its position in the encoding expressed as a decimal integer.
+The code for each character given in the font file must correspond
+to the code for the character in encoding file, or to the code in the default
+encoding for the font if the PostScript font is not to be reencoded.
+This code can be used with the
+.B \eN
+escape sequence in
+.B troff
+to select the character,
+even if the character does not have a groff name.
+Every character in the font file must exist in the PostScript font, and
+the widths given in the font file must match the widths used
+in the PostScript font.
+.B grops
+will assume that a character with a groff name of
+.B space
+is blank (makes no marks on the page);
+it can make use of such a character to generate more efficient and
+compact PostScript output.
+.LP
+.B grops
+can automatically include the downloadable fonts necessary
+to print the document.
+Any downloadable fonts which should, when required, be included by
+.B grops
+must be listed in the file
+.BR @FONTDIR@/devps/download ;
+this should consist of lines of the form
+.IP
+.I
+font filename
+.LP
+where
+.I font
+is the PostScript name of the font,
+and
+.I filename
+is the name of the file containing the font;
+lines beginning with
+.B #
+and blank lines are ignored;
+fields may be separated by tabs or spaces;
+.I filename
+will be searched for using the same mechanism that is used
+for groff font metric files.
+The
+.B download
+file itself will also be searched for using this mechanism.
+.LP
+If the file containing a downloadable font or imported document
+conforms to the Adobe Document Structuring Conventions,
+then
+.B grops
+will interpret any comments in the files sufficiently to ensure that its
+own output is conforming.
+It will also supply any needed font resources that are listed in the
+.B download
+file
+as well as any needed file resources.
+It is also able to handle inter-resource dependencies.
+For example, suppose that you have a downloadable font called Garamond,
+and also a downloadable font called Garamond-Outline
+which depends on Garamond
+(typically it would be defined to copy Garamond's font dictionary,
+and change the PaintType),
+then it is necessary for Garamond to be appear before Garamond-Outline
+in the PostScript document.
+.B grops
+will handle this automatically
+provided that the downloadable font file for Garamond-Outline
+indicates its dependence on Garamond by means of
+the Document Structuring Conventions,
+for example by beginning with the following lines
+.IP
+.B
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-Font
+.br
+.B
+%%DocumentNeededResources: font Garamond
+.br
+.B
+%%EndComments
+.br
+.B
+%%IncludeResource: font Garamond
+.LP
+In this case both Garamond and Garamond-Outline would need to be listed
+in the
+.B download
+file.
+A downloadable font should not include its own name in a
+.B %%DocumentSuppliedResources
+comment.
+.LP
+.B grops
+will not interpret
+.B %%DocumentFonts
+comments.
+The
+.BR %%DocumentNeededResources ,
+.BR %%DocumentSuppliedResources ,
+.BR %%IncludeResource ,
+.BR %%BeginResource
+and
+.BR %%EndResource
+comments
+(or possibly the old
+.BR %%DocumentNeededFonts ,
+.BR %%DocumentSuppliedFonts ,
+.BR %%IncludeFont ,
+.BR %%BeginFont
+and
+.BR %%EndFont
+comments)
+should be used.
+.SH FILES
+.Tp \w'\fB@FONTDIR@/devps/download'u+2n
+.B @FONTDIR@/devps/DESC
+Device description file.
+.TP
+.BI @FONTDIR@/devps/ F
+Font description file for font
+.IR F .
+.TP
+.B @FONTDIR@/devps/download
+List of downloadable fonts.
+.TP
+.B @FONTDIR@/devps/text.enc
+Encoding used for text fonts.
+.TP
+.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.ps
+Macros for use with
+.BR grops ;
+automatically loaded by
+.BR troffrc
+.TP
+.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.pspic
+Definition of
+.B PSPIC
+macro,
+automatically loaded by
+.BR tmac.ps .
+.TP
+.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.psold
+Macros to disable use of characters not present in older
+PostScript printers; automatically loaded by
+.BR tmac.ps .
+.TP
+.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.psnew
+Macros to undo the effect of
+.BR tmac.psold .
+.TP
+.BI /tmp/grops XXXXXX
+Temporary file.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR afmtodit (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR psbb (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR groff_out (@MAN5EXT@),
+.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@),
+.BR groff_char (@MAN7EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
-.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
-.de Tp
-.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
-.el .TP "\\$1"
-..
-.TH GROPS @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-grops \- PostScript driver for groff
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B grops
-[
-.B \-glmv
-] [
-.BI \-b n
-] [
-.BI \-c n
-] [
-.BI \-w n
-] [
-.BI \-F dir
-] [
-.IR files \|.\|.\|.
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B grops
-translates the output of GNU
-.B troff
-to PostScript.
-Normally
-.B grops
-should be invoked by using the groff command
-with a
-.B \-Tps
-option.
-.if '@DEVICE@'ps' (Actually, this is the default for groff.)
-If no files are given,
-.B grops
-will read the standard input.
-A filename of
-.B \-
-will also cause
-.B grops
-to read the standard input.
-PostScript output is written to the standard output.
-When
-.B grops
-is run by
-.B groff
-options can be passed to
-.B grops
-using the
-.B groff
-.B \-P
-option.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.BI \-b n
-Workaround broken spoolers and previewers.
-Normally
-.B grops
-produces output that conforms
-the Document Structuring Conventions version 3.0.
-Unfortunately some spoolers and previewers can't handle such output.
-The value of
-.I n
-controls what
-.B grops
-does to its output acceptable to such programs.
-A value of 0 will cause grops not to employ any workarounds.
-Add 1 if no
-.B %%BeginDocumentSetup
-and
-.B %%EndDocumentSetup
-comments should be generated;
-this is needed for early versions of TranScript that get confused by
-anything between the
-.B %%EndProlog
-comment and the first
-.B %%Page
-comment.
-Add 2 if lines in included files beginning with
-.B %!
-should be stripped out; this is needed for Sun's pageview previewer.
-Add 4 if
-.BR %%Page ,
-.BR %%Trailer
-and
-.B %%EndProlog
-comments should be
-stripped out of included files; this is needed for spoolers that
-don't understand the
-.B %%BeginDocument
-and
-.B %%EndDocument
-comments.
-Add 8 if the first line of the PostScript output should be
-.B %!PS-Adobe-2.0
-rather than
-.BR %!PS-Adobe-3.0 ;
-this is needed when using Sun's Newsprint with a printer that requires
-page reversal.
-The default value can be specified by a
-.RS
-.IP
-.BI broken\ n
-.LP
-command in the DESC file.
-Otherwise the default value is 0.
-.RE
-.TP
-.BI \-c n
-Print
-.I n
-copies of each page.
-.TP
-.BI \-g
-Guess the page length.
-This generates PostScript code that guesses the page length.
-The guess will be correct only if the imageable area is vertically
-centered on the page.
-This option allows you to generate documents that can be printed
-both on letter (8.5\(mu11) paper and on A4 paper without change.
-.TP
-.B \-l
-Print the document in landscape format.
-.TP
-.B \-m
-Turn manual feed on for the document.
-.TP
-.BI \-F dir
-Search the directory
-.IB dir /dev name
-for font and device description files;
-.I name
-is the name of the device, usually
-.BR ps .
-.TP
-.BI \-w n
-Lines should be drawn using a thickness of
-.I n
-thousandths of an em.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print the version number.
-.SH USAGE
-There are styles called
-.BR R ,
-.BR I ,
-.BR B ,
-and
-.B BI
-mounted at font positions 1 to 4.
-The fonts are grouped into families
-.BR A ,
-.BR BM ,
-.BR C ,
-.BR H ,
-.BR HN ,
-.BR N ,
-.B P
-and
-.B T
-having members in each of these styles:
-.de FT
-.if '\\*(.T'ps' .ft \\$1
-..
-.TP
-.B AR
-.FT AR
-AvantGarde-Book
-.FT
-.TP
-.B AI
-.FT AI
-AvantGarde-BookOblique
-.FT
-.TP
-.B AB
-.FT AB
-AvantGarde-Demi
-.FT
-.TP
-.B ABI
-.FT ABI
-AvantGarde-DemiOblique
-.FT
-.TP
-.B BMR
-.FT BMR
-Bookman-Light
-.FT
-.TP
-.B BMI
-.FT BMI
-Bookman-LightItalic
-.FT
-.TP
-.B BMB
-.FT BMB
-Bookman-Demi
-.FT
-.TP
-.B BMBI
-.FT BMBI
-Bookman-DemiItalic
-.FT
-.TP
-.B CR
-.FT CR
-Courier
-.FT
-.TP
-.B CI
-.FT CI
-Courier-Oblique
-.FT
-.TP
-.B CB
-.FT CB
-Courier-Bold
-.FT
-.TP
-.B CBI
-.FT CBI
-Courier-BoldOblique
-.FT
-.TP
-.B HR
-.FT HR
-Helvetica
-.FT
-.TP
-.B HI
-.FT HI
-Helvetica-Oblique
-.FT
-.TP
-.B HB
-.FT HB
-Helvetica-Bold
-.FT
-.TP
-.B HBI
-.FT HBI
-Helvetica-BoldOblique
-.FT
-.TP
-.B HNR
-.FT HNR
-Helvetica-Narrow
-.FT
-.TP
-.B HNI
-.FT HNI
-Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique
-.FT
-.TP
-.B HNB
-.FT HNB
-Helvetica-Narrow-Bold
-.FT
-.TP
-.B HNBI
-.FT HNBI
-Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique
-.FT
-.TP
-.B NR
-.FT NR
-NewCenturySchlbk-Roman
-.FT
-.TP
-.B NI
-.FT NI
-NewCenturySchlbk-Italic
-.FT
-.TP
-.B NB
-.FT NB
-NewCenturySchlbk-Bold
-.FT
-.TP
-.B NBI
-.FT NBI
-NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic
-.FT
-.TP
-.B PR
-.FT PR
-Palatino-Roman
-.FT
-.TP
-.B PI
-.FT PI
-Palatino-Italic
-.FT
-.TP
-.B PB
-.FT PB
-Palatino-Bold
-.FT
-.TP
-.B PBI
-.FT PBI
-Palatino-BoldItalic
-.FT
-.TP
-.B TR
-.FT TR
-Times-Roman
-.FT
-.TP
-.B TI
-.FT TI
-Times-Italic
-.FT
-.TP
-.B TB
-.FT TB
-Times-Bold
-.FT
-.TP
-.B TBI
-.FT TBI
-Times-BoldItalic
-.FT
-.LP
-There is also the following font which is not a member of a family:
-.TP
-.B ZCMI
-.FT ZCMI
-ZapfChancery-MediumItalic
-.FT
-.LP
-There are also some special fonts called
-.B SS
-and
-.BR S .
-Zapf Dingbats is available as
-.BR ZD
-and a reversed version of ZapfDingbats (with symbols pointing in the opposite
-direction) is available as
-.BR ZDR ;
-most characters in these fonts are unnamed and must be accessed using
-.BR \eN .
-.LP
-.B grops
-understands various X commands produced using the
-.B \eX
-escape sequence;
-.B grops
-will only interpret commands that begin with a
-.B ps:
-tag.
-.TP
-.BI \eX'ps:\ exec\ code '
-This executes the arbitrary PostScript commands in
-.IR code .
-The PostScript currentpoint will be set to the position of the
-.B \eX
-command before executing
-.IR code .
-The origin will be at the top left corner of the page,
-and y coordinates will increase down the page.
-A procedure
-.B u
-will be defined that converts groff units
-to the coordinate system in effect.
-For example,
-.RS
-.IP
-.B
-\&.nr x 1i
-.br
-.B
-\eX'ps: exec \enx u 0 rlineto stroke'
-.br
-.RE
-.IP
-will draw a horizontal line one inch long.
-.I code
-may make changes to the graphics state,
-but any changes will persist only to the
-end of the page.
-A dictionary containing the definitions specified by the
-.B def
-and
-.B mdef
-will be on top of the dictionary stack.
-If your code adds definitions to this dictionary,
-you should allocate space for them using
-.BI \eX'ps\ mdef \ n '\fR.
-Any definitions will persist only until the end of the page.
-If you use the
-.B \eY
-escape sequence with an argument that names a macro,
-.I code
-can extend over multiple lines.
-For example,
-.RS
-.IP
-.nf
-.ft B
-\&.nr x 1i
-\&.de y
-\&ps: exec
-\&\enx u 0 rlineto
-\&stroke
-\&..
-\&\eYy
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-is another way to draw a horizontal line one inch long.
-.RE
-.TP
-.BI \eX'ps:\ file\ name '
-This is the same as the
-.B exec
-command except that the PostScript code is read from file
-.IR name .
-.TP
-.BI \eX'ps:\ def\ code '
-Place a PostScript definition contained in
-.I code
-in the prologue.
-There should be at most one definition per
-.B \eX
-command.
-Long definitions can be split over several
-.B \eX
-commands;
-all the
-.I code
-arguments are simply joined together separated by newlines.
-The definitions are placed in a dictionary which is automatically
-pushed on the dictionary stack when an
-.B exec
-command is executed.
-If you use the
-.B \eY
-escape sequence with an argument that names a macro,
-.I code
-can extend over multiple lines.
-.TP
-.BI \eX'ps:\ mdef\ n\ code '
-Like
-.BR def ,
-except that
-.I code
-may contain up to
-.I n
-definitions.
-.B grops
-needs to know how many definitions
-.I code
-contains
-so that it can create an appropriately sized PostScript dictionary
-to contain them.
-.TP
-.BI \eX'ps:\ import\ file\ llx\ lly\ urx\ ury\ width\ \fR[\fP\ height\ \fR]\fP '
-Import a PostScript graphic from
-.IR file .
-The arguments
-.IR llx ,
-.IR lly ,
-.IR urx ,
-and
-.I ury
-give the bounding box of the graphic in the default PostScript
-coordinate system; they should all be integers;
-.I llx
-and
-.I lly
-are the x and y coordinates of the lower left
-corner of the graphic;
-.I urx
-and
-.I ury
-are the x and y coordinates of the upper right corner of the graphic;
-.I width
-and
-.I height
-are integers that give the desired width and height in groff
-units of the graphic.
-The graphic will be scaled so that it has this width and height
-and translated so that the lower left corner of the graphic is
-located at the position associated with
-.B \eX
-command.
-If the height argument is omitted it will be scaled uniformly in the
-x and y directions so that it has the specified width.
-Note that the contents of the
-.B \eX
-command are not interpreted by
-.BR troff ;
-so vertical space for the graphic is not automatically added,
-and the
-.I width
-and
-.I height
-arguments are not allowed to have attached scaling indicators.
-If the PostScript file complies with the Adobe Document Structuring
-Conventions and contains a
-.B %%BoundingBox
-comment, then the bounding box can be automatically
-extracted from within groff by using the
-.B sy
-request to run the
-.B psbb
-command.
-.RS
-.LP
-The
-.B \-mps
-macros (which are automatically loaded when
-.B grops
-is run by the groff command) include a
-.B PSPIC
-macro which allows a picture to be easily imported.
-This has the format
-.IP
-\&\fB.PSPIC\fP [ \fB\-L\fP | \fB-R\fP | \fB\-I\fP \fIn\fP ]\ \"
-\fI\|file\fP [ \fIwidth\fP [ \fIheight\fP ]]
-.LP
-.I file
-is the name of the file containing the illustration;
-.I width
-and
-.I height
-give the desired width and height of the graphic.
-The
-.I width
-and
-.I height
-arguments may have scaling indicators attached;
-the default scaling indicator is
-.BR i .
-This macro will scale the graphic uniformly
-in the x and y directions so that it is no more than
-.I width
-wide
-and
-.I height
-high.
-By default, the graphic will be horizontally centered.
-The
-.BI \-L
-and
-.BI \-R
-cause the graphic to be left-aligned and right-aligned
-respectively.
-The
-.B \-I
-option causes the graphic to be indented by
-.IR n .
-.RE
-.TP
-.B \eX'ps:\ invis'
-.br
-.ns
-.TP
-.B \eX'ps:\ endinvis'
-No output will be generated for text and drawing commands
-that are bracketed with these
-.B \eX
-commands.
-These commands are intended for use when output from
-.B troff
-will be previewed before being processed with
-.BR grops ;
-if the previewer is unable to display certain characters
-or other constructs, then other substitute characters or constructs
-can be used for previewing by bracketing them with these
-.B \eX
-commands.
-.RS
-.LP
-For example,
-.B gxditview
-is not able to display a proper
-.B \e(em
-character because the standard X11 fonts do not provide it;
-this problem can be overcome by executing the following
-request
-.IP
-.ft B
-.nf
-\&.char \e(em \eX'ps: invis'\e
-\eZ'\ev'-.25m'\eh'.05m'\eD'l .9m 0'\eh'.05m''\e
-\eX'ps: endinvis'\e(em
-.ft
-.fi
-.LP
-In this case,
-.B gxditview
-will be unable to display the
-.B \e(em
-character and will draw the line,
-whereas
-.B grops
-will print the
-.B \e(em
-character
-and ignore the line.
-.RE
-.LP
-The input to
-.B grops
-must be in the format output by
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@).
-This is described in
-.BR groff_out (@MAN1EXT@).
-In addition the device and font description files for the device used
-must meet certain requirements.
-The device and font description files supplied for
-.B ps
-device meet all these requirements.
-.BR afmtodit (@MAN1EXT@)
-can be used to create font files from AFM files.
-The resolution must be an integer multiple of 72 times the
-.BR sizescale .
-The
-.B ps
-device uses a resolution of 72000 and a sizescale of 1000.
-The device description file should contain a command
-.IP
-.BI paperlength\ n
-.LP
-which says that output should be generated which is suitable for
-printing on a page whose length is
-.I n
-machine units.
-Each font description file must contain a command
-.IP
-.BI internalname\ psname
-.LP
-which says that the PostScript name of the font is
-.IR psname .
-It may also contain a command
-.IP
-.BI encoding\ enc_file
-.LP
-which says that
-the PostScript font should be reencoded using the encoding described in
-.IR enc_file ;
-this file should consist of a sequence of lines of the form:
-.IP
-.I
-pschar code
-.LP
-where
-.I pschar
-is the PostScript name of the character,
-and
-.I code
-is its position in the encoding expressed as a decimal integer.
-The code for each character given in the font file must correspond
-to the code for the character in encoding file, or to the code in the default
-encoding for the font if the PostScript font is not to be reencoded.
-This code can be used with the
-.B \eN
-escape sequence in
-.B troff
-to select the character,
-even if the character does not have a groff name.
-Every character in the font file must exist in the PostScript font, and
-the widths given in the font file must match the widths used
-in the PostScript font.
-.B grops
-will assume that a character with a groff name of
-.B space
-is blank (makes no marks on the page);
-it can make use of such a character to generate more efficient and
-compact PostScript output.
-.LP
-.B grops
-can automatically include the downloadable fonts necessary
-to print the document.
-Any downloadable fonts which should, when required, be included by
-.B grops
-must be listed in the file
-.BR @FONTDIR@/devps/download ;
-this should consist of lines of the form
-.IP
-.I
-font filename
-.LP
-where
-.I font
-is the PostScript name of the font,
-and
-.I filename
-is the name of the file containing the font;
-lines beginning with
-.B #
-and blank lines are ignored;
-fields may be separated by tabs or spaces;
-.I filename
-will be searched for using the same mechanism that is used
-for groff font metric files.
-The
-.B download
-file itself will also be searched for using this mechanism.
-.LP
-If the file containing a downloadable font or imported document
-conforms to the Adobe Document Structuring Conventions,
-then
-.B grops
-will interpret any comments in the files sufficiently to ensure that its
-own output is conforming.
-It will also supply any needed font resources that are listed in the
-.B download
-file
-as well as any needed file resources.
-It is also able to handle inter-resource dependencies.
-For example, suppose that you have a downloadable font called Garamond,
-and also a downloadable font called Garamond-Outline
-which depends on Garamond
-(typically it would be defined to copy Garamond's font dictionary,
-and change the PaintType),
-then it is necessary for Garamond to be appear before Garamond-Outline
-in the PostScript document.
-.B grops
-will handle this automatically
-provided that the downloadable font file for Garamond-Outline
-indicates its dependence on Garamond by means of
-the Document Structuring Conventions,
-for example by beginning with the following lines
-.IP
-.B
-%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-Font
-.br
-.B
-%%DocumentNeededResources: font Garamond
-.br
-.B
-%%EndComments
-.br
-.B
-%%IncludeResource: font Garamond
-.LP
-In this case both Garamond and Garamond-Outline would need to be listed
-in the
-.B download
-file.
-A downloadable font should not include its own name in a
-.B %%DocumentSuppliedResources
-comment.
-.LP
-.B grops
-will not interpret
-.B %%DocumentFonts
-comments.
-The
-.BR %%DocumentNeededResources ,
-.BR %%DocumentSuppliedResources ,
-.BR %%IncludeResource ,
-.BR %%BeginResource
-and
-.BR %%EndResource
-comments
-(or possibly the old
-.BR %%DocumentNeededFonts ,
-.BR %%DocumentSuppliedFonts ,
-.BR %%IncludeFont ,
-.BR %%BeginFont
-and
-.BR %%EndFont
-comments)
-should be used.
-.SH FILES
-.Tp \w'\fB@FONTDIR@/devps/download'u+2n
-.B @FONTDIR@/devps/DESC
-Device description file.
-.TP
-.BI @FONTDIR@/devps/ F
-Font description file for font
-.IR F .
-.TP
-.B @FONTDIR@/devps/download
-List of downloadable fonts.
-.TP
-.B @FONTDIR@/devps/text.enc
-Encoding used for text fonts.
-.TP
-.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.ps
-Macros for use with
-.BR grops ;
-automatically loaded by
-.BR troffrc
-.TP
-.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.pspic
-Definition of
-.B PSPIC
-macro,
-automatically loaded by
-.BR tmac.ps .
-.TP
-.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.psold
-Macros to disable use of characters not present in older
-PostScript printers; automatically loaded by
-.BR tmac.ps .
-.TP
-.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.psnew
-Macros to undo the effect of
-.BR tmac.psold .
-.TP
-.BI /tmp/grops XXXXXX
-Temporary file.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR afmtodit (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR psbb (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR groff_out (@MAN5EXT@),
-.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@),
-.BR groff_char (@MAN7EXT@)
public:
ps_printer();
~ps_printer();
- void set_char(int i, font *f, const environment *env, int w);
+ void set_char(int i, font *f, const environment *env, int w, const char *name);
void draw(int code, int *p, int np, const environment *env);
void begin_page(int);
void end_page(int);
return f->encoding_index = next_encoding_index++;
}
-void ps_printer::set_char(int i, font *f, const environment *env, int w)
+void ps_printer::set_char(int i, font *f, const environment *env, int w, const char *name)
{
if (i == space_char_index || invis_count > 0)
return;
}
case 'c':
if (sscanf(optarg, "%d", &ncopies) != 1 || ncopies <= 0) {
- error("bad number of copies `%1'", optarg);
+ error("bad number of copies `%s'", optarg);
ncopies = 1;
}
break;
PROG=grotty
-MAN1=grotty.n
+MAN1=grotty.1
XLIBS=$(LIBDRIVER) $(LIBGROFF)
MLIB=$(LIBM)
OBJS=tty.o
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.TH GROTTY @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+grotty \- groff driver for typewriter-like devices
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B grotty
+[
+.B \-hfbuodBUv
+] [
+.BI \-F dir
+] [
+.IR files \|.\|.\|.
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B grotty
+translates the output of GNU
+.B troff
+into a form suitable for typewriter-like devices.
+Normally
+.B grotty
+should invoked by using the
+.B groff
+command
+with a
+.B \-Tascii
+or
+.B \-Tlatin1
+option.
+If no files are given,
+.B grotty
+will read the standard input.
+A filename of
+.B \-
+will also cause
+.B grotty
+to read the standard input.
+Output is written to the standard output.
+.LP
+Normally
+.B grotty
+prints a bold character
+.I c
+using the sequence
+.RI ` c
+.SM BACKSPACE
+.IR c '
+and a italic character
+.I c
+by the sequence
+.RB ` _
+.SM BACKSPACE
+.IR c '.
+These sequences can be displayed on a terminal
+by piping through
+.BR ul (1).
+Pagers such as
+.BR more (1)
+or
+.BR less (1)
+are also able to display these sequences.
+Use either
+.B \-B
+or
+.B \-U
+when piping into
+.BR less (1);
+use
+.B \-b
+when piping into
+.BR more (1).
+There is no need to filter the output through
+.BR col (1)
+since
+.B grotty
+never outputs reverse line feeds.
+.LP
+The font description file may contain a command
+.IP
+.BI internalname\ n
+.LP
+where
+.I n
+is a decimal integer.
+If the 01 bit in
+.I n
+is set,
+then the font will be treated as an italic font;
+if the 02 bit is set,
+then it will be treated as a bold font.
+The code field in the font description field gives the
+code which will be used to output the character.
+This code can also be used in the
+.B \eN
+escape sequence in
+.BR troff .
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.BI \-F dir
+Search the directory
+.IB dir /dev name
+for font and device description files;
+.I name
+is the name of the device, usually
+.B ascii
+or
+.BR latin1 .
+.TP
+.B \-h
+Use horizontal tabs in the output.
+Tabs are assumed to be set every 8 columns.
+.TP
+.B \-f
+Use form feeds in the output.
+A form feed will be output at the end of each page that has no output
+on its last line.
+.TP
+.B \-b
+Suppress the use of overstriking for bold characters.
+.TP
+.B \-u
+Suppress the use of underlining for italic characters.
+.TP
+.B \-B
+Use only overstriking for bold-italic characters.
+.TP
+.B \-U
+Use only underlining for bold-italic characters.
+.TP
+.B \-o
+Suppress overstriking (other than for bold or underlined characters).
+.TP
+.B \-d
+Ignore all
+.B \eD
+commands.
+Without this
+.B grotty
+will render
+.B \eD'l\|.\|.\|.'
+commands that have at least at least one zero argument
+(and so are either horizontal or vertical)
+using
+.BR \- ,
+.B |
+and
+.B +
+characters.
+.TP
+.B \-v
+Print the version number.
+.SH FILES
+.TP
+.B @FONTDIR@/devascii/DESC
+Device description file for
+.B ascii
+device.
+.TP
+.B @FONTDIR@/devascii/ F
+Font description file for font
+.I F
+of
+.B ascii device.
+.TP
+.B @FONTDIR@/devlatin1/DESC
+Device description file for
+.B latin1
+device.
+.TP
+.B @FONTDIR@/devlatin1/ F
+Font description file for font
+.I F
+of
+.B latin1 device.
+.TP
+.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.tty
+Macros for use with
+.BR grotty .
+.TP
+.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.tty-char
+Additional klugey character definitions for use with
+.BR grotty .
+.SH BUGS
+.LP
+.B grotty
+is intended only for simple documents.
+.LP
+There is no support for fractional horizontal or vertical motions.
+.LP
+There is no support for
+.B \eD
+commands
+other than horizontal and vertical lines.
+.LP
+Characters above the first line (ie with a vertical position of 0)
+cannot be printed.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR groff_out (@MAN5EXT@),
+.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@),
+.BR groff_char (@MAN7EXT@),
+.BR ul (1),
+.BR more (1),
+.BR less (1)
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.TH GROTTY @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-grotty \- groff driver for typewriter-like devices
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B grotty
-[
-.B \-hfbuodBUv
-] [
-.BI \-F dir
-] [
-.IR files \|.\|.\|.
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B grotty
-translates the output of GNU
-.B troff
-into a form suitable for typewriter-like devices.
-Normally
-.B grotty
-should invoked by using the
-.B groff
-command
-with a
-.B \-Tascii
-or
-.B \-Tlatin1
-option.
-If no files are given,
-.B grotty
-will read the standard input.
-A filename of
-.B \-
-will also cause
-.B grotty
-to read the standard input.
-Output is written to the standard output.
-.LP
-Normally
-.B grotty
-prints a bold character
-.I c
-using the sequence
-.RI ` c
-.SM BACKSPACE
-.IR c '
-and a italic character
-.I c
-by the sequence
-.RB ` _
-.SM BACKSPACE
-.IR c '.
-These sequences can be displayed on a terminal
-by piping through
-.BR ul (1).
-Pagers such as
-.BR more (1)
-or
-.BR less (1)
-are also able to display these sequences.
-Use either
-.B \-B
-or
-.B \-U
-when piping into
-.BR less (1);
-use
-.B \-b
-when piping into
-.BR more (1).
-There is no need to filter the output through
-.BR col (1)
-since
-.B grotty
-never outputs reverse line feeds.
-.LP
-The font description file may contain a command
-.IP
-.BI internalname\ n
-.LP
-where
-.I n
-is a decimal integer.
-If the 01 bit in
-.I n
-is set,
-then the font will be treated as an italic font;
-if the 02 bit is set,
-then it will be treated as a bold font.
-The code field in the font description field gives the
-code which will be used to output the character.
-This code can also be used in the
-.B \eN
-escape sequence in
-.BR troff .
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.BI \-F dir
-Search the directory
-.IB dir /dev name
-for font and device description files;
-.I name
-is the name of the device, usually
-.B ascii
-or
-.BR latin1 .
-.TP
-.B \-h
-Use horizontal tabs in the output.
-Tabs are assumed to be set every 8 columns.
-.TP
-.B \-f
-Use form feeds in the output.
-A form feed will be output at the end of each page that has no output
-on its last line.
-.TP
-.B \-b
-Suppress the use of overstriking for bold characters.
-.TP
-.B \-u
-Suppress the use of underlining for italic characters.
-.TP
-.B \-B
-Use only overstriking for bold-italic characters.
-.TP
-.B \-U
-Use only underlining for bold-italic characters.
-.TP
-.B \-o
-Suppress overstriking (other than for bold or underlined characters).
-.TP
-.B \-d
-Ignore all
-.B \eD
-commands.
-Without this
-.B grotty
-will render
-.B \eD'l\|.\|.\|.'
-commands that have at least at least one zero argument
-(and so are either horizontal or vertical)
-using
-.BR \- ,
-.B |
-and
-.B +
-characters.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print the version number.
-.SH FILES
-.TP
-.B @FONTDIR@/devascii/DESC
-Device description file for
-.B ascii
-device.
-.TP
-.B @FONTDIR@/devascii/ F
-Font description file for font
-.I F
-of
-.B ascii device.
-.TP
-.B @FONTDIR@/devlatin1/DESC
-Device description file for
-.B latin1
-device.
-.TP
-.B @FONTDIR@/devlatin1/ F
-Font description file for font
-.I F
-of
-.B latin1 device.
-.TP
-.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.tty
-Macros for use with
-.BR grotty .
-.TP
-.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.tty-char
-Additional klugey character definitions for use with
-.BR grotty .
-.SH BUGS
-.LP
-.B grotty
-is intended only for simple documents.
-.LP
-There is no support for fractional horizontal or vertical motions.
-.LP
-There is no support for
-.B \eD
-commands
-other than horizontal and vertical lines.
-.LP
-Characters above the first line (ie with a vertical position of 0)
-cannot be printed.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR groff_out (@MAN5EXT@),
-.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@),
-.BR groff_char (@MAN7EXT@),
-.BR ul (1),
-.BR more (1),
-.BR less (1)
PROG=hpftodit
-MAN1=hpftodit.n
+MAN1=hpftodit.1
XLIBS=$(LIBGROFF)
MLIB=$(LIBM)
OBJS=hpftodit.o
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1994, 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
+.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
+.de Tp
+.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
+.el .TP "\\$1"
+..
+.TH HPFTODIT @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+hpftodit \- create font description files for use with groff \-Tlj4
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B hpftodit
+[
+.B \-sv
+]
+[
+.BI \-i n
+]
+.I tfm_file
+.I map_file
+.I font
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B hpftodit
+creates a font file for use with
+.B
+groff \-Tlj4\fR
+from an HP tagged font metric file.
+.I tfm_file
+is the name of the tagged font metric file for the font.
+.I map_file
+is a file giving the groff names for characters in the font;
+this file should consist of a sequence of lines of the form:
+.IP
+.I
+n c1 c2 \fR.\|.\|.
+.LP
+where
+.I n
+is a decimal integer giving the MSL number of the character,
+and
+.IR c1 ,
+.IR c2 ,.\|.\|.
+are the groff names of the character.
+.I font
+is the name of the groff font file.
+The groff font file is written to
+.IR font .
+.LP
+The
+.B \-s
+option should be given if the font is special
+(a font is
+.I special
+if
+.B troff
+should search it whenever
+a character is not found in the current font.)
+If the font is special,
+it should be listed in the
+.B fonts
+command in the DESC file;
+if it is not special, there is no need to list it, since
+.B troff
+can automatically mount it when it's first used.
+.LP
+If the
+.B \-i
+option is used,
+.B hpftodit
+will automatically generate an italic correction,
+a left italic correction and a subscript correction
+for each character
+(the significance of these parameters is explained in
+.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@)).
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.B \-v
+Print the version number.
+.TP
+.B \-s
+The font is special.
+The effect of this option is to add the
+.B special
+command to the font file.
+.TP
+.BI \-i n
+Generate an italic correction for each character so that
+the character's width plus the character's italic correction
+is equal to
+.I n
+design units
+plus the amount by which the right edge of the character's bounding
+is to the right of the character's origin.
+If this would result in a negative italic correction, use a zero
+italic correction instead.
+There are 8782 design units per em for Intellifont fonts.
+.IP
+Also generate a subscript correction equal to the
+product of the tangent of the slant of the font and
+four fifths of the x-height of the font.
+If this would result in a subscript correction greater than the italic
+correction, use a subscript correction equal to the italic correction
+instead.
+.IP
+Also generate a left italic correction for each character
+equal to
+.I n
+design units
+plus the amount by which the left edge of the character's bounding box
+is to the left of the character's origin.
+The left italic correction may be negative.
+.IP
+This option is normally needed only with italic (or oblique) fonts.
+.SH FILES
+.Tp \w'\fB@FONTDIR@/devlj4/DESC'u+2n
+.B @FONTDIR@/devlj4/DESC
+Device description file.
+.TP
+.BI @FONTDIR@/devlj4/ F
+Font description file for font
+.IR F .
+.SH BUGS
+.LP
+This program was written without the benefit of complete, official
+documentation on the tagged font metric format.
+It is therefore likely that it will fail to work on tfm files that are
+dissimilar to those for the internal fonts on the Laserjet 4,
+with which it was tested:
+.LP
+TrueType tfm files are not supported.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR grolj4 (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1994, 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
-.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
-.de Tp
-.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
-.el .TP "\\$1"
-..
-.TH HPFTODIT @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-hpftodit \- create font description files for use with groff \-Tlj4
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B hpftodit
-[
-.B \-sv
-]
-[
-.BI \-i n
-]
-.I tfm_file
-.I map_file
-.I font
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B hpftodit
-creates a font file for use with
-.B
-groff \-Tlj4\fR
-from an HP tagged font metric file.
-.I tfm_file
-is the name of the tagged font metric file for the font.
-.I map_file
-is a file giving the groff names for characters in the font;
-this file should consist of a sequence of lines of the form:
-.IP
-.I
-n c1 c2 \fR.\|.\|.
-.LP
-where
-.I n
-is a decimal integer giving the MSL number of the character,
-and
-.IR c1 ,
-.IR c2 ,.\|.\|.
-are the groff names of the character.
-.I font
-is the name of the groff font file.
-The groff font file is written to
-.IR font .
-.LP
-The
-.B \-s
-option should be given if the font is special
-(a font is
-.I special
-if
-.B troff
-should search it whenever
-a character is not found in the current font.)
-If the font is special,
-it should be listed in the
-.B fonts
-command in the DESC file;
-if it is not special, there is no need to list it, since
-.B troff
-can automatically mount it when it's first used.
-.LP
-If the
-.B \-i
-option is used,
-.B hpftodit
-will automatically generate an italic correction,
-a left italic correction and a subscript correction
-for each character
-(the significance of these parameters is explained in
-.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@)).
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print the version number.
-.TP
-.B \-s
-The font is special.
-The effect of this option is to add the
-.B special
-command to the font file.
-.TP
-.BI \-i n
-Generate an italic correction for each character so that
-the character's width plus the character's italic correction
-is equal to
-.I n
-design units
-plus the amount by which the right edge of the character's bounding
-is to the right of the character's origin.
-If this would result in a negative italic correction, use a zero
-italic correction instead.
-There are 8782 design units per em for Intellifont fonts.
-.IP
-Also generate a subscript correction equal to the
-product of the tangent of the slant of the font and
-four fifths of the x-height of the font.
-If this would result in a subscript correction greater than the italic
-correction, use a subscript correction equal to the italic correction
-instead.
-.IP
-Also generate a left italic correction for each character
-equal to
-.I n
-design units
-plus the amount by which the left edge of the character's bounding box
-is to the left of the character's origin.
-The left italic correction may be negative.
-.IP
-This option is normally needed only with italic (or oblique) fonts.
-.SH FILES
-.Tp \w'\fB@FONTDIR@/devlj4/DESC'u+2n
-.B @FONTDIR@/devlj4/DESC
-Device description file.
-.TP
-.BI @FONTDIR@/devlj4/ F
-Font description file for font
-.IR F .
-.SH BUGS
-.LP
-This program was written without the benefit of complete, official
-documentation on the tagged font metric format.
-It is therefore likely that it will fail to work on tfm files that are
-dissimilar to those for the internal fonts on the Laserjet 4,
-with which it was tested:
-.LP
-TrueType tfm files are not supported.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR grolj4 (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@)
PROG=indxbib
-MAN1=indxbib.n
+MAN1=indxbib.1
XLIBS=$(LIBBIB) $(LIBGROFF)
MLIB=$(LIBM)
OBJS=indxbib.o dirnamemax.o signal.o
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.TH @G@INDXBIB @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+@g@indxbib \- make inverted index for bibliographic databases
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nr a \n(.j
+.ad l
+.nr i \n(.i
+.in +\w'\fB@g@indxbib 'u
+.ti \niu
+.B @g@indxbib
+.de OP
+.ie \\n(.$-1 .RI "[\ \fB\\$1\fP" "\\$2" "\ ]"
+.el .RB "[\ " "\\$1" "\ ]"
+..
+.OP \-vw
+.OP \-c file
+.OP \-d dir
+.OP \-f file
+.OP \-h n
+.OP \-i string
+.OP \-k n
+.OP \-l n
+.OP \-n n
+.OP \-o file
+.OP \-t n
+.RI [\ filename \|.\|.\|.\ ]
+.ad \na
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B @g@indxbib
+makes an inverted index for the bibliographic databases in
+.IR filename \|.\|.\|.
+for use with
+.BR @g@refer (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@lookbib (@MAN1EXT@),
+and
+.BR lkbib (@MAN1EXT@).
+The index will be named
+.IB filename @INDEX_SUFFIX@\fR;
+the index is written to a temporary file which is then renamed to this.
+If no filenames are given on the command line because the
+.B \-f
+option has been used, and no
+.B \-o
+option is given, the index will be named
+.BR @DEFAULT_INDEX_NAME@@INDEX_SUFFIX@ .
+.LP
+Bibliographic databases are divided into records by blank lines.
+Within a record, each fields starts with a
+.B %
+character at the beginning of a line.
+Fields have a one letter name which follows the
+.B %
+character.
+.LP
+The values set by the
+.BR \-c ,
+.BR \-n ,
+.BR \-l
+and
+.B \-t
+options are stored in the index;
+when the index is searched, keys will be discarded and truncated in a
+manner appropriate to these options;
+the original keys will be used for verifying that any record
+found using the index actually contains the keys.
+This means that a user of an index need not know whether these
+options were used in the creation of the index,
+provided that not all the keys to be searched for
+would have been discarded during indexing
+and that the user supplies at least the part of each key
+that would have remained after being truncated during indexing.
+The value set by the
+.B \-i
+option is also stored in the index
+and will be used in verifying records found using the index.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.B \-v
+Print the version number.
+.TP
+.B \-w
+Index whole files.
+Each file is a separate record.
+.TP
+.BI \-c file
+Read the list of common words from
+.I file
+instead of
+.BR @COMMON_WORDS_FILE@ .
+.TP
+.BI \-d dir
+Use
+.I dir
+as the pathname of the current working directory to store in the index,
+instead of the path printed by
+.BR pwd (1).
+Usually
+.I dir
+will be a symbolic link that points to the directory printed by
+.BR pwd (1).
+.TP
+.BI \-f file
+Read the files to be indexed from
+.IR file .
+If
+.I file
+is
+.BR \- ,
+files will be read from the standard input.
+The
+.B \-f
+option can be given at most once.
+.TP
+.BI \-i string
+Don't index the contents of fields whose names are in
+.IR string .
+Initially
+.I string
+is
+.BR XYZ .
+.TP
+.BI \-h n
+Use the first prime greater than or equal to
+.I n
+for the size of the hash table.
+Larger values of
+.I n
+will usually make searching faster,
+but will make the index larger
+and
+.B @g@indxbib
+use more memory.
+Initially
+.I n
+is 997.
+.TP
+.BI \-k n
+Use at most
+.I n
+keys per input record.
+Initially
+.I n
+is 100.
+.TP
+.BI \-l n
+Discard keys that are shorter than
+.IR n .
+Initially
+.I n
+is 3.
+.TP
+.BI \-n n
+Discard the
+.I n
+most common words.
+Initially
+.I n
+is 100.
+.TP
+.BI \-o basename
+The index should be named
+.IB basename @INDEX_SUFFIX@\fR.
+.TP
+.BI \-t n
+Truncate keys to
+.IR n .
+Initially
+.I n
+is 6.
+.SH FILES
+.TP \w'\fBindxbib\fIXXXXXX'u+2n
+.IB filename @INDEX_SUFFIX@
+Index.
+.TP
+.B @DEFAULT_INDEX_NAME@@INDEX_SUFFIX@
+Default index name.
+.TP
+.B @COMMON_WORDS_FILE@
+List of common words.
+.TP
+.BI indxbib XXXXXX
+Temporary file.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR @g@refer (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR lkbib (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@lookbib (@MAN1EXT@)
extern "C" {
// Sun's stdlib.h fails to declare this.
char *mktemp(char *);
+ int mkstemp(char *);
}
#define DEFAULT_HASH_TABLE_SIZE 997
temp_index_file = strsave(TEMP_INDEX_TEMPLATE);
}
catch_fatal_signals();
+#ifdef HAVE_MKSTEMP
int fd = mkstemp(temp_index_file);
- if (fd == -1 || !temp_index_file[0])
+#else /* not HAVE_MKSTEMP */
+ if (!mktemp(temp_index_file) || !temp_index_file[0])
fatal("cannot create file name for temporary file");
- if (fchmod(fd, S_IRUSR|S_IRGRP|S_IROTH) < 0)
- fatal("cannot change permissions for temporary file");
+ int fd = open(temp_index_file, O_CREAT|O_EXCL|O_RDWR, S_IRUSR|S_IWUSR);
+#endif /* not HAVE_MKSTEMP */
+ if (fd < 0)
+ fatal("can't create temporary index file: %1", strerror(errno));
indxfp = fdopen(fd, "w");
if (indxfp == 0)
fatal("fdopen failed");
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.TH @G@INDXBIB @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-@g@indxbib \- make inverted index for bibliographic databases
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nr a \n(.j
-.ad l
-.nr i \n(.i
-.in +\w'\fB@g@indxbib 'u
-.ti \niu
-.B @g@indxbib
-.de OP
-.ie \\n(.$-1 .RI "[\ \fB\\$1\fP" "\\$2" "\ ]"
-.el .RB "[\ " "\\$1" "\ ]"
-..
-.OP \-vw
-.OP \-c file
-.OP \-d dir
-.OP \-f file
-.OP \-h n
-.OP \-i string
-.OP \-k n
-.OP \-l n
-.OP \-n n
-.OP \-o file
-.OP \-t n
-.RI [\ filename \|.\|.\|.\ ]
-.ad \na
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B @g@indxbib
-makes an inverted index for the bibliographic databases in
-.IR filename \|.\|.\|.
-for use with
-.BR @g@refer (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@lookbib (@MAN1EXT@),
-and
-.BR lkbib (@MAN1EXT@).
-The index will be named
-.IB filename @INDEX_SUFFIX@\fR;
-the index is written to a temporary file which is then renamed to this.
-If no filenames are given on the command line because the
-.B \-f
-option has been used, and no
-.B \-o
-option is given, the index will be named
-.BR @DEFAULT_INDEX_NAME@@INDEX_SUFFIX@ .
-.LP
-Bibliographic databases are divided into records by blank lines.
-Within a record, each fields starts with a
-.B %
-character at the beginning of a line.
-Fields have a one letter name which follows the
-.B %
-character.
-.LP
-The values set by the
-.BR \-c ,
-.BR \-n ,
-.BR \-l
-and
-.B \-t
-options are stored in the index;
-when the index is searched, keys will be discarded and truncated in a
-manner appropriate to these options;
-the original keys will be used for verifying that any record
-found using the index actually contains the keys.
-This means that a user of an index need not know whether these
-options were used in the creation of the index,
-provided that not all the keys to be searched for
-would have been discarded during indexing
-and that the user supplies at least the part of each key
-that would have remained after being truncated during indexing.
-The value set by the
-.B \-i
-option is also stored in the index
-and will be used in verifying records found using the index.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print the version number.
-.TP
-.B \-w
-Index whole files.
-Each file is a separate record.
-.TP
-.BI \-c file
-Read the list of common words from
-.I file
-instead of
-.BR @COMMON_WORDS_FILE@ .
-.TP
-.BI \-d dir
-Use
-.I dir
-as the pathname of the current working directory to store in the index,
-instead of the path printed by
-.BR pwd (1).
-Usually
-.I dir
-will be a symbolic link that points to the directory printed by
-.BR pwd (1).
-.TP
-.BI \-f file
-Read the files to be indexed from
-.IR file .
-If
-.I file
-is
-.BR \- ,
-files will be read from the standard input.
-The
-.B \-f
-option can be given at most once.
-.TP
-.BI \-i string
-Don't index the contents of fields whose names are in
-.IR string .
-Initially
-.I string
-is
-.BR XYZ .
-.TP
-.BI \-h n
-Use the first prime greater than or equal to
-.I n
-for the size of the hash table.
-Larger values of
-.I n
-will usually make searching faster,
-but will make the index larger
-and
-.B @g@indxbib
-use more memory.
-Initially
-.I n
-is 997.
-.TP
-.BI \-k n
-Use at most
-.I n
-keys per input record.
-Initially
-.I n
-is 100.
-.TP
-.BI \-l n
-Discard keys that are shorter than
-.IR n .
-Initially
-.I n
-is 3.
-.TP
-.BI \-n n
-Discard the
-.I n
-most common words.
-Initially
-.I n
-is 100.
-.TP
-.BI \-o basename
-The index should be named
-.IB basename @INDEX_SUFFIX@\fR.
-.TP
-.BI \-t n
-Truncate keys to
-.IR n .
-Initially
-.I n
-is 6.
-.SH FILES
-.TP \w'\fBindxbib\fIXXXXXX'u+2n
-.IB filename @INDEX_SUFFIX@
-Index.
-.TP
-.B @DEFAULT_INDEX_NAME@@INDEX_SUFFIX@
-Default index name.
-.TP
-.B @COMMON_WORDS_FILE@
-List of common words.
-.TP
-.BI indxbib XXXXXX
-Temporary file.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR @g@refer (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR lkbib (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@lookbib (@MAN1EXT@)
int fd = mkstemp(templ);
if (fd < 0)
fatal("cannot create temporary file: %1", strerror(errno));
- errno = 0;
- FILE *fp = fdopen(fd, "w+");
- if (!fp)
- fatal("fdopen: %1", strerror(errno));
#else /* not HAVE_MKSTEMP */
if (!mktemp(templ) || !templ[0])
fatal("cannot create file name for temporary file");
errno = 0;
- FILE *fp = fopen(templ, "w+");
- if (!fp)
+ int fd = open(templ, O_CREAT|O_EXCL|O_RDWR, S_IRUSR|S_IWUSR);
+ if (fd < 0)
fatal("cannot open `%1': %2", templ, strerror(errno));
#endif /* not HAVE_MKSTEMP */
+ errno = 0;
+ FILE *fp = fdopen(fd, "w+");
+ if (!fp)
+ fatal("fdopen: %1", strerror(errno));
if (unlink(templ) < 0)
error("cannot unlink `%1': %2", templ, strerror(errno));
a_delete templ;
PROG=lkbib
-MAN1=lkbib.n
+MAN1=lkbib.1
XLIBS=$(LIBBIB) $(LIBGROFF)
MLIB=$(LIBM)
OBJS=lkbib.o
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.ds g \" empty
+.ds G \" empty
+.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
+.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
+.de Tp
+.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
+.el .TP "\\$1"
+..
+.TH LKBIB @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+lkbib \- search bibliographic databases
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B lkbib
+[
+.B \-v
+]
+[
+.BI \-i fields
+]
+[
+.BI \-p filename
+]
+[
+.BI \-t n
+]
+.IR key \|.\|.\|.
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B lkbib
+searches bibliographic databases for references that contain the keys
+.IR key \|.\|.\|.
+and prints any references found on the standard output.
+.B lkbib
+will search any databases given by
+.B \-p
+options, and then a default database.
+The default database is taken from the
+.SB REFER
+environment variable if it is set,
+otherwise it is
+.BR @DEFAULT_INDEX@ .
+For each database
+.I filename
+to be searched,
+if an index
+.IB filename @INDEX_SUFFIX@
+created by
+.BR @g@indxbib (@MAN1EXT@)
+exists, then it will be searched instead;
+each index can cover multiple databases.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.B \-v
+Print the version number.
+.TP
+.BI \-p filename
+Search
+.IR filename .
+Multiple
+.B \-p
+options can be used.
+.TP
+.BI \-i string
+When searching files for which no index exists,
+ignore the contents of fields whose names are in
+.IR string .
+.TP
+.BI \-t n
+Only require the first
+.I n
+characters of keys to be given.
+Initially
+.I n
+is 6.
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+.TP \w'\fBREFER'u+2n
+.SB REFER
+Default database.
+.SH FILES
+.Tp \w'\fB@DEFAULT_INDEX@'u+2n
+.B @DEFAULT_INDEX@
+Default database to be used if the
+.SB REFER
+environment variable is not set.
+.IB filename @INDEX_SUFFIX@
+Index files.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR @g@refer (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@lookbib (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@indxbib (@MAN1EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.ds g \" empty
-.ds G \" empty
-.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
-.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
-.de Tp
-.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
-.el .TP "\\$1"
-..
-.TH LKBIB @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-lkbib \- search bibliographic databases
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B lkbib
-[
-.B \-v
-]
-[
-.BI \-i fields
-]
-[
-.BI \-p filename
-]
-[
-.BI \-t n
-]
-.IR key \|.\|.\|.
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B lkbib
-searches bibliographic databases for references that contain the keys
-.IR key \|.\|.\|.
-and prints any references found on the standard output.
-.B lkbib
-will search any databases given by
-.B \-p
-options, and then a default database.
-The default database is taken from the
-.SB REFER
-environment variable if it is set,
-otherwise it is
-.BR @DEFAULT_INDEX@ .
-For each database
-.I filename
-to be searched,
-if an index
-.IB filename @INDEX_SUFFIX@
-created by
-.BR @g@indxbib (@MAN1EXT@)
-exists, then it will be searched instead;
-each index can cover multiple databases.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print the version number.
-.TP
-.BI \-p filename
-Search
-.IR filename .
-Multiple
-.B \-p
-options can be used.
-.TP
-.BI \-i string
-When searching files for which no index exists,
-ignore the contents of fields whose names are in
-.IR string .
-.TP
-.BI \-t n
-Only require the first
-.I n
-characters of keys to be given.
-Initially
-.I n
-is 6.
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-.TP \w'\fBREFER'u+2n
-.SB REFER
-Default database.
-.SH FILES
-.Tp \w'\fB@DEFAULT_INDEX@'u+2n
-.B @DEFAULT_INDEX@
-Default database to be used if the
-.SB REFER
-environment variable is not set.
-.IB filename @INDEX_SUFFIX@
-Index files.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR @g@refer (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@lookbib (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@indxbib (@MAN1EXT@)
PROG=lookbib
-MAN1=lookbib.n
+MAN1=lookbib.1
XLIBS=$(LIBBIB) $(LIBGROFF)
MLIB=$(LIBM)
OBJS=lookbib.o
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.TH @G@LOOKBIB @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+@g@lookbib \- search bibliographic databases
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B @g@lookbib
+[
+.B \-v
+]
+[
+.BI \-i string
+]
+[
+.BI \-t n
+]
+.IR filename \|.\|.\|.
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+@g@lookbib prints a prompt on the standard error (unless the standard input is not a terminal),
+reads from the standard input a line containing a set of keywords,
+searches the bibliographic databases
+.IR filename \|.\|.\|.
+for references containing those keywords,
+prints any references found on the standard output,
+and repeats this process until the end of input.
+For each database
+.I filename
+to be searched,
+if an index
+.IB filename @INDEX_SUFFIX@
+created by
+.BR @g@indxbib (@MAN1EXT@)
+exists, then it will be searched instead;
+each index can cover multiple databases.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.B \-v
+Print the version number.
+.TP
+.BI \-i string
+When searching files for which no index exists,
+ignore the contents of fields whose names are in
+.IR string .
+.TP
+.BI \-t n
+Only require the first
+.I n
+characters of keys to be given.
+Initially
+.I n
+is 6.
+.SH FILES
+.TP \w'\fIfilename\fB@INDEX_SUFFIX@'u+2n
+.IB filename @INDEX_SUFFIX@
+Index files.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR @g@refer (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR lkbib (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@indxbib (@MAN1EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.TH @G@LOOKBIB @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-@g@lookbib \- search bibliographic databases
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B @g@lookbib
-[
-.B \-v
-]
-[
-.BI \-i string
-]
-[
-.BI \-t n
-]
-.IR filename \|.\|.\|.
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-@g@lookbib prints a prompt on the standard error (unless the standard input is not a terminal),
-reads from the standard input a line containing a set of keywords,
-searches the bibliographic databases
-.IR filename \|.\|.\|.
-for references containing those keywords,
-prints any references found on the standard output,
-and repeats this process until the end of input.
-For each database
-.I filename
-to be searched,
-if an index
-.IB filename @INDEX_SUFFIX@
-created by
-.BR @g@indxbib (@MAN1EXT@)
-exists, then it will be searched instead;
-each index can cover multiple databases.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print the version number.
-.TP
-.BI \-i string
-When searching files for which no index exists,
-ignore the contents of fields whose names are in
-.IR string .
-.TP
-.BI \-t n
-Only require the first
-.I n
-characters of keys to be given.
-Initially
-.I n
-is 6.
-.SH FILES
-.TP \w'\fIfilename\fB@INDEX_SUFFIX@'u+2n
-.IB filename @INDEX_SUFFIX@
-Index files.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR @g@refer (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR lkbib (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@indxbib (@MAN1EXT@)
-MAN5=groff_font.n groff_out.n
-MAN7=groff_char.n
+MAN5=groff_font.5 groff_out.5
+MAN7=groff_char.7
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.\" For best results, print this with groff.
+.ds aq \(aq
+.ie !\n(.g .if '\(aq'' .ds aq \'
+.el \{\
+. tr \(aq\(aq
+. if !c\(aq .ds aq \'
+.\}
+.if !\n(.g .ig
+.\" .Ac accented-char accent char
+.de Ac
+.char \\$1 \\$3\
+\k[acc]\
+\h'(u;-\w'\\$2'-\w'\\$3'/2+\\\\n[skw]+(\w'x'*0)-\\\\n[skw])'\
+\v'(u;\w'x'*0+\\\\n[rst]+(\w'\\$3'*0)-\\\\n[rst])'\
+\\$2\
+\v'(u;\w'x'*0-\\\\n[rst]+(\w'\\$3'*0)+\\\\n[rst])'\
+\h'|\\\\n[acc]u'
+.hcode \\$1\\$3
+..
+.Ac \(vc \(ah c
+.Ac \(vC \(ah C
+.TH GROFF_CHAR @MAN7EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+groff_char \- groff character names
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page lists the standard
+.B groff
+input characters.
+Only the characters that are available for the device that
+is being used to print this manual page will be displayed.
+The
+.I "Input code"
+column applies to characters which can be
+input with a single character, and gives the ISO Latin-1 code
+of that input character.
+The
+.I "PostScript name\"
+column gives the usual PostScript name of the output character.
+.LP
+The ISO Latin-1 no-break space (code 0240 octal) is equivalent to
+.BR \e (space).
+All other ISO Latin-1 characters print as themselves with the following
+exceptions:
+.B \`
+prints as `,
+.B \*(aq
+prints as ';
+the corresponding ISO Latin-1 characters can be obtained with
+.B \e`
+and
+.BR \e(aq .
+The ISO Latin-1 `Hyphen, Minus Sign' (code 45) prints as a hyphen;
+a minus sign can be obtained with
+.BR \e- .
+The ISO Latin-1 `Tilde' (code 126) prints as ~;
+the larger glyph can be obtained with
+.BR \e(ti .
+The ISO Latin-1 `Circumflex Accent' (code 94) prints as ^;
+a larger glyph can be obtained with
+.BR \e(ha .
+.sp
+'nf
+.nr Sp 3n
+.ta \w'\fIOutput'u+\n(Spu +\w'\fIInput'u+\n(Spu +\w'\fIInput'u+\n(Spu \
++\w'periodcentered'u+\n(Spu
+.de C0
+.C \\$1 "" \\$1 \\$2 "\\$3"
+..
+.de C1
+.C \e\\$1 "" \\\\\\$1 \\$2 "\\$3"
+..
+.de C2
+.C \e(\\$1 "" \\(\\$1 \\$2 "\\$3"
+..
+.if !\n(.g .ig
+.de CD
+.C \[char\\$1] \\$1 \[char\\$1] \\$2 "\\$3"
+..
+.do fspecial CR R
+.\" input-name decimal-code output-name ps-name description
+.if !\n(.g .ig
+.de C
+.if c\\$3 \{\
+.ft CR
+.tr `\`'\*(aq
+.in 0
+.di CH
+\&\\$1
+.br
+.di
+.in
+.ft
+.ds CH \\*(CH\
+.tr ``''
+\&\\$3\t\\*(CH\t\\$2\t\\$4\t\\$5
+.\}
+..
+.if \n(.g .ig
+.de C
+.if !'\\$3'' \{\
+.ft B
+.tr `\`'\*(aq
+.in 0
+.di CH
+\&\\$1
+.br
+.di
+.in
+.ft
+.ds CH \\*(CH\
+.tr ``''
+\&\\$3\t\\*(CH\t\\$2\t\\$4\t\\$5
+.\}
+..
+.wh \n(nlu+\n(.tu-\n(.Vu Fo
+.de Fo
+'bp
+.He
+..
+.de He
+.ft I
+Output Input Input PostScript Notes
+ name code name
+.ft
+.LP
+'nf
+..
+.He
+.CD 33 exclam
+.CD 34 quotedbl
+.CD 35 numbersign
+.CD 36 dollar
+.CD 37 percent
+.CD 38 ampersand
+.CD 39 quoteright
+.CD 40 parenleft
+.CD 41 parenright
+.CD 42 asterisk
+.CD 43 plus
+.CD 44 comma
+.CD 45 hyphen
+.CD 46 period
+.CD 47 slash
+.CD 58 colon
+.CD 59 semicolon
+.CD 60 less
+.CD 61 equal
+.CD 62 greater
+.CD 63 question
+.CD 64 at
+.CD 91 bracketleft
+.CD 92 backslash
+.CD 93 bracketright
+.CD 94 circumflex "circumflex accent"
+.CD 95 underscore
+.CD 96 quoteleft
+.CD 123 braceleft
+.CD 124 bar
+.CD 125 braceright
+.CD 126 tilde "tilde accent"
+.CD 161 exclamdown
+.CD 162 cent
+.CD 163 sterling
+.CD 164 currency
+.CD 165 yen
+.CD 166 brokenbar
+.CD 167 section
+.CD 168 dieresis
+.CD 169 copyright
+.CD 170 ordfeminine
+.CD 171 guillemotleft
+.CD 172 logicalnot
+.CD 173 hyphen
+.CD 174 registered
+.CD 175 macron
+.CD 176 degree
+.CD 177 plusminus
+.CD 178 twosuperior
+.CD 179 threesuperior
+.CD 180 acute "acute accent"
+.CD 181 mu
+.CD 182 paragraph
+.CD 183 periodcentered
+.CD 184 cedilla
+.CD 185 onesuperior
+.CD 186 ordmasculine
+.CD 187 guillemotright
+.CD 188 onequarter
+.CD 189 onehalf
+.CD 190 threequarters
+.CD 191 questiondown
+.CD 192 Agrave
+.CD 193 Aacute
+.CD 194 Acircumflex
+.CD 195 Atilde
+.CD 196 Adieresis
+.CD 197 Aring
+.CD 198 AE
+.CD 199 Ccedilla
+.CD 200 Egrave
+.CD 201 Eacute
+.CD 202 Ecircumflex
+.CD 203 Edieresis
+.CD 204 Igrave
+.CD 205 Iacute
+.CD 206 Icircumflex
+.CD 207 Idieresis
+.CD 208 Eth
+.CD 209 Ntilde
+.CD 210 Ograve
+.CD 211 Oacute
+.CD 212 Ocircumflex
+.CD 213 Otilde
+.CD 214 Odieresis
+.CD 215 multiply
+.CD 216 Oslash
+.CD 217 Ugrave
+.CD 218 Uacute
+.CD 219 Ucircumflex
+.CD 220 Udieresis
+.CD 221 Yacute
+.CD 222 Thorn
+.CD 223 germandbls
+.CD 224 agrave
+.CD 225 aacute
+.CD 226 acircumflex
+.CD 227 atilde
+.CD 228 adieresis
+.CD 229 aring
+.CD 230 ae
+.CD 231 ccedilla
+.CD 232 egrave
+.CD 233 eacute
+.CD 234 ecircumflex
+.CD 235 edieresis
+.CD 236 igrave
+.CD 237 iacute
+.CD 238 icircumflex
+.CD 239 idieresis
+.CD 240 eth
+.CD 241 ntilde
+.CD 242 ograve
+.CD 243 oacute
+.CD 244 ocircumflex
+.CD 245 otilde
+.CD 246 odieresis
+.CD 247 divide
+.CD 248 oslash
+.CD 249 ugrave
+.CD 250 uacute
+.CD 251 ucircumflex
+.CD 252 udieresis
+.CD 253 yacute
+.CD 254 thorn
+.CD 255 ydieresis
+.C2 -D Eth "Icelandic uppercase eth"
+.C2 Sd eth "Icelandic lowercase eth"
+.C2 TP Thorn "Icelandic uppercase thorn"
+.C2 Tp thorn "Icelandic lowercase thorn"
+.C2 AE AE
+.C2 ae ae
+.C2 OE OE
+.C2 oe oe
+.C2 IJ IJ "Dutch IJ ligature"
+.C2 ij ij "Dutch ij ligature"
+.C2 ss germandbls
+.C2 'A Aacute
+.C2 'C Cacute
+.C2 'E Eacute
+.C2 'I Iacute
+.C2 'O Oacute
+.C2 'U Uacute
+.C2 'a aacute
+.C2 'c cacute
+.C2 'e eacute
+.C2 'i iacute
+.C2 'o oacute
+.C2 'u uacute
+.C2 :A Adieresis
+.C2 :E Edieresis
+.C2 :I Idieresis
+.C2 :O Odieresis
+.C2 :U Udieresis
+.C2 :Y Ydieresis
+.C2 :a adieresis
+.C2 :e edieresis
+.C2 :i idieresis
+.C2 :o odieresis
+.C2 :u udieresis
+.C2 :y ydieresis
+.C2 ^A Acircumflex
+.C2 ^E Ecircumflex
+.C2 ^I Icircumflex
+.C2 ^O Ocircumflex
+.C2 ^U Ucircumflex
+.C2 ^a acircumflex
+.C2 ^e ecircumflex
+.C2 ^i icircumflex
+.C2 ^o ocircumflex
+.C2 ^u ucircumflex
+.C2 `A Agrave
+.C2 `E Egrave
+.C2 `I Igrave
+.C2 `O Ograve
+.C2 `U Ugrave
+.C2 `a agrave
+.C2 `e egrave
+.C2 `i igrave
+.C2 `o ograve
+.C2 `u ugrave
+.C2 ~A Atilde
+.C2 ~N Ntilde
+.C2 ~O Otilde
+.C2 ~a atilde
+.C2 ~n ntilde
+.C2 ~o otilde
+.C2 vS Scaron
+.C2 vs scaron
+.C2 vZ Zcaron
+.C2 vz zcaron
+.C2 ,C Ccedilla
+.C2 ,c ccedilla
+.C2 /L Lslash "Polish L with a slash"
+.C2 /l lslash "Polish l with a slash"
+.C2 /O Oslash
+.C2 /o oslash
+.C2 oA Aring
+.C2 oa aring
+.C2 a" hungarumlaut "Hungarian umlaut"
+.C2 a- macron "macron or bar accent"
+.C2 a. dotaccent "dot accent"
+.C2 a^ circumflex "circumflex accent"
+.C2 aa acute "acute accent"
+.C2 ga grave "grave accent"
+.C2 ab breve "breve accent"
+.C2 ac cedilla "cedilla accent"
+.C2 ad dieresis "umlaut or dieresis"
+.C2 ah caron "h\('a\(vcek accent"
+.C2 ao ring "ring or circle accent"
+.C2 a~ tilde "tilde accent"
+.C2 ho ogonek "hook or ogonek accent"
+.C2 .i dotlessi "i without a dot"
+.C2 .j dotlessj "j without a dot"
+.C2 Cs currency "Scandinavian currency sign"
+.C2 Do dollar
+.C2 Po sterling
+.C2 Ye yen
+.C2 Fn florin
+.C2 ct cent
+.C2 Fo guillemotleft
+.C2 Fc guillemotright
+.C2 fo guilsinglleft
+.C2 fc guilsinglright
+.C2 r! exclamdown
+.C2 r? questiondown
+.C2 ff ff "ff ligature"
+.C2 fi fi "fi ligature"
+.C2 fl fl "fl ligature"
+.C2 Fi ffi "ffi ligature"
+.C2 Fl ffl "ffl ligature"
+.C2 OK \& "check mark, tick"
+.C2 Of ordfeminine
+.C2 Om ordmasculine
+.C2 S1 onesuperior
+.C2 S2 twosuperior
+.C2 S3 threesuperior
+.C2 <- arrowleft
+.C2 -> arrowright
+.C2 <> arrowboth "horizontal double-headed arrow"
+.C2 da arrowdown
+.C2 ua arrowup
+.C2 va \& "vertical double-headed arrow"
+.C2 lA arrowdblleft
+.C2 rA arrowdblright
+.C2 hA arrowdblboth "horizontal double-headed double arrow"
+.C2 dA arrowdbldown
+.C2 uA arrowdblup
+.C2 vA \& "vertical double-headed double arrow"
+.C2 ba bar
+.C2 bb brokenbar
+.C2 br br "box rule with traditional troff metrics"
+.C2 ru ru "baseline rule"
+.C2 ul ul "underline with traditional troff metrics"
+.C2 bv bv "bold vertical"
+.C2 bs bell
+.C2 ci circle
+.C2 bu bullet
+.C2 co copyright
+.C2 rg registered
+.C2 tm trademark
+.C2 dd daggerdbl "double dagger sign"
+.C2 dg dagger
+.C2 ps paragraph
+.C2 sc section
+.C2 de degree
+.C2 em emdash "em dash"
+.C2 en endash "en dash"
+.C2 %0 perthousand "per thousand, per mille sign"
+.C2 12 onehalf
+.C2 14 onequarter
+.C2 34 threequarters
+.C2 f/ fraction "bar for fractions"
+.C2 fm minute "footmark, prime"
+.C2 sd second
+.C2 ha asciicircum "\s-2ASCII\s+2 circumflex, hat, caret"
+.C2 ti asciitilde "\s-2ASCII\s0 tilde, large tilde"
+.C2 hy hyphen
+.C2 lB bracketleft
+.C2 rB bracketright
+.C2 lC braceleft
+.C2 rC braceright
+.C2 la angleleft "left angle bracket"
+.C2 ra angleright "right angle bracket"
+.C2 lh handleft
+.C2 rh handright
+.C2 Bq quotedblbase "low double comma quote"
+.C2 bq quotesinglbase "low single comma quote"
+.C2 lq quotedblleft
+.C2 rq quotedblright
+.C2 oq quoteleft "single open quote"
+.C2 aq quotesingle "apostrophe quote"
+.C2 or bar
+.C2 at at
+.C1 - minus "minus sign from current font"
+.C2 sh numbersign
+.C2 sl slash
+.C2 rs backslash
+.C2 sq square
+.C2 3d therefore
+.C2 tf therefore
+.C2 *A Alpha
+.C2 *B Beta
+.C2 *C Xi
+.C2 *D Delta
+.C2 *E Epsilon
+.C2 *F Phi
+.C2 *G Gamma
+.C2 *H Theta
+.C2 *I Iota
+.C2 *K Kappa
+.C2 *L Lambda
+.C2 *M Mu
+.C2 *N Nu
+.C2 *O Omicron
+.C2 *P Pi
+.C2 *Q Psi
+.C2 *R Rho
+.C2 *S Sigma
+.C2 *T Tau
+.C2 *U Upsilon
+.C2 *W Omega
+.C2 *X Chi
+.C2 *Y Eta
+.C2 *Z Zeta
+.C2 *a alpha
+.C2 *b beta
+.C2 *c xi
+.C2 *d delta
+.C2 *e epsilon
+.C2 *f phi
+.C2 +f phi1 "variant phi"
+.C2 *g gamma
+.C2 *h theta
+.C2 +h theta1 "variant theta"
+.C2 *i iota
+.C2 *k kappa
+.C2 *l lambda
+.C2 *m mu
+.C2 *n nu
+.C2 *o omicron
+.C2 *p pi
+.C2 +p omega1 "variant pi, looking like omega"
+.C2 *q psi
+.C2 *r rho
+.C2 *s sigma
+.C2 *t tau
+.C2 *u upsilon
+.C2 *w omega
+.C2 *x chi
+.C2 *y eta
+.C2 *z zeta
+.C2 ts sigma1 "terminal sigma"
+.C2 ~~ approxequal
+.C2 ~= approxequal
+.C2 != notequal
+.C2 ** asteriskmath
+.C2 -+ minusplus
+.C2 +- plusminus
+.C2 <= lessequal
+.C2 == equivalence
+.C2 =~ congruent
+.C2 >= greaterequal
+.C2 AN logicaland
+.C2 OR logicalor
+.C2 no logicalnot
+.C2 te existential "there exists, existential quantifier"
+.C2 fa universal "for all, universal quantifier"
+.C2 Ah aleph
+.C2 Im Ifraktur "Fraktur I, imaginary"
+.C2 Re Rfraktur "Fraktur R, real"
+.C2 if infinity
+.C2 md dotmath
+.C2 mo element
+.C2 mu multiply
+.C2 nb notsubset
+.C2 nc notpropersuperset
+.C2 ne notequivalence
+.C2 nm notelement
+.C2 pl plusmath "plus sign in special font"
+.C2 eq equalmath "equals sign in special font"
+.C2 pt proportional
+.C2 pp perpendicular
+.C2 sb propersubset
+.C2 sp propersuperset
+.C2 ib reflexsubset
+.C2 ip reflexsuperset
+.C2 ap similar
+.C2 pd partialdiff "partial differentiation sign"
+.C2 c* circlemultiply "multiply sign in a circle"
+.C2 c+ circleplus "plus sign in a circle"
+.C2 ca intersection "intersection, cap"
+.C2 cu union "union, cup"
+.C2 di divide "division sign"
+.C2 -h hbar
+.C2 gr gradient
+.C2 es emptyset
+.C2 CL club "club suit"
+.C2 SP spade "spade suit"
+.C2 HE heart "heart suit"
+.C2 DI diamond "diamond suit"
+.C2 CR carriagereturn "carriage return symbol"
+.C2 st suchthat
+.C2 /_ angle
+.C2 << "" "much less"
+.C2 >> "" "much greater"
+.C2 wp weierstrass "Weierstrass p"
+.C2 lz lozenge
+.C2 an arrowhorizex "horizontal arrow extension"
+.ch Fo
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@)
+.br
+.IR "An extension to the troff character set for Europe" ,
+E.G. Keizer, K.J. Simonsen, J. Akkerhuis,
+EUUG Newsletter, Volume 9, No. 2, Summer 1989
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.\" For best results, print this with groff.
-.ds aq \(aq
-.ie !\n(.g .if '\(aq'' .ds aq \'
-.el \{\
-. tr \(aq\(aq
-. if !c\(aq .ds aq \'
-.\}
-.if !\n(.g .ig
-.\" .Ac accented-char accent char
-.de Ac
-.char \\$1 \\$3\
-\k[acc]\
-\h'(u;-\w'\\$2'-\w'\\$3'/2+\\\\n[skw]+(\w'x'*0)-\\\\n[skw])'\
-\v'(u;\w'x'*0+\\\\n[rst]+(\w'\\$3'*0)-\\\\n[rst])'\
-\\$2\
-\v'(u;\w'x'*0-\\\\n[rst]+(\w'\\$3'*0)+\\\\n[rst])'\
-\h'|\\\\n[acc]u'
-.hcode \\$1\\$3
-..
-.Ac \(vc \(ah c
-.Ac \(vC \(ah C
-.TH GROFF_CHAR @MAN7EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-groff_char \- groff character names
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page lists the standard
-.B groff
-input characters.
-Only the characters that are available for the device that
-is being used to print this manual page will be displayed.
-The
-.I "Input code"
-column applies to characters which can be
-input with a single character, and gives the ISO Latin-1 code
-of that input character.
-The
-.I "PostScript name\"
-column gives the usual PostScript name of the output character.
-.LP
-The ISO Latin-1 no-break space (code 0240 octal) is equivalent to
-.BR \e (space).
-All other ISO Latin-1 characters print as themselves with the following
-exceptions:
-.B \`
-prints as `,
-.B \*(aq
-prints as ';
-the corresponding ISO Latin-1 characters can be obtained with
-.B \e`
-and
-.BR \e(aq .
-The ISO Latin-1 `Hyphen, Minus Sign' (code 45) prints as a hyphen;
-a minus sign can be obtained with
-.BR \e- .
-The ISO Latin-1 `Tilde' (code 126) prints as ~;
-the larger glyph can be obtained with
-.BR \e(ti .
-The ISO Latin-1 `Circumflex Accent' (code 94) prints as ^;
-a larger glyph can be obtained with
-.BR \e(ha .
-.sp
-'nf
-.nr Sp 3n
-.ta \w'\fIOutput'u+\n(Spu +\w'\fIInput'u+\n(Spu +\w'\fIInput'u+\n(Spu \
-+\w'periodcentered'u+\n(Spu
-.de C0
-.C \\$1 "" \\$1 \\$2 "\\$3"
-..
-.de C1
-.C \e\\$1 "" \\\\\\$1 \\$2 "\\$3"
-..
-.de C2
-.C \e(\\$1 "" \\(\\$1 \\$2 "\\$3"
-..
-.if !\n(.g .ig
-.de CD
-.C \[char\\$1] \\$1 \[char\\$1] \\$2 "\\$3"
-..
-.do fspecial CR R
-.\" input-name decimal-code output-name ps-name description
-.if !\n(.g .ig
-.de C
-.if c\\$3 \{\
-.ft CR
-.tr `\`'\*(aq
-.in 0
-.di CH
-\&\\$1
-.br
-.di
-.in
-.ft
-.ds CH \\*(CH\
-.tr ``''
-\&\\$3\t\\*(CH\t\\$2\t\\$4\t\\$5
-.\}
-..
-.if \n(.g .ig
-.de C
-.if !'\\$3'' \{\
-.ft B
-.tr `\`'\*(aq
-.in 0
-.di CH
-\&\\$1
-.br
-.di
-.in
-.ft
-.ds CH \\*(CH\
-.tr ``''
-\&\\$3\t\\*(CH\t\\$2\t\\$4\t\\$5
-.\}
-..
-.wh \n(nlu+\n(.tu-\n(.Vu Fo
-.de Fo
-'bp
-.He
-..
-.de He
-.ft I
-Output Input Input PostScript Notes
- name code name
-.ft
-.LP
-'nf
-..
-.He
-.CD 33 exclam
-.CD 34 quotedbl
-.CD 35 numbersign
-.CD 36 dollar
-.CD 37 percent
-.CD 38 ampersand
-.CD 39 quoteright
-.CD 40 parenleft
-.CD 41 parenright
-.CD 42 asterisk
-.CD 43 plus
-.CD 44 comma
-.CD 45 hyphen
-.CD 46 period
-.CD 47 slash
-.CD 58 colon
-.CD 59 semicolon
-.CD 60 less
-.CD 61 equal
-.CD 62 greater
-.CD 63 question
-.CD 64 at
-.CD 91 bracketleft
-.CD 92 backslash
-.CD 93 bracketright
-.CD 94 circumflex "circumflex accent"
-.CD 95 underscore
-.CD 96 quoteleft
-.CD 123 braceleft
-.CD 124 bar
-.CD 125 braceright
-.CD 126 tilde "tilde accent"
-.CD 161 exclamdown
-.CD 162 cent
-.CD 163 sterling
-.CD 164 currency
-.CD 165 yen
-.CD 166 brokenbar
-.CD 167 section
-.CD 168 dieresis
-.CD 169 copyright
-.CD 170 ordfeminine
-.CD 171 guillemotleft
-.CD 172 logicalnot
-.CD 173 hyphen
-.CD 174 registered
-.CD 175 macron
-.CD 176 degree
-.CD 177 plusminus
-.CD 178 twosuperior
-.CD 179 threesuperior
-.CD 180 acute "acute accent"
-.CD 181 mu
-.CD 182 paragraph
-.CD 183 periodcentered
-.CD 184 cedilla
-.CD 185 onesuperior
-.CD 186 ordmasculine
-.CD 187 guillemotright
-.CD 188 onequarter
-.CD 189 onehalf
-.CD 190 threequarters
-.CD 191 questiondown
-.CD 192 Agrave
-.CD 193 Aacute
-.CD 194 Acircumflex
-.CD 195 Atilde
-.CD 196 Adieresis
-.CD 197 Aring
-.CD 198 AE
-.CD 199 Ccedilla
-.CD 200 Egrave
-.CD 201 Eacute
-.CD 202 Ecircumflex
-.CD 203 Edieresis
-.CD 204 Igrave
-.CD 205 Iacute
-.CD 206 Icircumflex
-.CD 207 Idieresis
-.CD 208 Eth
-.CD 209 Ntilde
-.CD 210 Ograve
-.CD 211 Oacute
-.CD 212 Ocircumflex
-.CD 213 Otilde
-.CD 214 Odieresis
-.CD 215 multiply
-.CD 216 Oslash
-.CD 217 Ugrave
-.CD 218 Uacute
-.CD 219 Ucircumflex
-.CD 220 Udieresis
-.CD 221 Yacute
-.CD 222 Thorn
-.CD 223 germandbls
-.CD 224 agrave
-.CD 225 aacute
-.CD 226 acircumflex
-.CD 227 atilde
-.CD 228 adieresis
-.CD 229 aring
-.CD 230 ae
-.CD 231 ccedilla
-.CD 232 egrave
-.CD 233 eacute
-.CD 234 ecircumflex
-.CD 235 edieresis
-.CD 236 igrave
-.CD 237 iacute
-.CD 238 icircumflex
-.CD 239 idieresis
-.CD 240 eth
-.CD 241 ntilde
-.CD 242 ograve
-.CD 243 oacute
-.CD 244 ocircumflex
-.CD 245 otilde
-.CD 246 odieresis
-.CD 247 divide
-.CD 248 oslash
-.CD 249 ugrave
-.CD 250 uacute
-.CD 251 ucircumflex
-.CD 252 udieresis
-.CD 253 yacute
-.CD 254 thorn
-.CD 255 ydieresis
-.C2 -D Eth "Icelandic uppercase eth"
-.C2 Sd eth "Icelandic lowercase eth"
-.C2 TP Thorn "Icelandic uppercase thorn"
-.C2 Tp thorn "Icelandic lowercase thorn"
-.C2 AE AE
-.C2 ae ae
-.C2 OE OE
-.C2 oe oe
-.C2 IJ IJ "Dutch IJ ligature"
-.C2 ij ij "Dutch ij ligature"
-.C2 ss germandbls
-.C2 'A Aacute
-.C2 'C Cacute
-.C2 'E Eacute
-.C2 'I Iacute
-.C2 'O Oacute
-.C2 'U Uacute
-.C2 'a aacute
-.C2 'c cacute
-.C2 'e eacute
-.C2 'i iacute
-.C2 'o oacute
-.C2 'u uacute
-.C2 :A Adieresis
-.C2 :E Edieresis
-.C2 :I Idieresis
-.C2 :O Odieresis
-.C2 :U Udieresis
-.C2 :Y Ydieresis
-.C2 :a adieresis
-.C2 :e edieresis
-.C2 :i idieresis
-.C2 :o odieresis
-.C2 :u udieresis
-.C2 :y ydieresis
-.C2 ^A Acircumflex
-.C2 ^E Ecircumflex
-.C2 ^I Icircumflex
-.C2 ^O Ocircumflex
-.C2 ^U Ucircumflex
-.C2 ^a acircumflex
-.C2 ^e ecircumflex
-.C2 ^i icircumflex
-.C2 ^o ocircumflex
-.C2 ^u ucircumflex
-.C2 `A Agrave
-.C2 `E Egrave
-.C2 `I Igrave
-.C2 `O Ograve
-.C2 `U Ugrave
-.C2 `a agrave
-.C2 `e egrave
-.C2 `i igrave
-.C2 `o ograve
-.C2 `u ugrave
-.C2 ~A Atilde
-.C2 ~N Ntilde
-.C2 ~O Otilde
-.C2 ~a atilde
-.C2 ~n ntilde
-.C2 ~o otilde
-.C2 vS Scaron
-.C2 vs scaron
-.C2 vZ Zcaron
-.C2 vz zcaron
-.C2 ,C Ccedilla
-.C2 ,c ccedilla
-.C2 /L Lslash "Polish L with a slash"
-.C2 /l lslash "Polish l with a slash"
-.C2 /O Oslash
-.C2 /o oslash
-.C2 oA Aring
-.C2 oa aring
-.C2 a" hungarumlaut "Hungarian umlaut"
-.C2 a- macron "macron or bar accent"
-.C2 a. dotaccent "dot accent"
-.C2 a^ circumflex "circumflex accent"
-.C2 aa acute "acute accent"
-.C2 ga grave "grave accent"
-.C2 ab breve "breve accent"
-.C2 ac cedilla "cedilla accent"
-.C2 ad dieresis "umlaut or dieresis"
-.C2 ah caron "h\('a\(vcek accent"
-.C2 ao ring "ring or circle accent"
-.C2 a~ tilde "tilde accent"
-.C2 ho ogonek "hook or ogonek accent"
-.C2 .i dotlessi "i without a dot"
-.C2 .j dotlessj "j without a dot"
-.C2 Cs currency "Scandinavian currency sign"
-.C2 Do dollar
-.C2 Po sterling
-.C2 Ye yen
-.C2 Fn florin
-.C2 ct cent
-.C2 Fo guillemotleft
-.C2 Fc guillemotright
-.C2 fo guilsinglleft
-.C2 fc guilsinglright
-.C2 r! exclamdown
-.C2 r? questiondown
-.C2 ff ff "ff ligature"
-.C2 fi fi "fi ligature"
-.C2 fl fl "fl ligature"
-.C2 Fi ffi "ffi ligature"
-.C2 Fl ffl "ffl ligature"
-.C2 OK \& "check mark, tick"
-.C2 Of ordfeminine
-.C2 Om ordmasculine
-.C2 S1 onesuperior
-.C2 S2 twosuperior
-.C2 S3 threesuperior
-.C2 <- arrowleft
-.C2 -> arrowright
-.C2 <> arrowboth "horizontal double-headed arrow"
-.C2 da arrowdown
-.C2 ua arrowup
-.C2 va \& "vertical double-headed arrow"
-.C2 lA arrowdblleft
-.C2 rA arrowdblright
-.C2 hA arrowdblboth "horizontal double-headed double arrow"
-.C2 dA arrowdbldown
-.C2 uA arrowdblup
-.C2 vA \& "vertical double-headed double arrow"
-.C2 ba bar
-.C2 bb brokenbar
-.C2 br br "box rule with traditional troff metrics"
-.C2 ru ru "baseline rule"
-.C2 ul ul "underline with traditional troff metrics"
-.C2 bv bv "bold vertical"
-.C2 bs bell
-.C2 ci circle
-.C2 bu bullet
-.C2 co copyright
-.C2 rg registered
-.C2 tm trademark
-.C2 dd daggerdbl "double dagger sign"
-.C2 dg dagger
-.C2 ps paragraph
-.C2 sc section
-.C2 de degree
-.C2 em emdash "em dash"
-.C2 en endash "en dash"
-.C2 %0 perthousand "per thousand, per mille sign"
-.C2 12 onehalf
-.C2 14 onequarter
-.C2 34 threequarters
-.C2 f/ fraction "bar for fractions"
-.C2 fm minute "footmark, prime"
-.C2 sd second
-.C2 ha asciicircum "\s-2ASCII\s+2 circumflex, hat, caret"
-.C2 ti asciitilde "\s-2ASCII\s0 tilde, large tilde"
-.C2 hy hyphen
-.C2 lB bracketleft
-.C2 rB bracketright
-.C2 lC braceleft
-.C2 rC braceright
-.C2 la angleleft "left angle bracket"
-.C2 ra angleright "right angle bracket"
-.C2 lh handleft
-.C2 rh handright
-.C2 Bq quotedblbase "low double comma quote"
-.C2 bq quotesinglbase "low single comma quote"
-.C2 lq quotedblleft
-.C2 rq quotedblright
-.C2 oq quoteleft "single open quote"
-.C2 aq quotesingle "apostrophe quote"
-.C2 or bar
-.C2 at at
-.C1 - minus "minus sign from current font"
-.C2 sh numbersign
-.C2 sl slash
-.C2 rs backslash
-.C2 sq square
-.C2 3d therefore
-.C2 tf therefore
-.C2 *A Alpha
-.C2 *B Beta
-.C2 *C Xi
-.C2 *D Delta
-.C2 *E Epsilon
-.C2 *F Phi
-.C2 *G Gamma
-.C2 *H Theta
-.C2 *I Iota
-.C2 *K Kappa
-.C2 *L Lambda
-.C2 *M Mu
-.C2 *N Nu
-.C2 *O Omicron
-.C2 *P Pi
-.C2 *Q Psi
-.C2 *R Rho
-.C2 *S Sigma
-.C2 *T Tau
-.C2 *U Upsilon
-.C2 *W Omega
-.C2 *X Chi
-.C2 *Y Eta
-.C2 *Z Zeta
-.C2 *a alpha
-.C2 *b beta
-.C2 *c xi
-.C2 *d delta
-.C2 *e epsilon
-.C2 *f phi
-.C2 +f phi1 "variant phi"
-.C2 *g gamma
-.C2 *h theta
-.C2 +h theta1 "variant theta"
-.C2 *i iota
-.C2 *k kappa
-.C2 *l lambda
-.C2 *m mu
-.C2 *n nu
-.C2 *o omicron
-.C2 *p pi
-.C2 +p omega1 "variant pi, looking like omega"
-.C2 *q psi
-.C2 *r rho
-.C2 *s sigma
-.C2 *t tau
-.C2 *u upsilon
-.C2 *w omega
-.C2 *x chi
-.C2 *y eta
-.C2 *z zeta
-.C2 ts sigma1 "terminal sigma"
-.C2 ~~ approxequal
-.C2 ~= approxequal
-.C2 != notequal
-.C2 ** asteriskmath
-.C2 -+ minusplus
-.C2 +- plusminus
-.C2 <= lessequal
-.C2 == equivalence
-.C2 =~ congruent
-.C2 >= greaterequal
-.C2 AN logicaland
-.C2 OR logicalor
-.C2 no logicalnot
-.C2 te existential "there exists, existential quantifier"
-.C2 fa universal "for all, universal quantifier"
-.C2 Ah aleph
-.C2 Im Ifraktur "Fraktur I, imaginary"
-.C2 Re Rfraktur "Fraktur R, real"
-.C2 if infinity
-.C2 md dotmath
-.C2 mo element
-.C2 mu multiply
-.C2 nb notsubset
-.C2 nc notpropersuperset
-.C2 ne notequivalence
-.C2 nm notelement
-.C2 pl plusmath "plus sign in special font"
-.C2 eq equalmath "equals sign in special font"
-.C2 pt proportional
-.C2 pp perpendicular
-.C2 sb propersubset
-.C2 sp propersuperset
-.C2 ib reflexsubset
-.C2 ip reflexsuperset
-.C2 ap similar
-.C2 pd partialdiff "partial differentiation sign"
-.C2 c* circlemultiply "multiply sign in a circle"
-.C2 c+ circleplus "plus sign in a circle"
-.C2 ca intersection "intersection, cap"
-.C2 cu union "union, cup"
-.C2 di divide "division sign"
-.C2 -h hbar
-.C2 gr gradient
-.C2 es emptyset
-.C2 CL club "club suit"
-.C2 SP spade "spade suit"
-.C2 HE heart "heart suit"
-.C2 DI diamond "diamond suit"
-.C2 CR carriagereturn "carriage return symbol"
-.C2 st suchthat
-.C2 /_ angle
-.C2 << "" "much less"
-.C2 >> "" "much greater"
-.C2 wp weierstrass "Weierstrass p"
-.C2 lz lozenge
-.C2 an arrowhorizex "horizontal arrow extension"
-.ch Fo
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@)
-.br
-.IR "An extension to the troff character set for Europe" ,
-E.G. Keizer, K.J. Simonsen, J. Akkerhuis,
-EUUG Newsletter, Volume 9, No. 2, Summer 1989
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.de TQ
+.br
+.ns
+.TP \\$1
+..
+.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
+.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
+.de Tp
+.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
+.el .TP "\\$1"
+..
+.TH GROFF_FONT @MAN5EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+groff_font \- format of groff device and font description files
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The groff font format is roughly a superset of the ditroff
+font format.
+Unlike the ditroff font format, there is no associated binary
+format.
+The font files for device
+.I name
+are stored in a directory
+.BI dev name.
+There are two types of file: a
+device description file called
+.B DESC
+and for each font
+.I F
+a font file called
+.IR F .
+These are text files;
+there is no associated binary format.
+.SS DESC file format
+The DESC file can contain the following types of line:
+.TP
+.BI res\ n
+There are
+.I n
+machine units per inch.
+.TP
+.BI hor\ n
+The horizontal resolution is
+.I n
+machine units.
+.TP
+.BI vert\ n
+The vertical resolution is
+.I n
+machine units.
+.TP
+.BI sizescale\ n
+The scale factor for pointsizes.
+By default this has a value of 1.
+One
+.I
+scaled point
+is equal to
+one
+.RI point/ n .
+The arguments to the
+.B unitwidth
+and
+.B sizes
+commands are given in scaled points.
+.TP
+.BI unitwidth\ n
+Quantities in the font files are given in machine units
+for fonts whose point size is
+.I n
+scaled points.
+.TP
+.B tcommand
+This means that the postprocessor can handle the
+.B t
+and
+.B u
+output commands.
+.TP
+.BI sizes\ s1\ s2\|.\|.\|.\|sn\ 0
+This means that the device has fonts at
+.IR s1 ,
+.IR s2 ,\|.\|.\|.\| sn
+scaled points.
+The list of sizes must be terminated by a
+.BR 0 .
+Each
+.BI s i
+can also be a range of sizes
+.IR m \- n .
+The list can extend over more than one line.
+.TP
+.BI styles\ S1\ S2\|.\|.\|.\|Sm
+The first
+.I m
+font positions will be associated with styles
+.IR S1\|.\|.\|.\|Sm .
+.TP
+.BI fonts\ n\ F1\ F2\ F3\|.\|.\|.\|Fn
+Fonts
+.I F1\|.\|.\|.\|Fn
+will be mounted in the font positions
+.IR m +1,\|.\|.\|., m + n
+where
+.I m
+is the number of styles.
+This command may extend over more than one line.
+A font name of
+.B 0
+will cause no font to be mounted on the corresponding font position.
+.TP
+.BI family\ fam
+The default font family is
+.IR fam .
+.TP
+.B charset
+This line and everything following in the file are ignored.
+It is allowed for the sake of backwards compatibility.
+.LP
+The res, unitwidth, fonts and sizes lines are compulsory.
+Other commands are ignored by
+.B troff
+but may be used by postprocessors to store arbitrary information
+about the device in the DESC file.
+.SS Font file format
+A font file has two sections. The first section is a sequence
+of lines each containing a sequence of blank delimited
+words; the first word in the line is a key, and subsequent
+words give a value for that key.
+.TP
+.BI name\ F
+The name of the font is
+.IR F .
+.TP
+.BI spacewidth\ n
+The normal width of a space is
+.IR n .
+.TP
+.BI slant\ n
+The characters of the font have a slant of
+.I n
+degrees. (Positive means forward.)
+.TP
+.BI ligatures\ lig1\ lig2\|.\|.\|.\|lign\ \fR[ 0 \fR]
+Characters
+.IR lig1 ,
+.IR lig2 ,\|.\|.\|., lign
+are ligatures; possible ligatures are
+.BR ff ,
+.BR fi ,
+.BR fl
+and
+.BR ffl .
+For backwards compatibility, the list of ligatures may be terminated
+with a
+.BR 0.
+The list of ligatures may not extend over more than one line.
+.TP
+.B special
+The font is
+.IR special ;
+this means that when a character is requested that is not present in
+the current font, it will be searched for in any special fonts that
+are mounted.
+.LP
+Other commands are ignored by
+.B troff
+but may be used by postprocessors to store arbitrary information
+about the font in the font file.
+.LP
+The first section can contain comments which start with the
+.B #
+character and extend to the end of a line.
+.LP
+The second section contains one or two subsections.
+It must contain a
+.I charset
+subsection
+and it may also contain a
+.I kernpairs
+subsection.
+These subsections can appear in any order.
+Each subsection starts with a word on a line by itself.
+.LP
+The word
+.B charset
+starts the charset subsection.
+The
+.B charset
+line is followed by a sequence of lines.
+Each line gives information for one character.
+A line comprises a number of fields separated
+by blanks or tabs. The format is
+.IP
+.I
+name metrics type code comment
+.LP
+.I name
+identifies the character:
+if
+.I name
+is a single character
+.I c
+then it corresponds to the groff input character
+.IR c ;
+if it is of the form
+.BI \e c
+where c is a single character, then it
+corresponds to the groff input character
+.BI \e c\fR;
+otherwise it corresponds to the groff input character
+.BI \e[ name ]
+(if it is exactly two characters
+.I xx
+it can be entered as
+.BI \e( xx\fR.)
+Groff supports eight bit characters; however some utilities
+has difficulties with eight bit characters.
+For this reason, there is a convention that the name
+.BI char n
+is equivalent to the single character whose code is
+.I n .
+For example,
+.B char163
+would be equivalent to the character with code 163
+which is the pounds sterling sign in ISO Latin-1.
+The name
+.B \-\-\-
+is special and indicates that the character is unnamed;
+such characters can only be used by means of the
+.B \eN
+escape sequence in
+.BR troff .
+.LP
+The
+.I type
+field gives the character type:
+.TP
+1
+means the character has an descender, for example, p;
+.TP
+2
+means the character has an ascender, for example, b;
+.TP
+3
+means the character has both an ascender and a descender, for example,
+(.
+.LP
+The
+.I code
+field gives the code which the postprocessor uses to print the character.
+The character can also be input to groff using this code by means of the
+.B \eN
+escape sequence.
+The code can be any integer.
+If it starts with a
+.B 0
+it will be interpreted as octal;
+if it starts with
+.B 0x
+or
+.B 0X
+it will be intepreted as hexadecimal.
+.LP
+Anything on the line after the code field will be ignored.
+.LP
+The
+.I metrics
+field has the form:
+.IP
+.IR width [\fB, height [\fB, depth [\fB, italic_correction [\fB, \
+left_italic_correction [\fB, subscript_correction ]]]]]
+.LP
+There must not be any spaces between these subfields.
+Missing subfields are assumed to be 0.
+The subfields are all decimal integers.
+Since there is no associated binary format, these
+values are not required to fit into a variable of type
+.B char
+as they are in ditroff.
+The
+.I width
+subfields gives the width of the character.
+The
+.I height
+subfield gives the height of the character (upwards is positive);
+if a character does not extend above the baseline, it should be
+given a zero height, rather than a negative height.
+The
+.I depth
+subfield gives the depth of the character, that is, the distance
+below the lowest point below the baseline to which the
+character extends (downwards is positive);
+if a character does not extend below above the baseline, it should be
+given a zero depth, rather than a negative depth.
+The
+.I italic_correction
+subfield gives the amount of space that should be added after the
+character when it is immediately to be followed by a character
+from a roman font.
+The
+.I left_italic_correction
+subfield gives the amount of space that should be added before the
+character when it is immediately to be preceded by a character
+from a roman font.
+The
+.I subscript_correction
+gives the amount of space that should be added after a character
+before adding a subscript.
+This should be less than the italic correction.
+.LP
+A line in the charset section can also have the format
+.IP
+.I
+name \fB"
+.LP
+This indicates that
+.I name
+is just another name for the character mentioned in the
+preceding line.
+.LP
+The word
+.B kernpairs
+starts the kernpairs section.
+This contains a sequence of lines of the form:
+.IP
+.I
+c1 c2 n
+.LP
+This means that when character
+.I c1
+appears next to character
+.I c2
+the space between them should be increased by
+.IR n .
+Most entries in kernpairs section will have a negative value for
+.IR n .
+.SH FILES
+.Tp \w'@FONTDIR@/devname/DESC'u+3n
+.BI @FONTDIR@/dev name /DESC
+Device description file for device
+.IR name .
+.TP
+.BI @FONTDIR@/dev name / F
+Font file for font
+.I F
+of device
+.IR name .
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR groff_out (@MAN5EXT@),
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@).
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.de TQ
-.br
-.ns
-.TP \\$1
-..
-.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
-.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
-.de Tp
-.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
-.el .TP "\\$1"
-..
-.TH GROFF_FONT @MAN5EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-groff_font \- format of groff device and font description files
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The groff font format is roughly a superset of the ditroff
-font format.
-Unlike the ditroff font format, there is no associated binary
-format.
-The font files for device
-.I name
-are stored in a directory
-.BI dev name.
-There are two types of file: a
-device description file called
-.B DESC
-and for each font
-.I F
-a font file called
-.IR F .
-These are text files;
-there is no associated binary format.
-.SS DESC file format
-The DESC file can contain the following types of line:
-.TP
-.BI res\ n
-There are
-.I n
-machine units per inch.
-.TP
-.BI hor\ n
-The horizontal resolution is
-.I n
-machine units.
-.TP
-.BI vert\ n
-The vertical resolution is
-.I n
-machine units.
-.TP
-.BI sizescale\ n
-The scale factor for pointsizes.
-By default this has a value of 1.
-One
-.I
-scaled point
-is equal to
-one
-.RI point/ n .
-The arguments to the
-.B unitwidth
-and
-.B sizes
-commands are given in scaled points.
-.TP
-.BI unitwidth\ n
-Quantities in the font files are given in machine units
-for fonts whose point size is
-.I n
-scaled points.
-.TP
-.B tcommand
-This means that the postprocessor can handle the
-.B t
-and
-.B u
-output commands.
-.TP
-.BI sizes\ s1\ s2\|.\|.\|.\|sn\ 0
-This means that the device has fonts at
-.IR s1 ,
-.IR s2 ,\|.\|.\|.\| sn
-scaled points.
-The list of sizes must be terminated by a
-.BR 0 .
-Each
-.BI s i
-can also be a range of sizes
-.IR m \- n .
-The list can extend over more than one line.
-.TP
-.BI styles\ S1\ S2\|.\|.\|.\|Sm
-The first
-.I m
-font positions will be associated with styles
-.IR S1\|.\|.\|.\|Sm .
-.TP
-.BI fonts\ n\ F1\ F2\ F3\|.\|.\|.\|Fn
-Fonts
-.I F1\|.\|.\|.\|Fn
-will be mounted in the font positions
-.IR m +1,\|.\|.\|., m + n
-where
-.I m
-is the number of styles.
-This command may extend over more than one line.
-A font name of
-.B 0
-will cause no font to be mounted on the corresponding font position.
-.TP
-.BI family\ fam
-The default font family is
-.IR fam .
-.TP
-.B charset
-This line and everything following in the file are ignored.
-It is allowed for the sake of backwards compatibility.
-.LP
-The res, unitwidth, fonts and sizes lines are compulsory.
-Other commands are ignored by
-.B troff
-but may be used by postprocessors to store arbitrary information
-about the device in the DESC file.
-.SS Font file format
-A font file has two sections. The first section is a sequence
-of lines each containing a sequence of blank delimited
-words; the first word in the line is a key, and subsequent
-words give a value for that key.
-.TP
-.BI name\ F
-The name of the font is
-.IR F .
-.TP
-.BI spacewidth\ n
-The normal width of a space is
-.IR n .
-.TP
-.BI slant\ n
-The characters of the font have a slant of
-.I n
-degrees. (Positive means forward.)
-.TP
-.BI ligatures\ lig1\ lig2\|.\|.\|.\|lign\ \fR[ 0 \fR]
-Characters
-.IR lig1 ,
-.IR lig2 ,\|.\|.\|., lign
-are ligatures; possible ligatures are
-.BR ff ,
-.BR fi ,
-.BR fl
-and
-.BR ffl .
-For backwards compatibility, the list of ligatures may be terminated
-with a
-.BR 0.
-The list of ligatures may not extend over more than one line.
-.TP
-.B special
-The font is
-.IR special ;
-this means that when a character is requested that is not present in
-the current font, it will be searched for in any special fonts that
-are mounted.
-.LP
-Other commands are ignored by
-.B troff
-but may be used by postprocessors to store arbitrary information
-about the font in the font file.
-.LP
-The first section can contain comments which start with the
-.B #
-character and extend to the end of a line.
-.LP
-The second section contains one or two subsections.
-It must contain a
-.I charset
-subsection
-and it may also contain a
-.I kernpairs
-subsection.
-These subsections can appear in any order.
-Each subsection starts with a word on a line by itself.
-.LP
-The word
-.B charset
-starts the charset subsection.
-The
-.B charset
-line is followed by a sequence of lines.
-Each line gives information for one character.
-A line comprises a number of fields separated
-by blanks or tabs. The format is
-.IP
-.I
-name metrics type code comment
-.LP
-.I name
-identifies the character:
-if
-.I name
-is a single character
-.I c
-then it corresponds to the groff input character
-.IR c ;
-if it is of the form
-.BI \e c
-where c is a single character, then it
-corresponds to the groff input character
-.BI \e c\fR;
-otherwise it corresponds to the groff input character
-.BI \e[ name ]
-(if it is exactly two characters
-.I xx
-it can be entered as
-.BI \e( xx\fR.)
-Groff supports eight bit characters; however some utilities
-has difficulties with eight bit characters.
-For this reason, there is a convention that the name
-.BI char n
-is equivalent to the single character whose code is
-.I n .
-For example,
-.B char163
-would be equivalent to the character with code 163
-which is the pounds sterling sign in ISO Latin-1.
-The name
-.B \-\-\-
-is special and indicates that the character is unnamed;
-such characters can only be used by means of the
-.B \eN
-escape sequence in
-.BR troff .
-.LP
-The
-.I type
-field gives the character type:
-.TP
-1
-means the character has an descender, for example, p;
-.TP
-2
-means the character has an ascender, for example, b;
-.TP
-3
-means the character has both an ascender and a descender, for example,
-(.
-.LP
-The
-.I code
-field gives the code which the postprocessor uses to print the character.
-The character can also be input to groff using this code by means of the
-.B \eN
-escape sequence.
-The code can be any integer.
-If it starts with a
-.B 0
-it will be interpreted as octal;
-if it starts with
-.B 0x
-or
-.B 0X
-it will be intepreted as hexadecimal.
-.LP
-Anything on the line after the code field will be ignored.
-.LP
-The
-.I metrics
-field has the form:
-.IP
-.IR width [\fB, height [\fB, depth [\fB, italic_correction [\fB, \
-left_italic_correction [\fB, subscript_correction ]]]]]
-.LP
-There must not be any spaces between these subfields.
-Missing subfields are assumed to be 0.
-The subfields are all decimal integers.
-Since there is no associated binary format, these
-values are not required to fit into a variable of type
-.B char
-as they are in ditroff.
-The
-.I width
-subfields gives the width of the character.
-The
-.I height
-subfield gives the height of the character (upwards is positive);
-if a character does not extend above the baseline, it should be
-given a zero height, rather than a negative height.
-The
-.I depth
-subfield gives the depth of the character, that is, the distance
-below the lowest point below the baseline to which the
-character extends (downwards is positive);
-if a character does not extend below above the baseline, it should be
-given a zero depth, rather than a negative depth.
-The
-.I italic_correction
-subfield gives the amount of space that should be added after the
-character when it is immediately to be followed by a character
-from a roman font.
-The
-.I left_italic_correction
-subfield gives the amount of space that should be added before the
-character when it is immediately to be preceded by a character
-from a roman font.
-The
-.I subscript_correction
-gives the amount of space that should be added after a character
-before adding a subscript.
-This should be less than the italic correction.
-.LP
-A line in the charset section can also have the format
-.IP
-.I
-name \fB"
-.LP
-This indicates that
-.I name
-is just another name for the character mentioned in the
-preceding line.
-.LP
-The word
-.B kernpairs
-starts the kernpairs section.
-This contains a sequence of lines of the form:
-.IP
-.I
-c1 c2 n
-.LP
-This means that when character
-.I c1
-appears next to character
-.I c2
-the space between them should be increased by
-.IR n .
-Most entries in kernpairs section will have a negative value for
-.IR n .
-.SH FILES
-.Tp \w'@FONTDIR@/devname/DESC'u+3n
-.BI @FONTDIR@/dev name /DESC
-Device description file for device
-.IR name .
-.TP
-.BI @FONTDIR@/dev name / F
-Font file for font
-.I F
-of device
-.IR name .
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff_out (@MAN5EXT@),
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@).
--- /dev/null
+'\" e
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.\" This man page must be preprocessed with eqn.
+.ie \n(.g .ds ic \/
+.el .ds ic \^
+.TH GROFF_OUT @MAN5EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+groff_out \- groff intermediate output format
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page describes the format output by GNU troff.
+The output format used by GNU troff is very similar to that used
+by Unix device-independent troff. Only the differences are documented
+here.
+.LP
+The argument to the
+.B s
+command is in scaled points (units of
+.IR points/ n ,
+where
+.I n
+is the argument to the
+.B sizescale
+command in the DESC file.)
+The argument to the
+.B x\ Height
+command is also in scaled points.
+.LP
+The first three output commands are guaranteed to be:
+.IP
+.BI x\ T\ device
+.br
+.BI x\ res\ n\ h\ v
+.br
+.B x init
+.LP
+If the
+.B tcommand
+line is present in the DESC file, troff will use the following
+two commands
+.TP
+.BI t xxx
+.I xxx
+is any sequence of characters terminated by a space or a newline;
+the first character should be printed at the current position,
+the current horizontal position should be increased by
+the width of the first character, and so on for each character.
+The width of the character is that given in the font file,
+appropriately scaled for the current point size, and rounded
+so that it is a multiple of the horizontal resolution.
+Special characters cannot be printed using this command.
+.TP
+.BI u n\ xxx
+This is same as the
+.B t
+command except that after printing each character, the current horizontal
+position is increased by the sum of the width of that character
+and
+.IR n .
+.LP
+Note that single characters can have the eighth bit set, as can the
+names of fonts and special characters.
+.LP
+The names of characters and fonts can be of arbitrary length; drivers
+should not assume that they will be only two characters long.
+.LP
+When a character is to be printed, that character will always be
+in the current font.
+Unlike device-independent troff, it is not necessary
+for drivers to search special fonts to find a character.
+.LP
+The
+.B D
+drawing command has been extended.
+These extensions will not be used by GNU pic if the
+.B \-n
+option is given.
+.TP
+\fBDf \fIn\fR\*(ic\en
+Set the shade of gray to be used for filling solid objects to
+.IR n ;
+.I n
+must be an integer between 0 and 1000, where 0 corresponds solid white
+and 1000 to solid black, and values in between correspond to
+intermediate shades of gray.
+This applies only to solid circles, solid ellipses and solid
+polygons.
+By default, a level of 1000 will be used.
+Whatever color a solid object has, it should completely obscure
+everything beneath it.
+A value greater than 1000 or less than 0 can also be used:
+this means fill with the shade of gray that is currently being used
+for lines and text.
+Normally this will be black, but some drivers may provide
+a way of changing this.
+.TP
+\fBDC \fId\fR\*(ic\en
+Draw a solid circle with a diameter of
+.I d
+with the leftmost point at the current position.
+.TP
+\fBDE \fIdx dy\fR\*(ic\en
+Draw a solid ellipse with a horizontal diameter of
+.I dx
+and a vertical diameter of
+.I dy
+with the leftmost point at the current position.
+.EQ
+delim $$
+.EN
+.TP
+\fBDp\fR $dx sub 1$ $dy sub 1$ $dx sub 2$ $dy sub 2$ $...$ $dx sub n$ $dy sub n$\en
+Draw a polygon with,
+for $i = 1 ,..., n+1$, the
+.IR i -th
+vertex at the current position
+$+ sum from j=1 to i-1 ( dx sub j , dy sub j )$.
+At the moment,
+GNU pic only uses this command to generate triangles and rectangles.
+.TP
+\fBDP\fR $dx sub 1$ $dy sub 1$ $dx sub 2$ $dy sub 2$ $...$ $dx sub n$ $dy sub n$\en
+Like
+.B Dp
+but draw a solid rather than outlined polygon.
+.TP
+\fBDt \fIn\fR\*(ic\en
+Set the current line thickness to
+.I n
+machine units.
+Traditionally Unix troff drivers use a line thickness proportional to the current
+point size; drivers should continue to do this if no
+.B Dt
+command has been given, or if a
+.B Dt
+command has been given with a negative value of
+.IR n .
+A zero value of
+.I n
+selects the smallest available line thickness.
+.LP
+A difficulty arises in how the current position should be changed after
+the execution of these commands.
+This is not of great importance since the code generated by GNU pic
+does not depend on this.
+Given a drawing command of the form
+.IP
+\fB\eD\(fm\fIc\fR $x sub 1$ $y sub 1$ $x sub 2$ $y sub 2$ $...$ $x sub n$ $y sub n$\(fm
+.LP
+where
+.I c
+is not one of
+.BR c ,
+.BR e ,
+.BR l ,
+.B a
+or
+.BR ~ ,
+Unix troff will treat each of the $x sub i$ as a horizontal quantity,
+and each of the $y sub i$ as a vertical quantity and will assume that
+the width of the drawn object is $sum from i=1 to n x sub i$,
+and that the height is $sum from i=1 to n y sub i$.
+(The assumption about the height can be seen by examining the
+.B st
+and
+.B sb
+registers after using such a
+.B D
+command in a \ew escape sequence.)
+This rule also holds for all the original drawing commands
+with the exception of
+.BR De .
+For the sake of compatibility GNU troff also follows this rule,
+even though it produces an ugly result in the case of the
+.BR Df ,
+.BR Dt ,
+and, to a lesser extent,
+.B DE
+commands.
+Thus after executing a
+.B D
+command of the form
+.IP
+\fBD\fIc\fR $x sub 1$ $y sub 1$ $x sub 2$ $y sub 2$ $...$ $x sub n$ $y sub n$\en
+.LP
+the current position should be increased by
+$( sum from i=1 to n x sub i , sum from i=1 to n y sub i )$.
+.LP
+There is a continuation convention which permits the argument to the
+.B x\ X
+command to contain newlines:
+when outputting the argument to the
+.B x\ X
+command, GNU troff
+will follow each newline in the argument with a
+.B +
+character
+(as usual, it will terminate the entire argument with a newline);
+thus if the line after the line containing the
+.B x\ X
+command starts with
+.BR + ,
+then the newline ending the line containing the
+.B x\ X
+command should be treated as part of the argument to the
+.B x\ X
+command,
+the
+.B +
+should be ignored,
+and the part of the line following the
+.B +
+should be treated like the part of the line following the
+.B x\ X
+command.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-'\" e
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.\" This man page must be preprocessed with eqn.
-.ie \n(.g .ds ic \/
-.el .ds ic \^
-.TH GROFF_OUT @MAN5EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-groff_out \- groff intermediate output format
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page describes the format output by GNU troff.
-The output format used by GNU troff is very similar to that used
-by Unix device-independent troff. Only the differences are documented
-here.
-.LP
-The argument to the
-.B s
-command is in scaled points (units of
-.IR points/ n ,
-where
-.I n
-is the argument to the
-.B sizescale
-command in the DESC file.)
-The argument to the
-.B x\ Height
-command is also in scaled points.
-.LP
-The first three output commands are guaranteed to be:
-.IP
-.BI x\ T\ device
-.br
-.BI x\ res\ n\ h\ v
-.br
-.B x init
-.LP
-If the
-.B tcommand
-line is present in the DESC file, troff will use the following
-two commands
-.TP
-.BI t xxx
-.I xxx
-is any sequence of characters terminated by a space or a newline;
-the first character should be printed at the current position,
-the current horizontal position should be increased by
-the width of the first character, and so on for each character.
-The width of the character is that given in the font file,
-appropriately scaled for the current point size, and rounded
-so that it is a multiple of the horizontal resolution.
-Special characters cannot be printed using this command.
-.TP
-.BI u n\ xxx
-This is same as the
-.B t
-command except that after printing each character, the current horizontal
-position is increased by the sum of the width of that character
-and
-.IR n .
-.LP
-Note that single characters can have the eighth bit set, as can the
-names of fonts and special characters.
-.LP
-The names of characters and fonts an be of arbitrary length; drivers
-should not assume that they will be only two characters long.
-.LP
-When a character is to be printed, that character will always be
-in the current font.
-Unlike device-independent troff, it is not necessary
-for drivers to search special fonts to find a character.
-.LP
-The
-.B D
-drawing command has been extended.
-These extensions will not be used by GNU pic if the
-.B \-n
-option is given.
-.TP
-\fBDf \fIn\fR\*(ic\en
-Set the shade of gray to be used for filling solid objects to
-.IR n ;
-.I n
-must be an integer between 0 and 1000, where 0 corresponds solid white
-and 1000 to solid black, and values in between correspond to
-intermediate shades of gray.
-This applies only to solid circles, solid ellipses and solid
-polygons.
-By default, a level of 1000 will be used.
-Whatever color a solid object has, it should completely obscure
-everything beneath it.
-A value greater than 1000 or less than 0 can also be used:
-this means fill with the shade of gray that is currently being used
-for lines and text.
-Normally this will be black, but some drivers may provide
-a way of changing this.
-.TP
-\fBDC \fId\fR\*(ic\en
-Draw a solid circle with a diameter of
-.I d
-with the leftmost point at the current position.
-.TP
-\fBDE \fIdx dy\fR\*(ic\en
-Draw a solid ellipse with a horizontal diameter of
-.I dx
-and a vertical diameter of
-.I dy
-with the leftmost point at the current position.
-.EQ
-delim $$
-.EN
-.TP
-\fBDp\fR $dx sub 1$ $dy sub 1$ $dx sub 2$ $dy sub 2$ $...$ $dx sub n$ $dy sub n$\en
-Draw a polygon with,
-for $i = 1 ,..., n+1$, the
-.IR i -th
-vertex at the current position
-$+ sum from j=1 to i-1 ( dx sub j , dy sub j )$.
-At the moment,
-GNU pic only uses this command to generate triangles and rectangles.
-.TP
-\fBDP\fR $dx sub 1$ $dy sub 1$ $dx sub 2$ $dy sub 2$ $...$ $dx sub n$ $dy sub n$\en
-Like
-.B Dp
-but draw a solid rather than outlined polygon.
-.TP
-\fBDt \fIn\fR\*(ic\en
-Set the current line thickness to
-.I n
-machine units.
-Traditionally Unix troff drivers use a line thickness proportional to the current
-point size; drivers should continue to do this if no
-.B Dt
-command has been given, or if a
-.B Dt
-command has been given with a negative value of
-.IR n .
-A zero value of
-.I n
-selects the smallest available line thickness.
-.LP
-A difficulty arises in how the current position should be changed after
-the execution of these commands.
-This is not of great importance since the code generated by GNU pic
-does not depend on this.
-Given a drawing command of the form
-.IP
-\fB\eD\(fm\fIc\fR $x sub 1$ $y sub 1$ $x sub 2$ $y sub 2$ $...$ $x sub n$ $y sub n$\(fm
-.LP
-where
-.I c
-is not one of
-.BR c ,
-.BR e ,
-.BR l ,
-.B a
-or
-.BR ~ ,
-Unix troff will treat each of the $x sub i$ as a horizontal quantity,
-and each of the $y sub i$ as a vertical quantity and will assume that
-the width of the drawn object is $sum from i=1 to n x sub i$,
-and that the height is $sum from i=1 to n y sub i$.
-(The assumption about the height can be seen by examining the
-.B st
-and
-.B sb
-registers after using such a
-.B D
-command in a \ew escape sequence.)
-This rule also holds for all the original drawing commands
-with the exception of
-.BR De .
-For the sake of compatibility GNU troff also follows this rule,
-even though it produces an ugly result in the case of the
-.BR Df ,
-.BR Dt ,
-and, to a lesser extent,
-.B DE
-commands.
-Thus after executing a
-.B D
-command of the form
-.IP
-\fBD\fIc\fR $x sub 1$ $y sub 1$ $x sub 2$ $y sub 2$ $...$ $x sub n$ $y sub n$\en
-.LP
-the current position should be increased by
-$( sum from i=1 to n x sub i , sum from i=1 to n y sub i )$.
-.LP
-There is a continuation convention which permits the argument to the
-.B x\ X
-command to contain newlines:
-when outputting the argument to the
-.B x\ X
-command, GNU troff
-will follow each newline in the argument with a
-.B +
-character
-(as usual, it will terminate the entire argument with a newline);
-thus if the line after the line containing the
-.B x\ X
-command starts with
-.BR + ,
-then the newline ending the line containing the
-.B x\ X
-command should be treated as part of the argument to the
-.B x\ X
-command,
-the
-.B +
-should be ignored,
-and the part of the line following the
-.B +
-should be treated like the part of the line following the
-.B x\ X
-command.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@)
+Mon Mar 15 22:22:42 1999 Jörgen Hägg (jh at axis.com)
+
+ * OK, let's release this as a beta, 1.33 will be better. :-)
+ * version 1.32
+ * fixed .el-error
+ * Added number variable Hss
+ * Changed Hps1 and Hps2 to units
+ * added hd*h1-text to be used in user defined macro TP.
+ * -U needed for SETR (I really need 'mv', 'echo', 'rm'
+ and 'test' builtin!)
+ * Rewritten the reference system, SETR now prints to stderr
+ if the number register Qrf > 0. Store in the filename
+ that is the argument to .INITR
+ The old behaviour is returned if number register Initr > 0.
+ * Fixed bug with List of XXXX, long lines messed up the result.
+ * added number register H1dot.
+ * added string variable H1txt
+ * added string variable Tcst
+ * added number register Dsp.
+ * added alias APPX for user-defined appendix title.
+ * added string variable Apptxt
+ * added H1h for use in TP in headers
+ * added macro EPIC
+ * added macro PIC (safe replacement for PSPIC)
+ * fixed Hps-bug, should be 1, not 1v.
+ * fixed bug with APPSK, variable not set.
+
+Wed Feb 4 15:46:04 1998 Jörgen Hägg (jh at axis.se)
+
+ * version 1.31
+ * .LI will now honor a space mark.
+ * Another fix for .AU to let it be used without arguments.
+ * uninitialized eq*label fixed
+
+Fri Sep 6 07:13:07 1996 Jörgen Hägg (jh at axis.se)
+
+ * version 1.30
+ * This is more like a beta-release, bugs might pop up. :-)
+ * last line in TOC was not correctly terminated (missing .br)
+ * changed the indentation for displays, it will now
+ indent to the current indent, not the one at the definition
+ of the display.
+ * Equation marks should now work better, indentation also.
+ * included these bug fixes from Larry Jones:
+ * The documentation for the argument to .AS was incorrect for MT 4.
+ * \*(EM should be a double-dash for nroff.
+ * \nS is in points, not units.
+ * If \nO isn't set, the default page offset should be .75i for nroff
+ and .963i for troff.
+ * .S D should set the point size to \nS, not 10.
+ * .S was setting the vertical spacing based on the old point size
+ instead of the new point size.
+ * Got rid of a spurrious .br that prevented run-in headings from
+ working.
+ * Reset the .SP counters in pg@header so that spacing on one page
+ won't affect spacing on subsequent pages.
+ * Allow .AU and .AF with no arguments (real mm does, even though it
+ isn't documented).
+ * Do .init@reset first thing to initialize the default environment.
+ * For MT 4, the title should be 4 points larger than the default size,
+ not 12 point.
+ * The cover environment needs to be initialized.
+ * Printing the abstract on the first page needs to be controlled by
+ the .AS argument.
+ * Heading eject should be suppressed if the heading immediately
+ follows the first page stuff (title, author, etc.).
+ * support for table of contents numbering style (.nr Oc)
+ * changes the troff empty line height from .25v to .5v
+ * fixed section page numbering
+ * fixed a really nasty bug in footnotes that could cause you
+ to lose the page footer completely if the very first
+ footnote on the page occurred at just the wrong place
+
+
+Wed May 15 07:39:32 1996 Jörgen Hägg (jh at axis.se)
+
+ * version 1.29
+ * Syntax and scaling errror fixed, (thanks to Frazer Williams)
+ * DF/DE will now do a line-break before printing the display.
+ * Updated the manual for TB,FG,EX and EC.
+ * Added support for the ms- (and mgs-)macro .IX
+ * Added indexmacro IX, INITI, IND and INDP, support for
+ TXIND, TYIND and TZIND.
+ * PGFORM will now always really reset to the default
+ values for unspecified arguments.
+ * Floating displays tested and repaired, it should
+ now (finanlly) work exactly as the original (I hope :-).
+ * Should now set year correctly even after 2000.
+ * Stupid bug in PGNH fixed.
+ * Corrected line length for figure caption (FG and friends)
+
+
+Mon Apr 24 07:37:52 1995 Jörgen Hägg (jh at axis.se)
+
+ * version 1.28
+ * Added AVL (AV without date)
+ * Fixed nroff scaling for W and L.
+ * Added support for register E and roman/bold
+ for all Subject/Date/From strings.
+ * Added support for register C (1-4), (for DRAFTs and other types)
+ * Will protest if not used with groff.
+ * Change of the internal number registers @ps and @vs, they
+ are now in units, and is set in the new macros .@ps and .@vs.
+ @ps and @vs is now corrected to the real point and vertical size.
+ * Macro EQ has now correct pointsize.
+ * Figures should now get the right page number in the index.
+ * User-defined macros can now be defined for list of
+ figures, tables, equations and exhibits (T{X,Y}{FG,TB,EC,EX}.
+ * Space may be omitted between prefix and mark in automatic lists (.AL)
+ See .LI
+
Tue Jan 10 07:51:37 1995 Jörgen Hägg (jh at axis.se)
* version 1.27
#
-# $Id: Makefile.sub,v 1.3 1998/01/19 00:40:11 etheisen Exp $
+# $Id: Makefile.sub,v 1.4 2000/04/09 08:25:18 millert Exp $
#
-MAN7=groff_mm.n groff_mmse.n
+MAN7=groff_mm.7 groff_mmse.7
FILES=0.MT 5.MT 4.MT ms.cov se_ms.cov
# Local configuration files with default values.
LOCALE = locale se_locale
CLEANADD=temp
+tmac_m=m
install: install_mm
install_mm: install_m
install_m:
-test -d $(tmacdir) || mkdir $(tmacdir)
- -rm -f $(tmacdir)/tmac.$(tmac_m_prefix)m
- $(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/tmac.m $(tmacdir)/tmac.$(tmac_m_prefix)m
- @sed -e "s;^.mso tmac.m;.mso $(tmac_m_prefix)m;g" $(srcdir)/tmac.mse \
- > $(tmacdir)/tmac.$(tmac_m_prefix)mse
+ -rm -f $(tmacdir)/tmac.$(tmac_m)
+ $(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/tmac.m $(tmacdir)/tmac.$(tmac_m)
+ @sed -e "s;^.mso tmac.m;.mso $(tmac_m);g" $(srcdir)/tmac.mse \
+ > $(tmacdir)/tmac.$(tmac_m)se
-for f in $(LOCALE); do \
test -s $(tmacdir)/mm/$$f || rm -f $(tmacdir)/mm/$$f; \
done
- -rm -f $(tmacdir)/tmac.$(tmac_m_prefix)m
- -rm -f $(tmacdir)/tmac.$(tmac_m_prefix)mse
+ -rm -f $(tmacdir)/tmac.$(tmac_m)
+ -rm -f $(tmacdir)/tmac.$(tmac_m)se
-rmdir $(tmacdir)/mm
Any new ideas or improvements are welcome.
Newest version is available with anonymous FTP
-at ftp.efd.lth.se [130.235.48.11], as pub/groff/mm<something>.Z
+at ftp://ftp.efd.lth.se/pub/groff/mm<something>.gz
+or ftp://ftp.axis.se/pub/groff/mm<something>.gz
You can install mgm as a separate package without the configure in groff
with the following command:
--- /dev/null
+.\"
+.\" $Id: groff_mm.7_in,v 1.1 2000/04/09 08:25:18 millert Exp $
+.\"
+.de T2
+.ne 2v
+.ti -.5i
+\\$1
+.sp -1
+..
+.de T3
+.ne 2v
+.ti -.5i
+\fB\\$1\fP
+.br
+..
+.TH GROFF_MM @MAN7EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+groff_mm \- groff mm macros
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B groff
+.B \-m@TMAC_M@
+[
+.IR options .\|.\|.
+]
+[
+.IR files .\|.\|.
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The groff mm macros are intended to be compatible with the DWB mm macros
+with the following limitations:
+.TP
+.B \(bu
+no Bell Labs localisms implemented.
+.TP
+.B \(bu
+the macros OK and PM is not implemented.
+.TP
+.B \(bu
+groff mm does not support cut marks
+.LP
+\fBm@TMAC_M@\fP is intended to be international. Therefore it is
+possible to write short national macrofiles which change all
+english text to the preferred language. Use \fBm@TMAC_M@se\fP as an example.
+.\"########################################################################
+.LP
+A file called \fBlocale\fP or \fIlang\fP\fB_locale\fP is read
+after the initiation of the global variables. It is therefore
+possible to localize the macros with companyname and so on.
+.sp
+In this manual square brackets is used to show optional arguments.
+.sp 3
+\fBNumber registers and strings\fP
+.br
+Many macros can be controlled by number registers and strings.
+A number register is assigned with the \fBnr\fP command:
+.br
+\fB\&.nr\fP \fIXXX\fP \fI[+-]n [i]\fP
+.br
+\fBXXX\fP is the name of the register, \fBn\fP is the value to
+be assigned, and \fBi\fP is increment value for auto-increment.
+\fBn\fP can have a plus or minus sign as prefix if an increment
+or decrement of the current value is wanted. (Auto-increment or decrement
+occurs if the number register is used with a plus or minus sign,
+\fB\en+[XXX]\fP or \fB\en-[XXX]\fP.)
+.sp
+Strings is defined with \fBds\fP.
+.br
+\fB\&.ds\fP \fIYYY string\fP
+.br
+The string is assigned everything to the end of the line, even blanks.
+Initial blanks in \fIstring\fP should be prefixed with
+a double-quote. (Strings are used in the text as \fB\e*[YYY]\fP.)
+.sp
+\fBSpecial formatting of number registers\fP
+A number register is printed with normal digits if no format has been
+given.
+Set the format with \fBaf\fP:
+.br
+\fB\&.af\fP \fIR c\fP
+.br
+\fIR\fP is the name of the register, \fIc\fP is the format.
+.in +.5i
+.T2 \fBForm\fP
+\fBSequence\fP
+.T2 1
+0, 1, 2, 3, ...
+.T2 001
+000, 001, 002, 003, ...
+.T2 i
+0, i, ii, iii, iv, ...
+.T2 I
+0, I, II, III, IV, ...
+.T2 a
+0, a, b, c, ..., z, aa, ab, ...
+.T2 A
+0, A, B, C, ..., Z, AA, AB, ...
+.in
+
+.LP
+\fBMacros:\fP
+.TP
+.B ")E level text"
+Adds \fBtext\fP (heading-text) to the table of contents
+with \fBlevel\fP either 0
+or between 1-7. See also \fB.H\fP. This macro is used for customized
+table of contents.
+.TP
+.B "1C [1]"
+Begin one column processing. An \fB1\fP as argument disables the page-break.
+Use wide footnotes, small footnotes may be overprinted.
+.TP
+.B 2C
+Begin two column processing. Splits the page in two columns. It is
+a special case of \fBMC\fP. See also \fB1C\fP.
+.TP
+.B AE
+Abstract end, see \fBAS\fP.
+.TP
+.B "AF [name of firm]"
+Authors firm, should be called before \fBAU\fP, see also \fBCOVER\fP.
+.TP
+.B "AL [type [text-indent [1]]]]"
+Start autoincrement list. Items are numbered beginning on one.
+The \fItype\fP argument controls the type of numbers.
+.in +.5i
+.T2 Arg
+Description
+.T2 1
+Arabic (the default)
+.T2 A
+Upper-case letters (A-Z)
+.T2 a
+Lower-case letters (a-z)
+.T2 I
+Upper-case roman
+.T2 i
+Lower-case roman
+.in
+\fIText-indent\fP sets the indent and overrides \fBLi\fP.
+A third argument will prohibit printing of a blank line before each
+item.
+.TP
+.B "APP name text"
+Begin an appendix with name \fIname\fP. Automatic naming occurs if
+\fIname\fP is "". The appendixes starts with \fBA\fP if auto is used.
+An new page is ejected, and a header is also produced if the number
+variable \fBAph\fP is non-zero. This is the default.
+The appendix always appear in the 'List of contents' with correct
+pagenumber. The name \fIAPPENDIX\fP can be changed by setting
+the string \fBApp\fP to the desired text.
+The string \fBApptxt\fP contains the current appendix text.
+.TP
+.B "APPSK name pages text"
+Same as \fB.APP\fP, but the pagenr is incremented with \fIpages\fP.
+This is used when diagrams or other non-formatted documents are
+included as appendixes.
+.TP
+.B "AS [arg [indent]]"
+Abstract start. Indent is specified in 'ens', but scaling is allowed.
+Argument \fIarg\fP controls where the abstract is printed.
+.in +.5i
+.T2 Arg
+Placement
+.T2 0
+Abstract will be printed on page 1 and on the cover sheet if
+used in the released-paper style (\fBMT 4\fP), otherwise
+it will be printed on page 1 without a cover sheet.
+.T2 1
+Abstract will only be printed on the cover sheet (\fBMT 4\fP only).
+.T2 2
+Abstract will be printed only on the cover sheet (other than \fBMT 4\fP only).
+The cover sheet is printed without need for \fBCS\fP.
+.in
+Abstract is not printed at all in external letters (\fBMT 5\fP).
+The \fIindent\fP controls the indentation of both margins, otherwise
+will normal text indent be used.
+.TP
+.B "AST [title]"
+Abstract title. Default is \fBABSTRACT\fP.
+Sets the text above the abstract text.
+.TP
+.B "AT title1 [title2 ...]"
+Authors title. \fBAT\fP must appear just after each \fBAU\fP.
+The title will show up after the name in the signature block.
+.TP
+.B "AU [name [initials [loc [dept [ext [room [arg [arg [arg]]]]]]]]]"
+Author information, specifies the author of the memo or paper, and
+will be printed on the cover sheet and on other similar places.
+\fBAU\fP must appear before \fBTL\fP. The author information
+can contain intials, location, department, telephone extension,
+room number or name and up to three extra arguments.
+.TP
+.B "AV [name [1]]"
+Approval signature, generates an approval line with place for
+signature and date. The string \fBAPPROVED:\fP can be changed
+with variable \fBLetapp\fP, and the string \fBDate\fP in \fBLetdate\fP.
+.TP
+.B "AVL [name]"
+Letter signature, generates a line with place for signature.
+.TP
+.B "B [bold-text [prev-font-tex [bold...]]]"
+Begin boldface
+No limit on the number of arguments.
+All arguments will be concatenated to one word, the first, third and so
+on will be printed in boldface.
+.TP
+.B B1
+Begin box (as the ms macro)
+Draws a box around the text. The text will be indented one character,
+and the right margin will be one character shorter.
+.TP
+.B B2
+End box. Finish the box started by \fBB1\fP.
+.TP
+.B BE
+End bottom block, see \fBBS\fP.
+.TP
+.B "BI [bold-text [italic-text [bold-text [...]]]"
+Bold-italic.
+No limit on the number of arguments, see \fBB\fP.
+.TP
+.B "BL [text-indent [1]]"
+Start bullet list, initialize a list with a bullet and a space
+in the beginning of each list item (see \fBLI\fP).
+\fIText-indent\fP
+overrides the default indentation of the list items set by
+number register \fBPi\fP.
+A third argument will prohibit printing of a blank line before each
+item.
+.TP
+.B "BR [bold-text [roman-text [bold-text [...]]]"
+Bold-roman.
+No limit on the number of arguments.
+.TP
+.B BS
+Bottom block start. Begins the definition of a text block wich is
+printed at the bottom of each page. Block ends with \fBBE\fP.
+.TP
+.B BVL
+Start of
+broken variable-item list.
+Broken variable-item list has no fixed mark, it assumes that
+every \fBLI\fP has a mark instead.
+The text will always begin at the next line after the mark.
+\fIText-indent\fP sets the indent to the text, and \fImark-indent\fP
+the distance from the current indent to the mark.
+A third argument will prohibit printing of a blank line before each
+item.
+.TP
+.B "COVER [arg]"
+\&\fBCOVER\fP begins a coversheet definition. It is important
+that \fB.COVER\fP appears before any normal text.
+\&\fB.COVER\fP uses \fIarg\fP to build the filename
+@TMAC_MDIR@/\fIarg\fP.cov. Therefore it is possible to create unlimited
+types of coversheets.
+\fIms.cov\fP is supposed to look like the \fBms\fP coversheet.
+\&\fB.COVER\fP requires a \fB.COVEND\fP at the end of the coverdefinition.
+Always use this order of the covermacros:
+.nf
+\&.COVER
+\&.TL
+\&.AF
+\&.AU
+\&.AT
+\&.AS
+\&.AE
+\&.COVEND
+.fi
+However, only \fB.TL\fP and \fB.AU\fP are required.
+.TP
+.B COVEND
+This finish the cover description and prints the cover-page.
+It is defined in the cover file.
+.TP
+.B DE
+Display end. Ends a block of text, display, that begins
+with \fBDS\fP or \fBDF\fP.
+.TP
+.B "DF [format [fill [rindent]]]"
+Begin floating display (no nesting allowed).
+A floating display is saved in a queue and is printed in the
+order entered. \fIFormat\fP, \fIfill\fP and \fIrindent\fP is the same
+as in \fBDS\fP.
+Floating displays are controlled by the two number registers \fBDe\fP
+and \fBDf\fP.
+.sp
+\fBDe register\fP
+.in +.5i
+.T2 0
+Nothing special, this is the default.
+.T2 1
+A page eject will occur after each printed display, giving only
+one display per page and no text following it.
+.in
+.sp
+\fBDf register\fP
+.in +.5i
+.T2 0
+Displays are printed at the end of each section (when section-page
+numbering is active) or at the end of the document.
+.T2 1
+A new display will be printed on the current page is there is enough
+space, otherwise it will be printed at the end of the document.
+.T2 2
+One display will be printed at the top of each page or column
+(in multi-column mode).
+.T2 3
+Print one display if there is enough space for it, otherwise it will
+be printed at the top of the next page or column.
+.T2 4
+Print as many displays that will fit in a new page or column.
+A page break will occur between each display if \fBDe\fP is not zero.
+.T2 5
+Fill the current page with displays and the rest beginning at a new page
+or column. (This is the default.)
+A page break will occur between each display
+if \fBDe\fP is not zero.
+.in
+.TP
+.B "DL [text-indent [1]]"
+Dash list start. Begins a list where each item is printed
+after a dash. \fIText-indent\fP changes the default indentation
+of the list items set by
+number register \fBPi\fP.
+A third argument will prohibit printing of a blank line before each
+item.
+A second argument prevents the empty line between each list item
+to be printed. See \fBLI\fP.
+.TP
+.B "DS [format [fill [rindent]]]"
+Static display start.
+Begins collection of text until \fBDE\fP.
+The text is printed together on the same page, unless it is longer
+than the height of the page.
+\fBDS\fP can be nested to a unlimited depth (reasonably :-).
+.sp
+\fBformat\fP
+.in +.5i
+.ds x "
+.T2 """"""
+No indentation.
+.T2 none
+No indentation.
+.T2 L
+No indentation.
+.T2 I
+Indent text with the value of number register \fBSi\fP.
+.T2 C
+Center each line
+.T2 CB
+Center the whole display as a block.
+.T2 R
+Right adjust the lines.
+.T2 RB
+Right adjust the whole display as a block
+.in
+.sp
+L, I, C and CB can also be specified as 0, 1, 2 or 3 for compatibility
+reasons. (Don't use it. :-)
+.sp
+\fBfill\fP
+.in +.5i
+.T2 """"""
+Line-filling turned off.
+.T2 none
+Line-filling turned off.
+.T2 N
+Line-filling turned off.
+.T2 F
+Line-filling turned on.
+.in
+.sp
+N and F can also be specified as 0 or 1.
+An empty line will normally be printed before and after the
+display. Setting number register \fBDs\fP to 0 will prevent this.
+\fIRindent\fP shortens the line length by that amount.
+.TP
+.B "EC [title [override [flag [refname]]]]"
+Equation title.
+Sets a title for an equation. The \fIoverride\fP argument
+change the numbering.
+.sp
+\fBflag\fP
+.in +.5i
+.T2 none
+\fIoverride\fP is a prefix to the number.
+.T2 0
+\fIoverride\fP is a prefix to the number.
+.T2 1
+\fIoverride\fP is a suffix to the number.
+.T2 2
+\fIoverride\fP replaces the number.
+.in
+\fBEC\fP uses the number register \fBEc\fP as counter.
+It is possible to use \fB.af\fP to change the format of the number.
+If number register \fBOf\fP is 1, then the format of title
+will use a dash instead of a dot after the number.
+.br
+The string \fBLe\fP controls the title of the
+List of Equations, default is \fILIST OF EQUATIONS\fP.
+The List of Equations will only be printed if number register \fBLe\fP
+is 1, default 0.
+The string \fBLiec\fP contains the word \fIEquation\fP, wich
+is printed before the number.
+If \fIrefname\fP is used, then the equation number is saved with
+\&\fB.SETR\fP, and can be retrieved with \fB.GETST\fP \fIrefname\fP.
+.br
+Special handling of the title will occur if
+\fBEC\fP is used inside \fBDS\fP/\fBDE\fP, it will not be
+affected by the format of \fBDS\fP.
+.TP
+.B "EF [arg]"
+Even-page footer, printed just above the normal page footer
+on even pages, see \fBPF\fP.
+.TP
+.B "EH [arg]"
+Even-page header, printed just below the normal page header
+on even pages, see \fBPH\fP.
+.TP
+.B EN
+Equation end, see \fBEQ\fP.
+.TP
+.B EOP
+End of page user-defined macro. This macro will be called
+instead of the normal printing of the footer. The macro
+will be executed in a separate environment, without any
+trap active. See \fBTP\fP.
+.sp
+\fBStrings available to EOP\fP
+.in +.5i
+.T2 EOPf
+Argument from \fBPF\fP.
+.T2 EOPef
+Argument from \fBEF\fP.
+.T2 EOPof
+Argument from \fBOF\fP.
+.in
+.TP
+.B "EPIC width height [name]"
+\fBEPIC\fP draws a box with the given \fIwidth\fP and \fIheight\fP, it will
+also print the text \fIname\fP or a default string if
+\fIname\fP is not specified..
+This is used to include external pictures, just give the size
+of the picture.
+See \fBPIC\fP
+.TP
+.B "EQ [label]"
+Equation start.
+\fBEQ\fP/\fBEN\fP are the delimiters for equations written for \fBeqn\fP.
+\fBEQ\fP/\fBEN\fP must be inside a \fBDS\fP/\fBDE\fP-pair, except
+when \fBEQ\fP is only used to set options in \fBeqn\fP.
+The \fIlabel\fP will appear at the right margin of the equation, unless
+number register \fBEq\fP is 1. Then the label will appear at the
+left margin.
+.TP
+.B "EX [title [override [flag [refname]]]]"
+Exhibit title, arguments are the same as for \fBEC\fP.
+\fBEX\fP uses the number register \fBEx\fP as counter.
+The string \fBLx\fP controls the title of the
+List of Exhibits, default is \fILIST OF EXHIBITS\fP.
+The List of Exhibits will only be printed if number register \fBLx\fP
+is 1, default 1.
+The string \fBLiex\fP contains the word \fIExhibit\fP, wich
+is printed before the number.
+If \fIrefname\fP is used, then the exhibit number is saved with
+\&\fB.SETR\fP, and can be retrieved with \fB.GETST\fP \fIrefname\fP.
+.br
+Special handling of the title will occur if
+\fBEX\fP is used inside \fBDS\fP/\fBDE\fP, it will not be
+affected by the format of \fBDS\fP.
+.TP
+.B "FC [closing]"
+Prints \fIYours\ very\ truly,\fP as a formal closing of a letter or
+memorandum. The argument replaces the defualt string.
+The default is stored in string variable \fBLetfc\fP.
+.TP
+.B "FD [arg [1]]"
+Footnote default format.
+Controls the hyphenation (hyphen), right margin justification (adjust),
+indentation of footnote text (indent). It can also change the label
+justification (ljust).
+.sp
+.ne 14v
+.nf
+.ta .5i +.8i +.8i +.8i +.8i
+\fBarg hyphen adjust indent ljust\fP
+0 no yes yes left
+1 yes yes yes left
+2 no no yes left
+3 yes no yes left
+4 no yes no left
+5 yes yes no left
+6 no no no left
+7 yes no no left
+8 no yes yes right
+9 yes yes yes right
+10 no no yes right
+11 yes no yes right
+.sp
+.fi
+.DT
+Argument greater than or equal to 11 is considered as arg 0.
+Default for m@TMAC_M@m is 10.
+.TP
+.B FE
+Footnote end.
+.TP
+.B "FG [title [override [flag [refname]]]]"
+Figure title, arguments are the same as for \fBEC\fP.
+\fBFG\fP uses the number register \fBFg\fP as counter.
+The string \fBLf\fP controls the title of the
+List of Figures, default is \fILIST OF FIGURES\fP.
+The List of Figures will only be printed if number register \fBLf\fP
+is 1, default 1.
+The string \fBLifg\fP contains the word \fIFigure\fP, wich
+is printed before the number.
+If \fIrefname\fP is used, then the figure number is saved with
+\&\fB.SETR\fP, and can be retrieved with \fB.GETST\fP \fIrefname\fP.
+.br
+Special handling of the title will occur if
+\fBFG\fP is used inside \fBDS\fP/\fBDE\fP, it will not be
+affected by the format of \fBDS\fP.
+.TP
+.B "FS [label]"
+Footnote start.
+The footnote is ended by \fBFE\fP. Footnotes is normally automatically
+numbered, the number is available in string \fBF\fP.
+Just add \fB\e*F\fP in the text. By adding \fIlabel\fP, it is possible
+to have other number or names on the footnotes.
+Footnotes in displays is now possible.
+An empty line separates footnotes, the height of the line
+is controlled by number register \fBFs\fP, default value is 1.
+.TP
+.B "GETHN refname [varname]"
+Includes the headernumber where the corresponding \fBSETR\fP \fIrefname\fP
+was placed. Will be X.X.X. in pass 1. See \fBINITR\fP.
+If varname is used, \fBGETHN\fP sets the stringvariable \fIvarname\fP to the
+headernumber.
+.TP
+.B "GETPN refname [varname]"
+Includes the pagenumber where the corresponding \fBSETR\fP \fIrefname\fP
+was placed. Will be 9999 in pass 1. See \fBINITR\fP.
+If varname is used, \fBGETPN\fP sets the stringvariable \fIvarname\fP
+to the pagenumber.
+.TP
+.B "GETR refname"
+Combines \fBGETHN\fP and \fBGETPN\fP with the text 'chapter' and ', page'.
+The string \fIQrf\fP contains the text for reference:
+.ti +.5i
+\&.ds Qrf See chapter \e\e*[Qrfh], page \e\e*[Qrfp].
+.br
+\fIQrf\fP may be changed to support other languages.
+Strings \fIQrfh\fP and \fIQrfp\fP are set by \fBGETR\fP
+and contains the page and headernumber.
+.TP
+.B "GETST refname [varname]"
+Includes the string saved with the second argument to \fB.SETR\fP.
+Will be dummystring in pass 1.
+If varname is used, \fBGETST\fP sets the stringvariable \fIvarname\fP to the
+saved string. See \fBINITR\fP.
+.TP
+.B "H level [heading-text [heading-suffix]]"
+Numbered section heading.
+Section headers can have a level between 1 and 7, level 1 is the
+top level. The text is given in \fIheading-text\fP, and must be
+surrounded by double quotes if it contains spaces.
+\fBHeading-suffix\fP is added to the header in the text but not in
+the table of contents. This is normally used for footnote marks
+and similar things. Don't use \fB\e*F\fP in \fIheading-suffix\fP, it won't
+work. A manual label must be used, see \fBFS\fP.
+.sp
+An eventual paragraph, \fBP\fP, directly after \fBH\fP will be
+ignored, \fBH\fP is taking care of spacing and indentation.
+.sp
+\fBPage ejection before heading\fP
+.br
+Number register \fBEj\fP controls page ejection before the heading.
+Normally, a level one heading gets two blank lines before it, higher levels
+gets only one. A new page is ejected before each
+first-level heading if number register \fBEj\fP is 1.
+All levels below or equal the value of \fBEj\fP gets a new page.
+Default value for \fBEj\fP is 0.
+.sp
+\fBHeading break level\fP
+.br
+A line break occurs after the heading if the heading level is less
+or equal to number register \fBHb\fP.
+Default value 2.
+.sp
+\fBHeading space level\fP
+.br
+A blank line is inserted after the heading if the heading level is less
+or equal to number register \fBHs\fP.
+Default value 2.
+.sp
+Text will follow the heading on the same line if the level is greater
+than both \fBHb\fP and \fBHs\fP.
+.sp
+\fBPost-heading indent\fP
+.br
+Indentation of the text after the heading is controlled by number
+register \fBHi\fP, default value 0.
+\fBHi\fP
+.in +.5i
+.T2 0
+The text will be left-justified.
+.T2 1
+Indentation of the text will follow the value of number register \fBPt\fP,
+see \fBP\fP.
+.T2 2
+The text will be lined up with the first word of the heading.
+.in
+.sp
+\fBCentered section headings\fP
+.br
+All headings whose level is equal or below number register \fBHc\fP
+and also less than or equal to \fBHb\fP or \fBHs\fP
+is centerered.
+.sp
+\fBFont control of the heading\fP
+.br
+The font of each heading level is controlled by string \fBHF\fP.
+It contains a fontnumber or fontnam for each level. Default
+is \fB2\ 2\ 2\ 2\ 2\ 2\ 2\fP (all headings in italic).
+Could also be written as \fBI\ I\ I\ I\ I\ I\ I\fP.
+All omitted values are presumed to be a 1.
+.sp
+\fBPoint size control\fP.
+.br
+String \fBHP\fP controls the pointsize of each heading, in the
+same way as \fBHF\fP controls the font.
+A value of 0 selects the default point size.
+Default value is \fB0\ 0\ 0\ 0\ 0\ 0\ 0\fP. Beware that only the
+point size changes, not the vertical size.
+That can be controlled by the user specified macro \fBHX\fP and/or
+\fBHZ\fP.
+.sp
+\fBHeading counters\fP
+.br
+Seven number registers, named \fBH1\fP thru \fBH7\fP contains
+the counter for each heading level.
+The values are printed using arabic numerals, this can be changed
+with the macro \fBHM\fP (see below).
+All marks ar concatenated before printing. To avoid this, set
+number register \fBHt\fP to 1. That will only print the current
+heading counter at each heading.
+.sp
+\fBAutomatic table of contents\fP
+.br
+All headings whose level is equal or below number register \fBCl\fP
+is saved to be printed in the table of contents. Default value is 2.
+.sp
+\fBSpecial control of the heading, user-defined macros\fP.
+.br
+These macros can be defined by the user to get a finer control
+of vertical spacing, fonts or other features.
+Argument \fIlevel\fP is the level-argument to \fBH\fP, but
+0 for unnumbered headings (see \fBHU\fP).
+Argument \fIrlevel\fP is the real level, it is
+set to number register \fBHu\fP for unnumbered headings.
+Argument \fIheading-text\fP is the text argument to \fBH\fP and \fBHU\fP.
+.sp
+\fBHX\ \fP\fIlevel\ rlevel\ heading-text\fP
+.br
+\fBHX\fP is called just before the printing of the heading.
+The following register is available for \fBHX\fP.
+\fBHX\fP may alter \fB}0\fP, \fB}2\fP and \fB;3\fP.
+.in +.5i
+.T3 "string }0"
+Contains the heading mark plus two spaces if \fIrlevel\fP is non-zero,
+otherwise empty.
+.T3 "register ;0"
+Contains the position of the text after the heading.
+0 means that the text should follow the heading on the same line, 1
+means that a line break should occur before the text and
+2 means that a blank line should separate the heading and the text.
+.T3 "string }2"
+Contains two spaces if register \fB;0\fP is 0. It is used to
+separate the heading from the text. The string
+is empty if \fB;0\fP is non-zero.
+.T3 "register ;3"
+Contains the needed space in units after the heading.
+Default is 2v.
+
+Can be used to change things like numbering (\fB}0\fP),
+vertical spacing (\fB}2\fP)
+and the needed space after the heading.
+.in
+.sp
+\fBHY\ \fP\fIdlevel\ rlevel\ heading-text\fP
+.br
+\fBHY\fP is called after size and font calculations and
+might be used to change indentation.
+.sp
+\fBHZ\ \fP\fIdlevel\ rlevel\ heading-text\fP
+\fBHZ\fP is called after the printing of the heading, just before
+\fBH\fP or \fBHU\fP exits.
+Could be used to change the page header according to the section heading.
+.TP
+.B "HC [hyphenation-character]"
+Set hyphenation character.
+Default value is \e%.
+Resets to the default if called without argument.
+Hyphenation can be turned by setting number
+register \fBHy\fP to 0 in the beginning of the file.
+.TP
+.B "HM [arg1 [arg2 [... [arg7]]]]"
+Heading mark style.
+Controls the type of marking for printing of the heading counters.
+Default is 1 for all levels.
+.sp
+\fBArgument\fP
+.in +.5i
+.T2 1
+Arabic numerals.
+.T2 0001
+Arabic numerals with leading zeroes, one or more.
+.T2 A
+Upper-case alphabetic
+.T2 a
+Lower-case alphabetic
+.T2 I
+Upper-case roman numerals
+.T2 i
+lower-case roman numerals
+.T2 \fIempty\fP
+Arabic numerals.
+.in
+.TP
+.B "HU heading-text"
+Unnumbered section header.
+\fBHU\fP behavies like \fBH\fP at the level in number register \fBHu\fP.
+See \fBH\fP.
+.TP
+.B "HX dlevel rlevel heading-text"
+Userdefined heading exit.
+Called just before printing the header.
+See \fBH\fP.
+.TP
+.B "HY dlevel rlevel heading-text"
+Userdefined heading exit.
+Called just before printing the header.
+See \fBH\fP.
+.TP
+.B "HZ dlevel rlevel heading-text"
+Userdefined heading exit.
+Called just after printing the header.
+See \fBH\fP.
+.TP
+.B "I [italic-text [prev-font-text [italic-text [...]]]"
+Italic.
+Changes the font to italic if called without arguments.
+With one argument it will set the word in italic.
+With two argument it will concatenate them and set the first
+word in italic and the second in the previous font.
+There is no limit on the number of argument, all will be concatenated.
+.TP
+.B "IA [addressee-name [title]]
+Begins specification of the addressee and addressee's address in
+letter style.
+Several names can be specified with empty \fBIA\fP/\fBIE\fP-pairs, but
+only one address.
+See \fBLT\fP.
+.TP
+.B "IB [italic-text [bold-text [italic-text [...]]]"
+Italic-bold
+Even arguments is printed in italic, odd in boldface.
+See \fBI\fP.
+.TP
+.B IE
+Ends the address-specification after \fPIA\fP.
+.TP
+.B "INITI filename [type]"
+Initialize the new index system, sets the filename to collect
+index lines in with \fBIND\fP. Argument \fItype\fP selects
+teh type of index, page number, header marks or both.
+The default is \fIN\fP.
+.sp
+\fBtype\fP
+.in +.5i
+.T2 N
+Page numbers
+.T2 H
+Header marks
+.T2 B
+Both page numbers and header marks, tab separated
+.in
+.TP
+.B "IND arg1 [arg2 [...]]"
+\fBIND\fP writes a line in the index file selected by \fBINITI\fP
+with all arguments and the page number or header mark separated by tabs.
+.in +.5i
+\fBExamples\fP
+.br
+arg1\etpage number
+.br
+arg1\etarg2\etpage number
+.br
+arg1\etheader mark
+.br
+arg1\etpage number\etheader mark
+.in
+.TP
+.B "INDP"
+\fBINDP\fP prints the index by running the command specified
+by string variable \fBIndcmd\fP, normally \fIsort\ -t\et\fP.
+\fBINDP\fP reads the output from the command to form
+the index, normally in two columns (can be changed by defining \fBTYIND\fP).
+The index is printed with string variable \fBIndex\fP as header,
+default is \fBINDEX\fP. One-column processing is
+returned after the list. \fBINDP\fP will call the
+user-defined macros \fBTXIND\fP, \fBTYIND\fP and \fBTZIND\fP if defined.
+\fBTXIND\fP is called before printing \fBINDEX\fP, \fBTYIND\fP
+is called instead of printing \fBINDEX\fP. \fBTZIND\fP is called
+after the printing and should take care of restoring to normal
+operation again.
+
+.TP
+.B "INITR filename"
+Initialize the refencemacros. References will be written to
+\fIfilename.tmp\fP and \fIfilename.qrf\fP. Requires two passes with groff.
+The first looks for references and the second includes them.
+\fBINITR\fP can be used several times, but it is only the first
+occurrence of \fBINITR\fP that is active.
+Option \fB-U\fP might be needed if \fBunsafe\fP-errors occur.
+See also \fBSETR\fP, \fBGETPN\fP and \fBGETHN\fP.
+.TP
+.B "IR [italic-text [roman-text [italic-text [...]]]"
+Italic-roman
+Even arguments is printed in italic, odd in roman.
+See \fBI\fP.
+.TP
+.B "LB text-indent mark-indent pad type [mark [LI-space [LB-space]]]"
+List begin macro.
+This is the common macro used for all lists.
+\fIText-indent\fP is the number of spaces to indent the text from the
+current indent.
+.sp
+\fIPad\fP and \fImark-indent\fP controls where to put the mark.
+The mark is placed within the mark area, and \fImark-indent\fP
+sets the number of spaces before this area. It is normally 0.
+The mark area ends where the text begins. The start of the text
+is still controlled by \fItext-indent\fP.
+.sp
+The mark is left justified whitin the mark area if \fIpad\fP is 0.
+If \fIpad\fP is greater than 0, then \fImark-indent\fP is ignored, and
+the mark is placed \fIpad\fP spaces before the text.
+This will right justify the mark.
+.sp
+If \fItype\fP is 0 the list will have either a hanging indent or, if
+argument \fImark\fP is given, the string \fImark\fP as mark.
+.sp
+If \fItype\fP is greater than 0 automatic numbering will occur, arabic
+if \fImark\fP is empty. \fIMark\fP can then be any of \fB1\fP, \fBA\fP,
+\fBa\fP, \fBI\fP or \fBi\fP.
+.sp
+\fIType\fP selects one of six possible ways to display the mark.
+.br
+\fBtype\fP
+.in +.6i
+.T2 1
+x.
+.T2 2
+x)
+.T2 3
+(x)
+.T2 4
+[x]
+.T2 5
+<x>
+.T2 6
+{x}
+.in
+.sp
+Every item in the list will get \fILI-space\fP number of blank lines
+before them. Default is 1.
+.sp
+\fBLB\fP itself will print \fILB-space\fP blank lines. Default is 0.
+.TP
+.B "LC [list-level]"
+List-status clear
+Terminates all current active lists down to \fIlist-level\fP, or 0
+if no argmuent is given. This is used by \fBH\fP to clear any
+active list.
+.TP
+.B "LE [1]"
+List end.
+Terminate the current list. \fBLE\fP outputs a blank line
+if an argument is given.
+.TP
+.B "LI [mark [1]]"
+List item precedes every item in a list. Without argument \fBLS\fP
+will print the mark determined by the current list type. By giving
+\fBLI\fP one argument, it will use that as the mark instead.
+Two arguments to \fBLI\fP will make \fImark\fP a prefix to
+the current mark.
+There will be no separating space between the prefix
+and the mark if the second argument is \fB2\fP instead of \fB1\fP.
+This behaviour can also be achieved by setting number register
+\fBLimsp\fP to zero.
+A zero length \fImark\fP will make a hanging
+indent instead.
+.sp
+A blank line is normally printed before the list item. This behaviour
+can be controlled by number register \fBLs\fP. Pre-spacing
+will occur for each list-level less than or equal to \fBLs\fP.
+Default value is 99. (Nesting of lists is unlimited. :-)
+.sp
+The indentation can be changed thru number register \fBLi\fP.
+Default is 6.
+.sp
+All lists begins with a list initialization macro, \fBLB\fP.
+There are, however, seven predefined listtypes to
+make lists easier to use. They all call \fBLB\fP with different
+default values.
+.in +.5i
+.T2 \fBAL\fP
+Automatically Incremented List
+.T2 \fBML\fP
+Marked List
+.T2 \fBVL\fP
+Variable-Item List
+.T2 \fBBL\fP
+Bullet List
+.T2 \fBDL\fP
+Dash List
+.T2 \fBRL\fP
+Reference List
+.T2 \fBBVL\fP
+Broken Varable List.
+.in
+These lists are described at other places in this manual. See also \fBLB\fP.
+.TP
+.B "LT [arg]"
+Formats a letter in one of four different styles depending
+on the argument.
+See also \fBINTERNALS\fP.
+.in +.5i
+.T2 \fBArg
+Style\fP
+.T2 BL
+Blocked. Date line, return address, writer's address and closing
+begins at the center of the line. All other lines begins at the left margin.
+.T2 SB
+Semi-blocked. Same as blocked, except that the first line in every
+paragraph is indented five spaces.
+.T2 FB
+Full-blocked. All lines begin at the left margin.
+.T2 SP
+Simplified. Almost the same as the full-blocked style. Subject and
+the writer'sidentification is printed in all-capital.
+.in
+.TP
+.B "LO type [arg]"
+Specify options in letter (see \fB.LT\fP).
+This is a list of the standard options:
+.in +.5i
+.T2 CN
+Confidential notation. Prints \fBRESTRICTED\fP on the second line
+below the date line. Any argument replaces \fBRESTRICTED\fP.
+See also string variable \fBLetCN\fP.
+.T2 RN
+Reference notation. Prints \fBIn reference to:\fP and the argument
+two lines below the date line.
+See also string variable \fBLetRN\fP.
+.T2 AT
+Attention. Prints \fBATTENTION:\fP and the argument below the inside address.
+See also string variable \fBLetAT\fP.
+.T2 SA
+Salutation. Prints \fBTo Whom It May Concern:\fP or the argument if
+it was present. The salutation is printed two lines below the inside address.
+See also string variable \fBLetSA\fP.
+.T2 SJ
+Subject line. Prints the argument as subject prefixed with \fBSUBJECT:\fP
+two lines below the inside address, except in letter type \fBSP\fP.
+Then the subject is printed in all-captial without any prefix.
+See also string variable \fBLetSJ\fP.
+.in
+.TP
+.B "MC column-size [column-separation] "
+Begin multiple columns. Return to normal with \fB1C\fP.
+\fBMC\fP will create as many columns as the current line length permits.
+\fIColumn-size\fP is the width of each column, and \fIcolumn-separation\fP
+is the space between two columns. Default separation is the
+column-size/15.
+See also \fB1C\fP.
+.TP
+.B "ML mark [text-indent [1]]"
+Marked list start. The \fImark\fP argument will be printed before
+each list item.
+\fIText-indent\fP sets the indent and overrides \fBLi\fP.
+A third argument will prohibit printing of a blank line before each
+item.
+.TP
+.B "MT [arg [addressee]]"
+Memorandum type.
+The \fIarg\fP is part of a filename in \fI@TMAC_MDIR@/*.MT\fP.
+Memorandum type 0 thru 5 are supported, including \fI"string"\fP.
+\fIAddresse\fP just sets a variable, used in the AT&T macros.
+.br
+\fBarg\fP
+.in +.5i
+.T2 0
+Normal memorandum, no type printed
+.T2 1
+Memorandum with \fIMEMORANDUM FOR FILE\fP printed
+.T2 2
+Memorandum with \fIPROGRAMMER'S NOTES\fP printed
+.T2 3
+Memorandum with \fIENGINEER'S NOTES\fP printed
+.T2 4
+Released paper style
+.T2 5
+External letter style
+.in
+See also \fBCOVER\fP/\fBCOVEND\fP, a more flexible type of front page.
+.TP
+.B "MOVE y-pos [x-pos [line-length]]"
+Move to a position, pageoffset set to \fIx-pos\fP.
+If \fIline-length\fP is not given, the difference between
+current and new pageoffset is used.
+Use \fBPGFORM\fP without arguments to return to normal.
+.TP
+.B "MULB cw1 space1 [cw2 space2 [cw3 ...]]"
+Begin a special multi-column mode. Every columns width must be specified.
+Also the space between the columns must be specified. The last column
+does not need any space-definition. MULB starts a diversion and MULE
+ends the diversion and prints the columns.
+The unit for width and space is 'n', but MULB accepts all
+normal unitspecifications like 'c' and 'i'.
+MULB operates in a separate environment.
+.TP
+.B "MULN"
+Begin the next column. This is the only way to switch column.
+.TP
+.B "MULE"
+End the multi-column mode and print the columns.
+.TP
+.B "nP [type]"
+Print numbered paragraph with header level two. Se \fB.P\fP.
+.TP
+.B "NS [arg [1]]"
+Prints different types of notations. The argument selects between
+the predefined type of notations. If the second argument is available,
+then the argument becomes the entire notation.
+If the argument doesn't exist in the predefined, it will be
+printed as \fBCopy (\fP\fIarg\fP\fB) to\fP.
+It is possible to add more standard notations, see the string variable
+\fBLetns\fP and \fBLetnsdef\fP.
+.nf
+.in +.5i
+.T2 \fBArg
+Notation\fP
+.T2 \fInone\fP
+Copy To
+.T2 """""
+Copy To
+.T2 1
+Copy To (with att.) to
+.T2 2
+Copy To (without att.) to
+.T2 3
+Att.
+.T2 4
+Atts.
+.T2 5
+Enc.
+.T2 6
+Encs.
+.T2 7
+Under separate cover
+.T2 8
+Letter to
+.T2 9
+Memorandum to
+.T2 10
+Copy (with atts.) to
+.T2 11
+Copy (without atts.) to
+.T2 12
+Abstract Only to
+.T2 13
+Complete Memorandum to
+.T2 14
+CC
+.in
+.fi
+.TP
+.B "ND new-date"
+New date. Override the current date. Date is not
+printed if \fInew-date\fP is an empty string.
+.TP
+.B "OF [arg]"
+Odd-page footer, a line printed just above the normal footer.
+See \fBEF\fP and \fBPF\fP.
+.TP
+.B "OH [arg]"
+Odd-page header, a line printed just below the normal header.
+See \fBEH\fP and \fBPH\fP.
+.TP
+.B OP
+Make sure that the following text is printed at the top
+of an odd-numbered page. Will not output an empty page
+if currently at the top of an odd page.
+.TP
+.B "P [type]"
+Begin new paragraph.
+\fBP\fP without argument will produce left justified text, even
+the first line of the paragraph. This is the same as setting
+\fItype\fP to 0. If the argument is 1, then the first line
+of text following \fBP\fP will be indented by the number of
+spaces in number register \fBPi\fP, normally 5.
+.sp
+Instead of giving 1 as argument to \fBP\fP it is possible to set the
+paragraph type in number register \fBPt\fP. Using 0 and 1
+will be the same as adding that value to \fBP\fP.
+A value of 2 will indent all paragraphs, except after
+headings, lists and displays.
+.sp
+The space between two paragraphs is controlled by number register \fBPs\fP,
+and is 1 by default (one blank line).
+.TP
+.B "PGFORM [linelength [pagelength [pageoffset [1]]]]"
+Sets linelength, pagelength and/or pageoffset.
+This macro can be used for special formatting, like letterheads
+and other.
+It is normally the first command in a file, though it's not necessary.
+\fBPGFORM\fP can be used without arguments
+to reset everything after a \fBMOVE\fP.
+A line-break is done unless the fourth argument is given.
+This can be used to avoid the pagenumber on the first page while setting
+new width and length.
+(It seems as if this macro sometimes doesn't work too well.
+Use the command line arguments
+to change linelength, pagelength and pageoffset instead. Sorry.)
+.TP
+.B PGNH
+No header is printed on the next page. Used to get rid off
+the header in letters or other special texts
+This macro must be used before any text to inhibit the pageheader
+on the first page.
+.TP
+.B PIC [-L] [-C] [-R] [-I n] filename [width [height]]
+\fBPIC\fP includes a Postscript file in the document.
+The macro depends on \fBmgm_ref\fP and \fBINITR\fP.
+\fB-L\fP, \fB-C\fP, \fB-R\fP and \fB-I n\fP adjusts the picture
+or indents it. The optionally \fIwidth\fP and \fIheight\fP
+can also be given to resize the picture.
+.TP
+.B PE
+Picture end.
+Ends a picture for \fB@TMAC_M@pic\fP, see the manual for \fB@TMAC_M@pic\fP.
+.TP
+.B "PF [arg]"
+Page footer.
+\fBPF\fP sets the line to be printed at the bottom of each page.
+Normally empty. See \fBPH\fP for the argument specification.
+.TP
+.B "PH [arg]"
+Page header, a line printed at the top of each page.
+The argument should be specified as "'left-part'center-part'right-part'",
+where left-, center- and right-part is printed left-justified, centered
+and right justified. The character \fB%\fP is changed to the current
+page number. The default page-header is "''- % -''", the page
+number between two dashes.
+.TP
+.B PS
+Picture start (from pic). Begins a picture for \fB@TMAC@pic\fP, see
+the manual.
+.TP
+.B PX
+Page-header user-defined exit.
+\fBPX\fP is called just after the printing of the page header
+in \fIno-space\fP mode.
+.TP
+.B R
+Roman.
+Return to roman font, see also \fBI\fP.
+.TP
+.B "RB [roman-text [bold-text [roman-text [...]]]"
+Roman-bold.
+Even arguments is printed in roman, odd in boldface.
+See \fBI\fP.
+.TP
+.B "RD [prompt [diversion [string]]]"
+Read from standard input to diversion and/or string.
+The text will be saved in a diversion named \fIdiversion\fP.
+Recall the text by writing the name of the diversion after a dot
+on an empty line. A string will also be defined if
+\fIstring\fP is given. \fIDiversion\fP and/or \fIprompt\fP can
+be empty ("").
+.TP
+.B RF
+Reference end. Ends a reference definition and returns to normal
+processing. See \fBRS\fP.
+.TP
+.B "RI [roman-text [italic-text [roman-text [...]]]"
+Even arguments is printed in roman, odd in italic.
+See \fBI\fP.
+.TP
+.B "RL [text-indent [1]]"
+Reference list start
+Begins a list where each item is preceded with a automatically
+incremented number between
+square brackets.
+\fIText-indent\fP changes the default indentation
+.TP
+.B "RP [arg1 [arg2]]"
+Produce reference page.
+\fBRP\fP can be used if a reference page is wanted somewhere in the
+document. It is not needed if \fBTC\fP is used to produce
+a table of content. The reference page will then be printed automatically.
+.sp
+The reference counter will not be resetted if \fIarg1\fP is 1.
+.sp
+\fIArg2\fP tells \fBRP\fP whether to eject a page or not.
+.br
+\fBArg2\fP
+.in +.5i
+.T2 0
+The reference page will be printed on a separate page.
+This is
+the default.
+.T2 1
+Do not eject page after the list.
+.T2 2
+Do not eject page before the list.
+.T2 3
+Do not eject page before and after the list.
+.in
+The reference items will be separated by a blank line.
+Setting number register \fBLs\fP to 0 will suppress the line.
+.sp
+The string \fBRp\fP contains the reference page title and
+is normally set to \fIREFERENCES\fP.
+.TP
+.B "RS [string-name]"
+\fBRS\fP begins an automatically numbered reference definition.
+Put the string \fB\e*(Rf\fP where the reference mark
+should be and write the reference between \fBRS\fP/\fBRF\fP
+at next new line after the reference mark. The reference number
+is stored in number register \fB:R\fP.
+If \fIstring-name\fP is given, a string with that name
+will be defined and contain the current reference mark.
+The string can be referenced as \fB\e*[\fIstring-name\fP]\fP later in
+the text.
+.TP
+.B "S [size [spacing]]"
+Set point size and vertical spacing. If any argument is equal 'P', then
+the previous value is used. A 'C' means current value, and 'D' default value.
+If '+' or '-' is used before the value, then increment or decrement of
+the current value will be done.
+.TP
+.B "SA [arg]"
+Set right-margin justification.
+Justification is normally turned on.
+No argumenent or \fB0\fP turns off justification, a \fB1\fP turns on
+justification.
+.TP
+.B "SETR refname [string]"
+Remember the current header and page-number as refname.
+Saves \fIstring\fP if \fIstring\fP is defined. \fIstring\fP is retrieved
+with \fB.GETST\fP.
+See \fBINITR\fP.
+.TP
+.B "SG [arg [1]]"
+Signature line. Prints the authors name(s) after the formal closing.
+The argument will be appended to the reference data, printed
+at either the first or last author. The reference data is the location,
+department and initials specified with \fB.AU\fP.
+It will be printed at the first author, otherwise at the last.
+No reference data will be printed if the author(s) is specifed
+thru \fB.WA\fP/\fB.WE\fP.
+See \fBLetter internals\fP.
+.TP
+.B "SK [pages]"
+Skip pages.
+If \fIpages\fP is \fB0\fP or omitted, a skip to the next page
+will occur unless it is already at the top of a page.
+Otherwise it will skip \fIpages\fP pages.
+.TP
+.B "SM string1 [string2 [string3]]"
+Make a string smaller.
+If \fIstring2\fP is given, \fIstring1\fP will be smaller and \fIstring2\fP
+normal, concatenated with \fIstring1\fP. With three argument, all is
+concatenated, but only \fIstring2\fP is made smaller.
+.TP
+.B "SP [lines]"
+Space vertically. \fIlines\fP can have any scalingfactor, like \fI3i\fP or
+\fI8v\fP. Several \fBSP\fP in a line will only produce the
+maximum number of lines, not the sum. \fBSP\fP will also be ignored
+until the first textline in a page. Add a \fB\e&\fP before \fBSP\fP
+to avoid this.
+.TP
+.B TAB
+reset tabs to every 5n. Normally used to reset any previous tabpositions.
+.TP
+.B "TB [title [override [flag [refname]]]]"
+Table title, arguments are the same as for \fBEC\fP.
+\fBTB\fP uses the number register \fBTb\fP as counter.
+The string \fBLt\fP controls the title of the
+List of Tables, default is \fILIST OF TABLES\fP.
+The List of Tables will only be printed if number register \fBLt\fP
+is 1, default 1.
+The string \fBLitb\fP contains the word \fITABLE\fP, wich
+is printed before the number.
+.br
+Special handling of the title will occur if
+\fBTB\fP is used inside \fBDS\fP/\fBDE\fP, it will not be
+affected by the format of \fBDS\fP.
+.TP
+.B "TC [slevel [spacing [tlevel [tab [h1 [h2 [h3 [h4 [h5]]]]]]]]]"
+Table of contents.
+This macro is normally used at the last line of the document.
+It generates a table of contents with headings up to the level
+controlled by number register \fBCl\fP. Note that \fBCl\fP controls
+the saving of headings, it has nothing to do with \fBTC\fP.
+Headings with level less than or equal to \fIslevel\fP will get
+\fIspacing\fP number of lines before them.
+Headings with level less than or equal to \fItlevel\fP will have
+their page numbers right justified with dots or spaces separating
+the text and the page number. Spaces is used if \fItab\fP
+is greater than zero, otherwise dots.
+Other headings will have the
+page number directly at the end of the heading text (\fIragged right\fP).
+.sp
+The rest of the arguments will be printed, centered, before the
+table of contents.
+.sp
+The user-defined macros \fBTX\fP and \fBTY\fP are used if \fBTC\fP is called
+with at most four arguments. \fBTX\fP is called before the printing
+of \fICONTENTS\fP, and \fBTY\fP is called instead of printing \fICONTENTS\fP.
+.sp
+Equivalent macros can be defined for list of figures, tables, equations
+and excibits by defining \fBTXxx\fP or \fBTYxx\fP, where \fBxx\fP
+is \fBFg\fP, \fBTB\fP, \fBEC\fP or \fBEX\fP.
+.sp
+String \fBCi\fP can be set to control the indentations for each heading-level.
+It must be scaled, like \fB.ds\ Ci\ .25i\ .5i\ .75i\ 1i\ 1i\fP.
+The indentation is normally controlled by the maxlength of headings
+in each level.
+.sp
+All texts can be redefined, new stringvariables
+\fILifg\fP, \fILitb\fP, \fILiex\fP, \fILiec\fP and \fILicon\fP contains
+"Figure", "TABLE", "Exhibit", "Equation" and "CONTENTS".
+These can be redefined to other languages.
+.TP
+.B TE
+Table end. See \fBTS\fP.
+.TP
+.B "TH [N]"
+Table header. See \fBTS\fP.
+\fBTH\fP ends the header of the table. This header will
+be printed again if a page-break occurs.
+Argument \fIN\fP isn't implemented yet.
+.TP
+.B TL [charging-case number(s) [filing-case number(s)]
+Begin title of memorandum.
+All text up to the next \fBAU\fP is included in the title.
+\fICharging-case number\fP and \fIfiling-case\fP is saved
+for use in the front page processing.
+.TP
+.B TM [num1 [num2 [...]]]
+Technical memorandumnumbers used in \fB.MT\fP. Unlimited number
+of arguments may be given.
+.TP
+.B TP
+Top of page user-defined macro.
+This macro is called instead of the normal page header. It is
+possible to get complete control over the header.
+Note that header and footer is printed in a separate environment.
+Linelength is preserved though.
+.TP
+.B "TS [H]"
+Table start. This is the start of a table specification
+to \fB@TMAC@tbl\fP. See separate manual for \fB@TMAC@tbl\fP.
+\fBTS\fP ends with \fBTE\fP.
+Argument \fIH\fP tells \fBm@TMAC@m\fP that the table
+has a header. See \fBTH\fP.
+.TP
+.B TX
+Userdefined table of contents exit.
+This macro is called just before \fBTC\fP prints the word \fICONTENTS\fP.
+See \fBTC\fP.
+.TP
+.B TY
+Userdefined table of contents exit (no "CONTENTS").
+This macro is called instead of printing \fICONTENTS\fP.
+See \fBTC\fP.
+.TP
+.B VERBON [flag [pointsize [font]]]
+Begin verbatim output using courier font.
+Usually for printing programs.
+All character has equal width.
+The pointsize can be changed with
+the second argument. By specifying the font-argument
+it is possible to use another font instead of courier.
+\fIflag\fP control several special features.
+It contains the sum of all wanted features.
+.in +.5i
+.T2 Value
+Description
+.T2 1
+Disable the escape-character (\e). This is normally turned on during
+verbose output.
+.T2 2
+Add en empty line before the verbose text.
+.T2 4
+Add en empty line after the verbose text.
+.T2 8
+Print the verbose text with numbered lines. This adds four digitsized
+spaces in the beginning of each line. Finer control is available with
+the string-variable \fBVerbnm\fP. It contains all arguments to the
+\fBtroff\fP-command \fB.nm\fP, normally '1'.
+.T2 16
+Indent the verbose text with five 'n':s. This is controlled by the
+number-variable \fBVerbin\fP (in units).
+.in
+.TP
+.B VERBOFF
+End verbatim output.
+.TP
+.B "VL text-indent [mark-indent [1]]"
+Variable-item list has no fixed mark, it assumes that
+every \fBLI\fP have a mark instead.
+\fIText-indent\fP sets the indent to the text, and \fImark-indent\fP
+the distance from the current indent to the mark.
+A third argument will prohibit printing of a blank line before each
+item.
+.TP
+.B "VM [top [bottom]]"
+Vertical margin.
+.TP
+.B "WA [writer-name [title]]
+Begins specification of the writer and writer's address.
+Several names can be specified with empty \fBWA\fP/\fBWE\fP-pairs, but
+only one address.
+.TP
+.B WE
+Ends the address-specification after \fP.WA\fP.
+.TP
+.B "WC [format]"
+Footnote and display width control.
+.in +.5i
+.T2 N
+Set default mode, \fB-WF\fP, \fB-FF\fP, \fB-WD\fP and \fBFB\fP.
+.T2 WF
+Wide footnotes, wide also in two-column mode.
+.T2 -WF
+Normal footnote width, follow column mode.
+.T2 FF
+All footnotes gets the same width as the first footnote encountered.
+.T2 -FF
+Normal footnotes, width follows \fBWF\fP and \fB-WF\fP.
+.T2 WD
+Wide displays, wide also in two-column mode.
+.T2 -WD
+Normal display width, follow column mode.
+.T2 FB
+Floating displays generates a line break when printed on the current page.
+.T2 -FB
+Floating displays does not generate line break.
+.in
+.sp 3
+.LP
+.\"########################################################################
+.LP
+.B "Strings used in m@TMAC_M@:"
+.TP
+.B App
+A string containing the word "APPENDIX".
+.TP
+.B Apptxt
+.TP
+The current appendix text.
+.B "EM"
+Em dash string
+.TP
+.B H1txt
+Will be updated by \fB.H\fP and \fB.HU\fP to the current heading text.
+Also updated in table of contents & friends.
+.TP
+.B HF
+Fontlist for headings, normally "2 2 2 2 2 2 2".
+Nonnumeric fontnames may also be used.
+.TP
+.B HP
+Pointsize list for headings. Normally "0 0 0 0 0 0 0" which is the same as
+"10 10 10 10 10 10 10".
+.TP
+.B Index
+.TP
+Contains \fIINDEX\fP.
+.B Indcmd
+.TP
+Contains the index command, \fIsort\ -t\et\fP.
+.B Lifg
+String containing \fIFigure\fP.
+.TP
+.B Litb
+String containing \fITABLE\fP.
+.TP
+.B Liex
+String containing \fIExhibit\fP.
+.TP
+.B Liec
+String containing \fIEquation\fP.
+.TP
+.B Licon
+String containing \fICONTENTS\fP.
+.TP
+.B Lf
+Contains "LIST OF FIGURES".
+.TP
+.B Lt
+Contains "LIST OF TABLES".
+.TP
+.B Lx
+Contains "LIST OF EXHIBITS".
+.TP
+.B Le
+Contains "LIST OF EQUATIONS".
+.TP
+.B Letfc
+Contains "Yours very truly,", used in \fB.FC\fP.
+.TP
+.B Letapp
+Contains "APPROVED:", used in \fB.AV.\fP.
+.TP
+.B Letdate
+Contains "Date", used in \fB.AV.\fP.
+.TP
+.B LetCN
+Contains "CONFIDENTIAL", used in \fB.LO CN\fP.
+.TP
+.B LetSA
+Contains "To Whom It May Concern:", used in \fB.LO SA\fP.
+.TP
+.B LetAT
+Contains "ATTENTION:", used in \fB.LO AT\fP.
+.TP
+.B LetSJ
+Contains "SUBJECT:", used in \fB.LO SJ\fP.
+.TP
+.B LetRN
+Contains "In reference to:", used in \fB.LO RN\fP.
+.TP
+.B Letns
+is an array containing the different strings used in \fB.NS\fP.
+It is really a number of stringvariables prefixed with \fBLetns!\fP.
+If the argument doesn't exist, it will be included
+between \fB()\fP with \fBLetns!copy\fP as prefix and \fBLetns!to\fP as suffix.
+Observe the space after \fBcopy\fP and before \fBto\fP.
+.nf
+.ta 1.5i
+\fBName Value\fP
+Letns!0 Copy to
+Letns!1 Copy (with att.) to
+Letns!2 Copy (without att.) to
+Letns!3 Att.
+Letns!4 Atts.
+Letns!5 Enc.
+Letns!6 Encs.
+Letns!7 Under separate cover
+Letns!8 Letter to
+Letns!9 Memorandum to
+Letns!10 Copy (with atts.) to
+Letns!11 Copy (without atts.) to
+Letns!12 Abstract Only to
+Letns!13 Complete Memorandum to
+Letns!14 CC
+Letns!copy Copy "
+Letns!to " to
+.fi
+.TP
+.B Letnsdef
+Defines the standard-notation used when no argument is given
+to \fB.NS\fP. Default is \fB0\fP.
+.TP
+.B "MO1 - MO12"
+Strings containing \fIJanuary\fP thru \fIDecember\fP.
+.TP
+.B Qrf
+String containing "See chapter \e\e*[Qrfh], page \e\en[Qrfp].".
+.TP
+.B Rp
+Contains "REFERENCES".
+.TP
+.B Tcst
+Contains current status of table of contents and list of XXXX.
+Empty outside \fB.TC\fP.
+Useful in user-defined macros like \fB.TP\fP.
+.nf
+.ta 1.5i
+\fBValue Meaning\fP
+co Table of contents
+fg List of figures
+tb List of tables
+ec List of equations
+ex List of exhibits
+ap Appendix
+.fi
+.ta
+.TP
+.B Tm
+Contains \e(tm, trade mark.
+.TP
+.B Verbnm
+Argument to \fB.nm\fP in \fB.VERBON\fP, default: \fB1\fP.
+.\"-----------------------------------
+.LP
+.B "Number variables used in m@TMAC_M@:"
+.TP
+.B Aph
+Print an appendix-page for every new appendix
+if this numbervariable is non-zero.
+No output will occur if \fBAph\fP is zero, but there will always
+be an appendix-entry in the 'List of contents'.
+.TP
+.B Cl
+Contents level [0:7], contents saved if heading level <= Cl, default 2.
+.TP
+.B Cp
+Eject page between LIST OF XXXX if Cp == 0, default 0.
+.TP
+.B D
+Debugflag, values >0 produces varying degree of debug. A value of 1
+gives information about the progress of formatting, default 0.
+.TP
+.B De
+Eject after floating display is output [0:1], default 0.
+.TP
+.B Dsp
+Controls the space output before and after static displays
+if defined. Otherwise is the value of Lsp used.
+.TP
+.B Df
+Floating keep output [0:5], default 5.
+.TP
+.B Ds
+\fBLsp\fP space before and after display if == 1 [0:1], default 1.
+.TP
+.B Ej
+Eject page, default 0.
+.TP
+.B Eq
+Equation lable adjust 0=left, 1=right. Default 0.
+.TP
+.B Fs
+Footnote spacing, default 1.
+.TP
+.B "H1-H7"
+Heading counters
+.TP
+.B H1dot
+Append a dot after the level one heading number if > 0. Default is 1.
+.TP
+.B H1h
+.TP
+Copy of number register \fBH1\fP, but it is incremented
+just before the page break. Useful in user defined header macros.
+.B Hb
+Heading break level [0:7], default 2.
+.TP
+.B Hc
+Heading centering level, [0:7]. Default 0.
+.TP
+.B Hi
+Heading temporary indent [0:2], default 1.
+.br
+0\ ->\ 0 indent, left margin
+.br
+1\ ->\ indent to right , like .P 1
+.br
+2\ ->\ indent to line up with text part of preceding heading
+.TP
+.B Hps
+Numbervariable with the heading pre-space level. If the heading-level
+is less than or equal to \fBHps\fP, then two lines will precede the
+section heading instead of one. Default is first level only.
+The real amount of lines is controlled by the variables \fBHps1\fP and
+\fBHps2\fP.
+.TP
+.B Hps1
+This is the number of lines preceding \fB.H\fP when the heading-level
+is greater than \fBHps\fP. Value is in units, normally 0.5.
+.TP
+.B Hps2
+This is the number of lines preceding \fB.H\fP when the heading-level
+is less than or equal to \fBHps\fP. Value is in units, normally 1.
+.TP
+.B Hs
+Heading space level [0:7], default 2.
+.TP
+.B Hss
+This is the number of lines that follows \fB.H\fP when the heading-level
+is less than or equal to \fBHs\fP. Value is in units, normally 1.
+.TP
+.B Ht
+Heading numbering type, default 0.
+0 -> multiple (1.1.1 ...)
+.br
+1 -> single
+.TP
+.B Hu
+Unnumbered heading level, default 2.
+.TP
+.B Hy
+Hyphenation in body, default 1.
+.br
+0\ ->\ no hyphenation
+.br
+1\ ->\ hyphenation 14 on
+.TP
+.B Letwam
+Max lines in return-address, used in \fB.WA\fP/\fB.WE\fP. Default 14.
+.TP
+.B "Lf, Lt, Lx, Le"
+Enables (1) or disables (0) the printing of List of figures,
+List of tables, List of exhibits and List of equations.
+Default: Lf=1, Lt=1, Lx=1, Le=0.
+.TP
+.B Li
+List indent, used by .AL, default 6.
+.TP
+.B Limsp
+Flag for space between prefix and mark in automatic lists (.AL).
+.br
+0\ ==\ no space
+.br
+1\ ==\ space
+.TP
+.B Ls
+List space, if current listlevel > Ls then no spacing will occur around lists.
+Default 99.
+.TP
+.B Lsp
+.TP
+The size of an empty line. Normally 0.5v, but it is 1v
+if \fBn\fP is set (\fB.nroff\fP).
+.TP
+.B N
+Numbering style [0:5], default 0.
+.br
+0\ ==\ (default) normal header for all pages.
+.br
+1\ ==\ header replaces footer on first page, header is empty.
+.br
+2\ ==\ page header is removed on the first page.
+.br
+3\ ==\ "section-page" numbering enabled.
+.br
+4\ ==\ page header is removed on the first page.
+.br
+5\ ==\ "section-page" and "section-figure" numbering enabled.
+Se also the number-register Sectf and Sectp.
+.TP
+.B Np
+Numbered paragraphs, default 0.
+.br
+0\ ==\ not numbered
+.br
+1\ ==\ numbered in first level headings.
+.TP
+.B Of
+Format of figure,table,exhibit,equation titles, default 0.
+.br
+0\ =\ ". "
+.br
+1\ =\ " - "
+.TP
+.B P
+Current page-number, normally the same as % unless "section-page" numbering
+is enabled.
+.TP
+.B Pi
+paragraph indent, default 5.
+.TP
+.B Pgps
+Controls whether header and footer pointsize should follow the current
+setting or just change when the header and footer is defined.
+.in +.5i
+.ti -.5i
+.T2 Value
+Description
+.T2 0
+Pointsize will only change to the current setting when \fB.PH\fP, \fB.PF\fP,
+\&\fB.OH\fP, \fP.EH\fP, \fB.OF\fP or \fB.OE\fP is executed.
+.T2 1
+Pointsize will change after every \fB.S\fP. This is the default.
+.in
+.TP
+.B Ps
+paragraph spacing, default 1.
+.TP
+.B Pt
+Paragraph type, default 0.
+.br
+0\ ==\ left-justified
+.br
+1\ ==\ indented .P
+.br
+2\ ==\ indented .P except after .H, .DE or .LE.
+.TP
+.B Sectf
+Flag controlling "section-figures". A non-zero value enables this.
+Se also register N.
+.TP
+.B Sectp
+Flag controlling "section-page-numbers". A non-zero value enables this.
+Se also register N.
+.TP
+.B Si
+Display indent, default 5.
+.TP
+.B Verbin
+Indent for \fB.VERBON\fP, default 5n.
+.TP
+.B .mgm
+Always 1.
+.LP
+.SH INTERNALS
+The letter macros is using different submacros depending on
+the letter type. The name of the submacro has the letter type
+as suffix. It is therefore possible to define other letter types, either
+in the national macro-file, or as local additions.
+\&\fB.LT\fP will set the number variables \fBPt\fP and \fBPi\fP to 5 and 0.
+The following strings and macros must be defined for a new letter type:
+.TP
+\fBlet@init_\fP\fItype\fP
+This macro is called directly by \fB.LT\fP. It is supposed to initialize
+variables and other stuff.
+.TP
+\fBlet@head_\fP\fItype\fP
+This macro prints the letter head, and is called instead of the
+normal page header. It is supposed to remove the alias \fBlet@header\fP,
+otherwise it will be called for all pages.
+.TP
+\fBlet@sg_\fP\fItype\ name\ title\ n\ flag\ [arg1\ [arg2\ [...]]]\fP
+\&\fB.SG\fP is calling this macro only for letters, memorandums has
+its own processing. \fIname\fP and \fItitle\fP is specified
+thru \fB.WA\fP/\fB.WB\fP. \fIn\fP is the counter, 1-max, and
+\fIflag\fP is true for the last name. Any other argument to \fB.SG\fP
+is appended.
+.TP
+\fBlet@fc_\fP\fItype\ closing\fP
+This macro is called by \fB.FC\fP, and has the
+formal closing as argument.
+.LP
+\&\fB.LO\fP is implemented as a general option-macro. \fB.LO\fP demands
+that a string named \fBLet\fP\fItype\fP is defined, where \fItype\fP
+is the letter type.
+\&\fB.LO\fP will then assign the argument to the string
+variable \fBlet*lo-\fP\fItype\fP.
+.LP
+.\".SH BUGS
+.SH AUTHOR
+Jörgen Hägg, Lund, Sweden <jh@axis.se>.
+.SH FILES
+.TP
+.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.@TMAC_M@
+.TP
+.B @TMAC_MDIR@/*.cov
+.TP
+.B @TMAC_MDIR@/*.MT
+.TP
+.B @TMAC_MDIR@/locale
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@tbl (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@pic (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@eqn (@MAN1EXT@)
+.br
+.BR mm (@MAN7EXT@)
+.BR m@TMAC_M@se (@MAN7EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1991-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.\" $Id: groff_mm.man,v 1.3 1998/01/19 00:40:12 etheisen Exp $
-.\"
-.de T2
-.ne 2v
-.ti -.5i
-\\$1
-.sp -1
-..
-.de T3
-.ne 2v
-.ti -.5i
-\fB\\$1\fP
-.br
-..
-.TH GROFF_MM @MAN7EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-groff_mm \- groff mm macros
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B groff
-.B \-m@TMAC_M_PREFIX@m
-[
-.IR options .\|.\|.
-]
-[
-.IR files .\|.\|.
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The groff mm macros are intended to be compatible with the DWB mm macros
-with the following limitations:
-.TP
-.B \(bu
-no Bell Labs localisms implemented.
-.TP
-.B \(bu
-the macros OK and PM is not implemented.
-.TP
-.B \(bu
-groff mm does not support cut marks
-.LP
-\fBm@TMAC_M_PREFIX@m\fP is intended to be international. Therefore it is
-possible to write short national macrofiles which change all
-english text to the preferred language. Use \fBm@TMAC_M_PREFIX@mse\fP as an example.
-.LP
-New macros: \fBAPP\fP, \fBAPPSK\fP, \fBB1\fP, \fBB2\fP, \fBBVL\fP,
-\fBCOVER\fP, \fBCOVEND\fP, \fBGETHN\fP, \fBGETPN\fP, \fBGETR\fP,
-\fBGETST\fP, \fBINITR\fP, \fBMC\fP, \fBMOVE\fP, \fBMULB\fP,
-\fBMULN\fP, \fBMULE\fP, \fBPGFORM\fP, \fBPGNH\fP, \fBSETR\fP,
-\fBTAB\fP, \fBVERBON\fP, \fBVERBOFF\fP.
-.LP
-.\"########################################################################
-.LP
-A file called \fBlocale\fP or \fIlang\fP\fB_locale\fP is read
-after the initiation of the global variables. It is therefore
-possible to localize the macros with companyname and so on.
-.sp
-In this manual square brackets is used to show optional arguments.
-.sp 3
-\fBNumber registers and strings\fP
-.br
-Many macros can be controlled by number registers and strings.
-A number register is assigned with the \fBnr\fP command:
-.br
-\fB\&.nr\fP \fIXXX\fP \fI[+-]n [i]\fP
-.br
-\fBXXX\fP is the name of the register, \fBn\fP is the value to
-be assigned, and \fBi\fP is increment value for auto-increment.
-\fBn\fP can have a plus or minus sign as prefix if an increment
-or decrement of the current value is wanted. (Auto-increment or decrement
-occurs if the number register is used with a plus or minus sign,
-\fB\en+[XXX]\fP or \fB\en-[XXX]\fP.)
-.sp
-Strings is defined with \fBds\fP.
-.br
-\fB\&.ds\fP \fIYYY string\fP
-.br
-The string is assigned everything to the end of the line, even blanks.
-Initial blanks in \fIstring\fP should be prefixed with
-a double-quote. (Strings are used in the text as \fB\e*[YYY]\fP.)
-.sp
-\fBSpecial formatting of number registers\fP
-A number register is printed with normal digits if no format has been
-given.
-Set the format with \fBaf\fP:
-.br
-\fB\&.af\fP \fIR c\fP
-.br
-\fIR\fP is the name of the register, \fIc\fP is the format.
-.in +.5i
-.T2 \fBForm\fP
-\fBSequence\fP
-.T2 1
-0, 1, 2, 3, ...
-.T2 001
-000, 001, 002, 003, ...
-.T2 i
-0, i, ii, iii, iv, ...
-.T2 I
-0, I, II, III, IV, ...
-.T2 a
-0, a, b, c, ..., z, aa, ab, ...
-.T2 A
-0, A, B, C, ..., Z, AA, AB, ...
-.in
-
-.LP
-\fBMacros:\fP
-.TP
-.B "1C [1]"
-Begin one column processing. An \fB1\fP as argument disables the page-break.
-Use wide footnotes, small footnotes may be overprinted.
-.TP
-.B 2C
-Begin two column processing. Splits the page in two columns. It is
-a special case of \fBMC\fP. See also \fB1C\fP.
-.TP
-.B AE
-Abstract end, see \fBAS\fP.
-.TP
-.B "AF [name of firm]"
-Authors firm, should be called before \fBAU\fP, see also \fBCOVER\fP.
-.TP
-.B "AL [type [text-indent [1]]]]"
-Start autoincrement list. Items are numbered beginning on one.
-The \fItype\fP argument controls the type of numbers.
-.in +.5i
-.T2 Arg
-Description
-.T2 1
-Arabic (the default)
-.T2 A
-Upper-case letters (A-Z)
-.T2 a
-Lower-case letters (a-z)
-.T2 I
-Upper-case roman
-.T2 i
-Lower-case roman
-.in
-\fIText-indent\fP sets the indent and overrides \fBLi\fP.
-A third argument will prohibit printing of a blank line before each
-item.
-.TP
-.B "APP name text"
-Begin an appendix with name \fIname\fP. Automatic naming occurs if
-\fIname\fP is "". The appendixes starts with \fBA\fP if auto is used.
-An new page is ejected, and a header is also produced if the number
-variable \fBAph\fP is non-zero. This is the default.
-The appendix always appear in the 'List of contents' with correct
-pagenumber. The name \fIAPPENDIX\fP can be changed by setting
-the string \fBApp\fP to the desired text.
-.TP
-.B "APPSK name pages text"
-Same as \fB.APP\fP, but the pagenr is incremented with \fIpages\fP.
-This is used when diagrams or other non-formatted documents are
-included as appendixes.
-.TP
-.B "AS [arg [indent]]"
-Abstract start. Indent is specified in 'ens', but scaling is allowed.
-Argument \fIarg\fP controls where the abstract is printed.
-.in +.5i
-.T2 Arg
-Placement
-.T2 0
-Abstract will be printed on page 1 and con the cover sheet if
-used in the released-paper style (\fBMT 4\fP), otherwise
-it will be printed on page 1 without a cover sheet.
-.T2 1
-Abstract will only be printed on page 1 (\fBMT 4\fP only).
-.T2 2
-Abstract will be printed only on the cover sheet. The cover sheet
-is printed without need for \fBCS\fP.
-.in
-Abstract is not printed at all in external letters (\fBMT 5\fP).
-The \fIindent\fP controls the indentation of both margins, otherwise
-will normal text indent be used.
-.TP
-.B "AST [title]"
-Abstract title. Default is \fBABSTRACT\fP.
-Sets the text above the abstract text.
-.TP
-.B "AT title1 [title2 ...]"
-Authors title. \fBAT\fP must appear just after each \fBAU\fP.
-The title will show up after the name in the signature block.
-.TP
-.B "AU name [initials [loc [dept [ext [room [arg [arg [arg]]]]]]]]"
-Author information, specifies the author of the memo or paper, and
-will be printed on the cover sheet and on other similar places.
-\fBAU\fP must appear before \fBTL\fP. The author information
-can contain intials, location, department, telephone extension,
-room number or name and up to three extra arguments.
-.TP
-.B "AV [name [1]]"
-Approval signature, generates an approval line with place for
-signature and date. The string \fBAPPROVED:\fP can be changed
-with variable \fBLetapp\fP, and the string \fBDate\fP in \fBLetdate\fP.
-.TP
-.B "B [bold-text [prev-font-tex [bold...]]]"
-Begin boldface
-No limit on the number of arguments.
-All arguments will be concatenated to one word, the first, third and so
-on will be printed in boldface.
-.TP
-.B B1
-Begin box (as the ms macro)
-Draws a box around the text. The text will be indented one character,
-and the right margin will be one character shorter.
-.TP
-.B B2
-End box. Finish the box started by \fBB1\fP.
-.TP
-.B BE
-End bottom block, see \fBBS\fP.
-.TP
-.B "BI [bold-text [italic-text [bold-text [...]]]"
-Bold-italic.
-No limit on the number of arguments, see \fBB\fP.
-.TP
-.B "BL [text-indent [1]]"
-Start bullet list, initialize a list with a bullet and a space
-in the beginning of each list item (see \fBLI\fP).
-\fIText-indent\fP
-overrides the default indentation of the list items set by
-number register \fBPi\fP.
-A third argument will prohibit printing of a blank line before each
-item.
-.TP
-.B "BR [bold-text [roman-text [bold-text [...]]]"
-Bold-roman.
-No limit on the number of arguments.
-.TP
-.B BS
-Bottom block start. Begins the definition of a text block wich is
-printed at the bottom of each page. Block ends with \fBBE\fP.
-.TP
-.B BVL
-Start of
-broken variable-item list.
-Broken variable-item list has no fixed mark, it assumes that
-every \fBLI\fP has a mark instead.
-The text will always begin at the next line after the mark.
-\fIText-indent\fP sets the indent to the text, and \fImark-indent\fP
-the distance from the current indent to the mark.
-A third argument will prohibit printing of a blank line before each
-item.
-.TP
-.B "COVER [arg]"
-\&\fBCOVER\fP begins a coversheet definition. It is important
-that \fB.COVER\fP appears before any normal text.
-\&\fB.COVER\fP uses \fIarg\fP to build the filename
-@TMAC_MDIR@/\fIarg\fP.cov. Therefore it is possible to create unlimited
-types of coversheets.
-\fIms.cov\fP is supposed to look like the \fBms\fP coversheet.
-\&\fB.COVER\fP requires a \fB.COVEND\fP at the end of the coverdefinition.
-Always use this order of the covermacros:
-.nf
-\&.COVER
-\&.TL
-\&.AF
-\&.AU
-\&.AT
-\&.AS
-\&.AE
-\&.COVEND
-.fi
-However, only \fB.TL\fP and \fB.AU\fP are required.
-.TP
-.B COVEND
-This finish the cover description and prints the cover-page.
-It is defined in the cover file.
-.TP
-.B DE
-Display end. Ends a block of text, display, that begins
-with \fBDS\fP or \fBDF\fP.
-.TP
-.B "DF [format [fill [rindent]]]"
-Begin floating display (no nesting allowed).
-A floating display is saved in a queue and is printed in the
-order entered. \fIFormat\fP, \fIfill\fP and \fIrindent\fP is the same
-as in \fBDS\fP.
-Floating displays are controlled by the two number registers \fBDe\fP
-and \fBDf\fP.
-.sp
-\fBDe register\fP
-.in +.5i
-.T2 0
-Nothing special, this is the default.
-.T2 1
-A page eject will occur after each printed display, giving only
-one display per page and no text following it.
-.in
-.sp
-\fBDf register\fP
-.in +.5i
-.T2 0
-Displays are printed at the end of each section (when section-page
-numbering is active) or at the end of the document.
-.T2 1
-A new display will be printed on the current page is there is enough
-space, otherwise it will be printed at the end of the document.
-.T2 2
-One display will be printed at the top of each page or column
-(in multi-column mode).
-.T2 3
-Print one display if there is enough space for it, otherwise it will
-be printed at the top of the next page or column.
-.T2 4
-Print as many displays that will fit in a new page or column.
-A page break will occur between each display if \fBDe\fP is not zero.
-.T2 5
-Fill the current page with displays and the rest beginning at a new page
-or column. (This is the default.)
-A page break will occur between each display
-if \fBDe\fP is not zero.
-.in
-.TP
-.B "DL [text-indent [1]]"
-Dash list start. Begins a list where each item is printed
-after a dash. \fIText-indent\fP changes the default indentation
-of the list items set by
-number register \fBPi\fP.
-A third argument will prohibit printing of a blank line before each
-item.
-A second argument prevents the empty line between each list item
-to be printed. See \fBLI\fP.
-.TP
-.B "DS [format [fill [rindent]]]"
-Static display start.
-Begins collection of text until \fBDE\fP.
-The text is printed together on the same page, unless it is longer
-than the height of the page.
-\fBDS\fP can be nested to a unlimited depth (reasonably :-).
-.sp
-\fBformat\fP
-.in +.5i
-.ds x "
-.T2 """"""
-No indentation.
-.T2 none
-No indentation.
-.T2 L
-No indentation.
-.T2 I
-Indent text with the value of number register \fBSi\fP.
-.T2 C
-Center each line
-.T2 CB
-Center the whole display as a block.
-.T2 R
-Right adjust the lines.
-.T2 RB
-Right adjust the whole display as a block
-.in
-.sp
-L, I, C and CB can also be specified as 0, 1, 2 or 3 for compatibility
-reasons. (Don't use it. :-)
-.sp
-\fBfill\fP
-.in +.5i
-.T2 """"""
-Line-filling turned off.
-.T2 none
-Line-filling turned off.
-.T2 N
-Line-filling turned off.
-.T2 F
-Line-filling turned on.
-.in
-.sp
-N and F can also be specified as 0 or 1.
-An empty line will normally be printed before and after the
-display. Setting number register \fBDs\fP to 0 will prevent this.
-\fIRindent\fP shortens the line length by that amount.
-.TP
-.B "EC [title [override [flag [refname]]]]"
-Equation title.
-Sets a title for an equation. The \fIoverride\fP argument
-change the numbering.
-.sp
-\fBflag\fP
-.in +.5i
-.T2 none
-\fIoverride\fP is a prefix to the number.
-.T2 0
-\fIoverride\fP is a prefix to the number.
-.T2 1
-\fIoverride\fP is a suffix to the number.
-.T2 2
-\fIoverride\fP replaces the number.
-.in
-\fBEC\fP uses the number register \fBEc\fP as counter.
-It is possible to use \fB.af\fP to change the format of the number.
-If number register \fBOf\fP is 1, then the format of title
-will use a dash instead of a dot after the number.
-The string \fBLe\fP controls the title of the
-List of Equations, default is \fILIST OF EQUATIONS\fP.
-The string \fBLiec\fP contains the word \fIEquation\fP, wich
-is printed before the number.
-If \fIrefname\fP is used, then the equationnumber is saved with
-\&\fB.SETR\fP, and can be retrieved with \fB.GETST\fP \fIrefname\fP.
-.TP
-.B "EF [arg]"
-Even-page footer, printed just above the normal page footer
-on even pages, see \fBPF\fP.
-.TP
-.B "EH [arg]"
-Even-page header, printed just below the normal page header
-on even pages, see \fBPH\fP.
-.TP
-.B EN
-Equation end, see \fBEQ\fP.
-.TP
-.B EOP
-End of page user-defined macro. This macro will be called
-instead of the normal printing of the footer. The macro
-will be executed in a separate environment, without any
-trap active. See \fBTP\fP.
-.sp
-\fBStrings available to EOP\fP
-.in +.5i
-.T2 EOPf
-Argument from \fBPF\fP.
-.T2 EOPef
-Argument from \fBEF\fP.
-.T2 EOPof
-Argument from \fBOF\fP.
-.in
-.TP
-.B "EQ [label]"
-Equation start.
-\fBEQ\fP/\fBEN\fP are the delimiters for equations written for \fBeqn\fP.
-\fBEQ\fP/\fBEN\fP must be inside a \fBDS\fP/\fBDE\fP-pair, except
-when \fBEQ\fP is only used to set options in \fBeqn\fP.
-The \fIlabel\fP will appear at the right margin of the equation, unless
-number register \fBEq\fP is 1. Then the label will appear at the
-left margin.
-.TP
-.B "EX [title [override [flag [refname]]]]"
-Exhibit title, arguments are the same as for \fBEC\fP
-\fBEX\fP uses the number register \fBEx\fP as counter.
-The string \fBLx\fP controls the title of the
-List of Exhibits, default is \fILIST OF EXHIBITS\fP.
-The string \fBLiex\fP contains the word \fIExhibit\fP, wich
-is printed before the number.
-If \fIrefname\fP is used, then the exhibitnumber is saved with
-\&\fB.SETR\fP, and can be retrieved with \fB.GETST\fP \fIrefname\fP.
-.TP
-.B "FC [closing]"
-Prints \fIYours\ very\ truly,\fP as a formal closing of a letter or
-memorandum. The argument replaces the defualt string.
-The default is stored in string variable \fBLetfc\fP.
-.TP
-.B "FD [arg [1]]"
-Footnote default format.
-Controls the hyphenation (hyphen), right margin justification (adjust),
-indentation of footnote text (indent). It can also change the label
-justification (ljust).
-.sp
-.ne 14v
-.nf
-.ta .5i +.8i +.8i +.8i +.8i
-\fBarg hyphen adjust indent ljust\fP
-0 no yes yes left
-1 yes yes yes left
-2 no no yes left
-3 yes no yes left
-4 no yes no left
-5 yes yes no left
-6 no no no left
-7 yes no no left
-8 no yes yes right
-9 yes yes yes right
-10 no no yes right
-11 yes no yes right
-.sp
-.fi
-.DT
-Argument greater than or equal to 11 is considered as arg 0.
-Default for m@TMAC_M_PREFIX@mm is 10.
-.TP
-.B FE
-Footnote end.
-.TP
-.B "FG [title [override [flag [refname]]]]"
-Figure title.
-If \fIrefname\fP is used, then the figurenumber is saved with
-\&\fB.SETR\fP, and can be retrieved with \fB.GETST\fP \fIrefname\fP.
-.TP
-.B "FS [label]"
-Footnote start.
-The footnote is ended by \fBFE\fP. Footnotes is normally automatically
-numbered, the number is available in string \fBF\fP.
-Just add \fB\e*F\fP in the text. By adding \fIlabel\fP, it is possible
-to have other number or names on the footnotes.
-Footnotes in displays is now possible.
-An empty line separates footnotes, the height of the line
-is controlled by number register \fBFs\fP, default value is 1.
-.TP
-.B "GETHN refname [varname]"
-Includes the headernumber where the corresponding \fBSETR\fP \fIrefname\fP
-was placed. Will be X.X.X. in pass 1. See \fBINITR\fP.
-If varname is used, \fBGETHN\fP sets the stringvariable \fIvarname\fP to the
-headernumber.
-.TP
-.B "GETPN refname [varname]"
-Includes the pagenumber where the corresponding \fBSETR\fP \fIrefname\fP
-was placed. Will be 9999 in pass 1. See \fBINITR\fP.
-If varname is used, \fBGETPN\fP sets the stringvariable \fIvarname\fP
-to the pagenumber.
-.TP
-.B "GETR refname"
-Combines \fBGETHN\fP and \fBGETPN\fP with the text 'chapter' and ', page'.
-The string \fIQrf\fP contains the text for reference:
-.ti +.5i
-\&.ds Qrf See chapter \e\e*[Qrfh], page \e\e*[Qrfp].
-.br
-\fIQrf\fP may be changed to support other languages.
-Strings \fIQrfh\fP and \fIQrfp\fP are set by \fBGETR\fP
-and contains the page and headernumber.
-.TP
-.B "GETST refname [varname]"
-Includes the string saved with the second argument to \fB.SETR\fP.
-Will be dummystring in pass 1.
-If varname is used, \fBGETST\fP sets the stringvariable \fIvarname\fP to the
-saved string. See \fBINITR\fP.
-.TP
-.B "H level [heading-text [heading-suffix]]"
-Numbered section heading.
-Section headers can have a level between 1 and 7, level 1 is the
-top level. The text is given in \fIheading-text\fP, and must be
-surrounded by double quotes if it contains spaces.
-\fBHeading-suffix\fP is added to the header in the text but not in
-the table of contents. This is normally used for footnote marks
-and similar things. Don't use \fB\e*F\fP in \fIheading-suffix\fP, it won't
-work. A manual label must be used, see \fBFS\fP.
-.sp
-An eventual paragraph, \fBP\fP, directly after \fBH\fP will be
-ignored, \fBH\fP is taking care of spacing and indentation.
-.sp
-\fBPage ejection before heading\fP
-.br
-Number register \fBEj\fP controls page ejection before the heading.
-Normally, a level one heading gets two blank lines before it, higher levels
-gets only one. A new page is ejected before each
-first-level heading if number register \fBEj\fP is 1.
-All levels below or equal the value of \fBEj\fP gets a new page.
-Default value for \fBEj\fP is 0.
-.sp
-\fBHeading break level\fP
-.br
-A line break occurs after the heading if the heading level is less
-or equal to number register \fBHb\fP.
-Default value 2.
-.sp
-\fBHeading space level\fP
-.br
-A blank line is inserted after the heading if the heading level is less
-or equal to number register \fBHs\fP.
-Default value 2.
-.sp
-Text will follow the heading on the same line if the level is greater
-than both \fBHb\fP and \fBHs\fP.
-.sp
-\fBPost-heading indent\fP
-.br
-Indentation of the text after the heading is controlled by number
-register \fBHi\fP, default value 0.
-\fBHi\fP
-.in +.5i
-.T2 0
-The text will be left-justified.
-.T2 1
-Indentation of the text will follow the value of number register \fBPt\fP,
-see \fBP\fP.
-.T2 2
-The text will be lined up with the first word of the heading.
-.in
-.sp
-\fBCentered section headings\fP
-.br
-All headings whose level is equal or below number register \fBHc\fP
-and also less than or equal to \fBHb\fP or \fBHs\fP
-is centerered.
-.sp
-\fBFont control of the heading\fP
-.br
-The font of each heading level is controlled by string \fBHF\fP.
-It contains a fontnumber or fontnam for each level. Default
-is \fB2\ 2\ 2\ 2\ 2\ 2\ 2\fP (all headings in italic).
-Could also be written as \fBI\ I\ I\ I\ I\ I\ I\fP.
-All omitted values are presumed to be a 1.
-.sp
-\fBPoint size control\fP.
-.br
-String \fBHP\fP controls the pointsize of each heading, in the
-same way as \fBHF\fP controls the font.
-A value of 0 selects the default point size.
-Default value is \fB0\ 0\ 0\ 0\ 0\ 0\ 0\fP. Beware that only the
-point size changes, not the vertical size.
-That can be controlled by the user specified macro \fBHX\fP and/or
-\fBHZ\fP.
-.sp
-\fBHeading counters\fP
-.br
-Seven number registers, named \fBH1\fP thru \fBH7\fP contains
-the counter for each heading level.
-The values are printed using arabic numerals, this can be changed
-with the macro \fBHM\fP (see below).
-All marks ar concatenated before printing. To avoid this, set
-number register \fBHt\fP to 1. That will only print the current
-heading counter at each heading.
-.sp
-\fBAutomatic table of contents\fP
-.br
-All headings whose level is equal or below number register \fBCl\fP
-is saved to be printed in the table of contents. Default value is 2.
-.sp
-\fBSpecial control of the heading, user-defined macros\fP.
-.br
-These macros can be defined by the user to get a finer control
-of vertical spacing, fonts or other features.
-Argument \fIlevel\fP is the level-argument to \fBH\fP, but
-0 for unnumbered headings (see \fBHU\fP).
-Argument \fIrlevel\fP is the real level, it is
-set to number register \fBHu\fP for unnumbered headings.
-Argument \fIheading-text\fP is the text argument to \fBH\fP and \fBHU\fP.
-.sp
-\fBHX\ \fP\fIlevel\ rlevel\ heading-text\fP
-.br
-\fBHX\fP is called just before the printing of the heading.
-The following register is available for \fBHX\fP.
-\fBHX\fP may alter \fB}0\fP, \fB}2\fP and \fB;3\fP.
-.in +.5i
-.T3 "string }0"
-Contains the heading mark plus two spaces if \fIrlevel\fP is non-zero,
-otherwise empty.
-.T3 "register ;0"
-Contains the position of the text after the heading.
-0 means that the text should follow the heading on the same line, 1
-means that a line break should occur before the text and
-2 means that a blank line should separate the heading and the text.
-.T3 "string }2"
-Contains two spaces if register \fB;0\fP is 0. It is used to
-separate the heading from the text. The string
-is empty if \fB;0\fP is non-zero.
-.T3 "register ;3"
-Contains the needed space in units after the heading.
-Default is 2v.
-
-Can be used to change things like numbering (\fB}0\fP),
-vertical spacing (\fB}2\fP)
-and the needed space after the heading.
-.in
-.sp
-\fBHY\ \fP\fIdlevel\ rlevel\ heading-text\fP
-.br
-\fBHY\fP is called after size and font calculations and
-might be used to change indentation.
-.sp
-\fBHZ\ \fP\fIdlevel\ rlevel\ heading-text\fP
-\fBHZ\fP is called after the printing of the heading, just before
-\fBH\fP or \fBHU\fP exits.
-Could be used to change the page header according to the section heading.
-.TP
-.B "HC [hyphenation-character]"
-Set hyphenation character.
-Default value is \e%.
-Resets to the default if called without argument.
-Hyphenation can be turned by setting number
-register \fBHy\fP to 0 in the beginning of the file.
-.TP
-.B "HM [arg1 [arg2 [... [arg7]]]]"
-Heading mark style.
-Controls the type of marking for printing of the heading counters.
-Default is 1 for all levels.
-.sp
-\fBArgument\fP
-.in +.5i
-.T2 1
-Arabic numerals.
-.T2 0001
-Arabic numerals with leading zeroes, one or more.
-.T2 A
-Upper-case alphabetic
-.T2 a
-Lower-case alphabetic
-.T2 I
-Upper-case roman numerals
-.T2 i
-lower-case roman numerals
-.T2 \fIempty\fP
-Arabic numerals.
-.in
-.TP
-.B "HU heading-text"
-Unnumbered section header.
-\fBHU\fP behavies like \fBH\fP at the level in number register \fBHu\fP.
-See \fBH\fP.
-.TP
-.B "HX dlevel rlevel heading-text"
-Userdefined heading exit.
-Called just before printing the header.
-See \fBH\fP.
-.TP
-.B "HY dlevel rlevel heading-text"
-Userdefined heading exit.
-Called just before printing the header.
-See \fBH\fP.
-.TP
-.B "HZ dlevel rlevel heading-text"
-Userdefined heading exit.
-Called just after printing the header.
-See \fBH\fP.
-.TP
-.B "I [italic-text [prev-font-text [italic-text [...]]]"
-Italic.
-Changes the font to italic if called without arguments.
-With one argument it will set the word in italic.
-With two argument it will concatenate them and set the first
-word in italic and the second in the previous font.
-There is no limit on the number of argument, all will be concatenated.
-.TP
-.B "IA [addressee-name [title]]
-Begins specification of the addressee and addressee's address in
-letter style.
-Several names can be specified with empty \fBIA\fP/\fBIE\fP-pairs, but
-only one address.
-See \fBLT\fP.
-.TP
-.B "IB [italic-text [bold-text [italic-text [...]]]"
-Italic-bold
-Even arguments is printed in italic, odd in boldface.
-See \fBI\fP.
-.TP
-.B IE
-Ends the address-specification after \fPIA\fP.
-.TP
-.B "INITR filename"
-Initialize the refencemacros. References will be written to
-\fIfilename.tmp\fP and \fIfilename.qrf\fP. Requires two passes with groff.
-The first looks for references and the second includes them.
-\fBINITR\fP can be used several times, but it is only the first
-occurrence of \fBINITR\fP that is active.
-See also \fBSETR\fP, \fBGETPN\fP and \fBGETHN\fP.
-.TP
-.B "IR [italic-text [roman-text [italic-text [...]]]"
-Italic-roman
-Even arguments is printed in italic, odd in roman.
-See \fBI\fP.
-.TP
-.B "LB text-indent mark-indent pad type [mark [LI-space [LB-space]]]"
-List begin macro.
-This is the common macro used for all lists.
-\fIText-indent\fP is the number of spaces to indent the text from the
-current indent.
-.sp
-\fIPad\fP and \fImark-indent\fP controls where to put the mark.
-The mark is placed within the mark area, and \fImark-indent\fP
-sets the number of spaces before this area. It is normally 0.
-The mark area ends where the text begins. The start of the text
-is still controlled by \fItext-indent\fP.
-.sp
-The mark is left justified whitin the mark area if \fIpad\fP is 0.
-If \fIpad\fP is greater than 0, then \fImark-indent\fP is ignored, and
-the mark is placed \fIpad\fP spaces before the text.
-This will right justify the mark.
-.sp
-If \fItype\fP is 0 the list will have either a hanging indent or, if
-argument \fImark\fP is given, the string \fImark\fP as mark.
-.sp
-If \fItype\fP is greater than 0 automatic numbering will occur, arabic
-if \fImark\fP is empty. \fIMark\fP can then be any of \fB1\fP, \fBA\fP,
-\fBa\fP, \fBI\fP or \fBi\fP.
-.sp
-\fIType\fP selects one of six possible ways to display the mark.
-.br
-\fBtype\fP
-.in +.6i
-.T2 1
-x.
-.T2 2
-x)
-.T2 3
-(x)
-.T2 4
-[x]
-.T2 5
-<x>
-.T2 6
-{x}
-.in
-.sp
-Every item in the list will get \fILI-space\fP number of blank lines
-before them. Default is 1.
-.sp
-\fBLB\fP itself will print \fILB-space\fP blank lines. Default is 0.
-.TP
-.B "LC [list-level]"
-List-status clear
-Terminates all current active lists down to \fIlist-level\fP, or 0
-if no argmuent is given. This is used by \fBH\fP to clear any
-active list.
-.TP
-.B "LE [1]"
-List end.
-Terminate the current list. \fBLE\fP outputs a blank line
-if an argument is given.
-.TP
-.B "LI [mark [1]]"
-List item precedes every item in a list. Without argument \fBLS\fP
-will print the mark determined by the current list type. By giving
-\fBLI\fP one argument, it will use that as the mark instead.
-Two arguments to \fBLI\fP will make \fImark\fP a prefix to
-the current mark. A zero length \fImark\fP will make a hanging
-indent instead.
-.sp
-A blank line is normally printed before the list item. This behaviour
-can be controlled by number register \fBLs\fP. Pre-spacing
-will occur for each list-level less than or equal to \fBLs\fP.
-Default value is 99. (Nesting of lists is unlimited. :-)
-.sp
-The indentation can be changed thru number register \fBLi\fP.
-Default is 6.
-.sp
-All lists begins with a list initialization macro, \fBLB\fP.
-There are, however, seven predefined listtypes to
-make lists easier to use. They all call \fBLB\fP with different
-default values.
-.in +.5i
-.T2 \fBAL\fP
-Automatically Incremented List
-.T2 \fBML\fP
-Marked List
-.T2 \fBVL\fP
-Variable-Item List
-.T2 \fBBL\fP
-Bullet List
-.T2 \fBDL\fP
-Dash List
-.T2 \fBRL\fP
-Reference List
-.T2 \fBBVL\fP
-Broken Varable List.
-.in
-These lists are described at other places in this manual. See also \fBLB\fP.
-.TP
-.B "LT [arg]"
-Formats a letter in one of four different styles depending
-on the argument.
-See also \fBINTERNALS\fP.
-.in +.5i
-.T2 \fBArg
-Style\fP
-.T2 BL
-Blocked. Date line, return address, writer's address and closing
-begins at the center of the line. All other lines begins at the left margin.
-.T2 SB
-Semi-blocked. Same as blocked, except that the first line in every
-paragraph is indented five spaces.
-.T2 FB
-Full-blocked. All lines begin at the left margin.
-.T2 SP
-Simplified. Almost the same as the full-blocked style. Subject and
-the writer'sidentification is printed in all-capital.
-.in
-.TP
-.B "LO type [arg]"
-Specify options in letter (see \fB.LT\fP).
-This is a list of the standard options:
-.in +.5i
-.T2 CN
-Confidential notation. Prints \fBRESTRICTED\fP on the second line
-below the date line. Any argument replaces \fBRESTRICTED\fP.
-See also string variable \fBLetCN\fP.
-.T2 RN
-Reference notation. Prints \fBIn reference to:\fP and the argument
-two lines below the date line.
-See also string variable \fBLetRN\fP.
-.T2 AT
-Attention. Prints \fBATTENTION:\fP and the argument below the inside address.
-See also string variable \fBLetAT\fP.
-.T2 SA
-Salutation. Prints \fBTo Whom It May Concern:\fP or the argument if
-it was present. The salutation is printed two lines below the inside address.
-See also string variable \fBLetSA\fP.
-.T2 SJ
-Subject line. Prints the argument as subject prefixed with \fBSUBJECT:\fP
-two lines below the inside address, except in letter type \fBSP\fP.
-Then the subject is printed in all-captial without any prefix.
-See also string variable \fBLetSJ\fP.
-.in
-.TP
-.B "MC column-size [column-separation] "
-Begin multiple columns. Return to normal with \fB1C\fP.
-\fBMC\fP will create as many columns as the current line length permits.
-\fIColumn-size\fP is the width of each column, and \fIcolumn-separation\fP
-is the space between two columns. Default separation is the
-column-size/15.
-See also \fB1C\fP.
-.TP
-.B "ML mark [text-indent [1]]"
-Marked list start. The \fImark\fP argument will be printed before
-each list item.
-\fIText-indent\fP sets the indent and overrides \fBLi\fP.
-A third argument will prohibit printing of a blank line before each
-item.
-.TP
-.B "MT [arg [addressee]]"
-Memorandum type.
-The \fIarg\fP is part of a filename in \fI@TMAC_MDIR@/*.MT\fP.
-Memorandum type 0 thru 5 are supported, including \fI"string"\fP.
-\fIAddresse\fP just sets a variable, used in the AT&T macros.
-.br
-\fBarg\fP
-.in +.5i
-.T2 0
-Normal memorandum, no type printed
-.T2 1
-Memorandum with \fIMEMORANDUM FOR FILE\fP printed
-.T2 2
-Memorandum with \fIPROGRAMMER'S NOTES\fP printed
-.T2 3
-Memorandum with \fIENGINEER'S NOTES\fP printed
-.T2 4
-Released paper style
-.T2 5
-External letter style
-.in
-See also \fBCOVER\fP/\fBCOVEND\fP, a more flexible type of front page.
-.TP
-.B "MOVE y-pos [x-pos [line-length]]"
-Move to a position, pageoffset set to \fIx-pos\fP.
-If \fIline-length\fP is not given, the difference between
-current and new pageoffset is used.
-Use \fBPGFORM\fP without arguments to return to normal.
-.TP
-.B "MULB cw1 space1 [cw2 space2 [cw3 ...]]"
-Begin a special multi-column mode. Every columns width must be specified.
-Also the space between the columns must be specified. The last column
-does not need any space-definition. MULB starts a diversion and MULE
-ends the diversion and prints the columns.
-The unit for width and space is 'n', but MULB accepts all
-normal unitspecifications like 'c' and 'i'.
-MULB operates in a separate environment.
-.TP
-.B "MULN"
-Begin the next column. This is the only way to switch column.
-.TP
-.B "MULE"
-End the multi-column mode and print the columns.
-.TP
-.B "nP [type]"
-Print numbered paragraph with header level two. Se \fB.P\fP.
-.TP
-.B "NS [arg [1]]"
-Prints different types of notations. The argument selects between
-the predefined type of notations. If the second argument is available,
-then the argument becomes the entire notation.
-If the argument doesn't exist in the predefined, it will be
-printed as \fBCopy (\fP\fIarg\fP\fB) to\fP.
-It is possible to add more standard notations, see the string variable
-\fBLetns\fP and \fBLetnsdef\fP.
-.nf
-.in +.5i
-.T2 \fBArg
-Notation\fP
-.T2 \fInone\fP
-Copy To
-.T2 """""
-Copy To
-.T2 1
-Copy To (with att.) to
-.T2 2
-Copy To (without att.) to
-.T2 3
-Att.
-.T2 4
-Atts.
-.T2 5
-Enc.
-.T2 6
-Encs.
-.T2 7
-Under separate cover
-.T2 8
-Letter to
-.T2 9
-Memorandum to
-.T2 10
-Copy (with atts.) to
-.T2 11
-Copy (without atts.) to
-.T2 12
-Abstract Only to
-.T2 13
-Complete Memorandum to
-.T2 14
-CC
-.in
-.fi
-.TP
-.B "ND new-date"
-New date. Override the current date. Date is not
-printed if \fInew-date\fP is an empty string.
-.TP
-.B "OF [arg]"
-Odd-page footer, a line printed just above the normal footer.
-See \fBEF\fP and \fBPF\fP.
-.TP
-.B "OH [arg]"
-Odd-page header, a line printed just below the normal header.
-See \fBEH\fP and \fBPH\fP.
-.TP
-.B OP
-Make sure that the following text is printed at the top
-of an odd-numbered page. Will not output an empty page
-if currently at the top of an odd page.
-.TP
-.B "P [type]"
-Begin new paragraph.
-\fBP\fP without argument will produce left justified text, even
-the first line of the paragraph. This is the same as setting
-\fItype\fP to 0. If the argument is 1, then the first line
-of text following \fBP\fP will be indented by the number of
-spaces in number register \fBPi\fP, normally 5.
-.sp
-Instead of giving 1 as argument to \fBP\fP it is possible to set the
-paragraph type in number register \fBPt\fP. Using 0 and 1
-will be the same as adding that value to \fBP\fP.
-A value of 2 will indent all paragraphs, except after
-headings, lists and displays.
-.sp
-The space between two paragraphs is controlled by number register \fBPs\fP,
-and is 1 by default (one blank line).
-.TP
-.B "PGFORM [linelength [pagelength [pageoffset [1]]]]"
-Sets linelength, pagelength and/or pageoffset.
-This macro can be used for special formatting, like letterheads
-and other.
-It is normally the first command in a file, though it's not necessary.
-\fBPGFORM\fP can be used without arguments
-to reset everything after a \fBMOVE\fP.
-A line-break is done unless the fourth argument is given.
-This can be used to avoid the pagenumber on the first page while setting
-new width and length.
-.TP
-.B PGNH
-No header is printed on the next page. Used to get rid off
-the header in letters or other special texts
-This macro must be used before any text to inhibit the pageheader
-on the first page.
-.TP
-.B PE
-Picture end.
-Ends a picture for \fB@g@pic\fP, see the manual for \fB@g@pic\fP.
-.TP
-.B "PF [arg]"
-Page footer.
-\fBPF\fP sets the line to be printed at the bottom of each page.
-Normally empty. See \fBPH\fP for the argument specification.
-.TP
-.B "PH [arg]"
-Page header, a line printed at the top of each page.
-The argument should be specified as "'left-part'center-part'right-part'",
-where left-, center- and right-part is printed left-justified, centered
-and right justified. The character \fB%\fP is changed to the current
-page number. The default page-header is "''- % -''", the page
-number between two dashes.
-.TP
-.B PS
-Picture start (from pic). Begins a picture for \fB@TMAC@pic\fP, see
-the manual.
-.TP
-.B PX
-Page-header user-defined exit.
-\fBPX\fP is called just after the printing of the page header
-in \fIno-space\fP mode.
-.TP
-.B R
-Roman.
-Return to roman font, see also \fBI\fP.
-.TP
-.B "RB [roman-text [bold-text [roman-text [...]]]"
-Roman-bold.
-Even arguments is printed in roman, odd in boldface.
-See \fBI\fP.
-.TP
-.B "RD [prompt [diversion [string]]]"
-Read from standard input to diversion and/or string.
-The text will be saved in a diversion named \fIdiversion\fP.
-Recall the text by writing the name of the diversion after a dot
-on an empty line. A string will also be defined if
-\fIstring\fP is given. \fIDiversion\fP and/or \fIprompt\fP can
-be empty ("").
-.TP
-.B RF
-Reference end. Ends a reference definition and returns to normal
-processing. See \fBRS\fP.
-.TP
-.B "RI [roman-text [italic-text [roman-text [...]]]"
-Even arguments is printed in roman, odd in italic.
-See \fBI\fP.
-.TP
-.B "RL [text-indent [1]]"
-Reference list start
-Begins a list where each item is preceded with a automatically
-incremented number between
-square brackets.
-\fIText-indent\fP changes the default indentation
-.TP
-.B "RP [arg1 [arg2]]"
-Produce reference page.
-\fBRP\fP can be used if a reference page is wanted somewhere in the
-document. It is not needed if \fBTC\fP is used to produce
-a table of content. The reference page will then be printed automatically.
-.sp
-The reference counter will not be resetted if \fIarg1\fP is 1.
-.sp
-\fIArg2\fP tells \fBRP\fP whether to eject a page or not.
-.br
-\fBArg2\fP
-.in +.5i
-.T2 0
-The reference page will be printed on a separate page.
-This is
-the default.
-.T2 1
-Do not eject page after the list.
-.T2 2
-Do not eject page before the list.
-.T2 3
-Do not eject page before and after the list.
-.in
-The reference items will be separated by a blank line.
-Setting number register \fBLs\fP to 0 will suppress the line.
-.sp
-The string \fBRp\fP contains the reference page title and
-is normally set to \fIREFERENCES\fP.
-.TP
-.B "RS [string-name]"
-\fBRS\fP begins an automatically numbered reference definition.
-Put the string \fB\e*(Rf\fP where the reference mark
-should be and write the reference between \fBRS\fP/\fBRF\fP
-at next new line after the reference mark. The reference number
-is stored in number register \fB:R\fP.
-If \fIstring-name\fP is given, a string with that name
-will be defined and contain the current reference mark.
-The string can be referenced as \fB\e*[\fIstring-name\fP]\fP later in
-the text.
-.TP
-.B "S [size [spacing]]"
-Set point size and vertical spacing. If any argument is equal 'P', then
-the previous value is used. A 'C' means current value, and 'D' default value.
-If '+' or '-' is used before the value, then increment or decrement of
-the current value will be done.
-.TP
-.B "SA [arg]"
-Set right-margin justification.
-Justification is normally turned on.
-No argumenent or \fB0\fP turns off justification, a \fB1\fP turns on
-justification.
-.TP
-.B "SETR refname [string]"
-Remember the current header and page-number as refname.
-Saves \fIstring\fP if \fIstring\fP is defined. \fIstring\fP is retrieved
-with \fB.GETST\fP.
-See \fBINITR\fP.
-.TP
-.B "SG [arg [1]]"
-Signature line. Prints the authors name(s) after the formal closing.
-The argument will be appended to the reference data, printed
-at either the first or last author. The reference data is the location,
-department and initials specified with \fB.AU\fP.
-It will be printed at the first author, otherwise at the last.
-No reference data will be printed if the author(s) is specifed
-thru \fB.WA\fP/\fB.WE\fP.
-See \fBLetter internals\fP.
-.TP
-.B "SK [pages]"
-Skip pages.
-If \fIpages\fP is \fB0\fP or omitted, a skip to the next page
-will occur unless it is already at the top of a page.
-Otherwise it will skip \fIpages\fP pages.
-.TP
-.B "SM string1 [string2 [string3]]"
-Make a string smaller.
-If \fIstring2\fP is given, \fIstring1\fP will be smaller and \fIstring2\fP
-normal, concatenated with \fIstring1\fP. With three argument, all is
-concatenated, but only \fIstring2\fP is made smaller.
-.TP
-.B "SP [lines]"
-Space vertically. \fIlines\fP can have any scalingfactor, like \fI3i\fP or
-\fI8v\fP. Several \fBSP\fP in a line will only produce the
-maximum number of lines, not the sum. \fBSP\fP will also be ignored
-until the first textline in a page. Add a \fB\e&\fP before \fBSP\fP
-to avoid this.
-.TP
-.B TAB
-reset tabs to every 5n. Normally used to reset any previous tabpositions.
-.TP
-.B "TB [title [override [flag [refname]]]]"
-Table title.
-If \fIrefname\fP is used, then the tablenumber is saved with
-\&\fB.SETR\fP, and can be retrieved with \fB.GETST\fP \fIrefname\fP.
-.TP
-.B "TC [slevel [spacing [tlevel [tab [h1 [h2 [h3 [h4 [h5]]]]]]]]]"
-Table of contents.
-This macro is normally used at the last line of the document.
-It generates a table of contents with headings up to the level
-controlled by number register \fBCl\fP. Note that \fBCl\fP controls
-the saving of headings, it has nothing to do with \fBTC\fP.
-Headings with level less than or equal to \fIslevel\fP will get
-\fIspacing\fP number of lines before them.
-Headings with level less than or equal to \fItlevel\fP will have
-their page numbers right justified with dots or spaces separating
-the text and the page number. Spaces is used if \fItab\fP
-is greater than zero, otherwise dots.
-Other headings will have the
-page number directly at the end of the heading text (\fIragged right\fP).
-.sp
-The rest of the arguments will be printed, centered, before the
-table of contents.
-.sp
-The user-defined macros \fBTX\fP and \fBTY\fP are used if \fBTC\fP is called
-with at most four arguments. \fBRX\fP is called before the printing
-of \fICONTENTS\fP, and \fBTY\fP is called instead of printing \fICONTENTS\fP.
-.sp
-String \fBCi\fP can be set to control the indentations for each heading-level.
-It must be scaled, like \fB.ds\ Ci\ .25i\ .5i\ .75i\ 1i\ 1i\fP.
-The indentation is normally controlled by the maxlength of headings
-in each level.
-.sp
-All texts can be redefined, new stringvariables
-\fILifg\fP, \fILitb\fP, \fILiex\fP, \fILiec\fP and \fILicon\fP contains
-"Figure", "TABLE", "Exhibit", "Equation" and "CONTENTS".
-These can be redefined to other languages.
-.TP
-.B TE
-Table end. See \fBTS\fP.
-.TP
-.B "TH [N]"
-Table header. See \fBTS\fP.
-\fBTH\fP ends the header of the table. This header will
-be printed again if a page-break occurs.
-Argument \fIN\fP isn't implemented yet.
-.TP
-.B TL [charging-case number(s) [filing-case number(s)]
-Begin title of memorandum.
-All text up to the next \fBAU\fP is included in the title.
-\fICharging-case number\fP and \fIfiling-case\fP is saved
-for use in the front page processing.
-.TP
-.B TM [num1 [num2 [...]]]
-Technical memorandumnumbers used in \fB.MT\fP. Unlimited number
-of arguments may be given.
-.TP
-.B TP
-Top of page user-defined macro.
-This macro is called instead of the normal page header. It is
-possible to get complete control over the header.
-Note that header and footer is printed in a separate environment.
-Linelength is preserved though.
-.TP
-.B "TS [H]"
-Table start. This is the start of a table specification
-to \fB@TMAC@tbl\fP. See separate manual for \fB@TMAC@tbl\fP.
-\fBTS\fP ends with \fBTE\fP.
-Argument \fIH\fP tells \fBm@TMAC@m\fP that the table
-has a header. See \fBTH\fP.
-.TP
-.B TX
-Userdefined table of contents exit.
-This macro is called just before \fBTC\fP prints the word \fICONTENTS\fP.
-See \fBTC\fP.
-.TP
-.B TY
-Userdefined table of contents exit (no "CONTENTS").
-This macro is called instead of printing \fICONTENTS\fP.
-See \fBTC\fP.
-.TP
-.B VERBON [flag [pointsize [font]]]
-Begin verbatim output using courier font.
-Usually for printing programs.
-All character has equal width.
-The pointsize can be changed with
-the second argument. By specifying the font-argument
-it is possible to use another font instead of courier.
-\fIflag\fP control several special features.
-It contains the sum of all wanted features.
-.in +.5i
-.T2 Value
-Description
-.T2 1
-Disable the escape-character (\e). This is normally turned on during
-verbose output.
-.T2 2
-Add en empty line before the verbose text.
-.T2 4
-Add en empty line after the verbose text.
-.T2 8
-Print the verbose text with numbered lines. This adds four digitsized
-spaces in the beginning of each line. Finer control is available with
-the string-variable \fBVerbnm\fP. It contains all arguments to the
-\fBtroff\fP-command \fB.nm\fP, normally '1'.
-.T2 16
-Indent the verbose text with five 'n':s. This is controlled by the
-number-variable \fBVerbin\fP (in units).
-.in
-.TP
-.B VERBOFF
-End verbatim output.
-.TP
-.B "VL text-indent [mark-indent [1]]"
-Variable-item list has no fixed mark, it assumes that
-every \fBLI\fP have a mark instead.
-\fIText-indent\fP sets the indent to the text, and \fImark-indent\fP
-the distance from the current indent to the mark.
-A third argument will prohibit printing of a blank line before each
-item.
-.TP
-.B "VM [top [bottom]]"
-Vertical margin.
-.TP
-.B "WA [writer-name [title]]
-Begins specification of the writer and writer's address.
-Several names can be specified with empty \fBWA\fP/\fBWE\fP-pairs, but
-only one address.
-.TP
-.B WE
-Ends the address-specification after \fP.WA\fP.
-.TP
-.B "WC [format]"
-Footnote and display width control.
-.in +.5i
-.T2 N
-Set default mode, \fB-WF\fP, \fB-FF\fP, \fB-WD\fP and \fBFB\fP.
-.T2 WF
-Wide footnotes, wide also in two-column mode.
-.T2 -WF
-Normal footnote width, follow column mode.
-.T2 FF
-All footnotes gets the same width as the first footnote encountered.
-.T2 -FF
-Normal footnotes, width follows \fBWF\fP and \fB-WF\fP.
-.T2 WD
-Wide displays, wide also in two-column mode.
-.T2 -WD
-Normal display width, follow column mode.
-.T2 FB
-Floating displays generates a line break when printed on the current page.
-.T2 -FB
-Floating displays does not generate line break.
-.in
-.sp 3
-.LP
-.\"########################################################################
-.LP
-.B "Strings used in m@TMAC_M_PREFIX@m:"
-.TP
-.B App
-A string containing the word "APPENDIX".
-.TP
-.B "EM"
-Em dash string
-.TP
-.B HF
-Fontlist for headings, normally "2 2 2 2 2 2 2".
-Nonnumeric fontnames may also be used.
-.TP
-.B HP
-Pointsize list for headings. Normally "0 0 0 0 0 0 0" which is the same as
-"10 10 10 10 10 10 10".
-.TP
-.B Lifg
-String containing \fIFigure\fP.
-.TP
-.B Litb
-String containing \fITABLE\fP.
-.TP
-.B Liex
-String containing \fIExhibit\fP.
-.TP
-.B Liec
-String containing \fIEquation\fP.
-.TP
-.B Licon
-String containing \fICONTENTS\fP.
-.TP
-.B Lf
-Contains "LIST OF FIGURES".
-.TP
-.B Lt
-Contains "LIST OF TABLES".
-.TP
-.B Lx
-Contains "LIST OF EXHIBITS".
-.TP
-.B Le
-Contains "LIST OF EQUATIONS".
-.TP
-.B Letfc
-Contains "Yours very truly,", used in \fB.FC\fP.
-.TP
-.B Letapp
-Contains "APPROVED:", used in \fB.AV.\fP.
-.TP
-.B Letdate
-Contains "Date", used in \fB.AV.\fP.
-.TP
-.B LetCN
-Contains "CONFIDENTIAL", used in \fB.LO CN\fP.
-.TP
-.B LetSA
-Contains "To Whom It May Concern:", used in \fB.LO SA\fP.
-.TP
-.B LetAT
-Contains "ATTENTION:", used in \fB.LO AT\fP.
-.TP
-.B LetSJ
-Contains "SUBJECT:", used in \fB.LO SJ\fP.
-.TP
-.B LetRN
-Contains "In reference to:", used in \fB.LO RN\fP.
-.TP
-.B Letns
-is an array containing the different strings used in \fB.NS\fP.
-It is really a number of stringvariables prefixed with \fBLetns!\fP.
-If the argument doesn't exist, it will be included
-between \fB()\fP with \fBLetns!copy\fP as prefix and \fBLetns!to\fP as suffix.
-Observe the space after \fBcopy\fP and before \fBto\fP.
-.nf
-.ta 1.5i
-\fBName Value\fP
-Letns!0 Copy to
-Letns!1 Copy (with att.) to
-Letns!2 Copy (without att.) to
-Letns!3 Att.
-Letns!4 Atts.
-Letns!5 Enc.
-Letns!6 Encs.
-Letns!7 Under separate cover
-Letns!8 Letter to
-Letns!9 Memorandum to
-Letns!10 Copy (with atts.) to
-Letns!11 Copy (without atts.) to
-Letns!12 Abstract Only to
-Letns!13 Complete Memorandum to
-Letns!14 CC
-Letns!copy Copy "
-Letns!to " to
-.fi
-.TP
-.B Letnsdef
-Defines the standard-notation used when no argument is given
-to \fB.NS\fP. Default is \fB0\fP.
-.TP
-.B "MO1 - MO12"
-Strings containing \fIJanuary\fP thru \fIDecember\fP.
-.TP
-.B Qrf
-String containing "See chapter \e\e*[Qrfh], page \e\en[Qrfp].".
-.TP
-.B Rp
-Contains "REFERENCES".
-.TP
-.B Tm
-Contains \e(tm, trade mark.
-.TP
-.B Verbnm
-Argument to \fB.nm\fP in \fB.VERBON\fP, default: \fB1\fP.
-.\"-----------------------------------
-.LP
-.B "Number variables used in m@TMAC_M_PREFIX@m:"
-.TP
-.B Aph
-Print an appendix-page for every new appendix
-if this numbervariable is non-zero.
-No output will occur if \fBAph\fP is zero, but there will always
-be an appendix-entry in the 'List of contents'.
-.TP
-.B Cl
-Contents level [0:7], contents saved if heading level <= Cl, default 2.
-.TP
-.B Cp
-Eject page between LIST OF XXXX if Cp == 0, default 0.
-.TP
-.B D
-Debugflag, values >0 produces varying degree of debug. A value of 1
-gives information about the progress of formatting, default 0.
-.TP
-.B De
-Eject after floating display is output [0:1], default 0.
-.TP
-.B Df
-Floating keep output [0:5], default 5.
-.TP
-.B Ds
-space before and after display if == 1 [0:1], default 1.
-.TP
-.B Ej
-Eject page, default 0.
-.TP
-.B Eq
-Equation lable adjust 0=left, 1=right. Default 0.
-.TP
-.B Fs
-Footnote spacing, default 1.
-.TP
-.B "H1-H7"
-Heading counters
-.TP
-.B Hb
-Heading break level [0:7], default 2.
-.TP
-.B Hc
-Heading centering level, [0:7]. Default 0.
-.TP
-.B Hi
-Heading temporary indent [0:2], default 1.
-.br
-0\ ->\ 0 indent, left margin
-.br
-1\ ->\ indent to right , like .P 1
-.br
-2\ ->\ indent to line up with text part of preceding heading
-.TP
-.B Hps
-Numbervariable with the heading pre-space level. If the heading-level
-is less than or equal to \fBHps\fP, then two lines will precede the
-section heading instead of one. Default is first level only.
-The real amount of lines is controlled by the variables \fBHps1\fP and
-\fBHps2\fP.
-.TP
-.B Hps1
-This is the number of lines preceding \fB.H\fP when the heading-level
-is greater than \fBHps\fP. Value is in units, normally 0.5v.
-.TP
-.B Hps2
-This is the number of lines preceding \fB.H\fP when the heading-level
-is less than or equal to \fBHps\fP. Value is in units, normally 1v.
-.TP
-.B Hs
-Heading space level [0:7], default 2.
-.TP
-.B Ht
-Heading numbering type, default 0.
-0 -> multiple (1.1.1 ...)
-.br
-1 -> single
-.TP
-.B Hu
-Unnumbered heading level, default 2.
-.TP
-.B Hy
-Hyphenation in body, default 1.
-.br
-0\ ->\ no hyphenation
-.br
-1\ ->\ hyphenation 14 on
-.TP
-.B Letwam
-Max lines in return-address, used in \fB.WA\fP/\fB.WE\fP. Default 14.
-.TP
-.B "Lf, Lt, Lx, Le"
-Enables (1) or disables (0) the printing of List of figures,
-List of tables, List of exhibits and List of equations.
-Default: Lf=1, Lt=1, Lx=1, Le=0.
-.TP
-.B Li
-List indent, used by .AL, default 6.
-.TP
-.B Ls
-List space, if current listlevel > Ls then no spacing will occur around lists.
-Default 99.
-.TP
-.B Lsp
-.TP
-The size of an empty line. Normally 0.5v, but it is 1v
-if \fBn\fP is set (\fB.nroff\fP).
-.TP
-.B N
-Numbering style [0:5], default 0.
-.br
-0\ ==\ (default) normal header for all pages.
-.br
-1\ ==\ header replaces footer on first page, header is empty.
-.br
-2\ ==\ page header is removed on the first page.
-.br
-3\ ==\ "section-page" numbering enabled.
-.br
-4\ ==\ page header is removed on the first page.
-.br
-5\ ==\ "section-page" and "section-figure" numbering enabled.
-Se also the number-register Sectf and Sectp.
-.TP
-.B Np
-Numbered paragraphs, default 0.
-.br
-0\ ==\ not numbered
-.br
-1\ ==\ numbered in first level headings.
-.TP
-.B Of
-Format of figure,table,exhibit,equation titles, default 0.
-.br
-0\ =\ ". "
-.br
-1\ =\ " - "
-.TP
-.B P
-Current page-number, normally the same as % unless "section-page" numbering
-is enabled.
-.TP
-.B Pi
-paragraph indent, default 5.
-.TP
-.B Pgps
-Controls whether header and footer pointsize should follow the current
-setting or just change when the header and footer is defined.
-.in +.5i
-.ti -.5i
-.T2 Value
-Description
-.T2 0
-Pointsize will only change to the current setting when \fB.PH\fP, \fB.PF\fP,
-\&\fB.OH\fP, \fP.EH\fP, \fB.OF\fP or \fB.OE\fP is executed.
-.T2 1
-Pointsize will change after every \fB.S\fP. This is the default.
-.in
-.TP
-.B Ps
-paragraph spacing, default 1.
-.TP
-.B Pt
-Paragraph type, default 0.
-.br
-0\ ==\ left-justified
-.br
-1\ ==\ indented .P
-.br
-2\ ==\ indented .P except after .H, .DE or .LE.
-.TP
-.B Sectf
-Flag controlling "section-figures". A non-zero value enables this.
-Se also register N.
-.TP
-.B Sectp
-Flag controlling "section-page-numbers". A non-zero value enables this.
-Se also register N.
-.TP
-.B Si
-Display indent, default 5.
-.TP
-.B Verbin
-Indent for \fB.VERBON\fP, default 5n.
-.TP
-.B .mgm
-Always 1.
-.LP
-.SH INTERNALS
-The letter macros is using different submacros depending on
-the letter type. The name of the submacro has the letter type
-as suffix. It is therefore possible to define other letter types, either
-in the national macro-file, or as local additions.
-\&\fB.LT\fP will set the number variables \fBPt\fP and \fBPi\fP to 5 and 0.
-The following strings and macros must be defined for a new letter type:
-.TP
-\fBlet@init_\fP\fItype\fP
-This macro is called directly by \fB.LT\fP. It is supposed to initialize
-variables and other stuff.
-.TP
-\fBlet@head_\fP\fItype\fP
-This macro prints the letter head, and is called instead of the
-normal page header. It is supposed to remove the alias \fBlet@header\fP,
-otherwise it will be called for all pages.
-.TP
-\fBlet@sg_\fP\fItype\ name\ title\ n\ flag\ [arg1\ [arg2\ [...]]]\fP
-\&\fB.SG\fP is calling this macro only for letters, memorandums has
-its own processing. \fIname\fP and \fItitle\fP is specified
-thru \fB.WA\fP/\fB.WB\fP. \fIn\fP is the counter, 1-max, and
-\fIflag\fP is true for the last name. Any other argument to \fB.SG\fP
-is appended.
-.TP
-\fBlet@fc_\fP\fItype\ closing\fP
-This macro is called by \fB.FC\fP, and has the
-formal closing as argument.
-.LP
-\&\fB.LO\fP is implemented as a general option-macro. \fB.LO\fP demands
-that a string named \fBLet\fP\fItype\fP is defined, where \fItype\fP
-is the letter type.
-\&\fB.LO\fP will then assign the argument to the string
-variable \fBlet*lo-\fP\fItype\fP.
-.LP
-.\".SH BUGS
-.SH AUTHOR
-Jörgen Hägg, Lund, Sweden <jh@axis.se>.
-.SH FILES
-.TP
-.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.@TMAC_M_PREFIX@m
-.TP
-.B @TMAC_MDIR@/*.cov
-.TP
-.B @TMAC_MDIR@/*.MT
-.TP
-.B @TMAC_MDIR@/locale
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@tbl (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@pic (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@eqn (@MAN1EXT@)
-.br
-.BR mm (@MAN7EXT@)
-.BR m@TMAC_M_PREFIX@mse (@MAN7EXT@)
--- /dev/null
+.\"
+.\" $Id: groff_mmse.7_in,v 1.1 2000/04/09 08:25:19 millert Exp $
+.\" Skrivet av Jörgen Hägg, Lund, Sverige
+.\"
+.TH GROFF_MMSE @MAN7EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAMN
+groff_mmse \- svenska mm makro för groff
+.SH SYNTAX
+.B groff
+.B \-m@TMAC_M@se
+[
+.IR flaggor .\|.\|.
+]
+[
+.IR filer .\|.\|.
+]
+.SH BESKRIVNING
+\fBm@TMAC_M@se\fP är en svensk variant av \fBm@TMAC_M@\fP. Alla texter
+är översatta. En A4 sida får text som är 13 cm bred, 3.5 cm indragning
+samt är 28.5 cm hög.
+Det finns stöd för brevuppställning enligt svensk standard
+för vänster och högerjusterad text.
+.LP
+\fBCOVER\fP kan använda \fIse_ms\fP som argument. Detta ger ett
+svenskt försättsblad.
+Se \fBgroff_mm(@MAN7EXT@)\fP för övriga detaljer.
+.SH BREV
+Tillgängliga brevtyper:
+.TP
+.B ".LT SVV"
+Vänsterställd löptext med adressat i position T0 (vänsterställt).
+.TP
+.B ".LT SVH"
+Högerställd löptext med adressat i position T4 (passar
+fönsterkuvert).
+.LP
+Följande extra LO-variabler används.
+.TP
+.B ".LO DNAMN\fI namn\fP"
+Anger dokumentets namn.
+.TP
+.br
+.B ".LO MDAT\fI datum\fP"
+Mottagarens datum, anges under \fBErt datum:\fP (\fBLetMDAT\fP).
+.TP
+.br
+.B ".LO BIL\fI sträng\fP"
+Anger bilaga, nummer eller sträng med \fBBilaga\fP (\fBLetBIL\fP)
+som prefix.
+.TP
+.br
+.B ".LO KOMP\fI text\fP"
+Anger kompletteringsuppgift.
+.TP
+.br
+.B ".LO DBET\fI beteckning\fP"
+Anger dokumentbeteckning eller dokumentnummer.
+.TP
+.br
+.B ".LO BET\fI beteckning\fP"
+Anger beteckning (ärendebeteckning i form av diarienummer eller liknande).
+.TP
+.br
+.B ".LO SIDOR\fI antal\fP"
+Anger totala antalet sidor och skrivs ut efter sidnumret inom
+parenteser.
+.LP
+Om makrot \fB.TP\fP är definierat anropas det efter utskrift av brevhuvudet.
+Där lägger man lämpligen in postadress och annat som brevfot.
+.SH "SKRIVET AV"
+Jörgen Hägg, Lund, Sweden <Jorgen.Hagg@axis.se>
+.SH FILER
+.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.@TMAC_M@se
+.B @TMAC_MDIR@/se_*.cov
+.SH "SE OCKSÅ"
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@tbl (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@pic (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@eqn (@MAN1EXT@)
+.br
+.BR m@TMAC_M@ (@MAN7EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-.\" -*- nroff -*-
-.\" $Id: groff_mmse.man,v 1.3 1998/01/19 00:40:13 etheisen Exp $
-.\" Skrivet av Jörgen Hägg, Lund, Sverige
-.\"
-.TH GROFF_MMSE @MAN7EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAMN
-groff_mmse \- svenska mm makro för groff
-.SH SYNTAX
-.B groff
-.B \-m@TMAC_M_PREFIX@mse
-[
-.IR flaggor .\|.\|.
-]
-[
-.IR filer .\|.\|.
-]
-.SH BESKRIVNING
-\fBm@TMAC_M_PREFIX@mse\fP är en svensk variant av \fBm@TMAC_M_PREFIX@m\fP. Alla texter
-är översatta. En A4 sida får text som är 13 cm bred, 3.5 cm indragning
-samt är 28.5 cm hög.
-Det finns stöd för brevuppställning enligt svensk standard
-för vänster och högerjusterad text.
-.LP
-\fBCOVER\fP kan använda \fIse_ms\fP som argument. Detta ger ett
-svenskt försättsblad.
-Se \fBgroff_mm(@MAN7EXT@)\fP för övriga detaljer.
-.SH BREV
-Tillgängliga brevtyper:
-.TP
-.B ".LT SVV"
-Vänsterställd löptext med adressat i position T0 (vänsterställt).
-.TP
-.B ".LT SVH"
-Högerställd löptext med adressat i position T4 (passar
-fönsterkuvert).
-.LP
-Följande extra LO-variabler används.
-.TP
-.B ".LO DNAMN\fI namn\fP"
-Anger dokumentets namn.
-.TP
-.br
-.B ".LO MDAT\fI datum\fP"
-Mottagarens datum, anges under \fBErt datum:\fP (\fBLetMDAT\fP).
-.TP
-.br
-.B ".LO BIL\fI sträng\fP"
-Anger bilaga, nummer eller sträng med \fBBilaga\fP (\fBLetBIL\fP)
-som prefix.
-.TP
-.br
-.B ".LO KOMP\fI text\fP"
-Anger kompletteringsuppgift.
-.TP
-.br
-.B ".LO DBET\fI beteckning\fP"
-Anger dokumentbeteckning eller dokumentnummer.
-.TP
-.br
-.B ".LO BET\fI beteckning\fP"
-Anger beteckning (ärendebeteckning i form av diarienummer eller liknande).
-.TP
-.br
-.B ".LO SIDOR\fI antal\fP"
-Anger totala antalet sidor och skrivs ut efter sidnumret inom
-parenteser.
-.LP
-Om makrot \fB.TP\fP är definierat anropas det efter utskrift av brevhuvudet.
-Där lägger man lämpligen in postadress och annat som brevfot.
-.SH "SKRIVET AV"
-Jörgen Hägg, Lund, Sweden <jh@axis.se>
-.SH FILER
-.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.@TMAC_M_PREFIX@mse
-.B @TMAC_MDIR@/se_*.cov
-.SH "SE OCKSÅ"
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@tbl (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@pic (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@eqn (@MAN1EXT@)
-.br
-.BR m@TMAC_M_PREFIX@m (@MAN7EXT@)
.\"------------
-.\" $Id: 0.MT,v 1.3 1998/01/19 00:40:18 etheisen Exp $
+.\" $Id: 0.MT,v 1.4 2000/04/09 08:25:19 millert Exp $
.\" Cover sheet. Memorandum type 0-3 and "string".
.\"------------
.if !r Au .nr Au 1
.sp -1.1
.S
.PGFORM
-.B
+.ft \\*[@sdf_font]
.ll 9c
.fi
.cov*title
-.R
+.ft
.ll
.nf
.if d cov*title-charge-case \fBCharge Case \\*[cov*title-charge-case]\fP
.S
.sp -1
.in 0.8c
-.B
+.ft \\*[@sdf_font]
.nr cov*i 0 1
.while \\n+[cov*i]<=\\n[cov*au] \{\
. cov@print-au1 \\n[cov*i] 1
. \}
. if \\n[cov*i]<\\n[cov*au] .SP 1
.\}
-.R
+.ft
.if r cov*mt-tm-max \{\
. SP 1
. nr cov*i 0 1
-. B
+. ft \\*[@sdf_font]
TM
. in 1.5c
. sp -1
. while \\n+[cov*i]<\\n[cov*mt-tm-max] \\*[cov*mt-tm!\\n[cov*i]]
. in
-. R
+. ft
.\}
.fi
.PGFORM
.S
.sp -1
.in 0.8c
-.B "\\*[cov*new-date]"
+\f[\\*[@sdf_font]]\\*[cov*new-date]\fP
.br
.fi
.PGFORM
.\"------------
-.\" $Id: 4.MT,v 1.3 1998/01/19 00:40:19 etheisen Exp $
+.\" $Id: 4.MT,v 1.4 2000/04/09 08:25:19 millert Exp $
.\" Cover sheet. Memorandum type 4
.\"------------
.de cov@print-title
.if !d cov*title .@error title (.TL) not defined!
.MOVE 2.4c
-.S 12
+.S +4
.ad c
.fi
.B
.SP 2
.if d cov*abstract \{\
. misc@ev-keep cov*ev
+. init@reset
. if \\n[cov*abs-ind]>0 \{\
. in +\\n[cov*abs-ind]u
. ll -\\n[cov*abs-ind]u
. cov@print-title
. cov@print-authors
. cov@print-firm
-. cov@print-abstract
+. if !\n[cov*abs-arg] .cov@print-abstract
. SP 3
+. nr hd*cur-bline \n[nl]
. ds cov*mt-printed
. pg@enable-top-trap
. pg@enable-trap
.\}
+.de CS
+.pg@disable-top-trap
+.SK
+.cov@print-title
+.cov@print-authors
+.cov@print-firm
+.cov@print-abstract
+..
+
.\"------------
-.\" $Id: 5.MT,v 1.3 1998/01/19 00:40:20 etheisen Exp $
+.\" $Id: 5.MT,v 1.4 2000/04/09 08:25:20 millert Exp $
.\" Cover sheet. Memorandum type 5
.\"------------
.nr cov*mt0-ind 1.1c
.\"------------
.de cov@print-date
.rj 1
-.B "\\*[cov*new-date]"
+\f[\\*[@sdf_font]]\\*[cov*new-date]\fP
.br
..
.\"------------
.\"------------
-.\" $Id: ms.cov,v 1.3 1998/01/19 00:40:20 etheisen Exp $
+.\" $Id: ms.cov,v 1.4 2000/04/09 08:25:20 millert Exp $
.\" Cover sheet. Mostly like ms cover.
.\"------------
.de cov@print-title
.\"------------
.de cov@print-date
.SP 2
-\\*[cov*new-date]
+\f[\\*[@sdf_font]]\\*[cov*new-date]\fP
..
.\"-----------------
.de COVEND
-.\" $Id: se_ms.cov,v 1.3 1998/01/19 00:40:21 etheisen Exp $
+.\" $Id: se_ms.cov,v 1.4 2000/04/09 08:25:20 millert Exp $
.mso mm/ms.cov
.nr cur*abstract-ll 11c
.ds RE \\$2
..
.\"
-.\" $Id: tmac.m,v 1.4 1998/01/19 00:40:14 etheisen Exp $
-.@revision $Revision: 1.4 $
+.\" $Id: tmac.m,v 1.5 2000/04/09 08:25:19 millert Exp $
+.@revision $Revision: 1.5 $
.ig
-Copyright (C) 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright (C) 1991-1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
mgm is written by Jörgen Hägg <jh@axis.se>
mgm is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
with groff; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software
-Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
-Almost complete. The letter format is not included.
-Maybe as a separate package.
-Should be better as time goes.
-
-Please send bugreports with examples to jh@axis.se.
+Please send bugreports with examples to jh@axis.com.
Naming convention stolen from mgs.
Local names module*name
Env.var environ:name
Index array!index
..
+.if !\n(.g .ab These mm macros require groff.
+.if \n(.C .ab The groff mm macros do not work in compatibility mode.
.warn
.\" ######## init #######
.\" Contents level [0:7], contents saved if heading level <= Cl
.nr Ds 1
.\" Eject page
.nr Ej 0
-.\" Equation lable adjust 0=left, 1=right
+.\" Equation label adjust 0=left, 1=right
.nr Eq 0
.\" Em dash string
-.ds EM \-
+.ie n .ds EM " --
+.el .ds EM \(em
.\" Footnote spacing
.nr Fs 1
.\" H1-H7 heading counters
.\" Format of figure,table,exhibit,equation titles.
.\" 0= ". ", 1=" - "
.nr Of 0
+.\" Table of contents page numbering style
+.nr Oc 0
.\" Page-number, normally same as %.
.nr P 0
.\" paragraph indent
.\" Display indent
.nr Si 5
.\"
+.\" Current state of TOC, empty outside TC, inside
+.\" it will be set to co,fg,tb,ec,ex or ap.
+.ds Tcst
+.\"
.ds Tm \(tm
.\"
.\"---------------------------------------------
.\" This is for cover macro .MT
.\" .ds @language
.\"
-.\" Current pointsize and vertical space, always in points.
-.ie r S \{\
-. nr @ps \n[S]
-. nr @vs \n[S]+2
+.nr @copy_type 0
+.if r C .nr @copy_type \n[C]
+.\" >0 if Subject/Date/From should be bold, roman otherwise
+.ie n .ds @sdf_font R
+.el .ds @sdf_font B
+.if \n[@copy_type]=4 \{\
+. ls 2
+. nr Pi 10
+. nr Pt 1
.\}
-.el \{\
-. nr @ps 10
-. nr @vs 12
+.\"
+.\"
+.if r E \{\
+. ie \n[E] .ds @sdf_font B
+. el .ds @sdf_font R
.\}
.\"
+.\" Current pointsize and vertical space, always in points.
+.if !r S .nr S 10
+.ps \n[S]
+.vs \n[S]+2
+.\"
+.nr @ps \n[.ps]
+.nr @vs \n[.v]
+.if \n[D]>1 .tm @ps=\n[@ps], @vs=\n[@vs]
+.\"
.\" Page length
-.ie r L .nr @pl \n[L]
-.el .nr @pl \n[.p]
+.if r L \{\
+. ie n .pl \n[L]u
+. el .pl \n[L]u
+.\}
+.nr @pl \n[.p]
+.\"
.\" page width
-.ie r W .nr @ll \n[W]
-.el .nr @ll 6i
+.ie r W \{\
+. ie n .ll \n[W]u
+. el .ll \n[W]u
+.\}
+.el .ll 6i
+.nr @ll \n[.l]
+.nr @cur-ll \n[@ll]
+.lt \n[@ll]u
+.\"
.\" page offset
-.ie r O .nr @po \n[O]
-.el .nr @po \n(.o
+.ie r O .po \n[O]
+.el \{\
+. ie n .po .75i
+. el .po .963i
+.\}
.\"
-.\" cheating...
-.pl \n[@pl]u
-.ll \n[@ll]u
-.lt \n[@ll]u
-.po \n[@po]u
-.nr @cur-ll \n[@ll]
+.nr @po \n[.o]
.\"
.\" non-zero if escape mechanism is turned off. Used by VERBON/OFF
.nr @verbose-flag 0
.\" print appendixheader, 0 == don't
.nr Aph 1
.\"
+.\" Current appendix text
+.ds Apptext
+.\" Controls the space before and after static displays if defined.
+.\" Lsp is used otherwise
+.\" .nr Dsp 1v
+.\"
+.\" Add a dot after level one heading number if >0
+.nr H1dot 1
+.\"
.\" header prespace level. If level <= Hps, then two lines will be printed
.\" before the header instead of one.
.nr Hps 1
.\"
.\" These variables controls the number of lines preceding .H.
.\" Hps1 is the number of lines when level > Hps
-.nr Hps1 0.5v
-.if n .nr Hps1 1v
+.nr Hps1 0.5
+.if n .nr Hps1 1
+.\"
+.\" Hps2 is the number of lines when level <= Hps
+.nr Hps2 1
+.if n .nr Hps2 2
+.\"
+.\" Hss is the number of lines (Lsp) after the header.
+.nr Hss 1
+.\"
+.\" H1txt will be updated by .H and .HU, containing the heading text.
+.\" Will also be updated in table of contents & friends
.\"
-.\" Hps2 is the number of lines when level >= Hps
-.nr Hps2 1v
-.if n .nr Hps2 2v
+.ds H1txt
+.\"
+.\" header text for the index
+.ds Index INDEX
+.\" command to sort the index
+.ds Indcmd sort
.\"
.\" flag for mkindex
.if !r Idxf .nr Idxf 0
.ds Liex Exhibit
.ds Liec Equation
.ds Licon CONTENTS
+.\" Flag for space between mark and prefix 1==space, 0==no space
+.\" Can also be controlled by using '.LI mark 2'
+.nr Limsp 1
.\"
.\" Lsp controls the height of an empty line. Normally 0.5v
.\" Normally used for nroff compatibility.
.ds Letns!13 Complete Memorandum to
.ds Letns!14 CC:
.\"
+.\" Text printed below the footer. Controlled by @copy_type (C).
+.ds Pg_type!0
+.ds Pg_type!1 OFFICIAL FILE COPY
+.ds Pg_type!2 DATE FILE COPY
+.ds Pg_type!3 D\ R\ A\ F\ T
+.ds Pg_type!4 D\ R\ A\ F\ T
.\" Max lines in return address
.nr Letwam 14
.\"--------------------------
.\" what macros is used.
.nr .mgm 1
.\"
+.\" Due to security problems with groff I had to rewrite
+.\" the reference system. It's not as elegant as before, you
+.\" have to run groff with '-z -rRef=1' and put stderr into the filename
+.\" for .INITR
+.\"
+.\" Output references to stderr if non-zero
+.ie !r Ref \{\
+. nr Ref 0
+.\}
+.el .warn 0
+.\"
.\"---------------------------------------------
.\" set local variables.
-.ie d @language .mso mm/\\*[@language]_locale
+.ie d @language .mso mm/\*[@language]_locale
.el .mso mm/locale
.\"---------------------------------------------
.if \n[D] .tm Groff mm, version \*[RE].
.el 'nh
'in 0
'ti 0
-'ps \\n[@ps]
-'vs \\n[@vs]
+.ps \\n[@ps]u
+.vs \\n[@vs]u
..
.de @warning
'tm WARNING:(\\n[.F]) input line \\n[.c]:\\$*
.de P
.\" skip P if previous heading
.ie !((\\n[nl]=\\n[hd*last-pos]):(\\n[nl]=(\\n[hd*last-pos]-.5v))) \{\
-. if \\n[D]>2 .tm Paragraph
+. if \\n[D]>2 .tm Paragraph nl=\\n[nl]
. par@doit \\$*
. if \\n[Np] \\n[H1].\\n+[par*number]\ \ \c
.\}
.el .if !(\\n[hd*last-hpos]=\\n[.k]) \{\
-. if \\n[D]>2 .tm Paragraph
+. if \\n[D]>2 .tm Paragraph nl=\\n[nl]
. par@doit \\$*
. if \\n[Np] \\n[H1].\\n+[par*number]\ \ \c
.\}
.de nP
.\" skip P if previous heading
.ie !((\\n[nl]=\\n[hd*last-pos]):(\\n[nl]=(\\n[hd*last-pos]-.5v))) \{\
-. if \\n[D]>2 .tm Paragraph
+. if \\n[D]>2 .tm Paragraph nl=\\n[nl]
. par@doit \\$*
\\n[H2].\\n+[par*number2]\ \ \c
.\}
.el .if !(\\n[hd*last-hpos]=\\n[.k]) \{\
-. if \\n[D]>2 .tm Paragraph
+. if \\n[D]>2 .tm Paragraph nl=\\n[nl]
. par@doit \\$*
\\n[H2].\\n+[par*number2]\ \ \c
.\}
.\" Hope this doesn't break anything else :-)
.\" Don't break if arg_4 is a '1'.
.if ''\\$4' .br
-.if !''\\$1' .nr @ll \\$1
-.if !''\\$2' .nr @pl \\$2
-.if !''\\$3' .nr @po \\$3
-.ll \\n[@ll]u
-.lt \\n[@ll]u
-.po \\n[@po]u
-.pl \\n[@pl]u
-.nr @cur-ll \\n[@ll]
+.ie !''\\$1' \{\
+. ll \\$1
+. nr @ll \n[.l]
+. nr @cur-ll \\n[@ll]
+. lt \\n[@ll]u
+.\}
+.el \{\
+. ll \\n[@ll]u
+. lt \\n[@ll]u
+.\}
+.\"
+.ie !''\\$2' \{\
+. pl \\$2
+. nr @pl \n[.p]
+.\}
+.el .pl \\n[@pl]u
+.\"
+.ie !''\\$3' \{\
+. po \\$3
+. nr @po \n[.o]
+.\}
+.el .po \\n[@po]u
'in 0
.pg@move-trap
..
.\"
.\" set point size
.if !'\\*[misc*a]'C' \{\
-. ie '\\*[misc*a]'P' .nr @ps \\n[misc*S-ps]
+. ie '\\*[misc*a]'P' .ps \\n[misc*S-ps]u
. el \{\
-. ie '\\*[misc*a]'D' .nr @ps 10
-. el .nr @ps \\*[misc*a]
+. ie '\\*[misc*a]'D' .ps \\n[@ps]u
+. el .ps \\*[misc*a]
+. if \\n[D]>2 .tm S: .ps \\*[misc*a]
. \}
.\}
.\"
.\" set vertical spacing
.if !'\\*[misc*b]'C' \{\
-. ie '\\*[misc*b]'P' .nr @vs \\n[misc*S-vs]
+. ie '\\*[misc*b]'P' .vs \\n[misc*S-vs]u
. el \{\
-. ie '\\*[misc*b]'D' .nr @vs \\n[@ps]+2
-. el .nr @vs \\*[misc*b]
+. ie '\\*[misc*b]'D' .vs \\n[.ps]u+2p
+. el .vs \\*[misc*b]
+. if \\n[D]>2 .tm S: .vs \\*[misc*b]
. \}
.\}
-'ps \\n[@ps]
-'vs \\n[@vs]
-.if \\n[D]>1 .tm point-size \\n[@ps] (\\n[.s]), vertical spacing \\n[@vs] (\\n[.v])
+.nr @ps \\n[.ps]
+.nr @vs \\n[.v]
+.\"
+.if \\n[D]>1 .tm S(\\$*): ma:\\*[misc*a], mb:\\*[misc*b] => ps:\\n[@ps]u, vs:\\n[@vs]u
.nr misc*S-ps \\n[misc*S-ps1]
.nr misc*S-vs \\n[misc*S-vs1]
.nr misc*S-ps1 \\n[@ps]
.nr misc*S-vs1 \\n[@vs]
+.pg@move-trap
..
.\"------------
.de HC
.ev
.nr @verbose-flag 0
..
+.\" ######## module pict #################
+.nr pict*width 0
+.nr pict*height 0
+.nr pict*mode 0
+.nr pict*ind 0
+.nr pict*id 0 1
+.\" I assume that the number variable pict*id is the same
+.\" between two runs.
+.de PIC
+.br
+.nr pict*ind 0
+.nr pict*box 0
+.while \\n[.$]>0 \{\
+. if '-B'\\$1' \{\
+. nr pict*box 1
+. shift
+. continue
+. \}
+. if '-L'\\$1' \{\
+. nr pict*mode 0
+. shift
+. continue
+. \}
+. if '-R'\\$1' \{\
+. nr pict*mode 1
+. shift
+. continue
+. \}
+. if '-I'\\$1' \{\
+. nr pict*ind (m;\\$2)
+. nr pict*mode 2
+. shift 2
+. continue
+. \}
+. if '-C'\\$1' \{\
+. nr pict*mode 3
+. shift
+. continue
+. \}
+. ds pict*f \\$1
+. nr pict*id +1
+. shift
+. if \\n[.$]>0 \{\
+. nr pict*width (i;\\$1)
+. shift
+. \}
+. if \\n[.$]>0 \{\
+. nr pict*height (i;\\$1)
+. shift
+. \}
+.\}
+.if \\n[Ref]>0 \{\
+. tm .\\\\" PIC id \\n[pict*id]
+. tm .\\\\" PIC file \\*[pict*f]
+.\}
+.if d pict*file!\\n[pict*id] \{\
+. ds pict*f \\*[pict*file!\\n[pict*id]]
+. nr pict*llx \\n[pict*llx!\\n[pict*id]]
+. nr pict*lly \\n[pict*lly!\\n[pict*id]]
+. nr pict*urx \\n[pict*urx!\\n[pict*id]]
+. nr pict*ury \\n[pict*ury!\\n[pict*id]]
+. \"
+. nr pict*w (p;\\n[pict*urx]-\\n[pict*llx])
+. if \\n[pict*w]<0 .nr pict*w 0-\\n[pict*w]
+. nr pict*h (p;\\n[pict*ury]-\\n[pict*lly])
+. if \\n[pict*h]<0 .nr pict*h 0-\\n[pict*h]
+. if \\n[pict*width]>0 \{\
+. nr pict*rs (u;1000*\\n[pict*width]/\\n[pict*w])
+. nr pict*w (u;\\n[pict*w]*\\n[pict*rs]/1000)
+. nr pict*h (u;\\n[pict*h]*\\n[pict*rs]/1000)
+. \}
+. if \\n[pict*height]>0 \{\
+. nr pict*rs (u;1000*\\n[pict*height]/\\n[pict*h])
+. nr pict*h (u;\\n[pict*h]*\\n[pict*rs]/1000)
+. \}
+. if '0'\\n[pict*mode]' \{\
+. nr pict*in \\n[.i]u
+. \}
+. if '1'\\n[pict*mode]' \{\
+. nr pict*in (u;\\n[.l]-\\n[.i]-\\n[pict*w])
+. \}
+. if '2'\\n[pict*mode]' \{\
+. nr pict*in \\n[pict*ind]u
+. \}
+. if '3'\\n[pict*mode]' \{\
+. nr pict*in (u;(\\n[.l]-\\n[.i]-\\n[pict*w])/2)
+. \}
+. ds pict*h "
+. if \\n[pict*h]>0 .ds pict*h \\n[pict*h]
+. \"
+. ne \\n[pict*h]u
+. \"
+. \" these lines are copied and modified from tmac.pspic.
+. \" Originally written by James Clark
+. br
+. ie \\n[pict*box]>0 \{\
+\h'\\n[pict*in]u'\
+\Z'\D'p 0 \\n[pict*h]u \\n[pict*w]u 0 0 -\\n[pict*h]u''\
+\v'\\n[pict*h]u'\X'ps: import \\*[pict*f] \
+\\n[pict*llx] \\n[pict*lly] \\n[pict*urx] \\n[pict*ury] \\n[pict*w] \\n[pict*h]'
+.\}
+. el \{\
+\h'\\n[pict*in]u'\
+\X'ps: invis'\
+\Z'\D'p 0 \\n[pict*h]u \\n[pict*w]u 0 0 -\\n[pict*h]u''\
+\X'ps: endinvis'\
+\v'\\n[pict*h]u'\X'ps: import \\*[pict*f] \
+\\n[pict*llx] \\n[pict*lly] \\n[pict*urx] \\n[pict*ury] \\n[pict*w] \\n[pict*h]'
+. \}
+. br
+. sp \\n[pict*h]u
+.\}
+..
+.\" external picture
+.de EPIC
+.if \\n[.$]< 2 .@error "EPIC: Not enough arguments"
+.nr pict*w \\$1
+.nr pict*h \\$2
+.ds pict*name "External picture
+.if !''$3' .ds pict*name \\$3
+\&
+.br
+.ne \\n[pict*h]u
+.sp \\n[pict*h]u
+.nr pict*ind (u;(\\n[.l]-\\n[.i]-\\n[pict*w])/2)
+.in +\\n[pict*ind]u
+\D'l \\n[pict*w]u 0'\
+\D'l 0 -\\n[pict*h]u'\
+\D'l -\\n[pict*w]u 0'\
+\D'l 0 \\n[pict*h]u'\
+\v'-(u;\\n[pict*h]/2)'\
+\h'(u;(\\n[pict*w]-\w'\\*[pict*name]'/2))'\\*[pict*name]
+.in
+..
.\" ######## module acc #################
.\"-----------
.\" accents. These are copied from mgs, written by James Clark.
.nr hd*i 1 1
.while \\n+[hd*i]<8 .if \\n[hd*level]<\\n[hd*i] .nr H\\n[hd*i] 0 1
.\"
+.\" save last text for use in TP
+.if \\n[hd*level]=1 .ds H1txt \\$2\\$3
+.\"
+.\" This is a little fix to be able to get correct H1 heading number
+.\" in page headers.
+.nr H1h \\n[H1] 1
+.if \\n[hd*level]=1 .nr H1h +1
+.\"
.\" Check if it's time for new page. Only if text has
.\" appeared before.
.if \\n[Ej]&(\\n[Ej]>=\\n[hd*level])&(\\n[nl]>\\n[hd*cur-bline]) .pg@next-page
.nr H\\n[hd*level] +1
.\"
.\" update pagenumber if section-page is used
-.if \\n[hd*level]=1 .hd@set-page \\n[%]
-.\"
+.if (\\n[hd*level]=1)&(\\n[Sectp]>0) .hd@set-page 1
.\"
.\" hd*mark is the text written to the left of the header.
.ds hd*mark \\n[H1].
.while \\n+[hd*i]<8 .if \\n[hd*level]>(\\n[hd*i]-1) .as hd*mark .\\n[H\\n[hd*i]]
.if \\n[Ht] .ds hd*mark \\n[H\\n[hd*level]].
.\"
-.\" toc-mark is sent to the table of contents
-.ds hd*toc-mark \\*[hd*mark]
+.\" special case, no dot after level one heading if not H1dot true
+.if (\\n[hd*level]=1)&(\\n[H1dot]=0) .ds hd*mark \\n[H1]
+.\"
.as hd*mark \ \ \" add spaces between mark and heading
-.if !\\n[hd*arg1] \{\
-. ds hd*mark\" no mark for unnumbered
-. ds hd*toc-mark
-.\}
+.if !\\n[hd*arg1] .ds hd*mark\" no mark for unnumbered
.\"
-.if \\n[D]>1 .tm At header \\*[hd*toc-mark] "\\$2"
+.if \\n[D]>1 .tm At header \\*[hd*mark] "\\$2"
.nr hd*htype 0 \" hd*htype = check break and space
. \" 0 = run-in, 1 = break only, 2 = space
.if \\n[hd*level]<=\\n[Hb] .nr hd*htype 1
.ie (\\n[hd*htype]=0)&(\w@\\$2@) .ds hd*suf-space " \"
.el .ds hd*suf-space
.nr hd*need 2v \" hd*need = header need space
-.if \\n[hd*htype]<2 .nr hd*need +\\n[Lsp]u \" add some extra space
.\"---------- user macro HX ------------
.\" User exit macro to override numbering.
.\" May change hd*mark (}0), hd*suf-space (}2) and hd*need (;3)
.if d HX .HX \\n[hd*level] \\n[hd*arg1] "\\$2\\$3"
.\"--------------------------------------
.\" pre-space
-.ie \\n[hd*level]<=\\n[Hps] .SP \\n[Hps2]u
-.el .SP \\n[Hps1]u
+.ie \\n[hd*level]<=\\n[Hps] .SP (u;\\n[Hps2])
+.el .SP (u;\\n[Hps1])
.\"
.par@reset-num \\n[hd*level]\" reset numbered paragraph
.\" start diversion to measure size of header
.br
.di
.rm hd*div
-.ne \\n[hd*need]u+\\n[dn]u+.5p \" this is the needed space for a header
.if \\n[hd*htype] .na \" no adjust if run-in
+.if \\n[hd*htype]<2 .nr hd*need +\\n[Lsp]u \" add some extra space
+.ne \\n[hd*need]u+\\n[dn]u+.5p-1v \" this is the needed space for a header
.\"
.\" size and font calculations
.hd@split hd*font \\n[hd*level] HF \\*[HF]\" get font for this level
.el \\$2\\$3\\*[hd*suf-space]\&\c
.ft 1
.\" restore pointsize and vertical size.
-.ps \\n[@ps]
-.vs \\n[@vs]
+.ps \\n[@ps]u
+.vs \\n[@vs]u
.\"
.\" table of contents
-.if (\\n[hd*level]<=\\n[Cl])&\w@\\$2@ \{\
-. ie \\n[Sectp] \{\
-. toc@save \\n[hd*level] "\\*[hd*toc-mark]" "\\$2" \\*[hd*sect-pg]
-. \}
-. el .toc@save \\n[hd*level] "\\*[hd*toc-mark]" "\\$2" \\n[%]
-.\}
+.if (\\n[hd*level]<=\\n[Cl])&\w@\\$2@ .toc@entry \\n[hd*level] "\\$2"
.\" set adjust to previous value
.SA
.\" do break or space
.if \\n[hd*htype] .br
-.if \\n[hd*htype]>1 .SP \\n[Lsp]u
+.if \\n[hd*htype]>1 .SP (u;\\n[Lsp]*\\n[Hss])
.if \\n[hd*htype] \{\
. \" indent if Hi=1 and Pt=1
. if (\\n[Hi]=1)&(\\n[Pt]=1) .ti +\\n[Pi]n
.\" set page-nr, called from header
.\"
.de hd@set-page
-.if \\n[.$]>0 .nr hd*h1-page \\$1
-.\"
-.ie \\n[Sectp] .nr P \\n[%]-\\n[hd*h1-page]+1
-.el .nr P \\n[%]
.\"
+.ie \\n[.$]>0 .nr P \\$1
+.el .nr P +1
.\" Set section-page-string
.ds hd*sect-pg \\n[H1]-\\n[P]
.if \\n[Sectp]>1 .if '\\n[H1]'0' .ds hd*sect-pg "
.wh 0 pg@header
.em pg@end-of-text
.\"
-.ds pg*header ''- % -''
+.ds pg*header ''- \\nP -''
.ds pg*footer
.if \n[N]=4 .ds pg*header ''''
-.if \n[N]=5 \{\
+.if (\n[N]=3):(\n[N]=5) \{\
. ds pg*header ''''
. ds pg*footer ''\\*[hd*sect-pg]''
.\}
.nr pg*ps \n[@ps]
.nr pg*vs \n[@vs]
.\"-------------------------
-.\" footer traps: set, enable and disable
+.\" footer TRAPS: set, enable and disable
.de pg@set-new-trap
.nr pg*foot-trap \\n[@pl]u-(\\n[pg*block-size]u+\\n[ft*note-size]u+\\n[pg*foot-margin]u+\\n[pg*footer-size]v+\\n[pg*extra-footer-size]u)
.\"
-.if \\n[D]>2 .tm pg*foot-trap \\n[@pl]u-(\\n[pg*block-size]u+\\n[ft*note-size]u+\\n[pg*foot-margin]u+\\n[pg*footer-size]v) = \\n[pg*foot-trap]
+.if \\n[D]>2 .tm pg*foot-trap \\n[@pl]u-(\\n[pg*block-size]u+\\n[ft*note-size]u+\\n[pg*foot-margin]u+\\n[pg*footer-size]v+\\n[pg*extra-footer-size]u) = \\n[pg*foot-trap]
.\"
.\" last-pos points to the position of the footer and bottom
.\" block below foot-notes.
.nr pg*last-pos \\n[@pl]u-(\\n[pg*block-size]u+\\n[pg*foot-margin]u+\\n[pg*footer-size]v)
+.if \\n[D]>2 .tm pg*last-pos \\n[@pl]u-(\\n[pg*block-size]u+\\n[pg*foot-margin]u+\\n[pg*footer-size]v) = \\n[pg*last-pos]
..
.de pg@enable-trap
.wh \\n[pg*foot-trap]u pg@footer
..
.\" no header on the next page
.de PGNH
-.nr pg*top-enabled -1
+.nr pg*top-enabled (-1)
..
.\" set first trap for pagefooter
.pg@enable-top-trap
.\}
.\" assign current page-number to P
.hd@set-page
+.\" reset spacing
+.nr line*lp\\n[.z] 0
+.nr line*ac\\n[.z] 0
.\"
.\" suppress pageheader if pagenumber == 1 and N == [124]
.if \\n[pg*top-enabled] \{\
. el .tl \\*[pg*even-footer]
. ie (\\n[%]=1)&(\\n[N]=1) .tl \\*[pg*header]
. el .tl \\*[pg*footer]
+. tl ''\\*[Pg_type!\\n[@copy_type]]''
.\}
.ev
.\" be sure that floating displays and footnotes will be
'in 0
'ti 0
.ie \\n[Pgps] \{\
-. ps \\n[@ps]
-. vs \\n[@vs]
+. ps \\n[@ps]u
+. vs \\n[@vs]u
.\}
.el \{\
-. ps \\n[pg*ps]
-. vs \\n[pg*vs]
+. ps \\n[pg*ps]u
+. vs \\n[pg*vs]u
.\}
.lt \\n[@ll]u
..
.ds pg*mul-fam \\n[.fam]
.nr pg*mul-font \\n[.f]
.ev pg*mul-ev
-.ps \\n[@ps]
-.vs \\n[@vs]
+.ps \\n[@ps]u
+.vs \\n[@vs]u
.fam \\*[pg*mul-fam]
.ft \\n[pg*mul-font]
.fi
.el 'hy 0
.ll \\n[@cur-ll]u
.lt \\n[@cur-ll]u
-.ps (\\n[@ps]-2)
-.vs (\\n[@vs]-1)
+.ps (p;\\n[@ps]u-2)
+.vs (p;\\n[@vs]u-1)
..
.\"-----------------
.\" set footnote format
..
.\"-----------------
.\" begin footnote
+.\" Change environment, switch to diversion and print the foot-note mark.
.de FS
.if \\n[ft*busy] .@error "FS: missing FE"
.nr ft*busy 1
..
.\"-----------------
.\" end footnote
+.\" End the diversion, back to previous environment, and adjust
+.\" the trap to the new foot-note size.
.de FE
.nr ft*busy 0
.br
'in 0
'nf
.if \\n[@pl]u<\\n[dn]u .@error "FE: too big footnote"
+.if !d ft*div .nr dn +1v
+.if \\n[D]>3 .tm FE: foot-trap=\\n[pg*foot-trap] .d=\\n[.d] dn=\\n[dn]
.ie (\\n[pg*foot-trap]u-\\n[.d]u)<\\n[dn]u \{\
. da ft*next-div
. ft*tmp-div
.ds@set-format \\$@
.\"
.nr df*old-ll \\n[.l]
-.nr ds*i \\n[.i]
.nr ds*ftmp \\n[.f]
.misc@ev-keep df*ev
.ft \\n[ds*ftmp]
.\"
.init@reset
.di df*div
-'in \\n[ds*i]u
+'in 0
.\"
.ds@set-new-ev \\n[df*old-ll]
.SP \\n[Lsp]u
.\"-------------
.\" called by end-of-text
.de df@eot-print
+.br
.if \\n[df*o-fnr]<=\\n[df*fnr] \{\
. if \\n[D]>2 .tm Print remaining displays.
.\" still some floats left, make non-empty environment
.if !\\n[ds*float-busy] \{\
. nr ds*float-busy 1
.\" at .DE
-. if (\\$1=1)&((\\n[Df]%2)=1) \{\
+. if \\n[D]>3 .tm print-float: .t=\\n[.t], h=\\n[df*height!\\n[df*o-fnr]]
+. \" Df = 1 or 5
+. if (\\$1=1)&((\\n[Df]=1):(\\n[Df]=5)) \{\
+. if \\n[.t]>\\n[df*height!\\n[df*o-fnr]] \{\
+. \" Print only new displays.
+. if \\n[df*o-fnr]=\\n[df*fnr] \{\
+. br
+. ds@print-one-float
+. \}
+. \}
+. \}
+. \" Df = 3
+. if (\\$1=1)&(\\n[Df]=3) \{\
. if \\n[.t]>\\n[df*height!\\n[df*o-fnr]] \{\
-. \" Df = 1,3 or 5
+. br
. ds@print-one-float
. \}
. \}
.\" print all if Df<2 and end of section
-. if (\\$1=2)&(\\n[Df]<2) .ds@print-all-floats
+. if (\\$1=2)&(\\n[Sectp]>0)&(\\n[Df]<2) \{\
+. br
+. ds@print-all-floats
+. \}
.\" print all if end of document. Where should they go instead?
-. if \\$1=3 .ds@print-all-floats
+. if \\$1=3 \{\
+. br
+. ds@print-all-floats
+.\}
.\" new page
. if (\\$1=4)&(\\n[Df]>1) \{\
. if \\n[Df]=2 .ds@print-one-float
.\}
..
.\"---------------
+.\" DF out
.\" print a floating diversion
-.de ds@output-div
+.de ds@output-float
.nr df*old-ll \\n[.l]
+.nr df*old-in \\n[.i]
.ev ds*fev
-.in 0
.nf
.nr df*i \\n[df*o-fnr]
.nr df*f \\n[df*format!\\n[df*i]]
.\"
+.in \\n[df*old-in]u
+.if \\n[df*f]=1 'in +\\n[Si]n
+.if \\n[df*f]>=2 'in 0
.if \\n[df*f]=2 'ce 9999
-.if \\n[df*f]=3 'in (u;(\\n[df*old-ll]-\\n[df*width!\\n[df*i]])/2)
+.if \\n[df*f]=3 'in (u;(\\n[.l]-\\n[df*width!\\n[df*i]])/2)
.if \\n[df*f]=4 'rj 9999
-.if \\n[df*f]=5 'in (u;\\n[df*old-ll]-\\n[df*width!\\n[df*i]])
+.if \\n[df*f]=5 'in (u;\\n[.l]-\\n[df*width!\\n[df*i]])
+.\"
.\"
.df*fdiv!\\n[df*o-fnr]
.\"
.\" print one floating display if there is one.
.de ds@print-one-float
.if \\n[df*o-fnr]<=\\n[df*fnr] \{\
+. if \\n[D]>3 .tm print-one-float: .t=\\n[.t], h=\\n[df*height!\\n[df*o-fnr]]
. if \\n[.t]<\\n[df*height!\\n[df*o-fnr]] .pg@next-page
-. ds@output-div
+. ds@output-float
. if \\n[De] .pg@next-page
.\}
..
.\" if De>0 do a page eject between the floats.
.de ds@print-all-floats
.while \\n[df*o-fnr]<=\\n[df*fnr] \{\
+. if \\n[D]>3 .tm print-all-floats: .t=\\n[.t], h=\\n[df*height!\\n[df*o-fnr]]
. if \\n[.t]<\\n[df*height!\\n[df*o-fnr]] .pg@next-page
-. ds@output-div
+. br
+\c
+. ds@output-float
. if \\n[De] .pg@next-page
.\}
..
.\" print as many floats as will fit on the current page
.de ds@print-this-page
.while \\n[df*o-fnr]<=\\n[df*fnr] \{\
+. if \\n[D]>3 .tm print-this-page: .t=\\n[.t], h=\\n[df*height!\\n[df*o-fnr]]
. if \\n[.t]<\\n[df*height!\\n[df*o-fnr]] .break
-. ds@output-div
+. ds@output-float
.\}
..
.\"---------------------------------------------------
.\"
.ie \\n[ds*fill] 'fi
.el 'nf
-.\"
-.if \\n[ds*format]=1 \{\
-. ll -\\n[Si]n
-. lt -\\n[Si]n
-' in +\\n[Si]n
-.\}
-.if (\\n[ds*format]=3):(\\n[ds*format]=5) 'in 0
..
.\"--------------------------------------------------------
.nr ds*format 0\" dummy value for .En/.EQ
.ds@set-format \\$@
.\"
.nr ds*old-ll \\n[.l]
+.nr ds*old-in \\n[.i]
.misc@push ds-ll \\n[.l]
.misc@push ds-form \\n[ds*format]
.nr ds*i \\n[.i]
.ft \\n[ds*ftmp]
.\"
.init@reset
-'in \\n[ds*i]u
+.\" indent in a diversion doesn't seem like a good idea.
+'in 0
.di ds*div!\\n[ds*snr]
.\"
.ds@set-new-ev \\n[ds*old-ll]
.if \\n-[ds*lvl]<0 .@error "DE: no corresponding DS"
.br
.di
+.\" **********
.nr ds*width \\n[dl]
.nr ds*height \\n[dn]
.misc@pop-nr ds-ll ds*old-ll
.misc@pop-nr ds-form ds*format
-.if (\\n[ds*format]>=2)&(\\n[ds*width]>\\n[ds*old-ll]) \{\
-. @error "DE: display too wide for current line-length"
-.\}
.\"
-'in 0
+.\" **********
'nf
+.\" calculate needed space
+.nr ds*need \\n[ds*height]
+.nr ds*i \\n[pg*foot-trap]-\\n[pg*header-size]v-\\n[pg*extra-header-size]v
+.if (\\n[ds*height]>\\n[ds*i])&(\\n[.t]<(\\n[ds*i]/2)) .nr ds*need \\n[.t]u+1v
+.if (\\n[ds*height]<\\n[ds*i])&(\\n[.t]<(\\n[ds*height])) .nr ds*need \\n[.t]u+1v
+.\" Eject page if display will fit one page and
+.\" there are less than half of the page left.
+.if \\n[ds*need] .ne \\n[ds*need]u
+.\"
+.\" check if pending equation label
+.eq@check \\n[ds*need]
+'in \\n[ds*old-in]u
+.if \\n[ds*format]=1 'in \\n[ds*old-in]u+\\n[Si]n
+.if \\n[ds*format]>=2 'in 0
.if \\n[ds*format]=2 'ce 9999
-.if \\n[ds*format]=3 'in (u;(\\n[ds*old-ll]-\\n[ds*width])/2)
+.if \\n[ds*format]=3 'in (u;(\\n[.l]-\\n[ds*width])/2)
.if \\n[ds*format]=4 'rj 9999
-.if \\n[ds*format]=5 'in (u;\\n[ds*old-ll]-\\n[ds*width])
+.if \\n[ds*format]=5 'in (u;\\n[.l]-\\n[ds*width])
+.\" **********
.\"
.\" Print static display
-.\" Eject page if display will fit one page and
-.\" there are less than half of the page left.
-.nr ds*i \\n[pg*foot-trap]-\\n[pg*header-size]v-\\n[pg*extra-header-size]v
-.if (\\n[ds*height]>\\n[ds*i])&(\\n[.t]<(\\n[ds*i]/2)) .ne \\n[.t]u+1v
-.if (\\n[ds*height]<\\n[ds*i])&(\\n[.t]<(\\n[ds*height])) .ne \\n[.t]u+1v
-.if \\n[Ds] .SP \\n[Lsp]u
+.nr ds*i \\n[Lsp]
+.if r Dsp .nr ds*i \\n[Dsp]
+.\"
+.if \\n[Ds] .SP \\n[ds*i]u
.ds*div!\\n[ds*snr]
-.if \\n[Ds] .SP \\n[Lsp]u
+.if \\n[Ds] .SP \\n[ds*i]u
.\"
.if \\n[ds*format]=2 'ce 0
.if \\n[ds*format]=4 'rj 0
.if \\n[li*type]=5 .ds li*c-mark <\\n[li*cnt!\\n[li*lvl]]>
.if \\n[li*type]=6 .ds li*c-mark {\\n[li*cnt!\\n[li*lvl]]}
.if \\n[.$]=1 .ds li*c-mark \\$1
-.if \\n[.$]=2 .ds li*c-mark \\$1\ \\*[li*c-mark]
-.if '\\*[li*c-mark]'\ ' .ds li*c-mark
+.ie \\n[.$]=2 \{\
+. ie (\\$2=2):(\\n[Limsp]=0) .ds li*c-mark \\$1\\*[li*c-mark]
+. el .ds li*c-mark \\$1\ \\*[li*c-mark]
+.\}
.\"
.\" determine where the text begins
.nr li*text-begin \\n[li*tind]>?\w@\\*[li*c-mark]\ @
.\" ####### module eq #######################################
.\"
.nr eq*number 0 1
+.ds eq*label
.de EQ
-.ds eq*lable "\\$1
-.di eq*div
-.misc@ev-keep eq*ev
-.in 0
-.nf
+.ds eq*label "\\$1
..
-.de EN
-.br
-.di
-.ta
-.\" equation with lable.
-.if \\n[dl] \{\
-. br
-. chop eq*div
+.de eq@check
+.if !'\\*[eq*label]'' \{\
+. mk
+' sp (u;\\$1/2-.45v)
. ie (\\n[Eq]%2) \{\
-. \" lable to the left
-. if \\n[ds*format]<2 \{\
-. ta (u;(\\n[.l]/7)+\\n[.i]) \\n[.l]u\" L
-\\*[eq*lable]\t\\*[eq*div]\t\&
-. \}
-. if (\\n[ds*format]=2):(\\n[ds*format]=3) \{\
-. ta (u;(\\n[.l]-\\n[.i])/2+\\n[.i])C \\n[.l]u\" C
-\\*[eq*lable]\t\\*[eq*div]\t\&
-. \}
-. if \\n[ds*format]>3 \{\
-. ta \\n[.l]uR\" R
-\\*[eq*lable]\t\\*[eq*div]
-. \}
+. \" label to the left
+\h'|0'\\*[eq*label]\c
. \}
. el \{\
-. \" lable to the right
-. if \\n[ds*format]<2 \{\
-. ta \\n[.l]uR\" L
-\\*[eq*div]\t\\*[eq*lable]
-. \}
-. if (\\n[ds*format]=2):(\\n[ds*format]=3) \{\
-. ta (u;(\\n[.l]-\\n[.i])/2+\\n[.i])C \\n[.l]uR\" C
-\t\\*[eq*div]\t\\*[eq*lable]
-. \}
-. if \\n[ds*format]>3 \{\
-. ta (\\n[.l]u-\w@\\*[eq*lable]@u-1m)R \\n[.l]uR\" R
-\t\\*[eq*div]\t\\*[eq*lable]
-. \}
+. \" label to the right
+\h'|\\n[.l]u'\\*[eq*label]
. \}
+. rt
.\}
-.TAB
-.ev
+.ds eq*label
+..
+.de EN
..
.\"########### module toc ###################
.\" table of contents
.if \w@\\$3@>0 .nr toc*tlevel \\$3
.if \w@\\$4@>0 .nr toc*tab \\$4
.if \\n[pg*cols-per-page]>1 .1C
+.ds H1txt \\*[Licon]
+.ds Tcst co
.pg@clear-hd
+.EF ""
+.OF ""
.pg@next-page
-.pg@clear-ft
.\"-------------
.if d Ci .toc@read-Ci \\*[Ci]
.nf
.in 0
-.nr toc*pn 0 1
-.af toc*pn i
-.PF "''\\\\\\\\n+[toc*pn]''"
+.ie \\n[Oc] .hd@set-page 1
+.el \{\
+. nr toc*pn 1 1
+. af toc*pn i
+. aln ;g toc*pn
+. PF "''\\\\\\\\n[toc*pn]''"
+. am pg@header
+. nr toc*pn +1
+\\..
+.\}
.nr toc*i 4 1
.while \\n+[toc*i]<10 \{\
. if !'\\$\\n[toc*i]'' \{\
. SP 3
.\}
.if d toc*list .toc*list
+.br
.\" print LIST OF XXX
-.if d lix*dsfg .lix@print-ds fg "\\*[Lf]"
-.if d lix*dstb .lix@print-ds tb "\\*[Lt]"
-.if d lix*dsec .lix@print-ds ec "\\*[Le]"
-.if d lix*dsex .lix@print-ds ex "\\*[Lx]"
+.if d lix*dsfg .lix@print-ds fg FG "\\*[Lf]" \\n[.$]
+.if d lix*dstb .lix@print-ds tb TB "\\*[Lt]" \\n[.$]
+.if d lix*dsec .lix@print-ds ec EC "\\*[Le]" \\n[.$]
+.if d lix*dsex .lix@print-ds ex EX "\\*[Lx]" \\n[.$]
..
.\"-----------
.\" .toc@read-Ci lev1 lev2 lev3 lev4 ... lev7
.\}
..
.\"-----------
+.de toc@entry
+.ie \\n[Sectp] \{\
+. toc@save \\$1 "\\*[hd*mark]" "\\$2" \\*[hd*sect-pg]
+.\}
+.el .toc@save \\$1 "\\*[hd*mark]" "\\$2" \\n[%]
+..
+.als )E toc@entry
+.\"-----------
.de toc@save
.\" collect maxsize of mark if string Ci don't exist.
.if !d Ci \{\
. if !r toc*hl!\\$1 .nr toc*hl!\\$1 0
. if \\n[toc*hl!\\$1]<=\w@\\$2@ \{\
-. nr toc*hl!\\$1 \w@\\$2@u+1m
+. nr toc*hl!\\$1 \w@\\$2@u
. \}
.\}
.am toc*list
.\" level mark text pagenumber
.de toc@set
.if \\$1<=\\n[toc*slevel] .SP \\n[toc*spacing]u
-.ne 2v
.na
.fi
.nr toc*ind 0
.nr toc*i \\n[toc*hl!\\$1]-\w@\\$2@
.\"
.ll \\n[@ll]u-\w@\\$4@u-2m
+.ne 2v
.\" ragged right ---------------------------------
.ie \\$1>\\n[toc*tlevel] \{\
\\$2
.ie !\\n[Of] .ds lix*ds-form .\ \ \"
.el .ds lix*ds-form "\ \(em\ \"
.nr lix*in \\n[.i]
-.ds lix*lable \\*[Li\\$1]\ \\*[lix*numb]\\*[lix*ds-form]
+.ds lix*label \\*[Li\\$1]\ \\*[lix*numb]\\*[lix*ds-form]
.if !'\\$5'' \{\
-. if !0\\$6 .ds lix*lable \\*[Li\\$1]\ \\$5\\*[lix*numb]\\*[lix*ds-form]
-. if 0\\$6=1 .ds lix*lable \\*[Li\\$1]\ \\*[lix*numb]\\$5\\*[lix*ds-form]
-. if 0\\$6=2 .ds lix*lable \\*[Li\\$1]\ \\$5\\*[lix*ds-form]
+. if !0\\$6 .ds lix*label \\*[Li\\$1]\ \\$5\\*[lix*numb]\\*[lix*ds-form]
+. if 0\\$6=1 .ds lix*label \\*[Li\\$1]\ \\*[lix*numb]\\$5\\*[lix*ds-form]
+. if 0\\$6=2 .ds lix*label \\*[Li\\$1]\ \\$5\\*[lix*ds-form]
.\}
-.ie \\n[Sectp] .ds lix*pgnr \\*[hd*sect-pg]
-.el .ds lix*pgnr \\n[%]
.\" print line if not between DS/DE
-.ie \\n[ds*lvl]<1 .lix@print-text "\\*[lix*lable]" "\\*[lix*text]"
-.el .lix@embedded-text "\\*[lix*lable]" "\\*[lix*text]"
+.ie \\n[ds*lvl]<1&\\n[df*float]=0 \{\
+. lix@print-text "\\*[lix*label]" "\\*[lix*text]" \\$1 \\$2 \\$7
+.\}
+.el \{\
+. lix@embedded-text "\\*[lix*label]" "\\*[lix*text]" \\$1 \\$2 \\$7
+.\}
.\"
-.\" save line for LIST OF XXX
-.if !r lix*wth\\$1 .nr lix*wth\\$1 0
-.if \w@\\*[lix*lable]@>\\n[lix*wth\\$1] .nr lix*wth\\$1 \w@\\*[lix*lable]@
-.if \\n[\\$2] .lix@ds-save \\$1 \\*[lix*pgnr] "\\$4" "\\*[lix*lable]"
-.if !'\\$7'' .SETR \\$7 \\*[lix*numb]
..
.\"-----------
+.\" label text type stringvar refname
.de lix@print-text
+.ie \\n[Sectp] .ds lix*pgnr \\*[hd*sect-pg]
+.el .ds lix*pgnr \\n[%]
.SP \\n[Lsp]u
.misc@ev-keep lix
.init@reset
\fB\\$1\fP\\$2
.br
.ev
+.\" save line for LIST OF XXX, wth is the width of the label
+.if !r lix*wth\\$3 .nr lix*wth\\$3 0
+.\" find the maximum width
+.if \w@\\*[lix*label]@>\\n[lix*wth\\$3] .nr lix*wth\\$3 \w@\\*[lix*label]@
+.if \\n[\\$4] .lix@ds-save \\$3 \\*[lix*pgnr] "\\*[lix*text]" "\\*[lix*label]"
+.\" save reference to the figure
+.if !'\\$5'' .SETR \\$5 \\*[lix*numb]
..
.\" hide printout until diversion is evaluated
.de lix@embedded-text
-\!.SP \\n[Lsp]u
+\!.ie \\\\n[Sectp] .ds lix*pgnr \\\\*[hd*sect-pg]
+\!.el .ds lix*pgnr \\\\n[%]
+\!.SP \\\\n[Lsp]u
\!.misc@ev-keep lix
+\!.ll \\n[.l]u
\!.init@reset
-\!.br
-\!.ie (\w@\\$1\\$2@)>(\\n[.l]-\\n[.i]) \{\
+\!.fi
+\!.ie (\w@\\$1\\$2@)>(\\\\n[.l]-\\\\n[.i]) \{\
. in +\w@\\$1@u
\!. ti 0
+\!\fB\\$1\fP\\$2
\!.\}
-\!.el .ce 1
+\!.el \{\
+. ce 1
\!\fB\\$1\fP\\$2
+\!.\}
\!.br
\!.ev
+.\" save line for LIST OF XXX, wth is the width of the label
+\!.if !r lix*wth\\$3 .nr lix*wth\\$3 0
+.\" find the maximum width
+\!.if \w@\\*[lix*label]@>\\\\n[lix*wth\\$3] .nr lix*wth\\$3 \w@\\*[lix*label]@
+\!.if \\\\n[\\$4] .lix@ds-save \\$3 \\\\*[lix*pgnr] "\\*[lix*text]" "\\*[lix*label]"
+.\" save reference to the figure
+\!.if !'\\$5'' .SETR \\$5 \\*[lix*numb]
..
.\"------------
.\" print complete list of XXXX
.de lix@print-ds
.\" arg: fg,tb,ec,ex text
+.ds H1txt \\$3
+.ds Tcst \\$1
.if !\\n[Cp] .pg@next-page
.\" print LIST OF XXXX
-.ce
-\\$2
-.SP 3
+.\" execute user-defined macros
+.if \\$4<=4 .if d TX\\$2 .TX\\$2
+.ie d TY\\$2 .if \\$4<=4 .TY\\$2
+.el \{\
+. ce
+\\$3
+. SP 3
+.\}
.in \\n[lix*wth\\$1]u
.fi
.lix*ds\\$1
.\" lix@dsln type pagenumber text headernr
.de lix@dsln
.nr lix*i \\n[lix*wth\\$1]-\w@\\$4@
-.ne 2v
-.nr lix*sep \\n[.l]-\\n[lix*i]-\w'\\$4\\$3\\$2'-1m-1n-\\n[.i]
-\h'\\n[lix*i]u'\\$4\\$3\h'1n'\l'\\n[lix*sep]u.'\h'1m'\\$2
+.ne 4v
+.ll \\n[@ll]u-\w@\\$4@u-\w@\\$2@u-2m
+.ti -\\n[lix*wth\\$1]u
+\\$4
+.sp -1
+\\$3\h'1m'
+.sp -1
+.ll
+.nr lix*sep (u;\\n[.l]-\\n[.n]-\\n[.i]-\w@\\$2@)-1m
+\h'|\\n[.n]u'\l'\\n[lix*sep]u.'\h'1m'\\$2
.SP \\n[toc*spacing]u
..
.\"########################### module fnt ############################
.\" jump to new environment.
.ev box*ev
.di box*div
-.ps \\n[@ps]
-.vs \\n[@vs]
+.ps \\n[@ps]u
+.vs \\n[@vs]u
.in 1n
.ll (u;\\n[box*wid]-1n)
.hy \\n[.hy]
.nr app*nr 0 1
.af app*nr A
.nr app*dnr 0 1
+.nr app*flag 0
.\"------------
.\" .APP name text
.\" name == "" -> autonumber
.\" .if \\n[.$]<2 .@error "APP: too few arguments"
.app@set-ind "\\$1"
.\"
+.ds Tcst ap
+.ds Apptxt \\$2
+.\"
.ie \\n[Aph] .app@header \\*[app*ind] "\\$2"
.el .bp
.app@index "\\*[app*ind]" "\\$2"
.if \\n[.$]<2 .@error "APPSK: too few arguments"
.app@set-ind "\\$1"
.\"
+.ds Tcst ap
+.ds Apptxt \\$3
+.\"
.ie \\n[Aph] .app@header \\*[app*ind] "\\$3"
.el .bp
.app@index "\\*[app*ind]" "\\$3"
.de app@set-ind
.ie \w@\\$1@ .ds app*ind \\$1
.el \{\
-. if !\\n[app*dnr] \{\
+. if !\\n[app*flag] \{\
. nr H1 0 1
. af H1 A
+. af H1h A
+. nr app*flag 1
. \}
. ds app*ind \\n+[app*nr]
. nr H1 \\n+[app*dnr]
+. nr H1h \\n[app*dnr]
.\}
.\" clear lower counters
.nr app*i 1 1
\fB\s+2\\$2\s0\fP
.SP (u;\\n[Lsp]*4)
..
+.als APPX app@header
.\"########################### module cov ############################
.\" title stored in diversion cov*title
.\" abstract stored in diversion cov*abstract
.de AU
.cov@title-end
.pg@disable-top-trap
-.if \\n[.$]<1 .@error "AU: no arguments"
.nr cov*au +1
.nr cov*i 0 1
+.ds cov*au!\\n[cov*au]!1
.while \\n[.$]>=\\n+[cov*i] \{\
. ds cov*au!\\n[cov*au]!\\n[cov*i] "\\$[\\n[cov*i]]
.\}
.\"-------------------
.de AF
.cov@title-end
-.if \\n[.$]<1 .@error "AF: no arguments"
.ds cov*firm \\$1
..
.de AST
..
.de AE
..
-.\" I am planning to use mgm some time :-)
-.ie \\n[yr]<50 .ds cov*new-date \\*[MO\\n[mo]] \\n[dy], 20\\n[yr]
-.el .ds cov*new-date \\*[MO\\n[mo]] \\n[dy], 19\\n[yr]
+.\" I am planning to use mgm for some time :-)
+.nr cov*year 1900+\n[yr]
+.ds cov*new-date \*[MO\n[mo]] \n[dy], \n[cov*year]
.als DT cov*new-date
.de ND
.ds cov*new-date \\$1
.\"########################### module qrf ############################
.\" forward and backward reference thru special files.
.\"
+.\" check if stderr-method is wanted
+.\" This was needed when I discovered that groff was considered unsafe
+.\" and groff -U didn't work. It's a workaround like the original
+.\" index method, but not in my view elegant enough.
+.\"
.\" init reference system
.de INITR
-.if \\n[.$]<1 .@error "INITR:filename missing"
-.\" ignore if INITR has already been used
-.if !r qrf*pass \{\
-.\"
-. ds qrf*file \\$1
-. sy test -f \\*[qrf*file].tmp
-. ie \\n[systat] \{\
-. \" PASS 1
-. if \\n[D]=1 .tm PASS 1
-. if \\n[D]>1 .tm INITR: file \\*[qrf*file].tmp, PASS 1
-. nr qrf*pass 1
-. open qrf*stream \\*[qrf*file].tmp
-. write qrf*stream .\\\\" references for \\*[qrf*file]
-. close qrf*stream
-. \}
-. el \{\
-. nr qrf*pass 2
-. if \\n[D]=1 .tm PASS 2
-. if \\n[D]>1 .tm INITR: file \\*[qrf*file].tmp, PASS 2
-. sy mv \\*[qrf*file].tmp \\*[qrf*file].qrf
-' so \\*[qrf*file].qrf
-. \}
+.ds qrf*file \\$1
+.nr qrf*pass 2
+.if \\n[D]>1 .tm INITR: source \\*[qrf*file]
+.if \\n[Ref] \{\
+. tm .\\\\" Filename: \\$1
+.\}
+'so \\*[qrf*file]
.\}
..
.\"---------------
.ie !r qrf*pass .tm "SETR: No .INITR in this file"
.el \{\
. ds qrf*name qrf*ref-\\$1
-.\" probably pass two if already defined
-. if \\n[qrf*pass]<2 \{\
-. if \\n[D]>2 .tm SETR: ref \\*[qrf*name]=\\*[hd*toc-mark],\\n[%]
-. \" heading-number
-. ds \\*[qrf*name]-hn \\*[hd*toc-mark]
-. \" page-number
-. ds \\*[qrf*name]-pn \\n[%]
-. \"
-. \" append to file
-. opena qrf*stream \\*[qrf*file].tmp
-. write qrf*stream .ds \\*[qrf*name]-hn \\*[hd*toc-mark]
-. write qrf*stream .ds \\*[qrf*name]-pn \\n[%]
-. if !'\\$2'' .write qrf*stream .ds \\*[qrf*name]-xx \\$2
-. close qrf*stream
+. if \\n[D]>2 .tm SETR: ref \\*[qrf*name]=\\*[hd*mark],\\n[%]
+. \" heading-number
+. ds \\*[qrf*name]-hn \\*[hd*mark]
+. \" page-number
+. ds \\*[qrf*name]-pn \\n[%]
+. \"
+. if \\n[Ref] \{\
+. tm .ds \\*[qrf*name]-hn \\*[hd*mark]
+. tm .ds \\*[qrf*name]-pn \\n[%]
+. if !'\\$2'' .tm .ds \\*[qrf*name]-xx \\$2
. \}
.\}
..
.if \\n[.$]<1 .@error "GETST:reference name missing"
.if !r qrf*pass .tm "GETST: No .INITR in this file"
.ds qrf*name qrf*ref-\\$1
-.ie \\n[qrf*pass]=2 \{\
-. ie !d \\*[qrf*name]-xx .tm "GETHN:\\$1 not defined"
-. el \{\
+. if d \\*[qrf*name]-xx \{\
. ie \\n[.$]>1 .ds \\$2 \\*[\\*[qrf*name]-xx]
. el \\*[\\*[qrf*name]-xx]\c
. \}
.\}
-.\" The answer...
-.el <->42<->\c
..
.\"---------------
.\" get header-number, output X.X.X. in pass 1
.if \\n[.$]<1 .@error "GETHN:reference name missing"
.if !r qrf*pass .tm "GETHN: No .INITR in this file"
.ds qrf*name qrf*ref-\\$1
-.ie \\n[qrf*pass]=2 \{\
-. ie !d \\*[qrf*name]-hn .tm "GETHN:\\$1 not defined"
-. el \{\
-. ie \\n[.$]>1 .ds \\$2 \\*[\\*[qrf*name]-hn]
-. el \\*[\\*[qrf*name]-hn]\c
-. \}
+.if d \\*[qrf*name]-hn \{\
+. ie \\n[.$]>1 .ds \\$2 \\*[\\*[qrf*name]-hn]
+. el \\*[\\*[qrf*name]-hn]\c
.\}
-.el X.X.X.\c
..
.\"---------------
.\" get page-number, output 9999 in pass 1
.if \\n[.$]<1 .@error "GETPN:reference name missing"
.if !r qrf*pass .tm "GETPN: No .INITR in this file"
.ds qrf*name qrf*ref-\\$1
-.ie \\n[qrf*pass]=2 \{\
-. ie !d \\*[qrf*name]-pn .tm "GETPN:\\$1 not defined"
-. el \{\
-. ie \\n[.$]>1 .ds \\$2 \\*[\\*[qrf*name]-pn]
-. el \\*[\\*[qrf*name]-pn]\c
-. \}
+.if d \\*[qrf*name]-pn
+. ie \\n[.$]>1 .ds \\$2 \\*[\\*[qrf*name]-pn]
+. el \\*[\\*[qrf*name]-pn]\c
.\}
-.el 9999\c
..
.\"----------
.de GETR
. tm "GETR: No .INITR in this file"
.\}
.el \{\
-. if \\n[qrf*pass]=2 \{\
-. GETHN \\$1 Qrfh
-. GETPN \\$1 Qrfp
+. GETHN \\$1 Qrfh
+. GETPN \\$1 Qrfp
\\*[Qrf]
-. \}
+.\}
+..
+.\"########################### module ind ############################
+.\" Support for mgs-style indexing, borrowed from mgs.
+.de IX
+.tm \\$1\t\\$2\t\\$3\t\\$4 ... \\n[%]
+..
+.\"--------------------
+.\" Another type of index system
+.\" INITI filename [type]
+.de INITI
+.if \\n[.$]<1 .@error "INITI:filename missing"
+.\" ignore if INITI has already been used
+.if r ind*pass .@error "INITI:already initialyzed"
+.nr ind*pass 1
+.ds ind*file \\$1.ind
+.ie \\n[.$]<2 .ds ind*type N
+.el .ds ind*type \\$2
+..
+.\"---------------
+.de IND
+.if !r ind*pass .@error "IND: No .INITI in this file"
+.if '\\*[ind*type]'N' .ds ind*ref \\n[%]
+.if '\\*[ind*type]'H' .ds ind*ref \\*[hd*mark]
+.if '\\*[ind*type]'B' .ds ind*ref \\*[hd*mark]\t\\n[%]
+.\"
+.if \\n[.$] .ds ind*line \\$1
+.while \\n[.$]>0 \{\
+. shift
+. as ind*line \t\\$1
+.\}
+.as ind*line \\*[ind*ref]
+.tm \\*[ind*line]
+..
+.\" print index
+.de INDP
+.\" sort the index
+.if !\\n[Cp] .pg@next-page
+.\" print INDEX
+.\" execute user-defined macros
+.if d TXIND .TXIND
+.ie d TYIND .TYIND
+.el \{\
+. SK
+. ce
+\\*[Index]
+. SP 3
+. 2C
+. nf
+.\}
+.pso \\*[Indcmd] \\*[ind*file]
+.ie d TZIND .TZIND
+.el \{\
+. fi
+. 1C
.\}
..
.\"########################### module let ############################
.sp 2
.ie n ______________________________ ______________
.el \D'l 25m 0'\h'4m'\D'l 12m 0'
-\Z'\\$1'\h'29m'\\*[Letdate]
+\Z'\\$1'\h'29m'\f[\\*[@sdf_font]]\\*[Letdate]\fP
+.fi
+..
+.\"------------------------
+.\" Letter signature
+.de AVL
+.ne 6v
+.nf
+.sp 3
+.ie n ______________________________
+.el \D'l 25m 0'
+\Z'\\$1'
.fi
..
.\"------------------------
. el \{\
. sp
. if '\\*[let*type]'SB' .ti +5m
-\\*[LetSJ] \\*[let*lo-SJ]
+\\*[LetSJ] \f[\\*[@sdf_font]]\\*[let*lo-SJ]\fP
. \}
.\}
..
.ds let*lo-\\$1 \\$2
.if \n[D]>1 .tm Letter option \\$1 \\$2
..
+.\"--------------------
+.\" Start with a clean slate
+.init@reset
-.\" $Id: tmac.mse,v 1.4 1998/01/19 00:40:16 etheisen Exp $
+.\" $Id: tmac.mse,v 1.5 2000/04/09 08:25:19 millert Exp $
.\"
.\" swedish version of mm
.\" See tmac.m for version-information.
-.mso tmac.m
.ds @language se
+.mso tmac.m
.\"
+.ds App Bilaga
.ds Lf Figurer
.ds Lt Tabeller
.ds Lx Uppställningar
.ds Letns!4 Atts.
.ds Letns!5 Enc.
.ds Letns!6 Encs.
-.ds Letns!7 Under separate cover
+.ds Letns!7 Annat försättsblad
.ds Letns!8 Brev till
.ds Letns!9 Dokument till
.ds Letns!10 Kopia (med atts.) till
.ds MO10 oktober
.ds MO11 november
.ds MO12 december
-.ie \\n[yr]<50 .ds cov*new-date \\n[dy] \\*[MO\\n[mo]] 20\\n[yr]
-.el .ds cov*new-date \\n[dy] \\*[MO\\n[mo]] 19\\n[yr]
+.nr cov*year 1900+\n[yr]
+.ds cov*new-date \n[dy] \*[MO\n[mo]] \n[cov*year]
.nr pg*footer-size 4\" 1v+footer+even/odd footer+1v
.\"------------------------------------------------
.\" Dokumentnamn
-MAN1=nroff.n
+MAN1=nroff.1
NAMEPREFIX=$(g)
CLEANADD=nroff
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.TH @G@NROFF @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+@g@nroff \- emulate nroff command with groff
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B @g@nroff
+[
+.B \-h
+]
+[
+.B \-i
+]
+[
+.BI \-m name
+]
+[
+.BI \-n num
+]
+[
+.BI \-o list
+]
+[
+.BI \-r cn
+]
+[
+.BI \-T name
+]
+[
+.I file\|.\|.\|.
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The
+.B @g@nroff
+script emulates the
+.B nroff
+command using groff.
+The
+.B \-T
+option with an argument other than
+.B ascii
+and
+.B latin1
+will be ignored.
+The
+.B \-h
+option
+is equivalent to the
+.B grotty
+.B \-h
+option.
+The
+.BR \-i ,
+.BR \-n ,
+.BR \-m ,
+.B \-o
+and
+.B \-r
+options have the effect described in
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@).
+In addition
+.B @g@nroff
+silently ignores options of
+.BR \-e ,
+.B \-q
+or
+.BR \-s .
+Options
+.B \-S
+(safer) and
+.B \-U
+(unsafe) are passed to groff.
+.B \-S
+is passed by default.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR grotty (@MAN1EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.TH @G@NROFF @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-@g@nroff \- emulate nroff command with groff
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B @g@nroff
-[
-.B \-h
-]
-[
-.B \-i
-]
-[
-.BI \-m name
-]
-[
-.BI \-n num
-]
-[
-.BI \-o list
-]
-[
-.BI \-r cn
-]
-[
-.BI \-T name
-]
-[
-.I file\|.\|.\|.
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.B @g@nroff
-script emulates the
-.B nroff
-command using groff.
-The
-.B \-T
-option with an argument other than
-.B ascii
-and
-.B latin1
-will be ignored.
-The
-.B \-h
-option
-is equivalent to the
-.B grotty
-.B \-h
-option.
-The
-.BR \-i ,
-.BR \-n ,
-.BR \-m ,
-.B \-o
-and
-.B \-r
-options have the effect described in
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@).
-In addition
-.B @g@nroff
-silently ignores options of
-.BR \-e ,
-.B \-q
-or
-.BR \-s .
-Options
-.B \-S
-(safer) and
-.B \-U
-(unsafe) are passed to groff.
-.B \-S
-is passed by default.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR grotty (@MAN1EXT@)
T=-Tascii
fi
opts=
+safer=-S
for i
do
echo "$prog: option $1 requires an argument" >&2
exit 1
;;
- -i|-S|-[mrno]*)
+ -i|-[mrno]*)
opts="$opts $1";
;;
-T*)
# ignore other devices
;;
+ -S)
+ # safer behaviour
+ safer=-S
+ ;;
+ -U)
+ # unsafe behaviour
+ safer=-U
+ ;;
-u*)
# Solaris 2.2 `man' uses -u0; ignore it,
# since `less' and `more' can use the emboldening info.
# This shell script is intended for use with man, so warnings are
# probably not wanted. Also load nroff-style character definitions.
-exec groff -S -Wall -mtty-char $T $opts ${1+"$@"}
+exec groff $safer -Wall -mtty-char $T $opts ${1+"$@"}
PROG=pfbtops
-MAN1=pfbtops.n
+MAN1=pfbtops.1
OBJS=pfbtops.o
CSRCS=pfbtops.c
XLIBS=$(LIBGROFF)
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.TH PFBTOPS @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+pfbtops \- translate a PostScript font in .pfb format to ASCII
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B pfbtops
+[
+.I pfb_file
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B pfbtops
+translates a PostScript font in
+.B .pfb
+format to ASCII.
+If
+.I pfb_file
+is omitted the pfb file will be read from the standard input.
+The ASCII format PostScript font will be written on the standard output.
+PostScript fonts for MS-DOS are normally supplied in
+.B .pfb
+format.
+.LP
+The resulting ASCII format PostScript font can be used with groff.
+It must first be listed in
+.BR @FONTDIR@/devps/download .
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR grops (@MAN1EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.TH PFBTOPS @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-pfbtops \- translate a PostScript font in .pfb format to ASCII
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B pfbtops
-[
-.I pfb_file
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B pfbtops
-translates a PostScript font in
-.B .pfb
-format to ASCII.
-If
-.I pfb_file
-is omitted the pfb file will be read from the standard input.
-The ASCII format PostScript font will be written on the standard output.
-PostScript fonts for MS-DOS are normally supplied in
-.B .pfb
-format.
-.LP
-The resulting ASCII format PostScript font can be used with groff.
-It must first be listed in
-.BR @FONTDIR@/devps/download .
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR grops (@MAN1EXT@)
PROG=pic
-MAN1=pic.n
+MAN1=pic.1
XLIBS=$(LIBGROFF)
MLIB=$(LIBM)
OBJS=pic.o lex.o main.o object.o common.o troff.o tex.o # fig.o
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
+.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
+.de Tp
+.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
+.el .TP "\\$1"
+..
+.ie t .ds tx T\h'-.1667m'\v'.224m'E\v'-.224m'\h'-.125m'X
+.el .ds tx TeX
+.ie \n(.g .ds ic \/
+.el .ds ic \^
+.\" The BSD man macros can't handle " in arguments to font change macros,
+.\" so use \(ts instead of ".
+.tr \(ts"
+.TH @G@PIC @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+@g@pic \- compile pictures for troff or TeX
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B @g@pic
+[
+.B \-nvCSU
+]
+[
+.I filename
+\&.\|.\|.
+]
+.br
+.B @g@pic
+.B \-t
+[
+.B \-cvzCSU
+]
+[
+.I filename
+\&.\|.\|.
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.LP
+This manual page describes the GNU version of
+.BR pic ,
+which is part of the groff document formatting system.
+.B pic
+compiles descriptions of pictures embedded within
+.B troff
+or \*(tx input files into commands that are understood by \*(tx or
+.BR troff .
+Each picture starts with a line beginning with
+.B .PS
+and ends with a line beginning with
+.BR .PE .
+Anything outside of
+.B .PS
+and
+.B .PE
+is passed through without change.
+.LP
+It is the user's responsibility to provide appropriate definitions of the
+.B PS
+and
+.B PE
+macros.
+When the macro package being used does not supply such definitions
+(for example, old versions of \-ms),
+appropriate definitions can be obtained with
+.BR \-mpic :
+these will center each picture.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.LP
+Options that do not take arguments may be grouped behind a single
+.BR \- .
+The special option
+.B \-\^\-
+can be used to mark the end of the options.
+A filename of
+.B \-
+refers to the standard input.
+.TP
+.B \-C
+Recognize
+.B .PS
+and
+.B .PE
+even when followed by a character other than space or newline.
+.TP
+.B \-S
+Safer mode; do not execute
+.B sh
+commands.
+This can be useful when operating on untrustworthy input.
+(enabled by default)
+.TP
+.B \-U
+Unsafe mode; revert the default option
+.BR \-S .
+.TP
+.B \-n
+Don't use the groff extensions to the troff drawing commands.
+You should use this if you are using a postprocessor that doesn't support
+these extensions.
+The extensions are described in
+.BR groff_out (@MAN5EXT@).
+The
+.B \-n
+option also causes pic
+not to use zero-length lines to draw dots in troff mode.
+.TP
+.B \-t
+\*(tx mode.
+.TP
+.B \-c
+Be more compatible with
+.BR tpic .
+Implies
+.BR \-t .
+Lines beginning with
+.B \e
+are not passed through transparently.
+Lines beginning with
+.B .
+are passed through with the initial
+.B .
+changed to
+.BR \e .
+A line beginning with
+.B .ps
+is given special treatment:
+it takes an optional integer argument specifying
+the line thickness (pen size) in milliinches;
+a missing argument restores the previous line thickness;
+the default line thickness is 8 milliinches.
+The line thickness thus specified takes effect only
+when a non-negative line thickness has not been
+specified by use of the
+.B thickness
+attribute or by setting the
+.B linethick
+variable.
+.TP
+.B \-v
+Print the version number.
+.TP
+.B \-z
+In \*(tx mode draw dots using zero-length lines.
+.LP
+The following options supported by other versions of
+.B pic
+are ignored:
+.TP
+.B \-D
+Draw all lines using the \eD escape sequence.
+.B pic
+always does this.
+.TP
+.BI \-T \ dev
+Generate output for the
+.B troff
+device
+.IR dev .
+This is unnecessary because the
+.B troff
+output generated by
+.B pic
+is device-independent.
+.SH USAGE
+This section describes only the differences between GNU pic and the original
+version of pic.
+Many of these differences also apply to newer versions of Unix pic.
+.SS \*(tx mode
+.LP
+\*(tx mode is enabled by the
+.B \-t
+option.
+In \*(tx mode, pic will define a vbox called
+.B \egraph
+for each picture.
+You must yourself print that vbox using, for example, the command
+.RS
+.LP
+.B
+\ecenterline{\ebox\egraph}
+.RE
+.LP
+Actually, since the vbox has a height of zero this will produce
+slightly more vertical space above the picture than below it;
+.RS
+.LP
+.B
+\ecenterline{\eraise 1em\ebox\egraph}
+.RE
+.LP
+would avoid this.
+.LP
+You must use a \*(tx driver that supports the
+.B tpic
+specials, version 2.
+.LP
+Lines beginning with
+.B \e
+are passed through transparently; a
+.B %
+is added to the end of the line to avoid unwanted spaces.
+You can safely use this feature to change fonts or to
+change the value of
+.BR \ebaselineskip .
+Anything else may well produce undesirable results; use at your own risk.
+Lines beginning with a period are not given any special treatment.
+.SS Commands
+.TP
+\fBfor\fR \fIvariable\fR \fB=\fR \fIexpr1\fR \fBto\fR \fIexpr2\fR \
+[\fBby\fR [\fB*\fR]\fIexpr3\fR] \fBdo\fR \fIX\fR \fIbody\fR \fIX\fR
+Set
+.I variable
+to
+.IR expr1 .
+While the value of
+.I variable
+is less than or equal to
+.IR expr2 ,
+do
+.I body
+and increment
+.I variable
+by
+.IR expr3 ;
+if
+.B by
+is not given, increment
+.I variable
+by 1.
+If
+.I expr3
+is prefixed by
+.B *
+then
+.I variable
+will instead be multiplied by
+.IR expr3 .
+.I X
+can be any character not occurring in
+.IR body .
+.TP
+\fBif\fR \fIexpr\fR \fBthen\fR \fIX\fR \fIif-true\fR \fIX\fR \
+[\fBelse\fR \fIY\fR \fIif-false\fR \fIY\fR]
+Evaluate
+.IR expr ;
+if it is non-zero then do
+.IR if-true ,
+otherwise do
+.IR if-false .
+.I X
+can be any character not occurring in
+.IR if-true .
+.I Y
+can be any character not occurring in
+.IR if-false .
+.TP
+\fBprint\fR \fIarg\fR\|.\|.\|.
+Concatenate the arguments and print as a line on stderr.
+Each
+.I arg
+must be an expression, a position, or text.
+This is useful for debugging.
+.TP
+\fBcommand\fR \fIarg\fR\|.\|.\|.
+Concatenate the arguments
+and pass them through as a line to troff or\*(tx.
+Each
+.I arg
+must be an expression, a position, or text.
+This has a similar effect to a line beginning with
+.B .
+or
+.BR \e ,
+but allows the values of variables to be passed through.
+.TP
+\fBsh\fR \fIX\fR \fIcommand\fR \fIX\fR
+Pass
+.I command
+to a shell.
+.I X
+can be any character not occurring in
+.IR command .
+.TP
+\fBcopy\fR \fB"\fIfilename\fB"\fR
+Include
+.I filename
+at this point in the file.
+.TP
+\fBcopy\fR [\fB"\fIfilename\fB"\fR] \fBthru\fR \fIX\fR \fIbody\fR \fIX\fR \
+[\fBuntil\fR \fB"\fIword\*(ic\fB"\fR]
+.ns
+.TP
+\fBcopy\fR [\fB"\fIfilename\fB"\fR] \fBthru\fR \fImacro\fR \
+[\fBuntil\fR \fB"\fIword\*(ic\fB"\fR]
+This construct does
+.I body
+once for each line of
+.IR filename ;
+the line is split into blank-delimited words,
+and occurrences of
+.BI $ i
+in
+.IR body ,
+for
+.I i
+between 1 and 9,
+are replaced by the
+.IR i -th
+word of the line.
+If
+.I filename
+is not given, lines are taken from the current input up to
+.BR .PE .
+If an
+.B until
+clause is specified,
+lines will be read only until a line the first word of which is
+.IR word ;
+that line will then be discarded.
+.I X
+can be any character not occurring in
+.IR body .
+For example,
+.RS
+.IP
+.ft B
+.nf
+\&.PS
+copy thru % circle at ($1,$2) % until "END"
+1 2
+3 4
+5 6
+END
+box
+\&.PE
+.ft
+.fi
+.RE
+.IP
+is equivalent to
+.RS
+.IP
+.ft B
+.nf
+\&.PS
+circle at (1,2)
+circle at (3,4)
+circle at (5,6)
+box
+\&.PE
+.ft
+.fi
+.RE
+.IP
+The commands to be performed for each line can also be taken
+from a macro defined earlier by giving the name of the macro
+as the argument to
+.BR thru .
+.LP
+.B reset
+.br
+.ns
+.TP
+\fBreset\fI variable1\fB,\fI variable2 .\^.\^.
+Reset pre-defined variables
+.IR variable1 ,
+.I variable2
+\&.\^.\^. to their default values.
+If no arguments are given, reset all pre-defined variables
+to their default values.
+Note that assigning a value to
+.B scale
+also causes all pre-defined variables that control dimensions
+to be reset to their default values times the new value of scale.
+.TP
+\fBplot\fR \fIexpr\fR [\fB"\fItext\*(ic\fB"\fR]
+This is a text object which is constructed by using
+.I text
+as a format string for sprintf
+with an argument of
+.IR expr .
+If
+.I text
+is omitted a format string of
+.B "\(ts%g\(ts"
+is used.
+Attributes can be specified in the same way as for a normal text
+object.
+Be very careful that you specify an appropriate format string;
+pic does only very limited checking of the string.
+This is deprecated in favour of
+.BR sprintf .
+.TP
+.IB variable := expr
+This is similar to
+.B =
+except
+.I variable
+must already be defined,
+and the value of
+.I variable
+will be changed only in the innermost block in which it is defined.
+(By contrast,
+.B =
+defines the variable in the current block if it is not already defined there,
+and then changes the value in the current block.)
+.LP
+Arguments of the form
+.IP
+.IR X\ anything\ X
+.LP
+are also allowed to be of the form
+.IP
+.BI {\ anything\ }
+.LP
+In this case
+.I anything
+can contain balanced occurrences of
+.B {
+and
+.BR } .
+Strings may contain
+.I X
+or imbalanced occurrences of
+.B {
+and
+.BR } .
+.SS Expressions
+The syntax for expressions has been significantly extended:
+.LP
+.IB x\ ^\ y
+(exponentiation)
+.br
+.BI sin( x )
+.br
+.BI cos( x )
+.br
+.BI atan2( y , \ x )
+.br
+.BI log( x )
+(base 10)
+.br
+.BI exp( x )
+(base 10, ie 10\v'-.4m'\fIx\*(ic\fR\v'.4m')
+.br
+.BI sqrt( x )
+.br
+.BI int( x )
+.br
+.B rand()
+(return a random number between 0 and 1)
+.br
+.BI rand( x )
+(return a random number between 1 and
+.IR x ;
+deprecated)
+.br
+.BI max( e1 , \ e2 )
+.br
+.BI min( e1 , \ e2 )
+.br
+.BI ! e
+.br
+\fIe1\fB && \fIe2\fR
+.br
+\fIe1\fB || \fIe2\fR
+.br
+\fIe1\fB == \fIe2\fR
+.br
+\fIe1\fB != \fIe2\fR
+.br
+\fIe1\fB >= \fIe2\fR
+.br
+\fIe1\fB > \fIe2\fR
+.br
+\fIe1\fB <= \fIe2\fR
+.br
+\fIe1\fB < \fIe2\fR
+.br
+\fB"\fIstr1\*(ic\fB" == "\fIstr2\*(ic\fB"\fR
+.br
+\fB"\fIstr1\*(ic\fB" != "\fIstr2\*(ic\fB"\fR
+.br
+.LP
+String comparison expressions must be parenthesised in some contexts
+to avoid ambiguity.
+.SS Other Changes
+.LP
+A bare expression,
+.IR expr ,
+is acceptable as an attribute;
+it is equivalent to
+.IR dir\ expr ,
+where
+.I dir
+is the current direction.
+For example
+.IP
+.B line 2i
+.LP
+means draw a line 2 inches long in the current direction.
+.LP
+The maximum width and height of the picture are taken from the variables
+.B maxpswid
+and
+.BR maxpsht .
+Initially these have values 8.5 and 11.
+.LP
+Scientific notation is allowed for numbers.
+For example
+.RS
+.B
+x = 5e\-2
+.RE
+.LP
+Text attributes can be compounded.
+For example,
+.RS
+.B
+"foo" above ljust
+.RE
+is legal.
+.LP
+There is no limit to the depth to which blocks can be examined.
+For example,
+.RS
+.B
+[A: [B: [C: box ]]] with .A.B.C.sw at 1,2
+.br
+.B
+circle at last [\^].A.B.C
+.RE
+is acceptable.
+.LP
+Arcs now have compass points
+determined by the circle of which the arc is a part.
+.LP
+Circles and arcs can be dotted or dashed.
+In \*(tx mode splines can be dotted or dashed.
+.LP
+Boxes can have rounded corners.
+The
+.B rad
+attribute specifies the radius of the quarter-circles at each corner.
+If no
+.B rad
+or
+.B diam
+attribute is given, a radius of
+.B boxrad
+is used.
+Initially,
+.B boxrad
+has a value of 0.
+A box with rounded corners can be dotted or dashed.
+.LP
+The
+.B .PS
+line can have a second argument specifying a maximum height for
+the picture.
+If the width of zero is specified the width will be ignored in computing
+the scaling factor for the picture.
+Note that GNU pic will always scale a picture by the same amount
+vertically as horizontally.
+This is different from the
+.SM DWB
+2.0 pic which may scale a picture by a
+different amount vertically than horizontally if a height is
+specified.
+.LP
+Each text object has an invisible box associated with it.
+The compass points of a text object are determined by this box.
+The implicit motion associated with the object is also determined
+by this box.
+The dimensions of this box are taken from the width and height attributes;
+if the width attribute is not supplied then the width will be taken to be
+.BR textwid ;
+if the height attribute is not supplied then the height will be taken to be
+the number of text strings associated with the object
+times
+.BR textht .
+Initially
+.B textwid
+and
+.B textht
+have a value of 0.
+.LP
+In places where a quoted text string can be used,
+an expression of the form
+.IP
+.BI sprintf(\(ts format \(ts,\ arg ,\fR.\|.\|.\fB)
+.LP
+can also be used;
+this will produce the arguments formatted according to
+.IR format ,
+which should be a string as described in
+.BR printf (3)
+appropriate for the number of arguments supplied,
+using only the
+.BR e ,
+.BR f ,
+.B g
+or
+.B %
+format characters.
+.LP
+The thickness of the lines used to draw objects is controlled by the
+.B linethick
+variable.
+This gives the thickness of lines in points.
+A negative value means use the default thickness:
+in \*(tx output mode, this means use a thickness of 8 milliinches;
+in \*(tx output mode with the
+.B -c
+option, this means use the line thickness specified by
+.B .ps
+lines;
+in troff output mode, this means use a thickness proportional
+to the pointsize.
+A zero value means draw the thinnest possible line supported by
+the output device.
+Initially it has a value of -1.
+There is also a
+.BR thick [ ness ]
+attribute.
+For example,
+.RS
+.LP
+.B circle thickness 1.5
+.RE
+.LP
+would draw a circle using a line with a thickness of 1.5 points.
+The thickness of lines is not affected by the
+value of the
+.B scale
+variable, nor by the width or height given in the
+.B .PS
+line.
+.LP
+Boxes (including boxes with rounded corners),
+circles and ellipses can be filled by giving then an attribute of
+.BR fill [ ed ].
+This takes an optional argument of an expression with a value between
+0 and 1; 0 will fill it with white, 1 with black, values in between
+with a proportionally gray shade.
+A value greater than 1 can also be used:
+this means fill with the
+shade of gray that is currently being used for text and lines.
+Normally this will be black, but output devices may provide
+a mechanism for changing this.
+Without an argument, then the value of the variable
+.B fillval
+will be used.
+Initially this has a value of 0.5.
+The invisible attribute does not affect the filling of objects.
+Any text associated with a filled object will be added after the
+object has been filled, so that the text will not be obscured
+by the filling.
+.LP
+Arrow heads will be drawn as solid triangles if the variable
+.B arrowhead
+is non-zero and either \*(tx mode is enabled or
+the
+.B \-x
+option has been given.
+Initially
+.B arrowhead
+has a value of 1.
+.LP
+The troff output of pic is device-independent.
+The
+.B \-T
+option is therefore redundant.
+All numbers are taken to be in inches; numbers are never interpreted
+to be in troff machine units.
+.LP
+Objects can have an
+.B aligned
+attribute.
+This will only work when the postprocessor is
+.BR grops .
+Any text associated with an object having the
+.B aligned
+attribute will be rotated about the center of the object
+so that it is aligned in the direction from the start point
+to the end point of the object.
+Note that this attribute will have no effect for objects whose start and
+end points are coincident.
+.LP
+In places where
+.IB n th
+is allowed
+.BI ` expr 'th
+is also allowed.
+Note that
+.B 'th
+is a single token: no space is allowed between the
+.B '
+and the
+.BR th .
+For example,
+.IP
+.B
+.nf
+for i = 1 to 4 do {
+ line from `i'th box.nw to `i+1'th box.se
+}
+.fi
+.SH FILES
+.Tp \w'\fB@MACRODIR@/tmac.pic'u+3n
+.B
+@MACRODIR@/tmac.pic
+Example definitions of the
+.B PS
+and
+.B PE
+macros.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR groff_out (@MAN5EXT@),
+.BR tex (1)
+.br
+Tpic: Pic for \*(tx
+.br
+Brian W. Kernighan,
+PIC \(em A Graphics Language for Typesetting (User Manual).
+AT&T Bell Laboratories, Computing Science Technical Report No.\ 116
+<URL:http://cm.bell-labs.com/cm/cs/cstr/116.ps.gz>
+(revised May, 1991).
+.SH BUGS
+.LP
+Input characters that are illegal for
+.B groff
+(ie those with
+.SM ASCII
+code 0 or between 013 and 037 octal or between 0200 and 0237 octal)
+are rejected even in \*(tx mode.
+.LP
+The interpretation of
+.B fillval
+is incompatible with the pic in 10th edition Unix,
+which interprets 0 as black and 1 as white.
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
-.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
-.de Tp
-.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
-.el .TP "\\$1"
-..
-.ie t .ds tx T\h'-.1667m'\v'.224m'E\v'-.224m'\h'-.125m'X
-.el .ds tx TeX
-.ie \n(.g .ds ic \/
-.el .ds ic \^
-.\" The BSD man macros can't handle " in arguments to font change macros,
-.\" so use \(ts instead of ".
-.tr \(ts"
-.TH @G@PIC @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-@g@pic \- compile pictures for troff or TeX
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B @g@pic
-[
-.B \-nvCSU
-]
-[
-.I filename
-\&.\|.\|.
-]
-.br
-.B @g@pic
-.B \-t
-[
-.B \-cvzCSU
-]
-[
-.I filename
-\&.\|.\|.
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.LP
-This manual page describes the GNU version of
-.BR pic ,
-which is part of the groff document formatting system.
-.B pic
-compiles descriptions of pictures embedded within
-.B troff
-or \*(tx input files into commands that are understood by \*(tx or
-.BR troff .
-Each picture starts with a line beginning with
-.B .PS
-and ends with a line beginning with
-.BR .PE .
-Anything outside of
-.B .PS
-and
-.B .PE
-is passed through without change.
-.LP
-It is the user's responsibility to provide appropriate definitions of the
-.B PS
-and
-.B PE
-macros.
-When the macro package being used does not supply such definitions
-(for example, old versions of \-ms),
-appropriate definitions can be obtained with
-.BR \-mpic :
-these will center each picture.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.LP
-Options that do not take arguments may be grouped behind a single
-.BR \- .
-The special option
-.B \-\^\-
-can be used to mark the end of the options.
-A filename of
-.B \-
-refers to the standard input.
-.TP
-.B \-C
-Recognize
-.B .PS
-and
-.B .PE
-even when followed by a character other than space or newline.
-.TP
-.B \-S
-Safer mode; do not execute
-.B sh
-commands.
-This can be useful when operating on untrustworthy input.
-(enabled by default)
-.TP
-.B \-U
-Unsafe mode; revert the default option
-.BR \-S .
-.TP
-.B \-n
-Don't use the groff extensions to the troff drawing commands.
-You should use this if you are using a postprocessor that doesn't support
-these extensions.
-The extensions are described in
-.BR groff_out (@MAN5EXT@).
-The
-.B \-n
-option also causes pic
-not to use zero-length lines to draw dots in troff mode.
-.TP
-.B \-t
-\*(tx mode.
-.TP
-.B \-c
-Be more compatible with
-.BR tpic .
-Implies
-.BR \-t .
-Lines beginning with
-.B \e
-are not passed through transparently.
-Lines beginning with
-.B .
-are passed through with the initial
-.B .
-changed to
-.BR \e .
-A line beginning with
-.B .ps
-is given special treatment:
-it takes an optional integer argument specifying
-the line thickness (pen size) in milliinches;
-a missing argument restores the previous line thickness;
-the default line thickness is 8 milliinches.
-The line thickness thus specified takes effect only
-when a non-negative line thickness has not been
-specified by use of the
-.B thickness
-attribute or by setting the
-.B linethick
-variable.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print the version number.
-.TP
-.B \-z
-In \*(tx mode draw dots using zero-length lines.
-.LP
-The following options supported by other versions of
-.B pic
-are ignored:
-.TP
-.B \-D
-Draw all lines using the \eD escape sequence.
-.B pic
-always does this.
-.TP
-.BI \-T \ dev
-Generate output for the
-.B troff
-device
-.IR dev .
-This is unnecessary because the
-.B troff
-output generated by
-.B pic
-is device-independent.
-.SH USAGE
-This section describes only the differences between GNU pic and the original
-version of pic.
-Many of these differences also apply to newer versions of Unix pic.
-.SS \*(tx mode
-.LP
-\*(tx mode is enabled by the
-.B \-t
-option.
-In \*(tx mode, pic will define a vbox called
-.B \egraph
-for each picture.
-You must yourself print that vbox using, for example, the command
-.RS
-.LP
-.B
-\ecenterline{\ebox\egraph}
-.RE
-.LP
-Actually, since the vbox has a height of zero this will produce
-slightly more vertical space above the picture than below it;
-.RS
-.LP
-.B
-\ecenterline{\eraise 1em\ebox\egraph}
-.RE
-.LP
-would avoid this.
-.LP
-You must use a \*(tx driver that supports the
-.B tpic
-specials, version 2.
-.LP
-Lines beginning with
-.B \e
-are passed through transparently; a
-.B %
-is added to the end of the line to avoid unwanted spaces.
-You can safely use this feature to change fonts or to
-change the value of
-.BR \ebaselineskip .
-Anything else may well produce undesirable results; use at your own risk.
-Lines beginning with a period are not given any special treatment.
-.SS Commands
-.TP
-\fBfor\fR \fIvariable\fR \fB=\fR \fIexpr1\fR \fBto\fR \fIexpr2\fR \
-[\fBby\fR [\fB*\fR]\fIexpr3\fR] \fBdo\fR \fIX\fR \fIbody\fR \fIX\fR
-Set
-.I variable
-to
-.IR expr1 .
-While the value of
-.I variable
-is less than or equal to
-.IR expr2 ,
-do
-.I body
-and increment
-.I variable
-by
-.IR expr3 ;
-if
-.B by
-is not given, increment
-.I variable
-by 1.
-If
-.I expr3
-is prefixed by
-.B *
-then
-.I variable
-will instead be multiplied by
-.IR expr3 .
-.I X
-can be any character not occurring in
-.IR body .
-.TP
-\fBif\fR \fIexpr\fR \fBthen\fR \fIX\fR \fIif-true\fR \fIX\fR \
-[\fBelse\fR \fIY\fR \fIif-false\fR \fIY\fR]
-Evaluate
-.IR expr ;
-if it is non-zero then do
-.IR if-true ,
-otherwise do
-.IR if-false .
-.I X
-can be any character not occurring in
-.IR if-true .
-.I Y
-can be any character not occurring in
-.IR if-false .
-.TP
-\fBprint\fR \fIarg\fR\|.\|.\|.
-Concatenate the arguments and print as a line on stderr.
-Each
-.I arg
-must be an expression, a position, or text.
-This is useful for debugging.
-.TP
-\fBcommand\fR \fIarg\fR\|.\|.\|.
-Concatenate the arguments
-and pass them through as a line to troff or\*(tx.
-Each
-.I arg
-must be an expression, a position, or text.
-This has a similar effect to a line beginning with
-.B .
-or
-.BR \e ,
-but allows the values of variables to be passed through.
-.TP
-\fBsh\fR \fIX\fR \fIcommand\fR \fIX\fR
-Pass
-.I command
-to a shell.
-.I X
-can be any character not occurring in
-.IR command .
-.TP
-\fBcopy\fR \fB"\fIfilename\fB"\fR
-Include
-.I filename
-at this point in the file.
-.TP
-\fBcopy\fR [\fB"\fIfilename\fB"\fR] \fBthru\fR \fIX\fR \fIbody\fR \fIX\fR \
-[\fBuntil\fR \fB"\fIword\*(ic\fB"\fR]
-.ns
-.TP
-\fBcopy\fR [\fB"\fIfilename\fB"\fR] \fBthru\fR \fImacro\fR \
-[\fBuntil\fR \fB"\fIword\*(ic\fB"\fR]
-This construct does
-.I body
-once for each line of
-.IR filename ;
-the line is split into blank-delimited words,
-and occurrences of
-.BI $ i
-in
-.IR body ,
-for
-.I i
-between 1 and 9,
-are replaced by the
-.IR i -th
-word of the line.
-If
-.I filename
-is not given, lines are taken from the current input up to
-.BR .PE .
-If an
-.B until
-clause is specified,
-lines will be read only until a line the first word of which is
-.IR word ;
-that line will then be discarded.
-.I X
-can be any character not occurring in
-.IR body .
-For example,
-.RS
-.IP
-.ft B
-.nf
-\&.PS
-copy thru % circle at ($1,$2) % until "END"
-1 2
-3 4
-5 6
-END
-box
-\&.PE
-.ft
-.fi
-.RE
-.IP
-is equivalent to
-.RS
-.IP
-.ft B
-.nf
-\&.PS
-circle at (1,2)
-circle at (3,4)
-circle at (5,6)
-box
-\&.PE
-.ft
-.fi
-.RE
-.IP
-The commands to be performed for each line can also be taken
-from a macro defined earlier by giving the name of the macro
-as the argument to
-.BR thru .
-.LP
-.B reset
-.br
-.ns
-.TP
-\fBreset\fI variable1\fB,\fI variable2 .\^.\^.
-Reset pre-defined variables
-.IR variable1 ,
-.I variable2
-\&.\^.\^. to their default values.
-If no arguments are given, reset all pre-defined variables
-to their default values.
-Note that assigning a value to
-.B scale
-also causes all pre-defined variables that control dimensions
-to be reset to their default values times the new value of scale.
-.TP
-\fBplot\fR \fIexpr\fR [\fB"\fItext\*(ic\fB"\fR]
-This is a text object which is constructed by using
-.I text
-as a format string for sprintf
-with an argument of
-.IR expr .
-If
-.I text
-is omitted a format string of
-.B "\(ts%g\(ts"
-is used.
-Attributes can be specified in the same way as for a normal text
-object.
-Be very careful that you specify an appropriate format string;
-pic does only very limited checking of the string.
-This is deprecated in favour of
-.BR sprintf .
-.TP
-.IB variable := expr
-This is similar to
-.B =
-except
-.I variable
-must already be defined,
-and the value of
-.I variable
-will be changed only in the innermost block in which it is defined.
-(By contrast,
-.B =
-defines the variable in the current block if it is not already defined there,
-and then changes the value in the current block.)
-.LP
-Arguments of the form
-.IP
-.IR X\ anything\ X
-.LP
-are also allowed to be of the form
-.IP
-.BI {\ anything\ }
-.LP
-In this case
-.I anything
-can contain balanced occurrences of
-.B {
-and
-.BR } .
-Strings may contain
-.I X
-or imbalanced occurrences of
-.B {
-and
-.BR } .
-.SS Expressions
-The syntax for expressions has been significantly extended:
-.LP
-.IB x\ ^\ y
-(exponentiation)
-.br
-.BI sin( x )
-.br
-.BI cos( x )
-.br
-.BI atan2( y , \ x )
-.br
-.BI log( x )
-(base 10)
-.br
-.BI exp( x )
-(base 10, ie 10\v'-.4m'\fIx\*(ic\fR\v'.4m')
-.br
-.BI sqrt( x )
-.br
-.BI int( x )
-.br
-.B rand()
-(return a random number between 0 and 1)
-.br
-.BI rand( x )
-(return a random number between 1 and
-.IR x ;
-deprecated)
-.br
-.BI max( e1 , \ e2 )
-.br
-.BI min( e1 , \ e2 )
-.br
-.BI ! e
-.br
-\fIe1\fB && \fIe2\fR
-.br
-\fIe1\fB || \fIe2\fR
-.br
-\fIe1\fB == \fIe2\fR
-.br
-\fIe1\fB != \fIe2\fR
-.br
-\fIe1\fB >= \fIe2\fR
-.br
-\fIe1\fB > \fIe2\fR
-.br
-\fIe1\fB <= \fIe2\fR
-.br
-\fIe1\fB < \fIe2\fR
-.br
-\fB"\fIstr1\*(ic\fB" == "\fIstr2\*(ic\fB"\fR
-.br
-\fB"\fIstr1\*(ic\fB" != "\fIstr2\*(ic\fB"\fR
-.br
-.LP
-String comparison expressions must be parenthesised in some contexts
-to avoid ambiguity.
-.SS Other Changes
-.LP
-A bare expression,
-.IR expr ,
-is acceptable as an attribute;
-it is equivalent to
-.IR dir\ expr ,
-where
-.I dir
-is the current direction.
-For example
-.IP
-.B line 2i
-.LP
-means draw a line 2 inches long in the current direction.
-.LP
-The maximum width and height of the picture are taken from the variables
-.B maxpswid
-and
-.BR maxpsht .
-Initially these have values 8.5 and 11.
-.LP
-Scientific notation is allowed for numbers.
-For example
-.RS
-.B
-x = 5e\-2
-.RE
-.LP
-Text attributes can be compounded.
-For example,
-.RS
-.B
-"foo" above ljust
-.RE
-is legal.
-.LP
-There is no limit to the depth to which blocks can be examined.
-For example,
-.RS
-.B
-[A: [B: [C: box ]]] with .A.B.C.sw at 1,2
-.br
-.B
-circle at last [\^].A.B.C
-.RE
-is acceptable.
-.LP
-Arcs now have compass points
-determined by the circle of which the arc is a part.
-.LP
-Circles and arcs can be dotted or dashed.
-In \*(tx mode splines can be dotted or dashed.
-.LP
-Boxes can have rounded corners.
-The
-.B rad
-attribute specifies the radius of the quarter-circles at each corner.
-If no
-.B rad
-or
-.B diam
-attribute is given, a radius of
-.B boxrad
-is used.
-Initially,
-.B boxrad
-has a value of 0.
-A box with rounded corners can be dotted or dashed.
-.LP
-The
-.B .PS
-line can have a second argument specifying a maximum height for
-the picture.
-If the width of zero is specified the width will be ignored in computing
-the scaling factor for the picture.
-Note that GNU pic will always scale a picture by the same amount
-vertically as horizontally.
-This is different from the
-.SM DWB
-2.0 pic which may scale a picture by a
-different amount vertically than horizontally if a height is
-specified.
-.LP
-Each text object has an invisible box associated with it.
-The compass points of a text object are determined by this box.
-The implicit motion associated with the object is also determined
-by this box.
-The dimensions of this box are taken from the width and height attributes;
-if the width attribute is not supplied then the width will be taken to be
-.BR textwid ;
-if the height attribute is not supplied then the height will be taken to be
-the number of text strings associated with the object
-times
-.BR textht .
-Initially
-.B textwid
-and
-.B textht
-have a value of 0.
-.LP
-In places where a quoted text string can be used,
-an expression of the form
-.IP
-.BI sprintf(\(ts format \(ts,\ arg ,\fR.\|.\|.\fB)
-.LP
-can also be used;
-this will produce the arguments formatted according to
-.IR format ,
-which should be a string as described in
-.BR printf (3)
-appropriate for the number of arguments supplied,
-using only the
-.BR e ,
-.BR f ,
-.B g
-or
-.B %
-format characters.
-.LP
-The thickness of the lines used to draw objects is controlled by the
-.B linethick
-variable.
-This gives the thickness of lines in points.
-A negative value means use the default thickness:
-in \*(tx output mode, this means use a thickness of 8 milliinches;
-in \*(tx output mode with the
-.B -c
-option, this means use the line thickness specified by
-.B .ps
-lines;
-in troff output mode, this means use a thickness proportional
-to the pointsize.
-A zero value means draw the thinnest possible line supported by
-the output device.
-Initially it has a value of -1.
-There is also a
-.BR thick [ ness ]
-attribute.
-For example,
-.RS
-.LP
-.B circle thickness 1.5
-.RE
-.LP
-would draw a circle using a line with a thickness of 1.5 points.
-The thickness of lines is not affected by the
-value of the
-.B scale
-variable, nor by the width or height given in the
-.B .PS
-line.
-.LP
-Boxes (including boxes with rounded corners),
-circles and ellipses can be filled by giving then an attribute of
-.BR fill [ ed ].
-This takes an optional argument of an expression with a value between
-0 and 1; 0 will fill it with white, 1 with black, values in between
-with a proportionally gray shade.
-A value greater than 1 can also be used:
-this means fill with the
-shade of gray that is currently being used for text and lines.
-Normally this will be black, but output devices may provide
-a mechanism for changing this.
-Without an argument, then the value of the variable
-.B fillval
-will be used.
-Initially this has a value of 0.5.
-The invisible attribute does not affect the filling of objects.
-Any text associated with a filled object will be added after the
-object has been filled, so that the text will not be obscured
-by the filling.
-.LP
-Arrow heads will be drawn as solid triangles if the variable
-.B arrowhead
-is non-zero and either \*(tx mode is enabled or
-the
-.B \-x
-option has been given.
-Initially
-.B arrowhead
-has a value of 1.
-.LP
-The troff output of pic is device-independent.
-The
-.B \-T
-option is therefore redundant.
-All numbers are taken to be in inches; numbers are never interpreted
-to be in troff machine units.
-.LP
-Objects can have an
-.B aligned
-attribute.
-This will only work when the postprocessor is
-.BR grops .
-Any text associated with an object having the
-.B aligned
-attribute will be rotated about the center of the object
-so that it is aligned in the direction from the start point
-to the end point of the object.
-Note that this attribute will have no effect for objects whose start and
-end points are coincident.
-.LP
-In places where
-.IB n th
-is allowed
-.BI ` expr 'th
-is also allowed.
-Note that
-.B 'th
-is a single token: no space is allowed between the
-.B '
-and the
-.BR th .
-For example,
-.IP
-.B
-.nf
-for i = 1 to 4 do {
- line from `i'th box.nw to `i+1'th box.se
-}
-.fi
-.SH FILES
-.Tp \w'\fB@MACRODIR@/tmac.pic'u+3n
-.B
-@MACRODIR@/tmac.pic
-Example definitions of the
-.B PS
-and
-.B PE
-macros.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR groff_out (@MAN5EXT@),
-.BR tex (1)
-.br
-Tpic: Pic for \*(tx
-.br
-Brian W. Kernighan,
-PIC \(em A Graphics Language for Typesetting (User Manual).
-AT&T Bell Laboratories, Computing Science Technical Report No.\ 116
-<URL:http://cm.bell-labs.com/cm/cs/cstr/116.ps.gz>
-(revised May, 1991).
-.SH BUGS
-.LP
-Input characters that are illegal for
-.B groff
-(ie those with
-.SM ASCII
-code 0 or between 013 and 037 octal or between 0200 and 0237 octal)
-are rejected even in \*(tx mode.
-.LP
-The interpretation of
-.B fillval
-is incompatible with the pic in 10th edition Unix,
-which interprets 0 as black and 1 as white.
PROG=psbb
-MAN1=psbb.n
+MAN1=psbb.1
OBJS=psbb.o
CSRCS=psbb.c
XLIBS=
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.TH PSBB @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+psbb \- extract bounding box from PostScript document
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B psbb
+.I file
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+psbb reads
+.I file
+which should be a PostScript document conforming to
+the Document Structuring conventions
+and looks for a
+.B %%BoundingBox
+comment.
+If it finds one,
+it prints a line
+.IP
+.I
+llx lly urx ury
+.LP
+on the standard output and exits with zero status.
+If it doesn't find such a line or if the line is invalid
+it prints a message and exits with non-zero status.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR grops (@MAN1EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.TH PSBB @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-psbb \- extract bounding box from PostScript document
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B psbb
-.I file
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-psbb reads
-.I file
-which should be a PostScript document conforming to
-the Document Structuring conventions
-and looks for a
-.B %%BoundingBox
-comment.
-If it finds one,
-it prints a line
-.IP
-.I
-llx lly urx ury
-.LP
-on the standard output and exits with zero status.
-If it doesn't find such a line or if the line is invalid
-it prints a message and exits with non-zero status.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR grops (@MAN1EXT@)
PROG=refer
-MAN1=refer.n
+MAN1=refer.1
XLIBS=$(LIBBIB) $(LIBGROFF)
MLIB=$(LIBM)
OBJS=command.o label.o ref.o refer.o token.o
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.de TQ
+.br
+.ns
+.TP \\$1
+..
+.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
+.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
+.de Tp
+.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
+.el .TP "\\$1"
+..
+.\" The BSD man macros can't handle " in arguments to font change macros,
+.\" so use \(ts instead of ".
+.tr \(ts"
+.TH @G@REFER @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+@g@refer \- preprocess bibliographic references for groff
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nr a \n(.j
+.ad l
+.nr i \n(.i
+.in +\w'\fB@g@refer 'u
+.ti \niu
+.B @g@refer
+.de OP
+.ie \\n(.$-1 .RI "[\ \fB\\$1\fP" "\\$2" "\ ]"
+.el .RB "[\ " "\\$1" "\ ]"
+..
+.OP \-benvCPRS
+.OP \-a n
+.OP \-c fields
+.OP \-f n
+.OP \-i fields
+.OP \-k field
+.OP \-l m,n
+.OP \-p filename
+.OP \-s fields
+.OP \-t n
+.OP \-B field.macro
+.RI [\ filename \|.\|.\|.\ ]
+.br
+.ad \na
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This file documents the GNU version of
+.BR refer ,
+which is part of the groff document formatting system.
+.B refer
+copies the contents of
+.IR filename \|.\|.\|.
+to the standard output,
+except that lines between
+.B .[
+and
+.B .]
+are interpreted as citations,
+and lines between
+.B .R1
+and
+.B .R2
+are interpreted as commands about how citations are to be processed.
+.LP
+Each citation specifies a reference.
+The citation can specify a reference that is contained in
+a bibliographic database by giving a set of keywords
+that only that reference contains.
+Alternatively it can specify a reference by supplying a database
+record in the citation.
+A combination of these alternatives is also possible.
+.LP
+For each citation,
+.B refer
+can produce a mark in the text.
+This mark consists of some label which can be separated from
+the text and from other labels in various ways.
+For each reference it also outputs
+.B groff
+commands that can be used by a macro package to produce a formatted
+reference for each citation.
+The output of
+.B refer
+must therefore be processed using a suitable macro package.
+The
+.B \-ms
+and
+.B \-me
+macros are both suitable.
+The commands to format a citation's reference can be output immediately after
+the citation,
+or the references may be accumulated,
+and the commands output at some later point.
+If the references are accumulated, then multiple citations of the same
+reference will produce a single formatted reference.
+.LP
+The interpretation of lines between
+.B .R1
+and
+.B .R2
+as commands is a new feature of GNU refer.
+Documents making use of this feature can still be processed by
+Unix refer just by adding the lines
+.RS
+.LP
+.nf
+.ft B
+\&.de R1
+\&.ig R2
+\&..
+.ft
+.fi
+.RE
+to the beginning of the document.
+This will cause
+.B troff
+to ignore everything between
+.B .R1
+and
+.BR .R2 .
+The effect of some commands can also be achieved by options.
+These options are supported mainly for compatibility with Unix refer.
+It is usually more convenient to use commands.
+.LP
+.B refer
+generates
+.B .lf
+lines so that filenames and line numbers in messages produced
+by commands that read
+.B refer
+output will be correct;
+it also interprets lines beginning with
+.B .lf
+so that filenames and line numbers in the messages and
+.B .lf
+lines that it produces will be accurate even if the input has been
+preprocessed by a command such as
+.BR @g@soelim (@MAN1EXT@).
+.SH OPTIONS
+.LP
+Most options are equivalent to commands
+(for a description of these commands see the
+.B Commands
+subsection):
+.TP
+.B \-b
+.B
+no-label-in-text; no-label-in-reference
+.TP
+.B \-e
+.B accumulate
+.TP
+.B \-n
+.B no-default-database
+.TP
+.B \-C
+.B compatible
+.TP
+.B \-P
+.B move-punctuation
+.TP
+.B \-S
+.B
+label "(A.n|Q) ', ' (D.y|D)"; bracket-label " (" ) "; "
+.TP
+.BI \-a n
+.B reverse
+.BI A n
+.TP
+.BI \-c fields
+.B capitalize
+.I fields
+.TP
+.BI \-f n
+.B label
+.BI % n
+.TP
+.BI \-i fields
+.B search-ignore
+.I fields
+.TP
+.B \-k
+.B label
+.B L\(ti%a
+.TP
+.BI \-k field
+.B label
+.IB field \(ti%a
+.TP
+.B \-l
+.B label
+.BI A.nD.y%a
+.TP
+.BI \-l m
+.B label
+.BI A.n+ m D.y%a
+.TP
+.BI \-l, n
+.B label
+.BI A.nD.y\- n %a
+.TP
+.BI \-l m , n
+.B label
+.BI A.n+ m D.y\- n %a
+.TP
+.BI \-p filename
+.B database
+.I filename
+.TP
+.BI \-s spec
+.B sort
+.I spec
+.TP
+.BI \-t n
+.B search-truncate
+.I n
+.LP
+These options are equivalent to the following commands with the
+addition that the filenames specified on the command line are
+processed as if they were arguments to the
+.B bibliography
+command instead of in the normal way:
+.TP
+.B \-B
+.B
+annotate X AP; no-label-in-reference
+.TP
+.BI \-B field . macro
+.B annotate
+.I field
+.IB macro ;
+.B no-label-in-reference
+.LP
+The following options have no equivalent commands:
+.TP
+.B \-v
+Print the version number.
+.TP
+.B \-R
+Don't recognize lines beginning with
+.BR .R1 / .R2 .
+.SH USAGE
+.SS Bibliographic databases
+The bibliographic database is a text file consisting of records
+separated by one or more blank lines.
+Within each record fields start with a
+.B %
+at the beginning of a line.
+Each field has a one character name that immediately follows the
+.BR % .
+It is best to use only upper and lower case letters for the names
+of fields.
+The name of the field should be followed by exactly one space,
+and then by the contents of the field.
+Empty fields are ignored.
+The conventional meaning of each field is as follows:
+.TP
+.B A
+The name of an author.
+If the name contains a title such as
+.B Jr.
+at the end,
+it should be separated from the last name by a comma.
+There can be multiple occurrences of the
+.B A
+field.
+The order is significant.
+It is a good idea always to supply an
+.B A
+field or a
+.B Q
+field.
+.TP
+.B B
+For an article that is part of a book, the title of the book
+.TP
+.B C
+The place (city) of publication.
+.TP
+.B D
+The date of publication.
+The year should be specified in full.
+If the month is specified, the name rather than the number of the month
+should be used, but only the first three letters are required.
+It is a good idea always to supply a
+.B D
+field;
+if the date is unknown, a value such as
+.B in press
+or
+.B unknown
+can be used.
+.TP
+.B E
+For an article that is part of a book, the name of an editor of the book.
+Where the work has editors and no authors,
+the names of the editors should be given as
+.B A
+fields and
+.B ,\ (ed)
+or
+.B ,\ (eds)
+should be appended to the last author.
+.TP
+.B G
+US Government ordering number.
+.TP
+.B I
+The publisher (issuer).
+.TP
+.B J
+For an article in a journal, the name of the journal.
+.TP
+.B K
+Keywords to be used for searching.
+.TP
+.B L
+Label.
+.TP
+.B N
+Journal issue number.
+.TP
+.B O
+Other information.
+This is usually printed at the end of the reference.
+.TP
+.B P
+Page number.
+A range of pages can be specified as
+.IB m \- n\fR.
+.TP
+.B Q
+The name of the author, if the author is not a person.
+This will only be used if there are no
+.B A
+fields.
+There can only be one
+.B Q
+field.
+.TP
+.B R
+Technical report number.
+.TP
+.B S
+Series name.
+.TP
+.B T
+Title.
+For an article in a book or journal,
+this should be the title of the article.
+.TP
+.B V
+Volume number of the journal or book.
+.TP
+.B X
+Annotation.
+.LP
+For all fields except
+.B A
+and
+.BR E ,
+if there is more than one occurrence of a particular field in a record,
+only the last such field will be used.
+.LP
+If accent strings are used, they should follow the character to be accented.
+This means that the
+.B AM
+macro must be used with the
+.B \-ms
+macros.
+Accent strings should not be quoted:
+use one
+.B \e
+rather than two.
+.SS Citations
+The format of a citation is
+.RS
+.BI .[ opening-text
+.br
+.I
+flags keywords
+.br
+.I fields
+.br
+.BI .] closing-text
+.RE
+.LP
+The
+.IR opening-text ,
+.IR closing-text
+and
+.I flags
+components are optional.
+Only one of the
+.I keywords
+and
+.I fields
+components need be specified.
+.LP
+The
+.I keywords
+component says to search the bibliographic databases for a reference
+that contains all the words in
+.IR keywords .
+It is an error if more than one reference if found.
+.LP
+The
+.I fields
+components specifies additional fields to replace or supplement
+those specified in the reference.
+When references are being accumulated and the
+.I keywords
+component is non-empty,
+then additional fields should be specified only on the first
+occasion that a particular reference is cited,
+and will apply to all citations of that reference.
+.LP
+The
+.I opening-text
+and
+.I closing-text
+component specifies strings to be used to bracket the label instead
+of the strings specified in the
+.B bracket-label
+command.
+If either of these components is non-empty,
+the strings specified in the
+.B bracket-label
+command will not be used;
+this behaviour can be altered using the
+.B [
+and
+.B ]
+flags.
+Note that leading and trailing spaces are significant for these components.
+.LP
+The
+.I flags
+component is a list of
+non-alphanumeric characters each of which modifies the treatment
+of this particular citation.
+Unix refer will treat these flags as part of the keywords and
+so will ignore them since they are non-alphanumeric.
+The following flags are currently recognized:
+.TP
+.B #
+This says to use the label specified by the
+.B short-label
+command,
+instead of that specified by the
+.B label
+command.
+If no short label has been specified, the normal label will be used.
+Typically the short label is used with author-date labels
+and consists of only the date and possibly a disambiguating letter;
+the
+.B #
+is supposed to be suggestive of a numeric type of label.
+.TP
+.B [
+Precede
+.I opening-text
+with the first string specified in the
+.B bracket-label
+command.
+.TP
+.B ]
+Follow
+.I closing-text
+with the second string specified in the
+.B bracket-label
+command.
+.LP
+One advantages of using the
+.B [
+and
+.B ]
+flags rather than including the brackets in
+.I opening-text
+and
+.I closing-text
+is that
+you can change the style of bracket used in the document just by changing the
+.B bracket-label
+command.
+Another advantage is that sorting and merging of citations
+will not necessarily be inhibited if the flags are used.
+.LP
+If a label is to be inserted into the text,
+it will be attached to the line preceding the
+.B .[
+line.
+If there is no such line, then an extra line will be inserted before the
+.B .[
+line and a warning will be given.
+.LP
+There is no special notation for making a citation to multiple references.
+Just use a sequence of citations, one for each reference.
+Don't put anything between the citations.
+The labels for all the citations will be attached to the line preceding
+the first citation.
+The labels may also be sorted or merged.
+See the description of the
+.B <>
+label expression, and of the
+.B sort-adjacent-labels
+and
+.B abbreviate-label-ranges
+command.
+A label will not be merged if its citation has a non-empty
+.I opening-text
+or
+.IR closing-text .
+However, the labels for a citation using the
+.B ]
+flag and without any
+.I closing-text
+immediately followed by a citation using the
+.B [
+flag and without any
+.I opening-text
+may be sorted and merged
+even though the first citation's
+.I opening-text
+or the second citation's
+.I closing-text
+is non-empty.
+(If you wish to prevent this just make the first citation's
+.I closing-text
+.BR \e& .)
+.SS Commands
+Commands are contained between lines starting with
+.B .R1
+and
+.BR .R2 .
+Recognition of these lines can be prevented by the
+.B \-R
+option.
+When a
+.B .R1
+line is recognized any accumulated references are flushed out.
+Neither
+.B .R1
+nor
+.B .R2
+lines,
+nor anything between them
+is output.
+.LP
+Commands are separated by newlines or
+.BR ; s.
+.B #
+introduces a comment that extends to the end of the line
+(but does not conceal the newline).
+Each command is broken up into words.
+Words are separated by spaces or tabs.
+A word that begins with
+.B \(ts
+extends to the next
+.B \(ts
+that is not followed by another
+.BR \(ts .
+If there is no such
+.B \(ts
+the word extends to the end of the line.
+Pairs of
+.B \(ts
+in a word beginning with
+.B \(ts
+collapse to a single
+.BR \(ts .
+Neither
+.B #
+nor
+.B ;
+are recognized inside
+.BR \(ts s.
+A line can be continued by ending it with
+.BR \e ;
+this works everywhere except after a
+.BR # .
+.LP
+.ds n \fR*
+Each command
+.I name
+that is marked with \*n has an associated negative command
+.BI no- name
+that undoes the effect of
+.IR name .
+For example, the
+.B no-sort
+command specifies that references should not be sorted.
+The negative commands take no arguments.
+.LP
+In the following description each argument must be a single word;
+.I field
+is used for a single upper or lower case letter naming a field;
+.I fields
+is used for a sequence of such letters;
+.I m
+and
+.I n
+are used for a non-negative numbers;
+.I string
+is used for an arbitrary string;
+.I filename
+is used for the name of a file.
+.Tp \w'\fBabbreviate-label-ranges'u+2n
+.BI abbreviate\*n\ fields\ string1\ string2\ string3\ string4
+Abbreviate the first names of
+.IR fields .
+An initial letter will be separated from another initial letter by
+.IR string1 ,
+from the last name by
+.IR string2 ,
+and from anything else
+(such as a
+.B von
+or
+.BR de )
+by
+.IR string3 .
+These default to a period followed by a space.
+In a hyphenated first name,
+the initial of the first part of the name will be separated from the hyphen by
+.IR string4 ;
+this defaults to a period.
+No attempt is made to handle any ambiguities that might
+result from abbreviation.
+Names are abbreviated before sorting and before
+label construction.
+.TP
+.BI abbreviate-label-ranges\*n\ string
+Three or more adjacent labels that refer to consecutive references
+will be abbreviated to a label consisting
+of the first label, followed by
+.I string
+followed by the last label.
+This is mainly useful with numeric labels.
+If
+.I string
+is omitted it defaults to
+.BR \- .
+.TP
+.B accumulate\*n
+Accumulate references instead of writing out each reference
+as it is encountered.
+Accumulated references will be written out whenever a reference
+of the form
+.RS
+.IP
+.B .[
+.br
+.B $LIST$
+.br
+.B .]
+.LP
+is encountered,
+after all input files hve been processed,
+and whenever
+.B .R1
+line is recognized.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BI annotate\*n\ field\ string
+.I field
+is an annotation;
+print it at the end of the reference as a paragraph preceded by the line
+.RS
+.IP
+.BI . string
+.LP
+If
+.I macro
+is omitted it will default to
+.BR AP ;
+if
+.I field
+is also omitted it will default to
+.BR X .
+Only one field can be an annotation.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BI articles\ string \fR\|.\|.\|.
+.IR string \|.\|.\|.
+are definite or indefinite articles, and should be ignored at the beginning of
+.B T
+fields when sorting.
+Initially,
+.BR the ,
+.B a
+and
+.B an
+are recognized as articles.
+.TP
+.BI bibliography\ filename \fR\|.\|.\|.
+Write out all the references contained in the bibliographic databases
+.IR filename \|.\|.\|.
+.TP
+.BI bracket-label\ string1\ string2\ string3
+In the text, bracket each label
+with
+.I string1
+and
+.IR string2 .
+An occurrence of
+.I string2
+immediately followed by
+.I string1
+will be turned into
+.IR string3 .
+The default behaviour is
+.RS
+.IP
+.B
+bracket-label \e*([. \e*(.] ", "
+.RE
+.TP
+.BI capitalize\ fields
+Convert
+.I fields
+to caps and small caps.
+.TP
+.B compatible\*n
+Recognize
+.B .R1
+and
+.B .R2
+even when followed by a character other than space or newline.
+.TP
+.BI database\ filename \fR\|.\|.\|.
+Search the bibliographic databases
+.IR filename \|.\|.\|.
+For each
+.I filename
+if an index
+.IB filename @INDEX_SUFFIX@
+created by
+.BR @g@indxbib (@MAN1EXT@)
+exists, then it will be searched instead;
+each index can cover multiple databases.
+.TP
+.BI date-as-label\*n\ string
+.I string
+is a label expression that specifies a string with which to replace the
+.B D
+field after constructing the label.
+See the
+.B "Label expressions"
+subsection for a description of label expressions.
+This command is useful if you do not want explicit labels in the
+reference list, but instead want to handle any necessary
+disambiguation by qualifying the date in some way.
+The label used in the text would typically be some combination of the
+author and date.
+In most cases you should also use the
+.B no-label-in-reference
+command.
+For example,
+.RS
+.IP
+.B
+date-as-label D.+yD.y%a*D.-y
+.LP
+would attach a disambiguating letter to the year part of the
+.B D
+field in the reference.
+.RE
+.TP
+.B default-database\*n
+The default database should be searched.
+This is the default behaviour, so the negative version of
+this command is more useful.
+refer determines whether the default database should be searched
+on the first occasion that it needs to do a search.
+Thus a
+.B no-default-database
+command must be given before then,
+in order to be effective.
+.TP
+.BI discard\*n\ fields
+When the reference is read,
+.I fields
+should be discarded;
+no string definitions for
+.I fields
+will be output.
+Initially,
+.I fields
+are
+.BR XYZ .
+.TP
+.BI et-al\*n\ string\ m\ n
+Control use of
+.B
+et al
+in the evaluation of
+.B @
+expressions in label expressions.
+If the number of authors needed to make the author sequence
+unambiguous is
+.I u
+and the total number of authors is
+.I t
+then the last
+.IR t \|\-\| u
+authors will be replaced by
+.I string
+provided that
+.IR t \|\-\| u
+is not less than
+.I m
+and
+.I t
+is not less than
+.IR n .
+The default behaviour is
+.RS
+.IP
+.B
+et-al " et al" 2 3
+.RE
+.TP
+.BI include\ filename
+Include
+.I filename
+and interpret the contents as commands.
+.TP
+.BI join-authors\ string1\ string2\ string3
+This says how authors should be joined together.
+When there are exactly two authors, they will be joined with
+.IR string1 .
+When there are more than two authors, all but the last two will
+be joined with
+.IR string2 ,
+and the last two authors will be joined with
+.IR string3 .
+If
+.I string3
+is omitted,
+it will default to
+.IR string1 ;
+if
+.I string2
+is also omitted it will also default to
+.IR string1 .
+For example,
+.RS
+.IP
+.B
+join-authors " and " ", " ", and "
+.LP
+will restore the default method for joining authors.
+.RE
+.TP
+.B label-in-reference\*n
+When outputting the reference,
+define the string
+.B [F
+to be the reference's label.
+This is the default behaviour; so the negative version
+of this command is more useful.
+.TP
+.B label-in-text\*n
+For each reference output a label in the text.
+The label will be separated from the surrounding text as described in the
+.B bracket-label
+command.
+This is the default behaviour; so the negative version
+of this command is more useful.
+.TP
+.BI label\ string
+.I string
+is a label expression describing how to label each reference.
+.TP
+.BI separate-label-second-parts\ string
+When merging two-part labels, separate the second part of the second
+label from the first label with
+.IR string .
+See the description of the
+.B <>
+label expression.
+.TP
+.B move-punctuation\*n
+In the text, move any punctuation at the end of line past the label.
+It is usually a good idea to give this command unless you are using
+superscripted numbers as labels.
+.TP
+.BI reverse\*n\ string
+Reverse the fields whose names
+are in
+.IR string .
+Each field name can be followed by a number which says
+how many such fields should be reversed.
+If no number is given for a field, all such fields will be reversed.
+.TP
+.BI search-ignore\*n\ fields
+While searching for keys in databases for which no index exists,
+ignore the contents of
+.IR fields .
+Initially, fields
+.B XYZ
+are ignored.
+.TP
+.BI search-truncate\*n\ n
+Only require the first
+.I n
+characters of keys to be given.
+In effect when searching for a given key
+words in the database are truncated to the maximum of
+.I n
+and the length of the key.
+Initially
+.I n
+is 6.
+.TP
+.BI short-label\*n\ string
+.I string
+is a label expression that specifies an alternative (usually shorter)
+style of label.
+This is used when the
+.B #
+flag is given in the citation.
+When using author-date style labels, the identity of the author
+or authors is sometimes clear from the context, and so it
+may be desirable to omit the author or authors from the label.
+The
+.B short-label
+command will typically be used to specify a label containing just
+a date and possibly a disambiguating letter.
+.TP
+.BI sort\*n\ string
+Sort references according to
+.BR string .
+References will automatically be accumulated.
+.I string
+should be a list of field names, each followed by a number,
+indicating how many fields with the name should be used for sorting.
+.B +
+can be used to indicate that all the fields with the name should be used.
+Also
+.B .
+can be used to indicate the references should be sorted using the
+(tentative) label.
+(The
+.B
+Label expressions
+subsection describes the concept of a tentative label.)
+.TP
+.B sort-adjacent-labels\*n
+Sort labels that are adjacent in the text according to their
+position in the reference list.
+This command should usually be given if the
+.B abbreviate-label-ranges
+command has been given,
+or if the label expression contains a
+.B <>
+expression.
+This will have no effect unless references are being accumulated.
+.SS Label expressions
+.LP
+Label expressions can be evaluated both normally and tentatively.
+The result of normal evaluation is used for output.
+The result of tentative evaluation, called the
+.I
+tentative label,
+is used to gather the information
+that normal evaluation needs to disambiguate the label.
+Label expressions specified by the
+.B date-as-label
+and
+.B short-label
+commands are not evaluated tentatively.
+Normal and tentative evaluation are the same for all types
+of expression other than
+.BR @ ,
+.BR * ,
+and
+.B %
+expressions.
+The description below applies to normal evaluation,
+except where otherwise specified.
+.TP
+.I field
+.TQ
+.I field\ n
+The
+.IR n -th
+part of
+.IR field .
+If
+.I n
+is omitted, it defaults to 1.
+.TP
+.BI ' string '
+The characters in
+.I string
+literally.
+.TP
+.B @
+All the authors joined as specified by the
+.B join-authors
+command.
+The whole of each author's name will be used.
+However, if the references are sorted by author
+(that is the sort specification starts with
+.BR A+ ),
+then authors' last names will be used instead, provided that this does
+not introduce ambiguity,
+and also an initial subsequence of the authors may be used
+instead of all the authors, again provided that this does not
+introduce ambiguity.
+The use of only the last name for the
+.IR i -th
+author of some reference
+is considered to be ambiguous if
+there is some other reference,
+such that the first
+.IR i \|-\|1
+authors of the references are the same,
+the
+.IR i -th
+authors are not the same,
+but the
+.IR i -th
+authors' last names are the same.
+A proper initial subsequence of the sequence
+of authors for some reference is considered to be ambiguous if there is
+a reference with some other sequence of authors which also has
+that subsequence as a proper initial subsequence.
+When an initial subsequence of authors is used, the remaining
+authors are replaced by the string specified by the
+.B et-al
+command;
+this command may also specify additional requirements that must be
+met before an initial subsequence can be used.
+.B @
+tentatively evaluates to a canonical representation of the authors,
+such that authors that compare equally for sorting purpose
+will have the same representation.
+.TP
+.BI % n
+.TQ
+.B %a
+.TQ
+.B %A
+.TQ
+.B %i
+.TQ
+.B %I
+The serial number of the reference formatted according to the character
+following the
+.BR % .
+The serial number of a reference is 1 plus the number of earlier references
+with same tentative label as this reference.
+These expressions tentatively evaluate to an empty string.
+.TP
+.IB expr *
+If there is another reference with the same tentative label as
+this reference, then
+.IR expr ,
+otherwise an empty string.
+It tentatively evaluates to an empty string.
+.TP
+.IB expr + n
+.TQ
+.IB expr \- n
+The first
+.RB ( + )
+or last
+.RB ( \- )
+.I n
+upper or lower case letters or digits of
+.IR expr .
+Troff special characters (such as
+.BR \e('a )
+count as a single letter.
+Accent strings are retained but do not count towards the total.
+.TP
+.IB expr .l
+.I expr
+converted to lowercase.
+.TP
+.IB expr .u
+.I expr
+converted to uppercase.
+.TP
+.IB expr .c
+.I expr
+converted to caps and small caps.
+.TP
+.IB expr .r
+.I expr
+reversed so that the last name is first.
+.TP
+.IB expr .a
+.I expr
+with first names abbreviated.
+Note that fields specified in the
+.B abbreviate
+command are abbreviated before any labels are evaluated.
+Thus
+.B .a
+is useful only when you want a field to be abbreviated in a label
+but not in a reference.
+.TP
+.IB expr .y
+The year part of
+.IR expr .
+.TP
+.IB expr .+y
+The part of
+.I expr
+before the year, or the whole of
+.I expr
+if it does not contain a year.
+.TP
+.IB expr .\-y
+The part of
+.I expr
+after the year, or an empty string if
+.I expr
+does not contain a year.
+.TP
+.IB expr .n
+The last name part of
+.IR expr .
+.TP
+.IB expr1 \(ti expr2
+.I expr1
+except that if the last character of
+.I expr1
+is
+.B \-
+then it will be replaced by
+.IR expr2 .
+.TP
+.I expr1\ expr2
+The concatenation of
+.I expr1
+and
+.IR expr2 .
+.TP
+.IB expr1 | expr2
+If
+.I expr1
+is non-empty then
+.I expr1
+otherwise
+.IR expr2 .
+.TP
+.IB expr1 & expr2
+If
+.I expr1
+is non-empty
+then
+.I expr2
+otherwise an empty string.
+.TP
+.IB expr1 ? expr2 : expr3
+If
+.I expr1
+is non-empty
+then
+.I expr2
+otherwise
+.IR expr3 .
+.TP
+.BI < expr >
+The label is in two parts, which are separated by
+.IR expr .
+Two adjacent two-part labels which have the same first part will be
+merged by appending the second part of the second label onto the first
+label separated by the string specified in the
+.B separate-label-second-parts
+command (initially, a comma followed by a space); the resulting label
+will also be a two-part label with the same first part as before
+merging, and so additional labels can be merged into it.
+Note that it is permissible for the first part to be empty;
+this maybe desirable for expressions used in the
+.B short-label
+command.
+.TP
+.BI ( expr )
+The same as
+.IR expr .
+Used for grouping.
+.LP
+The above expressions are listed in order of precedence
+(highest first);
+.B &
+and
+.B |
+have the same precedence.
+.SS Macro interface
+Each reference starts with a call to the macro
+.BR ]- .
+The string
+.B [F
+will be defined to be the label for this reference,
+unless the
+.B no-label-in-reference
+command has been given.
+There then follows a series of string definitions,
+one for each field:
+string
+.BI [ X
+corresponds to field
+.IR X .
+The number register
+.B [P
+is set to 1 if the
+.B P
+field contains a range of pages.
+The
+.BR [T ,
+.B [A
+and
+.B [O
+number registers are set to 1 according as the
+.BR T ,
+.B A
+and
+.B O
+fields end with one of the characters
+.BR .?! .
+The
+.B [E
+number register will be set to 1 if the
+.B [E
+string contains more than one name.
+The reference is followed by a call to the
+.B ][
+macro.
+The first argument to this macro gives a number representing
+the type of the reference.
+If a reference contains a
+.B J
+field, it will be classified as type 1,
+otherwise if it contains a
+.B B
+field, it will type 3,
+otherwise if it contains a
+.B G
+or
+.B R
+field it will be type 4,
+otherwise if contains a
+.B I
+field it will be type 2,
+otherwise it will be type 0.
+The second argument is a symbolic name for the type:
+.BR other ,
+.BR journal-article ,
+.BR book ,
+.B article-in-book
+or
+.BR tech-report .
+Groups of references that have been accumulated
+or are produced by the
+.B bibliography
+command are preceded by a call to the
+.B ]<
+macro and followed by a call to the
+.B ]>
+macro.
+.SH FILES
+.Tp \w'\fB@DEFAULT_INDEX@'u+2n
+.B @DEFAULT_INDEX@
+Default database.
+.TP
+.IB file @INDEX_SUFFIX@
+Index files.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR @g@indxbib (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@lookbib (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR lkbib (@MAN1EXT@)
+.br
+.SH BUGS
+In label expressions,
+.B <>
+expressions are ignored inside
+.BI . char
+expressions.
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.de TQ
-.br
-.ns
-.TP \\$1
-..
-.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
-.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
-.de Tp
-.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
-.el .TP "\\$1"
-..
-.\" The BSD man macros can't handle " in arguments to font change macros,
-.\" so use \(ts instead of ".
-.tr \(ts"
-.TH @G@REFER @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-@g@refer \- preprocess bibliographic references for groff
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nr a \n(.j
-.ad l
-.nr i \n(.i
-.in +\w'\fB@g@refer 'u
-.ti \niu
-.B @g@refer
-.de OP
-.ie \\n(.$-1 .RI "[\ \fB\\$1\fP" "\\$2" "\ ]"
-.el .RB "[\ " "\\$1" "\ ]"
-..
-.OP \-benvCPRS
-.OP \-a n
-.OP \-c fields
-.OP \-f n
-.OP \-i fields
-.OP \-k field
-.OP \-l m,n
-.OP \-p filename
-.OP \-s fields
-.OP \-t n
-.OP \-B field.macro
-.RI [\ filename \|.\|.\|.\ ]
-.br
-.ad \na
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This file documents the GNU version of
-.BR refer ,
-which is part of the groff document formatting system.
-.B refer
-copies the contents of
-.IR filename \|.\|.\|.
-to the standard output,
-except that lines between
-.B .[
-and
-.B .]
-are interpreted as citations,
-and lines between
-.B .R1
-and
-.B .R2
-are interpreted as commands about how citations are to be processed.
-.LP
-Each citation specifies a reference.
-The citation can specify a reference that is contained in
-a bibliographic database by giving a set of keywords
-that only that reference contains.
-Alternatively it can specify a reference by supplying a database
-record in the citation.
-A combination of these alternatives is also possible.
-.LP
-For each citation,
-.B refer
-can produce a mark in the text.
-This mark consists of some label which can be separated from
-the text and from other labels in various ways.
-For each reference it also outputs
-.B groff
-commands that can be used by a macro package to produce a formatted
-reference for each citation.
-The output of
-.B refer
-must therefore be processed using a suitable macro package.
-The
-.B \-ms
-and
-.B \-me
-macros are both suitable.
-The commands to format a citation's reference can be output immediately after
-the citation,
-or the references may be accumulated,
-and the commands output at some later point.
-If the references are accumulated, then multiple citations of the same
-reference will produce a single formatted reference.
-.LP
-The interpretation of lines between
-.B .R1
-and
-.B .R2
-as commands is a new feature of GNU refer.
-Documents making use of this feature can still be processed by
-Unix refer just by adding the lines
-.RS
-.LP
-.nf
-.ft B
-\&.de R1
-\&.ig R2
-\&..
-.ft
-.fi
-.RE
-to the beginning of the document.
-This will cause
-.B troff
-to ignore everything between
-.B .R1
-and
-.BR .R2 .
-The effect of some commands can also be achieved by options.
-These options are supported mainly for compatibility with Unix refer.
-It is usually more convenient to use commands.
-.LP
-.B refer
-generates
-.B .lf
-lines so that filenames and line numbers in messages produced
-by commands that read
-.B refer
-output will be correct;
-it also interprets lines beginning with
-.B .lf
-so that filenames and line numbers in the messages and
-.B .lf
-lines that it produces will be accurate even if the input has been
-preprocessed by a command such as
-.BR @g@soelim (@MAN1EXT@).
-.SH OPTIONS
-.LP
-Most options are equivalent to commands
-(for a description of these commands see the
-.B Commands
-subsection):
-.TP
-.B \-b
-.B
-no-label-in-text; no-label-in-reference
-.TP
-.B \-e
-.B accumulate
-.TP
-.B \-n
-.B no-default-database
-.TP
-.B \-C
-.B compatible
-.TP
-.B \-P
-.B move-punctuation
-.TP
-.B \-S
-.B
-label "(A.n|Q) ', ' (D.y|D)"; bracket-label " (" ) "; "
-.TP
-.BI \-a n
-.B reverse
-.BI A n
-.TP
-.BI \-c fields
-.B capitalize
-.I fields
-.TP
-.BI \-f n
-.B label
-.BI % n
-.TP
-.BI \-i fields
-.B search-ignore
-.I fields
-.TP
-.B \-k
-.B label
-.B L\(ti%a
-.TP
-.BI \-k field
-.B label
-.IB field \(ti%a
-.TP
-.B \-l
-.B label
-.BI A.nD.y%a
-.TP
-.BI \-l m
-.B label
-.BI A.n+ m D.y%a
-.TP
-.BI \-l, n
-.B label
-.BI A.nD.y\- n %a
-.TP
-.BI \-l m , n
-.B label
-.BI A.n+ m D.y\- n %a
-.TP
-.BI \-p filename
-.B database
-.I filename
-.TP
-.BI \-s spec
-.B sort
-.I spec
-.TP
-.BI \-t n
-.B search-truncate
-.I n
-.LP
-These options are equivalent to the following commands with the
-addition that the filenames specified on the command line are
-processed as if they were arguments to the
-.B bibliography
-command instead of in the normal way:
-.TP
-.B \-B
-.B
-annotate X AP; no-label-in-reference
-.TP
-.BI \-B field . macro
-.B annotate
-.I field
-.IB macro ;
-.B no-label-in-reference
-.LP
-The following options have no equivalent commands:
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print the version number.
-.TP
-.B \-R
-Don't recognize lines beginning with
-.BR .R1 / .R2 .
-.SH USAGE
-.SS Bibliographic databases
-The bibliographic database is a text file consisting of records
-separated by one or more blank lines.
-Within each record fields start with a
-.B %
-at the beginning of a line.
-Each field has a one character name that immediately follows the
-.BR % .
-It is best to use only upper and lower case letters for the names
-of fields.
-The name of the field should be followed by exactly one space,
-and then by the contents of the field.
-Empty fields are ignored.
-The conventional meaning of each field is as follows:
-.TP
-.B A
-The name of an author.
-If the name contains a title such as
-.B Jr.
-at the end,
-it should be separated from the last name by a comma.
-There can be multiple occurrences of the
-.B A
-field.
-The order is significant.
-It is a good idea always to supply an
-.B A
-field or a
-.B Q
-field.
-.TP
-.B B
-For an article that is part of a book, the title of the book
-.TP
-.B C
-The place (city) of publication.
-.TP
-.B D
-The date of publication.
-The year should be specified in full.
-If the month is specified, the name rather than the number of the month
-should be used, but only the first three letters are required.
-It is a good idea always to supply a
-.B D
-field;
-if the date is unknown, a value such as
-.B in press
-or
-.B unknown
-can be used.
-.TP
-.B E
-For an article that is part of a book, the name of an editor of the book.
-Where the work has editors and no authors,
-the names of the editors should be given as
-.B A
-fields and
-.B ,\ (ed)
-or
-.B ,\ (eds)
-should be appended to the last author.
-.TP
-.B G
-US Government ordering number.
-.TP
-.B I
-The publisher (issuer).
-.TP
-.B J
-For an article in a journal, the name of the journal.
-.TP
-.B K
-Keywords to be used for searching.
-.TP
-.B L
-Label.
-.TP
-.B N
-Journal issue number.
-.TP
-.B O
-Other information.
-This is usually printed at the end of the reference.
-.TP
-.B P
-Page number.
-A range of pages can be specified as
-.IB m \- n\fR.
-.TP
-.B Q
-The name of the author, if the author is not a person.
-This will only be used if there are no
-.B A
-fields.
-There can only be one
-.B Q
-field.
-.TP
-.B R
-Technical report number.
-.TP
-.B S
-Series name.
-.TP
-.B T
-Title.
-For an article in a book or journal,
-this should be the title of the article.
-.TP
-.B V
-Volume number of the journal or book.
-.TP
-.B X
-Annotation.
-.LP
-For all fields except
-.B A
-and
-.BR E ,
-if there is more than one occurrence of a particular field in a record,
-only the last such field will be used.
-.LP
-If accent strings are used, they should follow the character to be accented.
-This means that the
-.B AM
-macro must be used with the
-.B \-ms
-macros.
-Accent strings should not be quoted:
-use one
-.B \e
-rather than two.
-.SS Citations
-The format of a citation is
-.RS
-.BI .[ opening-text
-.br
-.I
-flags keywords
-.br
-.I fields
-.br
-.BI .] closing-text
-.RE
-.LP
-The
-.IR opening-text ,
-.IR closing-text
-and
-.I flags
-components are optional.
-Only one of the
-.I keywords
-and
-.I fields
-components need be specified.
-.LP
-The
-.I keywords
-component says to search the bibliographic databases for a reference
-that contains all the words in
-.IR keywords .
-It is an error if more than one reference if found.
-.LP
-The
-.I fields
-components specifies additional fields to replace or supplement
-those specified in the reference.
-When references are being accumulated and the
-.I keywords
-component is non-empty,
-then additional fields should be specified only on the first
-occasion that a particular reference is cited,
-and will apply to all citations of that reference.
-.LP
-The
-.I opening-text
-and
-.I closing-text
-component specifies strings to be used to bracket the label instead
-of the strings specified in the
-.B bracket-label
-command.
-If either of these components is non-empty,
-the strings specified in the
-.B bracket-label
-command will not be used;
-this behaviour can be altered using the
-.B [
-and
-.B ]
-flags.
-Note that leading and trailing spaces are significant for these components.
-.LP
-The
-.I flags
-component is a list of
-non-alphanumeric characters each of which modifies the treatment
-of this particular citation.
-Unix refer will treat these flags as part of the keywords and
-so will ignore them since they are non-alphanumeric.
-The following flags are currently recognized:
-.TP
-.B #
-This says to use the label specified by the
-.B short-label
-command,
-instead of that specified by the
-.B label
-command.
-If no short label has been specified, the normal label will be used.
-Typically the short label is used with author-date labels
-and consists of only the date and possibly a disambiguating letter;
-the
-.B #
-is supposed to be suggestive of a numeric type of label.
-.TP
-.B [
-Precede
-.I opening-text
-with the first string specified in the
-.B bracket-label
-command.
-.TP
-.B ]
-Follow
-.I closing-text
-with the second string specified in the
-.B bracket-label
-command.
-.LP
-One advantages of using the
-.B [
-and
-.B ]
-flags rather than including the brackets in
-.I opening-text
-and
-.I closing-text
-is that
-you can change the style of bracket used in the document just by changing the
-.B bracket-label
-command.
-Another advantage is that sorting and merging of citations
-will not necessarily be inhibited if the flags are used.
-.LP
-If a label is to be inserted into the text,
-it will be attached to the line preceding the
-.B .[
-line.
-If there is no such line, then an extra line will be inserted before the
-.B .[
-line and a warning will be given.
-.LP
-There is no special notation for making a citation to multiple references.
-Just use a sequence of citations, one for each reference.
-Don't put anything between the citations.
-The labels for all the citations will be attached to the line preceding
-the first citation.
-The labels may also be sorted or merged.
-See the description of the
-.B <>
-label expression, and of the
-.B sort-adjacent-labels
-and
-.B abbreviate-label-ranges
-command.
-A label will not be merged if its citation has a non-empty
-.I opening-text
-or
-.IR closing-text .
-However, the labels for a citation using the
-.B ]
-flag and without any
-.I closing-text
-immediately followed by a citation using the
-.B [
-flag and without any
-.I opening-text
-may be sorted and merged
-even though the first citation's
-.I opening-text
-or the second citation's
-.I closing-text
-is non-empty.
-(If you wish to prevent this just make the first citation's
-.I closing-text
-.BR \e& .)
-.SS Commands
-Commands are contained between lines starting with
-.B .R1
-and
-.BR .R2 .
-Recognition of these lines can be prevented by the
-.B \-R
-option.
-When a
-.B .R1
-line is recognized any accumulated references are flushed out.
-Neither
-.B .R1
-nor
-.B .R2
-lines,
-nor anything between them
-is output.
-.LP
-Commands are separated by newlines or
-.BR ; s.
-.B #
-introduces a comment that extends to the end of the line
-(but does not conceal the newline).
-Each command is broken up into words.
-Words are separated by spaces or tabs.
-A word that begins with
-.B \(ts
-extends to the next
-.B \(ts
-that is not followed by another
-.BR \(ts .
-If there is no such
-.B \(ts
-the word extends to the end of the line.
-Pairs of
-.B \(ts
-in a word beginning with
-.B \(ts
-collapse to a single
-.BR \(ts .
-Neither
-.B #
-nor
-.B ;
-are recognized inside
-.BR \(ts s.
-A line can be continued by ending it with
-.BR \e ;
-this works everywhere except after a
-.BR # .
-.LP
-.ds n \fR*
-Each command
-.I name
-that is marked with \*n has an associated negative command
-.BI no- name
-that undoes the effect of
-.IR name .
-For example, the
-.B no-sort
-command specifies that references should not be sorted.
-The negative commands take no arguments.
-.LP
-In the following description each argument must be a single word;
-.I field
-is used for a single upper or lower case letter naming a field;
-.I fields
-is used for a sequence of such letters;
-.I m
-and
-.I n
-are used for a non-negative numbers;
-.I string
-is used for an arbitrary string;
-.I filename
-is used for the name of a file.
-.Tp \w'\fBabbreviate-label-ranges'u+2n
-.BI abbreviate\*n\ fields\ string1\ string2\ string3\ string4
-Abbreviate the first names of
-.IR fields .
-An initial letter will be separated from another initial letter by
-.IR string1 ,
-from the last name by
-.IR string2 ,
-and from anything else
-(such as a
-.B von
-or
-.BR de )
-by
-.IR string3 .
-These default to a period followed by a space.
-In a hyphenated first name,
-the initial of the first part of the name will be separated from the hyphen by
-.IR string4 ;
-this defaults to a period.
-No attempt is made to handle any ambiguities that might
-result from abbreviation.
-Names are abbreviated before sorting and before
-label construction.
-.TP
-.BI abbreviate-label-ranges\*n\ string
-Three or more adjacent labels that refer to consecutive references
-will be abbreviated to a label consisting
-of the first label, followed by
-.I string
-followed by the last label.
-This is mainly useful with numeric labels.
-If
-.I string
-is omitted it defaults to
-.BR \- .
-.TP
-.B accumulate\*n
-Accumulate references instead of writing out each reference
-as it is encountered.
-Accumulated references will be written out whenever a reference
-of the form
-.RS
-.IP
-.B .[
-.br
-.B $LIST$
-.br
-.B .]
-.LP
-is encountered,
-after all input files hve been processed,
-and whenever
-.B .R1
-line is recognized.
-.RE
-.TP
-.BI annotate\*n\ field\ string
-.I field
-is an annotation;
-print it at the end of the reference as a paragraph preceded by the line
-.RS
-.IP
-.BI . string
-.LP
-If
-.I macro
-is omitted it will default to
-.BR AP ;
-if
-.I field
-is also omitted it will default to
-.BR X .
-Only one field can be an annotation.
-.RE
-.TP
-.BI articles\ string \fR\|.\|.\|.
-.IR string \|.\|.\|.
-are definite or indefinite articles, and should be ignored at the beginning of
-.B T
-fields when sorting.
-Initially,
-.BR the ,
-.B a
-and
-.B an
-are recognized as articles.
-.TP
-.BI bibliography\ filename \fR\|.\|.\|.
-Write out all the references contained in the bibliographic databases
-.IR filename \|.\|.\|.
-.TP
-.BI bracket-label\ string1\ string2\ string3
-In the text, bracket each label
-with
-.I string1
-and
-.IR string2 .
-An occurrence of
-.I string2
-immediately followed by
-.I string1
-will be turned into
-.IR string3 .
-The default behaviour is
-.RS
-.IP
-.B
-bracket-label \e*([. \e*(.] ", "
-.RE
-.TP
-.BI capitalize\ fields
-Convert
-.I fields
-to caps and small caps.
-.TP
-.B compatible\*n
-Recognize
-.B .R1
-and
-.B .R2
-even when followed by a character other than space or newline.
-.TP
-.BI database\ filename \fR\|.\|.\|.
-Search the bibliographic databases
-.IR filename \|.\|.\|.
-For each
-.I filename
-if an index
-.IB filename @INDEX_SUFFIX@
-created by
-.BR @g@indxbib (@MAN1EXT@)
-exists, then it will be searched instead;
-each index can cover multiple databases.
-.TP
-.BI date-as-label\*n\ string
-.I string
-is a label expression that specifies a string with which to replace the
-.B D
-field after constructing the label.
-See the
-.B "Label expressions"
-subsection for a description of label expressions.
-This command is useful if you do not want explicit labels in the
-reference list, but instead want to handle any necessary
-disambiguation by qualifying the date in some way.
-The label used in the text would typically be some combination of the
-author and date.
-In most cases you should also use the
-.B no-label-in-reference
-command.
-For example,
-.RS
-.IP
-.B
-date-as-label D.+yD.y%a*D.-y
-.LP
-would attach a disambiguating letter to the year part of the
-.B D
-field in the reference.
-.RE
-.TP
-.B default-database\*n
-The default database should be searched.
-This is the default behaviour, so the negative version of
-this command is more useful.
-refer determines whether the default database should be searched
-on the first occasion that it needs to do a search.
-Thus a
-.B no-default-database
-command must be given before then,
-in order to be effective.
-.TP
-.BI discard\*n\ fields
-When the reference is read,
-.I fields
-should be discarded;
-no string definitions for
-.I fields
-will be output.
-Initially,
-.I fields
-are
-.BR XYZ .
-.TP
-.BI et-al\*n\ string\ m\ n
-Control use of
-.B
-et al
-in the evaluation of
-.B @
-expressions in label expressions.
-If the number of authors needed to make the author sequence
-unambiguous is
-.I u
-and the total number of authors is
-.I t
-then the last
-.IR t \|\-\| u
-authors will be replaced by
-.I string
-provided that
-.IR t \|\-\| u
-is not less than
-.I m
-and
-.I t
-is not less than
-.IR n .
-The default behaviour is
-.RS
-.IP
-.B
-et-al " et al" 2 3
-.RE
-.TP
-.BI include\ filename
-Include
-.I filename
-and interpret the contents as commands.
-.TP
-.BI join-authors\ string1\ string2\ string3
-This says how authors should be joined together.
-When there are exactly two authors, they will be joined with
-.IR string1 .
-When there are more than two authors, all but the last two will
-be joined with
-.IR string2 ,
-and the last two authors will be joined with
-.IR string3 .
-If
-.I string3
-is omitted,
-it will default to
-.IR string1 ;
-if
-.I string2
-is also omitted it will also default to
-.IR string1 .
-For example,
-.RS
-.IP
-.B
-join-authors " and " ", " ", and "
-.LP
-will restore the default method for joining authors.
-.RE
-.TP
-.B label-in-reference\*n
-When outputting the reference,
-define the string
-.B [F
-to be the reference's label.
-This is the default behaviour; so the negative version
-of this command is more useful.
-.TP
-.B label-in-text\*n
-For each reference output a label in the text.
-The label will be separated from the surrounding text as described in the
-.B bracket-label
-command.
-This is the default behaviour; so the negative version
-of this command is more useful.
-.TP
-.BI label\ string
-.I string
-is a label expression describing how to label each reference.
-.TP
-.BI separate-label-second-parts\ string
-When merging two-part labels, separate the second part of the second
-label from the first label with
-.IR string .
-See the description of the
-.B <>
-label expression.
-.TP
-.B move-punctuation\*n
-In the text, move any punctuation at the end of line past the label.
-It is usually a good idea to give this command unless you are using
-superscripted numbers as labels.
-.TP
-.BI reverse\*n\ string
-Reverse the fields whose names
-are in
-.IR string .
-Each field name can be followed by a number which says
-how many such fields should be reversed.
-If no number is given for a field, all such fields will be reversed.
-.TP
-.BI search-ignore\*n\ fields
-While searching for keys in databases for which no index exists,
-ignore the contents of
-.IR fields .
-Initially, fields
-.B XYZ
-are ignored.
-.TP
-.BI search-truncate\*n\ n
-Only require the first
-.I n
-characters of keys to be given.
-In effect when searching for a given key
-words in the database are truncated to the maximum of
-.I n
-and the length of the key.
-Initially
-.I n
-is 6.
-.TP
-.BI short-label\*n\ string
-.I string
-is a label expression that specifies an alternative (usually shorter)
-style of label.
-This is used when the
-.B #
-flag is given in the citation.
-When using author-date style labels, the identity of the author
-or authors is sometimes clear from the context, and so it
-may be desirable to omit the author or authors from the label.
-The
-.B short-label
-command will typically be used to specify a label containing just
-a date and possibly a disambiguating letter.
-.TP
-.BI sort\*n\ string
-Sort references according to
-.BR string .
-References will automatically be accumulated.
-.I string
-should be a list of field names, each followed by a number,
-indicating how many fields with the name should be used for sorting.
-.B +
-can be used to indicate that all the fields with the name should be used.
-Also
-.B .
-can be used to indicate the references should be sorted using the
-(tentative) label.
-(The
-.B
-Label expressions
-subsection describes the concept of a tentative label.)
-.TP
-.B sort-adjacent-labels\*n
-Sort labels that are adjacent in the text according to their
-position in the reference list.
-This command should usually be given if the
-.B abbreviate-label-ranges
-command has been given,
-or if the label expression contains a
-.B <>
-expression.
-This will have no effect unless references are being accumulated.
-.SS Label expressions
-.LP
-Label expressions can be evaluated both normally and tentatively.
-The result of normal evaluation is used for output.
-The result of tentative evaluation, called the
-.I
-tentative label,
-is used to gather the information
-that normal evaluation needs to disambiguate the label.
-Label expressions specified by the
-.B date-as-label
-and
-.B short-label
-commands are not evaluated tentatively.
-Normal and tentative evaluation are the same for all types
-of expression other than
-.BR @ ,
-.BR * ,
-and
-.B %
-expressions.
-The description below applies to normal evaluation,
-except where otherwise specified.
-.TP
-.I field
-.TQ
-.I field\ n
-The
-.IR n -th
-part of
-.IR field .
-If
-.I n
-is omitted, it defaults to 1.
-.TP
-.BI ' string '
-The characters in
-.I string
-literally.
-.TP
-.B @
-All the authors joined as specified by the
-.B join-authors
-command.
-The whole of each author's name will be used.
-However, if the references are sorted by author
-(that is the sort specification starts with
-.BR A+ ),
-then authors' last names will be used instead, provided that this does
-not introduce ambiguity,
-and also an initial subsequence of the authors may be used
-instead of all the authors, again provided that this does not
-introduce ambiguity.
-The use of only the last name for the
-.IR i -th
-author of some reference
-is considered to be ambiguous if
-there is some other reference,
-such that the first
-.IR i \|-\|1
-authors of the references are the same,
-the
-.IR i -th
-authors are not the same,
-but the
-.IR i -th
-authors' last names are the same.
-A proper initial subsequence of the sequence
-of authors for some reference is considered to be ambiguous if there is
-a reference with some other sequence of authors which also has
-that subsequence as a proper initial subsequence.
-When an initial subsequence of authors is used, the remaining
-authors are replaced by the string specified by the
-.B et-al
-command;
-this command may also specify additional requirements that must be
-met before an initial subsequence can be used.
-.B @
-tentatively evaluates to a canonical representation of the authors,
-such that authors that compare equally for sorting purpose
-will have the same representation.
-.TP
-.BI % n
-.TQ
-.B %a
-.TQ
-.B %A
-.TQ
-.B %i
-.TQ
-.B %I
-The serial number of the reference formatted according to the character
-following the
-.BR % .
-The serial number of a reference is 1 plus the number of earlier references
-with same tentative label as this reference.
-These expressions tentatively evaluate to an empty string.
-.TP
-.IB expr *
-If there is another reference with the same tentative label as
-this reference, then
-.IR expr ,
-otherwise an empty string.
-It tentatively evaluates to an empty string.
-.TP
-.IB expr + n
-.TQ
-.IB expr \- n
-The first
-.RB ( + )
-or last
-.RB ( \- )
-.I n
-upper or lower case letters or digits of
-.IR expr .
-Troff special characters (such as
-.BR \e('a )
-count as a single letter.
-Accent strings are retained but do not count towards the total.
-.TP
-.IB expr .l
-.I expr
-converted to lowercase.
-.TP
-.IB expr .u
-.I expr
-converted to uppercase.
-.TP
-.IB expr .c
-.I expr
-converted to caps and small caps.
-.TP
-.IB expr .r
-.I expr
-reversed so that the last name is first.
-.TP
-.IB expr .a
-.I expr
-with first names abbreviated.
-Note that fields specified in the
-.B abbreviate
-command are abbreviated before any labels are evaluated.
-Thus
-.B .a
-is useful only when you want a field to be abbreviated in a label
-but not in a reference.
-.TP
-.IB expr .y
-The year part of
-.IR expr .
-.TP
-.IB expr .+y
-The part of
-.I expr
-before the year, or the whole of
-.I expr
-if it does not contain a year.
-.TP
-.IB expr .\-y
-The part of
-.I expr
-after the year, or an empty string if
-.I expr
-does not contain a year.
-.TP
-.IB expr .n
-The last name part of
-.IR expr .
-.TP
-.IB expr1 \(ti expr2
-.I expr1
-except that if the last character of
-.I expr1
-is
-.B \-
-then it will be replaced by
-.IR expr2 .
-.TP
-.I expr1\ expr2
-The concatenation of
-.I expr1
-and
-.IR expr2 .
-.TP
-.IB expr1 | expr2
-If
-.I expr1
-is non-empty then
-.I expr1
-otherwise
-.IR expr2 .
-.TP
-.IB expr1 & expr2
-If
-.I expr1
-is non-empty
-then
-.I expr2
-otherwise an empty string.
-.TP
-.IB expr1 ? expr2 : expr3
-If
-.I expr1
-is non-empty
-then
-.I expr2
-otherwise
-.IR expr3 .
-.TP
-.BI < expr >
-The label is in two parts, which are separated by
-.IR expr .
-Two adjacent two-part labels which have the same first part will be
-merged by appending the second part of the second label onto the first
-label separated by the string specified in the
-.B separate-label-second-parts
-command (initially, a comma followed by a space); the resulting label
-will also be a two-part label with the same first part as before
-merging, and so additional labels can be merged into it.
-Note that it is permissible for the first part to be empty;
-this maybe desirable for expressions used in the
-.B short-label
-command.
-.TP
-.BI ( expr )
-The same as
-.IR expr .
-Used for grouping.
-.LP
-The above expressions are listed in order of precedence
-(highest first);
-.B &
-and
-.B |
-have the same precedence.
-.SS Macro interface
-Each reference starts with a call to the macro
-.BR ]- .
-The string
-.B [F
-will be defined to be the label for this reference,
-unless the
-.B no-label-in-reference
-command has been given.
-There then follows a series of string definitions,
-one for each field:
-string
-.BI [ X
-corresponds to field
-.IR X .
-The number register
-.B [P
-is set to 1 if the
-.B P
-field contains a range of pages.
-The
-.BR [T ,
-.B [A
-and
-.B [O
-number registers are set to 1 according as the
-.BR T ,
-.B A
-and
-.B O
-fields end with one of the characters
-.BR .?! .
-The
-.B [E
-number register will be set to 1 if the
-.B [E
-string contains more than one name.
-The reference is followed by a call to the
-.B ][
-macro.
-The first argument to this macro gives a number representing
-the type of the reference.
-If a reference contains a
-.B J
-field, it will be classified as type 1,
-otherwise if it contains a
-.B B
-field, it will type 3,
-otherwise if it contains a
-.B G
-or
-.B R
-field it will be type 4,
-otherwise if contains a
-.B I
-field it will be type 2,
-otherwise it will be type 0.
-The second argument is a symbolic name for the type:
-.BR other ,
-.BR journal-article ,
-.BR book ,
-.B article-in-book
-or
-.BR tech-report .
-Groups of references that have been accumulated
-or are produced by the
-.B bibliography
-command are preceded by a call to the
-.B ]<
-macro and followed by a call to the
-.B ]>
-macro.
-.SH FILES
-.Tp \w'\fB@DEFAULT_INDEX@'u+2n
-.B @DEFAULT_INDEX@
-Default database.
-.TP
-.IB file @INDEX_SUFFIX@
-Index files.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR @g@indxbib (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@lookbib (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR lkbib (@MAN1EXT@)
-.br
-.SH BUGS
-In label expressions,
-.B <>
-expressions are ignored inside
-.BI . char
-expressions.
PROG=soelim
-MAN1=soelim.n
+MAN1=soelim.1
XLIBS=$(LIBGROFF)
OBJS=soelim.o
CCSRCS=soelim.cc
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.TH @G@SOELIM @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+@g@soelim \- interpret .so requests in groff input
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B @g@soelim
+[
+.B \-Cv
+]
+[
+.BI \-I dir
+]
+[
+.IR files \|.\|.\|.\|
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B @g@soelim
+reads
+.I files
+and replaces lines of the form
+.IP
+.BI .so\ file
+.LP
+by the contents of
+.IR file .
+It is useful if files included with
+.B so
+need to be preprocessed.
+Normally,
+.B @g@soelim
+should be invoked with the
+.B \-s
+option of
+.BR groff .
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.B \-C
+Recognize
+.B .so
+even when followed by a character other than space or newline.
+.TP
+.BI \-I dir
+This option may be used to specify a directory to search for
+files (both those on the command line and those named in
+.B \&.so
+lines).
+The current directory is always searched first.
+This option may be specified more than once,
+the directories will be searched in the order specified.
+No directory search is performed for files specified using an absolute path.
+.TP
+.B \-v
+Print the version number.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.TH @G@SOELIM @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-@g@soelim \- interpret .so requests in groff input
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B @g@soelim
-[
-.B \-Cv
-]
-[
-.BI \-I dir
-]
-[
-.IR files \|.\|.\|.\|
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B @g@soelim
-reads
-.I files
-and replaces lines of the form
-.IP
-.BI .so\ file
-.LP
-by the contents of
-.IR file .
-It is useful if files included with
-.B so
-need to be preprocessed.
-Normally,
-.B @g@soelim
-should be invoked with the
-.B \-s
-option of
-.BR groff .
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-C
-Recognize
-.B .so
-even when followed by a character other than space or newline.
-.TP
-.BI \-I dir
-This option may be used to specify a directory to search for
-files (both those on the command line and those named in
-.B \&.so
-lines).
-The current directory is always searched first.
-This option may be specified more than once,
-the directories will be searched in the order specified.
-No directory search is performed for files specified using an absolute path.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print the version number.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@)
PROG=tbl
-MAN1=tbl.n
+MAN1=tbl.1
XLIBS=$(LIBGROFF)
OBJS=main.o table.o
CCSRCS=main.cc table.cc
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.TH @G@TBL @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+@g@tbl \- format tables for troff
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B @g@tbl
+[
+.B \-Cv
+]
+[
+.IR files \|.\|.\|.
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page describes the GNU version of
+.BR tbl ,
+which is part of the groff document formatting system.
+.B tbl
+compiles descriptions of tables embedded within
+.B troff
+input files into commands that are understood by
+.BR troff .
+Normally, it should be invoked using the
+.B \-t
+option of
+.B groff.
+It is highly compatible with Unix
+.BR tbl .
+The output generated by GNU
+.B tbl
+cannot be processed with Unix
+.BR troff ;
+it must be processed with GNU
+.BR troff .
+If no files are given on the command line, the standard input
+will be read.
+A filename of
+.B \-
+will cause the standard input to be read.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.B \-C
+Recognize
+.B .TS
+and
+.B .TE
+even when followed by a character other than space or newline.
+.TP
+.B \-v
+Print the version number.
+.SH USAGE
+Only the differences between GNU
+.B tbl
+and Unix
+.B tbl
+are described here.
+.LP
+Normally
+.B tbl
+attempts to prevent undesirable breaks in the table by using diversions.
+This can sometimes interact badly with macro packages' own use of diversions,
+when footnotes, for example, are used.
+The
+.B nokeep
+option tells
+.B tbl
+not to try and prevent breaks in this way.
+.LP
+The
+.B decimalpoint
+option specifies the character to be recognized as the decimal
+point character in place of the default period.
+It takes an argument in parentheses, which must be a single
+character, as for the
+.B tab
+option.
+.LP
+The
+.B f
+format modifier can be followed by an arbitrary length
+font name in parentheses.
+.LP
+There is a
+.B d
+format modifier which means that a vertically spanning entry
+should be aligned at the bottom of its range.
+.LP
+There is no limit on the number of columns in a table, nor any limit
+on the number of text blocks.
+All the lines of a table are considered in deciding column
+widths, not just the first 200.
+Table continuation
+.RB ( .T& )
+lines are not restricted to the first 200 lines.
+.LP
+Numeric and alphabetic items may appear in the same column.
+.LP
+Numeric and alphabetic items may span horizontally.
+.LP
+.B tbl
+uses register, string, macro and diversion names beginning with
+.BR 3 .
+When using
+.B tbl
+you should avoid using any names beginning with a
+.BR 3 .
+.SH BUGS
+You should use
+.BR .TS\ H / .TH
+in conjunction with a supporting macro package for
+.I all
+multi-page boxed tables.
+If there is no header that you wish to appear at the top of each page
+of the table, place the
+.B .TH
+line immediately after the format section.
+Do not enclose a multi-page table within keep/release macros,
+or divert it in any other way.
+.LP
+A text block within a table must be able to fit on one page.
+.LP
+The
+.B bp
+request cannot be used to force a page-break in a multi-page table.
+Instead, define
+.B BP
+as follows
+.IP
+.B .de BP
+.br
+.B .ie '\e\en(.z'' .bp \e\e$1
+.br
+.B .el \e!.BP \e\e$1
+.br
+.B ..
+.br
+.LP
+and use
+.B BP
+instead of
+.BR bp .
+.LP
+Using \ea directly in a table to get leaders will not work.
+This is correct behaviour: \ea is a
+.B uninterpreted
+leader.
+To get leaders use a real leader, either by using a control A or like
+this:
+.IP
+.nf
+.ft B
+\&.ds a \ea
+\&.TS
+tab(;);
+lw(1i) l.
+A\e*a;B
+\&.TE
+.ft
+.fi
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.TH @G@TBL @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-@g@tbl \- format tables for troff
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B @g@tbl
-[
-.B \-Cv
-]
-[
-.IR files \|.\|.\|.
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page describes the GNU version of
-.BR tbl ,
-which is part of the groff document formatting system.
-.B tbl
-compiles descriptions of tables embedded within
-.B troff
-input files into commands that are understood by
-.BR troff .
-Normally, it should be invoked using the
-.B \-t
-option of
-.B groff.
-It is highly compatible with Unix
-.BR tbl .
-The output generated by GNU
-.B tbl
-cannot be processed with Unix
-.BR troff ;
-it must be processed with GNU
-.BR troff .
-If no files are given on the command line, the standard input
-will be read.
-A filename of
-.B \-
-will cause the standard input to be read.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-C
-Recognize
-.B .TS
-and
-.B .TE
-even when followed by a character other than space or newline.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print the version number.
-.SH USAGE
-Only the differences between GNU
-.B tbl
-and Unix
-.B tbl
-are described here.
-.LP
-Normally
-.B tbl
-attempts to prevent undesirable breaks in the table by using diversions.
-This can sometimes interact badly with macro packages' own use of diversions,
-when footnotes, for example, are used.
-The
-.B nokeep
-option tells
-.B tbl
-not to try and prevent breaks in this way.
-.LP
-The
-.B decimalpoint
-option specifies the character to be recognized as the decimal
-point character in place of the default period.
-It takes an argument in parentheses, which must be a single
-character, as for the
-.B tab
-option.
-.LP
-The
-.B f
-format modifier can be followed by an arbitrary length
-font name in parentheses.
-.LP
-There is a
-.B d
-format modifier which means that a vertically spanning entry
-should be aligned at the bottom of its range.
-.LP
-There is no limit on the number of columns in a table, nor any limit
-on the number of text blocks.
-All the lines of a table are considered in deciding column
-widths, not just the first 200.
-Table continuation
-.RB ( .T& )
-lines are not restricted to the first 200 lines.
-.LP
-Numeric and alphabetic items may appear in the same column.
-.LP
-Numeric and alphabetic items may span horizontally.
-.LP
-.B tbl
-uses register, string, macro and diversion names beginning with
-.BR 3 .
-When using
-.B tbl
-you should avoid using any names beginning with a
-.BR 3 .
-.SH BUGS
-You should use
-.BR .TS\ H / .TH
-in conjunction with a supporting macro package for
-.I all
-multi-page boxed tables.
-If there is no header that you wish to appear at the top of each page
-of the table, place the
-.B .TH
-line immediately after the format section.
-Do not enclose a multi-page table within keep/release macros,
-or divert it in any other way.
-.LP
-A text block within a table must be able to fit on one page.
-.LP
-The
-.B bp
-request cannot be used to force a page-break in a multi-page table.
-Instead, define
-.B BP
-as follows
-.IP
-.B .de BP
-.br
-.B .ie '\e\en(.z'' .bp \e\e$1
-.br
-.B .el \e!.BP \e\e$1
-.br
-.B ..
-.br
-.LP
-and use
-.B BP
-instead of
-.BR bp .
-.LP
-Using \ea directly in a table to get leaders will not work.
-This is correct behaviour: \ea is a
-.B uninterpreted
-leader.
-To get leaders use a real leader, either by using a control A or like
-this:
-.IP
-.nf
-.ft B
-\&.ds a \ea
-\&.TS
-tab(;);
-lw(1i) l.
-A\e*a;B
-\&.TE
-.ft
-.fi
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@)
PROG=tfmtodit
-MAN1=tfmtodit.n
+MAN1=tfmtodit.1
XLIBS=$(LIBGROFF)
MLIB=$(LIBM)
OBJS=tfmtodit.o
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.ie t .ds tx T\h'-.1667m'\v'.224m'E\v'-.224m'\h'-.125m'X
+.el .ds tx TeX
+.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
+.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
+.de Tp
+.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
+.el .TP "\\$1"
+..
+.TH TFMTODIT @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+tfmtodit \- create font files for use with groff \-Tdvi
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B tfmtodit
+[
+.B \-sv
+]
+[
+.BI \-g gf_file
+]
+[
+.BI \-k skewchar
+]
+.I tfm_file
+.I map_file
+.I font
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.B tfmtodit
+creates a font file for use with
+.B
+groff \-Tdvi\fR.
+.I tfm_file
+is the name of the \*(tx font metric file for the font.
+.I map_file
+is a file giving the groff names for characters in the font;
+this file should consist of a sequence of lines of the form:
+.IP
+.I
+n c1 c2 \fR.\|.\|.
+.LP
+where
+.I n
+is a decimal integer giving the position of the character in the font,
+and
+.IR c1 ,
+.IR c2 ,.\|.\|.
+are the groff names of the character.
+If a character has no groff names but exists in the tfm file,
+then it will be put in the groff font file as an unnamed character.
+.I font
+is the name of the groff font file.
+The groff font file is written to
+.IR font .
+.LP
+The
+.B \-s
+option should be given if the font is special
+(a font is
+.I special
+if
+.B troff
+should search it whenever
+a character is not found in the current font.)
+If the font is special,
+it should be listed in the
+.B fonts
+command in the DESC file;
+if it is not special, there is no need to list it, since
+.B troff
+can automatically mount it when it's first used.
+.LP
+To do a good job of math typesetting, groff requires
+font metric information not present in the tfm file.
+The reason for this is that \*(tx has separate math italic fonts
+whereas groff uses normal italic fonts for math.
+The additional information required by groff is given by the
+two arguments to the
+.B math_fit
+macro in the Metafont programs for the Computer Modern fonts.
+In a text font (a font for which
+.B math_fitting
+is false), Metafont normally ignores these two arguments.
+Metafont can be made to put this information in the gf file
+by loading the following definition after
+.B cmbase
+when creating
+.BR cm.base :
+.IP
+.nf
+.ft B
+def ignore_math_fit(expr left_adjustment,right_adjustment) =
+ special "adjustment";
+ numspecial left_adjustment*16/designsize;
+ numspecial right_adjustment*16/designsize;
+ enddef;
+.fi
+.ft R
+.LP
+The gf file created using this modified
+.B cm.base
+should be specified with the
+.B \-g
+option.
+The
+.B \-g
+option should not be given for a font for which
+.B math_fitting
+is true.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.B \-v
+Print the version number.
+.TP
+.B \-s
+The font is special.
+The effect of this option is to add the
+.B special
+command to the font file.
+.TP
+.BI \-k n
+The skewchar of this font is at position
+.IR n .
+.I n
+should be an integer;
+it may be given in decimal,
+or with a leading
+.B 0
+in octal,
+or with a leading
+.B 0x
+in hexadecimal.
+The effect of this option is to ignore any kerns whose second component
+is the specified character.
+.TP
+.BI \-g gf_file
+.I gf_file
+is a gf file produced by Metafont containing special and numspecial
+commands giving additional font metric information.
+.SH FILES
+.Tp \w'\fB@FONTDIR@/devdvi/DESC'u+2n
+.B @FONTDIR@/devdvi/DESC
+Device description file.
+.TP
+.BI @FONTDIR@/devdvi/ F
+Font description file for font
+.IR F .
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR grodvi (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.ie t .ds tx T\h'-.1667m'\v'.224m'E\v'-.224m'\h'-.125m'X
-.el .ds tx TeX
-.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
-.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
-.de Tp
-.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
-.el .TP "\\$1"
-..
-.TH TFMTODIT @MAN1EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-tfmtodit \- create font files for use with groff \-Tdvi
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B tfmtodit
-[
-.B \-sv
-]
-[
-.BI \-g gf_file
-]
-[
-.BI \-k skewchar
-]
-.I tfm_file
-.I map_file
-.I font
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B tfmtodit
-creates a font file for use with
-.B
-groff \-Tdvi\fR.
-.I tfm_file
-is the name of the \*(tx font metric file for the font.
-.I map_file
-is a file giving the groff names for characters in the font;
-this file should consist of a sequence of lines of the form:
-.IP
-.I
-n c1 c2 \fR.\|.\|.
-.LP
-where
-.I n
-is a decimal integer giving the position of the character in the font,
-and
-.IR c1 ,
-.IR c2 ,.\|.\|.
-are the groff names of the character.
-If a character has no groff names but exists in the tfm file,
-then it will be put in the groff font file as an unnamed character.
-.I font
-is the name of the groff font file.
-The groff font file is written to
-.IR font .
-.LP
-The
-.B \-s
-option should be given if the font is special
-(a font is
-.I special
-if
-.B troff
-should search it whenever
-a character is not found in the current font.)
-If the font is special,
-it should be listed in the
-.B fonts
-command in the DESC file;
-if it is not special, there is no need to list it, since
-.B troff
-can automatically mount it when it's first used.
-.LP
-To do a good job of math typesetting, groff requires
-font metric information not present in the tfm file.
-The reason for this is that \*(tx has separate math italic fonts
-whereas groff uses normal italic fonts for math.
-The additional information required by groff is given by the
-two arguments to the
-.B math_fit
-macro in the Metafont programs for the Computer Modern fonts.
-In a text font (a font for which
-.B math_fitting
-is false), Metafont normally ignores these two arguments.
-Metafont can be made to put this information in the gf file
-by loading the following definition after
-.B cmbase
-when creating
-.BR cm.base :
-.IP
-.nf
-.ft B
-def ignore_math_fit(expr left_adjustment,right_adjustment) =
- special "adjustment";
- numspecial left_adjustment*16/designsize;
- numspecial right_adjustment*16/designsize;
- enddef;
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-The gf file created using this modified
-.B cm.base
-should be specified with the
-.B \-g
-option.
-The
-.B \-g
-option should not be given for a font for which
-.B math_fitting
-is true.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print the version number.
-.TP
-.B \-s
-The font is special.
-The effect of this option is to add the
-.B special
-command to the font file.
-.TP
-.BI \-k n
-The skewchar of this font is at position
-.IR n .
-.I n
-should be an integer;
-it may be given in decimal,
-or with a leading
-.B 0
-in octal,
-or with a leading
-.B 0x
-in hexadecimal.
-The effect of this option is to ignore any kerns whose second component
-is the specified character.
-.TP
-.BI \-g gf_file
-.I gf_file
-is a gf file produced by Metafont containing special and numspecial
-commands giving additional font metric information.
-.SH FILES
-.Tp \w'\fB@FONTDIR@/devdvi/DESC'u+2n
-.B @FONTDIR@/devdvi/DESC
-Device description file.
-.TP
-.BI @FONTDIR@/devdvi/ F
-Font description file for font
-.IR F .
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR grodvi (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@)
-MAN7=groff_ms.n me.n msafer.n
+MAN7=groff_ms.7 groff_man.7 groff_me.7 groff_msafer.7
-NORMALFILES=$(TMAC_ANDOC) tmac.pic tmac.ps tmac.psnew tmac.psold tmac.pspic \
+NORMALFILES=tmac.pic tmac.ps tmac.psnew tmac.psold tmac.pspic \
tmac.psatk tmac.dvi tmac.tty tmac.tty-char tmac.X tmac.Xps tmac.latin1 \
- tmac.lj4 eqnrc troffrc tmac.safer
-SPECIALFILES=$(TMAC_AN) tmac.s
-STRIPFILES=tmac.e tmac.doc tmac.doc.old
-# MDOCFILES=doc-common doc-ditroff doc-nroff doc-syms
+ tmac.lj4 eqnrc troffrc tmac.safer tmac.html tmac.arkup
+SPECIALFILES=tmac.s
+STRIPFILES=tmac.e
mdocdir=$(tmacdir)/mdoc
CLEANADD=stamp-strip stamp-wrap tmac.e-s tmac.doc-s tmac.doc.old-s \
- doc-common-s doc-ditroff-s doc-nroff-s doc-syms-s *-wrap
+ doc-common-s doc-ditroff-s doc-nroff-s doc-syms-s *-wrap
tmac_s_prefix=
-tmac_an_prefix=
tmac_wrap=
sys_tmac_prefix=
install_data: $(NORMALFILES) $(SPECIALFILES) stamp-wrap stamp-strip man.local
-test -d $(tmacdir) || mkdir $(tmacdir)
if test -n "$(tmac_wrap)"; then \
- for m in $(tmac_wrap); do \
+ for m in ""$(tmac_wrap); do \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $$m-wrap $(tmacdir)/tmac.$$m; \
done; \
fi
rm -f $(tmacdir)/$$f; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/$$f $(tmacdir)/$$f; \
done
- if test -n "$(TMAC_S)"; then \
- rm -f $(tmacdir)/tmac.$(tmac_s_prefix)s ; \
- $(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/tmac.s $(tmacdir)/tmac.$(tmac_s_prefix)s ; \
- fi
- if test -n "$(TMAC_AN)"; then \
- rm -f $(tmacdir)/tmac.$(tmac_an_prefix)an ; \
- $(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/tmac.an $(tmacdir)/tmac.$(tmac_an_prefix)an ; \
- fi
+ -rm -f $(tmacdir)/tmac.$(tmac_s_prefix)s
+ $(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/tmac.s $(tmacdir)/tmac.$(tmac_s_prefix)s
for f in $(STRIPFILES); do \
rm -f $(tmacdir)/$$f; \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $$f-s $(tmacdir)/$$f; \
done
- -test -d $(mdocdir) || mkdir $(mdocdir)
- for f in $(MDOCFILES); do \
- rm -f $(mdocdir)/$$f; \
- $(INSTALL_DATA) $$f-s $(mdocdir)/$$f; \
- done
-test -f $(tmacdir)/man.local || \
$(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/man.local $(tmacdir)/man.local
-rm -f temp
stamp-wrap:
if test -n "$(tmac_wrap)"; then \
- for m in $(tmac_wrap); do \
+ for m in ""$(tmac_wrap); do \
rm -f $$m-wrap; \
echo .cp 1 >$$m-wrap; \
echo .so $(sys_tmac_prefix)$$m >>$$m-wrap; \
uninstall_sub:
-if test -n "$(tmac_wrap)"; then \
- for m in $(tmac_wrap); do rm -f $(tmacdir)/tmac.$$m; done; \
+ for m in ""$(tmac_wrap); do \
+ rm -f $(tmacdir)/tmac.$$m; \
+ done; \
fi
-for f in $(NORMALFILES) $(STRIPFILES); do rm -f $(tmacdir)/$$f; done
-rm -f $(tmacdir)/tmac.$(tmac_s_prefix)s
- -rm -f $(tmacdir)/tmac.$(tmac_an_prefix)an
-if cmp -s $(tmacdir)/man.local $(srcdir)/man.local; then \
rm -f $(tmacdir)/man.local; \
fi
.nr Xc 3
.nr Xo 1
.nr Xr 10n
+.nr Yr \n(yr+1900
.ds sV \& \&
.ds hV \&\ \&
.ds iV \& \&
. ds cH \\$2
.\" . if "\\$3"" \{\
. if \\$2>=1 .if \\$2<=8 \{\
-. ds vT UNIX Reference Manual
-. if \\$2>1 .if \\$2<6 .ds vT UNIX Programmer's Manual
-. if "\\$2"8" .ds vT UNIX System Manager's Manual
+. ds vT System Reference Manual
+. if \\$2>1 .if \\$2<6 .ds vT System Programmer's Manual
+. if "\\$2"8" .ds vT System Manager's Manual
. nr sN \\$2
. \}
. if "\\$2"unass" .ds vT DRAFT
.\" . \}
.\}
.if !"\\$3"" \{\
-. if "\\$3"USD" .ds vT UNIX User's Supplementary Documents
-. if "\\$3"PS1" .ds vT UNIX Programmers's Supplementary Documents
-. if "\\$3"AMD" .ds vT UNIX Ancestral Manual Documents
-. if "\\$3"SMM" .ds vT UNIX System Manager's Manual
-. if "\\$3"URM" .ds vT UNIX Reference Manual
-. if "\\$3"PRM" .ds vT UNIX Programmers's Manual
-. if "\\$3"IND" .ds vT UNIX Manual Master Index
-.\" . if "\\$3"CON" .ds vT UNIX Contributed Software Manual
-.\" . if "\\$3"IMP" .ds vT UNIX Implementation Notes
-.\" . if "\\$3"HOW" .ds vT UNIX How Pocket Manual
-. if "\\$3"LOCAL" .ds vT UNIX Local Manual
+. if "\\$3"USD" .ds vT User's Supplementary Documents
+. if "\\$3"PS1" .ds vT Programmers's Supplementary Documents
+. if "\\$3"AMD" .ds vT Ancestral Manual Documents
+. if "\\$3"SMM" .ds vT System Manager's Manual
+. if "\\$3"URM" .ds vT Reference Manual
+. if "\\$3"PRM" .ds vT Programmers's Manual
+. if "\\$3"IND" .ds vT Manual Master Index
+.\" . if "\\$3"CON" .ds vT Contributed Software Manual
+.\" . if "\\$3"IMP" .ds vT Implementation Notes
+.\" . if "\\$3"HOW" .ds vT How Pocket Manual
+. if "\\$3"LOCAL" .ds vT Local Manual
. if "\\$3"tahoe" .as vT \ (Tahoe Architecture)
. if "\\$3"vax" .as vT \ (VAX Architecture)
. if "\\$3"hp300" .as vT \ (HP300 Architecture)
. if "\\n(mo"10" .ds dD October
. if "\\n(mo"11" .ds dD November
. if "\\n(mo"12" .ds dD December
-. nr *year \\n(yr+1900
-. as dD \&\ \\n(dy, \\n([*year]
+. as dD \&\ \\n(dy, \\n(Yr
. \}
.\}
.el \{\
--- /dev/null
+.TH GROFF_MAN @MAN7EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.
+.SH NAME
+.
+groff_man \- groff `an' macros to support generation of man pages
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B groff
+.B \-m@TMAC_AN_PREFIX@an
+[
+.IR options .\|.\|.
+]
+[
+.IR files .\|.\|.
+]
+.
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.
+The
+.B tmac.an
+macros used to generate man pages with
+.I groff
+were written by James Clark.
+This document provides a brief summary of the use of each macro in that
+package.
+.TP
+.BI .TP " title section " [ extra1 "] [" extra2 "] [" extra3 ]
+Sets the title of the man page to
+.I title
+and the section to
+.IR section ,
+which must take on a value between 1 and\ 8.
+The value
+.I section
+may also have a string appended, e.g. `.pm', to indicate a specific
+subsection of the man pages.
+.TP
+.BI .SH " text for a heading"
+Sets up an unindented and unnumbered section heading.
+Prints out all the text following `.SH' up to the end of the line in bold
+face, with a size slightly smaller than that for indented section headings.
+.TP
+.BI .SS " text for a heading"
+Sets up an indented section heading.
+Prints out all the text following `.SS' up to the end of the line in bold
+face, with a size slightly larger than that for unindented section headings.
+.TP
+.BI ".TP [" nnn ]
+Sets up an indented paragraph.
+The indentation is set to
+.I nnn
+if that argument is supplied.
+The first line of text following this macro is interpreted as a string to be
+printed flush-left, as it is appropriate for a label.
+It is not interpreted as part of a paragraph, so there is no attempt to fill
+the first line with text from the following input lines.
+Nevertheless, if the label is not as wide as the indentation, then the
+paragraph starts at the same line (but indented), continuing on the
+following lines.
+If the label is wider than the indentation, then the descriptive part of the
+paragraph begins on the line following the label, entirely indented.
+The `.TP' macro is the macro used for the explanations you are just reading.
+.TP
+.BR ".LP " or " .PP " or " .P"
+These macros are mutual aliases.
+Any of them causes a line break at the current position, followed by a
+vertical space downwards by the amount that is set in the `PD' counter.
+.TP
+.BI ".IP [" designator "] [" nnn ]
+Sets up an indented paragraph, using
+.I designator
+as a tag to mark its beginning.
+The indentation is permanently set to
+.I nnn
+if that argument is supplied.
+To set the indentation back to the previous level, one must call some other
+macro that uses indented paragraphs, and explicitly provide it with the
+value of the previous indentation.
+.IP
+For example, the following paragraphs were all set up with bullets as the
+designator, using `.IP \\(bu 4':
+.IP \(bu 4
+`IP' is one of the three macros used in
+.B tmac.an
+to format lists.
+.IP \(bu 4
+`HP' is another.
+This macro produces a paragraph with a left hanging indentation.
+.IP \(bu 4
+`TP' is another.
+This macro produces an unindented label (given by the text on the first line
+following `TP'), followed by an indented paragraph with appropriately
+descriptive text.
+.TP
+.BI ".HP [" nnn ]
+Sets up paragraphs with hanging left indentation.
+The indentation is set to
+.I nnn
+if that argument is supplied.
+The following pargraph illustrates the effect of this macro with the hanging
+indentation set to\ 2:
+.HP 2
+This is a pagraph following an invocation of the `.HP' macro.
+As you can see, it produces a paragraph where all lines but the first are
+flushed right and are shorter than the preceding lines.
+.
+.SH "MACROS TO SET FONTS"
+.
+.TP
+.BI .SM
+Causes the text on the same line or the text on the next line to appear in a
+font that is one point size smaller than the default font.
+.TP
+.BI .SB
+Causes the text on the same line or the text on the next line to appear in
+small boldface font.
+.TP
+.BI ".BI " text
+Causes text on the same line to appear alternately in bold face and italic.
+The text must be on the same line as the macro call.
+Thus `.BI this word and that' would cause `this' and `and' to appear in bold
+face, while `word' and `that' appear in italics.
+.TP
+.BI ".IB " text
+Causes text to appear alternately in italic and bold face.
+The text must be on the same line as the macro call.
+.TP
+.BI ".BR " text
+Causes text on the same line to appear alternately in bold face and roman.
+The text must be on the same line as the macro call.
+.TP
+.BI ".RB " text
+Causes text on the same line to appear alternately in roman and bold face.
+The text must be on the same line as the macro call.
+.TP
+.BI ".R " text
+Causes text to appear in roman font.
+If no text is present on the line where the macro is called, then the text
+of the next line appears in roman.
+This is the default font to which text is returned at the end of processing
+of the other macros.
+.TP
+.BI ".B " text
+Causes text to appear in bold face.
+If no text is present on the line where the macro is called, then the text
+of the next line appears in bold face.
+.TP
+.BI ".I " text
+Causes text to appear in italic.
+If no text is present on the line where the macro is called, then the text
+of the next line appears in italic.
+.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.
+Since the
+.B tmac.an
+macros consist of groups of
+.I groff
+requests, one can, in principle, supplement the functionality of the
+.B tmac.an
+macros with individual
+.I groff
+requests where necessary.
+A complete list of these requests is available on the WWW at
+.ce 1
+http://www.cs.pdx.edu/~trent/gnu/groff/groff_toc.html
+.
+.SH AUTHOR
+.
+This manual page was originally written for the Debian GNU/Linux system by
+Susan G. Kleinmann <sgk@debian.org>, corrected by Werner Lemberg
+<wl@gnu.org>, and is now part of the GNU troff distribution.
+++ /dev/null
-.TH GROFF_MAN @MAN7EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.
-.SH NAME
-.
-groff_man \- groff `an' macros to support generation of man pages
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B groff
-.B \-m@TMAC_AN_PREFIX@an
-[
-.IR options .\|.\|.
-]
-[
-.IR files .\|.\|.
-]
-.
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.
-The
-.B tmac.an
-macros used to generate man pages with
-.I groff
-were written by James Clark.
-This document provides a brief summary of the use of each macro in that
-package.
-.TP
-.BI .TP " title section " [ extra1 "] [" extra2 "] [" extra3 ]
-Sets the title of the man page to
-.I title
-and the section to
-.IR section ,
-which must take on a value between 1 and\ 8.
-The value
-.I section
-may also have a string appended, e.g. `.pm', to indicate a specific
-subsection of the man pages.
-.TP
-.BI .SH " text for a heading"
-Sets up an unindented and unnumbered section heading.
-Prints out all the text following `.SH' up to the end of the line in bold
-face, with a size slightly smaller than that for indented section headings.
-.TP
-.BI .SS " text for a heading"
-Sets up an indented section heading.
-Prints out all the text following `.SS' up to the end of the line in bold
-face, with a size slightly larger than that for unindented section headings.
-.TP
-.BI ".TP [" nnn ]
-Sets up an indented paragraph.
-The indentation is set to
-.I nnn
-if that argument is supplied.
-The first line of text following this macro is interpreted as a string to be
-printed flush-left, as it is appropriate for a label.
-It is not interpreted as part of a paragraph, so there is no attempt to fill
-the first line with text from the following input lines.
-Nevertheless, if the label is not as wide as the indentation, then the
-paragraph starts at the same line (but indented), continuing on the
-following lines.
-If the label is wider than the indentation, then the descriptive part of the
-paragraph begins on the line following the label, entirely indented.
-The `.TP' macro is the macro used for the explanations you are just reading.
-.TP
-.BR ".LP " or " .PP " or " .P"
-These macros are mutual aliases.
-Any of them causes a line break at the current position, followed by a
-vertical space downwards by the amount that is set in the `PD' counter.
-.TP
-.BI ".IP [" designator "] [" nnn ]
-Sets up an indented paragraph, using
-.I designator
-as a tag to mark its beginning.
-The indentation is permanently set to
-.I nnn
-if that argument is supplied.
-To set the indentation back to the previous level, one must call some other
-macro that uses indented paragraphs, and explicitly provide it with the
-value of the previous indentation.
-.IP
-For example, the following paragraphs were all set up with bullets as the
-designator, using `.IP \\(bu 4':
-.IP \(bu 4
-`IP' is one of the three macros used in
-.B tmac.an
-to format lists.
-.IP \(bu 4
-`HP' is another.
-This macro produces a paragraph with a left hanging indentation.
-.IP \(bu 4
-`TP' is another.
-This macro produces an unindented label (given by the text on the first line
-following `TP'), followed by an indented paragraph with appropriately
-descriptive text.
-.TP
-.BI ".HP [" nnn ]
-Sets up paragraphs with hanging left indentation.
-The indentation is set to
-.I nnn
-if that argument is supplied.
-The following pargraph illustrates the effect of this macro with the hanging
-indentation set to\ 2:
-.HP 2
-This is a pagraph following an invocation of the `.HP' macro.
-As you can see, it produces a paragraph where all lines but the first are
-flushed right and are shorter than the preceding lines.
-.
-.SH "MACROS TO SET FONTS"
-.
-.TP
-.BI .SM
-Causes the text on the same line or the text on the next line to appear in a
-font that is one point size smaller than the default font.
-.TP
-.BI .SB
-Causes the text on the same line or the text on the next line to appear in
-small boldface font.
-.TP
-.BI ".BI " text
-Causes text on the same line to appear alternately in bold face and italic.
-The text must be on the same line as the macro call.
-Thus `.BI this word and that' would cause `this' and `and' to appear in bold
-face, while `word' and `that' appear in italics.
-.TP
-.BI ".IB " text
-Causes text to appear alternately in italic and bold face.
-The text must be on the same line as the macro call.
-.TP
-.BI ".BR " text
-Causes text on the same line to appear alternately in bold face and roman.
-The text must be on the same line as the macro call.
-.TP
-.BI ".RB " text
-Causes text on the same line to appear alternately in roman and bold face.
-The text must be on the same line as the macro call.
-.TP
-.BI ".R " text
-Causes text to appear in roman font.
-If no text is present on the line where the macro is called, then the text
-of the next line appears in roman.
-This is the default font to which text is returned at the end of processing
-of the other macros.
-.TP
-.BI ".B " text
-Causes text to appear in bold face.
-If no text is present on the line where the macro is called, then the text
-of the next line appears in bold face.
-.TP
-.BI ".I " text
-Causes text to appear in italic.
-If no text is present on the line where the macro is called, then the text
-of the next line appears in italic.
-.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.
-Since the
-.B tmac.an
-macros consist of groups of
-.I groff
-requests, one can, in principle, supplement the functionality of the
-.B tmac.an
-macros with individual
-.I groff
-requests where necessary.
-A complete list of these requests is available on the WWW at
-.ce 1
-http://www.cs.pdx.edu/~trent/gnu/groff/groff_toc.html
-.
-.SH AUTHOR
-.
-This manual page was originally written for the Debian GNU/Linux system by
-Susan G. Kleinmann <sgk@debian.org>, corrected by Werner Lemberg
-<wl@gnu.org>, and is now part of the GNU troff distribution.
--- /dev/null
+.\" $NetBSD: mdoc.7,v 1.14 1999/08/30 00:41:28 ross Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1991, 1993
+.\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\" without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\" @(#)mdoc.7 8.2 (Berkeley) 12/30/93
+.\"
+.Dd November 24, 1997
+.Os
+.Dt MDOC 7
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm mdoc
+.Nd quick reference guide for the
+.Nm \-mdoc
+macro package
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm groff
+.Fl m Ns Ar doc
+.Ar files ...
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The
+.Nm \-mdoc
+package is a set of content-based and domain-based macros
+used to format the
+.Bx
+man pages.
+The macro names and their meanings are
+listed below for quick reference; for
+a detailed explanation on using the package,
+see the tutorial sampler
+.Xr mdoc.samples 7 .
+.Pp
+The macros are described in two groups, the first
+includes the structural and physical page layout macros.
+The second contains the manual and general text domain
+macros which differentiate the
+.Nm -\mdoc
+package from other
+.Xr troff
+formatting packages.
+.Sh PAGE STRUCTURE DOMAIN
+.Ss Title Macros
+To create a valid manual page, these three macros, in this order,
+are required:
+.Bl -tag -width "xxxx.Os OPERATINGxSYSTEM [version/release]" -compact
+.It Li "\&.Dd " Ar "Month day, year"
+Document date.
+.It Li "\&.Dt " Ar "DOCUMENT_TITLE [section] [volume]"
+Title, in upper case.
+.It Li "\&.Os " Ar "OPERATING_SYSTEM [version/release]"
+Operating system
+.Pq Tn BSD .
+.El
+.Ss Page Layout Macros
+Section headers, paragraph breaks, lists and displays.
+.Bl -tag -width flag -compact
+.It Li \&.Sh
+Section Headers.
+Valid headers, in the order of presentation:
+.Bl -tag -width "RETURN VALUES" -compact
+.It Ar NAME
+Name section, should include the
+.Ql \&.Nm
+or
+.Ql \&.Fn
+and the
+.Ql \&.Nd
+macros.
+.It Ar SYNOPSIS
+Usage.
+.It Ar DESCRIPTION
+General description, should include
+options and parameters.
+.It Ar RETURN VALUES
+Sections two and three function calls.
+.It Ar ENVIRONMENT
+Describe environment variables.
+.It Ar FILES
+Files associated with the subject.
+.It Ar EXAMPLES
+Examples and suggestions.
+.It Ar DIAGNOSTICS
+Normally used for section four device interface diagnostics.
+.It Ar ERRORS
+Sections two and three error and signal
+handling.
+.It Ar SEE ALSO
+Cross references and citations.
+.It Ar STANDARDS
+Conformance to standards if applicable.
+.It Ar HISTORY
+If a standard is not applicable, the history
+of the subject should be given.
+.It Ar BUGS
+Gotchas and caveats.
+.It Ar SECURITY CONSIDERATIONS
+Security issues to be aware of.
+.It Ar other
+Customized headers may be added at
+the authors discretion.
+.El
+.It Li \&.Ss
+Subsection Headers.
+.It Li \&.Pp
+Paragraph Break.
+Vertical space (one line).
+.It Li \&.D1
+(D-one) Display-one
+Indent and display one text line.
+.It Li \&.Dl
+(D-ell) Display-one literal.
+Indent and display one line of literal text.
+.It Li \&.Bd
+Begin-display block.
+Display options:
+.Bl -tag -width "xoffset string " -compact
+.It Fl ragged
+Unjustified (ragged edges).
+.It Fl filled
+Filled, and if
+.Xr troff 1 ,
+also justified.
+.It Fl unfilled
+Unfilled, unjustified.
+.It Fl literal
+Literal text or code.
+.It Fl file Ar name
+Read in named
+.Ar file
+and display.
+.It Fl offset Ar string
+Offset display.
+Acceptable
+.Ar string
+values:
+.Bl -tag -width indent-two -compact
+.It Ar left
+Align block on left (default).
+.It Ar center
+Approximate center margin.
+.It Ar indent
+Six constant width spaces (a tab).
+.It Ar indent-two
+Two tabs.
+.It Ar right
+Left aligns block 2 inches from
+right.
+.It Ar xx Ns Cm n
+Where
+.Ar xx
+is a number from
+.No \&4 Ns Cm n
+to
+.No \&9\&9 Ns Cm n .
+.It Ar Aa
+Where
+.Ar Aa
+is a callable macro name.
+.It Ar string
+The width of
+.Ar string
+is used.
+.El
+.El
+.It Li \&.Ed
+End-display (matches \&.Bd).
+.It Li \&.Bl
+Begin-list.
+Create lists or columns. Options:
+.Bl -tag -width flag -compact
+.It Em List-types
+.Bl -column "xbullet " -compact
+.It Fl bullet Ta "Bullet Item List"
+.It Fl dash Ta "Dash Item List"
+.It Fl hyphen Ta "(as per" Fl dash ")"
+.It Fl item Ta "Unlabeled List"
+.It Fl enum Ta "Enumerated List"
+.It Fl tag Ta "Tag Labeled List"
+.It Fl diag Ta "Diagnostic List"
+.It Fl hang Ta "Hanging Labeled List"
+.It Fl ohang Ta "Overhanging Labeled List"
+.It Fl inset Ta "Inset or Run-on Labeled List"
+.It Fl column Ta "Multiple Columns"
+.El
+.It Em List-parameters
+.Bl -tag -width "xcompact " -compact
+.It Fl offset
+(All lists.) See
+.Ql \&.Bd
+begin-display above.
+.It Fl width
+.Pf ( Fl tag
+and
+.Fl hang
+lists only.)
+See
+.Ql \&.Bd .
+This parameter is effectively required for
+.Fl tag
+lists.
+.It Fl compact
+(All lists.)
+Suppresses blank lines.
+.El
+.El
+.It Li \&.El
+End-list.
+.It Li \&.It
+List item.
+.El
+.Sh MANUAL AND GENERAL TEXT DOMAIN MACROS
+The manual and general text domain macros are special in that
+most of them are parsed for callable macros
+for example:
+.Bl -tag -width ".Op Fl s Ar filex" -offset indent
+.It Li "\&.Op Fl s Ar file"
+Produces
+.Op Fl s Ar file
+.El
+.Pp
+In this example, the option enclosure macro
+.Ql \&.Op
+is parsed, and calls the callable content macro
+.Ql \&Fl
+which operates on the argument
+.Ql s
+and then calls the callable content macro
+.Ql \&Ar
+which operates on the argument
+.Ql file .
+Some macros may be callable, but are not parsed and vice versa.
+These macros are indicated in the
+.Em parsed
+and
+.Em callable
+columns below.
+.Pp
+Unless stated, manual domain macros share a common syntax:
+.Pp
+.Dl \&.Va argument [\ .\ ,\ ;\ :\ (\ )\ [\ ]\ argument \...\ ]
+.Pp
+.Sy Note :
+Opening and closing
+punctuation characters are only recognized as such if they are presented
+one at a time.
+The string
+.Ql "),"
+is not recognized as punctuation and will be output with a leading white
+space and in what ever font the calling macro uses.
+The
+argument list
+.Ql "] ) ,"
+is recognized as three sequential closing punctuation characters
+and a leading white space is not output between the characters
+and the previous argument (if any).
+The special meaning of a punctuation character may be escaped
+with the string
+.Ql \e& .
+For example the following string,
+.Bl -tag -width "&.Ar file1\ , file2\ , file3\ )\ ." -offset indent
+.It Li "\&.Ar file1\ , file2\ , file3\ )\ ."
+Produces
+.Ar file1 , file2 , file3 ) .
+.El
+.ne 1i
+.Ss Manual Domain Macros
+.Bl -column "Name" "Parsed" "Callable" -compact
+.It Em Name Parsed Callable Description
+.It Li \&Ad Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta Address. "(This macro may be deprecated.)"
+.It Li \&Ar Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Command line argument."
+.It Li \&Cd Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Configuration declaration (section four only)."
+.It Li \&Cm Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Command line argument modifier."
+.It Li \&Dv Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Defined variable (source code)."
+.It Li \&Er Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Error number (source code)."
+.It Li \&Ev Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Environment variable."
+.It Li \&Fa Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Function argument."
+.It Li \&Fd Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Function declaration."
+.It Li \&Fl Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Command line flag."
+.It Li \&Fn Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Function call (also .Fo and .Fc)."
+.It Li \&Ic Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Interactive command."
+.It Li \&Li Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Literal text."
+.It Li \&Nm Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Command name."
+.It Li \&Op Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Option (also .Oo and .Oc)."
+.It Li \&Ot Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Old style function type (Fortran only)."
+.It Li \&Pa Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Pathname or file name."
+.It Li \&St Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Standards (-p1003.2, -p1003.1 or -ansiC)"
+.It Li \&Va Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Variable name."
+.It Li \&Vt Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Variable type (Fortran only)."
+.It Li \&Xr Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Manual Page Cross Reference."
+.El
+.Ss General Text Domain Macros
+.Bl -column "Name" "Parsed" "Callable" -compact
+.It Em "Name Parsed Callable Description"
+.It Li \&%A Ta Yes Ta \&No Ta "Reference author."
+.It Li \&%B Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Reference book title."
+.It Li \&%\&C Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Reference place of publishing (city)."
+.It Li \&%\&D Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Reference date."
+.It Li \&%J Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Reference journal title."
+.It Li \&%N Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Reference issue number."
+.It Li \&%\&O Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Reference optional information."
+.It Li \&%P Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Reference page number(s)."
+.It Li \&%R Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Reference report Name."
+.It Li \&%T Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Reference article title."
+.It Li \&%V Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Reference volume."
+.It Li \&Ac Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Angle close quote."
+.It Li \&Ao Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Angle open quote."
+.It Li \&Ap Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Insert apostrophe; switch to .No mode "
+.It Li \&Aq Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Angle quote."
+.It Li \&At Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta Tn "AT&T UNIX."
+.It Li \&Bc Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Bracket close quote."
+.It Li \&Bf Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Begin font mode."
+.It Li \&Bo Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Bracket open quote."
+.It Li \&Bq Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Bracket quote."
+.It Li \&Bx Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "BSD" .
+.It Li \&Db Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Debug (default is \\*qoff\\*q)."
+.It Li \&Dc Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Double close quote."
+.It Li \&Do Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Double open quote."
+.It Li \&Dq Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Double quote."
+.It Li \&Ec Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Enclose string close quote."
+.It Li \&Ef Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "End font mode."
+.It Li \&Em Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Emphasis (traditional English)."
+.It Li \&Eo Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Enclose string open quote."
+.It Li \&Fx Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "FreeBSD."
+.It Li \&No Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Normal text (no-op)."
+.It Li \&Ns Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "No space."
+.It Li \&Nx Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "NetBSD."
+.It Li \&Pc Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Parenthesis close quote."
+.It Li \&Pf Ta Yes Ta \&No Ta "Prefix string."
+.It Li \&Po Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Parenthesis open quote."
+.It Li \&Pq Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Parentheses quote."
+.It Li \&Qc Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Strait Double close quote."
+.It Li \&Ql Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Quoted literal."
+.It Li \&Qo Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Strait Double open quote."
+.It Li \&Qq Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Strait Double quote."
+.It Li \&Re Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Reference end."
+.It Li \&Rs Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Reference start."
+.It Li \&Sc Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Single close quote."
+.It Li \&So Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Single open quote."
+.It Li \&Sq Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Single quote."
+.It Li \&Sm Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Space mode (default is \\*qon\\*q)."
+.It Li \&Sx Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Section Cross Reference."
+.It Li \&Sy Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Symbolic (traditional English)."
+.It Li \&Tn Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Trade or type name (small Caps)."
+.It Li \&Ux Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "UNIX."
+.It Li \&Xc Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Extend argument list close."
+.It Li \&Xo Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Extend argument list open."
+.El
+.\" .It Sy \&Hf Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Include file with header"
+.Pp
+Macro names ending in
+.Ql q
+quote remaining items on the argument list.
+Macro names ending in
+.Ql o
+begin a quote which may span more than one line of input and
+are close quoted with the matching macro name ending in
+.Ql c .
+Enclosure macros may be nested and are limited to
+eight arguments.
+.Pp
+Note: the extended argument list macros
+.Pf ( Ql \&.Xo ,
+.Ql \&.Xc )
+and the function enclosure macros
+.Pf ( Ql \&.Fo ,
+.Ql \&.Fc )
+are irregular.
+The extended list macros are used when the number of macro arguments
+would exceed the
+.Xr troff
+limitation of nine arguments.
+.Sh CONFIGURATION
+For site specific configuration of the macro package,
+see the file
+.Pa /usr/src/share/tmac/README .
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width "tmac.doc-ditroff" -compact
+.It Pa tmac.doc
+Manual and general text domain macros.
+.It Pa tmac.doc-common
+Common structural macros and definitions.
+.It Pa tmac.doc-nroff
+Site dependent
+.Xr nroff
+style file.
+.It Pa tmac.doc-ditroff
+Site dependent
+.Xr troff
+style file.
+.It Pa tmac.doc-syms
+Special defines (such as the standards macro).
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr mdoc.samples 7
+++ /dev/null
-.\" $NetBSD: mdoc.7,v 1.14 1999/08/30 00:41:28 ross Exp $
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1991, 1993
-.\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" @(#)mdoc.7 8.2 (Berkeley) 12/30/93
-.\"
-.Dd November 24, 1997
-.Os
-.Dt MDOC 7
-.Sh NAME
-.Nm mdoc
-.Nd quick reference guide for the
-.Nm \-mdoc
-macro package
-.Sh SYNOPSIS
-.Nm groff
-.Fl m Ns Ar doc
-.Ar files ...
-.Sh DESCRIPTION
-The
-.Nm \-mdoc
-package is a set of content-based and domain-based macros
-used to format the
-.Bx
-man pages.
-The macro names and their meanings are
-listed below for quick reference; for
-a detailed explanation on using the package,
-see the tutorial sampler
-.Xr mdoc.samples 7 .
-.Pp
-The macros are described in two groups, the first
-includes the structural and physical page layout macros.
-The second contains the manual and general text domain
-macros which differentiate the
-.Nm -\mdoc
-package from other
-.Xr troff
-formatting packages.
-.Sh PAGE STRUCTURE DOMAIN
-.Ss Title Macros
-To create a valid manual page, these three macros, in this order,
-are required:
-.Bl -tag -width "xxxx.Os OPERATINGxSYSTEM [version/release]" -compact
-.It Li "\&.Dd " Ar "Month day, year"
-Document date.
-.It Li "\&.Dt " Ar "DOCUMENT_TITLE [section] [volume]"
-Title, in upper case.
-.It Li "\&.Os " Ar "OPERATING_SYSTEM [version/release]"
-Operating system
-.Pq Tn BSD .
-.El
-.Ss Page Layout Macros
-Section headers, paragraph breaks, lists and displays.
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact
-.It Li \&.Sh
-Section Headers.
-Valid headers, in the order of presentation:
-.Bl -tag -width "RETURN VALUES" -compact
-.It Ar NAME
-Name section, should include the
-.Ql \&.Nm
-or
-.Ql \&.Fn
-and the
-.Ql \&.Nd
-macros.
-.It Ar SYNOPSIS
-Usage.
-.It Ar DESCRIPTION
-General description, should include
-options and parameters.
-.It Ar RETURN VALUES
-Sections two and three function calls.
-.It Ar ENVIRONMENT
-Describe environment variables.
-.It Ar FILES
-Files associated with the subject.
-.It Ar EXAMPLES
-Examples and suggestions.
-.It Ar DIAGNOSTICS
-Normally used for section four device interface diagnostics.
-.It Ar ERRORS
-Sections two and three error and signal
-handling.
-.It Ar SEE ALSO
-Cross references and citations.
-.It Ar STANDARDS
-Conformance to standards if applicable.
-.It Ar HISTORY
-If a standard is not applicable, the history
-of the subject should be given.
-.It Ar BUGS
-Gotchas and caveats.
-.It Ar SECURITY CONSIDERATIONS
-Security issues to be aware of.
-.It Ar other
-Customized headers may be added at
-the authors discretion.
-.El
-.It Li \&.Ss
-Subsection Headers.
-.It Li \&.Pp
-Paragraph Break.
-Vertical space (one line).
-.It Li \&.D1
-(D-one) Display-one
-Indent and display one text line.
-.It Li \&.Dl
-(D-ell) Display-one literal.
-Indent and display one line of literal text.
-.It Li \&.Bd
-Begin-display block.
-Display options:
-.Bl -tag -width "xoffset string " -compact
-.It Fl ragged
-Unjustified (ragged edges).
-.It Fl filled
-Filled, and if
-.Xr troff 1 ,
-also justified.
-.It Fl unfilled
-Unfilled, unjustified.
-.It Fl literal
-Literal text or code.
-.It Fl file Ar name
-Read in named
-.Ar file
-and display.
-.It Fl offset Ar string
-Offset display.
-Acceptable
-.Ar string
-values:
-.Bl -tag -width indent-two -compact
-.It Ar left
-Align block on left (default).
-.It Ar center
-Approximate center margin.
-.It Ar indent
-Six constant width spaces (a tab).
-.It Ar indent-two
-Two tabs.
-.It Ar right
-Left aligns block 2 inches from
-right.
-.It Ar xx Ns Cm n
-Where
-.Ar xx
-is a number from
-.No \&4 Ns Cm n
-to
-.No \&9\&9 Ns Cm n .
-.It Ar Aa
-Where
-.Ar Aa
-is a callable macro name.
-.It Ar string
-The width of
-.Ar string
-is used.
-.El
-.El
-.It Li \&.Ed
-End-display (matches \&.Bd).
-.It Li \&.Bl
-Begin-list.
-Create lists or columns. Options:
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact
-.It Em List-types
-.Bl -column "xbullet " -compact
-.It Fl bullet Ta "Bullet Item List"
-.It Fl dash Ta "Dash Item List"
-.It Fl hyphen Ta "(as per" Fl dash ")"
-.It Fl item Ta "Unlabeled List"
-.It Fl enum Ta "Enumerated List"
-.It Fl tag Ta "Tag Labeled List"
-.It Fl diag Ta "Diagnostic List"
-.It Fl hang Ta "Hanging Labeled List"
-.It Fl ohang Ta "Overhanging Labeled List"
-.It Fl inset Ta "Inset or Run-on Labeled List"
-.It Fl column Ta "Multiple Columns"
-.El
-.It Em List-parameters
-.Bl -tag -width "xcompact " -compact
-.It Fl offset
-(All lists.) See
-.Ql \&.Bd
-begin-display above.
-.It Fl width
-.Pf ( Fl tag
-and
-.Fl hang
-lists only.)
-See
-.Ql \&.Bd .
-This parameter is effectively required for
-.Fl tag
-lists.
-.It Fl compact
-(All lists.)
-Suppresses blank lines.
-.El
-.El
-.It Li \&.El
-End-list.
-.It Li \&.It
-List item.
-.El
-.Sh MANUAL AND GENERAL TEXT DOMAIN MACROS
-The manual and general text domain macros are special in that
-most of them are parsed for callable macros
-for example:
-.Bl -tag -width ".Op Fl s Ar filex" -offset indent
-.It Li "\&.Op Fl s Ar file"
-Produces
-.Op Fl s Ar file
-.El
-.Pp
-In this example, the option enclosure macro
-.Ql \&.Op
-is parsed, and calls the callable content macro
-.Ql \&Fl
-which operates on the argument
-.Ql s
-and then calls the callable content macro
-.Ql \&Ar
-which operates on the argument
-.Ql file .
-Some macros may be callable, but are not parsed and vice versa.
-These macros are indicated in the
-.Em parsed
-and
-.Em callable
-columns below.
-.Pp
-Unless stated, manual domain macros share a common syntax:
-.Pp
-.Dl \&.Va argument [\ .\ ,\ ;\ :\ (\ )\ [\ ]\ argument \...\ ]
-.Pp
-.Sy Note :
-Opening and closing
-punctuation characters are only recognized as such if they are presented
-one at a time.
-The string
-.Ql "),"
-is not recognized as punctuation and will be output with a leading white
-space and in what ever font the calling macro uses.
-The
-argument list
-.Ql "] ) ,"
-is recognized as three sequential closing punctuation characters
-and a leading white space is not output between the characters
-and the previous argument (if any).
-The special meaning of a punctuation character may be escaped
-with the string
-.Ql \e& .
-For example the following string,
-.Bl -tag -width "&.Ar file1\ , file2\ , file3\ )\ ." -offset indent
-.It Li "\&.Ar file1\ , file2\ , file3\ )\ ."
-Produces
-.Ar file1 , file2 , file3 ) .
-.El
-.ne 1i
-.Ss Manual Domain Macros
-.Bl -column "Name" "Parsed" "Callable" -compact
-.It Em Name Parsed Callable Description
-.It Li \&Ad Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta Address. "(This macro may be deprecated.)"
-.It Li \&Ar Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Command line argument."
-.It Li \&Cd Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Configuration declaration (section four only)."
-.It Li \&Cm Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Command line argument modifier."
-.It Li \&Dv Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Defined variable (source code)."
-.It Li \&Er Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Error number (source code)."
-.It Li \&Ev Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Environment variable."
-.It Li \&Fa Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Function argument."
-.It Li \&Fd Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Function declaration."
-.It Li \&Fl Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Command line flag."
-.It Li \&Fn Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Function call (also .Fo and .Fc)."
-.It Li \&Ic Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Interactive command."
-.It Li \&Li Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Literal text."
-.It Li \&Nm Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Command name."
-.It Li \&Op Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Option (also .Oo and .Oc)."
-.It Li \&Ot Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Old style function type (Fortran only)."
-.It Li \&Pa Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Pathname or file name."
-.It Li \&St Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Standards (-p1003.2, -p1003.1 or -ansiC)"
-.It Li \&Va Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Variable name."
-.It Li \&Vt Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Variable type (Fortran only)."
-.It Li \&Xr Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Manual Page Cross Reference."
-.El
-.Ss General Text Domain Macros
-.Bl -column "Name" "Parsed" "Callable" -compact
-.It Em "Name Parsed Callable Description"
-.It Li \&%A Ta Yes Ta \&No Ta "Reference author."
-.It Li \&%B Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Reference book title."
-.It Li \&%\&C Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Reference place of publishing (city)."
-.It Li \&%\&D Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Reference date."
-.It Li \&%J Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Reference journal title."
-.It Li \&%N Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Reference issue number."
-.It Li \&%\&O Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Reference optional information."
-.It Li \&%P Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Reference page number(s)."
-.It Li \&%R Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Reference report Name."
-.It Li \&%T Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Reference article title."
-.It Li \&%V Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Reference volume."
-.It Li \&Ac Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Angle close quote."
-.It Li \&Ao Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Angle open quote."
-.It Li \&Ap Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Insert apostrophe; switch to .No mode "
-.It Li \&Aq Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Angle quote."
-.It Li \&At Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta Tn "AT&T UNIX."
-.It Li \&Bc Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Bracket close quote."
-.It Li \&Bf Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Begin font mode."
-.It Li \&Bo Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Bracket open quote."
-.It Li \&Bq Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Bracket quote."
-.It Li \&Bx Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "BSD" .
-.It Li \&Db Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Debug (default is \\*qoff\\*q)."
-.It Li \&Dc Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Double close quote."
-.It Li \&Do Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Double open quote."
-.It Li \&Dq Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Double quote."
-.It Li \&Ec Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Enclose string close quote."
-.It Li \&Ef Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "End font mode."
-.It Li \&Em Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Emphasis (traditional English)."
-.It Li \&Eo Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Enclose string open quote."
-.It Li \&Fx Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "FreeBSD."
-.It Li \&No Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Normal text (no-op)."
-.It Li \&Ns Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "No space."
-.It Li \&Nx Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "NetBSD."
-.It Li \&Pc Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Parenthesis close quote."
-.It Li \&Pf Ta Yes Ta \&No Ta "Prefix string."
-.It Li \&Po Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Parenthesis open quote."
-.It Li \&Pq Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Parentheses quote."
-.It Li \&Qc Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Strait Double close quote."
-.It Li \&Ql Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Quoted literal."
-.It Li \&Qo Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Strait Double open quote."
-.It Li \&Qq Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Strait Double quote."
-.It Li \&Re Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Reference end."
-.It Li \&Rs Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Reference start."
-.It Li \&Sc Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Single close quote."
-.It Li \&So Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Single open quote."
-.It Li \&Sq Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Single quote."
-.It Li \&Sm Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Space mode (default is \\*qon\\*q)."
-.It Li \&Sx Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Section Cross Reference."
-.It Li \&Sy Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Symbolic (traditional English)."
-.It Li \&Tn Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Trade or type name (small Caps)."
-.It Li \&Ux Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "UNIX."
-.It Li \&Xc Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Extend argument list close."
-.It Li \&Xo Ta Yes Ta Yes Ta "Extend argument list open."
-.El
-.\" .It Sy \&Hf Ta \&No Ta \&No Ta "Include file with header"
-.Pp
-Macro names ending in
-.Ql q
-quote remaining items on the argument list.
-Macro names ending in
-.Ql o
-begin a quote which may span more than one line of input and
-are close quoted with the matching macro name ending in
-.Ql c .
-Enclosure macros may be nested and are limited to
-eight arguments.
-.Pp
-Note: the extended argument list macros
-.Pf ( Ql \&.Xo ,
-.Ql \&.Xc )
-and the function enclosure macros
-.Pf ( Ql \&.Fo ,
-.Ql \&.Fc )
-are irregular.
-The extended list macros are used when the number of macro arguments
-would exceed the
-.Xr troff
-limitation of nine arguments.
-.Sh CONFIGURATION
-For site specific configuration of the macro package,
-see the file
-.Pa /usr/src/share/tmac/README .
-.Sh FILES
-.Bl -tag -width "tmac.doc-ditroff" -compact
-.It Pa tmac.doc
-Manual and general text domain macros.
-.It Pa tmac.doc-common
-Common structural macros and definitions.
-.It Pa tmac.doc-nroff
-Site dependent
-.Xr nroff
-style file.
-.It Pa tmac.doc-ditroff
-Site dependent
-.Xr troff
-style file.
-.It Pa tmac.doc-syms
-Special defines (such as the standards macro).
-.El
-.Sh SEE ALSO
-.Xr mdoc.samples 7
--- /dev/null
+.\" $NetBSD: mdoc.samples.7,v 1.21 1999/08/23 21:54:20 ross Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1993
+.\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\" without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\" @(#)mdoc.samples.7 8.2 (Berkeley) 12/30/93
+.\"
+.\" This tutorial sampler invokes every macro in the package several
+.\" times and is guaranteed to give a worst case performance
+.\" for an already extremely slow package.
+.\"
+.Dd November 24, 1997
+.Os
+.Dt MDOC.SAMPLES 7
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm mdoc.samples
+.Nd tutorial sampler for writing
+.Bx
+manuals with
+.Nm \-mdoc
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm man mdoc.samples
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+A tutorial sampler for writing
+.Bx
+manual pages with the
+.Nm \-mdoc
+macro package, a
+.Em content Ns \-based
+and
+.Em domain Ns \-based
+formatting
+package for
+.Xr troff 1 .
+Its predecessor, the
+.Xr \-man 7
+package,
+addressed page layout leaving the
+manipulation of fonts and other
+typesetting details to the individual author.
+In
+.Nm \-mdoc ,
+page layout macros
+make up the
+.Em "page structure domain"
+which consists of macros for titles, section headers, displays
+and lists. Essentially items which affect the physical position
+of text on a formatted page.
+In addition to the page structure domain, there are two more domains,
+the manual domain and the general text domain.
+The general text domain is defined as macros which
+perform tasks such as quoting or emphasizing pieces of text.
+The manual domain is defined as macros that are a subset of the
+day to day informal language used to describe commands, routines
+and related
+.Bx
+files.
+Macros in the manual domain handle
+command names, command line arguments and options, function names,
+function parameters, pathnames, variables, cross
+references to other manual pages, and so on.
+These domain
+items have value
+for both the author and the future user of the manual page.
+It is hoped the consistency gained
+across the manual set will provide easier
+translation to future documentation tools.
+.Pp
+Throughout the
+.Ux
+manual pages, a manual entry
+is simply referred
+to as a man page, regardless of actual length and without
+sexist intention.
+.Sh GETTING STARTED
+Since a tutorial document is normally read when a person
+desires to use the material immediately, the assumption has
+been made that the user of this document may be impatient.
+The material presented in the remained of this document is
+outlined as follows:
+.Bl -enum -offset indent
+.It
+.Tn "TROFF IDIOSYNCRASIES"
+.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
+.It "Macro Usage" .
+.It "Passing Space Characters in an Argument" .
+.It "Trailing Blank Space Characters (a warning)" .
+.It "Escaping Special Characters" .
+.El
+.It
+.Tn "THE ANATOMY OF A MAN PAGE"
+.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
+.It "A manual page template" .
+.El
+.It
+.Tn "INTRODUCTION OF TITLE MACROS" .
+.It
+.Tn "INTRODUCTION OF MANUAL AND GENERAL TEXT DOMAINS" .
+.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
+.It "What's in a name..." .
+.It "General Syntax" .
+.El
+.It
+.Tn "MANUAL DOMAIN"
+.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
+.It "Addresses" .
+.It "Arguments" .
+.It "Configuration Declarations (section four only)" .
+.It "Command Modifier" .
+.It "Defined Variables" .
+.It "Errno's (Section two only)" .
+.It "Environment Variables" .
+.It "Function Argument" .
+.It "Function Declaration" .
+.It "Flags" .
+.It "Functions (library routines)" .
+.It "Function Types" .
+.\" .It "Header File (including source code)" .
+.It "Interactive Commands" .
+.It "Literals" .
+.It "Names" .
+.It "Options" .
+.It "Pathnames" .
+.It "Variables" .
+.It "Cross References" .
+.El
+.It
+.Tn "GENERAL TEXT DOMAIN"
+.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
+.It "AT&T Macro" .
+.It "BSD Macro" .
+.It "UNIX Macro" .
+.It "Emphasis Macro" .
+.It "Enclosure/Quoting Macros"
+.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
+.It "Angle Bracket Quote/Enclosure" .
+.It "Bracket Quotes/Enclosure" .
+.It "Double Quote macro/Enclosure" .
+.It "Parenthesis Quote/Enclosure" .
+.It "Single Quotes/Enclosure" .
+.It "Prefix Macro" .
+.El
+.It "Extended Arguments" .
+.It "No\-Op or Normal Text Macro" .
+.It "No Space Macro" .
+.It "Section Cross References" .
+.It "Symbolic Macro" .
+.It "References and Citations" .
+.It "Trade Names (Acronyms and Type Names)" .
+.El
+.It
+.Tn "PAGE STRUCTURE DOMAIN"
+.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
+.It "Section Headers" .
+.It "Paragraphs and Line Spacing" .
+.It "Keeps" .
+.It "Displays" .
+.It "Lists and Columns" .
+.El
+.It
+.Tn "PREDEFINED STRINGS"
+.It
+.Tn "DIAGNOSTICS"
+.It
+.Tn "FORMATTING WITH GROFF, TROFF AND NROFF"
+.It
+.Tn "BUGS"
+.El
+.ne 7
+.Sh TROFF IDIOSYNCRASIES
+The
+.Nm \-mdoc
+package attempts to simplify the process of writing a man page.
+Theoretically, one should not have to learn the dirty details of
+.Xr troff 1
+to use
+.Nm \-mdoc ;
+however, there are a few
+limitations which are unavoidable and best gotten out
+of the way.
+And, too, be forewarned, this package is
+.Em not
+fast.
+.Ss Macro Usage
+As in
+.Xr troff 1 ,
+a macro is called by placing a
+.Ql \&\.
+(dot character)
+at the beginning of
+a line followed by the two character name for the macro.
+Arguments may follow the macro separated by spaces.
+It is the dot character at the beginning of the line which causes
+.Xr troff 1
+to interpret the next two characters as a macro name.
+To place a
+.Ql \&\.
+(dot character)
+at the beginning of a line in some context other than
+a macro invocation, precede the
+.Ql \&\.
+(dot) with the
+.Ql \e&
+escape sequence.
+The
+.Ql \e&
+translates literally to a zero width space, and is never displayed in the
+output.
+.Pp
+In general,
+.Xr troff 1
+macros accept up to nine arguments, any
+extra arguments are ignored.
+Most macros in
+.Nm \-mdoc
+accept nine arguments and,
+in limited cases, arguments may be continued or extended
+on the
+next line (See
+.Sx Extended Arguments ) .
+A few macros handle quoted arguments (see
+.Sx Passing Space Characters in an Argument
+below).
+.Pp
+Most of the
+.Nm \-mdoc
+general text domain and manual domain macros are special
+in that their argument lists are
+.Em parsed
+for callable macro names.
+This means an argument on the argument list which matches
+a general text or manual domain macro name and is determined
+to be callable will be executed
+or called when it is processed.
+In this case
+the argument, although the name of a macro,
+is not preceded by a
+.Ql \&\.
+(dot).
+It is in this manner that many macros are nested; for
+example
+the option macro,
+.Ql \&.Op ,
+may
+.Em call
+the flag and argument macros,
+.Ql \&Fl
+and
+.Ql \&Ar ,
+to specify an optional flag with an argument:
+.Bl -tag -width "\&.Op \&Fl s \&Ar bytes" -offset indent
+.It Op Fl s Ar bytes
+is produced by
+.Li \&.Op \&Fl s \&Ar bytes
+.El
+.Pp
+To prevent a two character
+string from being interpreted as a macro name, precede
+the string with the
+escape sequence
+.Ql \e& :
+.Bl -tag -width "\&.Op \&Fl s \&Ar bytes" -offset indent
+.It Op \&Fl s \&Ar bytes
+is produced by
+.Li \&.Op \e&Fl s \e&Ar bytes
+.El
+.Pp
+Here the strings
+.Ql \&Fl
+and
+.Ql \&Ar
+are not interpreted as macros.
+Macros whose argument lists are parsed for callable arguments
+are referred to
+as parsed and macros which may be called from an argument
+list are referred to as callable
+throughout this document and in the companion quick reference
+manual
+.Xr mdoc 7 .
+This is a technical
+.Em faux pas
+as almost all of the macros in
+.Nm \-mdoc
+are parsed, but as it was cumbersome to constantly refer to macros
+as being callable and being able to call other macros,
+the term parsed has been used.
+.Ss Passing Space Characters in an Argument
+Sometimes it is desirable to give as one argument a string
+containing one or more blank space characters.
+This may be necessary
+to defeat the nine argument limit or to specify arguments to macros
+which expect particular arrangement of items in the argument list.
+For example,
+the function macro
+.Ql \&.Fn
+expects the first argument to be the name of a function and any
+remaining arguments to be function parameters.
+As
+.Tn "ANSI C"
+stipulates the declaration of function parameters in the
+parenthesized parameter list, each parameter is guaranteed
+to be at minimum a two word string.
+For example,
+.Fa int foo .
+.Pp
+There are two possible ways to pass an argument which contains
+an embedded space.
+.Em Implementation note :
+Unfortunately, the most convenient way
+of passing spaces in between quotes by reassigning individual
+arguments before parsing was fairly expensive speed wise
+and space wise to implement in all the macros for
+.Tn AT&T
+.Xr troff .
+It is not expensive for
+.Xr groff
+but for the sake of portability, has been limited
+to the following macros which need
+it the most:
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width 4n -offset indent -compact
+.It Li \&Cd
+Configuration declaration (section 4
+.Sx SYNOPSIS )
+.It Li \&Bl
+Begin list (for the width specifier).
+.It Li \&Em
+Emphasized text.
+.It Li \&Fn
+Functions (sections two and four).
+.It Li \&It
+List items.
+.It Li \&Li
+Literal text.
+.It Li \&Sy
+Symbolic text.
+.It Li \&%B
+Book titles.
+.It Li \&%J
+Journal names.
+.It Li \&%O
+Optional notes for a reference.
+.It Li \&%R
+Report title (in a reference).
+.It Li \&%T
+Title of article in a book or journal.
+.El
+.Pp
+One way of passing a string
+containing blank spaces is to use the hard or unpaddable space character
+.Ql \e\ ,
+that is, a blank space preceded by the escape character
+.Ql \e .
+This method may be used with any macro but has the side effect
+of interfering with the adjustment of text
+over the length of a line.
+.Xr Troff
+sees the hard space as if it were any other printable character and
+cannot split the string into blank or newline separated pieces as one
+would expect.
+The method is useful for strings which are not expected
+to overlap a line boundary.
+For example:
+.Bl -tag -width "fetch(char *str)" -offset indent
+.It Fn fetch char\ *str
+is created by
+.Ql \&.Fn fetch char\e *str
+.It Fn fetch "char *str"
+can also be created by
+.Ql \&.Fn fetch "\\*q*char *str\\*q"
+.El
+.Pp
+If the
+.Ql \e
+or quotes
+were omitted,
+.Ql \&.Fn
+would see three arguments and
+the result would be:
+.Pp
+.Dl Fn fetch char *str
+.Pp
+For an example of what happens when the parameter list overlaps
+a newline boundary, see the
+.Sx BUGS
+section.
+.Ss Trailing Blank Space Characters
+.Xr Troff
+can be confused by blank space characters at the end of a line.
+It
+is a wise preventive measure to globally remove all blank spaces
+from <blank-space><end-of-line> character sequences.
+Should the need
+arise to force a blank character at the end of a line,
+it may be forced with an unpaddable space and the
+.Ql \e&
+escape character.
+For example,
+.Ql string\e\ \e& .
+.Ss Escaping Special Characters
+Special characters
+like the newline character
+.Ql \en ,
+are handled by replacing the
+.Ql \e
+with
+.Ql \ee
+(e.g.
+.Ql \een )
+to preserve
+the backslash.
+.Sh THE ANATOMY OF A MAN PAGE
+The body of a man page is easily constructed from a basic
+template found in the file:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+\&.\e" /usr/share/misc/mdoc.template:
+\&.\e" The following six lines are required.
+\&.Dd Month day, year
+\&.Os OPERATING_SYSTEM [version/release]
+\&.Dt DOCUMENT_TITLE [section number] [volume]
+\&.Sh NAME
+\&.Sh SYNOPSIS
+\&.Sh DESCRIPTION
+\&.\e" The following requests should be uncommented and
+\&.\e" used where appropriate. This next request is
+\&.\e" for sections 2 and 3 function return values only.
+\&.\e" .Sh RETURN VALUES
+\&.\e" This next request is for sections 1, 6, 7 & 8 only
+\&.\e" .Sh ENVIRONMENT
+\&.\e" .Sh FILES
+\&.\e" .Sh EXAMPLES
+\&.\e" This next request is for sections 1, 6, 7 & 8 only
+\&.\e" (command return values (to shell) and
+\&.\e" fprintf/stderr type diagnostics)
+\&.\e" .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
+\&.\e" The next request is for sections 2 and 3 error
+\&.\e" and signal handling only.
+\&.\e" .Sh ERRORS
+\&.\e" .Sh SEE ALSO
+\&.\e" .Sh STANDARDS
+\&.\e" .Sh HISTORY
+\&.\e" .Sh AUTHORS
+\&.\e" .Sh BUGS
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The first items in the template are the macros
+.Pq Li \&.Dd , \&.Os , \&.Dt ;
+the document date,
+the operating system the man page or subject source is developed
+or modified for,
+and the man page title
+.Pq Em in upper case
+along with the section of the manual the page
+belongs in.
+These macros identify the page,
+and are discussed below in
+.Sx TITLE MACROS .
+.Pp
+The remaining items in the template are section headers
+.Pq Li \&.Sh ;
+of which
+.Sx NAME ,
+.Sx SYNOPSIS
+and
+.Sx DESCRIPTION
+are mandatory.
+The
+headers are
+discussed in
+.Sx PAGE STRUCTURE DOMAIN ,
+after
+presentation of
+.Sx MANUAL DOMAIN .
+Several content macros are used to demonstrate page layout macros;
+reading about content macros before page layout macros is
+recommended.
+.Sh TITLE MACROS
+The title macros are the first portion of the page structure
+domain, but are presented first and separate for someone who
+wishes to start writing a man page yesterday.
+Three header macros designate the document title or manual page title,
+the operating system,
+and the date of authorship.
+These macros are one called once at the very beginning of the document
+and are used to construct the headers and footers only.
+.Bl -tag -width 6n
+.It Li \&.Dt DOCUMENT_TITLE section# [volume]
+The document title is the
+subject of the man page and must be in
+.Tn CAPITALS
+due to troff
+limitations.
+The section number may be 1,\ ...,\ 9,
+and if it is specified,
+the volume title may be omitted.
+A volume title may be arbitrary or one of the following:
+.\" .Cl
+.\" USD UNIX User's Supplementary Documents
+.\" .Cl
+.\" PS1 UNIX Programmer's Supplementary Documents
+.Pp
+.Bl -column SMM -offset indent -compact
+.It Li AMD NetBSD Ancestral Manual Documents
+.It Li SMM NetBSD System Manager's Manual
+.It Li URM NetBSD Reference Manual
+.It Li PRM NetBSD Programmer's Manual
+.It Li KM NetBSD Kernel Manual
+.El
+.Pp
+The default volume labeling is
+.Li URM
+for sections 1, 6, and 7;
+.Li SMM
+for section 8;
+.Li PRM
+for sections 2, 3, 4, and 5;
+.Li KM
+for section 9.
+.\" .Cl
+.\" MMI UNIX Manual Master Index
+.\" .Cl
+.\" CON UNIX Contributed Software Manual
+.\" .Cl
+.\" LOC UNIX Local Manual
+.It Li \&.Os operating_system release#
+The name of the operating system
+should be the common acronym, e.g.
+.Tn BSD
+or
+.Tn ATT .
+The release should be the standard release
+nomenclature for the system specified, e.g. 4.3, 4.3+Tahoe, V.3,
+V.4.
+Unrecognized arguments are displayed as given in the page footer.
+For instance, a typical footer might be:
+.Pp
+.Dl \&.Os BSD 4.3
+.Pp
+or for a locally produced set
+.Pp
+.Dl \&.Os CS Department
+.Pp
+The Berkeley default,
+.Ql \&.Os
+without an argument, has been defined as
+.Nx 1.4
+in the site specific file
+.Pa /usr/share/tmac/tmac.doc-common .
+Note, if the
+.Ql \&.Os
+macro is not present, the bottom left corner of the page
+will be ugly.
+.It Li \&.Dd month day, year
+The date should be written formally:
+.Pp
+.ne 5
+.Dl January 25, 1989
+.sp
+Note that the date must not be placed in quotes!
+.El
+.Sh MANUAL DOMAIN
+.Ss What's in a name...
+The manual domain macro names are derived from the day to day
+informal language used to describe commands, subroutines and related
+files.
+Slightly
+different variations of this language are used to describe
+the three different aspects of writing a man page.
+First, there is the description of
+.Nm \-mdoc
+macro request usage.
+Second is the description of a
+.Ux
+command
+.Em with
+.Nm \-mdoc
+macros and third,
+the
+description of a command to a user in the verbal sense;
+that is, discussion of a command in the text of a man page.
+.Pp
+In the first case,
+.Xr troff 1
+macros are themselves a type of command;
+the general syntax for a troff command is:
+.Bd -filled -offset indent
+\&.Va argument1 argument2 ... argument9
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The
+.Ql \&.Va
+is a macro command or request, and anything following it is an argument to
+be processed.
+In the second case,
+the description of a
+.Ux
+command using the content macros is a
+bit more involved;
+a typical
+.Sx SYNOPSIS
+command line might be displayed as:
+.Bd -filled -offset indent
+.Nm filter
+.Op Fl flag
+.Ar infile outfile
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Here,
+.Nm filter
+is the command name and the
+bracketed string
+.Fl flag
+is a
+.Em flag
+argument designated as optional by the option brackets.
+In
+.Nm \-mdoc
+terms,
+.Ar infile
+and
+.Ar outfile
+are
+called
+.Em arguments .
+The macros which formatted the above example:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+\&.Nm filter
+\&.Op \&Fl flag
+\&.Ar infile outfile
+.Ed
+.Pp
+In the third case, discussion of commands and command syntax
+includes both examples above, but may add more detail.
+The
+arguments
+.Ar infile
+and
+.Ar outfile
+from the example above might be referred to as
+.Em operands
+or
+.Em file arguments .
+Some command line argument lists are quite long:
+.Bl -tag -width make -offset indent
+.It Nm make
+.Op Fl eiknqrstv
+.Op Fl D Ar variable
+.Op Fl d Ar flags
+.Op Fl f Ar makefile
+.Bk -words
+.Op Fl I Ar directory
+.Ek
+.Op Fl j Ar max_jobs
+.Op Ar variable=value
+.Bk -words
+.Op Ar target ...
+.Ek
+.El
+.Pp
+Here one might talk about the command
+.Nm make
+and qualify the argument
+.Ar makefile ,
+as an argument to the flag,
+.Fl f ,
+or discuss the optional
+file
+operand
+.Ar target .
+In the verbal context, such detail can prevent confusion,
+however the
+.Nm \-mdoc
+package
+does not have a macro for an argument
+.Em to
+a flag.
+Instead the
+.Ql \&Ar
+argument macro is used for an operand or file argument like
+.Ar target
+as well as an argument to a flag like
+.Ar variable .
+The make command line was produced from:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+\&.Nm make
+\&.Op Fl eiknqrstv
+\&.Op Fl D Ar variable
+\&.Op Fl d Ar flags
+\&.Op Fl f Ar makefile
+\&.Op Fl I Ar directory
+\&.Op Fl j Ar max_jobs
+\&.Op Ar variable=value
+\&.Bk -words
+\&.Op Ar target ...
+\&.Ek
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The
+.Ql \&.Bk
+and
+.Ql \&.Ek
+macros are explained in
+.Sx Keeps .
+.Ss General Syntax
+The manual domain and general text domain macros share a similar
+syntax with a few minor deviations:
+.Ql \&.Ar ,
+.Ql \&.Fl ,
+.Ql \&.Nm ,
+and
+.Ql \&.Pa
+differ only when called without arguments;
+.Ql \&.Fn
+and
+.Ql \&.Xr
+impose an order on their argument lists
+and the
+.Ql \&.Op
+and
+.Ql \&.Fn
+macros
+have nesting limitations.
+All content macros
+are capable of recognizing and properly handling punctuation,
+provided each punctuation character is separated by a leading space.
+If an request is given:
+.Pp
+.Dl \&.Li sptr, ptr),
+.Pp
+The result is:
+.Pp
+.Dl Li sptr, ptr),
+.Pp
+The punctuation is not recognized and all is output in the
+literal font. If the punctuation is separated by a leading
+white space:
+.Pp
+.Dl \&.Li "sptr , ptr ) ,"
+.Pp
+The result is:
+.Pp
+.Dl Li sptr , ptr ) ,
+.Pp
+The punctuation is now recognized and is output in the
+default font distinguishing it from the strings in literal font.
+.Pp
+To remove the special meaning from a punctuation character
+escape it with
+.Ql \e& .
+.Xr Troff
+is limited as a macro language, and has difficulty
+when presented with a string containing
+a member of the mathematical, logical or
+quotation set:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent-two
+\&{+,\-,/,*,\&%,<,>,<=,>=,=,==,&,`,',"}
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The problem is that
+.Xr troff
+may assume it is supposed to actually perform the operation
+or evaluation suggested by the characters. To prevent
+the accidental evaluation of these characters,
+escape them with
+.Ql \e& .
+Typical syntax is shown in the first content macro displayed
+below,
+.Ql \&.Ad .
+.Ss Address Macro
+The address macro identifies an address construct
+of the form addr1[,addr2[,addr3]].
+.Pp
+.Dl Usage: .Ad address ... \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Ad f1 , f2 , f3 :" -compact -offset 14n
+.It Li \&.Ad addr1
+.Ad addr1
+.It Li \&.Ad addr1\ .
+.Ad addr1 .
+.It Li \&.Ad addr1\ , file2
+.Ad addr1 , file2
+.It Li \&.Ad f1\ , f2\ , f3\ :
+.Ad f1 , f2 , f3 :
+.It Li \&.Ad addr\ )\ )\ ,
+.Ad addr ) ) ,
+.El
+.Pp
+It is an error to call
+.Li \&.Ad
+without arguments.
+.Li \&.Ad
+is callable by other macros and is parsed.
+.Ss Argument Macro
+The
+.Li \&.Ar
+argument macro may be used whenever
+a command line argument is referenced.
+.Pp
+.Dl Usage: .Ar argument ... \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Ar file1 file2" -compact -offset 15n
+.It Li \&.Ar
+.Ar
+.It Li \&.Ar file1
+.Ar file1
+.It Li \&.Ar file1\ .
+.Ar file1 .
+.It Li \&.Ar file1 file2
+.Ar file1 file2
+.It Li \&.Ar f1 f2 f3\ :
+.Ar f1 f2 f3 :
+.It Li \&.Ar file\ )\ )\ ,
+.Ar file ) ) ,
+.El
+.Pp
+If
+.Li \&.Ar
+is called without arguments
+.Ql Ar
+is assumed.
+The
+.Li \&.Ar
+macro is parsed and is callable.
+.Ss Configuration Declaration (section four only)
+The
+.Ql \&.Cd
+macro is used to demonstrate a
+.Xr config 8
+declaration for a device interface in a section four manual.
+This macro accepts quoted arguments (double quotes only).
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width "device le0 at scode?" -offset indent
+.It Cd "device le0 at scode?"
+produced by:
+.Ql ".Cd device le0 at scode?" .
+.El
+.Ss Command Modifier
+The command modifier is identical to the
+.Ql \&.Fl
+(flag) command with the exception
+the
+.Ql \&.Cm
+macro does not assert a dash
+in front of every argument.
+Traditionally flags are marked by the
+preceding dash, some commands or subsets of commands do not use them.
+Command modifiers may also be specified in conjunction with interactive
+commands such as editor commands.
+See
+.Sx Flags .
+.Ss Defined Variables
+A variable which is defined in an include file is specified
+by the macro
+.Ql \&.Dv .
+.Pp
+.Dl Usage: .Dv defined_variable ... \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Dv MAXHOSTNAMELEN" -compact -offset 14n
+.It Li ".Dv MAXHOSTNAMELEN"
+.Dv MAXHOSTNAMELEN
+.It Li ".Dv TIOCGPGRP )"
+.Dv TIOCGPGRP )
+.El
+.Pp
+It is an error to call
+.Ql \&.Dv
+without arguments.
+.Ql \&.Dv
+is parsed and is callable.
+.Ss Errno's (Section two only)
+The
+.Ql \&.Er
+errno macro specifies the error return value
+for section two library routines.
+The second example
+below shows
+.Ql \&.Er
+used with the
+.Ql \&.Bq
+general text domain macro, as it would be used in
+a section two manual page.
+.Pp
+.Dl Usage: .Er ERRNOTYPE ... \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Bq Er ENOTDIR" -compact -offset 14n
+.It Li \&.Er ENOENT
+.Er ENOENT
+.It Li \&.Er ENOENT\ )\ ;
+.Er ENOENT ) ;
+.It Li \&.Bq \&Er ENOTDIR
+.Bq Er ENOTDIR
+.El
+.Pp
+It is an error to call
+.Ql \&.Er
+without arguments.
+The
+.Ql \&.Er
+macro is parsed and is callable.
+.Ss Environment Variables
+The
+.Ql \&.Ev
+macro specifies an environment variable.
+.Pp
+.Dl Usage: .Ev argument ... \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Ev PRINTER ) ) ," -compact -offset 14n
+.It Li \&.Ev DISPLAY
+.Ev DISPLAY
+.It Li \&.Ev PATH\ .
+.Ev PATH .
+.It Li \&.Ev PRINTER\ )\ )\ ,
+.Ev PRINTER ) ) ,
+.El
+.Pp
+It is an error to call
+.Ql \&.Ev
+without arguments.
+The
+.Ql \&.Ev
+macro is parsed and is callable.
+.Ss Function Argument
+The
+.Ql \&.Fa
+macro is used to refer to function arguments (parameters)
+outside of the
+.Sx SYNOPSIS
+section of the manual or inside
+the
+.Sx SYNOPSIS
+section should a parameter list be too
+long for the
+.Ql \&.Fn
+macro and the enclosure macros
+.Ql \&.Fo
+and
+.Ql \&.Fc
+must be used.
+.Ql \&.Fa
+may also be used to refer to structure members.
+.Pp
+.Dl Usage: .Fa function_argument ... \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Fa d_namlen\ )\ )\ ," -compact -offset 14n
+.It Li \&.Fa d_namlen\ )\ )\ ,
+.Fa d_namlen ) ) ,
+.It Li \&.Fa iov_len
+.Fa iov_len
+.El
+.Pp
+It is an error to call
+.Ql \&.Fa
+without arguments.
+.Ql \&.Fa
+is parsed and is callable.
+.Ss Function Declaration
+The
+.Ql \&.Fd
+macro is used in the
+.Sx SYNOPSIS
+section with section two or three
+functions.
+The
+.Ql \&.Fd
+macro does not call other macros and is not callable by other
+macros.
+.Pp
+.Dl Usage: .Fd include_file (or defined variable)
+.Pp
+In the
+.Sx SYNOPSIS
+section a
+.Ql \&.Fd
+request causes a line break if a function has already been presented
+and a break has not occurred.
+This leaves a nice vertical space
+in between the previous function call and the declaration for the
+next function.
+.Ss Flags
+The
+.Ql \&.Fl
+macro handles command line flags.
+It prepends
+a dash,
+.Ql \- ,
+to the flag.
+For interactive command flags, which
+are not prepended with a dash, the
+.Ql \&.Cm
+(command modifier)
+macro is identical, but without the dash.
+.Pp
+.Dl Usage: .Fl argument ... \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Fl \-s \-t \-v" -compact -offset 14n
+.It Li \&.Fl
+.Fl
+.It Li \&.Fl cfv
+.Fl cfv
+.It Li \&.Fl cfv\ .
+.Fl cfv .
+.It Li \&.Fl s v t
+.Fl s v t
+.It Li \&.Fl -\ ,
+.Fl - ,
+.It Li \&.Fl xyz\ )\ ,
+.Fl xyz ) ,
+.El
+.Pp
+The
+.Ql \&.Fl
+macro without any arguments results
+in a dash representing stdin/stdout.
+Note that giving
+.Ql \&.Fl
+a single dash, will result in two dashes.
+The
+.Ql \&.Fl
+macro is parsed and is callable.
+.Ss Functions (library routines)
+The .Fn macro is modeled on ANSI C conventions.
+.Bd -literal
+Usage: .Fn [type] function [[type] parameters ... \*(Pu]
+.Ed
+.Bl -tag -width ".Fn .int align. .const * char *sptrsxx" -compact
+.It Li "\&.Fn getchar"
+.Fn getchar
+.It Li "\&.Fn strlen ) ,"
+.Fn strlen ) ,
+.It Li \&.Fn "\\*qint align\\*q" "\\*qconst * char *sptrs\\*q" ,
+.Fn "int align" "const * char *sptrs" ,
+.El
+.Pp
+It is an error to call
+.Ql \&.Fn
+without any arguments.
+The
+.Ql \&.Fn
+macro
+is parsed and is callable,
+note that any call to another macro signals the end of
+the
+.Ql \&.Fn
+call (it will close-parenthesis at that point).
+.Pp
+For functions that have more than eight parameters (and this
+is rare), the
+macros
+.Ql \&.Fo
+(function open)
+and
+.Ql \&.Fc
+(function close)
+may be used with
+.Ql \&.Fa
+(function argument)
+to get around the limitation. For example:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+\&.Fo "int res_mkquery"
+\&.Fa "int op"
+\&.Fa "char *dname"
+\&.Fa "int class"
+\&.Fa "int type"
+\&.Fa "char *data"
+\&.Fa "int datalen"
+\&.Fa "struct rrec *newrr"
+\&.Fa "char *buf"
+\&.Fa "int buflen"
+\&.Fc
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Produces:
+.Bd -filled -offset indent
+.Fo "int res_mkquery"
+.Fa "int op"
+.Fa "char *dname"
+.Fa "int class"
+.Fa "int type"
+.Fa "char *data"
+.Fa "int datalen"
+.Fa "struct rrec *newrr"
+.Fa "char *buf"
+.Fa "int buflen"
+.Fc
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The
+.Ql \&.Fo
+and
+.Ql \&.Fc
+macros are parsed and are callable.
+In the
+.Sx SYNOPSIS
+section, the function will always begin at
+the beginning of line.
+If there is more than one function
+presented in the
+.Sx SYNOPSIS
+section and a function type has not been
+given, a line break will occur, leaving a nice vertical space
+between the current function name and the one prior.
+At the moment,
+.Ql \&.Fn
+does not check its word boundaries
+against troff line lengths and may split across a newline
+ungracefully.
+This will be fixed in the near future.
+.Ss Function Type
+This macro is intended for the
+.Sx SYNOPSIS
+section.
+It may be used
+anywhere else in the man page without problems, but its main purpose
+is to present the function type in kernel normal form for the
+.Sx SYNOPSIS
+of sections two and three
+(it causes a page break allowing the function name to appear
+on the next line).
+.Pp
+.Dl Usage: .Ft type ... \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width "\&.Ft struct stat" -offset 14n -compact
+.It Li \&.Ft struct stat
+.Ft struct stat
+.El
+.Pp
+The
+.Ql \&.Ft
+request is not callable by other macros.
+.Ss Interactive Commands
+The
+.Ql \&.Ic
+macro designates an interactive or internal command.
+.Pp
+.Dl Usage: .Li argument ... \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Ic setenv , unsetenvxx" -compact -offset 14n
+.It Li \&.Ic :wq
+.Ic :wq
+.It Li \&.Ic do while {...}
+.Ic do while {...}
+.It Li \&.Ic setenv\ , unsetenv
+.Ic setenv , unsetenv
+.El
+.Pp
+It is an error to call
+.Ql \&.Ic
+without arguments.
+The
+.Ql \&.Ic
+macro is parsed and is callable.
+.Ss Literals
+The
+.Ql \&.Li
+literal macro may be used for special characters,
+variable constants, anything which should be displayed as it
+would be typed.
+.Pp
+.Dl Usage: .Li argument ... \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Li cntrl-D ) ," -compact -offset 14n
+.It Li \&.Li \een
+.Li \en
+.It Li \&.Li M1 M2 M3\ ;
+.Li M1 M2 M3 ;
+.It Li \&.Li cntrl-D\ )\ ,
+.Li cntrl-D ) ,
+.It Li \&.Li 1024\ ...
+.Li 1024 ...
+.El
+.Pp
+The
+.Ql \&.Li
+macro is parsed and is callable.
+.Ss Name Macro
+The
+.Ql \&.Nm
+macro is used for the document title or subject name.
+It has the peculiarity of remembering the first
+argument it was called with, which should
+always be the subject name of the page.
+When called without
+arguments,
+.Ql \&.Nm
+regurgitates this initial name for the sole purpose
+of making less work for the author.
+If trailing punctuation is required with this feature,
+use
+.Qq
+as a first argument to
+.Ql \&.Nm .
+Note:
+a section two
+or three document function name is addressed with the
+.Ql \&.Nm
+in the
+.Sx NAME
+section, and with
+.Ql \&.Fn
+in the
+.Sx SYNOPSIS
+and remaining sections.
+For interactive commands, such as the
+.Ql while
+command keyword in
+.Xr csh 1 ,
+the
+.Ql \&.Ic
+macro should be used.
+While the
+.Ql \&.Ic
+is nearly identical
+to
+.Ql \&.Nm ,
+it can not recall the first argument it was invoked with.
+.Pp
+.Dl Usage: .Nm argument ... \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Nm mdoc.samples" -compact -offset 14n
+.It Li \&.Nm mdoc.samples
+.Nm mdoc.samples
+.It Li \&.Nm \e-mdoc
+.Nm \-mdoc
+.It Li \&.Nm foo\ )\ )\ ,
+.Nm foo ) ) ,
+.It Li \&.Nm
+.Nm
+.It Li \&.Nm \&"\&"\ :
+.Nm "" :
+.El
+.Pp
+The
+.Ql \&.Nm
+macro is parsed and is callable.
+.Ss Options
+The
+.Ql \&.Op
+macro
+places option brackets around the any remaining arguments on the command
+line, and places any
+trailing punctuation outside the brackets.
+The macros
+.Ql \&.Oc
+and
+.Ql \&.Oo
+may be used across one or more lines.
+.Pp
+.Dl Usage: .Op options ... \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Op Fl c Ar objfil Op Ar corfil ," -compact -offset indent
+.It Li \&.Op
+.Op
+.It Li ".Op Fl k"
+.Op Fl k
+.It Li ".Op Fl k ) ."
+.Op Fl k ) .
+.It Li ".Op Fl k Ar kookfile"
+.Op Fl k Ar kookfile
+.It Li ".Op Fl k Ar kookfile ,"
+.Op Fl k Ar kookfile ,
+.It Li ".Op Ar objfil Op Ar corfil"
+.Op Ar objfil Op Ar corfil
+.It Li ".Op Fl c Ar objfil Op Ar corfil ,"
+.Op Fl c Ar objfil Op Ar corfil ,
+.It Li \&.Op word1 word2
+.Op word1 word2
+.El
+.Pp
+The
+.Ql \&.Oc
+and
+.Ql \&.Oo
+macros:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+\&.Oo
+\&.Op \&Fl k \&Ar kilobytes
+\&.Op \&Fl i \&Ar interval
+\&.Op \&Fl c \&Ar count
+\&.Oc
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Produce:
+.Oo
+.Op Fl k Ar kilobytes
+.Op Fl i Ar interval
+.Op Fl c Ar count
+.Oc
+.Pp
+The macros
+.Ql \&.Op ,
+.Ql \&.Oc
+and
+.Ql \&.Oo
+are parsed and are callable.
+.Ss Pathnames
+The
+.Ql \&.Pa
+macro formats path or file names.
+.Pp
+.Dl Usage: .Pa pathname \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Pa /tmp/fooXXXXX ) ." -compact -offset 14n
+.It Li \&.Pa /usr/share
+.Pa /usr/share
+.It Li \&.Pa /tmp/fooXXXXX\ )\ .
+.Pa /tmp/fooXXXXX ) .
+.El
+.Pp
+The
+.Ql \&.Pa
+macro is parsed and is callable.
+.Ss Variables
+Generic variable reference:
+.Pp
+.Dl Usage: .Va variable ... \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Va char s ] ) ) ," -compact -offset 14n
+.It Li \&.Va count
+.Va count
+.It Li \&.Va settimer ,
+.Va settimer ,
+.It Li \&.Va int\ *prt\ )\ :
+.Va int\ *prt ) :
+.It Li \&.Va char\ s\ ]\ )\ )\ ,
+.Va char\ s ] ) ) ,
+.El
+.Pp
+It is an error to call
+.Ql \&.Va
+without any arguments.
+The
+.Ql \&.Va
+macro is parsed and is callable.
+.Ss Manual Page Cross References
+The
+.Ql \&.Xr
+macro expects the first argument to be
+a manual page name, and the second argument, if it exists,
+to be either a section page number or punctuation.
+Any
+remaining arguments are assumed to be punctuation.
+.Pp
+.Dl Usage: .Xr man_page [1,...,9] \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Xr mdoc 7 ) ) ," -compact -offset 14n
+.It Li \&.Xr mdoc
+.Xr mdoc
+.It Li \&.Xr mdoc\ ,
+.Xr mdoc ,
+.It Li \&.Xr mdoc 7
+.Xr mdoc 7
+.It Li \&.Xr mdoc 7\ )\ )\ ,
+.Xr mdoc 7 ) ) ,
+.El
+.Pp
+The
+.Ql \&.Xr
+macro is parsed and is callable.
+It is an error to call
+.Ql \&.Xr
+without
+any arguments.
+.Sh GENERAL TEXT DOMAIN
+.Ss AT&T Macro
+.Bd -literal -offset indent -compact
+Usage: .At [v1 .. v7 | 32v | V.1 | V.4] ... \*(Pu
+.Ed
+.Bl -tag -width ".At v6 ) ," -compact -offset 14n
+.It Li ".At"
+.At
+.It Li ".At v6 ."
+.At v6 .
+.El
+.Pp
+The
+.Ql \&.At
+macro is
+.Em not
+parsed and
+.Em not
+callable. It accepts at most two arguments.
+.Ss BSD Macro
+.Dl Usage: .Bx [Version/release] ... \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Bx 4.3 ) ," -compact -offset 14n
+.It Li ".Bx"
+.Bx
+.It Li ".Bx 4.3 ."
+.Bx 4.3 .
+.El
+.Pp
+The
+.Ql \&.Bx
+macro is parsed and is callable.
+.Ss NetBSD Macro
+.Dl Usage: .Nx [Version/release] ... \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Nx 1.4 ) ," -compact -offset 14n
+.It Li ".Nx"
+.Nx
+.It Li ".Nx 1.4 ."
+.Nx 1.4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+The
+.Ql \&.Nx
+macro is parsed and is callable.
+.Ss FreeBSD Macro
+.Dl Usage: .Fx [Version/release] ... \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Fx 2.2 ) ," -compact -offset 14n
+.It Li ".Fx"
+.Fx
+.It Li ".Fx 2.2 ."
+.Fx 2.2 .
+.El
+.Pp
+The
+.Ql \&.Fx
+macro is parsed and is callable.
+.Ss UNIX Macro
+.Dl Usage: .Ux ... \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Ux 4.3 ) ," -compact -offset 14n
+.It Li ".Ux"
+.Ux
+.El
+.Pp
+The
+.Ql \&.Ux
+macro is parsed and is callable.
+.Ss Emphasis Macro
+Text may be stressed or emphasized with the
+.Ql \&.Em
+macro.
+The usual font for emphasis is italic.
+.Pp
+.Dl Usage: .Em argument ... \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Em vide infra ) ) ," -compact -offset 14n
+.It Li ".Em does not"
+.Em does not
+.It Li ".Em exceed 1024 ."
+.Em exceed 1024 .
+.It Li ".Em vide infra ) ) ,"
+.Em vide infra ) ) ,
+.El
+.\" .Pp
+.\" The emphasis can be forced across several lines of text by using
+.\" the
+.\" .Ql \&.Bf
+.\" macro discussed in
+.\" .Sx Modes
+.\" under
+.\" .Sx PAGE STRUCTURE DOMAIN .
+.\" .Pp
+.\" .Bf -emphasis
+.\" We are certain the reason most people desire a Harvard MBA
+.\" so they can become to be successful philanthropists. Only
+.\" mathematicians and physicists go to graduate school strictly
+.\" to acquire infinite wealthy and fame. Its that inifinity
+.\" word that does it to them. Ruins them.
+.\" .Ef
+.Pp
+The
+.Ql \&.Em
+macro is parsed and is callable.
+It is an error to call
+.Ql \&.Em
+without arguments.
+.Ss Enclosure and Quoting Macros
+The concept of enclosure is similar to quoting.
+The object being to enclose one or more strings between
+a pair of characters like quotes or parentheses.
+The terms quoting and enclosure are used
+interchangeably throughout this document.
+Most of the
+one line enclosure macros end
+in small letter
+.Ql q
+to give a hint of quoting, but there are a few irregularities.
+For each enclosure macro
+there is also a pair of open and close macros which end
+in small letters
+.Ql o
+and
+.Ql c
+respectively.
+These can be used across one or more lines of text
+and while they have nesting limitations, the one line quote macros
+can be used inside
+of them.
+.Pp
+.ne 5
+.Bd -filled -offset indent
+.Bl -column "quote " "close " "open " "Enclose Stringx(in XX) " XXstringXX
+.Em " Quote Close Open Function Result"
+\&.Aq .Ac .Ao Angle Bracket Enclosure <string>
+\&.Bq .Bc .Bo Bracket Enclosure [string]
+\&.Dq .Dc .Do Double Quote ``string''
+ .Ec .Eo Enclose String (in XX) XXstringXX
+\&.Pq .Pc .Po Parenthesis Enclosure (string)
+\&.Ql Quoted Literal `st' or string
+\&.Qq .Qc .Qo Straight Double Quote "string"
+\&.Sq .Sc .So Single Quote `string'
+.El
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Except for the irregular macros noted below, all
+of the quoting macros are parsed and callable.
+All handle punctuation properly, as long as it
+is presented one character at a time and separated by spaces.
+The quoting macros examine opening and closing punctuation
+to determine whether it comes before or after the
+enclosing string. This makes some nesting possible.
+.Bl -tag -width xxx,xxxx
+.It Li \&.Ec , \&.Eo
+These macros expect the first argument to be the
+opening and closing strings respectively.
+.It Li \&.Ql
+The quoted literal macro behaves differently for
+.Xr troff
+than
+.Xr nroff .
+If formatted with
+.Xr nroff ,
+a quoted literal is always quoted. If formatted with
+troff, an item is only quoted if the width
+of the item is less than three constant width characters.
+This is to make short strings more visible where the font change
+to literal (constant width) is less noticeable.
+.It Li \&.Pf
+The prefix macro is not callable, but it is parsed:
+.Bl -tag -width "(namexx" -offset indent
+.It Li ".Pf ( Fa name2"
+becomes
+.Pf ( Fa name2 .
+.El
+.It Li \&.Ns
+The
+.Ql \&.Ns
+(no space) macro, which
+.Em is
+callable,
+performs the analogous suffix function.
+.It Li ".Ap
+The \&.Ap macro inserts an apostrophe and exits any special text modes,
+continuing in
+.Li \&.No
+mode.
+.El
+.Pp
+.ne 4
+Examples of quoting:
+.Bl -tag -width ".Aq Pa ctype.h ) ,xxxxxxxx" -compact -offset indent
+.It Li \&.Aq
+.Aq
+.It Li \&.Aq \&Ar ctype.h\ )\ ,
+.Aq Ar ctype.h ) ,
+.It Li \&.Bq
+.Bq
+.It Li \&.Bq \&Em Greek \&, French \&.
+.Bq Em Greek , French .
+.It Li \&.Dq
+.Dq
+.It Li ".Dq string abc ."
+.Dq string abc .
+.It Li ".Dq \'^[A-Z]\'"
+.Dq \'^[A-Z]\'
+.It Li "\&.Ql man mdoc"
+.Ql man mdoc
+.It Li \&.Qq
+.Qq
+.It Li "\&.Qq string ) ,"
+.Qq string ) ,
+.It Li "\&.Qq string Ns ),"
+.Qq string Ns ),
+.It Li \&.Sq
+.Sq
+.It Li "\&.Sq string
+.Sq string
+.It Li "\&.Em or Ap ing
+.Em or Ap ing
+.El
+.Pp
+For a good example of nested enclosure macros, see the
+.Ql \&.Op
+option macro.
+It was created from the same
+underlying enclosure macros as those presented in the list
+above.
+The
+.Ql \&.Xo
+and
+.Ql \&.Xc
+extended argument list macros
+were also built from the same underlying routines and are a good
+example of
+.Nm \-mdoc
+macro usage at its worst.
+.Ss No\-Op or Normal Text Macro
+The macro
+.Li \&.No
+is
+a hack for words in a macro command line which should
+.Em not
+be formatted and follows the conventional syntax
+for content macros.
+.Ss No Space Macro
+The
+.Ql \&.Ns
+macro eliminates unwanted spaces in between macro requests.
+It is useful for old style argument lists where there is no space
+between the flag and argument:
+.Bl -tag -width ".Op Fl I Ns Ar directoryxx" -offset indent
+.It Li ".Op Fl I Ns Ar directory"
+produces
+.Op Fl I Ns Ar directory
+.El
+.Pp
+Note: the
+.Ql \&.Ns
+macro always invokes the
+.Ql \&.No
+macro after eliminating the space unless another macro name
+follows it.
+The macro
+.Ql \&.Ns
+is parsed and is callable.
+.Ss Section Cross References
+The
+.Ql \&.Sx
+macro designates a reference to a section header
+within the same document.
+It is parsed and is callable.
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width "Li \&.Sx FILES" -offset 14n
+.It Li \&.Sx FILES
+.Sx FILES
+.El
+.Ss Symbolic
+The symbolic emphasis macro is generally a boldface macro in
+either the symbolic sense or the traditional English usage.
+.Pp
+.Dl Usage: .Sy symbol ... \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Sy Important Noticex" -compact -offset 14n
+.It Li \&.Sy Important Notice
+.Sy Important Notice
+.El
+.Pp
+The
+.Ql \&.Sy
+macro is parsed and is callable.
+Arguments to
+.Ql \&.Sy
+may be quoted.
+.Ss References and Citations
+The following macros make a modest attempt to handle references.
+At best, the macros make it convenient to manually drop in a subset of
+refer style references.
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width 6n -offset indent -compact
+.It Li ".Rs"
+Reference Start.
+Causes a line break and begins collection
+of reference information until the
+reference end macro is read.
+.It Li ".Re"
+Reference End.
+The reference is printed.
+.It Li ".%A"
+Reference author name, one name per invocation.
+.It Li ".%B"
+Book title.
+.It Li ".\&%C"
+City/place.
+.It Li ".\&%D"
+Date.
+.It Li ".%J"
+Journal name.
+.It Li ".%N"
+Issue number.
+.It Li ".%O"
+Optional information.
+.It Li ".%P"
+Page number.
+.It Li ".%R"
+Report name.
+.It Li ".%T"
+Title of article.
+.It Li ".%V"
+Volume(s).
+.El
+.Pp
+The macros beginning with
+.Ql %
+are not callable, and are parsed only for the trade name macro which
+returns to its caller.
+(And not very predictably at the moment either.)
+The purpose is to allow trade names
+to be pretty printed in
+.Xr troff Ns / Ns Xr ditroff
+output.
+.Ss Trade Names (or Acronyms and Type Names)
+The trade name macro is generally a small caps macro for
+all upper case words longer than two characters.
+.Pp
+.Dl Usage: .Tn symbol ... \*(Pu
+.Bl -tag -width ".Tn ASCII" -compact -offset 14n
+.It Li \&.Tn DEC
+.Tn DEC
+.It Li \&.Tn ASCII
+.Tn ASCII
+.El
+.Pp
+The
+.Ql \&.Tn
+macro
+is parsed and is callable by other macros.
+.Ss Extended Arguments
+The
+.Li \&.Xo
+and
+.Li \&.Xc
+macros allow one to extend an argument list
+on a macro boundary.
+Argument lists cannot
+be extended within a macro
+which expects all of its arguments on one line such
+as
+.Ql \&.Op .
+.Pp
+Here is an example of
+.Ql \&.Xo
+using the space mode macro to turn spacing off:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+\&.Sm off
+\&.It Xo Sy I Ar operation
+\&.No \een Ar count No \een
+\&.Xc
+\&.Sm on
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Produces
+.Bd -filled -offset indent
+.Bl -tag -width flag -compact
+.Sm off
+.It Xo Sy I Ar operation
+.No \en Ar count No \en
+.Xc
+.Sm on
+.El
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Another one:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+\&.Sm off
+\&.It Cm S No \&/ Ar old_pattern Xo
+\&.No \&/ Ar new_pattern
+\&.No \&/ Op Cm g
+\&.Xc
+\&.Sm on
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Produces
+.Bd -filled -offset indent
+.Bl -tag -width flag -compact
+.Sm off
+.It Cm S No \&/ Ar old_pattern Xo
+.No \&/ Ar new_pattern
+.No \&/ Op Cm g
+.Xc
+.Sm on
+.El
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Another example of
+.Ql \&.Xo
+and using enclosure macros:
+Test the value of an variable.
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+\&.It Xo
+\&.Ic .ifndef
+\&.Oo \e&! Oc Ns Ar variable
+\&.Op Ar operator variable ...
+\&.Xc
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Produces
+.Bd -filled -offset indent
+.Bl -tag -width flag -compact
+.It Xo
+.Ic .ifndef
+.Oo \&! Oc Ns Ar variable
+.Op Ar operator variable ...
+.Xc
+.El
+.Ed
+.Pp
+All of the above examples have used the
+.Ql \&.Xo
+macro on the argument list of the
+.Ql \&.It
+(list-item)
+macro.
+The extend macros are not used very often, and when they are
+it is usually to extend the list-item argument list.
+Unfortunately, this is also where the extend macros are the
+most finicky.
+In the first two examples, spacing was turned off;
+in the third, spacing was desired in part of the output but
+not all of it.
+To make these macros work in this situation make sure
+the
+.Ql \&.Xo
+and
+.Ql \&.Xc
+macros are placed as shown in the third example.
+If the
+.Ql \&.Xo
+macro is not alone on the
+.Ql \&.It
+argument list, spacing will be unpredictable.
+The
+.Ql \&.Ns
+(no space macro)
+must not occur as the first or last macro on a line
+in this situation.
+Out of 900 manual pages (about 1500 actual pages)
+currently released with
+.Bx
+only fifteen use the
+.Ql \&.Xo
+macro.
+.Sh PAGE STRUCTURE DOMAIN
+.Ss Section Headers
+The first three
+.Ql \&.Sh
+section header macros
+list below are required in every
+man page.
+The remaining section headers
+are recommended at the discretion of the author
+writing the manual page.
+The
+.Ql \&.Sh
+macro can take up to nine arguments.
+It is parsed and but is not callable.
+.Bl -tag -width ".Sh SYNOPSIS"
+.It \&.Sh NAME
+The
+.Ql \&.Sh NAME
+macro is mandatory.
+If not specified,
+the headers, footers and page layout defaults
+will not be set and things will be rather unpleasant.
+The
+.Sx NAME
+section consists of at least three items.
+The first is the
+.Ql \&.Nm
+name macro naming the subject of the man page.
+The second is the Name Description macro,
+.Ql \&.Nd ,
+which separates the subject
+name from the third item, which is the description.
+The
+description should be the most terse and lucid possible,
+as the space available is small.
+.It \&.Sh SYNOPSIS
+The
+.Sx SYNOPSIS
+section describes the typical usage of the
+subject of a man page.
+The macros required
+are either
+.Ql ".Nm" ,
+.Ql ".Cd" ,
+.Ql ".Fn" ,
+(and possibly
+.Ql ".Fo" ,
+.Ql ".Fc" ,
+.Ql ".Fd" ,
+.Ql ".Ft"
+macros).
+The function name
+macro
+.Ql ".Fn"
+is required
+for manual page sections 2 and 3, the command and general
+name macro
+.Ql \&.Nm
+is required for sections 1, 5, 6, 7, 8.
+Section 4 manuals require a
+.Ql ".Nm" , ".Fd"
+or a
+.Ql ".Cd"
+configuration device usage macro.
+Several other macros may be necessary to produce
+the synopsis line as shown below:
+.Pp
+.Bd -filled -offset indent
+.Nm cat
+.Op Fl benstuv
+.Op Fl
+.Ar
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The following macros were used:
+.Pp
+.Dl \&.Nm cat
+.Dl \&.Op \&Fl benstuv
+.Dl \&.Op \&Fl
+.Dl \&.Ar
+.Pp
+.Sy Note :
+The macros
+.Ql \&.Op ,
+.Ql \&.Fl ,
+and
+.Ql \&.Ar
+recognize the pipe bar character
+.Ql \*(Ba ,
+so a command line such as:
+.Pp
+.Dl ".Op Fl a | Fl b"
+.Pp
+will not go orbital.
+.Xr Troff
+normally interprets a \*(Ba as a special operator.
+See
+.Sx PREDEFINED STRINGS
+for a usable \*(Ba
+character in other situations.
+.It \&.Sh DESCRIPTION
+In most cases the first text in the
+.Sx DESCRIPTION
+section
+is a brief paragraph on the command, function or file,
+followed by a lexical list of options and respective
+explanations.
+To create such a list, the
+.Ql \&.Bl
+begin-list,
+.Ql \&.It
+list-item and
+.Ql \&.El
+end-list
+macros are used (see
+.Sx Lists and Columns
+below).
+.El
+.Pp
+The following
+.Ql \&.Sh
+section headers are part of the
+preferred manual page layout and must be used appropriately
+to maintain consistency.
+They are listed in the order
+in which they would be used.
+.Bl -tag -width SYNOPSIS
+.It \&.Sh ENVIRONMENT
+The
+.Sx ENVIRONMENT
+section should reveal any related
+environment
+variables and clues to their behavior and/or usage.
+.It \&.Sh EXAMPLES
+There are several ways to create examples.
+See
+the
+.Sx EXAMPLES
+section below
+for details.
+.It \&.Sh FILES
+Files which are used or created by the man page subject
+should be listed via the
+.Ql \&.Pa
+macro in the
+.Sx FILES
+section.
+.It \&.Sh SEE ALSO
+References to other material on the man page topic and
+cross references to other relevant man pages should
+be placed in the
+.Sx SEE ALSO
+section.
+Cross references
+are specified using the
+.Ql \&.Xr
+macro.
+At this time
+.Xr refer 1
+style references are not accommodated.
+.Pp
+It is recommended that the cross references are sorted on the section
+number, and then alphabetically on the names within a section.
+.It \&.Sh STANDARDS
+If the command, library function or file adheres to a
+specific implementation such as
+.St -p1003.2
+or
+.St -ansiC
+this should be noted here.
+If the
+command does not adhere to any standard, its history
+should be noted in the
+.Sx HISTORY
+section.
+.It \&.Sh HISTORY
+Any command which does not adhere to any specific standards
+should be outlined historically in this section.
+.It \&.Sh AUTHORS
+Credits, if need be, should be placed here.
+.It \&.Sh DIAGNOSTICS
+Diagnostics from a command should be placed in this section.
+.It \&.Sh ERRORS
+Specific error handling, especially from library functions
+(man page sections 2 and 3) should go here.
+The
+.Ql \&.Er
+macro is used to specify an errno.
+.It \&.Sh BUGS
+Blatant problems with the topic go here...
+.El
+.Pp
+User specified
+.Ql \&.Sh
+sections may be added,
+for example, this section was set with:
+.Bd -literal -offset 14n
+\&.Sh PAGE LAYOUT MACROS
+.Ed
+.Ss Paragraphs and Line Spacing.
+.Bl -tag -width 6n
+.It \&.Pp
+The \&.Pp paragraph command may
+be used to specify a line space where necessary.
+The macro is not necessary after a
+.Ql \&.Sh
+or
+.Ql \&.Ss
+macro or before
+a
+.Ql \&.Bl
+macro.
+(The
+.Ql \&.Bl
+macro asserts a vertical distance unless the -compact flag is given).
+.El
+.\" This worked with version one, need to redo for version three
+.\" .Pp
+.\" .Ds I
+.\" .Cw (ax+bx+c) \ is\ produced\ by\ \&
+.\" .\".Cw (ax+bx+c) \&.Va_by_) \&_and_\& \&[?/]m_b1_e1_f1[?/]\&
+.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
+.\" .Li \&.Cx\ (
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
+.\" .Li \&.Va ax
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
+.\" .Li \&.Sy \+
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cl Cx \&(\&
+.\" .Va ax
+.\" .Cx +
+.\" .Va by
+.\" .Cx +
+.\" .Va c )
+.\" .Cx \t
+.\" .Em is produced by
+.\" .Cx \t
+.\" .Li \&.Va by
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
+.\" .Li \&.Sy \+
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
+.\" .Li \&.Va c )
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
+.\" .Li \&.Cx
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cw
+.\" .De
+.\" .Pp
+.\" This example shows the same equation in a different format.
+.\" The spaces
+.\" around the
+.\" .Li \&+
+.\" signs were forced with
+.\" .Li \e :
+.\" .Pp
+.\" .Ds I
+.\" .Cw (ax\ +\ bx\ +\ c) \ is\ produced\ by\ \&
+.\" .\".Cw (ax+bx+c) \&.Va_by_) \&_and_\& \&[?/]m_b1_e1_f1[?/]\&
+.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
+.\" .Li \&.Cx\ (
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
+.\" .Li \&.Va a
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
+.\" .Li \&.Sy x
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
+.\" .Li \&.Cx \e\ +\e\ \e&
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cl Cx \&(\&
+.\" .Va a
+.\" .Sy x
+.\" .Cx \ +\ \&
+.\" .Va b
+.\" .Sy y
+.\" .Cx \ +\ \&
+.\" .Va c )
+.\" .Cx \t
+.\" .Em is produced by
+.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
+.\" .Li \&.Va b
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
+.\" .Li \&.Sy y
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
+.\" .Li \&.Cx \e\ +\e\ \e&
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
+.\" .Li \&.Va c )
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
+.\" .Li \&.Cx
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cw
+.\" .De
+.\" .Pp
+.\" The incantation below was
+.\" lifted from the
+.\" .Xr adb 1
+.\" manual page:
+.\" .Pp
+.\" .Ds I
+.\" .Cw \&[?/]m_b1_e1_f1[?/]\& is\ produced\ by
+.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
+.\" .Li \&.Cx Op Sy ?/
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
+.\" .Li \&.Nm m
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cl Cx Op Sy ?/
+.\" .Nm m
+.\" .Ad \ b1 e1 f1
+.\" .Op Sy ?/
+.\" .Cx \t
+.\" .Em is produced by
+.\" .Cx \t
+.\" .Li \&.Ar \e\ b1 e1 f1
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
+.\" .Li \&.Op Sy ?/
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
+.\" .Li \&.Cx
+.\" .Cx
+.\" .Cw
+.\" .De
+.\" .Pp
+.Ss Keeps
+The only keep that is implemented at this time is for words.
+The macros are
+.Ql \&.Bk
+(begin-keep)
+and
+.Ql \&.Ek
+(end-keep).
+The only option that
+.Ql \&.Bl
+accepts is
+.Fl words
+and is useful for preventing line breaks in the middle of options.
+In the example for the make command line arguments (see
+.Sx What's in a name ) ,
+the keep prevented
+.Xr nroff
+from placing up the
+flag and the argument
+on separate lines.
+(Actually, the option macro used to prevent this from occurring,
+but was dropped when the decision (religious) was made to force
+right justified margins in
+.Xr troff
+as options in general look atrocious when spread across a sparse
+line.
+More work needs to be done with the keep macros, a
+.Fl line
+option needs to be added.)
+.Ss Examples and Displays
+There are six types of displays, a quickie one line indented display
+.Ql \&.D1 ,
+a quickie one line literal display
+.Ql \&.Dl ,
+and block literal, block filled, block unfilled, and block ragged which use
+the
+.Ql \&.Bd
+begin-display
+and
+.Ql \&.Ed
+end-display macros.
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width \&.Dlxx
+.It Li \&.D1
+(D-one) Display one line of indented text.
+This macro is parsed, but it is not callable.
+.Pp
+.Dl Fl ldghfstru
+.Pp
+The above was produced by:
+.Li \&.Dl Fl ldghfstru .
+.It Li \&.Dl
+(D-ell)
+Display one line of indented
+.Em literal
+text.
+The
+.Ql \&.Dl
+example macro has been used throughout this
+file.
+It allows
+the indent (display) of one line of text.
+Its default font is set to
+constant width (literal) however
+it is parsed and will recognized other macros.
+It is not callable however.
+.Pp
+.Dl % ls -ldg /usr/local/bin
+.Pp
+The above was produced by
+.Li \&.Dl % ls -ldg /usr/local/bin .
+.It Li \&.Bd
+Begin-display.
+The
+.Ql \&.Bd
+display must be ended with the
+.Ql \&.Ed
+macro.
+Displays may be nested within lists, but may
+.Em not
+contain other displays; this also prohibits nesting
+of .D1 and .Dl one-line displays.
+.Ql \&.Bd
+has the following syntax:
+.Pp
+.Dl ".Bd display-type [-offset offset_value] [-compact]"
+.Pp
+The display-type must be one of the following four types and
+may have an offset specifier for indentation:
+.Ql \&.Bd .
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width "file file_name " -compact
+.It Fl ragged
+Fill, but do not adjust the right margin.
+.It Fl unfilled
+Do not fill: display a block of text as typed, the
+right (and left) margin edges are left ragged.
+.It Fl filled
+Display a filled (formatted) block.
+The block of text is formatted (the edges are filled \-
+not left unjustified).
+.It Fl literal
+Display a literal block, useful for source code or
+simple tabbed or spaced text.
+.It Fl file Ar file_name
+The file name following the
+.Fl file
+flag is read and displayed.
+Literal mode is
+asserted and tabs are set at 8 constant width character
+intervals, however any
+.Xr troff/ Ns Nm \-mdoc
+commands in file will be processed.
+.It Fl offset Ar string
+If
+.Fl offset
+is specified with one of the following strings, the string
+is interpreted to indicate the level of indentation for the
+forthcoming block of text:
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width "indent-two" -compact
+.It Ar left
+Align block on the current left margin,
+this is the default mode of
+.Ql \&.Bd .
+.It Ar center
+Supposedly center the block.
+At this time
+unfortunately, the block merely gets
+left aligned about an imaginary center margin.
+.It Ar indent
+Indents by one default indent value or tab.
+The default
+indent value is also used for the
+.Ql \&.D1
+display so one is guaranteed the two types of displays
+will line up.
+This indent is normally set to 6n or about two
+thirds of an inch (six constant width characters).
+.It Ar indent-two
+Indents two times the default indent value.
+.It Ar right
+This
+.Em left
+aligns the block about two inches from
+the right side of the page.
+This macro needs
+work and perhaps may never do the right thing by
+.Xr troff .
+.El
+.El
+.It ".Ed"
+End-display.
+.El
+.Ss Tagged Lists and Columns
+There are several types of lists which may be initiated with the
+.Ql ".Bl"
+begin-list macro.
+Items within the list
+are specified with the
+.Ql ".It"
+item macro and
+each list must end with the
+.Ql ".El"
+macro.
+Lists other than
+.Li \-enum
+may be nested within themselves and within displays.
+The use of columns inside of lists or lists inside of columns
+is unproven.
+.Pp
+In addition, several list attributes may be specified such as
+the width of a tag, the list offset, and compactness
+(blank lines between items allowed or disallowed).
+Most of this document has been formatted with a tag style list
+.Pq Fl tag .
+For a change of pace, the list-type used to present the list-types
+is an over-hanging list
+.Pq Fl ohang .
+This type of list is quite popular with
+.Tn TeX
+users, but might look a bit funny after having read many pages of
+tagged lists.
+The following list types are accepted by
+.Ql ".Bl" :
+.Pp
+.Bl -ohang -compact
+.It Fl bullet
+.It Fl dash
+.It Fl enum
+.It Fl hyphen
+.It Fl item
+These five are the simplest types of lists.
+Once the
+.Ql ".Bl"
+macro has been given, items in the list are merely
+indicated by a line consisting solely of the
+.Ql ".It"
+macro.
+For example, the source text for a simple enumerated list
+would look like:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent-two
+\&.Bl -enum -compact
+\&.It
+\&Item one goes here.
+\&.It
+\&And item two here.
+\&.It
+\&Lastly item three goes here.
+\&.El
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The results:
+.Pp
+.Bl -enum -offset indent-two -compact
+.It
+Item one goes here.
+.It
+And item two here.
+.It
+Lastly item three goes here.
+.El
+.Pp
+A simple bullet list construction:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent-two
+\&.Bl -bullet -compact
+\&.It
+\&Bullet one goes here.
+\&.It
+\&Bullet two here.
+\&.El
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Produces:
+.Bl -bullet -offset indent-two -compact
+.It
+Bullet one goes here.
+.It
+Bullet two here.
+.El
+.Pp
+.It Fl tag
+.It Fl diag
+.It Fl hang
+.It Fl ohang
+.It Fl inset
+These list-types collect arguments specified with the
+.Ql \&.It
+macro and create a label which may be
+.Em inset
+into the forthcoming text,
+.Em hanged
+from the forthcoming text,
+.Em overhanged
+from above and not indented or
+.Em tagged .
+This
+list was constructed with the
+.Ql Fl ohang
+list-type.
+The
+.Ql \&.It
+macro is parsed only for the inset, hang
+and tag list-types and is not callable.
+Here is an example of inset labels:
+.Bl -inset -offset indent
+.It Em Tag
+The tagged list (also called a tagged paragraph) is the
+most common type of list used in the Berkeley manuals. Use a
+.Fl width
+attribute as described below.
+.It Em Diag
+Diag lists create section four diagnostic lists
+and are similar to inset lists except callable
+macros are ignored.
+.It Em Hang
+Hanged labels are a matter of taste.
+.It Em Ohang
+Overhanging labels are nice when space is constrained.
+.It Em Inset
+Inset labels are useful for controlling blocks of
+paragraphs and are valuable for converting
+.Nm \-mdoc
+manuals to other formats.
+.El
+.Pp
+Here is the source text which produced the above example:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+\&.Bl -inset -offset indent
+\&.It Em Tag
+\&The tagged list (also called a tagged paragraph) is the
+\&most common type of list used in the Berkeley manuals.
+\&.It Em Diag
+\&Diag lists create section four diagnostic lists
+\&and are similar to inset lists except callable
+\¯os are ignored.
+\&.It Em Hang
+\&Hanged labels are a matter of taste.
+\&.It Em Ohang
+\&Overhanging labels are nice when space is constrained.
+\&.It Em Inset
+\&Inset labels are useful for controlling blocks of
+\¶graphs and are valuable for converting
+\&.Nm \-mdoc
+\&manuals to other formats.
+\&.El
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Here is a hanged list with just one item:
+.Bl -hang -offset indent
+.It Em Hanged
+labels appear similar to tagged lists when the
+label is smaller than the label width.
+.It Em Longer hanged list labels
+blend in to the paragraph unlike
+tagged paragraph labels.
+.El
+.Pp
+And the unformatted text which created it:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+\&.Bl -hang -offset indent
+\&.It Em Hanged
+\&labels appear similar to tagged lists when the
+\&label is smaller than the label width.
+\&.It Em Longer hanged list labels
+\&blend in to the paragraph unlike
+\&tagged paragraph labels.
+\&.El
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The tagged list which follows uses a width specifier to control
+the width of the tag.
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width "PAGEIN" -compact -offset indent
+.It SL
+sleep time of the process (seconds blocked)
+.It PAGEIN
+number of disk
+.Tn I/O Ns 's
+resulting from references
+by the process to pages not loaded in core.
+.It UID
+numerical user-id of process owner
+.It PPID
+numerical id of parent of process process priority
+(non-positive when in non-interruptible wait)
+.El
+.Pp
+The raw text:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+\&.Bl -tag -width "PAGEIN" -compact -offset indent
+\&.It SL
+\&sleep time of the process (seconds blocked)
+\&.It PAGEIN
+\&number of disk
+\&.Tn I/O Ns 's
+\&resulting from references
+\&by the process to pages not loaded in core.
+\&.It UID
+\&numerical user-id of process owner
+\&.It PPID
+\&numerical id of parent of process process priority
+\&(non-positive when in non-interruptible wait)
+\&.El
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Acceptable width specifiers:
+.Bl -tag -width Ar -offset indent
+.It Fl width Ar "\&Fl"
+sets the width to the default width for a flag.
+All callable
+macros have a default width value.
+The
+.Ql \&.Fl ,
+value is presently
+set to ten constant width characters or about five sixth of
+an inch.
+.It Fl width Ar "24n"
+sets the width to 24 constant width characters or about two
+inches.
+The
+.Ql n
+is absolutely necessary for the scaling to work correctly.
+.It Fl width Ar "ENAMETOOLONG"
+sets width to the constant width length of the
+string given.
+.It Fl width Ar "\\*qint mkfifo\\*q"
+again, the width is set to the constant width of the string
+given.
+.El
+.Pp
+If a width is not specified for the tag list type, the first
+time
+.Ql \&.It
+is invoked, an attempt is made to determine an appropriate
+width.
+If the first argument to
+.Ql ".It"
+is a callable macro, the default width for that macro will be used
+as if the macro name had been supplied as the width.
+However,
+if another item in the list is given with a different callable
+macro name, a new and nested list is assumed. This effectively
+means that
+.Fl width
+is required for the tag list type.
+.Pp
+.It Fl column
+This list type generates multiple columns.
+The number of columns and the width of each column is determined by
+the arguments to the
+.Fl column
+list.
+Each
+.Ql ".It"
+argument is parsed to make a row, each column within the
+row is a separate argument separated by a tab or the
+.Ql ".Ta"
+macro.
+.El
+The table:
+.Bl -column "String" "Nroff" "Troff" -offset indent
+.It Sy "String" Ta Sy "Nroff" Ta Sy "Troff"
+.It Li "<=" Ta \&<\&= Ta \*(<=
+.It Li ">=" Ta \&>\&= Ta \*(>=
+.El
+.Pp
+was produced by:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+\&.Bl -column "String" "Nroff" "Troff" -offset indent
+\&.It Sy "String" Ta Sy "Nroff" Ta Sy "Troff"
+\&.It Li "<=" Ta \&<\&= Ta \*(<=
+\&.It Li ">=" Ta \&>\&= Ta \*(>=
+\&.El
+.Ed
+.Sh PREDEFINED STRINGS
+The following strings are predefined as may be used by
+preceding with the troff string interpreting sequence
+.Ql \&\e*(xx
+where
+.Em xx
+is the name of the defined string or as
+.Ql \&\e*x
+where
+.Em x
+is the name of the string.
+The interpreting sequence may be used any where in the text.
+.Pp
+.Bl -column "String " "Nroff " "Troff " -offset indent
+.It Sy "String Nroff Troff"
+.It Li "<=" Ta \&<\&= Ta \*(<=
+.It Li ">=" Ta \&>\&= Ta \*(>=
+.It Li "Rq" Ta "''" Ta \*(Rq
+.It Li "Lq" Ta "``" Ta \*(Lq
+.It Li "ua" Ta ^ Ta \*(ua
+.It Li "aa" Ta ' Ta \*(aa
+.It Li "ga" Ta \` Ta \*(ga
+.\" .It Li "sL" Ta ` Ta \*(sL
+.\" .It Li "sR" Ta ' Ta \*(sR
+.It Li "q" Ta \&" Ta \*q
+.It Li "Pi" Ta pi Ta \*(Pi
+.It Li "Ne" Ta != Ta \*(Ne
+.It Li "Le" Ta <= Ta \*(Le
+.It Li "Ge" Ta >= Ta \*(Ge
+.It Li "Lt" Ta < Ta \*(Gt
+.It Li "Gt" Ta > Ta \*(Lt
+.It Li "Pm" Ta +- Ta \*(Pm
+.It Li "If" Ta infinity Ta \*(If
+.It Li "Na" Ta \fINaN\fP Ta \*(Na
+.It Li "Ba" Ta \fR\&|\fP Ta \*(Ba
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Note :
+The string named
+.Ql q
+should be written as
+.Ql \e*q
+since it is only one char.
+.Sh DIAGNOSTICS
+The debugging facilities for
+.Nm \-mdoc
+are limited, but can help detect subtle errors such
+as the collision of an argument name with an internal
+register or macro name.
+(A what?)
+A register is an arithmetic storage class for
+.Xr troff
+with a one or two character name.
+All registers internal to
+.Nm \-mdoc
+for
+.Xr troff
+and
+.Xr ditroff
+are two characters and
+of the form <upper_case><lower_case> such as
+.Ql \&Ar ,
+<lower_case><upper_case> as
+.Ql \&aR
+or
+<upper or lower letter><digit> as
+.Ql \&C\&1 .
+And adding to the muddle,
+.Xr troff
+has its own internal registers all of which are either
+two lower case characters or a dot plus a letter or meta-character
+character.
+In one of the introduction examples, it was shown how to
+prevent the interpretation of a macro name with the escape sequence
+.Ql \e& .
+This is sufficient for the internal register names also.
+.Pp
+.\" Every callable macro name has a corresponding register
+.\" of the same name (<upper_case><lower_case>).
+.\" There are also specific registers which have
+.\" been used for stacks and arrays and are listed in the
+.\" .Sx Appendix .
+.\" .Bd -ragged -offset 4n
+.\" [A-Z][a-z] registers corresponding to macro names (example ``Ar'')
+.\" [a-z][A-Z] registers corresponding to macro names (example ``aR'')
+.\" C[0-9] argument types (example C1)
+.\" O[0-9] offset stack (displays)
+.\" h[0-9] horizontal spacing stack (lists)
+.\" o[0-9] offset (stack) (lists)
+.\" t[0-9] tag stack (lists)
+.\" v[0-9] vertical spacing stack (lists)
+.\" w[0-9] width tag/label stack
+.\" .Ed
+.\" .Pp
+If a non-escaped register name is given in the argument list of a request
+unpredictable behavior will occur.
+In general, any time huge portions
+of text do not appear where expected in the output, or small strings
+such as list tags disappear, chances are there is a misunderstanding
+about an argument type in the argument list.
+Your mother never intended for you to remember this evil stuff - so here
+is a way to find out whether or not your arguments are valid: The
+.Ql \&.Db
+(debug)
+macro displays the interpretation of the argument list for most
+macros.
+Macros such as the
+.Ql \&.Pp
+(paragraph)
+macro do not contain debugging information.
+All of the callable macros do,
+and it is strongly advised whenever in doubt,
+turn on the
+.Ql \&.Db
+macro.
+.Pp
+.Dl Usage: \&.Db [on | off]
+.Pp
+An example of a portion of text with
+the debug macro placed above and below an
+artificially created problem (a flag argument
+.Ql \&aC
+which should be
+.Ql \e&aC
+in order to work):
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+\&.Db on
+\&.Op Fl aC Ar file )
+\&.Db off
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The resulting output:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+DEBUGGING ON
+DEBUG(argv) MACRO: `.Op' Line #: 2
+ Argc: 1 Argv: `Fl' Length: 2
+ Space: `' Class: Executable
+ Argc: 2 Argv: `aC' Length: 2
+ Space: `' Class: Executable
+ Argc: 3 Argv: `Ar' Length: 2
+ Space: `' Class: Executable
+ Argc: 4 Argv: `file' Length: 4
+ Space: ` ' Class: String
+ Argc: 5 Argv: `)' Length: 1
+ Space: ` ' Class: Closing Punctuation or suffix
+ MACRO REQUEST: .Op Fl aC Ar file )
+DEBUGGING OFF
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The first line of information tells the name of the calling
+macro, here
+.Ql \&.Op ,
+and the line number it appears on.
+If one or more files are involved
+(especially if text from another file is included) the line number
+may be bogus.
+If there is only one file, it should be accurate.
+The second line gives the argument count, the argument
+.Pq Ql \&Fl
+and its length.
+If the length of an argument is two characters, the
+argument is tested to see if it is executable (unfortunately, any
+register which contains a non-zero value appears executable).
+The third line gives the space allotted for a class, and the
+class type.
+The problem here is the argument aC should not be
+executable.
+The four types of classes are string, executable, closing
+punctuation and opening punctuation.
+The last line shows the entire
+argument list as it was read.
+In this next example, the offending
+.Ql \&aC
+is escaped:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+\&.Db on
+\&.Em An escaped \e&aC
+\&.Db off
+.Ed
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+DEBUGGING ON
+DEBUG(fargv) MACRO: `.Em' Line #: 2
+ Argc: 1 Argv: `An' Length: 2
+ Space: ` ' Class: String
+ Argc: 2 Argv: `escaped' Length: 7
+ Space: ` ' Class: String
+ Argc: 3 Argv: `aC' Length: 2
+ Space: ` ' Class: String
+ MACRO REQUEST: .Em An escaped &aC
+DEBUGGING OFF
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The argument
+.Ql \e&aC
+shows up with the same length of 2 as the
+.Ql \e&
+sequence produces a zero width, but a register
+named
+.Ql \e&aC
+was not found and the type classified as string.
+.Pp
+Other diagnostics consist of usage statements and are self explanatory.
+.Sh GROFF, TROFF AND NROFF
+The
+.Nm \-mdoc
+package does not need compatibility mode with
+.Xr groff .
+.Pp
+The package inhibits page breaks, and the headers and footers
+which normally occur at those breaks with
+.Xr nroff ,
+to make the manual more efficient for viewing on-line.
+At the moment,
+.Xr groff
+with
+.Fl T Ns Ar ascii
+does eject the imaginary remainder of the page at end of file.
+The inhibiting of the page breaks makes
+.Xr nroff Ns 'd
+files unsuitable for hardcopy.
+There is a register named
+.Ql \&cR
+which can be set to zero in the site dependent style file
+.Pa /usr/src/share/tmac/doc-nroff
+to restore the old style behavior.
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /usr/share/misc/mdoc.template -compact
+.It Pa /usr/share/tmac/tmac.doc
+manual macro package
+.It Pa /usr/share/misc/mdoc.template
+template for writing a man page
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr mdoc 7 ,
+.Xr man 1 ,
+.Xr troff 1
+.Sh BUGS
+Undesirable hyphenation on the dash of a flag
+argument is not yet resolved, and causes
+occasional mishaps in the
+.Sx DESCRIPTION
+section.
+(line break on the hyphen).
+.Pp
+Predefined strings are not declared in documentation.
+.Pp
+Section 3f has not been added to the header routines.
+.Pp
+.Ql \&.Nm
+font should be changed in
+.Sx NAME
+section.
+.Pp
+.Ql \&.Fn
+needs to have a check to prevent splitting up
+if the line length is too short.
+Occasionally it
+separates the last parenthesis, and sometimes
+looks ridiculous if a line is in fill mode.
+.Pp
+The method used to prevent header and footer page
+breaks (other than the initial header and footer) when using
+nroff occasionally places an unsightly partially filled line (blank)
+at the would be bottom of the page.
+.Pp
+If the outer-most list definition doesn't have a
+.Fl width
+argument, the
+.Ql ".It"
+elements of inner lists may not work (producing a list where
+each successive element
+.Sq walks
+to the right).
+.Pp
+The list and display macros to not do any keeps
+and certainly should be able to.
+.\" Note what happens if the parameter list overlaps a newline
+.\" boundary.
+.\" to make sure a line boundary is crossed:
+.\" .Bd -literal
+.\" \&.Fn struct\e\ dictionarytable\e\ *dictionarylookup struct\e\ dictionarytable\e\ *tab[]
+.\" .Ed
+.\" .Pp
+.\" produces, nudge nudge,
+.\" .Fn struct\ dictionarytable\ *dictionarylookup char\ *h struct\ dictionarytable\ *tab[] ,
+.\" .Fn struct\ dictionarytable\ *dictionarylookup char\ *h struct\ dictionarytable\ *tab[] ,
+.\" nudge
+.\" .Fn struct\ dictionarytable\ *dictionarylookup char\ *h struct\ dictionarytable\ *tab[] .
+.\" .Pp
+.\" If double quotes are used, for example:
+.\" .Bd -literal
+.\" \&.Fn \*qstruct dictionarytable *dictionarylookup\*q \*qchar *h\*q \*qstruct dictionarytable *tab[]\*q
+.\" .Ed
+.\" .Pp
+.\" produces, nudge nudge,
+.\" .Fn "struct dictionarytable *dictionarylookup" "char *h" "struct dictionarytable *tab[]" ,
+.\" nudge
+.\" .Fn "struct dictionarytable *dictionarylookup" "char *h" "struct dictionarytable *tab[]" ,
+.\" nudge
+.\" .Fn "struct dictionarytable *dictionarylookup" "char *h" "struct dictionarytable *tab[]" .
+.\" .Pp
+.\" Not a pretty sight...
+.\" In a paragraph, a long parameter containing unpaddable spaces as
+.\" in the former example will cause
+.\" .Xr troff
+.\" to break the line and spread
+.\" the remaining words out.
+.\" The latter example will adjust nicely to
+.\" justified margins, but may break in between an argument and its
+.\" declaration.
+.\" In
+.\" .Xr nroff
+.\" the right margin adjustment is normally ragged and the problem is
+.\" not as severe.
+++ /dev/null
-.\" $NetBSD: mdoc.samples.7,v 1.21 1999/08/23 21:54:20 ross Exp $
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1993
-.\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" @(#)mdoc.samples.7 8.2 (Berkeley) 12/30/93
-.\"
-.\" This tutorial sampler invokes every macro in the package several
-.\" times and is guaranteed to give a worst case performance
-.\" for an already extremely slow package.
-.\"
-.Dd November 24, 1997
-.Os
-.Dt MDOC.SAMPLES 7
-.Sh NAME
-.Nm mdoc.samples
-.Nd tutorial sampler for writing
-.Bx
-manuals with
-.Nm \-mdoc
-.Sh SYNOPSIS
-.Nm man mdoc.samples
-.Sh DESCRIPTION
-A tutorial sampler for writing
-.Bx
-manual pages with the
-.Nm \-mdoc
-macro package, a
-.Em content Ns \-based
-and
-.Em domain Ns \-based
-formatting
-package for
-.Xr troff 1 .
-Its predecessor, the
-.Xr \-man 7
-package,
-addressed page layout leaving the
-manipulation of fonts and other
-typesetting details to the individual author.
-In
-.Nm \-mdoc ,
-page layout macros
-make up the
-.Em "page structure domain"
-which consists of macros for titles, section headers, displays
-and lists. Essentially items which affect the physical position
-of text on a formatted page.
-In addition to the page structure domain, there are two more domains,
-the manual domain and the general text domain.
-The general text domain is defined as macros which
-perform tasks such as quoting or emphasizing pieces of text.
-The manual domain is defined as macros that are a subset of the
-day to day informal language used to describe commands, routines
-and related
-.Bx
-files.
-Macros in the manual domain handle
-command names, command line arguments and options, function names,
-function parameters, pathnames, variables, cross
-references to other manual pages, and so on.
-These domain
-items have value
-for both the author and the future user of the manual page.
-It is hoped the consistency gained
-across the manual set will provide easier
-translation to future documentation tools.
-.Pp
-Throughout the
-.Ux
-manual pages, a manual entry
-is simply referred
-to as a man page, regardless of actual length and without
-sexist intention.
-.Sh GETTING STARTED
-Since a tutorial document is normally read when a person
-desires to use the material immediately, the assumption has
-been made that the user of this document may be impatient.
-The material presented in the remained of this document is
-outlined as follows:
-.Bl -enum -offset indent
-.It
-.Tn "TROFF IDIOSYNCRASIES"
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
-.It "Macro Usage" .
-.It "Passing Space Characters in an Argument" .
-.It "Trailing Blank Space Characters (a warning)" .
-.It "Escaping Special Characters" .
-.El
-.It
-.Tn "THE ANATOMY OF A MAN PAGE"
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
-.It "A manual page template" .
-.El
-.It
-.Tn "INTRODUCTION OF TITLE MACROS" .
-.It
-.Tn "INTRODUCTION OF MANUAL AND GENERAL TEXT DOMAINS" .
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
-.It "What's in a name..." .
-.It "General Syntax" .
-.El
-.It
-.Tn "MANUAL DOMAIN"
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
-.It "Addresses" .
-.It "Arguments" .
-.It "Configuration Declarations (section four only)" .
-.It "Command Modifier" .
-.It "Defined Variables" .
-.It "Errno's (Section two only)" .
-.It "Environment Variables" .
-.It "Function Argument" .
-.It "Function Declaration" .
-.It "Flags" .
-.It "Functions (library routines)" .
-.It "Function Types" .
-.\" .It "Header File (including source code)" .
-.It "Interactive Commands" .
-.It "Literals" .
-.It "Names" .
-.It "Options" .
-.It "Pathnames" .
-.It "Variables" .
-.It "Cross References" .
-.El
-.It
-.Tn "GENERAL TEXT DOMAIN"
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
-.It "AT&T Macro" .
-.It "BSD Macro" .
-.It "UNIX Macro" .
-.It "Emphasis Macro" .
-.It "Enclosure/Quoting Macros"
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
-.It "Angle Bracket Quote/Enclosure" .
-.It "Bracket Quotes/Enclosure" .
-.It "Double Quote macro/Enclosure" .
-.It "Parenthesis Quote/Enclosure" .
-.It "Single Quotes/Enclosure" .
-.It "Prefix Macro" .
-.El
-.It "Extended Arguments" .
-.It "No\-Op or Normal Text Macro" .
-.It "No Space Macro" .
-.It "Section Cross References" .
-.It "Symbolic Macro" .
-.It "References and Citations" .
-.It "Trade Names (Acronyms and Type Names)" .
-.El
-.It
-.Tn "PAGE STRUCTURE DOMAIN"
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
-.It "Section Headers" .
-.It "Paragraphs and Line Spacing" .
-.It "Keeps" .
-.It "Displays" .
-.It "Lists and Columns" .
-.El
-.It
-.Tn "PREDEFINED STRINGS"
-.It
-.Tn "DIAGNOSTICS"
-.It
-.Tn "FORMATTING WITH GROFF, TROFF AND NROFF"
-.It
-.Tn "BUGS"
-.El
-.ne 7
-.Sh TROFF IDIOSYNCRASIES
-The
-.Nm \-mdoc
-package attempts to simplify the process of writing a man page.
-Theoretically, one should not have to learn the dirty details of
-.Xr troff 1
-to use
-.Nm \-mdoc ;
-however, there are a few
-limitations which are unavoidable and best gotten out
-of the way.
-And, too, be forewarned, this package is
-.Em not
-fast.
-.Ss Macro Usage
-As in
-.Xr troff 1 ,
-a macro is called by placing a
-.Ql \&\.
-(dot character)
-at the beginning of
-a line followed by the two character name for the macro.
-Arguments may follow the macro separated by spaces.
-It is the dot character at the beginning of the line which causes
-.Xr troff 1
-to interpret the next two characters as a macro name.
-To place a
-.Ql \&\.
-(dot character)
-at the beginning of a line in some context other than
-a macro invocation, precede the
-.Ql \&\.
-(dot) with the
-.Ql \e&
-escape sequence.
-The
-.Ql \e&
-translates literally to a zero width space, and is never displayed in the
-output.
-.Pp
-In general,
-.Xr troff 1
-macros accept up to nine arguments, any
-extra arguments are ignored.
-Most macros in
-.Nm \-mdoc
-accept nine arguments and,
-in limited cases, arguments may be continued or extended
-on the
-next line (See
-.Sx Extended Arguments ) .
-A few macros handle quoted arguments (see
-.Sx Passing Space Characters in an Argument
-below).
-.Pp
-Most of the
-.Nm \-mdoc
-general text domain and manual domain macros are special
-in that their argument lists are
-.Em parsed
-for callable macro names.
-This means an argument on the argument list which matches
-a general text or manual domain macro name and is determined
-to be callable will be executed
-or called when it is processed.
-In this case
-the argument, although the name of a macro,
-is not preceded by a
-.Ql \&\.
-(dot).
-It is in this manner that many macros are nested; for
-example
-the option macro,
-.Ql \&.Op ,
-may
-.Em call
-the flag and argument macros,
-.Ql \&Fl
-and
-.Ql \&Ar ,
-to specify an optional flag with an argument:
-.Bl -tag -width "\&.Op \&Fl s \&Ar bytes" -offset indent
-.It Op Fl s Ar bytes
-is produced by
-.Li \&.Op \&Fl s \&Ar bytes
-.El
-.Pp
-To prevent a two character
-string from being interpreted as a macro name, precede
-the string with the
-escape sequence
-.Ql \e& :
-.Bl -tag -width "\&.Op \&Fl s \&Ar bytes" -offset indent
-.It Op \&Fl s \&Ar bytes
-is produced by
-.Li \&.Op \e&Fl s \e&Ar bytes
-.El
-.Pp
-Here the strings
-.Ql \&Fl
-and
-.Ql \&Ar
-are not interpreted as macros.
-Macros whose argument lists are parsed for callable arguments
-are referred to
-as parsed and macros which may be called from an argument
-list are referred to as callable
-throughout this document and in the companion quick reference
-manual
-.Xr mdoc 7 .
-This is a technical
-.Em faux pas
-as almost all of the macros in
-.Nm \-mdoc
-are parsed, but as it was cumbersome to constantly refer to macros
-as being callable and being able to call other macros,
-the term parsed has been used.
-.Ss Passing Space Characters in an Argument
-Sometimes it is desirable to give as one argument a string
-containing one or more blank space characters.
-This may be necessary
-to defeat the nine argument limit or to specify arguments to macros
-which expect particular arrangement of items in the argument list.
-For example,
-the function macro
-.Ql \&.Fn
-expects the first argument to be the name of a function and any
-remaining arguments to be function parameters.
-As
-.Tn "ANSI C"
-stipulates the declaration of function parameters in the
-parenthesized parameter list, each parameter is guaranteed
-to be at minimum a two word string.
-For example,
-.Fa int foo .
-.Pp
-There are two possible ways to pass an argument which contains
-an embedded space.
-.Em Implementation note :
-Unfortunately, the most convenient way
-of passing spaces in between quotes by reassigning individual
-arguments before parsing was fairly expensive speed wise
-and space wise to implement in all the macros for
-.Tn AT&T
-.Xr troff .
-It is not expensive for
-.Xr groff
-but for the sake of portability, has been limited
-to the following macros which need
-it the most:
-.Pp
-.Bl -tag -width 4n -offset indent -compact
-.It Li \&Cd
-Configuration declaration (section 4
-.Sx SYNOPSIS )
-.It Li \&Bl
-Begin list (for the width specifier).
-.It Li \&Em
-Emphasized text.
-.It Li \&Fn
-Functions (sections two and four).
-.It Li \&It
-List items.
-.It Li \&Li
-Literal text.
-.It Li \&Sy
-Symbolic text.
-.It Li \&%B
-Book titles.
-.It Li \&%J
-Journal names.
-.It Li \&%O
-Optional notes for a reference.
-.It Li \&%R
-Report title (in a reference).
-.It Li \&%T
-Title of article in a book or journal.
-.El
-.Pp
-One way of passing a string
-containing blank spaces is to use the hard or unpaddable space character
-.Ql \e\ ,
-that is, a blank space preceded by the escape character
-.Ql \e .
-This method may be used with any macro but has the side effect
-of interfering with the adjustment of text
-over the length of a line.
-.Xr Troff
-sees the hard space as if it were any other printable character and
-cannot split the string into blank or newline separated pieces as one
-would expect.
-The method is useful for strings which are not expected
-to overlap a line boundary.
-For example:
-.Bl -tag -width "fetch(char *str)" -offset indent
-.It Fn fetch char\ *str
-is created by
-.Ql \&.Fn fetch char\e *str
-.It Fn fetch "char *str"
-can also be created by
-.Ql \&.Fn fetch "\\*q*char *str\\*q"
-.El
-.Pp
-If the
-.Ql \e
-or quotes
-were omitted,
-.Ql \&.Fn
-would see three arguments and
-the result would be:
-.Pp
-.Dl Fn fetch char *str
-.Pp
-For an example of what happens when the parameter list overlaps
-a newline boundary, see the
-.Sx BUGS
-section.
-.Ss Trailing Blank Space Characters
-.Xr Troff
-can be confused by blank space characters at the end of a line.
-It
-is a wise preventive measure to globally remove all blank spaces
-from <blank-space><end-of-line> character sequences.
-Should the need
-arise to force a blank character at the end of a line,
-it may be forced with an unpaddable space and the
-.Ql \e&
-escape character.
-For example,
-.Ql string\e\ \e& .
-.Ss Escaping Special Characters
-Special characters
-like the newline character
-.Ql \en ,
-are handled by replacing the
-.Ql \e
-with
-.Ql \ee
-(e.g.
-.Ql \een )
-to preserve
-the backslash.
-.Sh THE ANATOMY OF A MAN PAGE
-The body of a man page is easily constructed from a basic
-template found in the file:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.\e" /usr/share/misc/mdoc.template:
-\&.\e" The following six lines are required.
-\&.Dd Month day, year
-\&.Os OPERATING_SYSTEM [version/release]
-\&.Dt DOCUMENT_TITLE [section number] [volume]
-\&.Sh NAME
-\&.Sh SYNOPSIS
-\&.Sh DESCRIPTION
-\&.\e" The following requests should be uncommented and
-\&.\e" used where appropriate. This next request is
-\&.\e" for sections 2 and 3 function return values only.
-\&.\e" .Sh RETURN VALUES
-\&.\e" This next request is for sections 1, 6, 7 & 8 only
-\&.\e" .Sh ENVIRONMENT
-\&.\e" .Sh FILES
-\&.\e" .Sh EXAMPLES
-\&.\e" This next request is for sections 1, 6, 7 & 8 only
-\&.\e" (command return values (to shell) and
-\&.\e" fprintf/stderr type diagnostics)
-\&.\e" .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
-\&.\e" The next request is for sections 2 and 3 error
-\&.\e" and signal handling only.
-\&.\e" .Sh ERRORS
-\&.\e" .Sh SEE ALSO
-\&.\e" .Sh STANDARDS
-\&.\e" .Sh HISTORY
-\&.\e" .Sh AUTHORS
-\&.\e" .Sh BUGS
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The first items in the template are the macros
-.Pq Li \&.Dd , \&.Os , \&.Dt ;
-the document date,
-the operating system the man page or subject source is developed
-or modified for,
-and the man page title
-.Pq Em in upper case
-along with the section of the manual the page
-belongs in.
-These macros identify the page,
-and are discussed below in
-.Sx TITLE MACROS .
-.Pp
-The remaining items in the template are section headers
-.Pq Li \&.Sh ;
-of which
-.Sx NAME ,
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-and
-.Sx DESCRIPTION
-are mandatory.
-The
-headers are
-discussed in
-.Sx PAGE STRUCTURE DOMAIN ,
-after
-presentation of
-.Sx MANUAL DOMAIN .
-Several content macros are used to demonstrate page layout macros;
-reading about content macros before page layout macros is
-recommended.
-.Sh TITLE MACROS
-The title macros are the first portion of the page structure
-domain, but are presented first and separate for someone who
-wishes to start writing a man page yesterday.
-Three header macros designate the document title or manual page title,
-the operating system,
-and the date of authorship.
-These macros are one called once at the very beginning of the document
-and are used to construct the headers and footers only.
-.Bl -tag -width 6n
-.It Li \&.Dt DOCUMENT_TITLE section# [volume]
-The document title is the
-subject of the man page and must be in
-.Tn CAPITALS
-due to troff
-limitations.
-The section number may be 1,\ ...,\ 9,
-and if it is specified,
-the volume title may be omitted.
-A volume title may be arbitrary or one of the following:
-.\" .Cl
-.\" USD UNIX User's Supplementary Documents
-.\" .Cl
-.\" PS1 UNIX Programmer's Supplementary Documents
-.Pp
-.Bl -column SMM -offset indent -compact
-.It Li AMD NetBSD Ancestral Manual Documents
-.It Li SMM NetBSD System Manager's Manual
-.It Li URM NetBSD Reference Manual
-.It Li PRM NetBSD Programmer's Manual
-.It Li KM NetBSD Kernel Manual
-.El
-.Pp
-The default volume labeling is
-.Li URM
-for sections 1, 6, and 7;
-.Li SMM
-for section 8;
-.Li PRM
-for sections 2, 3, 4, and 5;
-.Li KM
-for section 9.
-.\" .Cl
-.\" MMI UNIX Manual Master Index
-.\" .Cl
-.\" CON UNIX Contributed Software Manual
-.\" .Cl
-.\" LOC UNIX Local Manual
-.It Li \&.Os operating_system release#
-The name of the operating system
-should be the common acronym, e.g.
-.Tn BSD
-or
-.Tn ATT .
-The release should be the standard release
-nomenclature for the system specified, e.g. 4.3, 4.3+Tahoe, V.3,
-V.4.
-Unrecognized arguments are displayed as given in the page footer.
-For instance, a typical footer might be:
-.Pp
-.Dl \&.Os BSD 4.3
-.Pp
-or for a locally produced set
-.Pp
-.Dl \&.Os CS Department
-.Pp
-The Berkeley default,
-.Ql \&.Os
-without an argument, has been defined as
-.Nx 1.4
-in the site specific file
-.Pa /usr/share/tmac/tmac.doc-common .
-Note, if the
-.Ql \&.Os
-macro is not present, the bottom left corner of the page
-will be ugly.
-.It Li \&.Dd month day, year
-The date should be written formally:
-.Pp
-.ne 5
-.Dl January 25, 1989
-.sp
-Note that the date must not be placed in quotes!
-.El
-.Sh MANUAL DOMAIN
-.Ss What's in a name...
-The manual domain macro names are derived from the day to day
-informal language used to describe commands, subroutines and related
-files.
-Slightly
-different variations of this language are used to describe
-the three different aspects of writing a man page.
-First, there is the description of
-.Nm \-mdoc
-macro request usage.
-Second is the description of a
-.Ux
-command
-.Em with
-.Nm \-mdoc
-macros and third,
-the
-description of a command to a user in the verbal sense;
-that is, discussion of a command in the text of a man page.
-.Pp
-In the first case,
-.Xr troff 1
-macros are themselves a type of command;
-the general syntax for a troff command is:
-.Bd -filled -offset indent
-\&.Va argument1 argument2 ... argument9
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Va
-is a macro command or request, and anything following it is an argument to
-be processed.
-In the second case,
-the description of a
-.Ux
-command using the content macros is a
-bit more involved;
-a typical
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-command line might be displayed as:
-.Bd -filled -offset indent
-.Nm filter
-.Op Fl flag
-.Ar infile outfile
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Here,
-.Nm filter
-is the command name and the
-bracketed string
-.Fl flag
-is a
-.Em flag
-argument designated as optional by the option brackets.
-In
-.Nm \-mdoc
-terms,
-.Ar infile
-and
-.Ar outfile
-are
-called
-.Em arguments .
-The macros which formatted the above example:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Nm filter
-\&.Op \&Fl flag
-\&.Ar infile outfile
-.Ed
-.Pp
-In the third case, discussion of commands and command syntax
-includes both examples above, but may add more detail.
-The
-arguments
-.Ar infile
-and
-.Ar outfile
-from the example above might be referred to as
-.Em operands
-or
-.Em file arguments .
-Some command line argument lists are quite long:
-.Bl -tag -width make -offset indent
-.It Nm make
-.Op Fl eiknqrstv
-.Op Fl D Ar variable
-.Op Fl d Ar flags
-.Op Fl f Ar makefile
-.Bk -words
-.Op Fl I Ar directory
-.Ek
-.Op Fl j Ar max_jobs
-.Op Ar variable=value
-.Bk -words
-.Op Ar target ...
-.Ek
-.El
-.Pp
-Here one might talk about the command
-.Nm make
-and qualify the argument
-.Ar makefile ,
-as an argument to the flag,
-.Fl f ,
-or discuss the optional
-file
-operand
-.Ar target .
-In the verbal context, such detail can prevent confusion,
-however the
-.Nm \-mdoc
-package
-does not have a macro for an argument
-.Em to
-a flag.
-Instead the
-.Ql \&Ar
-argument macro is used for an operand or file argument like
-.Ar target
-as well as an argument to a flag like
-.Ar variable .
-The make command line was produced from:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Nm make
-\&.Op Fl eiknqrstv
-\&.Op Fl D Ar variable
-\&.Op Fl d Ar flags
-\&.Op Fl f Ar makefile
-\&.Op Fl I Ar directory
-\&.Op Fl j Ar max_jobs
-\&.Op Ar variable=value
-\&.Bk -words
-\&.Op Ar target ...
-\&.Ek
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Bk
-and
-.Ql \&.Ek
-macros are explained in
-.Sx Keeps .
-.Ss General Syntax
-The manual domain and general text domain macros share a similar
-syntax with a few minor deviations:
-.Ql \&.Ar ,
-.Ql \&.Fl ,
-.Ql \&.Nm ,
-and
-.Ql \&.Pa
-differ only when called without arguments;
-.Ql \&.Fn
-and
-.Ql \&.Xr
-impose an order on their argument lists
-and the
-.Ql \&.Op
-and
-.Ql \&.Fn
-macros
-have nesting limitations.
-All content macros
-are capable of recognizing and properly handling punctuation,
-provided each punctuation character is separated by a leading space.
-If an request is given:
-.Pp
-.Dl \&.Li sptr, ptr),
-.Pp
-The result is:
-.Pp
-.Dl Li sptr, ptr),
-.Pp
-The punctuation is not recognized and all is output in the
-literal font. If the punctuation is separated by a leading
-white space:
-.Pp
-.Dl \&.Li "sptr , ptr ) ,"
-.Pp
-The result is:
-.Pp
-.Dl Li sptr , ptr ) ,
-.Pp
-The punctuation is now recognized and is output in the
-default font distinguishing it from the strings in literal font.
-.Pp
-To remove the special meaning from a punctuation character
-escape it with
-.Ql \e& .
-.Xr Troff
-is limited as a macro language, and has difficulty
-when presented with a string containing
-a member of the mathematical, logical or
-quotation set:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent-two
-\&{+,\-,/,*,\&%,<,>,<=,>=,=,==,&,`,',"}
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The problem is that
-.Xr troff
-may assume it is supposed to actually perform the operation
-or evaluation suggested by the characters. To prevent
-the accidental evaluation of these characters,
-escape them with
-.Ql \e& .
-Typical syntax is shown in the first content macro displayed
-below,
-.Ql \&.Ad .
-.Ss Address Macro
-The address macro identifies an address construct
-of the form addr1[,addr2[,addr3]].
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Ad address ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Ad f1 , f2 , f3 :" -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Ad addr1
-.Ad addr1
-.It Li \&.Ad addr1\ .
-.Ad addr1 .
-.It Li \&.Ad addr1\ , file2
-.Ad addr1 , file2
-.It Li \&.Ad f1\ , f2\ , f3\ :
-.Ad f1 , f2 , f3 :
-.It Li \&.Ad addr\ )\ )\ ,
-.Ad addr ) ) ,
-.El
-.Pp
-It is an error to call
-.Li \&.Ad
-without arguments.
-.Li \&.Ad
-is callable by other macros and is parsed.
-.Ss Argument Macro
-The
-.Li \&.Ar
-argument macro may be used whenever
-a command line argument is referenced.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Ar argument ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Ar file1 file2" -compact -offset 15n
-.It Li \&.Ar
-.Ar
-.It Li \&.Ar file1
-.Ar file1
-.It Li \&.Ar file1\ .
-.Ar file1 .
-.It Li \&.Ar file1 file2
-.Ar file1 file2
-.It Li \&.Ar f1 f2 f3\ :
-.Ar f1 f2 f3 :
-.It Li \&.Ar file\ )\ )\ ,
-.Ar file ) ) ,
-.El
-.Pp
-If
-.Li \&.Ar
-is called without arguments
-.Ql Ar
-is assumed.
-The
-.Li \&.Ar
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Configuration Declaration (section four only)
-The
-.Ql \&.Cd
-macro is used to demonstrate a
-.Xr config 8
-declaration for a device interface in a section four manual.
-This macro accepts quoted arguments (double quotes only).
-.Pp
-.Bl -tag -width "device le0 at scode?" -offset indent
-.It Cd "device le0 at scode?"
-produced by:
-.Ql ".Cd device le0 at scode?" .
-.El
-.Ss Command Modifier
-The command modifier is identical to the
-.Ql \&.Fl
-(flag) command with the exception
-the
-.Ql \&.Cm
-macro does not assert a dash
-in front of every argument.
-Traditionally flags are marked by the
-preceding dash, some commands or subsets of commands do not use them.
-Command modifiers may also be specified in conjunction with interactive
-commands such as editor commands.
-See
-.Sx Flags .
-.Ss Defined Variables
-A variable which is defined in an include file is specified
-by the macro
-.Ql \&.Dv .
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Dv defined_variable ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Dv MAXHOSTNAMELEN" -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li ".Dv MAXHOSTNAMELEN"
-.Dv MAXHOSTNAMELEN
-.It Li ".Dv TIOCGPGRP )"
-.Dv TIOCGPGRP )
-.El
-.Pp
-It is an error to call
-.Ql \&.Dv
-without arguments.
-.Ql \&.Dv
-is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Errno's (Section two only)
-The
-.Ql \&.Er
-errno macro specifies the error return value
-for section two library routines.
-The second example
-below shows
-.Ql \&.Er
-used with the
-.Ql \&.Bq
-general text domain macro, as it would be used in
-a section two manual page.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Er ERRNOTYPE ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Bq Er ENOTDIR" -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Er ENOENT
-.Er ENOENT
-.It Li \&.Er ENOENT\ )\ ;
-.Er ENOENT ) ;
-.It Li \&.Bq \&Er ENOTDIR
-.Bq Er ENOTDIR
-.El
-.Pp
-It is an error to call
-.Ql \&.Er
-without arguments.
-The
-.Ql \&.Er
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Environment Variables
-The
-.Ql \&.Ev
-macro specifies an environment variable.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Ev argument ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Ev PRINTER ) ) ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Ev DISPLAY
-.Ev DISPLAY
-.It Li \&.Ev PATH\ .
-.Ev PATH .
-.It Li \&.Ev PRINTER\ )\ )\ ,
-.Ev PRINTER ) ) ,
-.El
-.Pp
-It is an error to call
-.Ql \&.Ev
-without arguments.
-The
-.Ql \&.Ev
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Function Argument
-The
-.Ql \&.Fa
-macro is used to refer to function arguments (parameters)
-outside of the
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-section of the manual or inside
-the
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-section should a parameter list be too
-long for the
-.Ql \&.Fn
-macro and the enclosure macros
-.Ql \&.Fo
-and
-.Ql \&.Fc
-must be used.
-.Ql \&.Fa
-may also be used to refer to structure members.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Fa function_argument ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Fa d_namlen\ )\ )\ ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Fa d_namlen\ )\ )\ ,
-.Fa d_namlen ) ) ,
-.It Li \&.Fa iov_len
-.Fa iov_len
-.El
-.Pp
-It is an error to call
-.Ql \&.Fa
-without arguments.
-.Ql \&.Fa
-is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Function Declaration
-The
-.Ql \&.Fd
-macro is used in the
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-section with section two or three
-functions.
-The
-.Ql \&.Fd
-macro does not call other macros and is not callable by other
-macros.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Fd include_file (or defined variable)
-.Pp
-In the
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-section a
-.Ql \&.Fd
-request causes a line break if a function has already been presented
-and a break has not occurred.
-This leaves a nice vertical space
-in between the previous function call and the declaration for the
-next function.
-.Ss Flags
-The
-.Ql \&.Fl
-macro handles command line flags.
-It prepends
-a dash,
-.Ql \- ,
-to the flag.
-For interactive command flags, which
-are not prepended with a dash, the
-.Ql \&.Cm
-(command modifier)
-macro is identical, but without the dash.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Fl argument ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Fl \-s \-t \-v" -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Fl
-.Fl
-.It Li \&.Fl cfv
-.Fl cfv
-.It Li \&.Fl cfv\ .
-.Fl cfv .
-.It Li \&.Fl s v t
-.Fl s v t
-.It Li \&.Fl -\ ,
-.Fl - ,
-.It Li \&.Fl xyz\ )\ ,
-.Fl xyz ) ,
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Fl
-macro without any arguments results
-in a dash representing stdin/stdout.
-Note that giving
-.Ql \&.Fl
-a single dash, will result in two dashes.
-The
-.Ql \&.Fl
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Functions (library routines)
-The .Fn macro is modeled on ANSI C conventions.
-.Bd -literal
-Usage: .Fn [type] function [[type] parameters ... \*(Pu]
-.Ed
-.Bl -tag -width ".Fn .int align. .const * char *sptrsxx" -compact
-.It Li "\&.Fn getchar"
-.Fn getchar
-.It Li "\&.Fn strlen ) ,"
-.Fn strlen ) ,
-.It Li \&.Fn "\\*qint align\\*q" "\\*qconst * char *sptrs\\*q" ,
-.Fn "int align" "const * char *sptrs" ,
-.El
-.Pp
-It is an error to call
-.Ql \&.Fn
-without any arguments.
-The
-.Ql \&.Fn
-macro
-is parsed and is callable,
-note that any call to another macro signals the end of
-the
-.Ql \&.Fn
-call (it will close-parenthesis at that point).
-.Pp
-For functions that have more than eight parameters (and this
-is rare), the
-macros
-.Ql \&.Fo
-(function open)
-and
-.Ql \&.Fc
-(function close)
-may be used with
-.Ql \&.Fa
-(function argument)
-to get around the limitation. For example:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Fo "int res_mkquery"
-\&.Fa "int op"
-\&.Fa "char *dname"
-\&.Fa "int class"
-\&.Fa "int type"
-\&.Fa "char *data"
-\&.Fa "int datalen"
-\&.Fa "struct rrec *newrr"
-\&.Fa "char *buf"
-\&.Fa "int buflen"
-\&.Fc
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Produces:
-.Bd -filled -offset indent
-.Fo "int res_mkquery"
-.Fa "int op"
-.Fa "char *dname"
-.Fa "int class"
-.Fa "int type"
-.Fa "char *data"
-.Fa "int datalen"
-.Fa "struct rrec *newrr"
-.Fa "char *buf"
-.Fa "int buflen"
-.Fc
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Fo
-and
-.Ql \&.Fc
-macros are parsed and are callable.
-In the
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-section, the function will always begin at
-the beginning of line.
-If there is more than one function
-presented in the
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-section and a function type has not been
-given, a line break will occur, leaving a nice vertical space
-between the current function name and the one prior.
-At the moment,
-.Ql \&.Fn
-does not check its word boundaries
-against troff line lengths and may split across a newline
-ungracefully.
-This will be fixed in the near future.
-.Ss Function Type
-This macro is intended for the
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-section.
-It may be used
-anywhere else in the man page without problems, but its main purpose
-is to present the function type in kernel normal form for the
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-of sections two and three
-(it causes a page break allowing the function name to appear
-on the next line).
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Ft type ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width "\&.Ft struct stat" -offset 14n -compact
-.It Li \&.Ft struct stat
-.Ft struct stat
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Ft
-request is not callable by other macros.
-.Ss Interactive Commands
-The
-.Ql \&.Ic
-macro designates an interactive or internal command.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Li argument ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Ic setenv , unsetenvxx" -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Ic :wq
-.Ic :wq
-.It Li \&.Ic do while {...}
-.Ic do while {...}
-.It Li \&.Ic setenv\ , unsetenv
-.Ic setenv , unsetenv
-.El
-.Pp
-It is an error to call
-.Ql \&.Ic
-without arguments.
-The
-.Ql \&.Ic
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Literals
-The
-.Ql \&.Li
-literal macro may be used for special characters,
-variable constants, anything which should be displayed as it
-would be typed.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Li argument ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Li cntrl-D ) ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Li \een
-.Li \en
-.It Li \&.Li M1 M2 M3\ ;
-.Li M1 M2 M3 ;
-.It Li \&.Li cntrl-D\ )\ ,
-.Li cntrl-D ) ,
-.It Li \&.Li 1024\ ...
-.Li 1024 ...
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Li
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Name Macro
-The
-.Ql \&.Nm
-macro is used for the document title or subject name.
-It has the peculiarity of remembering the first
-argument it was called with, which should
-always be the subject name of the page.
-When called without
-arguments,
-.Ql \&.Nm
-regurgitates this initial name for the sole purpose
-of making less work for the author.
-If trailing punctuation is required with this feature,
-use
-.Qq
-as a first argument to
-.Ql \&.Nm .
-Note:
-a section two
-or three document function name is addressed with the
-.Ql \&.Nm
-in the
-.Sx NAME
-section, and with
-.Ql \&.Fn
-in the
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-and remaining sections.
-For interactive commands, such as the
-.Ql while
-command keyword in
-.Xr csh 1 ,
-the
-.Ql \&.Ic
-macro should be used.
-While the
-.Ql \&.Ic
-is nearly identical
-to
-.Ql \&.Nm ,
-it can not recall the first argument it was invoked with.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Nm argument ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Nm mdoc.samples" -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Nm mdoc.samples
-.Nm mdoc.samples
-.It Li \&.Nm \e-mdoc
-.Nm \-mdoc
-.It Li \&.Nm foo\ )\ )\ ,
-.Nm foo ) ) ,
-.It Li \&.Nm
-.Nm
-.It Li \&.Nm \&"\&"\ :
-.Nm "" :
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Nm
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Options
-The
-.Ql \&.Op
-macro
-places option brackets around the any remaining arguments on the command
-line, and places any
-trailing punctuation outside the brackets.
-The macros
-.Ql \&.Oc
-and
-.Ql \&.Oo
-may be used across one or more lines.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Op options ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Op Fl c Ar objfil Op Ar corfil ," -compact -offset indent
-.It Li \&.Op
-.Op
-.It Li ".Op Fl k"
-.Op Fl k
-.It Li ".Op Fl k ) ."
-.Op Fl k ) .
-.It Li ".Op Fl k Ar kookfile"
-.Op Fl k Ar kookfile
-.It Li ".Op Fl k Ar kookfile ,"
-.Op Fl k Ar kookfile ,
-.It Li ".Op Ar objfil Op Ar corfil"
-.Op Ar objfil Op Ar corfil
-.It Li ".Op Fl c Ar objfil Op Ar corfil ,"
-.Op Fl c Ar objfil Op Ar corfil ,
-.It Li \&.Op word1 word2
-.Op word1 word2
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Oc
-and
-.Ql \&.Oo
-macros:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Oo
-\&.Op \&Fl k \&Ar kilobytes
-\&.Op \&Fl i \&Ar interval
-\&.Op \&Fl c \&Ar count
-\&.Oc
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Produce:
-.Oo
-.Op Fl k Ar kilobytes
-.Op Fl i Ar interval
-.Op Fl c Ar count
-.Oc
-.Pp
-The macros
-.Ql \&.Op ,
-.Ql \&.Oc
-and
-.Ql \&.Oo
-are parsed and are callable.
-.Ss Pathnames
-The
-.Ql \&.Pa
-macro formats path or file names.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Pa pathname \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Pa /tmp/fooXXXXX ) ." -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Pa /usr/share
-.Pa /usr/share
-.It Li \&.Pa /tmp/fooXXXXX\ )\ .
-.Pa /tmp/fooXXXXX ) .
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Pa
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Variables
-Generic variable reference:
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Va variable ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Va char s ] ) ) ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Va count
-.Va count
-.It Li \&.Va settimer ,
-.Va settimer ,
-.It Li \&.Va int\ *prt\ )\ :
-.Va int\ *prt ) :
-.It Li \&.Va char\ s\ ]\ )\ )\ ,
-.Va char\ s ] ) ) ,
-.El
-.Pp
-It is an error to call
-.Ql \&.Va
-without any arguments.
-The
-.Ql \&.Va
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Manual Page Cross References
-The
-.Ql \&.Xr
-macro expects the first argument to be
-a manual page name, and the second argument, if it exists,
-to be either a section page number or punctuation.
-Any
-remaining arguments are assumed to be punctuation.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Xr man_page [1,...,9] \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Xr mdoc 7 ) ) ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Xr mdoc
-.Xr mdoc
-.It Li \&.Xr mdoc\ ,
-.Xr mdoc ,
-.It Li \&.Xr mdoc 7
-.Xr mdoc 7
-.It Li \&.Xr mdoc 7\ )\ )\ ,
-.Xr mdoc 7 ) ) ,
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Xr
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-It is an error to call
-.Ql \&.Xr
-without
-any arguments.
-.Sh GENERAL TEXT DOMAIN
-.Ss AT&T Macro
-.Bd -literal -offset indent -compact
-Usage: .At [v1 .. v7 | 32v | V.1 | V.4] ... \*(Pu
-.Ed
-.Bl -tag -width ".At v6 ) ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li ".At"
-.At
-.It Li ".At v6 ."
-.At v6 .
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.At
-macro is
-.Em not
-parsed and
-.Em not
-callable. It accepts at most two arguments.
-.Ss BSD Macro
-.Dl Usage: .Bx [Version/release] ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Bx 4.3 ) ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li ".Bx"
-.Bx
-.It Li ".Bx 4.3 ."
-.Bx 4.3 .
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Bx
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss NetBSD Macro
-.Dl Usage: .Nx [Version/release] ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Nx 1.4 ) ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li ".Nx"
-.Nx
-.It Li ".Nx 1.4 ."
-.Nx 1.4 .
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Nx
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss FreeBSD Macro
-.Dl Usage: .Fx [Version/release] ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Fx 2.2 ) ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li ".Fx"
-.Fx
-.It Li ".Fx 2.2 ."
-.Fx 2.2 .
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Fx
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss UNIX Macro
-.Dl Usage: .Ux ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Ux 4.3 ) ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li ".Ux"
-.Ux
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Ux
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Emphasis Macro
-Text may be stressed or emphasized with the
-.Ql \&.Em
-macro.
-The usual font for emphasis is italic.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Em argument ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Em vide infra ) ) ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li ".Em does not"
-.Em does not
-.It Li ".Em exceed 1024 ."
-.Em exceed 1024 .
-.It Li ".Em vide infra ) ) ,"
-.Em vide infra ) ) ,
-.El
-.\" .Pp
-.\" The emphasis can be forced across several lines of text by using
-.\" the
-.\" .Ql \&.Bf
-.\" macro discussed in
-.\" .Sx Modes
-.\" under
-.\" .Sx PAGE STRUCTURE DOMAIN .
-.\" .Pp
-.\" .Bf -emphasis
-.\" We are certain the reason most people desire a Harvard MBA
-.\" so they can become to be successful philanthropists. Only
-.\" mathematicians and physicists go to graduate school strictly
-.\" to acquire infinite wealthy and fame. Its that inifinity
-.\" word that does it to them. Ruins them.
-.\" .Ef
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Em
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-It is an error to call
-.Ql \&.Em
-without arguments.
-.Ss Enclosure and Quoting Macros
-The concept of enclosure is similar to quoting.
-The object being to enclose one or more strings between
-a pair of characters like quotes or parentheses.
-The terms quoting and enclosure are used
-interchangeably throughout this document.
-Most of the
-one line enclosure macros end
-in small letter
-.Ql q
-to give a hint of quoting, but there are a few irregularities.
-For each enclosure macro
-there is also a pair of open and close macros which end
-in small letters
-.Ql o
-and
-.Ql c
-respectively.
-These can be used across one or more lines of text
-and while they have nesting limitations, the one line quote macros
-can be used inside
-of them.
-.Pp
-.ne 5
-.Bd -filled -offset indent
-.Bl -column "quote " "close " "open " "Enclose Stringx(in XX) " XXstringXX
-.Em " Quote Close Open Function Result"
-\&.Aq .Ac .Ao Angle Bracket Enclosure <string>
-\&.Bq .Bc .Bo Bracket Enclosure [string]
-\&.Dq .Dc .Do Double Quote ``string''
- .Ec .Eo Enclose String (in XX) XXstringXX
-\&.Pq .Pc .Po Parenthesis Enclosure (string)
-\&.Ql Quoted Literal `st' or string
-\&.Qq .Qc .Qo Straight Double Quote "string"
-\&.Sq .Sc .So Single Quote `string'
-.El
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Except for the irregular macros noted below, all
-of the quoting macros are parsed and callable.
-All handle punctuation properly, as long as it
-is presented one character at a time and separated by spaces.
-The quoting macros examine opening and closing punctuation
-to determine whether it comes before or after the
-enclosing string. This makes some nesting possible.
-.Bl -tag -width xxx,xxxx
-.It Li \&.Ec , \&.Eo
-These macros expect the first argument to be the
-opening and closing strings respectively.
-.It Li \&.Ql
-The quoted literal macro behaves differently for
-.Xr troff
-than
-.Xr nroff .
-If formatted with
-.Xr nroff ,
-a quoted literal is always quoted. If formatted with
-troff, an item is only quoted if the width
-of the item is less than three constant width characters.
-This is to make short strings more visible where the font change
-to literal (constant width) is less noticeable.
-.It Li \&.Pf
-The prefix macro is not callable, but it is parsed:
-.Bl -tag -width "(namexx" -offset indent
-.It Li ".Pf ( Fa name2"
-becomes
-.Pf ( Fa name2 .
-.El
-.It Li \&.Ns
-The
-.Ql \&.Ns
-(no space) macro, which
-.Em is
-callable,
-performs the analogous suffix function.
-.It Li ".Ap
-The \&.Ap macro inserts an apostrophe and exits any special text modes,
-continuing in
-.Li \&.No
-mode.
-.El
-.Pp
-.ne 4
-Examples of quoting:
-.Bl -tag -width ".Aq Pa ctype.h ) ,xxxxxxxx" -compact -offset indent
-.It Li \&.Aq
-.Aq
-.It Li \&.Aq \&Ar ctype.h\ )\ ,
-.Aq Ar ctype.h ) ,
-.It Li \&.Bq
-.Bq
-.It Li \&.Bq \&Em Greek \&, French \&.
-.Bq Em Greek , French .
-.It Li \&.Dq
-.Dq
-.It Li ".Dq string abc ."
-.Dq string abc .
-.It Li ".Dq \'^[A-Z]\'"
-.Dq \'^[A-Z]\'
-.It Li "\&.Ql man mdoc"
-.Ql man mdoc
-.It Li \&.Qq
-.Qq
-.It Li "\&.Qq string ) ,"
-.Qq string ) ,
-.It Li "\&.Qq string Ns ),"
-.Qq string Ns ),
-.It Li \&.Sq
-.Sq
-.It Li "\&.Sq string
-.Sq string
-.It Li "\&.Em or Ap ing
-.Em or Ap ing
-.El
-.Pp
-For a good example of nested enclosure macros, see the
-.Ql \&.Op
-option macro.
-It was created from the same
-underlying enclosure macros as those presented in the list
-above.
-The
-.Ql \&.Xo
-and
-.Ql \&.Xc
-extended argument list macros
-were also built from the same underlying routines and are a good
-example of
-.Nm \-mdoc
-macro usage at its worst.
-.Ss No\-Op or Normal Text Macro
-The macro
-.Li \&.No
-is
-a hack for words in a macro command line which should
-.Em not
-be formatted and follows the conventional syntax
-for content macros.
-.Ss No Space Macro
-The
-.Ql \&.Ns
-macro eliminates unwanted spaces in between macro requests.
-It is useful for old style argument lists where there is no space
-between the flag and argument:
-.Bl -tag -width ".Op Fl I Ns Ar directoryxx" -offset indent
-.It Li ".Op Fl I Ns Ar directory"
-produces
-.Op Fl I Ns Ar directory
-.El
-.Pp
-Note: the
-.Ql \&.Ns
-macro always invokes the
-.Ql \&.No
-macro after eliminating the space unless another macro name
-follows it.
-The macro
-.Ql \&.Ns
-is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Section Cross References
-The
-.Ql \&.Sx
-macro designates a reference to a section header
-within the same document.
-It is parsed and is callable.
-.Pp
-.Bl -tag -width "Li \&.Sx FILES" -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Sx FILES
-.Sx FILES
-.El
-.Ss Symbolic
-The symbolic emphasis macro is generally a boldface macro in
-either the symbolic sense or the traditional English usage.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Sy symbol ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Sy Important Noticex" -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Sy Important Notice
-.Sy Important Notice
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Sy
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-Arguments to
-.Ql \&.Sy
-may be quoted.
-.Ss References and Citations
-The following macros make a modest attempt to handle references.
-At best, the macros make it convenient to manually drop in a subset of
-refer style references.
-.Pp
-.Bl -tag -width 6n -offset indent -compact
-.It Li ".Rs"
-Reference Start.
-Causes a line break and begins collection
-of reference information until the
-reference end macro is read.
-.It Li ".Re"
-Reference End.
-The reference is printed.
-.It Li ".%A"
-Reference author name, one name per invocation.
-.It Li ".%B"
-Book title.
-.It Li ".\&%C"
-City/place.
-.It Li ".\&%D"
-Date.
-.It Li ".%J"
-Journal name.
-.It Li ".%N"
-Issue number.
-.It Li ".%O"
-Optional information.
-.It Li ".%P"
-Page number.
-.It Li ".%R"
-Report name.
-.It Li ".%T"
-Title of article.
-.It Li ".%V"
-Volume(s).
-.El
-.Pp
-The macros beginning with
-.Ql %
-are not callable, and are parsed only for the trade name macro which
-returns to its caller.
-(And not very predictably at the moment either.)
-The purpose is to allow trade names
-to be pretty printed in
-.Xr troff Ns / Ns Xr ditroff
-output.
-.Ss Trade Names (or Acronyms and Type Names)
-The trade name macro is generally a small caps macro for
-all upper case words longer than two characters.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Tn symbol ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Tn ASCII" -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Tn DEC
-.Tn DEC
-.It Li \&.Tn ASCII
-.Tn ASCII
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Tn
-macro
-is parsed and is callable by other macros.
-.Ss Extended Arguments
-The
-.Li \&.Xo
-and
-.Li \&.Xc
-macros allow one to extend an argument list
-on a macro boundary.
-Argument lists cannot
-be extended within a macro
-which expects all of its arguments on one line such
-as
-.Ql \&.Op .
-.Pp
-Here is an example of
-.Ql \&.Xo
-using the space mode macro to turn spacing off:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Sm off
-\&.It Xo Sy I Ar operation
-\&.No \een Ar count No \een
-\&.Xc
-\&.Sm on
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Produces
-.Bd -filled -offset indent
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact
-.Sm off
-.It Xo Sy I Ar operation
-.No \en Ar count No \en
-.Xc
-.Sm on
-.El
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Another one:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Sm off
-\&.It Cm S No \&/ Ar old_pattern Xo
-\&.No \&/ Ar new_pattern
-\&.No \&/ Op Cm g
-\&.Xc
-\&.Sm on
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Produces
-.Bd -filled -offset indent
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact
-.Sm off
-.It Cm S No \&/ Ar old_pattern Xo
-.No \&/ Ar new_pattern
-.No \&/ Op Cm g
-.Xc
-.Sm on
-.El
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Another example of
-.Ql \&.Xo
-and using enclosure macros:
-Test the value of an variable.
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.It Xo
-\&.Ic .ifndef
-\&.Oo \e&! Oc Ns Ar variable
-\&.Op Ar operator variable ...
-\&.Xc
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Produces
-.Bd -filled -offset indent
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact
-.It Xo
-.Ic .ifndef
-.Oo \&! Oc Ns Ar variable
-.Op Ar operator variable ...
-.Xc
-.El
-.Ed
-.Pp
-All of the above examples have used the
-.Ql \&.Xo
-macro on the argument list of the
-.Ql \&.It
-(list-item)
-macro.
-The extend macros are not used very often, and when they are
-it is usually to extend the list-item argument list.
-Unfortunately, this is also where the extend macros are the
-most finicky.
-In the first two examples, spacing was turned off;
-in the third, spacing was desired in part of the output but
-not all of it.
-To make these macros work in this situation make sure
-the
-.Ql \&.Xo
-and
-.Ql \&.Xc
-macros are placed as shown in the third example.
-If the
-.Ql \&.Xo
-macro is not alone on the
-.Ql \&.It
-argument list, spacing will be unpredictable.
-The
-.Ql \&.Ns
-(no space macro)
-must not occur as the first or last macro on a line
-in this situation.
-Out of 900 manual pages (about 1500 actual pages)
-currently released with
-.Bx
-only fifteen use the
-.Ql \&.Xo
-macro.
-.Sh PAGE STRUCTURE DOMAIN
-.Ss Section Headers
-The first three
-.Ql \&.Sh
-section header macros
-list below are required in every
-man page.
-The remaining section headers
-are recommended at the discretion of the author
-writing the manual page.
-The
-.Ql \&.Sh
-macro can take up to nine arguments.
-It is parsed and but is not callable.
-.Bl -tag -width ".Sh SYNOPSIS"
-.It \&.Sh NAME
-The
-.Ql \&.Sh NAME
-macro is mandatory.
-If not specified,
-the headers, footers and page layout defaults
-will not be set and things will be rather unpleasant.
-The
-.Sx NAME
-section consists of at least three items.
-The first is the
-.Ql \&.Nm
-name macro naming the subject of the man page.
-The second is the Name Description macro,
-.Ql \&.Nd ,
-which separates the subject
-name from the third item, which is the description.
-The
-description should be the most terse and lucid possible,
-as the space available is small.
-.It \&.Sh SYNOPSIS
-The
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-section describes the typical usage of the
-subject of a man page.
-The macros required
-are either
-.Ql ".Nm" ,
-.Ql ".Cd" ,
-.Ql ".Fn" ,
-(and possibly
-.Ql ".Fo" ,
-.Ql ".Fc" ,
-.Ql ".Fd" ,
-.Ql ".Ft"
-macros).
-The function name
-macro
-.Ql ".Fn"
-is required
-for manual page sections 2 and 3, the command and general
-name macro
-.Ql \&.Nm
-is required for sections 1, 5, 6, 7, 8.
-Section 4 manuals require a
-.Ql ".Nm" , ".Fd"
-or a
-.Ql ".Cd"
-configuration device usage macro.
-Several other macros may be necessary to produce
-the synopsis line as shown below:
-.Pp
-.Bd -filled -offset indent
-.Nm cat
-.Op Fl benstuv
-.Op Fl
-.Ar
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The following macros were used:
-.Pp
-.Dl \&.Nm cat
-.Dl \&.Op \&Fl benstuv
-.Dl \&.Op \&Fl
-.Dl \&.Ar
-.Pp
-.Sy Note :
-The macros
-.Ql \&.Op ,
-.Ql \&.Fl ,
-and
-.Ql \&.Ar
-recognize the pipe bar character
-.Ql \*(Ba ,
-so a command line such as:
-.Pp
-.Dl ".Op Fl a | Fl b"
-.Pp
-will not go orbital.
-.Xr Troff
-normally interprets a \*(Ba as a special operator.
-See
-.Sx PREDEFINED STRINGS
-for a usable \*(Ba
-character in other situations.
-.It \&.Sh DESCRIPTION
-In most cases the first text in the
-.Sx DESCRIPTION
-section
-is a brief paragraph on the command, function or file,
-followed by a lexical list of options and respective
-explanations.
-To create such a list, the
-.Ql \&.Bl
-begin-list,
-.Ql \&.It
-list-item and
-.Ql \&.El
-end-list
-macros are used (see
-.Sx Lists and Columns
-below).
-.El
-.Pp
-The following
-.Ql \&.Sh
-section headers are part of the
-preferred manual page layout and must be used appropriately
-to maintain consistency.
-They are listed in the order
-in which they would be used.
-.Bl -tag -width SYNOPSIS
-.It \&.Sh ENVIRONMENT
-The
-.Sx ENVIRONMENT
-section should reveal any related
-environment
-variables and clues to their behavior and/or usage.
-.It \&.Sh EXAMPLES
-There are several ways to create examples.
-See
-the
-.Sx EXAMPLES
-section below
-for details.
-.It \&.Sh FILES
-Files which are used or created by the man page subject
-should be listed via the
-.Ql \&.Pa
-macro in the
-.Sx FILES
-section.
-.It \&.Sh SEE ALSO
-References to other material on the man page topic and
-cross references to other relevant man pages should
-be placed in the
-.Sx SEE ALSO
-section.
-Cross references
-are specified using the
-.Ql \&.Xr
-macro.
-At this time
-.Xr refer 1
-style references are not accommodated.
-.Pp
-It is recommended that the cross references are sorted on the section
-number, and then alphabetically on the names within a section.
-.It \&.Sh STANDARDS
-If the command, library function or file adheres to a
-specific implementation such as
-.St -p1003.2
-or
-.St -ansiC
-this should be noted here.
-If the
-command does not adhere to any standard, its history
-should be noted in the
-.Sx HISTORY
-section.
-.It \&.Sh HISTORY
-Any command which does not adhere to any specific standards
-should be outlined historically in this section.
-.It \&.Sh AUTHORS
-Credits, if need be, should be placed here.
-.It \&.Sh DIAGNOSTICS
-Diagnostics from a command should be placed in this section.
-.It \&.Sh ERRORS
-Specific error handling, especially from library functions
-(man page sections 2 and 3) should go here.
-The
-.Ql \&.Er
-macro is used to specify an errno.
-.It \&.Sh BUGS
-Blatant problems with the topic go here...
-.El
-.Pp
-User specified
-.Ql \&.Sh
-sections may be added,
-for example, this section was set with:
-.Bd -literal -offset 14n
-\&.Sh PAGE LAYOUT MACROS
-.Ed
-.Ss Paragraphs and Line Spacing.
-.Bl -tag -width 6n
-.It \&.Pp
-The \&.Pp paragraph command may
-be used to specify a line space where necessary.
-The macro is not necessary after a
-.Ql \&.Sh
-or
-.Ql \&.Ss
-macro or before
-a
-.Ql \&.Bl
-macro.
-(The
-.Ql \&.Bl
-macro asserts a vertical distance unless the -compact flag is given).
-.El
-.\" This worked with version one, need to redo for version three
-.\" .Pp
-.\" .Ds I
-.\" .Cw (ax+bx+c) \ is\ produced\ by\ \&
-.\" .\".Cw (ax+bx+c) \&.Va_by_) \&_and_\& \&[?/]m_b1_e1_f1[?/]\&
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Cx\ (
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Va ax
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Sy \+
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \&(\&
-.\" .Va ax
-.\" .Cx +
-.\" .Va by
-.\" .Cx +
-.\" .Va c )
-.\" .Cx \t
-.\" .Em is produced by
-.\" .Cx \t
-.\" .Li \&.Va by
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Sy \+
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Va c )
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Cx
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cw
-.\" .De
-.\" .Pp
-.\" This example shows the same equation in a different format.
-.\" The spaces
-.\" around the
-.\" .Li \&+
-.\" signs were forced with
-.\" .Li \e :
-.\" .Pp
-.\" .Ds I
-.\" .Cw (ax\ +\ bx\ +\ c) \ is\ produced\ by\ \&
-.\" .\".Cw (ax+bx+c) \&.Va_by_) \&_and_\& \&[?/]m_b1_e1_f1[?/]\&
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Cx\ (
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Va a
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Sy x
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Cx \e\ +\e\ \e&
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \&(\&
-.\" .Va a
-.\" .Sy x
-.\" .Cx \ +\ \&
-.\" .Va b
-.\" .Sy y
-.\" .Cx \ +\ \&
-.\" .Va c )
-.\" .Cx \t
-.\" .Em is produced by
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Va b
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Sy y
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Cx \e\ +\e\ \e&
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Va c )
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Cx
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cw
-.\" .De
-.\" .Pp
-.\" The incantation below was
-.\" lifted from the
-.\" .Xr adb 1
-.\" manual page:
-.\" .Pp
-.\" .Ds I
-.\" .Cw \&[?/]m_b1_e1_f1[?/]\& is\ produced\ by
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Cx Op Sy ?/
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Nm m
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx Op Sy ?/
-.\" .Nm m
-.\" .Ad \ b1 e1 f1
-.\" .Op Sy ?/
-.\" .Cx \t
-.\" .Em is produced by
-.\" .Cx \t
-.\" .Li \&.Ar \e\ b1 e1 f1
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Op Sy ?/
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Cx
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cw
-.\" .De
-.\" .Pp
-.Ss Keeps
-The only keep that is implemented at this time is for words.
-The macros are
-.Ql \&.Bk
-(begin-keep)
-and
-.Ql \&.Ek
-(end-keep).
-The only option that
-.Ql \&.Bl
-accepts is
-.Fl words
-and is useful for preventing line breaks in the middle of options.
-In the example for the make command line arguments (see
-.Sx What's in a name ) ,
-the keep prevented
-.Xr nroff
-from placing up the
-flag and the argument
-on separate lines.
-(Actually, the option macro used to prevent this from occurring,
-but was dropped when the decision (religious) was made to force
-right justified margins in
-.Xr troff
-as options in general look atrocious when spread across a sparse
-line.
-More work needs to be done with the keep macros, a
-.Fl line
-option needs to be added.)
-.Ss Examples and Displays
-There are six types of displays, a quickie one line indented display
-.Ql \&.D1 ,
-a quickie one line literal display
-.Ql \&.Dl ,
-and block literal, block filled, block unfilled, and block ragged which use
-the
-.Ql \&.Bd
-begin-display
-and
-.Ql \&.Ed
-end-display macros.
-.Pp
-.Bl -tag -width \&.Dlxx
-.It Li \&.D1
-(D-one) Display one line of indented text.
-This macro is parsed, but it is not callable.
-.Pp
-.Dl Fl ldghfstru
-.Pp
-The above was produced by:
-.Li \&.Dl Fl ldghfstru .
-.It Li \&.Dl
-(D-ell)
-Display one line of indented
-.Em literal
-text.
-The
-.Ql \&.Dl
-example macro has been used throughout this
-file.
-It allows
-the indent (display) of one line of text.
-Its default font is set to
-constant width (literal) however
-it is parsed and will recognized other macros.
-It is not callable however.
-.Pp
-.Dl % ls -ldg /usr/local/bin
-.Pp
-The above was produced by
-.Li \&.Dl % ls -ldg /usr/local/bin .
-.It Li \&.Bd
-Begin-display.
-The
-.Ql \&.Bd
-display must be ended with the
-.Ql \&.Ed
-macro.
-Displays may be nested within lists, but may
-.Em not
-contain other displays; this also prohibits nesting
-of .D1 and .Dl one-line displays.
-.Ql \&.Bd
-has the following syntax:
-.Pp
-.Dl ".Bd display-type [-offset offset_value] [-compact]"
-.Pp
-The display-type must be one of the following four types and
-may have an offset specifier for indentation:
-.Ql \&.Bd .
-.Pp
-.Bl -tag -width "file file_name " -compact
-.It Fl ragged
-Fill, but do not adjust the right margin.
-.It Fl unfilled
-Do not fill: display a block of text as typed, the
-right (and left) margin edges are left ragged.
-.It Fl filled
-Display a filled (formatted) block.
-The block of text is formatted (the edges are filled \-
-not left unjustified).
-.It Fl literal
-Display a literal block, useful for source code or
-simple tabbed or spaced text.
-.It Fl file Ar file_name
-The file name following the
-.Fl file
-flag is read and displayed.
-Literal mode is
-asserted and tabs are set at 8 constant width character
-intervals, however any
-.Xr troff/ Ns Nm \-mdoc
-commands in file will be processed.
-.It Fl offset Ar string
-If
-.Fl offset
-is specified with one of the following strings, the string
-is interpreted to indicate the level of indentation for the
-forthcoming block of text:
-.Pp
-.Bl -tag -width "indent-two" -compact
-.It Ar left
-Align block on the current left margin,
-this is the default mode of
-.Ql \&.Bd .
-.It Ar center
-Supposedly center the block.
-At this time
-unfortunately, the block merely gets
-left aligned about an imaginary center margin.
-.It Ar indent
-Indents by one default indent value or tab.
-The default
-indent value is also used for the
-.Ql \&.D1
-display so one is guaranteed the two types of displays
-will line up.
-This indent is normally set to 6n or about two
-thirds of an inch (six constant width characters).
-.It Ar indent-two
-Indents two times the default indent value.
-.It Ar right
-This
-.Em left
-aligns the block about two inches from
-the right side of the page.
-This macro needs
-work and perhaps may never do the right thing by
-.Xr troff .
-.El
-.El
-.It ".Ed"
-End-display.
-.El
-.Ss Tagged Lists and Columns
-There are several types of lists which may be initiated with the
-.Ql ".Bl"
-begin-list macro.
-Items within the list
-are specified with the
-.Ql ".It"
-item macro and
-each list must end with the
-.Ql ".El"
-macro.
-Lists other than
-.Li \-enum
-may be nested within themselves and within displays.
-The use of columns inside of lists or lists inside of columns
-is unproven.
-.Pp
-In addition, several list attributes may be specified such as
-the width of a tag, the list offset, and compactness
-(blank lines between items allowed or disallowed).
-Most of this document has been formatted with a tag style list
-.Pq Fl tag .
-For a change of pace, the list-type used to present the list-types
-is an over-hanging list
-.Pq Fl ohang .
-This type of list is quite popular with
-.Tn TeX
-users, but might look a bit funny after having read many pages of
-tagged lists.
-The following list types are accepted by
-.Ql ".Bl" :
-.Pp
-.Bl -ohang -compact
-.It Fl bullet
-.It Fl dash
-.It Fl enum
-.It Fl hyphen
-.It Fl item
-These five are the simplest types of lists.
-Once the
-.Ql ".Bl"
-macro has been given, items in the list are merely
-indicated by a line consisting solely of the
-.Ql ".It"
-macro.
-For example, the source text for a simple enumerated list
-would look like:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent-two
-\&.Bl -enum -compact
-\&.It
-\&Item one goes here.
-\&.It
-\&And item two here.
-\&.It
-\&Lastly item three goes here.
-\&.El
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The results:
-.Pp
-.Bl -enum -offset indent-two -compact
-.It
-Item one goes here.
-.It
-And item two here.
-.It
-Lastly item three goes here.
-.El
-.Pp
-A simple bullet list construction:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent-two
-\&.Bl -bullet -compact
-\&.It
-\&Bullet one goes here.
-\&.It
-\&Bullet two here.
-\&.El
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Produces:
-.Bl -bullet -offset indent-two -compact
-.It
-Bullet one goes here.
-.It
-Bullet two here.
-.El
-.Pp
-.It Fl tag
-.It Fl diag
-.It Fl hang
-.It Fl ohang
-.It Fl inset
-These list-types collect arguments specified with the
-.Ql \&.It
-macro and create a label which may be
-.Em inset
-into the forthcoming text,
-.Em hanged
-from the forthcoming text,
-.Em overhanged
-from above and not indented or
-.Em tagged .
-This
-list was constructed with the
-.Ql Fl ohang
-list-type.
-The
-.Ql \&.It
-macro is parsed only for the inset, hang
-and tag list-types and is not callable.
-Here is an example of inset labels:
-.Bl -inset -offset indent
-.It Em Tag
-The tagged list (also called a tagged paragraph) is the
-most common type of list used in the Berkeley manuals. Use a
-.Fl width
-attribute as described below.
-.It Em Diag
-Diag lists create section four diagnostic lists
-and are similar to inset lists except callable
-macros are ignored.
-.It Em Hang
-Hanged labels are a matter of taste.
-.It Em Ohang
-Overhanging labels are nice when space is constrained.
-.It Em Inset
-Inset labels are useful for controlling blocks of
-paragraphs and are valuable for converting
-.Nm \-mdoc
-manuals to other formats.
-.El
-.Pp
-Here is the source text which produced the above example:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Bl -inset -offset indent
-\&.It Em Tag
-\&The tagged list (also called a tagged paragraph) is the
-\&most common type of list used in the Berkeley manuals.
-\&.It Em Diag
-\&Diag lists create section four diagnostic lists
-\&and are similar to inset lists except callable
-\¯os are ignored.
-\&.It Em Hang
-\&Hanged labels are a matter of taste.
-\&.It Em Ohang
-\&Overhanging labels are nice when space is constrained.
-\&.It Em Inset
-\&Inset labels are useful for controlling blocks of
-\¶graphs and are valuable for converting
-\&.Nm \-mdoc
-\&manuals to other formats.
-\&.El
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Here is a hanged list with just one item:
-.Bl -hang -offset indent
-.It Em Hanged
-labels appear similar to tagged lists when the
-label is smaller than the label width.
-.It Em Longer hanged list labels
-blend in to the paragraph unlike
-tagged paragraph labels.
-.El
-.Pp
-And the unformatted text which created it:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Bl -hang -offset indent
-\&.It Em Hanged
-\&labels appear similar to tagged lists when the
-\&label is smaller than the label width.
-\&.It Em Longer hanged list labels
-\&blend in to the paragraph unlike
-\&tagged paragraph labels.
-\&.El
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The tagged list which follows uses a width specifier to control
-the width of the tag.
-.Pp
-.Bl -tag -width "PAGEIN" -compact -offset indent
-.It SL
-sleep time of the process (seconds blocked)
-.It PAGEIN
-number of disk
-.Tn I/O Ns 's
-resulting from references
-by the process to pages not loaded in core.
-.It UID
-numerical user-id of process owner
-.It PPID
-numerical id of parent of process process priority
-(non-positive when in non-interruptible wait)
-.El
-.Pp
-The raw text:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Bl -tag -width "PAGEIN" -compact -offset indent
-\&.It SL
-\&sleep time of the process (seconds blocked)
-\&.It PAGEIN
-\&number of disk
-\&.Tn I/O Ns 's
-\&resulting from references
-\&by the process to pages not loaded in core.
-\&.It UID
-\&numerical user-id of process owner
-\&.It PPID
-\&numerical id of parent of process process priority
-\&(non-positive when in non-interruptible wait)
-\&.El
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Acceptable width specifiers:
-.Bl -tag -width Ar -offset indent
-.It Fl width Ar "\&Fl"
-sets the width to the default width for a flag.
-All callable
-macros have a default width value.
-The
-.Ql \&.Fl ,
-value is presently
-set to ten constant width characters or about five sixth of
-an inch.
-.It Fl width Ar "24n"
-sets the width to 24 constant width characters or about two
-inches.
-The
-.Ql n
-is absolutely necessary for the scaling to work correctly.
-.It Fl width Ar "ENAMETOOLONG"
-sets width to the constant width length of the
-string given.
-.It Fl width Ar "\\*qint mkfifo\\*q"
-again, the width is set to the constant width of the string
-given.
-.El
-.Pp
-If a width is not specified for the tag list type, the first
-time
-.Ql \&.It
-is invoked, an attempt is made to determine an appropriate
-width.
-If the first argument to
-.Ql ".It"
-is a callable macro, the default width for that macro will be used
-as if the macro name had been supplied as the width.
-However,
-if another item in the list is given with a different callable
-macro name, a new and nested list is assumed. This effectively
-means that
-.Fl width
-is required for the tag list type.
-.Pp
-.It Fl column
-This list type generates multiple columns.
-The number of columns and the width of each column is determined by
-the arguments to the
-.Fl column
-list.
-Each
-.Ql ".It"
-argument is parsed to make a row, each column within the
-row is a separate argument separated by a tab or the
-.Ql ".Ta"
-macro.
-.El
-The table:
-.Bl -column "String" "Nroff" "Troff" -offset indent
-.It Sy "String" Ta Sy "Nroff" Ta Sy "Troff"
-.It Li "<=" Ta \&<\&= Ta \*(<=
-.It Li ">=" Ta \&>\&= Ta \*(>=
-.El
-.Pp
-was produced by:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Bl -column "String" "Nroff" "Troff" -offset indent
-\&.It Sy "String" Ta Sy "Nroff" Ta Sy "Troff"
-\&.It Li "<=" Ta \&<\&= Ta \*(<=
-\&.It Li ">=" Ta \&>\&= Ta \*(>=
-\&.El
-.Ed
-.Sh PREDEFINED STRINGS
-The following strings are predefined as may be used by
-preceding with the troff string interpreting sequence
-.Ql \&\e*(xx
-where
-.Em xx
-is the name of the defined string or as
-.Ql \&\e*x
-where
-.Em x
-is the name of the string.
-The interpreting sequence may be used any where in the text.
-.Pp
-.Bl -column "String " "Nroff " "Troff " -offset indent
-.It Sy "String Nroff Troff"
-.It Li "<=" Ta \&<\&= Ta \*(<=
-.It Li ">=" Ta \&>\&= Ta \*(>=
-.It Li "Rq" Ta "''" Ta \*(Rq
-.It Li "Lq" Ta "``" Ta \*(Lq
-.It Li "ua" Ta ^ Ta \*(ua
-.It Li "aa" Ta ' Ta \*(aa
-.It Li "ga" Ta \` Ta \*(ga
-.\" .It Li "sL" Ta ` Ta \*(sL
-.\" .It Li "sR" Ta ' Ta \*(sR
-.It Li "q" Ta \&" Ta \*q
-.It Li "Pi" Ta pi Ta \*(Pi
-.It Li "Ne" Ta != Ta \*(Ne
-.It Li "Le" Ta <= Ta \*(Le
-.It Li "Ge" Ta >= Ta \*(Ge
-.It Li "Lt" Ta < Ta \*(Gt
-.It Li "Gt" Ta > Ta \*(Lt
-.It Li "Pm" Ta +- Ta \*(Pm
-.It Li "If" Ta infinity Ta \*(If
-.It Li "Na" Ta \fINaN\fP Ta \*(Na
-.It Li "Ba" Ta \fR\&|\fP Ta \*(Ba
-.El
-.Pp
-.Sy Note :
-The string named
-.Ql q
-should be written as
-.Ql \e*q
-since it is only one char.
-.Sh DIAGNOSTICS
-The debugging facilities for
-.Nm \-mdoc
-are limited, but can help detect subtle errors such
-as the collision of an argument name with an internal
-register or macro name.
-(A what?)
-A register is an arithmetic storage class for
-.Xr troff
-with a one or two character name.
-All registers internal to
-.Nm \-mdoc
-for
-.Xr troff
-and
-.Xr ditroff
-are two characters and
-of the form <upper_case><lower_case> such as
-.Ql \&Ar ,
-<lower_case><upper_case> as
-.Ql \&aR
-or
-<upper or lower letter><digit> as
-.Ql \&C\&1 .
-And adding to the muddle,
-.Xr troff
-has its own internal registers all of which are either
-two lower case characters or a dot plus a letter or meta-character
-character.
-In one of the introduction examples, it was shown how to
-prevent the interpretation of a macro name with the escape sequence
-.Ql \e& .
-This is sufficient for the internal register names also.
-.Pp
-.\" Every callable macro name has a corresponding register
-.\" of the same name (<upper_case><lower_case>).
-.\" There are also specific registers which have
-.\" been used for stacks and arrays and are listed in the
-.\" .Sx Appendix .
-.\" .Bd -ragged -offset 4n
-.\" [A-Z][a-z] registers corresponding to macro names (example ``Ar'')
-.\" [a-z][A-Z] registers corresponding to macro names (example ``aR'')
-.\" C[0-9] argument types (example C1)
-.\" O[0-9] offset stack (displays)
-.\" h[0-9] horizontal spacing stack (lists)
-.\" o[0-9] offset (stack) (lists)
-.\" t[0-9] tag stack (lists)
-.\" v[0-9] vertical spacing stack (lists)
-.\" w[0-9] width tag/label stack
-.\" .Ed
-.\" .Pp
-If a non-escaped register name is given in the argument list of a request
-unpredictable behavior will occur.
-In general, any time huge portions
-of text do not appear where expected in the output, or small strings
-such as list tags disappear, chances are there is a misunderstanding
-about an argument type in the argument list.
-Your mother never intended for you to remember this evil stuff - so here
-is a way to find out whether or not your arguments are valid: The
-.Ql \&.Db
-(debug)
-macro displays the interpretation of the argument list for most
-macros.
-Macros such as the
-.Ql \&.Pp
-(paragraph)
-macro do not contain debugging information.
-All of the callable macros do,
-and it is strongly advised whenever in doubt,
-turn on the
-.Ql \&.Db
-macro.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: \&.Db [on | off]
-.Pp
-An example of a portion of text with
-the debug macro placed above and below an
-artificially created problem (a flag argument
-.Ql \&aC
-which should be
-.Ql \e&aC
-in order to work):
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Db on
-\&.Op Fl aC Ar file )
-\&.Db off
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The resulting output:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-DEBUGGING ON
-DEBUG(argv) MACRO: `.Op' Line #: 2
- Argc: 1 Argv: `Fl' Length: 2
- Space: `' Class: Executable
- Argc: 2 Argv: `aC' Length: 2
- Space: `' Class: Executable
- Argc: 3 Argv: `Ar' Length: 2
- Space: `' Class: Executable
- Argc: 4 Argv: `file' Length: 4
- Space: ` ' Class: String
- Argc: 5 Argv: `)' Length: 1
- Space: ` ' Class: Closing Punctuation or suffix
- MACRO REQUEST: .Op Fl aC Ar file )
-DEBUGGING OFF
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The first line of information tells the name of the calling
-macro, here
-.Ql \&.Op ,
-and the line number it appears on.
-If one or more files are involved
-(especially if text from another file is included) the line number
-may be bogus.
-If there is only one file, it should be accurate.
-The second line gives the argument count, the argument
-.Pq Ql \&Fl
-and its length.
-If the length of an argument is two characters, the
-argument is tested to see if it is executable (unfortunately, any
-register which contains a non-zero value appears executable).
-The third line gives the space allotted for a class, and the
-class type.
-The problem here is the argument aC should not be
-executable.
-The four types of classes are string, executable, closing
-punctuation and opening punctuation.
-The last line shows the entire
-argument list as it was read.
-In this next example, the offending
-.Ql \&aC
-is escaped:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Db on
-\&.Em An escaped \e&aC
-\&.Db off
-.Ed
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-DEBUGGING ON
-DEBUG(fargv) MACRO: `.Em' Line #: 2
- Argc: 1 Argv: `An' Length: 2
- Space: ` ' Class: String
- Argc: 2 Argv: `escaped' Length: 7
- Space: ` ' Class: String
- Argc: 3 Argv: `aC' Length: 2
- Space: ` ' Class: String
- MACRO REQUEST: .Em An escaped &aC
-DEBUGGING OFF
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The argument
-.Ql \e&aC
-shows up with the same length of 2 as the
-.Ql \e&
-sequence produces a zero width, but a register
-named
-.Ql \e&aC
-was not found and the type classified as string.
-.Pp
-Other diagnostics consist of usage statements and are self explanatory.
-.Sh GROFF, TROFF AND NROFF
-The
-.Nm \-mdoc
-package does not need compatibility mode with
-.Xr groff .
-.Pp
-The package inhibits page breaks, and the headers and footers
-which normally occur at those breaks with
-.Xr nroff ,
-to make the manual more efficient for viewing on-line.
-At the moment,
-.Xr groff
-with
-.Fl T Ns Ar ascii
-does eject the imaginary remainder of the page at end of file.
-The inhibiting of the page breaks makes
-.Xr nroff Ns 'd
-files unsuitable for hardcopy.
-There is a register named
-.Ql \&cR
-which can be set to zero in the site dependent style file
-.Pa /usr/src/share/tmac/doc-nroff
-to restore the old style behavior.
-.Sh FILES
-.Bl -tag -width /usr/share/misc/mdoc.template -compact
-.It Pa /usr/share/tmac/tmac.doc
-manual macro package
-.It Pa /usr/share/misc/mdoc.template
-template for writing a man page
-.El
-.Sh SEE ALSO
-.Xr mdoc 7 ,
-.Xr man 1 ,
-.Xr troff 1
-.Sh BUGS
-Undesirable hyphenation on the dash of a flag
-argument is not yet resolved, and causes
-occasional mishaps in the
-.Sx DESCRIPTION
-section.
-(line break on the hyphen).
-.Pp
-Predefined strings are not declared in documentation.
-.Pp
-Section 3f has not been added to the header routines.
-.Pp
-.Ql \&.Nm
-font should be changed in
-.Sx NAME
-section.
-.Pp
-.Ql \&.Fn
-needs to have a check to prevent splitting up
-if the line length is too short.
-Occasionally it
-separates the last parenthesis, and sometimes
-looks ridiculous if a line is in fill mode.
-.Pp
-The method used to prevent header and footer page
-breaks (other than the initial header and footer) when using
-nroff occasionally places an unsightly partially filled line (blank)
-at the would be bottom of the page.
-.Pp
-If the outer-most list definition doesn't have a
-.Fl width
-argument, the
-.Ql ".It"
-elements of inner lists may not work (producing a list where
-each successive element
-.Sq walks
-to the right).
-.Pp
-The list and display macros to not do any keeps
-and certainly should be able to.
-.\" Note what happens if the parameter list overlaps a newline
-.\" boundary.
-.\" to make sure a line boundary is crossed:
-.\" .Bd -literal
-.\" \&.Fn struct\e\ dictionarytable\e\ *dictionarylookup struct\e\ dictionarytable\e\ *tab[]
-.\" .Ed
-.\" .Pp
-.\" produces, nudge nudge,
-.\" .Fn struct\ dictionarytable\ *dictionarylookup char\ *h struct\ dictionarytable\ *tab[] ,
-.\" .Fn struct\ dictionarytable\ *dictionarylookup char\ *h struct\ dictionarytable\ *tab[] ,
-.\" nudge
-.\" .Fn struct\ dictionarytable\ *dictionarylookup char\ *h struct\ dictionarytable\ *tab[] .
-.\" .Pp
-.\" If double quotes are used, for example:
-.\" .Bd -literal
-.\" \&.Fn \*qstruct dictionarytable *dictionarylookup\*q \*qchar *h\*q \*qstruct dictionarytable *tab[]\*q
-.\" .Ed
-.\" .Pp
-.\" produces, nudge nudge,
-.\" .Fn "struct dictionarytable *dictionarylookup" "char *h" "struct dictionarytable *tab[]" ,
-.\" nudge
-.\" .Fn "struct dictionarytable *dictionarylookup" "char *h" "struct dictionarytable *tab[]" ,
-.\" nudge
-.\" .Fn "struct dictionarytable *dictionarylookup" "char *h" "struct dictionarytable *tab[]" .
-.\" .Pp
-.\" Not a pretty sight...
-.\" In a paragraph, a long parameter containing unpaddable spaces as
-.\" in the former example will cause
-.\" .Xr troff
-.\" to break the line and spread
-.\" the remaining words out.
-.\" The latter example will adjust nicely to
-.\" justified margins, but may break in between an argument and its
-.\" declaration.
-.\" In
-.\" .Xr nroff
-.\" the right margin adjustment is normally ragged and the problem is
-.\" not as severe.
--- /dev/null
+.\" Copyright (c) 1980 The Regents of the University of California.
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted
+.\" provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are
+.\" duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation,
+.\" advertising materials, and other materials related to such
+.\" distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed
+.\" by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the
+.\" University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
+.\" from this software without specific prior written permission.
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
+.\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+.\"
+.\" @(#)me.7 6.4 (Berkeley) 4/13/90
+.\"
+.\" Modified for groff by jjc@jclark.com
+.hc %
+.TH GROFF_ME @MAN7EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.UC 3
+.SH NAME
+groff_me \- troff macros for formatting papers
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B "groff \-me"
+[ options ]
+file ...
+.br
+.B "troff \-me"
+[ options ]
+file ...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page describes the GNU version of the \-me macros,
+which is part of the groff document formatting system.
+This version can be used with both GNU troff and Unix troff.
+This package of
+.I troff
+macro definitions provides a canned formatting
+facility for tech%nical papers in various formats.
+.PP
+The macro requests are defined below.
+Many
+.I troff
+requests are unsafe in conjunction with
+this package, however, these requests may be used with
+impunity after the first .pp:
+.nf
+.IP
+.ta \w'.sz +n 'u
+\&.bp begin new page
+\&.br break output line here
+\&.sp n insert n spacing lines
+\&.ls n (line spacing) n=1 single, n=2 double space
+\&.na no alignment of right margin
+\&.ce n center next n lines
+\&.ul n underline next n lines
+.fi
+.PP
+Output of the
+.I pic,
+.I eqn,
+.I refer,
+and
+.I tbl
+preprocessors
+is acceptable as input.
+.SH FILES
+@MACRODIR@/tmac.e
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@)
+.br
+\-me Reference Manual, Eric P. Allman
+.br
+Writing Papers with Groff Using \-me
+.tr &.
+.SH REQUESTS
+This list is incomplete;
+see
+.I "The \-me Reference Manual"
+for interesting details.
+.PP
+.ta \w'.eh \'x\'y\'z\' 'u +\w'Initial 'u +\w'Cause 'u
+.br
+.di x
+ \ka
+.br
+.di
+.in \nau
+.ti 0
+Request Initial Cause Explanation
+.ti 0
+ Value Break
+.br
+.in \nau
+.ti 0
+\&.(c - yes Begin centered block
+.ti 0
+\&.(d - no Begin delayed text
+.ti 0
+\&.(f - no Begin footnote
+.ti 0
+\&.(l - yes Begin list
+.ti 0
+\&.(q - yes Begin major quote
+.ti 0
+\&.(x \fIx\fR - no Begin indexed item in index
+.I x
+.ti 0
+\&.(z - no Begin floating keep
+.ti 0
+\&.)c - yes End centered block
+.ti 0
+\&.)d - yes End delayed text
+.ti 0
+\&.)f - yes End footnote
+.ti 0
+\&.)l - yes End list
+.ti 0
+\&.)q - yes End major quote
+.ti 0
+\&.)x - yes End index item
+.ti 0
+\&.)z - yes End floating keep
+.ti 0
+\&.++ \fIm H\fR - no Define paper section.
+.I m
+defines the part of the paper, and can be
+.B C
+(chapter),
+.B A
+(appendix),
+.B P
+(preliminary, e.g., abstract, table of contents, etc.),
+.B B
+(bibliography),
+.B RC
+(chapters renumbered from page one each chapter),
+or
+.B RA
+(appendix renumbered from page one).
+.ti 0
+\&.+c \fIT\fR - yes Begin chapter (or appendix, etc., as
+set by .++).
+.I T
+is the chapter title.
+.ti 0
+\&.1c 1 yes One column format on a new page.
+.ti 0
+\&.2c 1 yes Two column format.
+.ti 0
+\&.EN - yes Space after equation
+produced by
+.I eqn
+or
+.IR neqn .
+.ti 0
+\&.EQ \fIx y\fR - yes Precede equation; break out and
+add space.
+Equation number is
+.IR y .
+The optional argument \fIx\fR
+may be
+.I I
+to indent equation (default),
+.I L
+to left-adjust the equation, or
+.I C
+to center the equation.
+.ti 0
+\&.GE - yes End \fIgremlin\fP picture.
+.ti 0
+\&.GS - yes Begin \fIgremlin\fP picture.
+.ti 0
+\&.PE - yes End \fIpic\fP picture.
+.ti 0
+\&.PS - yes Begin \fIpic\fP picture.
+.ti 0
+\&.TE - yes End table.
+.ti 0
+\&.TH - yes End heading section of table.
+.ti 0
+\&.TS \fIx\fR - yes Begin table; if \fIx\fR is
+.I H
+table has repeated heading.
+.ti 0
+\&.b \fIx\fR no no Print
+.I x
+in boldface; if no argument switch to boldface.
+.ti 0
+\&.ba \fI+n\fR 0 yes Augments the base indent by
+.I n.
+This indent is used to set the indent on regular text
+(like paragraphs).
+.ti 0
+\&.bc no yes Begin new column
+.ti 0
+\&.bi \fIx\fR no no Print
+.I x
+in bold italics (nofill only)
+.ti 0
+\&.bu - yes Begin bulleted paragraph
+.ti 0
+\&.bx \fIx\fR no no Print \fIx\fR in a box (nofill only).
+.ti 0
+\&.ef \fI\'x\'y\'z\'\fR \'\'\'\' no Set even footer to x y z
+.ti 0
+\&.eh \fI\'x\'y\'z\'\fR \'\'\'\' no Set even header to x y z
+.ti 0
+\&.fo \fI\'x\'y\'z\'\fR \'\'\'\' no Set footer to x y z
+.ti 0
+\&.hx - no Suppress headers and footers on next page.
+.ti 0
+\&.he \fI\'x\'y\'z\'\fR \'\'\'\' no Set header to x y z
+.ti 0
+\&.hl - yes Draw a horizontal line
+.ti 0
+\&.i \fIx\fR no no Italicize
+.I x;
+if
+.I x
+missing, italic text follows.
+.ti 0
+\&.ip \fIx y\fR no yes Start indented paragraph,
+with hanging tag
+.IR x .
+Indentation is
+.I y
+ens (default 5).
+.ti 0
+\&.lp yes yes Start left-blocked paragraph.
+.ti 0
+\&.np 1 yes Start numbered paragraph.
+.ti 0
+\&.of \fI\'x\'y\'z\'\fR \'\'\'\' no Set odd footer to x y z
+.ti 0
+\&.oh \fI\'x\'y\'z\'\fR \'\'\'\' no Set odd header to x y z
+.ti 0
+\&.pd - yes Print delayed text.
+.ti 0
+\&.pp no yes Begin paragraph.
+First line indented.
+.ti 0
+\&.r yes no Roman text follows.
+.ti 0
+\&.re - no Reset tabs to default values.
+.ti 0
+\&.sh \fIn x\fR - yes Section head follows,
+font automatically bold.
+.I n
+is level of section,
+.I x
+is title of section.
+.ti 0
+\&.sk no no Leave the next page blank.
+Only one page is remembered ahead.
+.ti 0
+\&.sm \fIx\fR - no Set
+.I x
+in a smaller pointsize.
+.ti 0
+\&.sz \fI+n\fR 10p no Augment the point size by
+.I n
+points.
+.ti 0
+\&.tp no yes Begin title page.
+.ti 0
+\&.u \fIx\fR - no Underline argument (even in \fItroff\fR).
+(Nofill only).
+.ti 0
+\&.uh - yes Like .sh but unnumbered.
+.ti 0
+\&.xp \fIx\fR - no Print index
+.I x.
+++ /dev/null
-.\" Copyright (c) 1980 The Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted
-.\" provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are
-.\" duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation,
-.\" advertising materials, and other materials related to such
-.\" distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed
-.\" by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the
-.\" University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
-.\" from this software without specific prior written permission.
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
-.\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.\"
-.\" @(#)me.7 6.4 (Berkeley) 4/13/90
-.\"
-.\" Modified for groff by jjc@jclark.com
-.hc %
-.TH GROFF_ME @MAN7EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.UC 3
-.SH NAME
-groff_me \- troff macros for formatting papers
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B "groff \-me"
-[ options ]
-file ...
-.br
-.B "troff \-me"
-[ options ]
-file ...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page describes the GNU version of the \-me macros,
-which is part of the groff document formatting system.
-This version can be used with both GNU troff and Unix troff.
-This package of
-.I troff
-macro definitions provides a canned formatting
-facility for tech%nical papers in various formats.
-.PP
-The macro requests are defined below.
-Many
-.I troff
-requests are unsafe in conjunction with
-this package, however, these requests may be used with
-impunity after the first .pp:
-.nf
-.IP
-.ta \w'.sz +n 'u
-\&.bp begin new page
-\&.br break output line here
-\&.sp n insert n spacing lines
-\&.ls n (line spacing) n=1 single, n=2 double space
-\&.na no alignment of right margin
-\&.ce n center next n lines
-\&.ul n underline next n lines
-.fi
-.PP
-Output of the
-.I pic,
-.I eqn,
-.I refer,
-and
-.I tbl
-preprocessors
-is acceptable as input.
-.SH FILES
-@MACRODIR@/tmac.e
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@)
-.br
-\-me Reference Manual, Eric P. Allman
-.br
-Writing Papers with Groff Using \-me
-.tr &.
-.SH REQUESTS
-This list is incomplete;
-see
-.I "The \-me Reference Manual"
-for interesting details.
-.PP
-.ta \w'.eh \'x\'y\'z\' 'u +\w'Initial 'u +\w'Cause 'u
-.br
-.di x
- \ka
-.br
-.di
-.in \nau
-.ti 0
-Request Initial Cause Explanation
-.ti 0
- Value Break
-.br
-.in \nau
-.ti 0
-\&.(c - yes Begin centered block
-.ti 0
-\&.(d - no Begin delayed text
-.ti 0
-\&.(f - no Begin footnote
-.ti 0
-\&.(l - yes Begin list
-.ti 0
-\&.(q - yes Begin major quote
-.ti 0
-\&.(x \fIx\fR - no Begin indexed item in index
-.I x
-.ti 0
-\&.(z - no Begin floating keep
-.ti 0
-\&.)c - yes End centered block
-.ti 0
-\&.)d - yes End delayed text
-.ti 0
-\&.)f - yes End footnote
-.ti 0
-\&.)l - yes End list
-.ti 0
-\&.)q - yes End major quote
-.ti 0
-\&.)x - yes End index item
-.ti 0
-\&.)z - yes End floating keep
-.ti 0
-\&.++ \fIm H\fR - no Define paper section.
-.I m
-defines the part of the paper, and can be
-.B C
-(chapter),
-.B A
-(appendix),
-.B P
-(preliminary, e.g., abstract, table of contents, etc.),
-.B B
-(bibliography),
-.B RC
-(chapters renumbered from page one each chapter),
-or
-.B RA
-(appendix renumbered from page one).
-.ti 0
-\&.+c \fIT\fR - yes Begin chapter (or appendix, etc., as
-set by .++).
-.I T
-is the chapter title.
-.ti 0
-\&.1c 1 yes One column format on a new page.
-.ti 0
-\&.2c 1 yes Two column format.
-.ti 0
-\&.EN - yes Space after equation
-produced by
-.I eqn
-or
-.IR neqn .
-.ti 0
-\&.EQ \fIx y\fR - yes Precede equation; break out and
-add space.
-Equation number is
-.IR y .
-The optional argument \fIx\fR
-may be
-.I I
-to indent equation (default),
-.I L
-to left-adjust the equation, or
-.I C
-to center the equation.
-.ti 0
-\&.GE - yes End \fIgremlin\fP picture.
-.ti 0
-\&.GS - yes Begin \fIgremlin\fP picture.
-.ti 0
-\&.PE - yes End \fIpic\fP picture.
-.ti 0
-\&.PS - yes Begin \fIpic\fP picture.
-.ti 0
-\&.TE - yes End table.
-.ti 0
-\&.TH - yes End heading section of table.
-.ti 0
-\&.TS \fIx\fR - yes Begin table; if \fIx\fR is
-.I H
-table has repeated heading.
-.ti 0
-\&.b \fIx\fR no no Print
-.I x
-in boldface; if no argument switch to boldface.
-.ti 0
-\&.ba \fI+n\fR 0 yes Augments the base indent by
-.I n.
-This indent is used to set the indent on regular text
-(like paragraphs).
-.ti 0
-\&.bc no yes Begin new column
-.ti 0
-\&.bi \fIx\fR no no Print
-.I x
-in bold italics (nofill only)
-.ti 0
-\&.bu - yes Begin bulleted paragraph
-.ti 0
-\&.bx \fIx\fR no no Print \fIx\fR in a box (nofill only).
-.ti 0
-\&.ef \fI\'x\'y\'z\'\fR \'\'\'\' no Set even footer to x y z
-.ti 0
-\&.eh \fI\'x\'y\'z\'\fR \'\'\'\' no Set even header to x y z
-.ti 0
-\&.fo \fI\'x\'y\'z\'\fR \'\'\'\' no Set footer to x y z
-.ti 0
-\&.hx - no Suppress headers and footers on next page.
-.ti 0
-\&.he \fI\'x\'y\'z\'\fR \'\'\'\' no Set header to x y z
-.ti 0
-\&.hl - yes Draw a horizontal line
-.ti 0
-\&.i \fIx\fR no no Italicize
-.I x;
-if
-.I x
-missing, italic text follows.
-.ti 0
-\&.ip \fIx y\fR no yes Start indented paragraph,
-with hanging tag
-.IR x .
-Indentation is
-.I y
-ens (default 5).
-.ti 0
-\&.lp yes yes Start left-blocked paragraph.
-.ti 0
-\&.np 1 yes Start numbered paragraph.
-.ti 0
-\&.of \fI\'x\'y\'z\'\fR \'\'\'\' no Set odd footer to x y z
-.ti 0
-\&.oh \fI\'x\'y\'z\'\fR \'\'\'\' no Set odd header to x y z
-.ti 0
-\&.pd - yes Print delayed text.
-.ti 0
-\&.pp no yes Begin paragraph.
-First line indented.
-.ti 0
-\&.r yes no Roman text follows.
-.ti 0
-\&.re - no Reset tabs to default values.
-.ti 0
-\&.sh \fIn x\fR - yes Section head follows,
-font automatically bold.
-.I n
-is level of section,
-.I x
-is title of section.
-.ti 0
-\&.sk no no Leave the next page blank.
-Only one page is remembered ahead.
-.ti 0
-\&.sm \fIx\fR - no Set
-.I x
-in a smaller pointsize.
-.ti 0
-\&.sz \fI+n\fR 10p no Augment the point size by
-.I n
-points.
-.ti 0
-\&.tp no yes Begin title page.
-.ti 0
-\&.u \fIx\fR - no Underline argument (even in \fItroff\fR).
-(Nofill only).
-.ti 0
-\&.uh - yes Like .sh but unnumbered.
-.ti 0
-\&.xp \fIx\fR - no Print index
-.I x.
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.TH GROFF_MS @MAN7EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+groff_ms \- groff ms macros
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B groff
+.B \-m@TMAC_S_PREFIX@s
+[
+.IR options .\|.\|.
+]
+[
+.IR files .\|.\|.
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page describes the GNU version of the ms macros,
+which is part of the groff document formatting system.
+The groff ms macros are intended to be compatible with the
+documented behaviour of the 4.3
+.SM BSD
+Unix ms macros subject to the following limitations:
+.IP \(bu
+the internals of groff ms are not similar to the internals of Unix ms
+and so documents that depend upon implementation details of Unix ms
+may well not work with groff ms;
+.IP \(bu
+there is no support for typewriter-like devices;
+.IP \(bu
+Berkeley localisms, in particular the
+.B TM
+and
+.B CT
+macros, are not implemented;
+.IP \(bu
+groff ms
+does not provide cut marks;
+.IP \(bu
+multiple line spacing is not allowed
+(use a larger vertical spacing instead);
+.IP \(bu
+groff ms does not work in compatibility mode (eg with the
+.B \-C
+option);
+.IP \(bu
+the error-handling policy of groff ms
+is to detect and report errors,
+rather than silently to ignore them.
+.LP
+The groff ms macros make use of many features of GNU troff
+and therefore cannot be used with any other troff.
+.LP
+Bell Labs localisms are not implemented in either the
+.SM BSD
+ms macros or in the groff ms macros.
+.LP
+Some Unix ms documentation says that the
+.B CW
+and
+.B GW
+number registers can be used to control the column width and
+gutter width respectively.
+This is not the case.
+These number registers are not used in groff ms.
+.LP
+Macros that cause a reset set the indent.
+Macros that change the indent do not increment or decrement
+the indent, but rather set it absolutely.
+This can cause problems for documents that define
+additional macros of their own.
+The solution is to use not the
+.B in
+request but instead the
+.B RS
+and
+.B RE
+macros.
+.LP
+The number register
+.B GS
+is set to 1 by the groff ms macros,
+but is not used by the Unix ms macros.
+It is intended that documents that need to determine whether
+they are being formatted with Unix ms or groff ms make use of this
+number register.
+.LP
+Footnotes are implemented so that they can safely be used within
+keeps and displays.
+Automatically numbered footnotes within floating keeps are
+not recommended.
+It is safe to have another
+.B \e**
+between a
+.B \e**
+and the corresponding
+.BR .FS ;
+it is required only that each
+.B .FS
+occur after the corresponding
+.B \e**
+and that the occurrences of
+.B .FS
+are in the same order as the corresponding occurrences of
+.BR \e** .
+.LP
+The strings
+.B \e*{
+and
+.B \e*}
+can be used to begin and end a superscript.
+.LP
+Some Unix V10 ms features are implemented.
+The
+.BR B ,
+.BR I
+and
+.B BI
+macros can have an optional third argument which will be printed
+in the current font before the first argument.
+There is a macro
+.B CW
+like
+.B B
+that changes to a constant-width font.
+.LP
+The following strings can be redefined to adapt the groff ms macros
+to languages other than English:
+.LP
+.nf
+.ta \w'REFERENCES'u+2n
+String Default Value
+.sp .3v
+REFERENCES References
+ABSTRACT ABSTRACT
+TOC Table of Contents
+MONTH1 January
+MONTH2 February
+MONTH3 March
+MONTH4 April
+MONTH5 May
+MONTH6 June
+MONTH7 July
+MONTH8 August
+MONTH9 September
+MONTH10 October
+MONTH11 November
+MONTH12 December
+.fi
+.LP
+The font family is reset from the string
+.BR FAM ;
+at initialization if this string is undefined it is set to the current
+font family.
+The point size, vertical spacing, and inter-paragraph spacing for footnotes
+are taken from the number registers
+.BR FPS ,
+.BR FVS ,
+and
+.BR FPD ;
+at initialization these are set to
+.BR \en(PS-2 ,
+.BR \en[FPS]+2 ,
+and
+.B \en(PD/2
+respectively; however, if any of these registers has been defined
+before initialization, it will not be set.
+The hyphenation flags (as set by the
+.B .hy
+request) are set from the
+.B HY
+register;
+if this has not been defined at initialization,
+it will be set to 14.
+.LP
+Right-aligned displays are available with
+.B ".DS R"
+and
+.BR .RD .
+.LP
+The following conventions are used for names of macros, strings and
+number registers.
+External names available to documents that use the groff ms
+macros contain only uppercase letters and digits.
+Internally the macros are divided into modules.
+Names used only within one module are of the form
+.IB module * name\fR.
+Names used outside the module in which they are defined are of the form
+.IB module @ name\fR.
+Names associated with a particular environment are of the form
+.IB environment : name;
+these are used only within the
+.B par
+module,
+and
+.I name
+does not have a module prefix.
+Constructed names used to implement arrays are of the form
+.IB array ! index\fR.
+Thus the groff ms macros reserve the following names:
+.IP \(bu
+names containing
+.BR * ;
+.IP \(bu
+names containing
+.BR @ ;
+.IP \(bu
+names containing
+.BR : ;
+.IP \(bu
+names containing only uppercase letters and digits.
+.SH FILES
+.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.@TMAC_S_PREFIX@s
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@tbl (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@pic (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@eqn (@MAN1EXT@)
+.br
+.BR ms (@MAN7EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.TH GROFF_MS @MAN7EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-groff_ms \- groff ms macros
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B groff
-.B \-m@TMAC_S_PREFIX@s
-[
-.IR options .\|.\|.
-]
-[
-.IR files .\|.\|.
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page describes the GNU version of the ms macros,
-which is part of the groff document formatting system.
-The groff ms macros are intended to be compatible with the
-documented behaviour of the 4.3
-.SM BSD
-Unix ms macros subject to the following limitations:
-.IP \(bu
-the internals of groff ms are not similar to the internals of Unix ms
-and so documents that depend upon implementation details of Unix ms
-may well not work with groff ms;
-.IP \(bu
-there is no support for typewriter-like devices;
-.IP \(bu
-Berkeley localisms, in particular the
-.B TM
-and
-.B CT
-macros, are not implemented;
-.IP \(bu
-groff ms
-does not provide cut marks;
-.IP \(bu
-multiple line spacing is not allowed
-(use a larger vertical spacing instead);
-.IP \(bu
-groff ms does not work in compatibility mode (eg with the
-.B \-C
-option);
-.IP \(bu
-the error-handling policy of groff ms
-is to detect and report errors,
-rather than silently to ignore them.
-.LP
-The groff ms macros make use of many features of GNU troff
-and therefore cannot be used with any other troff.
-.LP
-Bell Labs localisms are not implemented in either the
-.SM BSD
-ms macros or in the groff ms macros.
-.LP
-Some Unix ms documentation says that the
-.B CW
-and
-.B GW
-number registers can be used to control the column width and
-gutter width respectively.
-This is not the case.
-These number registers are not used in groff ms.
-.LP
-Macros that cause a reset set the indent.
-Macros that change the indent do not increment or decrement
-the indent, but rather set it absolutely.
-This can cause problems for documents that define
-additional macros of their own.
-The solution is to use not the
-.B in
-request but instead the
-.B RS
-and
-.B RE
-macros.
-.LP
-The number register
-.B GS
-is set to 1 by the groff ms macros,
-but is not used by the Unix ms macros.
-It is intended that documents that need to determine whether
-they are being formatted with Unix ms or groff ms make use of this
-number register.
-.LP
-Footnotes are implemented so that they can safely be used within
-keeps and displays.
-Automatically numbered footnotes within floating keeps are
-not recommended.
-It is safe to have another
-.B \e**
-between a
-.B \e**
-and the corresponding
-.BR .FS ;
-it is required only that each
-.B .FS
-occur after the corresponding
-.B \e**
-and that the occurrences of
-.B .FS
-are in the same order as the corresponding occurrences of
-.BR \e** .
-.LP
-The strings
-.B \e*{
-and
-.B \e*}
-can be used to begin and end a superscript.
-.LP
-Some Unix V10 ms features are implemented.
-The
-.BR B ,
-.BR I
-and
-.B BI
-macros can have an optional third argument which will be printed
-in the current font before the first argument.
-There is a macro
-.B CW
-like
-.B B
-that changes to a constant-width font.
-.LP
-The following strings can be redefined to adapt the groff ms macros
-to languages other than English:
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta \w'REFERENCES'u+2n
-String Default Value
-.sp .3v
-REFERENCES References
-ABSTRACT ABSTRACT
-TOC Table of Contents
-MONTH1 January
-MONTH2 February
-MONTH3 March
-MONTH4 April
-MONTH5 May
-MONTH6 June
-MONTH7 July
-MONTH8 August
-MONTH9 September
-MONTH10 October
-MONTH11 November
-MONTH12 December
-.fi
-.LP
-The font family is reset from the string
-.BR FAM ;
-at initialization if this string is undefined it is set to the current
-font family.
-The point size, vertical spacing, and inter-paragraph spacing for footnotes
-are taken from the number registers
-.BR FPS ,
-.BR FVS ,
-and
-.BR FPD ;
-at initialization these are set to
-.BR \en(PS-2 ,
-.BR \en[FPS]+2 ,
-and
-.B \en(PD/2
-respectively; however, if any of these registers has been defined
-before initialization, it will not be set.
-The hyphenation flags (as set by the
-.B .hy
-request) are set from the
-.B HY
-register;
-if this has not been defined at initialization,
-it will be set to 14.
-.LP
-Right-aligned displays are available with
-.B ".DS R"
-and
-.BR .RD .
-.LP
-The following conventions are used for names of macros, strings and
-number registers.
-External names available to documents that use the groff ms
-macros contain only uppercase letters and digits.
-Internally the macros are divided into modules.
-Names used only within one module are of the form
-.IB module * name\fR.
-Names used outside the module in which they are defined are of the form
-.IB module @ name\fR.
-Names associated with a particular environment are of the form
-.IB environment : name;
-these are used only within the
-.B par
-module,
-and
-.I name
-does not have a module prefix.
-Constructed names used to implement arrays are of the form
-.IB array ! index\fR.
-Thus the groff ms macros reserve the following names:
-.IP \(bu
-names containing
-.BR * ;
-.IP \(bu
-names containing
-.BR @ ;
-.IP \(bu
-names containing
-.BR : ;
-.IP \(bu
-names containing only uppercase letters and digits.
-.SH FILES
-.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.@TMAC_S_PREFIX@s
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@tbl (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@pic (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@eqn (@MAN1EXT@)
-.br
-.BR ms (@MAN7EXT@)
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.TH GROFF_MSAFER @MAN7EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+groff_msafer \- groff -msafer macros
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B groff
+.B \-msafer
+[
+.IR options .\|.\|.
+]
+[
+.IR files .\|.\|.
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The -msafer macros remove the
+.BR open ,
+.BR opena ,
+.BR pso ,
+.BR sy ,
+and
+.B pi
+requests.
+These macros should be used when processing input from
+an untrustworthy source.
+For maximum safety,
+they should be the first -m option on the command-line.
+Normally they are invoked using the
+.B \-S
+option of groff, which will also pass
+.B @g@pic
+the
+.B \-S
+flag.
+This is now the default; to get the old behaviour, use the
+.B \-U
+flag.
+.SH FILES
+.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.safer
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@pic (@MAN1EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.TH GROFF_MSAFER @MAN7EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-groff_msafer \- groff -msafer macros
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B groff
-.B \-msafer
-[
-.IR options .\|.\|.
-]
-[
-.IR files .\|.\|.
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The -msafer macros remove the
-.BR open ,
-.BR opena ,
-.BR pso ,
-.BR sy ,
-and
-.B pi
-requests.
-These macros should be used when processing input from
-an untrustworthy source.
-For maximum safety,
-they should be the first -m option on the command-line.
-Normally they are invoked using the
-.B \-S
-option of groff, which will also pass
-.B @g@pic
-the
-.B \-S
-flag.
-This is now the default; to get the old behaviour, use the
-.B \-U
-flag.
-.SH FILES
-.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.safer
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@pic (@MAN1EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-.\" Copyright (c) 1980 The Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted
-.\" provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are
-.\" duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation,
-.\" advertising materials, and other materials related to such
-.\" distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed
-.\" by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the
-.\" University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
-.\" from this software without specific prior written permission.
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
-.\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.\"
-.\" @(#)me.7 6.4 (Berkeley) 4/13/90
-.\"
-.\" Modified for groff by jjc@jclark.com
-.hc %
-.TH GROFF_ME @MAN7EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.UC 3
-.SH NAME
-groff_me \- troff macros for formatting papers
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B "groff \-me"
-[ options ]
-file ...
-.br
-.B "troff \-me"
-[ options ]
-file ...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page describes the GNU version of the \-me macros,
-which is part of the groff document formatting system.
-This version can be used with both GNU troff and Unix troff.
-This package of
-.I troff
-macro definitions provides a canned formatting
-facility for tech%nical papers in various formats.
-.PP
-The macro requests are defined below.
-Many
-.I troff
-requests are unsafe in conjunction with
-this package, however, these requests may be used with
-impunity after the first .pp:
-.nf
-.IP
-.ta \w'.sz +n 'u
-\&.bp begin new page
-\&.br break output line here
-\&.sp n insert n spacing lines
-\&.ls n (line spacing) n=1 single, n=2 double space
-\&.na no alignment of right margin
-\&.ce n center next n lines
-\&.ul n underline next n lines
-.fi
-.PP
-Output of the
-.I pic,
-.I eqn,
-.I refer,
-and
-.I tbl
-preprocessors
-is acceptable as input.
-.SH FILES
-@MACRODIR@/tmac.e
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@)
-.br
-\-me Reference Manual, Eric P. Allman
-.br
-Writing Papers with Groff Using \-me
-.tr &.
-.SH REQUESTS
-This list is incomplete;
-see
-.I "The \-me Reference Manual"
-for interesting details.
-.PP
-.ta \w'.eh \'x\'y\'z\' 'u +\w'Initial 'u +\w'Cause 'u
-.br
-.di x
- \ka
-.br
-.di
-.in \nau
-.ti 0
-Request Initial Cause Explanation
-.ti 0
- Value Break
-.br
-.in \nau
-.ti 0
-\&.(c - yes Begin centered block
-.ti 0
-\&.(d - no Begin delayed text
-.ti 0
-\&.(f - no Begin footnote
-.ti 0
-\&.(l - yes Begin list
-.ti 0
-\&.(q - yes Begin major quote
-.ti 0
-\&.(x \fIx\fR - no Begin indexed item in index
-.I x
-.ti 0
-\&.(z - no Begin floating keep
-.ti 0
-\&.)c - yes End centered block
-.ti 0
-\&.)d - yes End delayed text
-.ti 0
-\&.)f - yes End footnote
-.ti 0
-\&.)l - yes End list
-.ti 0
-\&.)q - yes End major quote
-.ti 0
-\&.)x - yes End index item
-.ti 0
-\&.)z - yes End floating keep
-.ti 0
-\&.++ \fIm H\fR - no Define paper section.
-.I m
-defines the part of the paper, and can be
-.B C
-(chapter),
-.B A
-(appendix),
-.B P
-(preliminary, e.g., abstract, table of contents, etc.),
-.B B
-(bibliography),
-.B RC
-(chapters renumbered from page one each chapter),
-or
-.B RA
-(appendix renumbered from page one).
-.ti 0
-\&.+c \fIT\fR - yes Begin chapter (or appendix, etc., as
-set by .++).
-.I T
-is the chapter title.
-.ti 0
-\&.1c 1 yes One column format on a new page.
-.ti 0
-\&.2c 1 yes Two column format.
-.ti 0
-\&.EN - yes Space after equation
-produced by
-.I eqn
-or
-.IR neqn .
-.ti 0
-\&.EQ \fIx y\fR - yes Precede equation; break out and
-add space.
-Equation number is
-.IR y .
-The optional argument \fIx\fR
-may be
-.I I
-to indent equation (default),
-.I L
-to left-adjust the equation, or
-.I C
-to center the equation.
-.ti 0
-\&.GE - yes End \fIgremlin\fP picture.
-.ti 0
-\&.GS - yes Begin \fIgremlin\fP picture.
-.ti 0
-\&.PE - yes End \fIpic\fP picture.
-.ti 0
-\&.PS - yes Begin \fIpic\fP picture.
-.ti 0
-\&.TE - yes End table.
-.ti 0
-\&.TH - yes End heading section of table.
-.ti 0
-\&.TS \fIx\fR - yes Begin table; if \fIx\fR is
-.I H
-table has repeated heading.
-.ti 0
-\&.b \fIx\fR no no Print
-.I x
-in boldface; if no argument switch to boldface.
-.ti 0
-\&.ba \fI+n\fR 0 yes Augments the base indent by
-.I n.
-This indent is used to set the indent on regular text
-(like paragraphs).
-.ti 0
-\&.bc no yes Begin new column
-.ti 0
-\&.bi \fIx\fR no no Print
-.I x
-in bold italics (nofill only)
-.ti 0
-\&.bu - yes Begin bulleted paragraph
-.ti 0
-\&.bx \fIx\fR no no Print \fIx\fR in a box (nofill only).
-.ti 0
-\&.ef \fI\'x\'y\'z\'\fR \'\'\'\' no Set even footer to x y z
-.ti 0
-\&.eh \fI\'x\'y\'z\'\fR \'\'\'\' no Set even header to x y z
-.ti 0
-\&.fo \fI\'x\'y\'z\'\fR \'\'\'\' no Set footer to x y z
-.ti 0
-\&.hx - no Suppress headers and footers on next page.
-.ti 0
-\&.he \fI\'x\'y\'z\'\fR \'\'\'\' no Set header to x y z
-.ti 0
-\&.hl - yes Draw a horizontal line
-.ti 0
-\&.i \fIx\fR no no Italicize
-.I x;
-if
-.I x
-missing, italic text follows.
-.ti 0
-\&.ip \fIx y\fR no yes Start indented paragraph,
-with hanging tag
-.IR x .
-Indentation is
-.I y
-ens (default 5).
-.ti 0
-\&.lp yes yes Start left-blocked paragraph.
-.ti 0
-\&.np 1 yes Start numbered paragraph.
-.ti 0
-\&.of \fI\'x\'y\'z\'\fR \'\'\'\' no Set odd footer to x y z
-.ti 0
-\&.oh \fI\'x\'y\'z\'\fR \'\'\'\' no Set odd header to x y z
-.ti 0
-\&.pd - yes Print delayed text.
-.ti 0
-\&.pp no yes Begin paragraph.
-First line indented.
-.ti 0
-\&.r yes no Roman text follows.
-.ti 0
-\&.re - no Reset tabs to default values.
-.ti 0
-\&.sh \fIn x\fR - yes Section head follows,
-font automatically bold.
-.I n
-is level of section,
-.I x
-is title of section.
-.ti 0
-\&.sk no no Leave the next page blank.
-Only one page is remembered ahead.
-.ti 0
-\&.sm \fIx\fR - no Set
-.I x
-in a smaller pointsize.
-.ti 0
-\&.sz \fI+n\fR 10p no Augment the point size by
-.I n
-points.
-.ti 0
-\&.tp no yes Begin title page.
-.ti 0
-\&.u \fIx\fR - no Underline argument (even in \fItroff\fR).
-(Nofill only).
-.ti 0
-\&.uh - yes Like .sh but unnumbered.
-.ti 0
-\&.xp \fIx\fR - no Print index
-.I x.
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.TH MSAFER @MAN7EXT@ "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-msafer \- groff -msafer macros
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B groff
-.B \-msafer
-[
-.IR options .\|.\|.
-]
-[
-.IR files .\|.\|.
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The -msafer macros remove the
-.BR open ,
-.BR opena ,
-.BR pso ,
-.B sy
-and
-.B pi
-requests.
-These macros should be used when processing input from
-an untrustworthy source.
-For maximum safety,
-they should be the first -m option on the command-line.
-Normally they are invoked using the
-.B \-S
-option of groff, which will also pass
-.B @g@pic
-the
-.B \-S
-flag.
-.SH FILES
-.B @MACRODIR@/tmac.safer
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@troff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@pic (@MAN1EXT@)
.if \n(dw=5 .ds dw Thursday
.if \n(dw=6 .ds dw Friday
.if \n(dw=7 .ds dw Saturday
-.nr *year \n(yr+1900
-.ds td \*(mo \n(dy, \n[*year]
+.nr y2 \n(yr%100
+.af y2 00
+.nr y4 \n(yr+1900
+.ds td \*(mo \n(dy, \n(y4
.\" *** PARAMETRIC INITIALIZATIONS ***
.rr x
.nr $v \n(.v00+\n(.sp-1/\n(.sp \" vs as percentage of ps for .sz request
PROG=troff
-MAN1=troff.n
+MAN1=troff.1
XLIBS=$(LIBGROFF)
MLIB=$(LIBM)
OBJS=env.o node.o input.o div.o symbol.o dictionary.o reg.o \
--- /dev/null
+.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
+Copyright (C) 1989-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
+translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
+the original English.
+..
+.\" define a string tx for the TeX logo
+.ie t .ds tx T\h'-.1667m'\v'.224m'E\v'-.224m'\h'-.125m'X
+.el .ds tx TeX
+.de TQ
+.br
+.ns
+.TP \\$1
+..
+.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
+.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
+.de Tp
+.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
+.el .TP "\\$1"
+..
+.\" The BSD man macros can't handle " in arguments to font change macros,
+.\" so use \(ts instead of ".
+.tr \(ts"
+.TH @G@TROFF 1 "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
+.SH NAME
+@g@troff \- format documents
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nr a \n(.j
+.ad l
+.nr i \n(.i
+.in +\w'\fB@g@troff 'u
+.ti \niu
+.B @g@troff
+.de OP
+.ie \\n(.$-1 .RI "[\ \fB\\$1\fP" "\\$2" "\ ]"
+.el .RB "[\ " "\\$1" "\ ]"
+..
+.OP \-abivzCERU
+.OP \-w name
+.OP \-W name
+.OP \-d cs
+.OP \-f fam
+.OP \-m name
+.OP \-n num
+.OP \-o list
+.OP \-r cn
+.OP \-T name
+.OP \-F dir
+.OP \-M dir
+.RI "[\ " files\|.\|.\|. "\ ]"
+.br
+.ad \na
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This manual page describes the GNU version of
+.BR troff ,
+which is part of the groff document formatting system.
+It is highly compatible with Unix troff.
+Usually it should be invoked using the groff command, which will
+also run preprocessors and postprocessors in the appropriate
+order and with the appropriate options.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP \w'\-dname=s'u+2n
+.B \-a
+Generate an
+.SM ASCII
+approximation of the typeset output.
+.TP
+.B \-b
+Print a backtrace with each warning or error message. This backtrace
+should help track down the cause of the error. The line numbers given
+in the backtrace may not always be correct:
+.B troff 's
+idea of line numbers
+gets confused by
+.B as
+or
+.B am
+requests.
+.TP
+.B \-i
+Read the standard input after all the named input files have been
+processed.
+.TP
+.B \-v
+Print the version number.
+.TP
+.BI \-w name
+Enable warning
+.IR name .
+Available warnings are described in
+the Warnings subsection below.
+Multiple
+.B \-w
+options are allowed.
+.TP
+.BI \-W name
+Inhibit warning
+.IR name .
+Multiple
+.B \-W
+options are allowed.
+.TP
+.B \-E
+Inhibit all error messages.
+.TP
+.B \-z
+Suppress formatted output.
+.TP
+.B \-C
+Enable compatibility mode.
+.TP
+.BI \-d cs
+.TQ
+.BI \-d name = s
+Define
+.I c
+or
+.I name
+to be a string
+.IR s ;
+.I c
+must be a one letter name.
+.TP
+.BI \-f fam
+Use
+.I fam
+as the default font family.
+.TP
+.BI \-m name
+Read in the file
+.BI tmac. name\fR.
+Normally this will be searched for in @MACRODIR@.
+By default is used the
+.I safer
+macro (reverted using -U ).
+.TP
+.B \-U
+Unsafe option, avoids default use of
+.I safer
+macro.
+.TP
+.B \-R
+Don't load
+.BR troffrc .
+.TP
+.BI \-n num
+Number the first page
+.IR num .
+.TP
+.BI \-o list
+Output only pages in
+.IR list ,
+which is a comma-separated list of page ranges;
+.I n
+means print page
+.IR n ,
+.IB m \- n
+means print every page between
+.I m
+and
+.IR n ,
+.BI \- n
+means print every page up to
+.IR n ,
+.IB n \-
+means print every page from
+.IR n .
+.B Troff
+will exit after printing the last page in the list.
+.TP
+.BI \-r cn
+.TQ
+.BI \-r name = n
+Set number register
+.I c
+or
+.I name
+to
+.IR n ;
+.I c
+must be a one character name;
+.I n
+can be any troff numeric expression.
+.TP
+.BI \-T name
+Prepare output for device
+.IR name ,
+rather than the default
+.BR @DEVICE@ .
+.TP
+.BI \-F dir
+Search
+.I dir
+for subdirectories
+.BI dev name
+.RI ( name
+is the name of the device)
+for the
+.B DESC
+file and font files before the normal
+.BR @FONTDIR@ .
+.TP
+.BI \-M dir
+Search directory
+.I dir
+for macro files before the normal
+.BR @MACRODIR@ .
+.SH USAGE
+Only the features not in Unix troff are described here.
+.SS Long names
+The names of number registers, fonts, strings/macros/diversions,
+special characters can be of any length. In escape sequences, where
+you can use
+.BI ( xx
+for a two character name, you can use
+.BI [ xxx ]
+for a name of arbitrary length:
+.TP
+.BI \e[ xxx ]
+Print the special character called
+.IR xxx .
+.TP
+.BI \ef[ xxx ]
+Set font
+.IR xxx .
+.TP
+.BI \e*[ xxx ]
+Interpolate string
+.IR xxx .
+.TP
+.BI \en[ xxx ]
+Interpolate number register
+.IR xxx .
+.SS Fractional pointsizes
+A
+.I
+scaled point
+is equal to 1/sizescale
+points, where
+sizescale is specified in the
+.B DESC
+file (1 by default.)
+There is a new scale indicator
+.B z
+which has the effect of multiplying by sizescale.
+Requests and escape sequences in troff
+interpret arguments that represent a pointsize as being in units
+of scaled points, but they evaluate each such argument
+using a default scale indicator of
+.BR z .
+Arguments treated in this way are
+the argument to the
+.B ps
+request,
+the third argument to the
+.B cs
+request,
+the second and fourth arguments to the
+.B tkf
+request,
+the argument to the
+.B \eH
+escape sequence,
+and those variants of the
+.B \es
+escape sequence that take a numeric expression as their argument.
+.LP
+For example, suppose sizescale is 1000;
+then a scaled point will be equivalent to a millipoint;
+the request
+.B .ps 10.25
+is equivalent to
+.B .ps 10.25z
+and so sets the pointsize to 10250 scaled points,
+which is equal to 10.25 points.
+.LP
+The number register
+.B \en(.s
+returns the pointsize in points as decimal fraction.
+There is also a new number register
+.B \en[.ps]
+that returns the pointsize in scaled points.
+.LP
+It would make no sense to use the
+.B z
+scale indicator in a numeric expression
+whose default scale indicator was neither
+.B u
+nor
+.BR z ,
+and so
+.B troff
+disallows this.
+Similarly it would make no sense to use a scaling indicator
+other than
+.B z
+or
+.B u
+in a numeric expression whose default scale indicator was
+.BR z ,
+and so
+.B troff
+disallows this as well.
+.LP
+There is also new scale indicator
+.B s
+which multiplies by the number of units in a scaled point.
+So, for example,
+.B \en[.ps]s
+is equal to
+.BR 1m .
+Be sure not to confuse the
+.B s
+and
+.B z
+scale indicators.
+.SS Numeric expressions
+.LP
+Spaces are permitted in a number expression within parentheses.
+.LP
+.B M
+indicates a scale of 100ths of an em.
+.TP
+.IB e1 >? e2
+The maximum of
+.I e1
+and
+.IR e2 .
+.TP
+.IB e1 <? e2
+The minimum of
+.I e1
+and
+.IR e2 .
+.TP
+.BI ( c ; e )
+Evaluate
+.I e
+using
+.I c
+as the default scaling indicator.
+If
+.I c
+is missing, ignore scaling indicators in the evaluation of
+.IR e .
+.SS New escape sequences
+.TP
+.BI \eA' anything '
+This expands to
+.B 1
+or
+.B 0
+according as
+.I anything
+is or is not acceptable as the name of a string, macro, diversion,
+number register, environment or font.
+It will return
+.B 0
+if
+.I anything
+is empty.
+This is useful if you want to lookup user input in some sort of
+associative table.
+.TP
+.BI \eC' xxx '
+Typeset character named
+.IR xxx .
+Normally it is more convenient to use
+.BI \e[ xxx ]\fR.
+But
+.B \eC
+has the advantage that it is compatible with recent versions of
+.SM UNIX
+and is available in compatibility mode.
+.TP
+.B \eE
+This is equivalent to an escape character,
+but it's not interpreted in copy-mode.
+For example, strings to start and end superscripting could be defined
+like this:
+.RS
+.IP
+\&.ds { \ev'\-.3m'\es'\eEn[.s]*6u/10u'
+.br
+\&.ds } \es0\ev'.3m'
+.LP
+The use of
+.B \eE
+ensures that these definitions will work even if
+.B \e*{
+gets interpreted in copy-mode
+(for example, by being used in a macro argument.)
+.RE
+.TP
+.BI \eN' n '
+Typeset the character with code
+.I n
+in the current font.
+.I n
+can be any integer.
+Most devices only have characters with codes between 0 and 255.
+If the current font does not contain a character with that code,
+special fonts will
+.I not
+be searched.
+The
+.B \eN
+escape sequence can be conveniently used on conjunction with the
+.B char
+request:
+.RS
+.IP
+.B
+\&.char \e[phone] \ef(ZD\eN'37'
+.RE
+.IP
+The code of each character is given in the fourth column in the font
+description file after the
+.B charset
+command.
+It is possible to include unnamed characters in the font description
+file by using a name of
+.BR \-\-\- ;
+the
+.B \eN
+escape sequence is the only way to use these.
+.TP
+.BI \eR' name\ \(+-n '
+This has the same effect as
+.RS
+.IP
+.BI .nr\ name\ \(+-n
+.RE
+.TP
+.BI \es( nn
+.TQ
+.BI \es\(+-( nn
+Set the point size to
+.I nn
+points;
+.I nn
+must be exactly two digits.
+.TP
+.BI \es[\(+- n ]
+.TQ
+.BI \es\(+-[ n ]
+.TQ
+.BI \es'\(+- n '
+.TQ
+.BI \es\(+-' n '
+Set the point size to
+.I n
+scaled points;
+.I n
+is a numeric expression with a default scale indicator of
+.BR z .
+.TP
+.BI \eV x
+.TQ
+.BI \eV( xx
+.TQ
+.BI \eV[ xxx ]
+Interpolate the contents of the environment variable
+.I xxx ,
+as returned by
+.BR getenv (3).
+.B \eV
+is interpreted in copy-mode.
+.TP
+.BI \eY x
+.TQ
+.BI \eY( xx
+.TQ
+.BI \eY[ xxx ]
+This is approximately equivalent to
+.BI \eX'\e*[ xxx ]'\fR.
+However the contents of the string or macro
+.I xxx
+are not interpreted;
+also it is permitted for
+.I xxx
+to have been defined as a macro and thus contain newlines
+(it is not permitted for the argument to
+.B \eX
+to contain newlines).
+The inclusion of newlines requires an extension to the Unix troff output
+format, and will confuse drivers that do not know about this
+extension.
+.TP
+.BI \eZ' anything '
+Print anything and then restore the horizontal and vertical
+position;
+.I anything
+may not contain tabs or leaders.
+.TP
+.B \e$0
+The name by which the current macro was invoked.
+The
+.B als
+request can make a macro have more than one name.
+.TP
+.B \e$*
+In a macro, the concatenation of all the arguments separated by spaces.
+.TP
+.B \e$@
+In a macro, the concatenation of all the arguments with each surrounded by
+double quotes, and separated by spaces.
+.TP
+.BI \e$( nn
+.TQ
+.BI \e$[ nnn ]
+In a macro, this gives the
+.IR nn -th
+or
+.IR nnn -th
+argument.
+Macros can have a unlimited number of arguments.
+.TP
+.BI \e? anything \e?
+When used in a diversion, this will transparently embed
+.I anything
+in the diversion.
+.I anything
+is read in copy mode.
+When the diversion is reread,
+.I anything
+will be interpreted.
+.I anything
+may not contain newlines; use
+.B \e!
+if you want to embed newlines in a diversion.
+The escape sequence
+.B \e?
+is also recognised in copy mode and turned into a single internal
+code; it is this code that terminates
+.IR anything .
+Thus
+.RS
+.RS
+.ft B
+.nf
+.ne 15
+\&.nr x 1
+\&.nf
+\&.di d
+\e?\e\e?\e\e\e\e?\e\e\e\e\e\e\e\enx\e\e\e\e?\e\e?\e?
+\&.di
+\&.nr x 2
+\&.di e
+\&.d
+\&.di
+\&.nr x 3
+\&.di f
+\&.e
+\&.di
+\&.nr x 4
+\&.f
+.fi
+.ft
+.RE
+.RE
+.IP
+will print
+.BR 4 .
+.TP
+.B \e/
+This increases the width of the preceding character so that
+the spacing between that character and the following character
+will be correct if the following character is a roman character.
+For example, if an italic f is immediately followed by a roman
+right parenthesis, then in many fonts the top right portion of the f
+will overlap the top left of the right parenthesis producing \fIf\fR)\fR,
+which is ugly.
+Inserting
+.B \e/
+produces
+.ie \n(.g \fIf\/\fR)\fR
+.el \fIf\|\fR)\fR
+and avoids this problem.
+It is a good idea to use this escape sequence whenever an
+italic character is immediately followed by a roman character without any
+intervening space.
+.TP
+.B \e,
+This modifies the spacing of the following character so that the spacing
+between that character and the preceding character will correct if
+the preceding character is a roman character.
+For example, inserting
+.B \e,
+between the parenthesis and the f changes
+\fR(\fIf\fR to
+.ie \n(.g \fR(\,\fIf\fR.
+.el \fR(\^\fIf\fR.
+It is a good idea to use this escape sequence whenever a
+roman character is immediately followed by an italic character without any
+intervening space.
+.TP
+.B \e)
+Like
+.B \e&
+except that it behaves like a character declared with the
+.B cflags
+request to be transparent for the purposes of end of sentence recognition.
+.TP
+.B \e~
+This produces an unbreakable space that stretches like a normal inter-word
+space when a line is adjusted.
+.TP
+.B \e#
+Everything up to and including the next newline is ignored.
+This is interpreted in copy mode.
+This is like
+.B \e"
+except that
+.B \e"
+does not ignore the terminating newline.
+.SS New requests
+.TP
+.BI .aln\ xx\ yy
+Create an alias
+.I xx
+for number register object named
+.IR yy .
+The new name and the old name will be exactly equivalent.
+If
+.I yy
+is undefined, a warning of type
+.B reg
+will be generated, and the request will be ignored.
+.TP
+.BI .als\ xx\ yy
+Create an alias
+.I xx
+for request, string, macro, or diversion object named
+.IR yy .
+The new name and the old name will be exactly equivalent (it is similar to a
+hard rather than a soft link).
+If
+.I yy
+is undefined, a warning of type
+.B mac
+will be generated, and the request will be ignored.
+The
+.BR de ,
+.BR am ,
+.BR di ,
+.BR da ,
+.BR ds ,
+and
+.B as
+requests only create a new object if the name of the macro, diversion
+or string diversion is currently undefined or if it is defined to be a
+request; normally they modify the value of an existing object.
+.TP
+.BI .asciify\ xx
+This request only exists in order to make it possible
+to make certain gross hacks work with GNU troff.
+It `unformats' the diversion
+.I xx
+in such a way that
+.SM ASCII
+characters that were formatted and diverted into
+.I xx
+will be treated like ordinary input characters when
+.I xx
+is reread.
+For example, this
+.RS
+.IP
+.ne 7v+\n(.Vu
+.ft B
+.nf
+.ss 24
+\&.tr @.
+\&.di x
+\&@nr\e n\e 1
+\&.br
+\&.di
+\&.tr @@
+\&.asciify x
+\&.x
+.ss 12
+.fi
+.RE
+.IP
+will set register
+.B n
+to 1.
+.TP
+.B .backtrace
+Print a backtrace of the input stack on stderr.
+.TP
+.BI .blm\ xx
+Set the blank line macro to
+.IR xx .
+If there is a blank line macro,
+it will be invoked when a blank line is encountered instead of the usual
+troff behaviour.
+.TP
+.B .break
+Break out of a while loop.
+See also the
+.B while
+and
+.B continue
+requests.
+Be sure not to confuse this with the
+.B br
+request.
+.TP
+.BI .cflags\ n\ c1\ c2\|.\|.\|.
+Characters
+.IR c1 ,
+.IR c2 ,\|.\|.\|.
+have properties determined by
+.IR n ,
+which is ORed from the following:
+.RS
+.TP
+1
+the character ends sentences
+(initially characters
+.B .?!
+have this property);
+.TP
+2
+lines can be broken before the character
+(initially no characters have this property);
+a line will not be broken at a character with this property
+unless the characters on each side both have non-zero
+hyphenation codes.
+.TP
+4
+lines can be broken after the character
+(initially characters
+.B \-\e(hy\e(em
+have this property);
+a line will not be broken at a character with this property
+unless the characters on each side both have non-zero
+hyphenation codes.
+.TP
+8
+the character overlaps horizontally
+(initially characters
+.B \e(ul\e(rn\e(ru
+have this property);
+.TP
+16
+the character overlaps vertically
+(initially character
+.B \e(br
+has this property);
+.TP
+32
+an end of sentence character followed by any number of characters
+with this property will be treated
+as the end of a sentence if followed by a newline or two spaces;
+in other words
+the character is transparent for the purposes of end of sentence
+recognition;
+this is the same as having a zero space factor in \*(tx
+(initially characters
+.B \(ts')]*\e(dg\e(rq
+have this property).
+.RE
+.TP
+.BI .char\ c\ string
+Define character
+.I c
+to be
+.IR string .
+Every time character
+.I c
+needs to be printed,
+.I string
+will be processed in a temporary environment and the result
+will be wrapped up into a single object.
+Compatibility mode will be turned off
+and the escape character will be set to
+.B \e
+while
+.I string
+is being processed.
+Any emboldening, constant spacing or track kerning will be applied
+to this object rather than to individual characters in
+.IR string .
+A character defined by this request can be used just like
+a normal character provided by the output device.
+In particular other characters can be translated to it
+with the
+.B tr
+request;
+it can be made the leader character by the
+.B lc
+request;
+repeated patterns can be drawn with the character using the
+.B \el
+and
+.B \eL
+escape sequences;
+words containing the character can be hyphenated
+correctly, if the
+.B hcode
+request is used to give the character a hyphenation code.
+There is a special anti-recursion feature:
+use of character within the character's definition
+will be handled like normal characters not defined with
+.BR char .
+A character definition can be removed with the
+.B rchar
+request.
+.TP
+.BI .chop\ xx
+Chop the last character off macro, string, or diversion
+.IR xx .
+This is useful for removing the newline from the end of diversions
+that are to be interpolated as strings.
+.TP
+.BI .close\ stream
+Close the stream named
+.IR stream ;
+.I stream
+will no longer be an acceptable argument to the
+.B write
+request.
+See the
+.B open
+request.
+.TP
+.B .continue
+Finish the current iteration of a while loop.
+See also the
+.B while
+and
+.B break
+requests.
+.TP
+.BI .cp\ n
+If
+.I n
+is non-zero or missing, enable compatibility mode, otherwise
+disable it.
+In compatibility mode, long names are not recognised, and the
+incompatibilities caused by long names do not arise.
+.TP
+.BI .do\ xxx
+Interpret
+.I .xxx
+with compatibility mode disabled.
+For example,
+.RS
+.IP
+.B
+\&.do fam T
+.LP
+would have the same effect as
+.IP
+.B
+\&.fam T
+.LP
+except that it would work even if compatibility mode had been enabled.
+Note that the previous compatibility mode is restored before any files
+sourced by
+.I xxx
+are interpreted.
+.RE
+.TP
+.BI .fam\ xx
+Set the current font family to
+.IR xx .
+The current font family is part of the current environment.
+See the description of the
+.B sty
+request for more information on font families.
+.TP
+.BI .fspecial\ f\ s1\ s2\|.\|.\|.
+When the current font is
+.IR f ,
+fonts
+.IR s1 ,
+.IR s2 ,\|.\|.\|.
+will be special, that is, they will searched for characters not in
+the current font.
+Any fonts specified in the
+.B special
+request will be searched after fonts specified in the
+.B fspecial
+request.
+.TP
+.BI .ftr\ f\ g
+Translate font
+.I f
+to
+.IR g .
+Whenever a font named
+.I f
+is referred to in
+.B \ef
+escape sequence,
+or in the
+.BR ft ,
+.BR ul ,
+.BR bd ,
+.BR cs ,
+.BR tkf ,
+.BR special ,
+.BR fspecial ,
+.BR fp ,
+or
+.BR sty
+requests,
+font
+.I g
+will be used.
+If
+.I g
+is missing,
+or equal to
+.I f
+then font
+.I f
+will not be translated.
+.TP
+.BI .hcode \ c1\ code1\ c2\ code2\|.\|.\|.
+Set the hyphenation code of character
+.I c1
+to
+.I code1
+and that of
+.I c2
+to
+.IR code2 .
+A hyphenation code must be a single input
+character (not a special character) other than a digit or a space.
+Initially each lower-case letter has a hyphenation code, which
+is itself, and each upper-case letter has a hyphenation code
+which is the lower case version of itself.
+See also the
+.B hpf
+request.
+.TP
+.BI .hla\ lang
+Set the current hyphenation language to
+.IR lang .
+Hyphenation exceptions specified with the
+.B hw
+request and hyphenation patterns specified with the
+.B hpf
+request are both associated with the current hyphenation language.
+The
+.B hla
+request is usually invoked by the
+.B troffrc
+file.
+.TP
+.BI .hlm\ n
+Set the maximum number of consecutive hyphenated lines to
+.IR n .
+If
+.I n
+is negative, there is no maximum.
+The default value is \-1.
+This value is associated with the current environment.
+Only lines output from an environment count towards the maximum associated
+with that environment.
+Hyphens resulting from
+.B \e%
+are counted; explicit hyphens are not.
+.TP
+.BI .hpf\ file
+Read hyphenation patterns from
+.IR file ;
+this will be searched for in the same way that
+.BI tmac. name
+is searched for when the
+.BI \-m name
+option is specified.
+It should have the same format as the argument to
+the \epatterns primitive in \*(tx;
+the letters appearing in this file are interpreted as hyphenation
+codes.
+A
+.B %
+character in the patterns file introduces a comment that continues
+to the end of the line.
+The set of hyphenation patterns is associated with the current language
+set by the
+.B hla
+request.
+The
+.B hpf
+request
+is usually invoked by the
+.B troffrc
+file.
+.TP
+.BI .hym\ n
+Set the
+.I hyphenation margin
+to
+.IR n :
+when the current adjustment mode is not
+.BR b ,
+the line will not be hyphenated if the line is no more than
+.I n
+short.
+The default hyphenation margin is 0.
+The default scaling indicator for this request is
+.IR m .
+The hyphenation margin is associated with the current environment.
+The current hyphenation margin is available in the
+.B \en[.hym]
+register.
+.TP
+.BI .hys\ n
+Set the
+.I hyphenation space
+to
+.IR n :
+when the current adjustment mode is
+.B b
+don't hyphenate the line if the line can be justified by adding no more than
+.I n
+extra space to each word space.
+The default hyphenation space is 0.
+The default scaling indicator for this request is
+.BR m .
+The hyphenation space is associated with the current environment.
+The current hyphenation space is available in the
+.B \en[.hys]
+register.
+.TP
+.BI .kern\ n
+If
+.I n
+is non-zero or missing, enable pairwise kerning, otherwise disable it.
+.TP
+.BI .mso\ file
+The same as the
+.B so
+request except that
+.I file
+is searched for in the same way that
+.BI tmac. name
+is searched for when the
+.BI \-m name
+option is specified.
+.TP
+.B .nroff
+Make the
+.B n
+built-in condition true
+and the
+.B t
+built-in condition false.
+This can be reversed using the
+.B troff
+request.
+.TP
+.BI .open\ stream\ filename
+Open
+.I filename
+for writing and associate the stream named
+.I stream
+with it.
+See also the
+.B close
+and
+.B write
+requests.
+.TP
+.BI .opena\ stream\ filename
+Like
+.BR open ,
+but if
+.I filename
+exists, append to it instead of truncating it.
+.TP
+.B .pnr
+Print the names and contents of all currently defined number registers
+on stderr.
+.TP
+.BI .pso \ command
+This is behaves like the
+.B so
+request except that input comes from the standard output of
+.IR command .
+.TP
+.B .ptr
+Print the names and positions of all traps (not including input line
+traps and diversion traps) on stderr. Empty slots in the page trap
+list are printed as well, because they can affect the priority of
+subsequently planted traps.
+.TP
+.BI .rchar\ c1\ c2\|.\|.\|.
+Remove the definitions of characters
+.IR c1 ,
+.IR c2 ,\|.\|.\|.
+This undoes the effect of a
+.B char
+request.
+.TP
+.B .rj
+.TQ
+.BI .rj\ n
+Right justify the next
+.I n
+input lines.
+Without an argument right justify the next input line.
+The number of lines to be right justified is available in the
+.B \en[.rj]
+register.
+This implicitly does
+.BR .ce\ 0 .
+The
+.B ce
+request implicitly does
+.BR .rj\ 0 .
+.TP
+.BI .rnn \ xx\ yy
+Rename number register
+.I xx
+to
+.IR yy .
+.TP
+.BI .shc\ c
+Set the soft hyphen character to
+.IR c .
+If
+.I c
+is omitted,
+the soft hyphen character will be set to the default
+.BR \e(hy .
+The soft hyphen character is the character which will be inserted
+when a word is hyphenated at a line break.
+If the soft hyphen character does not exist in the font of the character
+immediately preceding a potential break point,
+then the line will not be broken at that point.
+Neither definitions (specified with the
+.B char
+request)
+nor translations (specified with the
+.B tr
+request)
+are considered when finding the soft hyphen character.
+.TP
+.BI .shift\ n
+In a macro, shift the arguments by
+.I n
+positions:
+argument
+.I i
+becomes argument
+.IR i \- n ;
+arguments 1 to
+.I n
+will no longer be available.
+If
+.I n
+is missing,
+arguments will be shifted by 1.
+Shifting by negative amounts is currently undefined.
+.TP
+.BI .special\ s1\ s2\|.\|.\|.
+Fonts
+.IR s1 ,
+.IR s2 ,
+are special and will be searched for characters not in the
+current font.
+.TP
+.BI .sty\ n\ f
+Associate style
+.I f
+with font position
+.IR n .
+A font position can be associated either with a font or
+with a style.
+The current font is the index of a font position and so is also
+either a font or a style.
+When it is a style, the font that is actually used is the font the
+name of which is the concatenation of the name of the current family
+and the name of the current style.
+For example, if the current font is 1 and font position 1 is
+associated with style
+.B R
+and the current
+font family is
+.BR T ,
+then font
+.BR TR
+will be used.
+If the current font is not a style, then the current family is ignored.
+When the requests
+.BR cs ,
+.BR bd ,
+.BR tkf ,
+.BR uf ,
+or
+.B fspecial
+are applied to a style,
+then they will instead be applied to the member of the
+current family corresponding to that style.
+The default family can be set with the
+.B \-f
+option.
+The styles command in the
+.SM DESC
+file controls which font positions
+(if any) are initially associated with styles rather than fonts.
+.TP
+.BI .tkf\ f\ s1\ n1\ s2\ n2
+Enable track kerning for font
+.IR f .
+When the current font is
+.I f
+the width of every character will be increased by an amount
+between
+.I n1
+and
+.IR n2 ;
+when the current point size is less than or equal to
+.I s1
+the width will be increased by
+.IR n1 ;
+when it is greater than or equal to
+.I s2
+the width will be increased by
+.IR n2 ;
+when the point size is greater than or equal to
+.I s1
+and less than or equal to
+.I s2
+the increase in width is a linear function of the point size.
+.TP
+.BI .trf\ filename
+Transparently output the contents of file
+.IR filename .
+Each line is output as it would be were it preceded by
+.BR \e! ;
+however, the lines are not subject to copy-mode interpretation.
+If the file does not end with a newline, then a newline will
+be added.
+For example, you can define a macro
+.I x
+containing the contents of file
+.IR f ,
+using
+.RS
+.IP
+.BI .di\ x
+.br
+.BI .trf\ f
+.br
+.B .di
+.LP
+Unlike with the
+.B cf
+request,
+the file cannot contain characters such as
+.SM NUL
+that are not legal troff input characters.
+.RE
+.TP
+.B .trnt abcd
+This is the same as the
+.B tr
+request except that the translations do not apply to text that is
+transparently throughput into a diversion with
+.BR \e! .
+For example,
+.RS
+.LP
+.nf
+.ft B
+\&.tr ab
+\&.di x
+\e!.tm a
+\&.di
+\&.x
+.fi
+.ft
+.LP
+will print
+.BR b ;
+if
+.B trnt
+is used instead of
+.B tr
+it will print
+.BR a .
+.RE
+.TP
+.B .troff
+Make the
+.B n
+built-in condition false,
+and the
+.B t
+built-in condition true.
+This undoes the effect of the
+.B nroff
+request.
+.TP
+.BI .vpt\ n
+Enable vertical position traps if
+.I n
+is non-zero, disable them otherwise.
+Vertical position traps are traps set by the
+.B wh
+or
+.B dt
+requests.
+Traps set by the
+.B it
+request are not vertical position traps.
+The parameter that controls whether vertical position traps are enabled
+is global.
+Initially vertical position traps are enabled.
+.TP
+.BI .warn\ n
+Control warnings.
+.I n
+is the sum of the numbers associated with each warning that is to be enabled;
+all other warnings will be disabled.
+The number associated with each warning is listed in the `Warnings' section.
+For example,
+.B .warn 0
+will disable all warnings, and
+.B .warn 1
+will disable all warnings except that about missing characters.
+If
+.I n
+is not given,
+all warnings will be enabled.
+.TP
+.BI .while \ c\ anything
+While condition
+.I c
+is true, accept
+.I anything
+as input;
+.I c
+can be any condition acceptable to an
+.B if
+request;
+.I anything
+can comprise multiple lines if the first line starts with
+.B \e{
+and the last line ends with
+.BR \e} .
+See also the
+.B break
+and
+.B continue
+requests.
+.TP
+.BI .write\ stream\ anything
+Write
+.I anything
+to the stream named
+.IR stream .
+.I stream
+must previously have been the subject of an
+.B open
+request.
+.I anything
+is read in copy mode;
+a leading
+.B \(ts
+will be stripped.
+.SS Extended requests
+.TP
+.BI .cf\ filename
+When used in a diversion, this will embed in the diversion an object which,
+when reread, will cause the contents of
+.I filename
+to be transparently copied through to the output.
+In Unix troff, the
+contents of
+.I filename
+is immediately copied through to the output regardless of whether
+there is a current diversion; this behaviour is so anomalous that it
+must be considered a bug.
+.TP
+.BI .ev\ xx
+If
+.I xx
+is not a number, this will switch to a named environment called
+.IR xx .
+The environment should be popped with a matching
+.B ev
+request without any arguments, just as for numbered environments.
+There is no limit on the number of named environments; they will be
+created the first time that they are referenced.
+.TP
+.BI .fp\ n\ f1\ f2
+The
+.B fp
+request has an optional third argument.
+This argument gives the external name of the font,
+which is used for finding the font description file.
+The second argument gives the internal name of the font
+which is used to refer to the font in troff after it has been mounted.
+If there is no third argument then the internal name will be used
+as the external name.
+This feature allows you to use fonts with long names in compatibility mode.
+.TP
+.BI .ss\ m\ n
+When two arguments are given to the
+.B ss
+request, the second argument gives the
+.IR "sentence space size" .
+If the second argument is not given, the sentence space size
+will be the same as the word space size.
+Like the word space size, the sentence space is in units of
+one twelfth of the spacewidth parameter for the current font.
+Initially both the word space size and the sentence
+space size are 12.
+The sentence space size is used in two circumstances:
+if the end of a sentence occurs at the end of a line in fill mode, then
+both an inter-word space and a sentence space will be added;
+if two spaces follow the end of a sentence in the middle of a line,
+then the second space will be a sentence space.
+Note that the behaviour of Unix troff will be exactly
+that exhibited by GNU troff if a second argument is never given to the
+.B ss
+request.
+In GNU troff, as in Unix troff, you should always
+follow a sentence with either a newline or two spaces.
+.TP
+.BI .ta\ n1\ n2\|.\|.\|.nn \ T\ r1\ r2\|.\|.\|.\|rn
+Set tabs at positions
+.IR n1 ,
+.IR n2 ,\|.\|.\|.\|,
+.I nn
+and then set tabs at
+.IR nn + r1 ,
+.IR nn + r2 ,\|.\|.\|.\|.\|,
+.IR nn + rn
+and then at
+.IR nn + rn + r1 ,
+.IR nn + rn + r2 ,\|.\|.\|.\|,
+.IR nn + rn + rn ,
+and so on.
+For example,
+.RS
+.IP
+.B
+\&.ta T .5i
+.LP
+will set tabs every half an inch.
+.RE
+.SS New number registers
+The following read-only registers are available:
+.TP
+.B \en[.C]
+1 if compatibility mode is in effect, 0 otherwise.
+.TP
+.B \en[.cdp]
+The depth of the last character added to the current environment.
+It is positive if the character extends below the baseline.
+.TP
+.B \en[.ce]
+The number of lines remaining to be centered, as set by the
+.B ce
+request.
+.TP
+.B \en[.cht]
+The height of the last character added to the current environment.
+It is positive if the character extends above the baseline.
+.TP
+.B \en[.csk]
+The skew of the last character added to the current environment.
+The
+.I skew
+of a character is how far to the right of the center of a character
+the center of an accent over that character should be placed.
+.TP
+.B \en[.ev]
+The name or number of the current environment.
+This is a string-valued register.
+.TP
+.B \en[.fam]
+The current font family.
+This is a string-valued register.
+.TP
+.B \en[.fp]
+The number of the next free font position.
+.TP
+.B \en[.g]
+Always 1.
+Macros should use this to determine whether they are running
+under GNU troff.
+.TP
+.B \en[.hla]
+The current hyphenation language as set by the
+.B hla
+request.
+.TP
+.B \en[.hlc]
+The number of immediately preceding consecutive hyphenated lines.
+.TP
+.B \en[.hlm]
+The maximum allowed number of consecutive hyphenated lines, as set by the
+.B hlm
+request.
+.TP
+.B \en[.hy]
+The current hyphenation flags (as set by the
+.B hy
+request.)
+.TP
+.B \en[.hym]
+The current hyphenation margin (as set by the
+.B hym
+request.)
+.TP
+.B \en[.hys]
+The current hyphenation space (as set by the
+.B hys
+request.)
+.TP
+.B \en[.in]
+The indent that applies to the current output line.
+.TP
+.B \en[.kern]
+.B 1
+if pairwise kerning is enabled,
+.B 0
+otherwise.
+.TP
+.B \en[.lg]
+The current ligature mode (as set by the
+.B lg
+request.)
+.TP
+.B \en[.ll]
+The line length that applies to the current output line.
+.TP
+.B \en[.lt]
+The title length as set by the
+.B lt
+request.
+.TP
+.B \en[.ne]
+The amount of space that was needed in the last
+.B ne
+request that caused a trap to be sprung.
+Useful in conjunction with the
+.B \en[.trunc]
+register.
+.TP
+.B \en[.pn]
+The number of the next page:
+either the value set by a
+.B pn
+request, or the number of the current page plus 1.
+.TP
+.B \en[.ps]
+The current pointsize in scaled points.
+.TP
+.B \en[.psr]
+The last-requested pointsize in scaled points.
+.TP
+.B \en[.rj]
+The number of lines to be right-justified as set by the
+.B rj
+request.
+.TP
+.B \en[.sr]
+The last requested pointsize in points as a decimal fraction.
+This is a string-valued register.
+.TP
+.B \en[.tabs]
+A string representation of the current tab settings suitable for use as
+an argument to the
+.B ta
+request.
+.TP
+.B \en[.trunc]
+The amount of vertical space truncated by the most recently sprung
+vertical position trap, or,
+if the trap was sprung by a
+.B ne
+request,
+minus the amount of vertical motion produced by the
+.B ne
+request.
+In other words, at the point a trap is sprung, it represents the difference
+of what the vertical position would have been but for the trap,
+and what the vertical position actually is.
+Useful in conjunction with the
+.B \en[.ne]
+register.
+.TP
+.B \en[.ss]
+.TQ
+.B \en[.sss]
+These give the values of the parameters set by the
+first and second arguments of the
+.B ss
+request.
+.TP
+.B \en[.vpt]
+1 if vertical position traps are enabled, 0 otherwise.
+.TP
+.B \en[.warn]
+The sum of the numbers associated with each of the currently enabled
+warnings.
+The number associated with each warning is listed in the `Warnings'
+subsection.
+.TP
+.B \en(.x
+The major version number.
+For example, if the version number is
+.B 1.03
+then
+.B \en(.x
+will contain
+.BR 1 .
+.TP
+.B \en(.y
+The minor version number.
+For example, if the version number is
+.B 1.03
+then
+.B \en(.y
+will contain
+.BR 03 .
+.LP
+The following registers are set by the
+.B \ew
+escape sequence:
+.TP
+.B \en[rst]
+.TQ
+.B \en[rsb]
+Like the
+.B st
+and
+.B sb
+registers, but takes account of the heights and depths of characters.
+.TP
+.B \en[ssc]
+The amount of horizontal space (possibly negative) that should
+be added to the last character before a subscript.
+.TP
+.B \en[skw]
+How far to right of the center of the last character
+in the
+.B \ew
+argument,
+the center of an accent from a roman font should be placed over that character.
+.LP
+The following read/write number registers are available:
+.TP
+.B \en[systat]
+The return value of the system() function executed by the last
+.B sy
+request.
+.TP
+.B \en[slimit]
+If greater than 0, the maximum number of objects on the input stack.
+If less than or equal to 0, there is no limit on the number of objects
+on the input stack. With no limit, recursion can continue until
+virtual memory is exhausted.
+.SS Miscellaneous
+.LP
+Fonts not listed in the
+.SM DESC
+file are automatically mounted on the next available font position
+when they are referenced.
+If a font is to be mounted explicitly with the
+.B fp
+request on an unused font position,
+it should be mounted on the first unused font position,
+which can be found in the
+.B \en[.fp]
+register;
+although
+.B troff
+does not enforce this strictly,
+it will not allow a font to be mounted at a position whose number is much
+greater than that of any currently used position.
+.LP
+Interpolating a string does not hide existing macro arguments.
+Thus in a macro, a more efficient way of doing
+.IP
+.BI . xx\ \e\e$@
+.LP
+is
+.IP
+.BI \e\e*[ xx ]\e\e
+.LP
+If the font description file contains pairwise kerning information,
+characters from that font will be kerned.
+Kerning between two characters can be inhibited by placing a
+.B \e&
+between them.
+.LP
+In a string comparison in a condition,
+characters that appear at different input levels
+to the first delimiter character will not be recognised
+as the second or third delimiters.
+This applies also to the
+.B tl
+request.
+In a
+.B \ew
+escape sequence,
+a character that appears at a different input level to
+the starting delimiter character will not be recognised
+as the closing delimiter character.
+When decoding a macro argument that is delimited
+by double quotes, a character that appears at a different
+input level to the starting delimiter character will not
+be recognised as the closing delimiter character.
+The implementation of
+.B \e$@
+ensures that the double quotes surrounding an argument
+will appear the same input level, which will be different
+to the input level of the argument itself.
+In a long escape name
+.B ]
+will not be recognized as a closing delimiter except
+when it occurs at the same input level as the opening
+.BR ] .
+In compatibility mode, no attention is paid to the input-level.
+.LP
+There are some new types of condition:
+.TP
+.BI .if\ r xxx
+True if there is a number register named
+.IR xxx .
+.TP
+.BI .if\ d xxx
+True if there is a string, macro, diversion, or request named
+.IR xxx .
+.TP
+.BI .if\ c ch
+True if there is a character
+.IR ch
+available;
+.I ch
+is either an
+.SM ASCII
+character
+or a special character
+.BI \e( xx
+or
+.BI \e[ xxx ]\fR;
+the condition will also be true if
+.I ch
+has been defined by the
+.B char
+request.
+.SS Warnings
+The warnings that can be given by
+.B troff
+are divided into the following categories.
+The name associated with each warning is used by the
+.B \-w
+and
+.B \-W
+options;
+the number is used by the
+.B warn
+request, and by the
+.B .warn
+register.
+.nr x \w'\fBright-brace'+1n+\w'0000'u
+.ta \nxuR
+.TP \nxu+3n
+.BR char \t1
+Non-existent characters.
+This is enabled by default.
+.TP
+.BR number \t2
+Invalid numeric expressions.
+This is enabled by default.
+.TP
+.BR break \t4
+In fill mode, lines which could not be broken so that their length was
+less than the line length.
+This is enabled by default.
+.TP
+.BR delim \t8
+Missing or mismatched closing delimiters.
+.TP
+.BR el \t16
+Use of the
+.B el
+request with no matching
+.B ie
+request.
+.TP
+.BR scale \t32
+Meaningless scaling indicators.
+.TP
+.BR range \t64
+Out of range arguments.
+.TP
+.BR syntax \t128
+Dubious syntax in numeric expressions.
+.TP
+.BR di \t256
+Use of
+.B di
+or
+.B da
+without an argument when there is no current diversion.
+.TP
+.BR mac \t512
+Use of undefined strings, macros and diversions.
+When an undefined string, macro or diversion is used,
+that string is automatically defined as empty.
+So, in most cases, at most one warning will be given for
+each name.
+.TP
+.BR reg \t1024
+Use of undefined number registers.
+When an undefined number register is used,
+that register is automatically defined to have a value of 0.
+a definition is automatically made with a value of 0.
+So, in most cases, at most one warning will be given for
+use of a particular name.
+.TP
+.BR tab \t2048
+Inappropriate use of a tab character.
+Either use of a tab character where a number was expected,
+or use of tab character in an unquoted macro argument.
+.TP
+.BR right-brace \t4096
+Use of
+.B \e}
+where a number was expected.
+.TP
+.BR missing \t8192
+Requests that are missing non-optional arguments.
+.TP
+.BR input \t16384
+Illegal input characters.
+.TP
+.BR escape \t32768
+Unrecognized escape sequences.
+When an unrecognized escape sequence is encountered,
+the escape character is ignored.
+.TP
+.BR space \t65536
+Missing space between a request or macro and its argument.
+This warning will be given
+when an undefined name longer than two characters is encountered,
+and the first two characters of the name make a defined name.
+The request or macro will not be invoked.
+When this warning is given, no macro is automatically defined.
+This is enabled by default.
+This warning will never occur in compatibility mode.
+.TP
+.BR font \t131072
+Non-existent fonts.
+This is enabled by default.
+.TP
+.BR ig \t262144
+Illegal escapes in text ignored with the
+.B ig
+request.
+These are conditions that are errors when they do not occur
+in ignored text.
+.LP
+There are also names that can be used to refer to groups of warnings:
+.TP
+.B all
+All warnings except
+.BR di ,
+.B mac
+and
+.BR reg .
+It is intended that this covers all warnings
+that are useful with traditional macro packages.
+.TP
+.B w
+All warnings.
+.SS Incompatibilities
+.LP
+Long names cause some incompatibilities.
+Unix troff will interpret
+.IP
+.B
+\&.dsabcd
+.LP
+as defining a string
+.B ab
+with contents
+.BR cd .
+Normally, GNU troff will interpret this as a call of a macro named
+.BR dsabcd .
+Also Unix troff will interpret
+.B \e*[
+or
+.B \en[
+as references to a string or number register called
+.BR [ .
+In GNU troff, however, this will normally be interpreted as the start
+of a long name.
+In
+.I compatibility mode
+GNU troff will interpret these things in the traditional way.
+In compatibility mode, however, long names are not recognised.
+Compatibility mode can be turned on with the
+.B \-C
+command line option, and turned on or off with the
+.B cp
+request.
+The number register
+.B \en(.C
+is 1 if compatibility mode is on, 0 otherwise.
+.LP
+GNU troff
+does not allow the use of the escape sequences
+.BR \\e\e|\e^\e&\e}\e{\e (space) \e'\e`\e-\e_\e!\e%\ec
+in names of strings, macros, diversions, number registers,
+fonts or environments; Unix troff does.
+The
+.B \eA
+escape sequence may be helpful in avoiding use of these
+escape sequences in names.
+.LP
+Fractional pointsizes cause one noteworthy incompatibility.
+In Unix troff the
+.B ps
+request ignores scale indicators and so
+.IP
+.B .ps\ 10u
+.LP
+will set the pointsize to 10 points, whereas in
+GNU troff it will set the pointsize to 10 scaled points.
+.LP
+In GNU troff there is a fundamental difference between unformatted,
+input characters, and formatted, output characters.
+Everything that affects how an output character
+will be output is stored with the character; once an output
+character has been constructed it is unaffected by any subsequent
+requests that are executed, including
+.BR bd ,
+.BR cs ,
+.BR tkf ,
+.BR tr ,
+or
+.B fp
+requests.
+Normally output characters are constructed from input
+characters at the moment immediately before the character
+is added to the current output line.
+Macros, diversions and strings are all, in fact, the same type
+of object; they contain lists of input characters and output
+characters in any combination.
+An output character does not behave like an input character
+for the purposes of macro processing; it does not inherit any
+of the special properties that the input character from which it
+was constructed might have had.
+For example,
+.IP
+.nf
+.ft B
+\&.di x
+\e\e\e\e
+\&.br
+\&.di
+\&.x
+.ft
+.fi
+.LP
+will print
+.B \e\e
+in GNU troff;
+each pair of input
+.BR \e s
+is turned into one output
+.B \e
+and the resulting output
+.BR \e s
+are not interpreted as escape characters when they are reread.
+Unix troff would interpret them as escape characters
+when they were reread and would end up printing one
+.BR \e .
+The correct way to obtain a printable
+.B \e
+is to use the
+.B \ee
+escape sequence: this will always print a single instance of the
+current escape character, regardless of whether or not it is used in a
+diversion; it will also work in both GNU troff and Unix troff.
+If you wish for some reason to store in a diversion an escape
+sequence that will be interpreted when the diversion is reread,
+you can either use the traditional
+.B \e!
+transparent output facility, or, if this is unsuitable, the new
+.B \e?
+escape sequence.
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+.TP
+.SM
+.B GROFF_TMAC_PATH
+A colon separated list of directories in which to search for
+macro files.
+.TP
+.SM
+.B GROFF_TYPESETTER
+Default device.
+.TP
+.SM
+.B GROFF_FONT_PATH
+A colon separated list of directories in which to search for the
+.BI dev name
+directory.
+.B troff
+will search in directories given in the
+.B \-F
+option before these, and in standard directories
+.RB ( @FONTPATH@ )
+after these.
+.SH FILES
+.Tp \w'@FONTDIR@/devname/DESC'u+3n
+.B @MACRODIR@/troffrc
+Initialization file
+.TP
+.BI @MACRODIR@/tmac. name
+Macro files
+.TP
+.BI @FONTDIR@/dev name /DESC
+Device description file for device
+.IR name .
+.TP
+.BI @FONTDIR@/dev name / F
+Font file for font
+.I F
+of device
+.IR name .
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@)
+.BR @g@tbl (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@pic (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR @g@eqn (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR grops (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR grodvi (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR grotty (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR grohtml (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR deroff (@MAN1EXT@),
+.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@),
+.BR groff_out (@MAN5EXT@),
+.BR groff_char (@MAN7EXT@)
+++ /dev/null
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.\" define a string tx for the TeX logo
-.ie t .ds tx T\h'-.1667m'\v'.224m'E\v'-.224m'\h'-.125m'X
-.el .ds tx TeX
-.de TQ
-.br
-.ns
-.TP \\$1
-..
-.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
-.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
-.de Tp
-.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
-.el .TP "\\$1"
-..
-.\" The BSD man macros can't handle " in arguments to font change macros,
-.\" so use \(ts instead of ".
-.tr \(ts"
-.TH @G@TROFF 1 "@MDATE@" "Groff Version @VERSION@"
-.SH NAME
-@g@troff \- format documents
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nr a \n(.j
-.ad l
-.nr i \n(.i
-.in +\w'\fB@g@troff 'u
-.ti \niu
-.B @g@troff
-.de OP
-.ie \\n(.$-1 .RI "[\ \fB\\$1\fP" "\\$2" "\ ]"
-.el .RB "[\ " "\\$1" "\ ]"
-..
-.OP \-abivzCER
-.OP \-w name
-.OP \-W name
-.OP \-d cs
-.OP \-f fam
-.OP \-m name
-.OP \-n num
-.OP \-o list
-.OP \-r cn
-.OP \-T name
-.OP \-F dir
-.OP \-M dir
-.RI "[\ " files\|.\|.\|. "\ ]"
-.br
-.ad \na
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page describes the GNU version of
-.BR troff ,
-which is part of the groff document formatting system.
-It is highly compatible with Unix troff.
-Usually it should be invoked using the groff command, which will
-also run preprocessors and postprocessors in the appropriate
-order and with the appropriate options.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP \w'\-dname=s'u+2n
-.B \-a
-Generate an
-.SM ASCII
-approximation of the typeset output.
-.TP
-.B \-b
-Print a backtrace with each warning or error message. This backtrace
-should help track down the cause of the error. The line numbers given
-in the backtrace may not always correct: troff's idea of line numbers
-gets confused by
-.B as
-or
-.B am
-requests.
-.TP
-.B \-i
-Read the standard input after all the named input files have been
-processed.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print the version number.
-.TP
-.BI \-w name
-Enable warning
-.IR name .
-Available warnings are described in
-the Warnings subsection below.
-Multiple
-.B \-w
-options are allowed.
-.TP
-.BI \-W name
-Inhibit warning
-.IR name .
-Multiple
-.B \-W
-options are allowed.
-.TP
-.B \-E
-Inhibit all error messages.
-.TP
-.B \-z
-Suppress formatted output.
-.TP
-.B \-C
-Enable compatibility mode.
-.TP
-.BI \-d cs
-.TQ
-.BI \-d name = s
-Define
-.I c
-or
-.I name
-to be a string
-.IR s ;
-.I c
-must be a one letter name.
-.TP
-.BI \-f fam
-Use
-.I fam
-as the default font family.
-.TP
-.BI \-m name
-Read in the file
-.BI tmac. name\fR.
-Normally this will be searched for in @MACRODIR@.
-.TP
-.B \-R
-Don't load
-.BR troffrc .
-.TP
-.BI \-n num
-Number the first page
-.IR num .
-.TP
-.BI \-o list
-Output only pages in
-.IR list ,
-which is a comma-separated list of page ranges;
-.I n
-means print page
-.IR n ,
-.IB m \- n
-means print every page between
-.I m
-and
-.IR n ,
-.BI \- n
-means print every page up to
-.IR n ,
-.IB n \-
-means print every page from
-.IR n .
-.B Troff
-will exit after printing the last page in the list.
-.TP
-.BI \-r cn
-.TQ
-.BI \-r name = n
-Set number register
-.I c
-or
-.I name
-to
-.IR n ;
-.I c
-must be a one character name;
-.I n
-can be any troff numeric expression.
-.TP
-.BI \-T name
-Prepare output for device
-.IR name ,
-rather than the default
-.BR @DEVICE@ .
-.TP
-.BI \-F dir
-Search
-.I dir
-for subdirectories
-.BI dev name
-.RI ( name
-is the name of the device)
-for the
-.B DESC
-file and font files before the normal
-.BR @FONTDIR@ .
-.TP
-.BI \-M dir
-Search directory
-.I dir
-for macro files before the normal
-.BR @MACRODIR@ .
-.SH USAGE
-Only the features not in Unix troff are described here.
-.SS Long names
-The names of number registers, fonts, strings/macros/diversions,
-special characters can be of any length. In escape sequences, where
-you can use
-.BI ( xx
-for a two character name, you can use
-.BI [ xxx ]
-for a name of arbitrary length:
-.TP
-.BI \e[ xxx ]
-Print the special character called
-.IR xxx .
-.TP
-.BI \ef[ xxx ]
-Set font
-.IR xxx .
-.TP
-.BI \e*[ xxx ]
-Interpolate string
-.IR xxx .
-.TP
-.BI \en[ xxx ]
-Interpolate number register
-.IR xxx .
-.SS Fractional pointsizes
-A
-.I
-scaled point
-is equal to 1/sizescale
-points, where
-sizescale is specified in the
-.B DESC
-file (1 by default.)
-There is a new scale indicator
-.B z
-which has the effect of multiplying by sizescale.
-Requests and escape sequences in troff
-interpret arguments that represent a pointsize as being in units
-of scaled points, but they evaluate each such argument
-using a default scale indicator of
-.BR z .
-Arguments treated in this way are
-the argument to the
-.B ps
-request,
-the third argument to the
-.B cs
-request,
-the second and fourth arguments to the
-.B tkf
-request,
-the argument to the
-.B \eH
-escape sequence,
-and those variants of the
-.B \es
-escape sequence that take a numeric expression as their argument.
-.LP
-For example, suppose sizescale is 1000;
-then a scaled point will be equivalent to a millipoint;
-the request
-.B .ps 10.25
-is equivalent to
-.B .ps 10.25z
-and so sets the pointsize to 10250 scaled points,
-which is equal to 10.25 points.
-.LP
-The number register
-.B \en(.s
-returns the pointsize in points as decimal fraction.
-There is also a new number register
-.B \en[.ps]
-that returns the pointsize in scaled points.
-.LP
-It would make no sense to use the
-.B z
-scale indicator in a numeric expression
-whose default scale indicator was neither
-.B u
-nor
-.BR z ,
-and so
-.B troff
-disallows this.
-Similarly it would make no sense to use a scaling indicator
-other than
-.B z
-or
-.B u
-in a numeric expression whose default scale indicator was
-.BR z ,
-and so
-.B troff
-disallows this as well.
-.LP
-There is also new scale indicator
-.B s
-which multiplies by the number of units in a scaled point.
-So, for example,
-.B \en[.ps]s
-is equal to
-.BR 1m .
-Be sure not to confuse the
-.B s
-and
-.B z
-scale indicators.
-.SS Numeric expressions
-.LP
-Spaces are permitted in a number expression within parentheses.
-.LP
-.B M
-indicates a scale of 100ths of an em.
-.TP
-.IB e1 >? e2
-The maximum of
-.I e1
-and
-.IR e2 .
-.TP
-.IB e1 <? e2
-The minimum of
-.I e1
-and
-.IR e2 .
-.TP
-.BI ( c ; e )
-Evaluate
-.I e
-using
-.I c
-as the default scaling indicator.
-If
-.I c
-is missing, ignore scaling indicators in the evaluation of
-.IR e .
-.SS New escape sequences
-.TP
-.BI \eA' anything '
-This expands to
-.B 1
-or
-.B 0
-according as
-.I anything
-is or is not acceptable as the name of a string, macro, diversion,
-number register, environment or font.
-It will return
-.B 0
-if
-.I anything
-is empty.
-This is useful if you want to lookup user input in some sort of
-associative table.
-.TP
-.BI \eC' xxx '
-Typeset character named
-.IR xxx .
-Normally it is more convenient to use
-.BI \e[ xxx ]\fR.
-But
-.B \eC
-has the advantage that it is compatible with recent versions of
-.SM UNIX
-and is available in compatibility mode.
-.TP
-.B \eE
-This is equivalent to an escape character,
-but it's not interpreted in copy-mode.
-For example, strings to start and end superscripting could be defined
-like this:
-.RS
-.IP
-\&.ds { \ev'\-.3m'\es'\eEn[.s]*6u/10u'
-.br
-\&.ds } \es0\ev'.3m'
-.LP
-The use of
-.B \eE
-ensures that these definitions will work even if
-.B \e*{
-gets interpreted in copy-mode
-(for example, by being used in a macro argument.)
-.RE
-.TP
-.BI \eN' n '
-Typeset the character with code
-.I n
-in the current font.
-.I n
-can be any integer.
-Most devices only have characters with codes between 0 and 255.
-If the current font does not contain a character with that code,
-special fonts will
-.I not
-be searched.
-The
-.B \eN
-escape sequence can be conveniently used on conjunction with the
-.B char
-request:
-.RS
-.IP
-.B
-\&.char \e[phone] \ef(ZD\eN'37'
-.RE
-.IP
-The code of each character is given in the fourth column in the font
-description file after the
-.B charset
-command.
-It is possible to include unnamed characters in the font description
-file by using a name of
-.BR \-\-\- ;
-the
-.B \eN
-escape sequence is the only way to use these.
-.TP
-.BI \eR' name\ \(+-n '
-This has the same effect as
-.RS
-.IP
-.BI .nr\ name\ \(+-n
-.RE
-.TP
-.BI \es( nn
-.TQ
-.BI \es\(+-( nn
-Set the point size to
-.I nn
-points;
-.I nn
-must be exactly two digits.
-.TP
-.BI \es[\(+- n ]
-.TQ
-.BI \es\(+-[ n ]
-.TQ
-.BI \es'\(+- n '
-.TQ
-.BI \es\(+-' n '
-Set the point size to
-.I n
-scaled points;
-.I n
-is a numeric expression with a default scale indicator of
-.BR z .
-.TP
-.BI \eV x
-.TQ
-.BI \eV( xx
-.TQ
-.BI \eV[ xxx ]
-Interpolate the contents of the environment variable
-.I xxx ,
-as returned by
-.BR getenv (3).
-.B \eV
-is interpreted in copy-mode.
-.TP
-.BI \eY x
-.TQ
-.BI \eY( xx
-.TQ
-.BI \eY[ xxx ]
-This is approximately equivalent to
-.BI \eX'\e*[ xxx ]'\fR.
-However the contents of the string or macro
-.I xxx
-are not interpreted;
-also it is permitted for
-.I xxx
-to have been defined as a macro and thus contain newlines
-(it is not permitted for the argument to
-.B \eX
-to contain newlines).
-The inclusion of newlines requires an extension to the Unix troff output
-format, and will confuse drivers that do not know about this
-extension.
-.TP
-.BI \eZ' anything '
-Print anything and then restore the horizontal and vertical
-position;
-.I anything
-may not contain tabs or leaders.
-.TP
-.B \e$0
-The name by which the current macro was invoked.
-The
-.B als
-request can make a macro have more than one name.
-.TP
-.B \e$*
-In a macro, the concatenation of all the arguments separated by spaces.
-.TP
-.B \e$@
-In a macro, the concatenation of all the arguments with each surrounded by
-double quotes, and separated by spaces.
-.TP
-.BI \e$( nn
-.TQ
-.BI \e$[ nnn ]
-In a macro, this gives the
-.IR nn -th
-or
-.IR nnn -th
-argument.
-Macros can have a unlimited number of arguments.
-.TP
-.BI \e? anything \e?
-When used in a diversion, this will transparently embed
-.I anything
-in the diversion.
-.I anything
-is read in copy mode.
-When the diversion is reread,
-.I anything
-will be interpreted.
-.I anything
-may not contain newlines; use
-.B \e!
-if you want to embed newlines in a diversion.
-The escape sequence
-.B \e?
-is also recognised in copy mode and turned into a single internal
-code; it is this code that terminates
-.IR anything .
-Thus
-.RS
-.RS
-.ft B
-.nf
-.ne 15
-\&.nr x 1
-\&.nf
-\&.di d
-\e?\e\e?\e\e\e\e?\e\e\e\e\e\e\e\enx\e\e\e\e?\e\e?\e?
-\&.di
-\&.nr x 2
-\&.di e
-\&.d
-\&.di
-\&.nr x 3
-\&.di f
-\&.e
-\&.di
-\&.nr x 4
-\&.f
-.fi
-.ft
-.RE
-.RE
-.IP
-will print
-.BR 4 .
-.TP
-.B \e/
-This increases the width of the preceding character so that
-the spacing between that character and the following character
-will be correct if the following character is a roman character.
-For example, if an italic f is immediately followed by a roman
-right parenthesis, then in many fonts the top right portion of the f
-will overlap the top left of the right parenthesis producing \fIf\fR)\fR,
-which is ugly.
-Inserting
-.B \e/
-produces
-.ie \n(.g \fIf\/\fR)\fR
-.el \fIf\|\fR)\fR
-and avoids this problem.
-It is a good idea to use this escape sequence whenever an
-italic character is immediately followed by a roman character without any
-intervening space.
-.TP
-.B \e,
-This modifies the spacing of the following character so that the spacing
-between that character and the preceding character will correct if
-the preceding character is a roman character.
-For example, inserting
-.B \e,
-between the parenthesis and the f changes
-\fR(\fIf\fR to
-.ie \n(.g \fR(\,\fIf\fR.
-.el \fR(\^\fIf\fR.
-It is a good idea to use this escape sequence whenever a
-roman character is immediately followed by an italic character without any
-intervening space.
-.TP
-.B \e)
-Like
-.B \e&
-except that it behaves like a character declared with the
-.B cflags
-request to be transparent for the purposes of end of sentence recognition.
-.TP
-.B \e~
-This produces an unbreakable space that stretches like a normal inter-word
-space when a line is adjusted.
-.TP
-.B \e#
-Everything up to and including the next newline is ignored.
-This is interpreted in copy mode.
-This is like
-.B \e"
-except that
-.B \e"
-does not ignore the terminating newline.
-.SS New requests
-.TP
-.BI .aln\ xx\ yy
-Create an alias
-.I xx
-for number register object named
-.IR yy .
-The new name and the old name will be exactly equivalent.
-If
-.I yy
-is undefined, a warning of type
-.B reg
-will be generated, and the request will be ignored.
-.TP
-.BI .als\ xx\ yy
-Create an alias
-.I xx
-for request, string, macro, or diversion object named
-.IR yy .
-The new name and the old name will be exactly equivalent (it is similar to a
-hard rather than a soft link).
-If
-.I yy
-is undefined, a warning of type
-.B mac
-will be generated, and the request will be ignored.
-The
-.BR de ,
-.BR am ,
-.BR di ,
-.BR da ,
-.BR ds ,
-and
-.B as
-requests only create a new object if the name of the macro, diversion
-or string diversion is currently undefined or if it is defined to be a
-request; normally they modify the value of an existing object.
-.TP
-.BI .asciify\ xx
-This request only exists in order to make it possible
-to make certain gross hacks work with GNU troff.
-It `unformats' the diversion
-.I xx
-in such a way that
-.SM ASCII
-characters that were formatted and diverted into
-.I xx
-will be treated like ordinary input characters when
-.I xx
-is reread.
-For example, this
-.RS
-.IP
-.ne 7v+\n(.Vu
-.ft B
-.nf
-.ss 24
-\&.tr @.
-\&.di x
-\&@nr\e n\e 1
-\&.br
-\&.di
-\&.tr @@
-\&.asciify x
-\&.x
-.ss 12
-.fi
-.RE
-.IP
-will set register
-.B n
-to 1.
-.TP
-.B .backtrace
-Print a backtrace of the input stack on stderr.
-.TP
-.BI .blm\ xx
-Set the blank line macro to
-.IR xx .
-If there is a blank line macro,
-it will be invoked when a blank line is encountered instead of the usual
-troff behaviour.
-.TP
-.B .break
-Break out of a while loop.
-See also the
-.B while
-and
-.B continue
-requests.
-Be sure not to confuse this with the
-.B br
-request.
-.TP
-.BI .cflags\ n\ c1\ c2\|.\|.\|.
-Characters
-.IR c1 ,
-.IR c2 ,\|.\|.\|.
-have properties determined by
-.IR n ,
-which is ORed from the following:
-.RS
-.TP
-1
-the character ends sentences
-(initially characters
-.B .?!
-have this property);
-.TP
-2
-lines can be broken before the character
-(initially no characters have this property);
-a line will not be broken at a character with this property
-unless the characters on each side both have non-zero
-hyphenation codes.
-.TP
-4
-lines can be broken after the character
-(initially characters
-.B \-\e(hy\e(em
-have this property);
-a line will not be broken at a character with this property
-unless the characters on each side both have non-zero
-hyphenation codes.
-.TP
-8
-the character overlaps horizontally
-(initially characters
-.B \e(ul\e(rn\e(ru
-have this property);
-.TP
-16
-the character overlaps vertically
-(initially character
-.B \e(br
-has this property);
-.TP
-32
-an end of sentence character followed by any number of characters
-with this property will be treated
-as the end of a sentence if followed by a newline or two spaces;
-in other words
-the character is transparent for the purposes of end of sentence
-recognition;
-this is the same as having a zero space factor in \*(tx
-(initially characters
-.B \(ts')]*\e(dg\e(rq
-have this property).
-.RE
-.TP
-.BI .char\ c\ string
-Define character
-.I c
-to be
-.IR string .
-Every time character
-.I c
-needs to be printed,
-.I string
-will be processed in a temporary environment and the result
-will be wrapped up into a single object.
-Compatibility mode will be turned off
-and the escape character will be set to
-.B \e
-while
-.I string
-is being processed.
-Any emboldening, constant spacing or track kerning will be applied
-to this object rather than to individual characters in
-.IR string .
-A character defined by this request can be used just like
-a normal character provided by the output device.
-In particular other characters can be translated to it
-with the
-.B tr
-request;
-it can be made the leader character by the
-.B lc
-request;
-repeated patterns can be drawn with the character using the
-.B \el
-and
-.B \eL
-escape sequences;
-words containing the character can be hyphenated
-correctly, if the
-.B hcode
-request is used to give the character a hyphenation code.
-There is a special anti-recursion feature:
-use of character within the character's definition
-will be handled like normal characters not defined with
-.BR char .
-A character definition can be removed with the
-.B rchar
-request.
-.TP
-.BI .chop\ xx
-Chop the last character off macro, string, or diversion
-.IR xx .
-This is useful for removing the newline from the end of diversions
-that are to be interpolated as strings.
-.TP
-.BI .close\ stream
-Close the stream named
-.IR stream ;
-.I stream
-will no longer be an acceptable argument to the
-.B write
-request.
-See the
-.B open
-request.
-.TP
-.B .continue
-Finish the current iteration of a while loop.
-See also the
-.B while
-and
-.B break
-requests.
-.TP
-.BI .cp\ n
-If
-.I n
-is non-zero or missing, enable compatibility mode, otherwise
-disable it.
-In compatibility mode, long names are not recognised, and the
-incompatibilities caused by long names do not arise.
-.TP
-.BI .do\ xxx
-Interpret
-.I .xxx
-with compatibility mode disabled.
-For example,
-.RS
-.IP
-.B
-\&.do fam T
-.LP
-would have the same effect as
-.IP
-.B
-\&.fam T
-.LP
-except that it would work even if compatibility mode had been enabled.
-Note that the previous compatibility mode is restored before any files
-sourced by
-.I xxx
-are interpreted.
-.RE
-.TP
-.BI .fam\ xx
-Set the current font family to
-.IR xx .
-The current font family is part of the current environment.
-See the description of the
-.B sty
-request for more information on font families.
-.TP
-.BI .fspecial\ f\ s1\ s2\|.\|.\|.
-When the current font is
-.IR f ,
-fonts
-.IR s1 ,
-.IR s2 ,\|.\|.\|.
-will be special, that is, they will searched for characters not in
-the current font.
-Any fonts specified in the
-.B special
-request will be searched after fonts specified in the
-.B fspecial
-request.
-.TP
-.BI .ftr\ f\ g
-Translate font
-.I f
-to
-.IR g .
-Whenever a font named
-.I f
-is referred to in
-.B \ef
-escape sequence,
-or in the
-.BR ft ,
-.BR ul ,
-.BR bd ,
-.BR cs ,
-.BR tkf ,
-.BR special ,
-.BR fspecial ,
-.BR fp ,
-or
-.BR sty
-requests,
-font
-.I g
-will be used.
-If
-.I g
-is missing,
-or equal to
-.I f
-then font
-.I f
-will not be translated.
-.TP
-.BI .hcode \ c1\ code1\ c2\ code2\|.\|.\|.
-Set the hyphenation code of character
-.I c1
-to
-.I code1
-and that of
-.I c2
-to
-.IR code2 .
-A hyphenation code must be a single input
-character (not a special character) other than a digit or a space.
-Initially each lower-case letter has a hyphenation code, which
-is itself, and each upper-case letter has a hyphenation code
-which is the lower case version of itself.
-See also the
-.B hpf
-request.
-.TP
-.BI .hla\ lang
-Set the current hyphenation language to
-.IR lang .
-Hyphenation exceptions specified with the
-.B hw
-request and hyphenation patterns specified with the
-.B hpf
-request are both associated with the current hyphenation language.
-The
-.B hla
-request is usually invoked by the
-.B troffrc
-file.
-.TP
-.BI .hlm\ n
-Set the maximum number of consecutive hyphenated lines to
-.IR n .
-If
-.I n
-is negative, there is no maximum.
-The default value is \-1.
-This value is associated with the current environment.
-Only lines output from an environment count towards the maximum associated
-with that environment.
-Hyphens resulting from
-.B \e%
-are counted; explicit hyphens are not.
-.TP
-.BI .hpf\ file
-Read hyphenation patterns from
-.IR file ;
-this will be searched for in the same way that
-.BI tmac. name
-is searched for when the
-.BI \-m name
-option is specified.
-It should have the same format as the argument to
-the \epatterns primitive in \*(tx;
-the letters appearing in this file are interpreted as hyphenation
-codes.
-A
-.B %
-character in the patterns file introduces a comment that continues
-to the end of the line.
-The set of hyphenation patterns is associated with the current language
-set by the
-.B hla
-request.
-The
-.B hpf
-request
-is usually invoked by the
-.B troffrc
-file.
-.TP
-.BI .hym\ n
-Set the
-.I hyphenation margin
-to
-.IR n :
-when the current adjustment mode is not
-.BR b ,
-the line will not be hyphenated if the line is no more than
-.I n
-short.
-The default hyphenation margin is 0.
-The default scaling indicator for this request is
-.IR m .
-The hyphenation margin is associated with the current environment.
-The current hyphenation margin is available in the
-.B \en[.hym]
-register.
-.TP
-.BI .hys\ n
-Set the
-.I hyphenation space
-to
-.IR n :
-when the current adjustment mode is
-.B b
-don't hyphenate the line if the line can be justified by adding no more than
-.I n
-extra space to each word space.
-The default hyphenation space is 0.
-The default scaling indicator for this request is
-.BR m .
-The hyphenation space is associated with the current environment.
-The current hyphenation space is available in the
-.B \en[.hys]
-register.
-.TP
-.BI .kern\ n
-If
-.I n
-is non-zero or missing, enable pairwise kerning, otherwise disable it.
-.TP
-.BI .mso\ file
-The same as the
-.B so
-request except that
-.I file
-is searched for in the same way that
-.BI tmac. name
-is searched for when the
-.BI \-m name
-option is specified.
-.TP
-.B .nroff
-Make the
-.B n
-built-in condition true
-and the
-.B t
-built-in condition false.
-This can be reversed using the
-.B troff
-request.
-.TP
-.BI .open\ stream\ filename
-Open
-.I filename
-for writing and associate the stream named
-.I stream
-with it.
-See also the
-.B close
-and
-.B write
-requests.
-.TP
-.BI .opena\ stream\ filename
-Like
-.BR open ,
-but if
-.I filename
-exists, append to it instead of truncating it.
-.TP
-.B .pnr
-Print the names and contents of all currently defined number registers
-on stderr.
-.TP
-.BI .pso \ command
-This is behaves like the
-.B so
-request except that input comes from the standard output of
-.IR command .
-.TP
-.B .ptr
-Print the names and positions of all traps (not including input line
-traps and diversion traps) on stderr. Empty slots in the page trap
-list are printed as well, because they can affect the priority of
-subsequently planted traps.
-.TP
-.BI .rchar\ c1\ c2\|.\|.\|.
-Remove the definitions of characters
-.IR c1 ,
-.IR c2 ,\|.\|.\|.
-This undoes the effect of a
-.B char
-request.
-.TP
-.B .rj
-.TQ
-.BI .rj\ n
-Right justify the next
-.I n
-input lines.
-Without an argument right justify the next input line.
-The number of lines to be right justified is available in the
-.B \en[.rj]
-register.
-This implicitly does
-.BR .ce\ 0 .
-The
-.B ce
-request implicitly does
-.BR .rj\ 0 .
-.TP
-.BI .rnn \ xx\ yy
-Rename number register
-.I xx
-to
-.IR yy .
-.TP
-.BI .shc\ c
-Set the soft hyphen character to
-.IR c .
-If
-.I c
-is omitted,
-the soft hyphen character will be set to the default
-.BR \e(hy .
-The soft hyphen character is the character which will be inserted
-when a word is hyphenated at a line break.
-If the soft hyphen character does not exist in the font of the character
-immediately preceding a potential break point,
-then the line will not be broken at that point.
-Neither definitions (specified with the
-.B char
-request)
-nor translations (specified with the
-.B tr
-request)
-are considered when finding the soft hyphen character.
-.TP
-.BI .shift\ n
-In a macro, shift the arguments by
-.I n
-positions:
-argument
-.I i
-becomes argument
-.IR i \- n ;
-arguments 1 to
-.I n
-will no longer be available.
-If
-.I n
-is missing,
-arguments will be shifted by 1.
-Shifting by negative amounts is currently undefined.
-.TP
-.BI .special\ s1\ s2\|.\|.\|.
-Fonts
-.IR s1 ,
-.IR s2 ,
-are special and will be searched for characters not in the
-current font.
-.TP
-.BI .sty\ n\ f
-Associate style
-.I f
-with font position
-.IR n .
-A font position can be associated either with a font or
-with a style.
-The current font is the index of a font position and so is also
-either a font or a style.
-When it is a style, the font that is actually used is the font the
-name of which is the concatenation of the name of the current family
-and the name of the current style.
-For example, if the current font is 1 and font position 1 is
-associated with style
-.B R
-and the current
-font family is
-.BR T ,
-then font
-.BR TR
-will be used.
-If the current font is not a style, then the current family is ignored.
-When the requests
-.BR cs ,
-.BR bd ,
-.BR tkf ,
-.BR uf ,
-or
-.B fspecial
-are applied to a style,
-then they will instead be applied to the member of the
-current family corresponding to that style.
-The default family can be set with the
-.B \-f
-option.
-The styles command in the
-.SM DESC
-file controls which font positions
-(if any) are initially associated with styles rather than fonts.
-.TP
-.BI .tkf\ f\ s1\ n1\ s2\ n2
-Enable track kerning for font
-.IR f .
-When the current font is
-.I f
-the width of every character will be increased by an amount
-between
-.I n1
-and
-.IR n2 ;
-when the current point size is less than or equal to
-.I s1
-the width will be increased by
-.IR n1 ;
-when it is greater than or equal to
-.I s2
-the width will be increased by
-.IR n2 ;
-when the point size is greater than or equal to
-.I s1
-and less than or equal to
-.I s2
-the increase in width is a linear function of the point size.
-.TP
-.BI .trf\ filename
-Transparently output the contents of file
-.IR filename .
-Each line is output as it would be were it preceded by
-.BR \e! ;
-however, the lines are not subject to copy-mode interpretation.
-If the file does not end with a newline, then a newline will
-be added.
-For example, you can define a macro
-.I x
-containing the contents of file
-.IR f ,
-using
-.RS
-.IP
-.BI .di\ x
-.br
-.BI .trf\ f
-.br
-.B .di
-.LP
-Unlike with the
-.B cf
-request,
-the file cannot contain characters such as
-.SM NUL
-that are not legal troff input characters.
-.RE
-.TP
-.B .trnt abcd
-This is the same as the
-.B tr
-request except that the translations do not apply to text that is
-transparently throughput into a diversion with
-.BR \e! .
-For example,
-.RS
-.LP
-.nf
-.ft B
-\&.tr ab
-\&.di x
-\e!.tm a
-\&.di
-\&.x
-.fi
-.ft
-.LP
-will print
-.BR b ;
-if
-.B trnt
-is used instead of
-.B tr
-it will print
-.BR a .
-.RE
-.TP
-.B .troff
-Make the
-.B n
-built-in condition false,
-and the
-.B t
-built-in condition true.
-This undoes the effect of the
-.B nroff
-request.
-.TP
-.BI .vpt\ n
-Enable vertical position traps if
-.I n
-is non-zero, disable them otherwise.
-Vertical position traps are traps set by the
-.B wh
-or
-.B dt
-requests.
-Traps set by the
-.B it
-request are not vertical position traps.
-The parameter that controls whether vertical position traps are enabled
-is global.
-Initially vertical position traps are enabled.
-.TP
-.BI .warn\ n
-Control warnings.
-.I n
-is the sum of the numbers associated with each warning that is to be enabled;
-all other warnings will be disabled.
-The number associated with each warning is listed in the `Warnings' section.
-For example,
-.B .warn 0
-will disable all warnings, and
-.B .warn 1
-will disable all warnings except that about missing characters.
-If
-.I n
-is not given,
-all warnings will be enabled.
-.TP
-.BI .while \ c\ anything
-While condition
-.I c
-is true, accept
-.I anything
-as input;
-.I c
-can be any condition acceptable to an
-.B if
-request;
-.I anything
-can comprise multiple lines if the first line starts with
-.B \e{
-and the last line ends with
-.BR \e} .
-See also the
-.B break
-and
-.B continue
-requests.
-.TP
-.BI .write\ stream\ anything
-Write
-.I anything
-to the stream named
-.IR stream .
-.I stream
-must previously have been the subject of an
-.B open
-request.
-.I anything
-is read in copy mode;
-a leading
-.B \(ts
-will be stripped.
-.SS Extended requests
-.TP
-.BI .cf\ filename
-When used in a diversion, this will embed in the diversion an object which,
-when reread, will cause the contents of
-.I filename
-to be transparently copied through to the output.
-In Unix troff, the
-contents of
-.I filename
-is immediately copied through to the output regardless of whether
-there is a current diversion; this behaviour is so anomalous that it
-must be considered a bug.
-.TP
-.BI .ev\ xx
-If
-.I xx
-is not a number, this will switch to a named environment called
-.IR xx .
-The environment should be popped with a matching
-.B ev
-request without any arguments, just as for numbered environments.
-There is no limit on the number of named environments; they will be
-created the first time that they are referenced.
-.TP
-.BI .fp\ n\ f1\ f2
-The
-.B fp
-request has an optional third argument.
-This argument gives the external name of the font,
-which is used for finding the font description file.
-The second argument gives the internal name of the font
-which is used to refer to the font in troff after it has been mounted.
-If there is no third argument then the internal name will be used
-as the external name.
-This feature allows you to use fonts with long names in compatibility mode.
-.TP
-.BI .ss\ m\ n
-When two arguments are given to the
-.B ss
-request, the second argument gives the
-.IR "sentence space size" .
-If the second argument is not given, the sentence space size
-will be the same as the word space size.
-Like the word space size, the sentence space is in units of
-one twelfth of the spacewidth parameter for the current font.
-Initially both the word space size and the sentence
-space size are 12.
-The sentence space size is used in two circumstances:
-if the end of a sentence occurs at the end of a line in fill mode, then
-both an inter-word space and a sentence space will be added;
-if two spaces follow the end of a sentence in the middle of a line,
-then the second space will be a sentence space.
-Note that the behaviour of Unix troff will be exactly
-that exhibited by GNU troff if a second argument is never given to the
-.B ss
-request.
-In GNU troff, as in Unix troff, you should always
-follow a sentence with either a newline or two spaces.
-.TP
-.BI .ta\ n1\ n2\|.\|.\|.nn \ T\ r1\ r2\|.\|.\|.\|rn
-Set tabs at positions
-.IR n1 ,
-.IR n2 ,\|.\|.\|.\|,
-.I nn
-and then set tabs at
-.IR nn + r1 ,
-.IR nn + r2 ,\|.\|.\|.\|.\|,
-.IR nn + rn
-and then at
-.IR nn + rn + r1 ,
-.IR nn + rn + r2 ,\|.\|.\|.\|,
-.IR nn + rn + rn ,
-and so on.
-For example,
-.RS
-.IP
-.B
-\&.ta T .5i
-.LP
-will set tabs every half an inch.
-.RE
-.SS New number registers
-The following read-only registers are available:
-.TP
-.B \en[.C]
-1 if compatibility mode is in effect, 0 otherwise.
-.TP
-.B \en[.cdp]
-The depth of the last character added to the current environment.
-It is positive if the character extends below the baseline.
-.TP
-.B \en[.ce]
-The number of lines remaining to be centered, as set by the
-.B ce
-request.
-.TP
-.B \en[.cht]
-The height of the last character added to the current environment.
-It is positive if the character extends above the baseline.
-.TP
-.B \en[.csk]
-The skew of the last character added to the current environment.
-The
-.I skew
-of a character is how far to the right of the center of a character
-the center of an accent over that character should be placed.
-.TP
-.B \en[.ev]
-The name or number of the current environment.
-This is a string-valued register.
-.TP
-.B \en[.fam]
-The current font family.
-This is a string-valued register.
-.TP
-.B \en[.fp]
-The number of the next free font position.
-.TP
-.B \en[.g]
-Always 1.
-Macros should use this to determine whether they are running
-under GNU troff.
-.TP
-.B \en[.hla]
-The current hyphenation language as set by the
-.B hla
-request.
-.TP
-.B \en[.hlc]
-The number of immediately preceding consecutive hyphenated lines.
-.TP
-.B \en[.hlm]
-The maximum allowed number of consecutive hyphenated lines, as set by the
-.B hlm
-request.
-.TP
-.B \en[.hy]
-The current hyphenation flags (as set by the
-.B hy
-request.)
-.TP
-.B \en[.hym]
-The current hyphenation margin (as set by the
-.B hym
-request.)
-.TP
-.B \en[.hys]
-The current hyphenation space (as set by the
-.B hys
-request.)
-.TP
-.B \en[.in]
-The indent that applies to the current output line.
-.TP
-.B \en[.kern]
-.B 1
-if pairwise kerning is enabled,
-.B 0
-otherwise.
-.TP
-.B \en[.lg]
-The current ligature mode (as set by the
-.B lg
-request.)
-.TP
-.B \en[.ll]
-The line length that applies to the current output line.
-.TP
-.B \en[.lt]
-The title length as set by the
-.B lt
-request.
-.TP
-.B \en[.ne]
-The amount of space that was needed in the last
-.B ne
-request that caused a trap to be sprung.
-Useful in conjunction with the
-.B \en[.trunc]
-register.
-.TP
-.B \en[.pn]
-The number of the next page:
-either the value set by a
-.B pn
-request, or the number of the current page plus 1.
-.TP
-.B \en[.ps]
-The current pointsize in scaled points.
-.TP
-.B \en[.psr]
-The last-requested pointsize in scaled points.
-.TP
-.B \en[.rj]
-The number of lines to be right-justified as set by the
-.B rj
-request.
-.TP
-.B \en[.sr]
-The last requested pointsize in points as a decimal fraction.
-This is a string-valued register.
-.TP
-.B \en[.tabs]
-A string representation of the current tab settings suitable for use as
-an argument to the
-.B ta
-request.
-.TP
-.B \en[.trunc]
-The amount of vertical space truncated by the most recently sprung
-vertical position trap, or,
-if the trap was sprung by a
-.B ne
-request,
-minus the amount of vertical motion produced by the
-.B ne
-request.
-In other words, at the point a trap is sprung, it represents the difference
-of what the vertical position would have been but for the trap,
-and what the vertical position actually is.
-Useful in conjunction with the
-.B \en[.ne]
-register.
-.TP
-.B \en[.ss]
-.TQ
-.B \en[.sss]
-These give the values of the parameters set by the
-first and second arguments of the
-.B ss
-request.
-.TP
-.B \en[.vpt]
-1 if vertical position traps are enabled, 0 otherwise.
-.TP
-.B \en[.warn]
-The sum of the numbers associated with each of the currently enabled
-warnings.
-The number associated with each warning is listed in the `Warnings'
-subsection.
-.TP
-.B \en(.x
-The major version number.
-For example, if the version number is
-.B 1.03
-then
-.B \en(.x
-will contain
-.BR 1 .
-.TP
-.B \en(.y
-The minor version number.
-For example, if the version number is
-.B 1.03
-then
-.B \en(.y
-will contain
-.BR 03 .
-.LP
-The following registers are set by the
-.B \ew
-escape sequence:
-.TP
-.B \en[rst]
-.TQ
-.B \en[rsb]
-Like the
-.B st
-and
-.B sb
-registers, but takes account of the heights and depths of characters.
-.TP
-.B \en[ssc]
-The amount of horizontal space (possibly negative) that should
-be added to the last character before a subscript.
-.TP
-.B \en[skw]
-How far to right of the center of the last character
-in the
-.B \ew
-argument,
-the center of an accent from a roman font should be placed over that character.
-.LP
-The following read/write number registers are available:
-.TP
-.B \en[systat]
-The return value of the system() function executed by the last
-.B sy
-request.
-.TP
-.B \en[slimit]
-If greater than 0, the maximum number of objects on the input stack.
-If less than or equal to 0, there is no limit on the number of objects
-on the input stack. With no limit, recursion can continue until
-virtual memory is exhausted.
-.SS Miscellaneous
-.LP
-Fonts not listed in the
-.SM DESC
-file are automatically mounted on the next available font position
-when they are referenced.
-If a font is to be mounted explicitly with the
-.B fp
-request on an unused font position,
-it should be mounted on the first unused font position,
-which can be found in the
-.B \en[.fp]
-register;
-although
-.B troff
-does not enforce this strictly,
-it will not allow a font to be mounted at a position whose number is much
-greater than that of any currently used position.
-.LP
-Interpolating a string does not hide existing macro arguments.
-Thus in a macro, a more efficient way of doing
-.IP
-.BI . xx\ \e\e$@
-.LP
-is
-.IP
-.BI \e\e*[ xx ]\e\e
-.LP
-If the font description file contains pairwise kerning information,
-characters from that font will be kerned.
-Kerning between two characters can be inhibited by placing a
-.B \e&
-between them.
-.LP
-In a string comparison in a condition,
-characters that appear at different input levels
-to the first delimiter character will not be recognised
-as the second or third delimiters.
-This applies also to the
-.B tl
-request.
-In a
-.B \ew
-escape sequence,
-a character that appears at a different input level to
-the starting delimiter character will not be recognised
-as the closing delimiter character.
-When decoding a macro argument that is delimited
-by double quotes, a character that appears at a different
-input level to the starting delimiter character will not
-be recognised as the closing delimiter character.
-The implementation of
-.B \e$@
-ensures that the double quotes surrounding an argument
-will appear the same input level, which will be different
-to the input level of the argument itself.
-In a long escape name
-.B ]
-will not be recognized as a closing delimiter except
-when it occurs at the same input level as the opening
-.BR ] .
-In compatibility mode, no attention is paid to the input-level.
-.LP
-There are some new types of condition:
-.TP
-.BI .if\ r xxx
-True if there is a number register named
-.IR xxx .
-.TP
-.BI .if\ d xxx
-True if there is a string, macro, diversion, or request named
-.IR xxx .
-.TP
-.BI .if\ c ch
-True if there is a character
-.IR ch
-available;
-.I ch
-is either an
-.SM ASCII
-character
-or a special character
-.BI \e( xx
-or
-.BI \e[ xxx ]\fR;
-the condition will also be true if
-.I ch
-has been defined by the
-.B char
-request.
-.SS Warnings
-The warnings that can be given by
-.B troff
-are divided into the following categories.
-The name associated with each warning is used by the
-.B \-w
-and
-.B \-W
-options;
-the number is used by the
-.B warn
-request, and by the
-.B .warn
-register.
-.nr x \w'\fBright-brace'+1n+\w'0000'u
-.ta \nxuR
-.TP \nxu+3n
-.BR char \t1
-Non-existent characters.
-This is enabled by default.
-.TP
-.BR number \t2
-Invalid numeric expressions.
-This is enabled by default.
-.TP
-.BR break \t4
-In fill mode, lines which could not be broken so that their length was
-less than the line length.
-This is enabled by default.
-.TP
-.BR delim \t8
-Missing or mismatched closing delimiters.
-.TP
-.BR el \t16
-Use of the
-.B el
-request with no matching
-.B ie
-request.
-.TP
-.BR scale \t32
-Meaningless scaling indicators.
-.TP
-.BR range \t64
-Out of range arguments.
-.TP
-.BR syntax \t128
-Dubious syntax in numeric expressions.
-.TP
-.BR di \t256
-Use of
-.B di
-or
-.B da
-without an argument when there is no current diversion.
-.TP
-.BR mac \t512
-Use of undefined strings, macros and diversions.
-When an undefined string, macro or diversion is used,
-that string is automatically defined as empty.
-So, in most cases, at most one warning will be given for
-each name.
-.TP
-.BR reg \t1024
-Use of undefined number registers.
-When an undefined number register is used,
-that register is automatically defined to have a value of 0.
-a definition is automatically made with a value of 0.
-So, in most cases, at most one warning will be given for
-use of a particular name.
-.TP
-.BR tab \t2048
-Inappropriate use of a tab character.
-Either use of a tab character where a number was expected,
-or use of tab character in an unquoted macro argument.
-.TP
-.BR right-brace \t4096
-Use of
-.B \e}
-where a number was expected.
-.TP
-.BR missing \t8192
-Requests that are missing non-optional arguments.
-.TP
-.BR input \t16384
-Illegal input characters.
-.TP
-.BR escape \t32768
-Unrecognized escape sequences.
-When an unrecognized escape sequence is encountered,
-the escape character is ignored.
-.TP
-.BR space \t65536
-Missing space between a request or macro and its argument.
-This warning will be given
-when an undefined name longer than two characters is encountered,
-and the first two characters of the name make a defined name.
-The request or macro will not be invoked.
-When this warning is given, no macro is automatically defined.
-This is enabled by default.
-This warning will never occur in compatibility mode.
-.TP
-.BR font \t131072
-Non-existent fonts.
-This is enabled by default.
-.TP
-.BR ig \t262144
-Illegal escapes in text ignored with the
-.B ig
-request.
-These are conditions that are errors when they do not occur
-in ignored text.
-.LP
-There are also names that can be used to refer to groups of warnings:
-.TP
-.B all
-All warnings except
-.BR di ,
-.B mac
-and
-.BR reg .
-It is intended that this covers all warnings
-that are useful with traditional macro packages.
-.TP
-.B w
-All warnings.
-.SS Incompatibilities
-.LP
-Long names cause some incompatibilities.
-Unix troff will interpret
-.IP
-.B
-\&.dsabcd
-.LP
-as defining a string
-.B ab
-with contents
-.BR cd .
-Normally, GNU troff will interpret this as a call of a macro named
-.BR dsabcd .
-Also Unix troff will interpret
-.B \e*[
-or
-.B \en[
-as references to a string or number register called
-.BR [ .
-In GNU troff, however, this will normally be interpreted as the start
-of a long name.
-In
-.I compatibility mode
-GNU troff will interpret these things in the traditional way.
-In compatibility mode, however, long names are not recognised.
-Compatibility mode can be turned on with the
-.B \-C
-command line option, and turned on or off with the
-.B cp
-request.
-The number register
-.B \en(.C
-is 1 if compatibility mode is on, 0 otherwise.
-.LP
-GNU troff
-does not allow the use of the escape sequences
-.BR \\e\e|\e^\e&\e}\e{\e (space) \e'\e`\e-\e_\e!\e%\ec
-in names of strings, macros, diversions, number registers,
-fonts or environments; Unix troff does.
-The
-.B \eA
-escape sequence may be helpful in avoiding use of these
-escape sequences in names.
-.LP
-Fractional pointsizes cause one noteworthy incompatibility.
-In Unix troff the
-.B ps
-request ignores scale indicators and so
-.IP
-.B .ps\ 10u
-.LP
-will set the pointsize to 10 points, whereas in
-GNU troff it will set the pointsize to 10 scaled points.
-.LP
-In GNU troff there is a fundamental difference between unformatted,
-input characters, and formatted, output characters.
-Everything that affects how an output character
-will be output is stored with the character; once an output
-character has been constructed it is unaffected by any subsequent
-requests that are executed, including
-.BR bd ,
-.BR cs ,
-.BR tkf ,
-.BR tr ,
-or
-.B fp
-requests.
-Normally output characters are constructed from input
-characters at the moment immediately before the character
-is added to the current output line.
-Macros, diversions and strings are all, in fact, the same type
-of object; they contain lists of input characters and output
-characters in any combination.
-An output character does not behave like an input character
-for the purposes of macro processing; it does not inherit any
-of the special properties that the input character from which it
-was constructed might have had.
-For example,
-.IP
-.nf
-.ft B
-\&.di x
-\e\e\e\e
-\&.br
-\&.di
-\&.x
-.ft
-.fi
-.LP
-will print
-.B \e\e
-in GNU troff;
-each pair of input
-.BR \e s
-is turned into one output
-.B \e
-and the resulting output
-.BR \e s
-are not interpreted as escape characters when they are reread.
-Unix troff would interpret them as escape characters
-when they were reread and would end up printing one
-.BR \e .
-The correct way to obtain a printable
-.B \e
-is to use the
-.B \ee
-escape sequence: this will always print a single instance of the
-current escape character, regardless of whether or not it is used in a
-diversion; it will also work in both GNU troff and Unix troff.
-If you wish for some reason to store in a diversion an escape
-sequence that will be interpreted when the diversion is reread,
-you can either use the traditional
-.B \e!
-transparent output facility, or, if this is unsuitable, the new
-.B \e?
-escape sequence.
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-.TP
-.SM
-.B GROFF_TMAC_PATH
-A colon separated list of directories in which to search for
-macro files.
-.TP
-.SM
-.B GROFF_TYPESETTER
-Default device.
-.TP
-.SM
-.B GROFF_FONT_PATH
-A colon separated list of directories in which to search for the
-.BI dev name
-directory.
-.B troff
-will search in directories given in the
-.B \-F
-option before these, and in standard directories
-.RB ( @FONTPATH@ )
-after these.
-.SH FILES
-.Tp \w'@FONTDIR@/devname/DESC'u+3n
-.B @MACRODIR@/troffrc
-Initialization file
-.TP
-.BI @MACRODIR@/tmac. name
-Macro files
-.TP
-.BI @FONTDIR@/dev name /DESC
-Device description file for device
-.IR name .
-.TP
-.BI @FONTDIR@/dev name / F
-Font file for font
-.I F
-of device
-.IR name .
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff (@MAN1EXT@)
-.BR @g@tbl (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@pic (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR @g@eqn (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR grops (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR grodvi (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR grotty (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR deroff (@MAN1EXT@),
-.BR groff_font (@MAN5EXT@),
-.BR groff_out (@MAN5EXT@),
-.BR groff_char (@MAN7EXT@)
#include <X11/Xmu/Converters.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <ctype.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#ifndef HAVE_MKSTEMP
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#endif
#include "DviP.h"
/****************************************************************
dw->dvi.native = 0;
}
-#include <X11/bitmaps/gray>
+#include "gray1.bm"
+#include "gray2.bm"
+#include "gray3.bm"
+#include "gray4.bm"
+#include "gray5.bm"
+#include "gray6.bm"
+#include "gray7.bm"
+#include "gray8.bm"
static void
Realize (w, valueMask, attrs)
GCForeground|GCCapStyle|GCJoinStyle
|GCLineWidth,
&values);
- dw->dvi.gray = XCreateBitmapFromData(XtDisplay (w), XtWindow (w),
- gray_bits,
- gray_width, gray_height);
+ dw->dvi.gray[0] = XCreateBitmapFromData(XtDisplay (w), XtWindow (w),
+ gray1_bits,
+ gray1_width, gray1_height);
+ dw->dvi.gray[1] = XCreateBitmapFromData(XtDisplay (w), XtWindow (w),
+ gray2_bits,
+ gray2_width, gray2_height);
+ dw->dvi.gray[2] = XCreateBitmapFromData(XtDisplay (w), XtWindow (w),
+ gray3_bits,
+ gray3_width, gray3_height);
+ dw->dvi.gray[3] = XCreateBitmapFromData(XtDisplay (w), XtWindow (w),
+ gray4_bits,
+ gray4_width, gray4_height);
+ dw->dvi.gray[4] = XCreateBitmapFromData(XtDisplay (w), XtWindow (w),
+ gray5_bits,
+ gray5_width, gray5_height);
+ dw->dvi.gray[5] = XCreateBitmapFromData(XtDisplay (w), XtWindow (w),
+ gray6_bits,
+ gray6_width, gray6_height);
+ dw->dvi.gray[6] = XCreateBitmapFromData(XtDisplay (w), XtWindow (w),
+ gray7_bits,
+ gray7_width, gray7_height);
+ dw->dvi.gray[7] = XCreateBitmapFromData(XtDisplay (w), XtWindow (w),
+ gray8_bits,
+ gray8_width, gray8_height);
values.background = dw->dvi.background;
- values.stipple = dw->dvi.gray;
+ values.stipple = dw->dvi.gray[5];
dw->dvi.fill_GC = XCreateGC (XtDisplay (w), XtWindow (w),
GCForeground|GCBackground|GCStipple,
&values);
- dw->dvi.fill_type = DVI_FILL_BLACK;
+ dw->dvi.fill_type = 9;
if (dw->dvi.file)
OpenFile (dw);
XFreeGC (XtDisplay (w), dw->dvi.normal_GC);
XFreeGC (XtDisplay (w), dw->dvi.fill_GC);
- XFreePixmap (XtDisplay (w), dw->dvi.gray);
+ XFreePixmap (XtDisplay (w), dw->dvi.gray[0]);
+ XFreePixmap (XtDisplay (w), dw->dvi.gray[1]);
+ XFreePixmap (XtDisplay (w), dw->dvi.gray[2]);
+ XFreePixmap (XtDisplay (w), dw->dvi.gray[3]);
+ XFreePixmap (XtDisplay (w), dw->dvi.gray[4]);
+ XFreePixmap (XtDisplay (w), dw->dvi.gray[5]);
+ XFreePixmap (XtDisplay (w), dw->dvi.gray[6]);
+ XFreePixmap (XtDisplay (w), dw->dvi.gray[7]);
DestroyFontMap (dw->dvi.font_map);
DestroyFileMap (dw->dvi.file_map);
device_destroy (dw->dvi.device);
DviWidget dw;
{
char tmpName[sizeof ("/tmp/dviXXXXXX")];
- int fd;
+ int fd;
dw->dvi.tmpFile = 0;
if (!dw->dvi.seek) {
strcpy (tmpName, "/tmp/dviXXXXXX");
+#ifdef HAVE_MKSTEMP
fd = mkstemp (tmpName);
- dw->dvi.tmpFile = fdopen (fd, "w+");
+#else /* not HAVE_MKSTEMP */
+ mktemp (tmpName);
+ fd = open (tmpName, O_CREAT|O_EXCL|O_RDWR, S_IRUSR|S_IWUSR);
+#endif /* not HAVE_MKSTEMP */
+ dw->dvi.tmpFile = fdopen (tmpName, "w+");
unlink (tmpName);
}
dw->dvi.requested_page = 1;
-GROFF_LIBDIR = /usr/share
-GROFF_FONTDIR = $(GROFF_LIBDIR)/groff_font
+GROFF_FONTDIR = /usr/share/groff_font
GROFF_FONTPATH = .:$(GROFF_FONTDIR):/usr/local/lib/font:/usr/lib/font
DPIS = 75 100
OBJS2 = xtotroff.o XFontName.o DviChar.o
INCLUDES = -I$(TOOLKITSRC) -I$(TOP)
MATHLIB = -lm
-DEFINES = $(SIGNAL_DEFINES) -DFONTPATH=\"$(GROFF_FONTPATH)\" # -DX_NOT_STDC_ENV
+DEFINES = -DHAVE_MKSTEMP $(SIGNAL_DEFINES) -DFONTPATH=\"$(GROFF_FONTPATH)\" # -DX_NOT_STDC_ENV
ComplexProgramTarget_1(gxditview,$(LOCAL_LIBRARIES),$(MATHLIB))
NormalProgramTarget(xtotroff,$(OBJS2),$(DEPXLIB),$(XLIB), /**/)
$$dir/xtotroff -g -r $$dpi -s 12 $$dir/FontMap); \
done
+GXditview-ad.h: GXditview.ad
+ /bin/sh ad2c GXditview.ad >GXditview-ad.h
+
extraclean: clean
- -rm -f junk tmp grot old
+ -rm -f junk tmp grot old Makefile
FORCE:
projects / openbsd / commitdiff